IntroductionIntroduction What is ScriptCase ScriptCase is a complete development tool. Through a friendly web interface, ScriptCase creates PHP applications extremely fast with quality, saving time , lowering costs, increasing productivity and team integration. How does ScriptCase work? The developer can connect ScriptCase to the databases available in the market, such as SQL Server, Oracle, DB2, MYSQL, Postgres, and also create applications using multiple databases. You will be able to develop easily and really fast: Grid Reports Charts Filters Forms Menus Tabs PDF documents Blank applications Container Calendars Always looking for new technology, ScriptCase has a variety of components: Ajax Support Auto-complete Master-Details Editable Grid HTML Editor Database Dictionary Documentation creator Installed in a web server, Scriptcase can be simultaneously used by many developers through a browser, allowing remote and collaborative development. The source code is PHP and works independently of the tool, allowing its publishing on any PHP enabled Web server. Source code ScriptCase generates the source-code (PHP, JavaScript, HTML and AJAX). The generated source is totally independent of the tool, and can be published on any PHP enabled Web server. The PHP language is free (GNU) and can be used in Windows or Linux (every PHP processing is made in the server). Extra Tools ScriptCase brings some extra tools: SQL Builder A Tool to assist the SQL creation in wizard form to grid applications. It allows the choice of the database, tables, fields, order by and where clauses, as well as, the built command simulations saved for posterior use. Database Builder A Tool to manage your database. A complete database manager tool that allows to build or edit databases, tables and fields. Data Dictionary Allows to mantain a data dictionary. It creates data repository, synchronize tables and much more. Express Edit System tool to bulk edit applications for faster developement. Helpcase Used to create webhelps, standardizing your documentation and helping the end user to understand the system and/or applications. Buttons Management Allows system´s buttons standardization and centralized features management Themes Editor User friendly themes editor to manage CSS settings. Databases ScriptCase doesn't execute commands directly in databases. It uses a “layer” of access - ADODB. This layer makes an abstraction of the database, allowing the use of SQL statements to different databases (ODBC or OLEDB standard). Compatible databases: Scriptcase Installation Overview The ScriptCase installation process is described according to the environment type. ScriptCase Linux Installer ScriptCase MacOSX Installer ScripCase Windows Installer Scriptcase Installer - Linux ScriptCase Linux - Installer Using the scriptcase installer ScriptCase's installer is a executable file for linux. An application for self-extracting and configuring APACHE, PHP and SCRIPTCASE on your Operating System. In order to execute the installer correctly, we need to give it "execute permissions". Scriptcase installer will install automatically in your computer: 1 - Apache Web Server 2.2.15. 2 - PHP 5.3 with the mbstring, zip and gd extensions enabled. 3 - Zend Guard Loader 3.3. 4 - Scriptcase Version 7. * Before we proceed with the installation is recomended to do not have any other web environment (such as XAMP, Zend Server, etc...) installed on the machine. * Is aways recomended to have some basic knowledgment of environment in order to use the terminal. * We recomend the use of the SQLite database. This mannual will teach us to install ScriptCase in 3 simple steps: 1. Step 1:Execute ScriptCase's installer. 2. Step 2:Pick the installer's settings. 3. Step 3:Execute ScriptCase. Step 1: Execute ScriptCase's installer. 1 - Find the installer accessing the folder and subfolders using the CD command. Ex: user@computer:~$ cd /your/download/folder HINT Scriptcase Installer requires to be executed with administrative permissions to make changes on your computer. We need to require admin permissions (aka "root permissions") in order to execute the installer. 2 - Require root access by using SUDO SU and typing your password (if needed). Ex: user@computer:~/your/download/folder$ sudo su 3 - Grant execute permissions to the file. Ex: user@computer:~/your/download/folder$ chmod -x scriptcasev7_installer.run 4 - Run the installer. Ex: user@computer:~/your/download/folder$ ./scriptcasev7_installer.run Step 2: Pick the installer's settings. In the images bellow we are able to see all the installation's properties. 1 - Select installer language. 1. Language: Select the language that will be shown on the installation process. This will not select ScriptCase's Language. Click "Forward" to continue... 2 - Welcome message. This screen shows the installer's welcome message Click "Forward" to continue... 3 - License agreement. 1. Do you accept this license?: You must read and accept the terms before continuing. Click "Forward" to continue... 4 - Installation directory. HINT The default installation path is "/opt/NetMake/v7/". Don't change this path unless you know what you are doing. 1. Installation Directory: Put here the path for the installation. 2. Browse: This button allows you to choose from your folders for the installation path or create a new one. Click "Forward" to continue... 5 - Apache Configuration. 1. Port: This will define what port will Apache service run on. We recommend to use the default value. 2. Email Administrator: This is the Apache's administrator e-mail. This is the configuration for Apache only, not ScriptCase. 3. Apache Domain: Apache domain must be defined here. More info about Apache domains here. Click "Forward" to continue... 6 - Install. The installer will now start the installation process. Click "Forward" to continue... 1. Progress Bar: The overall installation progress. Click "Forward" to continue... 7 - Completing Setup. 1. View Readme File: When you finish the installer, it will show the README file. 2. Open Scriptcase 7: When you finish the installer, it will open ScriptCase. Click "Finish" to complete. Step 3: Start Using ScriptCase. Now to access your scriptcase, you must access on the browser the IP adress and the port you choose for Apache. Ex: http://localhost:97. Scriptcase Installer - Macos ScriptCase MacOS - Installer Using the scriptcase installer ScriptCase's installer is a executable file for MacOS. An application for self-extracting and configuring APACHE, PHP and SCRIPTCASE on your Operating System. In order to execute the installer correctly, we need to give it "execute permissions". Scriptcase installer will install automatically in your computer: 1 - Apache Web Server 2.2.15. 2 - PHP 5.3 with the mbstring, zip and gd extensions enabled. 3 - Zend Guard Loader 3.3. 4 - Scriptcase Version 7. * Before we proceed with the installation is recomended to do not have any other web environment (such as XAMP, Zend Server, etc...) installed on the machine. * Is aways recomended to have some basic knowledgment of environment in order to use the terminal. * We recomend the use of the SQLite database. This mannual will teach us to install ScriptCase in 3 simple steps: 1. Step 1:Pick the installer's settings. 2. Step 2:Execute ScriptCase. Step 1: Pick the installer's settings. In the images bellow we are able to see all the installation's properties. 1 - Select installer language. 1. Language: Select the language that will be shown on the installation process. This will not select ScriptCase's Language. Click "Forward" to continue... 2 - Welcome message. This screen shows the installer's welcome message Click "Forward" to continue... 3 - License agreement. 1. Do you accept this license?: You must read and accept the terms before continuing. Click "Forward" to continue... 4 - Installation directory. HINT The default installation path is "/Applications/NetMake/v7/". Don't change this path unless you know what you are doing. 1. Installation Directory: Put here the path for the installation. 2. Browse: This button allows you to choose from your folders for the installation path or create a new one. Click "Forward" to continue... 5 - Apache Configuration. 1. Port: This will define what port will Apache service run on. We recommend to use the default value. 2. Email Administrator: This is the Apache's administrator e-mail. This is the configuration for Apache only, not ScriptCase. 3. Apache Domain: Apache domain must be defined here. More info about Apache domains here. Click "Forward" to continue... 6 - Install. The installer will now start the installation process. Click "Forward" to continue... 1. Progress Bar: The overall installation progress. Click "Forward" to continue... 7 - Completing Setup. 1. View Readme File: When you finish the installer, it will show the README file. 2. Open Scriptcase 7: When you finish the installer, it will open ScriptCase. Click "Finish" to complete. Step 2: Start Using ScriptCase. Now to access your scriptcase, you must access on the browser the IP adress and the port you choose for Apache. Ex: http://localhost:97. Scriptcase Installer - Windows ??? ScriptCase Windows - Installer Using the scriptcase installer ScriptCase's installer is a executable file for Windows. An application for self-extracting and configuring APACHE, PHP and SCRIPTCASE on your Operating System. Scriptcase installer will install automatically in your computer: 1 - Apache Web Server 2.2.15. 2 - PHP 5.3 with the mbstring, zip and gd extensions enabled. 3 - Zend Guard Loader 3.3. 4 - Scriptcase Version 7. * Before we proceed with the installation is recomended to do not have any other web environment (such as XAMP, Zend Server, etc...) installed on the machine. * We recomend the use of the SQLite database. This mannual will teach us to install ScriptCase in 2 simple steps: 1. Step 1:Pick the installer's settings. 2. Step 2:Execute ScriptCase. Step 1: Pick the installer's settings. In the images bellow we are able to see all the installation's properties. 1 - Select installer language. 1. Language: Select the language that will be shown on the installation process. This will not select ScriptCase's Language. Click "Ok" to continue... 2 - Welcome message. This screen shows the installer's welcome message Click "Next" to continue... 3 - License agreement. 1. Do you accept this license?: You must read and accept the terms before continuing. Click "Next" to continue... 4 - Installation directory. HINT The default installation path is "C:\Program Files (x86)\NetMake\v7". Don't change this path unless you know what you are doing. 1. Installation Directory: Put here the path for the installation. 2. Browse: This button allows you to choose from your folders for the installation path or create a new one. Click "Next" to continue... 5 - Apache Configuration. 1. Port: This will define what port will Apache service run on. We recommend to use the default value. 2. Email Administrator: This is the Apache's administrator e-mail. This is the configuration for Apache only, not ScriptCase. 3. Apache Domain: Apache domain must be defined here. More info about Apache domains here. Click "Next" to continue... 6 - Install. The installer will now start the installation process. Click "Next" to continue... 1. Progress Bar: The overall installation progress. Click "Next" to continue... 7 - Completing Setup. 1. View Readme File: When you finish the installer, it will show the README file. 2. Open Scriptcase 7: When you finish the installer, it will open ScriptCase. Click "Finish" to complete. Step 2: Start Using ScriptCase. Now to access your scriptcase, you must access on the browser the IP adress and the port you choose for Apache. Ex: http://localhost:97. Scriptcase Manual Installation Requirements: Web server with PHP support, such as Apache, IIS, Abyss and more. PHP 5.3 or higher, with modules enabled mbstring, GD2 and zip enabled. Zend Guard Loader 3.3.0 or higher. Standard SQL database (SQLite, MySQL, MSSQL, PostgreSQL, Oracle and DB2) available to PHP. * *We recommend using the SQLite database Related links: PHP (Official Site). Zend (Site). Apache (Official Site). With the environment already installed, you must download the Scriptcase .zip in the downloads section of the site http://www.scriptcase.net. After configuring your environment, extract the file to a temporary folder, using the "extract here" your file decompressor. It will create a folder with the name: scriptcase.xxx. Rename it to scriptcase and move to the root of your web server. Finally, open the browser and access the ScriptCase to start the installation process. Example: http://server:port/scriptcase The screen below shows the choice of language (English) to use during the installation. Check enabled extensions. If you check the not installed extensions, so ScriptCase tries to configure the php.ini file to recognize these extensions. Now, you'll choose whether you prefer the Typical Installation or a Customized installation. Typical Installation Scriptcase will install everything automatically. After choosing a typical installation, you will be automatically directed to your Scriptcase development environment Scriptcase. By default the user is: admin and password: admin. Customized Installation You could choose on which database you wish to install ScriptCase and the default username and password to access it. ScriptCase needs some permissions to work properly. Check the permissions. NOTE: In case of IIS Web Server, requires permission IUSR_NOMEDOSERVIDOR to the user, in the following directories: of Writing, Reading and Execution 1 - PHP installation directory. 2 - ScriptCase Directory. 3 - File cmd.exe on Windows. This step consists in defining the database in which the ScriptCase is installed, the default option is SQLite (Recommended), requires only that your PHP module is enabled, but you can do the installation in other databases. The tables used by ScriptCase were created successfully. Here you create a login and password for the ScriptCase's administrator. If the installation has been successful this screen appears. Click continue to boot ScriptCase. Login screen to access the ScriptCase the username and password entered earlier. Accessing Scriptcase User Authentication Enter the user login and password at the login page as in the image below. Use the following information to login after a default installation: user : admin password : admin Image1: Login interface. After user/password validation and according to user profile, ScriptCase displays the options and projects available to that user. Note:The ScriptCase user administrator has access to all ScriptCase functionally , including functions to add new users. Start Page When accessing Scriptcase, if you don't have any project, you will see a start page with the first steps you should take to create your project. If you already have a project, you will see a screen to select or create a project. After select/create a project, the Scriptcase Workspace is displayed. Scriptcase Workspace Layout Overview Workspace layout Overview The Scriptcase workspace lets you view applications, object properties and operations available. Using a integrated workspace, all options are into a single larger application window. Once authenticated / logged in the ScriptCase, the user is redirected to a Home page similar to the "Windows Explorer". From there the user can select actions such as: create folders to organize applications, display applications previously created, copy, rename, etc. Image1: Workspace Layout Interface. 1 Main Menu 2 Toolbar 3 Taskbar 4 Project Explorer 5 Application List Main Menu At the top of the page is available a hierarchical menu containing all ScriptCase functionallity options. Image1: Main menu interface. Hierarchic Menu options: Toolbar Use the Toolbar icons to access ScriptCase features ScriptCase functionality icons: Toolbar - Main menu Home Return to the Project Home New Project Create a new project Open Project Open an existent project Close Project Close existent project New Connecion Edit Connecion SQL Builder Create new Connection New Express Creation Save Generate Source Run Deploy Web Help Logout Edit existing connection Run the tool for building the SQL commands. Create applications through the wizard resource Create applications in batches (express mode). Save the edited application. ( * ) Generate the application source program . (*) Save the application, generate the source program and run it. ( * ) Deploy the application to a sever. ( * ) ScriptCase On-line documentation. All functionality. Exit from ScriptCase. (*) The options Save, Generate, Run and Deploy are available when an application is being edited. Other toolbar attributes : User: Display active user name. Project and version: Display selected project / version. Taskbar The Taskbar displays the applications opened for editing, allowing to edit more than one application at the same time. Image1: TaskBar Interface. Project Explorer In the Main Menu page are listed the folders and the applications developed with ScriptCase. Image1: Project Explorer. 1 - Folder functions It allows to manage folders in the project: Create Create a new folder to organize the project applications. Rename Rename the selected folder. Delete Delete the selected folder. 2 - Filters It is used to filter applications in the current folder of the project. All applications It lists all applications of the folder and subfolders. My applications It lists all applications of the folder and subfolders developed by the current user. Recents It lists all applications generated recently. 3 - Folders Structure List of folders and subfolders existing into the project. 4 - Search Search for applications names or descriptions in the project. The search is done within the selected folder, and the search results are highlighted with yellow. Applications List Displays folders and applications. Each line offers action icons at application level. 1 - LABELS Application Description Creator Generation Status Application Name. Application Description. Application Developer. Date Generation. Application Status (updated e outdated). 2 - OPTIONS Run Edit Copy Run the application. If it is outdated the source code will be generated before the execution Open the application for editing. Creates an application copy. Enter a name to the copy. Rename Changes the application name. 3 - Footer It allows to run a function for multiple applications at the same time: The checkbox allows to select all applications listed in the application list. Other options are: Generate Deploy Delete Copy Move Export Generate the source code. Deploy the applications. Delete the selected applications. Copy the applications to another project. Move the applications to a different folder. Export the applications. Project Project Scriptcase uses projects to manage the applications development. A practical and intuitive way of organizing the development environment. The project elements are: the applications (forms, grids, menus, tabs, etc.) and connections to the database. The user can create and maintain a Project Version History, he can link users to projects, themes, languages, and generate source codes, deploy or export part of or all the project, using the Project mangement resources. Within a project you can define patterns to create applications, This topic includes the available resources to project management, which are: New Project Created Projects using Scriptcase Properties Default Values Open Project Delete Versions History Increment Version Generate Source-Code Deploy Export Applications Import Applications Report Show Diagram Application Search Export Projects Import Projects Security Log New Project This option is used to create one more project in your ScriptCase framework. Image1 : New Project. Image2:Creating a new project. Attributes: Project Name - Define a name to your project. Blank spaces can't be used there. Project Description -Project short description. Version - Initial Project version. - Select an image to represent your project . - Upload a new image to scripcase. ScriptCase provides examples of projects demostrating what can be done with the tool. These projects can be downloaded and imported to your Scriptcase. When a default language is not selected ScriptCase will select a default value based on the user browser values or the system settings. Image3: Selecting project locales Locales . . These relationships (locales) are available when creating or editing a project. Use the interface below to add or remove languages to the project. ex. Themes . Click in Set default to change the project default language. So a country with more than one language may have a regional setting and more than one language.Define themes available to the applications.: English (Canada) and French (Canada).Select the languages available in the project from the list and set the project default language.Locales . Image 4: Selecting themes for the project.It is the combination of language and regional settings. Systems It is possible to download eight different systems made using Scriptcase. MySQL SQLite MS SQL Server PostgreSQL Oracle MS Access . When importing the systems we have to choose which database Scriptcase will export the system tables. Image 01: Create new project screen. they are: Security System Training/Course Organizer System Online Shop Helpdesk System Project Management System Samples News System Album System These systems are available for download on the project creating process. Interbase/Firebird . . Select the languages available in the project from ScripCase language list and set the project default language. Click in Set default to update the project default language. Use the textarea with editor features provided by ScriptCase. Attributes: Project Short Description . It is possible also to update the project complete description. Use the interface below to add or remove languages to the project. When a default language is not selected ScriptCase will select a default value based on the user browser values or the system settings. Image1: Project Properties Interface. Image2: Edit Project Interface.Update project short description.Properties This option changes the project´s attributes. So a country with more than one language may have a regional setting and more than one language. ex. These relationships (locales) are available at project creation or editing.It is the combination of language and regional settings.Define schemes available to the applications. . Image4: Selecting themes for the project. Themes .Image3: Selecting project locales Locales .: English (Canada) and French (Canada). 1 .Application Settings: . ShowSummary.Default Values Using the Default Values is possible to customize a series of Project attributes.Common Settings: Logo ..Record quantity per page. It is implemented via an SQL count and as such can add performance overhead . 2 .Standard logo image used in applications. avoiding repetitive tasks and increasing productivity. Image1: Default Values Access Image2: Default Settings Interface. Display Line number.Display Summary in Grid Applications.. Records Per Page. Display Title. used in grids and forms applications. 3 . 4 . To set the field aligments.Libraries Select and enable the libraries to use in applications events.Select buttons to display in Toolbar. left or center). .Display the selected buttons. Select a template to the header and footer.Define the toolbar display status. Buttons's Organization .There we can set some default values to each type of application. Preview .Define the toolbar quantity (see image below). Attributes: Localization. etc. Select which buttons in the toolbar will be available by default when creating an application.HTML Editor Configure the toolbar attributes used in 'editor html fields' in form or control application. Toolbar Count . Statusbar . Buttons Alignment .Define the toolbar position in the editor box.Define the toolbar buttons alignment (right. such as: To Set the table width. Open Project You can open or go from one project to another one anytime acessing the menu File -> Open Project. Image1: Open Project Menu. . Select to open an existent project. Image1: Selecting a Project. all applications and connections. A project without back-up cannot be restored. Image1: Delete Project Menu. Project users are not excluded. Image2: Delete confirmation.Delete Delete a Project. Note: Confirm project deletion (Image2) since it is final and not reversible. . Edit .Open/Close a version of the Project. Image 1: Version History Menu.Version History Maintain project history using Version History. Image 2: Version Description Interface. Only available if the versions status is "Open" After clicked to 'Edit' a release. . Attributes: Delete . open/close or edit a project version.Delete all applications of the Project for selected version. Status . Scriptcase opens that project release. Delete. Image2: Versions Description of Scriptcase interface.Edit the version of the Project. Current Version of the Project. Image 2: Increment Version Interface. allowing the development of the new version. Image 1: Increment Version Menu. Attributes: Current version . When a new project version is generated. by separating the versions that has been developed. Description .Project Description.Id number of the New Version.Increment Version Increment version allows to manager the Project development. . New Version . it will keep a copy of the previous version. If the option Selected applications is used. Image1: Select application Menu. It allows to generate the entire project source code or selected applications.Generate Source-code Generate the project applications source code. . so the application are listed in accordance with its type or folder. Click here. . For more information.Deploy The deployment process involves publishing the ScriptCase developed applications (and libraries) in a PHP supported WEB server. If the option Select applications is used.ZIP). Then ScriptCase generates a link to the backup file (. Image 2: Routine backup Interface . .Export Applications Image 1: Export Project Menu It allows to export all applications of the project or just selected applications. so the application are listed in accordance with its type or folder. Click on the link to download it. . Image 1: Import Applications Menu. Image 2: Import Applications Interface.Import Applications Use it to upload and import an exported zip file to your project. then click OK after finish the process. Check the list of applications contained in the zip. Click on Restore. Select the zip file that were exported by ScriptCase. Image2: Applications List.Report Provide two types of project report: Applications List and Developers summary. . Image1: Project Reports Menu Applications List The Applications List displays historical and analytical information about the project applications. Clicking in SHOW INSERTS. the following screen is displayed. The Applications List allows to display all the table inserts (SQL) existing in the project. . Image5: Table Insert Interface. Developers summary The Developers summary report display a developer application distribution in a detail or chart format. Image6: Report (Summary by Developers) Interface.Image4: Applications insert Interface. . Image2: Diagram.Show Diagram Image1: Show Diagram. Image2: Application Search Interface. .Application Search Search for an attribute in all applications: Image1: Application Search Menu. Then ScriptCase generates a link to the backup file (.Export Project Use this option to save the project and all project applications in a zip file that you can import in another ScriptCase. Image 3: Routine backup Interface . Select the project to export. Click on the link to download it. Image 2: Export Application Interface. .ZIP). Image 1: Export Project Application Menu. . . Image1: Import Applications Interface.Select the zip with Project that were exported by ScriptCase. Image: Import Applications Interface.Import Project Use it to upload and import a zip exported file to your open project. Step 1 . Where the application is related to the user. Where the application is linked to user login.It creates an application based on the application level security. Select Connection . Types: User .Type. considering that the ScriptCase will generate access applications and all validations automatically. Image 1: Security Module Menu. Where is defined the access of each group to certain applications. Image2: Security Module .The Second step is common for any Type and it is used to select what database connection will be used to create the Security module.It creates an application based on security for user level. etc. passwords. . 2.The First step is used to select the level of security.It creates an application based on security for the Group level. further decreasing development time of a project. access profiles. There are three security levels and each level is based on a data model for storing information such as user accounts.Security Making use of ScriptCase security resources you can implement access rules for the system being developed. 1. Application . groups. Type . Group . Login .Select a database connection from the project. . Select Connection: Connection . E-mail .Define the table "Users" used by the system.You can choose if Scriptcase will create the tables in your database or it it will use existent tables. Table prefix .Set the field to stores the User login.Delete the tables to create new ones.Set the field to stores the User Name. Existing or Create Tables . Associate . User Based on user level security. Delete tables if they exist. User: Table . .Set the field to stores the E-mail. 3.Set the field to stores the User Password.Select Connection. Name . Image 4: User Interface.Image 3: Security Module . So it is just needed if you have selected the option to use "Existing Tables" in the last step.Prefix used to create the table names. Where the application is linked to user login.The Third step is different to each Type of security level and it is used to associate the fields from the security module with the fields from database. Password . Set the field to stores if the user is active or not.Set the table to store all project applications.Set the field to stores the User Name.Set the field to stores the User login.Set the field to store the application description. Image 5: User / App Interface. Description .User / Application: . Where the applications is related to the user.Application: Table . Active . Activation code .Set the field to stores the Activation code.Set the field to store the application type.Active . 1 . User / App Based on application level security. Password .Define the field to store the code or the application name. Administrator privilege .Set the field to stores the User Password.Set the field to stores the Activation code. 5 . Code .Define the table "Users" used by the system.Set the field to stores if the user is active or not.Set the field to stores if the user has administrator privileges.Set the field to stores the E-mail. Administrator privilege . 2 . Activation code .Set the field to stores if the user has administrator privileges. Type of application . Name . Login . E-mail .User: Table . Set the field to stores the Activation code. Code . Print Prvilege.168.Set the field to stores the User Password. <IMG SRC="http://192. Update Prvilege. Active .Define the field to store if the user has privilege to export records in the application.Set the field to store the application description.Set the field to stores the User login.Define the field to store if the user has privilege to update records in the application. Description . 1 .png""> Image 6: User / Group / App Interface. User / Group / App Based on security for the Group level. Name .Set the field to stores the User Name.Set the field to stores if the user has administrator privileges.Define the field to store the application name.Define the field to store if the user has privilege to insert new records in the application.248/tools/nm/sc_helpv7/gerado/en_us/pdfhelp_en_us/img/0056_seg_user_grp.Define the field to store the User Login. Login .Group: Table .Set the field that will store the group description. ID .Set the table to store all project applications.Set the field to stores if the user is active or not.Application: Table . Application Name .Define the field that will store the group code. Delete Privilege .Table .Define the field to store if the user has privilege to delete records in the application. Insert Prvilege.Define the table "Users" used by the system.254. . Access Privilege .User: Table . E-mail . Administrator privilege . Activation code . 2 . Description .Set the table to stores the groups created in the system. Export Privilege .Set the table to store the relationship between groups and project applications. 3 .Define the field to store if the user has privilege to access the application.Set the field to stores the E-mail.Defines the field to store if the user has privilege to print records in the application. Where is defined the access of each group to certain applications.Define the field to store the code or the application name. Password . Login . Set the field to store your login.Define the field to store if the group has privilege to delete records in the application.Define the field to store the application name.User / Group: Table . Update Prvilege.The fourth step is used to inform the settings used on the security module.Define the field to store if the group has privilege to access the application.Set the field to store the application type.Set the table to store the relationship between groups and project applications.Group / Application: Table . Delete Privilege . 4 . Access Privilege . Export Privilege . Insert Prvilege. Configuration . Group Code .Type of application .Set the table to store the relationship between users and groups in the project.Define the field to store if the group has privilege to update records in the application. Login .Define the field to store if the group has privilege to export records in the application. Application Name . 5 . Print Prvilege. . Group Code .Define the field to store if the group has privilege to insert new records in the application.Define the field to store the group code.Define the field to store if the group has privilege to print records in the application.Define the field to store the group code. 4. 4 .Define the SMTP e-mail.Define if the user can retrieve the password reseting the old and receiving a new one by e-mail.Define the SMTP port.Create the security applications with a prefix in the name. SMTP E-mail .Define if the password will use encryption. Log . Maximum size . 5.E-mail Settings: SMTP Server .New Users: Allows the registration of new users .Define if the user can retrieve the password receiving it by e-mail. Encryption .Minimum size of characters typed by the user.A link is created on the login screen allowing the new users registration. the administrator receives an email to allows or not that user to access the system.It allows to create or select a Menu application to include the security module.Enable the option to use CAPTCHA in the login screen.New users receive an activation link by email.Define the SMTP password.Retrieve Password: Send email with password . Requires activation by email .Login: Minimum size .Enable the option "use security" in each application.Define the SMTP server. Folder .When a new user is registered. SMTP Password .General: Prefix applications . Enable Security .The fifth step is used to populate the tables Users and Groups.Define the SMTP user. Theme . Menu Type . Send e-mail link for new password . Reset password and send new email . Use Captcha .Define the Menu type. Menu . if the option to create a new menu applications was set in the item above.Define if the user can retrieve the password receiving a link by email to register a new password. Insert data .Maximum size of characters typed by the user. SMTP User .It creates a folder in the project to security applications. . 2 .Define the theme to the applications. 5 .Define the Log Scheme used in the security applications. SMTP Port . Send email to administrator . Send e-mail link for new password . 3 .Define wich characters the end-user can type.Image 7: Settings Interface 1 . Activate the user. Password . Group . Active . Image 9: Add Applications Interface Checking the option. Administrator privileges . Note: This step is not needed if you are using the "User" security type. Add applications .User name E-mail .Image 8: Insert Data Interface Insert data: Login . .The last step is used to save in a profile all settings used on the steps to be used in other projects.Define if the user has administrator privileges ( all features enabled ). 6.User Login. Name .Name of the administrator group. the name of each application existing in the project.The sixth step is used to populate the table Applications. 7. Scriptcase will insert in the Applications Table. Profile .User e-mail.User password. . just to that user or just to be used in that project.Image 10: Profile Interface You can save a profile to any Scriptcase user. Applications Here we can define which applications and events will be tracked. . Image 2: Creating a Log Scheme. Image 1: Log Module Menu Create / Edit This option is used to create or modify a new scheme of Log module to your project.Log Making use of ScriptCase Log resources you can implement a complete Log system to your projects. Storing all data that was updated or deleted by the end-user and which applications they are accessing. Once you already have a Log Scheme created. Image 3: Log Scheme List. they will be listed to be edited or erased. .At the top we can apply actions to all lines or we can though the list and select an action to each line individually. At the bottom of the page we have options to filter the applications that are being listed. Image 4: Applications Interface. Image 5: Toolbar on the bottom. Linux SQLite SQLite PDO SyBase Foxpro .Connecting Your Database Connecting Scriptcase To Your Database CONNECTING YOUR DATABASE Access DB2 DBF Firebird Informix Interbase MySQL Oracle PostgresSQL MS SQL Server .Windows MS SQL Server . Connecting Access via ODBC.Access Ms Access Home >> Connections >> MS-Access Requirements: * The database Access (File . * Access databases using security (user and password) can only connect using ODBC.MDB) should be in the same web server where PHP is installed on. The Connection with Access Database in ScriptCase can be done in two ways: ADO or ODBC. Connecting Access via ADO. * Windows must have installed MDAC28SDK or newer (Windows 2000 already exceed the standard in the installation). . and on the left menu you can see a tab "Connection". . Step 1: Log in your ScriptCase. click on the sub item "New". check the phpinfo () if the COM option is enabled. *accdb) CREATING SCRIPTCASE CONNECTION (MSACCESS) Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection. If not install the package MDAC28SDK and restart your machine.Connecting Access Via Ado Home >> Connections >> MS-Access >> Connecting Access via ADO To connect your Access Database using ADO. When the option is enabled in the COM Diagnosis proceed with the establishment of the connection Use the following ADO driver: Accdb Extension - MicroSoft Access Driver (*mdb. PATH Newsletter Archive.Step 2: After you click "New". Password . Step 3: In the picture below. . click on the image of the MS Access database. DBMS type . MDB (This file is on server where is installed ScriptCase).Set the type of the DBMS is ADO or ODBC. will appear at the right screen to create connection.Enter the user to gain access to your MS Access. Username . click Decimal separator . For more details on configuring the database connection to the data. PATH .Displays if the connection was successful or not.Select the type of separator between comma and point.Enter the password to get access to your MS Access.Set the name of your new connection. Test Connection . fill in the required specifications: Connection name . especially the user. then complete the establishment of the connection. the following screen appears: View .Allows viewing of filters on the tables. Step 4: Always test your connection before completing the same. Use the schema name before the table . . Filter . views. and password server path.Persistent connection . Filters . if the message "Connected successfully".Allows you to define which tables and owners will be displayed.Allows the use of schemas before the names of the tables.Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends. review the fields filled in.Clicking this option. If there is any connection fails. system tables and procedures. exe to create the ODBC. Driver *accdb) (*mdb) . you must use the Control Panel located in C:/WINDOWS/SysWOW64/odbcad32. Use the following ODBC driver: Accdb MDB Extension Extension - MicroSoft - MicroSoft Access Driver Access (*mdb. we must create an ODBC connection in the Windows Control Panel (The ODBC should be created in the same server where it is located the web server). If you are using Windows 7 x64. To work with MS Access version inferior than 2007/2010 you should install 2007 Office System Driver: Data Connectivity Components. select the tab System DNS (see image below) and create your connection with your Access Database. Open the ODBC Data Source Administrator.Connecting Access Via Odbc Home >> Connections >> MS-Access >> Connecting Access via ODBC To create a connection using ODBC. Step 2: After you click "New". follow the steps below to create the connection: CREATING SCRIPTCASE CONNECTION (MSACCESS) Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection. fill in the required specifications: . will appear at the right screen to create connection. Step 3: In the picture below. and on the left menu you can see a tab "Connection". click on the sub item "New". click on the image of the MS Access database.After creating the ODBC. Step 1: Log in your ScriptCase. Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends.Set the type of the DBMS : ADO or ODBC. click Decimal separator .Enter the ODBC created in the Windows Control Panel. For more details on configuring the database connection to the data. Password . DBMS type .By clicking in his option.Select the type of separator between comma and point.Set the name of your new connection.Allows the use of schemas before the names of the tables. Test Connection .Enter a valid database user name. Use the schema name before the table . the following screen appears: . Filter .Used to test if the connection is successful or not. ODBCName .Enter the valid password. Persistent connection . Username .Connection name . Step 4: Always test your connection before completing the same. Filters . views. system tables and procedures.Define which tables and owners will be displayed.Display filters on the tables. if the message "Connected successfully" is displayed.Show . . then complete the establishment of the connection. . Issue the configure command to point to the location of your DB2 header files and libraries as follows: bash$ . providing a directory of all known extensions and hosting facilities for downloading and development of PHP extensions) so follow the instructions in Installation of PECL extensions o install the ibm_db2 extension for PHP. you must issue the command db2iupdt -e to update the symbolic links to the header files and libraries in your DB2 instances. (Repository for PHP Extensions. DB2 does not install these by default. Creating a Scriptcase Connection (DB2 ODBC Generic). so you may have to return to your DB2 installer and add this option. To build the ibm_db2 extension. Creating a Scriptcase Connection (DB2 ODBC Native). The header files are included with the DB2 Application Development Client freely available for download from the IBM DB2 Universal Database IBM DB2 Universal If you add the DB2 application development header files and libraries to a Linux or Unix operating system on which DB2 was already installed. the DB2 application development header files and libraries must be installed on your system./configure --with-IBM_DB2=/path/to/DB2 On the links below select the desired option Creating a Scriptcase Connection (DB2 Native).Db2 Ibm Db2 Home >> Connections >> IBM DB2 Windows IBM DB2 database connection. ibm_db2 is a ? PECL extension. Step 1: Log in ScriptCase. Step 2: Then you can see a screen to select the database type. Step 3: In the picture below. and on the top menu you can see the item "Database ".Ibm Db2 Native IBM DB2 Connection Home >> Connections >> IBM DB2 >> IBM DB2 Native Windows IBM DB2 database connection using Native Driver Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection. fill in the required specifications: . click on the image of the DB2 database. click on the sub item "New connection" or use the icon from the fast menu. Filter .Select the type of separator between comma and point. Database Name . DBMS Type .Enter the user valid password. Username . Test Connection .Enter the DB2 database instance name. Password .Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends. Persistent connection . if you wish to use only the tables belonging to the schema. For more details on configuring the database connection .Set the model of the DBMS is Native. Use the schema name before the table .Allows the use of schemas before the names of the tables.Connection name . i5_lib . Schema .Clicking this option.Enter a valid database user name. Server/Host (Name or IP) .Used to test if the connection is successful or not.You can tell the Schema (Optional).Library used in IBM i5/OS Operating System.Inform the server IP or name where the database is installed. click Decimal separator . ODBC or native ODBC Generic. the following screen appears: .Set the name of your new connection. .Display filters on the tables. Filters . system tables and procedures. Step 4: Always test your connection before completing the same. if the message "Connected successfully" is displayed.Define which tables and owners will be displayed. then complete the establishment of the connection. views.Show . Step 2: Then you can see a screen to select the database type. click on the image of the DB2 database. click on the sub item "New connection" or use the icon from the fast menu. . fill in the required specifications: Connection name . and on the top menu you can see the item "Database ". Step 3: In the picture below. Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection. Step 1: Log in ScriptCase.Set the name of your new connection. Home >> Connections >> IBM DB2 >> IBM DB2 ODBC Native Windows IBM DB2 database connection using ODBC Native driver.Ibm Db2 Odbc Native IBM DB2 Connection. Server/Host (Name or IP) .Used to test if the connection is successful or not.Select the type of separator between comma and point. Persistent connection . views. Filter . ODBC or native ODBC Generic. i5_lib .Enter the DB2 database instance name. system tables and procedures.Set the model of the DBMS is Native. For more details on configuring the database connection .DBMS Type .Display filters on the tables.Inform the server IP or name where the database is installed. Use the schema name before the table .Library used in IBM i5/OS Operating System. Database Name . if you wish to use only the tables belonging to the schema.You can tell the Schema (Optional).Allows the use of schemas before the names of the tables.Enter a valid database user name. Username . Schema . click Decimal separator . the following screen appears: Show .Clicking this option. .Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends. Password . Test Connection .Enter the user valid password. Filters . if the message "Connected successfully" is displayed. .Define which tables and owners will be displayed. then complete the establishment of the connection. Step 4: Always test your connection before completing the same. . Step 1: Use Windows Data Source Administrator to create ODBC.Ibm Db2 Odbc Generic IBM DB2 Connection. Step 1. Home >> Connections >> IBM DB2 >> IBM DB2 ODBC Generic Windows IBM DB2 database connection using ODBC Generic driver. Step 1. select System DSN.3: Enter ODBC name and select the database used.2: Select DB2 ODBC Driver. and on the top menu you can see the item "Database ". Step 1. click on the sub item "New connection" or use the icon from the fast menu. Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection.4: Configure ODBC.Step 1. . Step 1: Log in ScriptCase.5: Enter database user name and password and test the ODBC. Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends.Enter a valid database user name. click Decimal separator . Step 3: In the picture below.You can tell the Schema (Optional). if you wish to use only the tables belonging to the schema. For more details on configuring the database connection .Select the type of separator between comma and point.Enter the user valid password. fill in the required specifications: Connection name .Enter the ODBC name created in the Control Panel. Password . Test Connection .Set the name of your new connection.Set the model of the DBMS is Native. ODBC Name . click on the image of the DB2 database. Persistent connection . ODBC or native ODBC Generic. Username . DBMS Type . .Used to test if the connection is successful or not. Schema .Step 2: Then you can see a screen to select the database type. Step 4: Always test your connection before completing the same. system tables and procedures.Clicking this option. if the message "Connected successfully" is displayed. the following screen appears: Show .Use the schema name before the table . Filter .Display filters on the tables.Define which tables and owners will be displayed. views. Filters . . then complete the establishment of the connection.Allows the use of schemas before the names of the tables. Connecting to Firebird in Linux. Connecting to Firebird in Windows.Firebird Firebird Home >> Connections >> Firebird Select the desired option on the links below. Creating a Connection on Scriptcase. Connecting to Firebird in Windows using ODBC. . Creating a Connection on Scriptcase using ODBC. In the PHP." to enable this module.ini Edit Windows services file and add gds_db on 3050/tcp port. . Edit the php.INI.dll module in php.dll and remove the comment ". See image.ini file.Windows Creating a Firebird database Connection in Windows Home >> Connections >> Firebird >> Firebird on Windows Requirements: Enable interbase. Run ScriptCase diagnosis and check where the file is located. look for the word php_interbase.Firebird . netmake.php Edit Windows services file fix an error when try to connect to FireBird using ScriptCase: "Unable to complete network request to host "localhost".3. it is "C:\Program Files\NetMake\v6\ZendServer\lib\phpext"): http://www. it is "C:\Program Files\NetMake\v6\ZendServer\bin"): http://www. Undefined service gds_db/tcp".Download this file and extract it on PHP extension folder (by default. http://server:port/scriptcase/info.Download this file and extract it on Zend Server Binary folder (by default.br/knowledge/download/php_dll_firebird. Then add the following line: gds_db 3050/tcp # Firebird Save and create a ScriptCase connection. To solve this connection issues. Failed to locate host machine.zip 2 .com.Check if interbase module was enabled correctly.zip .netmake.com. please do the following: 1 . ScriptCase 6 runs on PHP 5.br/knowledge/download/dll_firebird. This version of PHP had a few issues while connecting with Firebird database. Open services file (you can find it at in C:\WINDOWS\system32\drivers\etc\). 3 . Once it is correctly installed we are able to create a connection on Scriptcase Creating a Connection on Scriptcase.ini (by default.dll extension=php_pdo_firebird. it is located extension=php_interbase.dll 4 . at "C:\Program .Add these lines on your Files\NetMake\v6\ZendServer\etc"): php.Restart your server and you will be able to connect with Firebird (Interbase). create a new ODBC Source as System Source.Odbc Creating a Firebird database connection Using ODBC Home >> Connections >> Firebird >> Firebird on Windows using ODBC Connecting to FireBird in ScriptCase using ODBC To create the connection using (http://www.ibphoenix.Firebird . Connect to a firebird. . the IBPhoenix Open Source ODBC Driver Download and install the driver.com) is required. running in another server (glacial) as in the example below. and choose Firebird/Interbase driver. Data Source Name: ODBC Name Database: HOST:PATH Enter the user name and password. .Once it is correctly installed we are able to create a connection on Scriptcase Creating a Connection on Scriptcase using ODBC. Linux Creating a Firebird database connection on Linux Home >> Connections >> Firebird >> Firebird on Linux Configuring Firebird/Interbase on Linux Requirements: To enable PHP to work with Firebird/InterBase.php Once it is correctly installed we are able to create a connection on Scriptcase Creating a Connection on Scriptcase.net/manual/en/ref.php. check php website at http://www. For more information. . compile it with --with-interbase[=DIR]option.ibase.Firebird . and on the top menu you can see the item "Database ". DBMS Type . fill in the required specifications: Connection name . Step 3: In the picture below.Select the DBMS type. Step 1: Log in ScriptCase. click on the image of the Firebird database. .Firebird .Set the name of your new connection. click on the sub item "New connection" or use the icon from the fast menu.Creating A Connection Creating a Connection on Scriptcase Home >> Connections >> Firebird >> Creating a Connection CREATING SCRIPTCASE CONNECTION (FIREBIRD) Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection. Step 2: Then you can see a screen to select the database type. Username .Select the type of separator between comma and point. Database Name .Enter your database name.Test Connection .Display filters on the tables. Step 4: Always test your connection before completing the same. Persistent connection .Use schemas before the tables names. Connecting to FireBird in ScriptCase using ODBC . Password . Filters . Filter .Define which tables and owners will be displayed.By clicking in his option. Server/Host (Name or IP) .Enter a valid username. system tables and procedures. views. if the message "Connected successfully" is displayed.Enter the user valid password. For more details on configuring the database connection . Use the schema before the table name .Enter the FireBird Server. then complete the establishment of the connection. click Decimal separator .Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends.Displays if the connection was successful or not. the following screen appears: Show . Connect to a firebird.com) is required. running in another server (glacial) as in the example below. create a new ODBC Source as System Source. Data Source Name: ODBC Name Database: HOST:PATH Enter the user name and password.ibphoenix. the IBPhoenix Open Source ODBC Driver Download and install the driver.To create the connection using (http://www. . and choose Firebird/Interbase driver. fill in the required specifications: . Step 3: In the picture below. click on the sub item "New".Creating A Connection Using Odbc Creating a Connection on Scriptcase using ODBC Home >> Connections >> Firebird >> Creating a Connection CREATING SCRIPTCASE CONNECTION (FIREBIRD ODBC) Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection. Step 1: Log in your ScriptCase. click on the image of the Generic ODBC. Step 2: After you click "New".Firebird . will appear at the right a screen to create connection. and on the left menu you can see a tab "Database Connections". By clicking in his option. DBMS Type . Decimal separator . Persistent connection .Enter the user valid password. Step 4: Always test your connection before completing the same. Username .Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends. ODBC Name . the following screen appears: Show .Select the type of separator between comma and point. if the message "Connected successfully" is displayed. Filter . Use the schema before the table name .Use schemas before the tables names.Display filters on the tables.Connection Name . .Defined as Generic ODBC.Enter the name of your database. then complete the establishment of the connection.Displays if the connection was successful or not.Define which tables and owners will be displayed.Enter a valid username. views. Test Connection . Password . Filters .Set the name of your new connection. For more details on configuring the database connection click . system tables and procedures. Connecting with Informix Native in Scriptcase. The first step is to install the Informix client. . Configuring Informix ODBC. Connecting with Informix ODBC in Scriptcase.Informix Informix Home >> Connections >> Informix This tutorial let the user connect to a Windows server where Scriptcase is installed with another one where the database is. We wil describe the native and ODBC connection. Connecting with Informix PDO in Scriptcase. Here we are using the IBM Informix Connect. (recomended) Configuring Informix Native. .Configuring Informix Native Home >> Connections >> Informix >> Configuring Informix Native Client image used by connections. In the Windows services file add the Informix Service (Name and Port). Database images used by connections. IBM Informix Server: Server Name used by connection. HostName: IP/Host Database Server. Enter IP/Host Database Server user name and password. Verify if the database server is accessible using client DBPing. Service Name: Service Name. Protocolname: Protocol used. .Client(Setnet32) Configuration. php and verify if the module was enabled. . Enabling Informix in the PHP Step 1: Enable Informix PHP Module in the configuration file (php. Connecting with Informix Native in Scriptcase. you already can access ScriptCase to create your connection.ini) Step 2: Accessing the info. If the Informix module is loaded correctly in your php.Using I-Connect verify the connection. Step 1: Log in ScriptCase. Test Connection .Set the name of your new connection. Step 3: In the picture below. click on the sub item "New connection" or use the icon from the fast menu. fill in the required specifications: Connection Name .Set the DBMS type as Informix or Informix PDO.Connecting With Informix Native In Scriptcase Home >> Connections >> Informix >> Connecting with Informix Native in Scriptcase Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection.Displays if the connection was successful or not. . Step 2: Then you can see a screen to select the database type. and on the top menu you can see the item "Database ". click on the image of Informix database. DBMS Type . the following screen appears: Show. Configuring Informix Native. Username .Use schemas before the tables names. Step 4: Always test your connection before completing the same.Enter a valid username. Persistent connection .Enter your database (actual base) name. click Decimal separator . Password .Tell Informix Server.Define which tables and owners will be displayed. Filters .Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends. then complete the establishment of the connection. Check if the module is properly enabled for PHP. . if the message "Connected successfully" is displayed. views.By clicking in his option.Display filters on the tables. system tables and procedures.Enter a valid password.Server/Host (Name or IP) . For more details on configuring the database connection.Select the type of separator between comma and point. Database Name . Filter . Use the schema before the table name . . Configuring Informix Odbc Home >> Connections >> Informix >> Configuring Informix ODBC Step 1: Create the ODBC using the database driver as in the pictures: Step 2: Enter the ODBC (Data Source Name) used by connection. . Step 3: Enter the connection data and test it. you already can access ScriptCase to create your connection.If the ODBC datasource was created correctly. Connecting with Informix ODBC in Scriptcase. . fill in the required specifications: Connection name . Step 2: After you click "New". will appear at the right a screen to create connection. Test Connection .Connecting With Informix Odbc In Scriptcase Home >> Connections >> Informix >> Connecting with Informix ODBC in Scriptcase Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection. Step 3: In the picture below. click on the sub item "New".Defined as ODBC Generic. DBMS Type .Set the name of your new connection. ODBC Name . Step 1: Log in your ScriptCase. and on the left menu you can see a tab "Database Connections".Enter your database name (actual base name).Displays if the connection was successful or not. . click on the image of the Generic ODBC. Enter the user valid password.Define which tables and owners will be displayed. Filter . .Username . system tables and procedures.Select the type of separator between comma and point. For more details on configuring the database connection . Step 4: Always test your connection before completing the same. If you still get errors. Filters . Decimal separator . click . then complete the establishment of the connection.Enter a valid username. check if the ODBC Data Source has been properly established. Configuring Informix ODBC. the following screen appears: Show.By clicking in his option.Use schemas before the tables names.Display filters on the tables. Persistent connection .Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends. views. if the message "Connected successfully" is displayed. Use the schema before the table name . Password . Step 2: Download the Zend Server CE with PHP 5.3 at Zend Page.Configuring Informix Pdo Home >> Connections >> Informix >> Configuring Informix PDOz' To create a connection on Scriptcase using Infomix PDO is necessary to follow the steps bellow. Step 1: If you already have Scriptcase installed make a full backup of it inside Options > Settings > Backup. . Step 3: Run the Zend installer and select the "Custom" option. * To use the infomix is necessary to have the "Infomix Instant Client" installed on you mahcine. Uninstall Scriptcase completely. Apache and PHP creating a small environment. the Zend installer will install the Zend Guard Loader. at this time the browser will open to proceed with the installation. so we must type: localhost:10081 .Step 4: Enable the "Zend Guard Loader" and the "Infomix" extensions. Proceed with the installation pressing next a few times. Step 5: Now we must activate the Infomix extension in the Zend. We must enable the check box to run the Zend after the installation. . Step 6: Now we must install Scriptcase using the zip file on the HTDOCS folder. then into the Extensions tab. . we must look for the pdo_infomix and turn it on. We can't forget to restart the PHP.Into the "Server Setup" tab. 130\ol_ids_1150_1:9088 * We cant use "localhost". we must use the IP of your machine on the network.Remember to rename the folder after the Scriptcase zip file get uncompressed and now we are ready to install Scriptcase in the new Environment.168. . Create your first project. Manual Installation Tutorial.254. select the Infomix PDO connection and use this structure as host: ip\service_name:port Example: 192. try to run your application using the default values.ini file after the date. one error about the time zone will appear this way you can copy your time zone from the error and paste it into the php. . Step 8: SRestart you apache and your Scriptcase will be ready to be used.Step 7: Save the connection and create an application (form or grid).timezone tag like the picture bellow. .dll" in php. Connecting to Interbase from Scriptcase. Enabling Interbase in PHP(Linux). Enabling Interbase in PHP(Windows).Interbase Interbase Home >> Connections >> Interbase In this tutorial we will see how to enable the PHP module "php_interbase.ini and then connect to Interbase from Scriptcase. Run ScriptCase diagnosis and check where the file is located.dll and remove the comment ". look for the word php_interbase." to enable this module. In PHP.ini file. .Configuring Interbase On Windows Home >> Connections >> Interbase >> Configuring Interbase on Windows See how to do it step by step: Edit the php.INI. See image below. php If the module INTERBASE is loaded correctly in your php. go through ScriptCase to create your connection. . http://server:port/scriptcase/info.Check if interbase module was enabled correctly. Connecting to Interbase from Scriptcase. net/manual/en/ref.php. compile it with --with-interbase[=DIR]option.Configuring Interbase On Linux Home >> Connections >> Interbase >> Configuring Interbase on Linux Requirements: To enable PHP to work with InterBase. check php website at http://www. .php Once it is correctly installed we are able to create a connection on Scriptcase Connecting to Interbase from Scriptcase.ibase. For more information. DBMS Type . Step 2: Then you can see a screen to select the database type. fill in the required specifications: Connection Name .Enter a valid user name.Connecting To Interbase From Scriptcase Home >> Connections >> Interbase >> Connecting to Interbase from Scriptcase Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection. Step 1: Log in ScriptCase.Set the version of the DBMS type. Test Connection . Username . and on the top menu you can see the item "Database ". click on the image of the Interbase database. click on the sub item "New connection" or use the icon from the fast menu. IP: PATH .Displays if the connection was successful or not.Enter the IP Server path. .Set the name of your new connection. Step 3: In the picture below. Use schemas before the tables names. if the message "Connected successfully" is displayed.Define which tables and owners will be displayed.Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends. If the connection was not successful. Filters . Enabling the PHP Interbase(Linux). Persistent connection . .By clicking in his option. verify that the PHP module is enabled: Enabling the PHP Interbase(Windows). the following screen appears: Show . For more details on configuring the database connection. system tables and procedures. click Decimal separator .Password . Use the schema before the table name . Step 4: Always test your connection before completing the same.Select the type of separator between comma and point.Enter the user valid password. views. Filter . then complete the establishment of the connection.Display filters on the tables. Mysql Mysql Home >> Connections >> MySQL The Scriptcase installer enable the MySQL module in the PHP by default. Conecting to MySQL from Scriptcase. you must be sure if the MySQL extension is enabled in the PHP. . Enabling PHP extension/module MySQL (LINUX). Enabling PHP extension/module MySQL (WINDOWS). If you are using your own environment. then you just need to connect from Scriptcase to the database. If you wish to use the MySQ? PDO connection. see image1.dll. To connect to MySQL database. Problems enabling MySQL extension on Windows . edit the file php. look for the php_mysql.INI file.ini and enable the MySQL module (php_mysql." to enable the MySQL module in PHP. you should remove the semicolon from php_pdo_mysql. Run the PHP info function to check the php.ini file location according to image below.dll and remove the ".ini file.dll). In the PHP. Remember to restart the web server. check in ScriptCase Diagnosis (menu: Help | Diagnosis) if the MySQL module is enabled.Enabling Mysql (windows) Enabling PHP extension/module MySQL (WINDOWS) Home >> Connections >> MySQL >> Enabling MySQL (WINDOWS) To enable the PHP MySQL extension/module we must edit the PHP. If not. See image below. Once the module is enabled we can create the connection to MySQL from Scriptcase: Conecting to MySQL from Scriptcase. This error occurs because Windows cannot find the DLL libmysql. Copy this DLL to the system32 Windows directory and restart the Services. in many cases the MySQL 5 extension is not enabled. .When using the Apache Web server with PHP ISAPI.dll which is located in the folder "bin" on the MySQL installation folder. php Once the module is enabled we can create the connection to MySQL from Scriptcase: Conecting to MySQL from Scriptcase. If MySQL is activated without specifying the path to the MySQL installation directory. PHP will use the MySQL client library. visit the site http://www. Restart the web server. neither the MySQL library is built in PHP.mysql. auth-mysql) should not use the library built. . Setting MySQL with PHP4: The option --with-mysql is enabled by default. This is the standard operation and can be disabled by setting --without-mysql.net/manual/pt_BR/ref.php. For other settings. Users running other applications that use MySQL (for example. This will force the PHP to use the customer libraries installed by MySQL.Enabling Mysql (linux) Enabling PHP extension/module MySQL (LINUX) Home >> Connections >> MySQL >> Enabling MySQL (LINUX) To enable the PHP MySQL extension/module on a Linux environment we must compile PHP with the option mysql (see description below). Use the option --with-mysql[= DIR] to enable MySQL extension. like this: -with-mysql=/path/to/MySQL. but instead only specify the MySQL path to the installation directory. Setting MySQL with PHP5: MySQL is not active by default. Step 2: After you click "New". Test Connection .Set the port to be used for your connection. Step 3: In the picture below. DBMS Type . . click on the sub item "New". and on the left menu you can see a tab "Database Connections". fill in the required specifications: Connection name .Set the DBMS type: transactional or not. Port . By Default port is 3306. click on the image of the MySQL database. Server/Host (Name or IP) -Inform the server IP or name where the database is installed.Set the name of your new connection.Connecting To Mysql From Scriptcase Home >> Connections >> MySQL >> Connecting to MySQL from Scriptcase Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection. will appear at the right screen to create connection.Used to test if the connection is successful or not. Step 1: Log in your ScriptCase. Persistent connection .Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends.Select the type of separator between comma and point.Define which tables and owners will be displayed. For more details on configuring the database connection to the data. the following screen appears: Show .Database Name . system tables and procedures.Use schemas before the tables names. check if the MySQL module is enabled in the PHP: Enabling PHP extension/module MySQL (WINDOWS). views. Enabling PHP extension/module MySQL (LINUX).Enter the valid password. if the message "Connected successfully" is displayed. If you have problem to connect.By clicking in his option. check if the database user has remote access.Enter a valid database user name. Use the schema before the table name . click Decimal separator . Step 4: Always test your connection before completing the same.Enter the MySQL database instance name.Display filters on the tables. Filter . Filters . then complete the establishment of the connection. Username . If you are connecting with a remote database server. Password . . . Connecting to Oracle using instant client for windows. On the links below we must choose the desired operating system. . Creating a connection on Scriptcase.Oracle Oracle Home >> Connections >> Oracle To connect with the Oracle Database it is necessary to install and configure some Oracle addons. Enabling the Oracle on the PHP. Oracle in linux environment. zip file downloaded to any directory (Ex: c:\instant_client_oracle). Configure the PHP for Oracle. Installing Oracle Instant Client Step 1: Unzip the . and 11. Grant Access to Oracle database. Requirements: *Download 'Oracle Instant Client Basic Package' (http://www. 10. When using Instant Client 11g. PHP OCI8 connects to all editions of Oracle 9.Oracle .2.oracle.x databases.x. .com).Instant Client Creating an Oracle database connection in ScriptCase Home >> Connections >> Oracle >> Instant Client (WINDOWS) This tutorial describe the steps to connect to Oracle from ScriptCase using Oracle Instant Client in Windows and the PHP configuration. (semicolon) at the end of line and the instant client path. It is necessary to restart the machine. add . Click with the right button on “My Computer”. Edit the variable 'Path' and enter the“Oracle Instant Client” path. Add the variable 'NLS_LANG'. . then Properties. (See images below). used to set the language. tab “Advanced --> Environment Variables”. When a value already exist in the 'Path'. Picture 1: Right click on the "My Computer" icon the properties menu Picture 2: At the "Advanced" tab we must click on the "Environment Variable" button.Step 2: Enter the Instant Client in Windows environment variable 'Path' location. Follow the images below. we must add ".C:\instantclient_11_2 Picture 5: We must add a new system variable. we must search for the "Path" variable and edit it. Picture 4: We will add the path to the instant client folder that we just created. Ex: .Picture 3: Once we are inside the "Environment Variables" menu." (semicolon) to separate the existant data from the new data that we are going to insert. . NDK7DEC Norwegian_Norway.BLT8CP921 .orafaq.WE8ISO8859P1 Latvian_Latvia. territory and character set properties.AR8MSWIN1256 American_America.Picture 6: We must set the variable name as "NLS_LANG".AR8MSWIN1256 American_America. http://www.com/wiki/NLS_LANG Here is a list with some of those language variables: French_France. In this link we will see a list with some of the variables.JA16SJIS Arabic_Egypt. the oracle will use this environment variable used to define language.WE8ISO8895P1 Norwegian_Norway.WE8ISO8895P1 Japanese_Japan.WE8ISO8895P French_Switzerland. Note 2: The way to get into the environment variables may be different depending on the windows version.Note: Restart the server to activate the Environment Variables. Once that the instant client is successfully we must certificate that the Oracle DLL is up into the PHP configuration: Enabling the Oracle on the PHP. . . Step 1: In the Oracle's website we will choose the desiredoperating system and then download the "Instant CLient Basic Package". to perform a connection it is needed to install the Instant Client </ a> for Linux. Step 3: Let's edit /etc/environment.Oracle .Linux Connecting to Oracle in Linux Environment Home >> Connections >> Oracle >> Linux Installing the Instant Client When the Scriptcase is installed in Linux environment the Oracle DLL is enable. Step 2: Uncompress the zip file. remember to separate what we will enter with ":" (colon).Step 4: We must add the path to the folder that we just created. Creating a connection on Scriptcase. . After the four steps scriptcase is ready to make a connection to the Oracle database. php . remove the comment in php.Enabling The Php Enabling the PHP Home >> Connections >> Oracle >> Enabling the PHP.". Example: diagnosis. PHP SETTINGS To enable oracle module in PHP.php' or 'info. Check if the module was really loaded opening our 'diagnosis. Find the extension=php_oci8.php'. Restart the web server if php is not configured as cgi.Oracle .dll line and remove the comment at the beginning of the line ".ini file. php Once the module is enabled we can create the connection to Oracle from Scriptcase: Creating a connection on Scriptcase. .info. CREATING SCRIPTCASE CONNECTION (ORACLE) Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection. Step 3: In the picture below. and on the left menu you can see a tab "Database Connections".Oracle . Step 2: After you click "New". click on the image of the Oracle database. fill in the required specifications: . Step 1: Log in your ScriptCase.Creating A Connection On Scriptcase Creating a Connection on Scriptcase Home >> Connections >> Oracle >> Connecting from scriptcase. click on the sub item "New". will appear at the right a screen to create connection. . Username .Used to test if the connection is successful or not. Persistent connection .Define which tables and owners will be displayed.Enter a valid database user name. the following screen appears: Show . Decimal separator . system tables and procedures. Password .Set the name of your new connection. if the message "Connected successfully" is displayed.Enter the valid password. then complete the establishment of the connection.Display filters on the tables. Test Connection . DBMS Type . For more details on configuring the database connection to the data. Client encoding .Select the type of separator between comma and point. Use the schema before the table name . Step 4: Always test your connection before completing the same. TSNAME .Oracle version used.By clicking in his option.Use schemas before the tables names. Filters .Inform the IP of the server where the database is installed and the instance name created in the Oracle installation.Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends.Encoding used on your database Filter . views. click .Connection name . . .dll in php. Enabling PHP extension/module PostgreSQL (LINUX). Connecting to PostgreSQL from Scriptcase.Postgresql Postgressql Home >> Connections >> PostgreSQL To connect with PostgreSQL in Scriptcase you should enable the PHP extensions/module php_pgsql. Enabling PHP extension/module PostgreSQL (WINDOWS).ini file. .Enabling Mysql (windows) Enabling PHP extension/module PostgreSQL (WINDOWS) Home >> Connections >> PostgreSQL >> Enabling PostgreSQL (WINDOWS) Edit the PHP. search for php_pgsql.INI file. See image below." to enable the module PostGreSQL in PHP.dll and remove the ". See Diagnosis. you should remove the semicolon from php_pdo_pgsql. Run the phpinfo() function to check the php.ini file.ini file location according to the image below. In the PHP. If you wish to use the PostgreSQL PDO connection.dll Make sure the PostGreSQL module was enabled. If the connection is made in a different server from where PostGresSQL is located. edit the file php.dll).ini and enable the PostGreSQL module (php_pgsql. Once the module is enabled we can create the connection to PostgreSQL from Scriptcase: Connecting to PostgreSQL from Scriptcase. see image1. check in ScriptCase Diagnosis (menu: Help | Diagnosis) if the PostGreSQL module is enabled. If not.Creating a connection in Windows Server To connect to PostGreSQL database. you must check if the "Allow Access Foreign" is marked. . pgsql. the option --with-pgsql[=DIR] should be used when compiling the PHP.php Once the module is enabled we can create the connection to PostgreSQL from Scriptcase: Connecting to PostgreSQL from Scriptcase.net/manual/en/ref.Enabling Postgresql (linux) Enabling PHP extension/module PostgreSQL (LINUX) Home >> Connections >> PostgreSQL >> Enabling PostgreSQL (LINUX) To enable the module for PostgreSQL.php. For other settings visit the site http://www. . and on the left menu you can see a tab "Connection".Inform the server IP or name where the database is installed. Step 3: In the picture below.PostgreSQL version used.Used to test if the connection is successful or not.Connecting To Postgresql From Scriptcase Home >> Connections >> PostgreSQL >> Connecting to PostgreSQL from Scriptcase Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection. Step 1: Log in your ScriptCase. . Step 2: After you click "New". click on the sub item "New". Test Connection . will appear at the right screen to create connection.Set the name of your new connection. click on the image of the PostgreSQL database. fill in the required specifications: Connection name . DBMS Type . Database Name . Server/Host (Name or IP) .Enter the PostgreSQL database instance name. Step 4: Always test your connection before completing the same. the following screen appears: Show. views. Persistent connection . click Decimal separator .Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends.Define which tables and owners will be displayed.Select the type of separator between comma and point. if the message "Connected successfully" is displayed.Display filters on the tables.By clicking in his option. For more details on configuring the database connection to the data. . Use the schema name before the table . Filter . Password . then complete the establishment of the connection.Username .Allows the use of schemas before the names of the tables. system tables and procedures. check if the PostgreSQL module is enabled in the PHP: Enabling PHP extension/module PostgreSQL (WINDOWS). If you have problem to connect.Enter the valid password.Enter a valid database user name . Filters . Enabling PHP extension/module PostgreSQL (LINUX). . org SQL Server in Linux .Sql Server Ms Sql Server MS SQL Server connection on Scriptcase (Windows Environment) can be made in 4 different ways: ADO MS-SQL Server Compatibility Win Win Win Win 7 Win XP Server Server Vista 2003 2008 OK OK Win 2000 OK ODBC OK OK OK OK OK OK SQL Server Client OK OK OK OK OK OK Native SRV OK OK OK OK OK Native SRV PDO OK OK Linux OK OK To make the connection in ScriptCase installed on a Linux Environment. use the FreeTDS Library www.freetds. and a MSSQL Database on a Windows Server. * The ScriptCase. verify the Diagnosis ( main menu: Help | Diagnosis) if the COM option is enable. make sure the MDAC is properly installed on this computer.exe installer that you can download from our site already configures everything needed to use this module. click on the image of MSSQL server database. It is recommended version 2.6 or higher. . Step 1: Log in ScriptCase. Creating the Scriptcase connection (MS SQL SERVER/ADO) Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection to the MSSQL database. see image1. Step 2: Then you can see a screen to select the database type.Ms Sql Server Ado Connecting to MS SQL Server using ADO To connect your SQL Server using ADO. If you have problems with the COM option. click on the sub item "New connection" or use the icon from the fast menu. and on the top menu you can see the item "Database ". the following screen appears: .By clicking in his option. ODBC or Native SRV.Select the type of separator between comma and point.Enter a valid database user name. For more details on configuring the database connection to the data. Database .Enter the user valid password. Password .Set the DBMS type: ADO.Use schemas before the tables names.Step 3: In the picture below.Enter the MSSQL. fill in the required specifications: Connection name . DBMS Type . User . DBMS Host or IP . Persistent connection .Used to test if the connection is successful or not. database instance name. Use the schema before the table name . Decimal separator . Test Connection . click .Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends.Set the name of your new connection. Filter .Inform the server IP or name where the database is installed. Define which tables and owners will be displayed.Show. The SQL Server listens by default port 1433. system tables and procedures. . To change or add a new port we must use comma. Note: When connecting ScriptCase via ado with SQL Server to another server you need to check the port block settings to the SQL server database where the Firewall is installed. views.Display filters on the tables. Filters . com/fwlink/?LinkId=101877 ) ./windows/syswow64/".Ms Sql Server Odbc Creating a MS SQL Server connection using ODBC To create a SQL Server connection using a data source ODBC. Start > Settings > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Data Sources (The ODBC must be created in the same Host where ScriptCase is installed ).microsoft. Follow the steps below to create a new connection using ODBC: * The driver that enables access to odbc by PHP is compiled in 32 bits. When using Windows 64 bits environment.exe" application in the folder ". Example: c:/windows/syswow64/odbcad32. it is necessary to create the odbc by "odbcad32. we must create a System ODBC Connection. ( http://go..exe Note: We are using the ODBC driver from the "SQL Native Client" installed in the machine. . click on the sub item "New connection" or use the icon from the fast menu. . DBMS Type . Step 2: Then you can see a screen to select the database type. Test Connection .Set the name of your new connection.Creating the Scriptcase connection (MS SQL SERVER/ODBC) We will now access the ScriptCase by the browser and we'll create the connection to the MSSQL database.Set the DBMS type: ADO. ODBC or Native SRV. Step 3: In the picture below. and on the top menu you can see the item "Database ". fill in the required specifications: Connection name .Enter the MSSQL database instance name. Step 1: Log in ScriptCase. ODBC Name . click on the image of MSSQL server database.Used to test if the connection is successful or not. Filter .Display filters on the tables. Password . Persistent connection .Use schemas before the tables names. click Decimal separator .By clicking in his option. if the message "Connected successfully" is displayed. then complete the establishment of the connection. the following screen appears: Show. views.Select the type of separator between comma and point. . Filters .Enter the user valid password.Username . Step 4: Always test your connection before completing the same.Define which tables and owners will be displayed. For more details on configuring the database connection to the data. system tables and procedures.Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends Use the schema before the table name .Enter a valid database user name. ini php_mssql.dll in php.dll .ini (remove the comment in the line) MS-SQL Server installed on the same machine Uncomment the extension in php.Ms Sql Server Client Requirements: Enable extension/module mssql. microsoft.Ms Sql Server Native Srv Using Native SRV Driver in Windows Environment The Native SRV connection is the recommended alternative to use with ScriptCase.microsoft. Below are step-by-step instructions for installing the Native SRV driver: Required: Operating Systems * Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 * Windows XP Service Pack 3 * Windows Vista Service Pack 1 or later * Windows Server 2008 * Windows Server 2008 R2 * Windows Seven Microsoft SQL Server Native Client Installed (sqlncli) http://go. It is faster (regarding database access) and it is the only that work properly with image and document database fields.com/fwlink/?LinkId=101877 SQLServerDriverForPHP Driver installed ( already installed by Scriptcase Installer ) http://msdn. execute and follow the installer steps .com/en-us/sqlserver/cc299381.aspx First Step: Microsoft SQL Server Native Client Installation (sqlncli) After downloading the file "sqlncli.msi". Final Step: Create the connection mssql SRV in scriptcase v5.dll and php_sqlsrv_53_nts_vc9.*After installation.dll * It is necessary to include the statement above after calling the extension php_mssql. Second Step: Installing the Driver .ini the following dll: php_sqlsrv_53_nts_vc6.dll Example: extension=php_sqlsrv_53_nts_vc6.ini". it is necessary reboot the service of "apache" inside : "Control Painel-> Administrative Tools-> Service-> ApacheScriptcase6". inform the php "ext" folder's path according to the image below. it is necessary to enable in php.ini After edit the file "php.dll in the php. it is recomended reboot the operating system. After Installation. To create the connection.SQLServerDriverForPHP Note: This step is not necessary if you have used the Scriptcase Installer. After executing the "SQLServerDriverForPHP". choose the option: MSSQL Server NATIVE SRV . The installer will extract "dlls" that will be used by php to start the service. Note: The SQL Server listens by default port 1433. To change or add a new port we must use comma. . Below are step-by-step instructions for installing the Native SRV PDO driver: Required: Operating Systems * Windows Vista Service Pack 2 or later * Windows Server 2008 (Service Pack 2 or R2) * Windows 7 Microsoft? SQL Server? 2012 Feature Pack http://www.aspx?id=20098 --> You must extract it and then use nts(non thread safe) dll in the php.0 for PHP for SQL Server http://www.microsoft.ini First Step: Microsoft SQL Server Native Client Installation ( sqlncli.msi ) Microsoft Drivers 3.Ms Sql Server Native Srv Pdo Using Native SRV PDO Driver in Windows Environment The Native SRV PDO Driver for SQL Server is the fastest driver to connect with MS SQL Server. execute and follow the installer steps . msi ) After downloading the file "sqlncli.com/en-us/download/details.com/en-us/download/details.microsoft.msi".aspx?id=29065 -> MICROSOFT SQL SERVER CONNECTIVITY FEATURE PACK COMPONENTS ( sqlncli. Second Step: Installing the Driver .0 for PHP for SQL Server After executing the "Microsoft Drivers 3.dll * It is necessary to include the statement above after calling the extension php_mssql. you must reboot the "apache" service ("Control Painel -> Administrative Tools-> Service-> ApacheScriptcase6").Microsoft Drivers 3.0 for PHP for SQL Server".*After installation.ini the following dll: php_sqlsrv_53_nts. To create the connection.ini After edit the file "php. Final Step: Create the connection mssql SRV PDO in Scriptcase. it is recomended reboot the operating system.ini". The installer will extract "dlls" that will be used by php to start the service.dll and php_pdo_sqlsrv_53_nts.dll in the php.dll/php_sqlsrv_54_nts.dll/php_pdo_sqlsrv_54_nts.dll Example: extension=php_pdo_sqlsrv_54_nts. inform the php "ext" folder's path. it is necessary to enable in php. After Installation. choose the option: MSSQL Server Native SRV PDO . Note: The SQL Server listens by default port 1433. . To change or add a new port we must use comma. 1 Nesta imagem você pode ver o site apachefriends.freetds. onde podemos baixar o XAMPP.Mssql No Linux(freetds) SQL Server no Linux Neste tópico iremos ver como conectar o ScriptCase com SQLServer usando o ambiente pré configurado do XAMPP. . Pré requisitos: Possuir acesso a base de dados SQLServer.org. Ter o PHP configurado com o FreeTDS. Nota: O Pacote XAMPP possui o FreeTDS na sua lista de produtos. mas caso queira configurar o FreeTDS entre no site http://www.org/ 1 Efetuando o Download do XAMPP 1. 2 Utilizando o comando 'tar -xzvf' vamos descompactar o arquivo do XAMPP. Arquivo descompactado com sucesso.2 Fazendo o download direto através do wget Download efetuado com sucesso. 2.1.1 Vamos mover o XAMPP para o diretório '/opt'. . 2 Instalando o XAMPP 2. 3 Iniciando os serviços do XAMPP 2.4 Agora basta acessar a partir do seu servidor Linux '/' 2.php e checando as configurações do módulo mssql. 3 Efetuando o Download do Ambiente de Produção .2.5 Acessando o arquivo info. conf'. este é o arquivo de configuração do FreeTDS. . Dentro do diretório '/opt/lampp/etc' existe um arquivo chamado 'freetds. Na imagem abaixo podemos visualizar o link direto para download do ambiente de produção. 4 Configurando o FreeTDS 4. 3. deve ser usado e configurado junto aos sistemas publicados.1 FreeTDS é uma biblioteca que possibilita a conexão com MS SQLServer a partir de uma estação Linux.2 Copiando o Ambiente de Produção ScriptCase para seu servidor WEB Copiando e descompactando o arquivo '.1 Configurando o Ambiente de Produção O ambiente de produção é uma biblioteca de funções comuns usadas nas aplicações geradas pelo ScriptCase.3 Renomeando o diretório para 'prod_scriptcase' e dando permissão total para este diretório. 3. Para mais informações sobre publicação acesse o tópico Esquema de Publicação.zip' na a raiz do servidor web dando origem ao ambiente de produção.3. tds version --> É a versão do meu SQLServer.2 Acessando o arquivo de configuração do FreeTDS: As configurações usadas no nosso caso estão destacadas. host --> É o IP do meu servidor de banco de dados. [SQLSERVER] --> É o nome que vai fazer referência ao meu servidor de Banco de Dados.4. 5 Criando uma Conexão a partir do meu Ambiente de Produção 5.1 Acessando o ambiente de produção através da URL --> '/scriptcase/prod/' . port --> É a porta onde está instalado o meu Banco de Dados. 5. .5 Definindo o modo de acesso ao banco.4 Selecionando o SGBD.6 Informando o nome de referência ao meu servidor e o nome da base de dados.2 Alterando a senha padrão do ambiente de produção. 5.Acessando o ambiente de produção com a senha padrão 'scriptcase'. 5. 5. 5.3 Criando uma nova conexão. . Conexão Realizada com sucesso.Ver: Configuração FreeTDS 5.9 Testando a conexão.8 Informando o nome da conexão.7 Informando os dados para autenticação do usuário. 5. 5. Enabling PHP extension/module SQLite (LINUX). Enabling PHP extension/module SQLite (WINDOWS). Connecting to SQLite from Scriptcase. .dll. php_pdo_sqlite.dll in php.ini file.Sqlite Sqlite Home >> Connections >> SQLite To connect with SQLite in Scriptcase you should enable PHP modules/extensions php_pdo.dll and php_sqlite. ini file.php .INI file find the DLL's pdo.dll.Enabling Php Module Sqlite (windows) Home >> Connections >> SQLite >> Enabling PHP module SQLite in Windows Edit the PHP. See image below. Run ScriptCase diagnosis and check the file path according to the image below.dll and remove the . sqlite.dll. On the PHP. Then you must check if the SQLite PDO module was enabled in the info. (semicolon) to enable the PHP SQLite module. pdo_sqlite. Once the module is enabled we can create the connection to SQLite from Scriptcase: Connecting to SQLite from Scriptcase. . php Once the module is enabled we can create the connection to SQLite from Scriptcase: Connecting to SQLite from Scriptcase. . --with-sqlite[=DIR] e --withpdo_sqlite[=DIR] should be used when compiling the PHP.sqlite. the options --with-pdo[=DIR]. For other settings visit the site http://www.net/manual/en/ref.php.Enabling Php Module Sqlite (linux) Home >> Connections >> SQLite >> Enabling PHP module SQLite in Linux To enable the module for SQLite. Home >> Connections >> SQLite >> Connecting to SQLite from Scriptcase Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection.Set the name of your new connection.Enter the full path to the file .Used to test if the connection is successful or not. DBMS type .Sqlite Pdo Connecting to SQLite from Scriptcase. Step 2: After you click "New". Step 1: Log in your ScriptCase. Step 3: In the picture below.Set the DBMS type: SQLite PDO or SQLite. Step 4: Always test your connection before completing the same. Test Connection .Db. click on the image of the SQLite database. click on the sub item "New". and on the left menu you can see a tab "Database Connections". fill in the required specifications: Connection name . will appear at the right a screen to create connection. PATH . if the message "Connected . Enabling PHP extension/module SQLite (LINUX). . then complete the establishment of the connection. check if the SQLite module is enabled in the PHP: Enabling PHP extension/module SQLite (WINDOWS).successfully" is displayed. If you have problem to connect. Installing and configuring the "Sybase Client. In the links below select the desired option. Creating a connection in Scriptcase. ." Enabling PHP in Sybase.Sybase Sybase Home >> Connections >> Sybase To connect to Sybase database becomes necessary install and configure "Sybase Client". . After the installation open the program DSEDIT and create an entry to your server. How to do step by step: On WINDOWS. We used in this tutorial the version ASE 12. install the SyBase client.dll of PHP in php.Sybase Home >> Connections >> Sybase >> Sybase Client Requirements: Must have SyBase client installed on. SyBase client installation. Enabled extension/module php_sybase_ct.5.ini file. Its only necessary to install the modules selected below.1 GA. we must make sure your DLL is being enabled in PHP: Enabling Sybase in PHP. Once the "Sybase Client" is installed correctly.Testing your connection with the software SQL Advantage. . .Sybase Home >> Connections >> Sybase >> Enabling PHP After connecting with success.INI file. edit the PHP.ini file.dll and remove the ". See image below. look for the php_sybase_ct." to enable the SyBase module in PHP.ini file location according to image below. In the PHP. Remember to restart the web server. Run the PHP info function to check the php. follow the steps above and when the SyBase module is enabled in ScriptCase Diagnosis (in the main menu of ScriptCase: Help | Diagnosis). proceed to create the connection.Creating a connection in Scriptcase To connect with your SyBase Database in ScriptCase. . Once the DLL is enabled we can create a connection in Scriptcase: Creating a connection on Scriptcase. fill in the required specifications: . Step 2: After you click "New".Sybase Home >> Connections >> Sybase >> Creating a Connection CREATING SCRIPTCASE CONNECTION (SYBASE) Now access ScriptCase to create a new connection. Step 1: Log in your ScriptCase. Step 3: In the picture below. and on the left menu you can see a tab "Database Connections". click on the sub item "New". click on the image of the Sybase database. will appear at the right screen to create connection. Server/Host (Name or IP) . Test Connection .Enter a valid database user name.By clicking in his option.Select the type of separator between comma and point. Filters .Display filters on the tables.Set the name of your new connection. the following screen appears: Show . For more details on configuring the database connection to the data. system tables and procedures. Password .Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends. then complete the establishment of the connection. views. Use the schema before the table name . Username .Gets the DBMS type. if the message "Connected successfully" is displayed.Inform the server IP or name where the database is installed.Enter the valid password. .Connection name . Persistent connection . Database Name . Filter .Use schemas before the tables names.Used to test if the connection is successful or not. click Decimal separator .Define which tables and owners will be displayed. DBMS Type . Step 4: Always test your connection before completing the same.Enter the Sybase database instance name. dbf). Visual FoxPro. This tutorial is only valid for the ScriptCase (server) running on WINDOWS. See step by step how to create and configure the ODBC related to your database and how to connect with ScriptCase ?? Creating the ODBC dBase (. Paradox.dbf) ?? Creating ODBC for Progress ?? Creating the ODBC Visual FoxPro ?? Connecting to the ODBC Scriptcase. etc. Dataflex. .Generic Odbc Generic Odbc Home >> Connections >> Generic ODBC connection via "Generic ODBC" is generally used to create connections to databases dBase (. Progress.. You just need to have the ODBC driver that corresponds to your database available. Open the ODBC Data Source Administrator. Select the folder and the dbf file.dbf) Home >> Connections >> Generic ODBC >> dBase(DBF) See step by step hot to create the ODBC data source: To create a connection using ODBC. select the tab System DNS (see image below) and create your connection with your DBF file. If you are using Windows 7 x64.exe to create the ODBC. you must use the Control Panel located in C:/WINDOWS/SysWOW64/odbcad32. we must create an ODBC connection in the Windows Control Panel.Dbase(dbf) Creating the ODBC for dBase (. . see image below. we can proceed with the connection in Scriptcase: ?? Connecting to an ODBC data source in Scriptcase. .Once the ODBC Data Source is created. Open the menu "Database :: Connect". On the new window. Add "sports" services to a free port using "tcp" protocol.C:\Program File\Progress (according to final Progress path) PATH . Open Progress "Data Dictionary" tool and choose "Create a New Database" option. use "sysprogress" as password for this example. Set environment variables: DLC . you must use the Control Panel located in C:/WINDOWS/SysWOW64/odbcad32. ex. Choose "A Copy of the SPORTS Database" option and enter the full path to the file.%DLC%\bin PROMSGS . 4. Create a load. Add user "sysprogress". 17. enter the database full path: C:\sports\sports. Click in OK and open the menu option "Admin :: Security :: Edit User List". Run the load. Close the "Data Administration". 12. 5. If you are using Windows 7 x64.bat file. Installing Progress 1.bat file in c:\sports directory. 7. Creating a PROGRESS ODBC 1.db 14. Create a directory to save your test database.exe to create the ODBC. 16. Enable ODBC (Merant ODBC) option during Progress Installation.Progress Home >> Connections >> Generic ODBC >> Progress Steps to do: Install Merant Progress 92 ODBC. Click in: "Options" and inform the following: Network . Put the following data in load. 9.db 6. Access Windows Control Panel to create a new ODBC Source. Create a ODBC data Source on the same ScriptCase´s server.: C:\sports.TCP Service Name . 11. 2. Edit C:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc\services file.sports 15.%DLC%\promsgs 3. Ex: C:\sports\sports.bat file. Open the Progress "Data Administration". 13. . with the port defined in services file on the -S parameter: @echo off cd \ cd c:\sports _mprosrv sports -n 4 -Ma 1 -Mn 21 -Mpb 10 -N tcp -S 2050 10. ex: 2050 8. Once the ODBC Data Source is created.localhost Port Number .sysprogress 4. Put a name to your ODBC and set these parameters: Hostname .sports User ID . Test and create the connection. . we can proceed with the connection in Scriptcase: ?? Connecting to an ODBC data source in Scriptcase. 3.your port defined in "services".sysprogress Password . Choose "MERANT Progress SQL92" driver. ex: 2050 Database Name . 2. Open "System Source" tab and click "Add".1. aspx Native Connection Step 1: Create a new ODBC in the System DSN.microsoft.com/en-us/vfoxpro/bb190233.Visual Foxpro Home >> Connections >> Generic ODBC >> Visual FoxPro This tutorial connects the Scriptcase server with Visual FoxPro ODBC. and enter the database file path. STEP 2: Select the Visual FoxPro Driver. Step 3: Enter the ODBC(DSN) name. The ODBC Driver is found at : http://msdn. . Once the ODBC Data Source is created.STEP 4: After complete the ODBC creation verify it. . we can proceed with the connection in Scriptcase: ?? Connecting to an ODBC data source in Scriptcase. Generic Odbc Connection In Scriptcase Connecting to an ODBC data source in Scriptcase Home >> Connections >> Generic ODBC >> Generic ODBC connection in Scriptcase Requirements: Configure an ODBC to your database. .Defined as ODBC Generic. fill in the required specifications: Connection Name . click on the image of the Generic ODBC.Set the name of your new connection. Access ScriptCase to create a new connection. Step 3: In the picture below. DBMS Type . Step 1: Log in your ScriptCase. and on the left menu you can see a tab "Database Connections". click on the sub item "New". Step 2: After you click "New Connection". Filters . click .Test Connection . if the message "Connected successfully" is displayed.Persistent connections are links that do not close when the execution of your script ends. If your ODBC is not yet created. system tables and procedures.Define which tables and owners will be displayed. Filter . password and ODBC name. Decimal separator . the following screen appears: Show . check the fields filled in.Displays if the connection was successful or not. Use the schema before the table name .Enter the user name (if exist) to access your database. Username . then complete the establishment of the connection. ODBC Name .Select the type of separator between comma and point.By clicking in his option. views. Step 4:Always test your connection before completing the same. especially user. Persistent connection . For more details on configuring the database connection .Use schemas before the tables names. If there is any connection failure.Display filters on the tables.Enter the password (if exist) to access your database. Password .Enter the name of the ODBC. see how to create it: . dbf) ?? Creating ODBC for Progress ?? Creating the ODBC Visual FoxPro .Creating the ODBC dBase (. . BLANK .Applications to manage the system infra-structure. CALENDAR . TREE MENU . ScriptCase Grid applications combine search functions and report formatting functions including generating output in PDF. like capturing data (parameters) that will be passed to other applications. CONTROL .Allows you to display various types of applications nested in Widgets similar to those for iGoogle.Multiple records per page. XLS. MENU . Simple .A record per page Multiple Record . FORM . To edit a record line. The record lines are disabled. SEARCH . once that it organizes the applications visually. RTF and other formats. Great to build applications with Scheduling and Appointments. It is a extremely useful resource. Editable Grid View .Applications used for data visualization and analysis.Multiple records per page.: system login. See below the options available .Applications for data update.Applications to create a system hierarchic navigation structure. The following types of application are available: GRID . Use this application to generate reports for government institutions or other organization that required specific format. update. Each record must be edited at a time.Working With Applications Overview Applications Each page created by Scriptcase is called "Application".Applications to create a system TreeView navigation structure (similar to the windows explorer).Multiple records per page. Editable Grid . All record lines are enabled to edit.Create PDF files.ScriptCase combines many developed applications in a structure where each tab corresponds to an application. first it must be enabled to edit.It allow to generate Calendar applications. Scriptcase offers a flexible range of form types to accommodate the business needs. Record lines are inserted. TABS . CONTAINER . facilitating the user access to the applications. XML. access selection and etc. company selection. updated or deleted at the same time. ScriptCase provides a tool to generate quality reports using predefined formats.Allows developers to write PHP / HTML code and display a result of the process. PDF REPORT .Filter form to link to any application that needs to receive a string having a WHERE clause. exclusion and navigation. Each record must be edited at a time. ScriptCase creates applications with all resources: records inclusion. Ex. . Image2: New Application through Toolbar. click on the following link: Creating applications Batch Creation Scriptcase has an option to Create Multiple Grid and Form Applications at once. To see more about creating applications. (Batch) Image 3: Acessing Batch Express Creation through Menu. Image1: New Application through Menu. To access the Standard Mode.Creating Applications How To Create Applications? Creating Applications ScriptCase offers a Standard mode and a Batch mode to create applications. just click on File >> New Application Menu or on the toolbar button New Application. See more details about the Batch Express Creation Mode.Image 4: Acessing Batch Express Creation through Toolbar. . Define the Language and Regional settings used in the Application. Localization . It will get all fields from the table. The connection must be previously created in the project.Express Mode The Express mode helps to create applications faster than Wizard Mode.Displays the SQL Select Statement. Just trivial data must be informed. All information is in the same screen. It can be edited or you can use "SQLBuilder" Tool to build the SQL. Image1: Express Mode Interface.It allows to create a SQL Select command based on a table (or view) from the database. Connection . SQL Select Statement (only for Grid and Search applications) . Table . The user selects the application type to create on the left side and all necessary settings are displayed on the right .Define a name to the Application.It indicates a database to use. . Name . Then a list with all tables availabe on that database (connection) is displayed (Image1). Image2: Selecting Tables. Image1: Batch Express Mode Interface. First a connection must be selected.Batch Express Mode Batch Express mode creates multiple applications (Grids and Forms). . When a table is selected then ScriptCase displays an option to create Form and Grid based on that table (Image2). Then click on "Finish" to create the applications.(Image5) . Click on "Next" to see a list of Grid and Form applications selected on previous step. After created the applications are listed in the Project Home. Inform the name. a description and the type if it is a Form. there is an option to generate the source code and/or to open the applications to be edited after creating them. (Image3) Image3: Applications Descriptions Interface. On the bottom. Image4: Creating the applications. .Image5: Batch Express Mode Interface. Editing Applications How To Edit Applications? Editing Applications Each application type has a great variety of settings. The first is the applications settings groups (a tree menu divided in Groups). 1 . It helps to .Application Settings Groups It groups the access to application settings using Tree Menus inside an Accordion Menu. To edit an application you can click on the application name or on the "Edit" option in the Application list panel. The second panel opens the settings option selected in the first. Image1: Editing an application. Image2: Editing an application. These settings can be edited by opening the application edit panel. An application workspace has 2 panels. Application Settings Panel It opens the settings option selected from the Application Settings Groups (Menu on the Left). .subdivide categories of settings. 2 . Automatic data formatting can also be integrated to the regional settings. Summary Display a summary page based on groups and totals. Grid applications display data retrieved from a database using a SELECT statement. . decimal values. MIN. XML. The grid applications generated are complete web reports with the following functionality: Feature Search Description Search form associated to the grid. field types such as: date . etc. Use the search page to filter the displayed data Paging Define the number of rows to display per page and page navigation. cascade sort is also available at run time. currency . formats. business rules. Dots and more Sorting Single sort is automatically created on reports columns header. Fields The end user can select at runtime which columns to selection displays in the grid. options Links creation Create links to other applications. used to create calculated programming fields . Events Customize grid event´s PHP code. Totals Summarize columns using different functions such as: SUM . Printing Print the generated reports in PDF or HTML. Pie . Data formatting Format the grid data. displaying only the summary data. images. AVG . XLS e CSV. Groups In one click is possible to create break down lines and group data by N levels or fields. Charts Charts based on grid´s data can be displayed in different styles like: Bars . Columns . integer values. text. The displayed information is organized in a grid layout. Data Exporting Generated grids can export data to many formats : RTF. MAX .Grid Applications Overview Grid applications Grid applications are powerful information analysis resource. . Image2: Grid application using group and total.Image1: Simple grid application running. Initial Module .Display search form as a modal window.Define the grid orientation as: Horizontal .Define what module will be opened first. Attributes: Load modules . Orientation . Start by Search .Grid Settings Image1: Grid Settings. Search Modal .Loaded interfaces available to end user.Select the grid initialization mode (display the search form before the grid). Lines per Page .Table width. Display records sequentially (side by side) in a page.Allows the line break in the heading titles (labels).Slide or vertical grid fields alignment. Vertical Total on Single Line . Table Width Unit .Display the field title (labels). Horizontal Alignment .Define the margin of the application (up. Alignment .Define the pagination as below: Partial .Application horizontal alignment.Display in a unique page (all selected records). Pixel or Automatic).Table width measurement unit (Percentage. Enter the record number to display sequentially (side by side) in a page. Line break in Titles . Table Width . Use with ?Width Unit?. Display Titles . right and left). Table Columns: . down.Number of lines per page.Used when selecting the Orientation type Vertical or Slide. Ignored for ?Automatic? type.Display in multiple pages (number of records per page is user defined). Columns per Page . Display Line Number .Used when selecting the Orientation type Vertical. Total . Margins .Display the line number in the begin of each line.Slide Vertical Pagination . .Informed .Calculate size according with the type and the field size. Refresh Interval .It will assume the informed width values at field level in the configuration of the visualization. Calculated .Interval in seconds to refresh (reload) the grid records.The alignment will be a browser criteria. Automatic . Note: Observe that all lines are draggable. 3 .Column to edit the field label displayed in the end application.Fields . Options: 1 .It allows to change the field type. It allows the user to arrange and edit the fields Image 1: Edit Fields Interface.Edit Fields New interface included in the V6. .Label . There you can define the position of fields. 2 .Datatype .This column is used to show the name of the field. Select Fields Fields Positioning Defines which fields are displayed in the application. Figure 1: Select Fields. Note: The list on the left displays all fields retrieved from the SQL select query for the application. The list on the right displays which fields will be displayed in the application (select a field and click on the right arrow to include it in the form). . A button to define a maximum number of line per page. A button can even be part of both parts simultaneously. Next Previous First Last Exit Navigation by page Advance to the next page of the grid. eg: 1 2 3 4 5 Exports . Image1: Toolbar. Display links to pages. having all grid data in XML format. RTF Create a complete report.Toolbar The application toolbar is divided in two parts: superior and inferior. Attributes: Navigation . Return to the previous page of the grid. Quit the application. XLS Create a complete report.Define the formats that must be generated. . It is possible to select the buttons for each part independently. PDF Create a complete report. having all grid data in PDF format. The ScriptCase can generate: Print Create the grid in HTML format. XML Create a complete report. Other Jump to Rows limit Define a button that allows to skip ( and position) to a specific record. Locates in the last page of the grid. WORDCreate a complete report.doc) format.Display navigation checkboxes that can be displayed in the grid. having all grid data in WORD (. having all grid data in Excel format. Locates in the first page of the grid. having all grid data in CSV format. having all grid data in RTF format. CSV Create a complete report. Display a rows counter in the application. A button that allows the user to sort the page by multiple criteria ( column ). Separator Image used to separate the buttons group. Buttons Settings Image2: Buttons Settings. A button to display the Gantt's chart. Group of Buttons Export Define a button that allows to open a float menu with a group of buttons. Separator Separator Image used to separate the buttons group.Search Columns Group By Sorting Order Summary Gantt Languages Themes When clicked lead to the search form. Quicksearch Executes a search in any field of the application. Selects a "group by" rule to be used in the application. A combo box to select the theme (available in the project properties). Rows Counter Web help A button to display the current page help. A option in the toolbar that displays a summary line with result set records info. A combo box to select the language. OPTIONS . Selects columns to display (or hide). eg.: [1 to 10 of 200] The amount of links displayed .Display summary at the bottom of each page. eg.Display format of the rows counter. or record. Attributes: Display summary .Jump to page.20. Lines per page .Show which options will be displayed for amount of rows in the combobox. Rows to choose .Image3: Grid Toolbar Options. Format rows counter .30 .The amount of page links to display if the option navigation by page is enabled. 10.Amount of record lines per page. Jump to . Page numbers format. Complete lines until footer .PDF right margin in Millimeters. define the number of records printed per page.Define the display format: simple (1.. .Define the PDF form type (letter.Creates summary charts in PDF.Define the printing orientation: Picture or Landscape. Rows per page in summary .?) or it will not use numeration. Upper Margin .3. Right Margin .Allows the user to configure the PDF parameters during the application.Opens the generated PDF file without displaying an intermediated link page.Fill with lines (empty) until footer. complete (1/n.Define number of rows printed per PDF page summary.4. Print type . Open PDF directly .). A4. Attributes: PDF Orientation .Defining the printing mode: colorful or economic. Image1: PDF Settings Interface. etc. 3/n. Left Margin .Enter a value in mm to be applied on the PDF upper margin. Configurable PDF .Applicable only for horizontal lined up grids.Enter a value in mm to be applied on the PDF bottom margin. Bottom Margin . PDF Format . 2/n. Records per page .2. Create Charts .PDF left margin in Millimeters.)...5.Export This screen allows to configure the PDF file to generate by the grid to export. Character used to separate the data columns. Opening CSV Directly . Configure the WORD format of the grid.Define number of rows printed per WORD page.Print Background . . Open WORD directly . Rows per page in summary . JS Execution Time . Image2: WORD Settings Interface. Attributes Lines separator .Adds label to he columns.Define number of rows printed per WORD page summary.Character used to separate lines of registers. Attributes Print Type . Text delimiter .Opens the generated WORD file without displaying an intermediated link page. Columns separator .The max execution time to wait the JS proccess. Rows per page in grid .Character used as a data delimiter of a column.Open the CSV generated file without the displaying an intermediated page link. Image4: Other formats Interface. Add Label . Image2: CSV Settings Interface.Character used to separate lines of registers.Allow the user to print the PDF with the background or not. Configure the CSV format of the grid. Image3: HTML Print Interface.Open the generated RTF file without displaying an intermediated page link.Select what will be printed: Both. Print Type .Open the generated XML file without displaying an intermediated page link.Define the quantity of rows to display per page in PDF summary.File format (XLSX or XLS). HTML Print Configure the HTML format of the grid. Open XML directly . Rows per Page . Open RTF directly .Open XLS directly . Black and White and Colorful. Attributes: Print Mode . .Show Background printing HTML. Format . Rows per page in summary . Print Background . Current Page and Complete Report.Selecting the print mode (color): Both.Open the generated XLS file without displaying an intermediated page link. Other Formats Image4: Other formats Interface.Define the quantity of rows to display per page. SQLSelect Statement . Font Face . Tip: Use the SQL Builder for statement fast assembly. SQL Preparation . .Error Message font size.Display the SQL select command.Enter SQL commands or procedure names to be executed before the main select. Connection . ? No Records Message .Display the (database) connection name used.(EOF).Message displayed when the application has no records. This connection can be changed for another that has the same tables (SQL). etc. functions.Define a customized error message to be displayed when the application has no records.Sql Image1: Interface of SQL Configuration.Error Message font color. Font Color . Use Customized Message . Field associated to “ Use Personalized Message”. Field associated to “ Use Personalized Message”. Font Size . Field associated to “ Use Personalized Message”. Field associated to “ Use Personalized Message”.Error Message font face. Edit the statement to add or delete fields. Note: Fill the first box with variable name. Case Sensitive . enter the name of the variable and the field that will be substituted.Apply case sensitive. For each dynamically determined field.Variables for substitution of the field names of the application. Note: Fill the first box with the variable name.Variable name used for replacing the table name. The second box must be filled with a part of the table name to be substituted.Variable for Table . . in the second select the name of the field to be substituted. Also inform the part of the table name that will be changed by the contents of the variable. Fields Variables . the six first fields already come checked (with an asterisk at the field left side).Sorting Define the sorting of the fields. . By default breaks are respected in the fields sort. Note: Use the function on/off to include or remove a field. Also by default. just by clicking on the column name (field) to order it. The application fields are sorted at running time. Image1: Fields with Sort. .Log New interface included in the V6. Options: Scheme . Events .Scheme of log to be used for the application. Image 1: Log Interface.Use all fields in the log. All Fields .Which event the log will save the application changes. It will allow the user to change the log's configuration for the application. 'on'). sc_apl_status('grid_products'.'on'). Example 1: Activating an application called grid_categories. } . Disabled applications display the message "Unauthorized user" when accessed. insert the following macro call: sc_apl_status('grid_categories'. sc_apl_status('form_categories'. Access to applications may be granted through a control application to authenticate users. } else{ sc_error_message("Unauthorized user!"). In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user).'off').'on'). sc_apl_status('form_products'. In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user).'off'). See the examples below.'on'). the application is only accessible when enabled using the sc_apl_status macro.'on'). Example 2: Creating a rule to authenticate by user type in a login form containing a field called userid. sc_apl_status('form_categories'.'on').'on'). sc_apl_status('form_products'. insert the following code: // two users: john and mary with permission to access different applications if({userid} == 'john') { sc_apl_status('grid_categories'. sc_apl_status('grid_products'.Security Attribute: Use Security: With this option selected. } elseif({userid} == 'mary') { sc_apl_status('grid_categories'. an "Unauthorized user" message is displayed. In the login application onValidate event. At run time a text box is displayed requiring the access password.Example 3: Authenticating applications using a database table. In the development environment it is possible to suppress the above steps purely for testing purposes. If the password is not entered correctly. (See image below). enter the following code: URL output safety (denied access URL redirection): It redirects the user to this URL. Disable the options Enable use of security and Enable Use of Password in the Configuration menu | My ScriptCase. thereby avoiding repeated password requests (or access denied) for each application execution. Use Password: An application password setting is required. if he does not have access to the application. . Quick Search Quick Search is an option that allow us to make searches in multiple fields through a text input field in the toolbar. Quicksearch Watermark . And we can select several search criterias.Show combobox if there is only one quicksearch option.Watermark showed in quicksearch Quicksearch width . Quicksearch show combobox . .Option to inform if the search button is inside of the text box (input object).Quicksearch width in pixels. In the Quicksearch settings we have the following options: Button within the search . Then we must select which fields can be searched. Note: You must add the quicksearch button on the "Toolbar" Settings to use it. . the fields that were selected in the menu “GRID . The user can set the attributes specific to a field data type using the update attribute settings page that reloads according to selected type. A series of attributes are defined to each field. .Fields Overview In this session just the fields that are part of the grid are displayed.SELECT FIELDS”. that is. See below. Replaced by any character. Examples: Mask (xx) xxxx .xxxx (xx) xxxx . . HTML fields store HTML tags processed accordingly by ScriptCase. If number of characters entered are less then the mask size.Text Image1: Field General Settings. Attributes: Data type.xxxx (zz) xxxx . Z Replaced by any character retrieved from database.Define the application field type.Define the field as HTML.7890 (00) 1234 . Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional). That is. the field value is completed with zeros (Filling full size field entry is required). could be label Client Name.Display the field only once (for records with equal values).xxxx Field Value 1234567890 12345678 1234567890 12345678 0012345678 Formatted Value (12) 3456 .xxxx (zz) xxxx .5678 (12) 3456 .5678 ( ) 1234 .7890 ( ) 1234 . When used combined with the mask character X it should be placed at the mask left. Label . Case Settings .5678 Do Not Repeat Value . For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name. See below the characters used to define the mask.Define the field display mask. Grid Mask .Field title in the display. Text fields accepts all characters.xxxx (zz) xxxx . CharacterDescription X Placeholder to any character.Converts the field text depending on the option: HTML Content . the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value. Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic). . retrieving the values from a database table. Attributes : SQL Select Statement .Define the field type in the database.Repeating value Without repeating value SQL Type . Before Lookup After Lookup Grid Lookup . The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}".Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command. XML . CSV e RTF). Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field. Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes. The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets. For example. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value .Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Delimiter . Multiple Options . During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value. PDF.Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF).Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically. Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution. Multiple Values (Delimiter) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. Separated by .Display original and lookup value .Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value . Value . Attributes : Lookup Types . Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface.Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Label . Multiple Values (Delimiter).Text displayed in the grid. the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by. For . Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary). Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. The string values are separated by a defined delimiter. Otherwise.1: Single Value lookup settings.Select No. For example. to display only the Select Command return value. M is displayed Male.Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values. The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list.Attribute stored in the table.Select a different connection available in the project. Choose connection . Figure1. Grid Lookup . the stored value S. . (First position is always 1). start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books . The values are retrieved based on the string position and size.Attribute stored in the table. Value .example.3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position). Label . Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label. Label . Delimiter .String start position for the data stored. Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. Figure1. Start . Figure1. Value . in a string to save Gender (a byte) .Attribute stored in the table. For example.Define the character used to separated string values.M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list.Text displayed in the grid.Text displayed in the grid.2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter). . the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies. Label .Movies .Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books .Text displayed in the grid. Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary).Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music Figure1. For example. (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports .Data size in bytes in the string.Size . In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm. Display original and lookup value . to display only the Label value . .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF).Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup. DISPLAY SETTINGS Scriptcase will attribute to the field the options bellow.Select No. Clear . Load lookup definitions . Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . Separated by .Remove selected item.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Save .Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. CSV e RTF). Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. Remove .Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse). Otherwise.Insert .Update selected item. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.Clear the attributes. XML . PDF. the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Update . Italic Text . Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment. Background Image . Number of characters . Background color .Font size.Uses Italic font.Figure5: Display Settings Attributes: Font Style .Field font type. Bold Text . . Bold . Line Break . Height (px) .Field Vertical alignment. Font Size . Title Horizontal Aligment . Column Chart Display an icon on the side of the Field Title to display a chart.Field height. Title Horizontal Aligment . Vertical Alignment .Uses line break in the field.Horizontal alignment of the title. Font Color .Apply bold formatting to the field.Uses a background image in the field. Width .Background color (Select from color palette).Font color (Select from color palette).Field width.Characters limit in the field.Apply bold formatting to field title only.Vertical alignment of the title. Max. Summary Function . Chart height . Column for Label . in pixels. Min or Avg. Display Values .Chart height.Column group by label. Chart width . Similar to the effect of a group by in a Select.Maximum height. in percentage between the chart and the space (on top) reserved for captions. Legend height . Attributes: Group by Label .Column Label.Summary function applied: Count. Sum.User configurable Chart parameters. in pixels. Configurable Chart .Chart width.Display Chart Values.Column Chart Interface. . Width . CharacterDescription X Placeholder to any character.Multiple Lines Text Figure1: General Settings Interface.xxxx (zz) xxxx . Attributes: Data type -Define the application field type.Field width.Define the field as HTML. Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional).Define the field display mask. Examples: Mask (xx) xxxx .xxxx Field Value 1234567890 12345678 1234567890 12345678 0012345678 Formatted Value (12) 3456 .5678 ( ) 1234 .7890 ( ) 1234 .Field title in the display.5678 Do Not Repeat Value . could be label Client Name. Multiple line text fields display line breaks (like HTML tag <BR>). If number of characters entered are less then the mask size. HTML fields store HTML tags processed accordingly by ScriptCase.Converts the field text depending on the option: HTML Content .xxxx (zz) xxxx . the field value is completed with zeros (Filling full size field entry is required). See below the characters used to define the mask. See below. When used combined with the mask character X it should be placed at the mask left. . Z Replaced by any character retrieved from database.7890 (00) 1234 . That is. the label is a field nickname in the application layer.xxxx (zz) xxxx .xxxx (xx) xxxx .5678 (12) 3456 .Display the field only once (for records with equal values). Grid Mask . Case Settings . For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name. Replaced by any character. Label . Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary . During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value. Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface.Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value. PDF. Delimiter . Multiple Options . Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field. Attributes : SQL Select Statement . CSV e RTF). The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}". XML .Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically. Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF).Define the field type in the database.Repeating value Without repeating value SQL Type . Before Lookup After Lookup Grid Lookup . a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic). The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets.Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. retrieving the values from a database table. For example.Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command. Separated by . Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. to display only the Select Command return value.Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Attributes : Lookup Types .1: Single Value lookup settings. the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by. Value .Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values. Multiple Values (Delimiter).Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Otherwise.Select a different connection available in the project. Choose connection . For example. Display original and lookup value . Figure1. Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution. Multiple Values (Delimiter) .Text displayed in the grid. Grid Lookup . Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary). Label . The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list.Attribute stored in the table.Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value . M is displayed Male.Default Value .Select No. 3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position). Figure1. the stored value S. For example.Text displayed in the grid. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size. For example. Figure1.Attribute stored in the table. Label .Define the character used to separated string values. Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label. in a string to save Gender (a byte) . The string values are separated by a defined delimiter.Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter). Value . Delimiter . . start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books . Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list. Label .Text displayed in the grid. Start .Data size in bytes in the string. (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports . (First position is always 1).Value .Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books .Movies . Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm.String start position for the data stored.Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music . Size . For example.Attribute stored in the table. the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies. Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. to display only the Label value . Insert . Separated by . DISPLAY SETTINGS Scriptcase will attribute to the field the options bellow. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. Update . Clear . Remove .Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Label .4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary).Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup. PDF.Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Display original and lookup value .Text displayed in the grid. CSV e RTF). XML .Clear the attributes.Remove selected item. . Load lookup definitions .Select No.Figure1. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF). Save . Otherwise.Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse). the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value .Update selected item. Title Horizontal Aligment .Apply bold formatting to field title only.Uses line break in the field. Height (px) . Number of characters .Apply bold formatting to the field.Uses Italic font. .Vertical alignment of the title. Font Color . Bold Text . Line Break .Field height.Background color (Select from color palette). Font Size .Horizontal alignment of the title.Characters limit in the field. Title Horizontal Aligment .Field Vertical alignment. Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment. Width .Font color (Select from color palette).Font size.Figure5: Display Settings Attributes: Font Style . Background Image .Uses a background image in the field. Bold . Background color . Column Chart Display an icon on the side of the Field Title to display a chart. Vertical Alignment .Field width.Field font type. Italic Text . Display Chart Values. Attributes: Group by Label . Chart width .Maximum height. in percentage between the chart and the space (on top) reserved for captions. Configurable Chart .User configurable Chart parameters. Max. in pixels. Chart height . Sum.Column Chart Interface. Legend height . Display Values .Chart width.Column Label. Column for Label .Chart height. Similar to the effect of a group by in a Select. in pixels. Summary Function . Min or Avg.Summary function applied: Count. .Column group by label. Label .xxxx (xx) xxxx . When used combined with the mask character X it should be placed at the mask left. See below. the field value is completed with zeros (Filling full size field entry is required).xxxx (zz) xxxx . could be label Client Name. Integer fields are formatted according to integer formatting rules.Display the field only once (for records with equal values).5678 (12) 3456 . Examples: Mask (xx) xxxx .xxxx Field Value 1234567890 12345678 1234567890 12345678 0012345678 Formatted Value (12) 3456 .xxxx (zz) xxxx . . See below the characters used to define the mask. Grid Mask .Integer Figure1: Field General Settings Attributes: Data type .Define the field display mask. Z Replaced by any character retrieved from database.5678 ( ) 1234 .Define the field type in the database.Define the application field type. CharacterDescription X Placeholder to any character. the label is a field nickname in the application layer. That is. Repeating value Without repeating value SQL Type . If number of characters entered are less then the mask size.7890 (00) 1234 . For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name.xxxx (zz) xxxx .5678 Do Not Repeat Value .Field title in the display. Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional). Replaced by any character.7890 ( ) 1234 . Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface.Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. If No is selected the attributes Digit Grouping Separator. retrieving the values from a database table. Negative Sign.Define the character used to display negative values. a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic). The .Define a different font color to negative values. Negative Sign and Negative format of number are displayed.(See regional settings). Regional Settings . Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field. For example.Figure2: Values Format Interface. Before Lookup After Lookup Grid Lookup . Number negative format . Negative Color . Attributes : SQL Select Statement .Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically.Define the character used as unit separator.Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field.Define the negative sign display position (relative to the field). Digit Grouping Separator . The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list. Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary). Otherwise.Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface. Delimiter . the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by. PDF. . Grid Lookup . Display original and lookup value . Multiple Values (Delimiter). Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes. Attributes : Lookup Types . Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF).Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value.Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value . Choose connection .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. to display only the Select Command return value.Select a different connection available in the project. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command. Multiple Options . The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets. CSV e RTF). XML .statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}". Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML.Select No. Separated by . in a string to save Gender (a byte) . Multiple Values (Delimiter) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.Attribute stored in the table. Value . Delimiter . Figure1. the stored value S. Label .Attribute stored in the table.1: Single Value lookup settings. Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label. For example. The string values are separated by a defined delimiter.Text displayed in the grid. Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.Text displayed in the grid. For example. Value . For example.Figure1. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size.Define the character used to separated string values. Label .2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter).M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list. M is displayed Male. start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 . Size .3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position). Value .Traveling) Attributed Lookup .String start position for the data stored.Movies . In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm.Data size in bytes in the string.Text displayed in the grid. Figure1. Label . (First position is always 1).Attribute stored in the table. For example.A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books . the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies. (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports . Start .Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books . Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. Update . Clear .Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value.Select No. Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF). Insert . Remove . Separated by . PDF. XML . Label . Display original and lookup value .Clear the attributes.Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value.Remove selected item. to display only the Label value .Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse).Value 1 2 4 8 16 Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music Figure1.Text displayed in the grid. Save . the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.Update selected item. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . Otherwise. Load lookup definitions . CSV e RTF).4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary). DISPLAY SETTINGS Scriptcase will attribute to the field the options bellow. Font color (Select from color palette). Background color .Horizontal alignment of the title. Vertical Alignment .Uses Italic font.Font size.Apply bold formatting to the field.Field height.Figure5: Display Settings Attributes: Font Style . Height (px) . Line Chart . Bold .Uses a background image in the field. Title Horizontal Aligment . Number of characters .Background color (Select from color palette).Characters limit in the field.Field Vertical alignment. Font Size . Title Horizontal Aligment .Uses line break in the field.Field font type. Background Image .Vertical alignment of the title. Font Color . Width .Field width. Italic Text . Line Break . Bold Text . Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment.Apply bold formatting to field title only. The chart width defines the images size to be displayed. Note: Icon Quantity is 1000. Default value is 200px.Enter color to be used. The calculation of the bars size is done in relation to the Grand Total of the column values. Image / Positive Color .There are two types that can be used: Bar Chart : Display a bar chart relative to working column. The amount of icons calculated is the division of the column value by icon quantity entered. Attributes: Line Chart Type . is display value divided by 1000. .Chart width in pixels. Quantity Icon . This field is only used by the option Bars Chart. Margin . thus. Chart Height.Image: Line Chart. Display value . Icon Chart -Display icons relative to working column.Display value and chart simultaneously (at the left or right side of the bar or icons).Chart height in pixels. Note: Chart width 200px. the amount of stars beside.Chart Margin. This field is only used by the option Bars Chart. This field is only used by the option Bar Graph. Chart Width .Determine how many icons (figures) will appear for each value in this field. This parameter is used if the field value is negative. . in pixels. Summary Function . Chart height .Display Chart Values.Column group by label.The same as Image / Positive Color above. Attributes: Group by Label .Image / Negative Color . Column Chart Interface.Chart height. Sum. Chart width . Column for Label . Max. Similar to the effect of a group by in a Select.Summary function applied: Count.Column Label. Legend height . Display Values . in pixels.User configurable Chart parameters. in percentage between the chart and the space (on top) reserved for captions.Chart width. Configurable Chart .Maximum height. Column Chart Display an icon on the side of the Field Title to display a chart. Min or Avg. 5678 Do Not Repeat Value . If number of characters entered are less then the mask size. the field value is completed with zeros (Filling full size field entry is required).xxxx Field Value 1234567890 12345678 1234567890 12345678 0012345678 Formatted Value (12) 3456 .Display the field only once (for records with equal values). the label is a field nickname in the application layer.5678 (12) 3456 . CharacterDescription X Placeholder to any character.Define the field type in the database. .xxxx (zz) xxxx . Grid Mask . For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name.5678 ( ) 1234 .xxxx (zz) xxxx .Field title in the display. When used combined with the mask character X it should be placed at the mask left.xxxx (xx) xxxx . See below. Repeating value Without repeating value SQL Type .Decimal General SettingsInterface Figure1: Attributes: Data type . Label . That is. See below the characters used to define the mask. Replaced by any character.Define the application field type. Z Replaced by any character retrieved from database.7890 (00) 1234 . Decimal fields are formatted according to real numbers formatting rules.xxxx (zz) xxxx . Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional).7890 ( ) 1234 . could be label Client Name.Define the field display mask. Examples: Mask (xx) xxxx . Negative Signal. Number negative format . Example: The value is $125. Digit Grouping Separator .50 with decimal precision of 3. (See regional settings).Define the character used to display negative values. Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field.Define the decimal precision to be completed with zeros at the right.Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. Using Complete with zeros the field is displayed $125. Complete with Zeros . Decimal Separator .Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically. Negative Sign and Negative number format are displayed.Define the character used as decimal separator. retrieving the values from a database table. . Decimal Separator. Negative Color . When selecting No the attributes Digit Grouping Separator.Define a different color to negative values. a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic). Attributes: Regional Settings . For example.500.Define the character used as unit separator. Before Lookup After Lookup Grid Lookup .Define the negative sign display position (relative to the field).Value decimal precision. Decimal Precision .Image: Values Format Interface. Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value . Grid Lookup . Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary). to display only the Select Command return value.Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. PDF. The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}". XML . Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF). Otherwise. Attributes : SQL Select Statement .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Delimiter . Multiple Options . Attributes : Lookup Types . Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value .Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values. the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. CSV e RTF). Multiple Values (Delimiter).Select a different connection available in the project. Separated by . .Select No. Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes. The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets.Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command. Display original and lookup value . Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface. Choose connection .Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface. During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value. For example.M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list. Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label. Delimiter .1: Single Value lookup settings. Figure1. M is displayed Male. For example. Label . start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Value M Start 1 Size 1 . Label .Attribute stored in the table. The string values are separated by a defined delimiter.Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution.Text displayed in the grid. Multiple Values (Delimiter) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list.Text displayed in the grid. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size.Define the character used to separated string values. Value .Attribute stored in the table. Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. For example. in a string to save Gender (a byte) . Figure1. the stored value S. Value .2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter). Attribute stored in the table. Start . the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies.String start position for the data stored. (First position is always 1). Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports . Figure1.Text displayed in the grid. Size .3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position).Data size in bytes in the string. For example. In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm.Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books . Value . Label .Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling F C S SP MO BO TR 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books .Movies . Label .Clear the attributes.Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup.Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. CSV e RTF).Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Update . Clear . Separated by .Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value.4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary).8 16 Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books .Text displayed in the grid. Save . PDF.Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse). XML . Display original and lookup value . Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . Remove .Update selected item. . Insert . Otherwise.Select No. Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF). to display only the Label value . Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Load lookup definitions .Remove selected item. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by.Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music Figure1. Font Size . Italic Text .Apply bold formatting to field title only. Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment. Width . Title Horizontal Aligment .Field width. Number of characters .Uses line break in the field.Apply bold formatting to the field.Font size. Height (px) . Line Break . Title Horizontal Aligment . Background Image .Horizontal alignment of the title.Field font type. Bold .Font color (Select from color palette).Field Vertical alignment.Characters limit in the field.DISPLAY SETTINGS Scriptcase will attribute to the field the options bellow. Vertical Alignment .Uses Italic font.Background color (Select from color palette).Vertical alignment of the title. Background color . Figure5: Display Settings Attributes: Font Style .Field height. . Font Color .Uses a background image in the field. Bold Text . Determine how many icons (figures) will appear for each value in this field. Icon Chart -Display icons relative to working column. . Attributes: Line Chart Type . Display value . is display value divided by 1000.Display value and chart simultaneously (at the left or right side of the bar or icons). The calculation of the bars size is done in relation to the Grand Total of the column values. The amount of icons calculated is the division of the column value by icon quantity entered.There are two types that can be used: Bar Chart : Display a bar chart relative to working column. thus. Note: Chart width 200px. The chart width defines the images size to be displayed.Line Chart Image: Line Chart. Quantity Icon . Note: Icon Quantity is 1000. the amount of stars beside. in pixels.Chart height in pixels. Max. Column Chart Interface. Legend height . Configurable Chart .Display Chart Values. Chart height .Chart width in pixels. This parameter is used if the field value is negative.Column group by label. Chart width . Image / Positive Color .Chart Margin. Margin .Chart width. in percentage between the chart and the space (on top) reserved for captions. Attributes: Group by Label . This field is only used by the option Bar Graph. Column for Label . This field is only used by the option Bars Chart.Column Label. Min or Avg.User configurable Chart parameters.Chart height.Summary function applied: Count. Similar to the effect of a group by in a Select. Chart Height.The same as Image / Positive Color above. Column Chart Display an icon on the side of the Field Title to display a chart. This field is only used by the option Bars Chart.Maximum height. Display Values . in pixels. .Enter color to be used. Image / Negative Color .Chart Width . Summary Function . Default value is 200px. Sum. the field value is completed with zeros (Filling full size field entry is required). Replaced by any character.Percent Figure1: Field General Settings Attributes: Data type . Repeating value Without repeating value SQL Type .Field title in the display. See below the characters used to define the mask.5678 (12) 3456 . could be label Client Name.xxxx Field Value 1234567890 12345678 1234567890 12345678 0012345678 Formatted Value (12) 3456 .Define the application field type. but displaying the percentage symbol after it.xxxx (zz) xxxx .Define the field display mask. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name.7890 ( ) 1234 .5678 ( ) 1234 .xxxx (zz) xxxx .Display the field only once (for records with equal values). Examples: Mask (xx) xxxx . Grid Mask . the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional).Define the field type in the database. . If number of characters entered are less then the mask size. That is.7890 (00) 1234 . CharacterDescription X Placeholder to any character.5678 Do Not Repeat Value . When used combined with the mask character X it should be placed at the mask left.xxxx (xx) xxxx . Percent fields are like a number field. Z Replaced by any character retrieved from database. See below. Label .xxxx (zz) xxxx . Decimal Precision . (See regional settings). .Define a different color to negative values. For example. When selecting No the attributes Digit Grouping Separator. retrieving the values from a database table. Before Lookup After Lookup Grid Lookup . Attributes: Regional Settings . Using Complete with zeros the field is displayed $125.Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. Decimal Separator . Example: The value is $125.Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically.Define the character used to display negative values.Define the negative sign display position (relative to the field).Decimal Format Image: Values Format Interface.Define the character used as unit separator.50 with decimal precision of 3. Number negative format . Negative Signal. Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field. Decimal Separator. Digit Grouping Separator .500. Complete with Zeros . Negative Color .Define the character used as decimal separator. Negative Sign and Negative number format are displayed.Value decimal precision.Define the decimal precision to be completed with zeros at the right. a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic). PDF. the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by. During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value.Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value . Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Separated by . Display original and lookup value . Grid Lookup . Choose connection . Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary).Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values.Select No. XML .Select a different connection available in the project. The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}". Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. Delimiter .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value.Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value. Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Attributes : SQL Select Statement . Multiple Values (Delimiter). . Attributes : Lookup Types . CSV e RTF). Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface. Multiple Options .Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value .Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command.Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. to display only the Select Command return value. The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets. Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF). Otherwise. Text displayed in the grid. Label .2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter).Text displayed in the grid. Delimiter . Label . the stored value S. Value . Figure1. Multiple Values (Delimiter) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. For example.Attribute stored in the table. Value . start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Value Start Size . Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.Attribute stored in the table.Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution. in a string to save Gender (a byte) .M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list. For example. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size. The string values are separated by a defined delimiter. For example.Define the character used to separated string values. The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list. Figure1. Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label. M is displayed Male.1: Single Value lookup settings. Start . (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports .Movies .Text displayed in the grid. Label . For example. In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm. Figure1.Data size in bytes in the string.Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 Lookup Description Sports Movies . (First position is always 1). Size .3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position). the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies. Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. Value .String start position for the data stored.Attribute stored in the table.Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling M F C S SP MO BO TR 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books . 4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary). Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Clear . Otherwise.Update selected item. XML . Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.Text displayed in the grid.Select No. Save . Label . Separated by . Load lookup definitions . Remove . to display only the Label value . Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML.Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music Figure1.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF).4 8 16 Books Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books .Remove selected item. .Clear the attributes. Update . CSV e RTF). PDF.Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup.Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse). Display original and lookup value . Insert .Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Apply bold formatting to the field.Field width. Vertical Alignment . Figure5: Display Settings Attributes: Font Style .Apply bold formatting to field title only.Horizontal alignment of the title. Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment.DISPLAY SETTINGS Scriptcase will attribute to the field the options bellow.Field height.Uses a background image in the field. Font Color .Characters limit in the field. Font Size . Width .Field font type.Vertical alignment of the title. Line Break .Font size. .Background color (Select from color palette). Number of characters . Height (px) . Italic Text . Title Horizontal Aligment . Bold .Uses line break in the field. Title Horizontal Aligment . Bold Text .Uses Italic font. Background Image .Field Vertical alignment. Background color .Font color (Select from color palette). Display value and chart simultaneously (at the left or right side of the bar or icons).Line Chart Image: Line Chart. Attributes: Line Chart Type . The calculation of the bars size is done in relation to the Grand Total of the column values. Note: Icon Quantity is 1000. is display value divided by 1000. . thus. The amount of icons calculated is the division of the column value by icon quantity entered. the amount of stars beside. The chart width defines the images size to be displayed. Note: Chart width 200px. Display value .There are two types that can be used: Bar Chart : Display a bar chart relative to working column. Icon Chart -Display icons relative to working column. Chart Margin. Min or Avg. in pixels. Chart height . Image / Negative Color .Chart height.Chart width in pixels. This field is only used by the option Bar Graph.Column group by label. Default value is 200px. Display Values . Chart Height. in pixels. Column Chart Interface. Image / Positive Color .Column Label. Margin . Sum.Display Chart Values. This field is only used by the option Bars Chart.Maximum height. Similar to the effect of a group by in a Select.Determine how many icons (figures) will appear for each value in this field.User configurable Chart parameters. Chart width . Legend height . Column Chart Display an icon on the side of the Field Title to display a chart. Column for Label . Configurable Chart .Summary function applied: Count. This field is only used by the option Bars Chart.Quantity Icon .Enter color to be used. Chart Width . .The same as Image / Positive Color above. Attributes: Group by Label .Chart width. Summary Function . Max. in percentage between the chart and the space (on top) reserved for captions.Chart height in pixels. This parameter is used if the field value is negative. . Grid Mask . For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name.Define the field type in the database. . Currency fields are formatted according to currency formatting rules.7890 (00) 1234 .5678 (12) 3456 . Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional).xxxx (xx) xxxx .5678 ( ) 1234 .7890 ( ) 1234 .Field title in the display. could be label Client Name.Display the field only once (for records with equal values). Z Replaced by any character retrieved from database.Currency Figure 1: Interface General Settings Attributes: Data type -Define the type of field application.xxxx (zz) xxxx . CharacterDescription X Placeholder to any character. the field value is completed with zeros (Filling full size field entry is required). Label . If number of characters entered are less then the mask size. Repeating value Without repeating value SQL Type .xxxx (zz) xxxx .xxxx Field Value 1234567890 12345678 1234567890 12345678 0012345678 Formatted Value (12) 3456 . That is.Define the field display mask. When used combined with the mask character X it should be placed at the mask left. Replaced by any character. See below. the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Examples: Mask (xx) xxxx . See below the characters used to define the mask.xxxx (zz) xxxx .5678 Do Not Repeat Value . Currency positive format and Currency negative format are displayed.Define the character used as decimal separator.(See regional settings). . Using Complete with zeros the field is displayed $125. For example. Example: The value is $125. Attributes: Regional Settings .Define the negative sign display position (relative to the field).Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field.Define a different color to negative values. Negative Sign.Define the character used as the monetary symbol. Currency positive format .Value decimal precision. Monetary Format .Define the character used to display negative values.50 with decimal precision 3. Decimal Separator.Image: Values Format Interface.Define the character used as unit separator. If selecting No the attributes Digit Grouping Separator. Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field. Negative Color . Digit Grouping Separator .Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically. a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic).500. Decimal Precision . Monetary Symbol . Before Lookup After Lookup Grid Lookup . Currency negative format . retrieving the values from a database table. Negative Sign .Define the character used to display negative values.Define if the field is displayed in monetary format. Complete with Zeros -Define the decimal precision is to be completed with zeros to the right. Decimal Separator . Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values. . Attributes : SQL Select Statement . Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes. XML . CSV e RTF). Display original and lookup value . Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value. The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}". PDF.Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface. Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF). Grid Lookup .Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command. Delimiter .Select a different connection available in the project. The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets.Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value .Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value.Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. Otherwise.Select No. Multiple Options . Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by. Choose connection . Separated by . to display only the Select Command return value. the stored value S. Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution.Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value . Multiple Values (Delimiter) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.Attribute stored in the table. Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary).Attribute stored in the table. The values are retrieved based on the string position and . Delimiter . Attributes : Lookup Types . Figure1. Multiple Values (Delimiter). Figure1. Value .2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter). The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list.M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list.Text displayed in the grid. The string values are separated by a defined delimiter. Label .Define the character used to separated string values. Label .1: Single Value lookup settings.Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface. For example. For example. Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. Value .Text displayed in the grid. M is displayed Male. in a string to save Gender (a byte) .3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position).Attribute stored in the table. Start . Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label. Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.size.Text displayed in the grid. start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books . Size . Value . For example. In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm. For example.String start position for the data stored.Data size in bytes in the string. (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: . the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies. Label . Figure1. (First position is always 1). PDF.Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse). CSV e RTF). Label . . Clear . Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. Update .Clear the attributes.Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music Figure1.Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value .Text displayed in the grid.4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary).Update selected item. Save .11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports .Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value.Remove selected item. Remove . Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF). Insert .Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books . XML . Load lookup definitions .Movies . Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Icon Chart -Display icons relative to working column. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. . The chart width defines the images size to be displayed. Attributes: Line Chart Type . Separated by . Note: Chart width 200px. to display only the Label value .Display original and lookup value . Line Chart Image: Line Chart. The amount of icons calculated is the division of the column value by icon quantity entered. The calculation of the bars size is done in relation to the Grand Total of the column values.There are two types that can be used: Bar Chart : Display a bar chart relative to working column. Otherwise.Select No. Display value and chart simultaneously (at the left or right side of the bar or icons). Column Chart Interface. thus. . Chart Width . the amount of stars beside. This field is only used by the option Bar Graph. Image / Positive Color .Chart width in pixels.Display Chart Values. Max. This field is only used by the option Bars Chart. Column Chart Display an icon on the side of the Field Title to display a chart. Summary Function .Column group by label. Image / Negative Color . Margin .Enter color to be used.Summary function applied: Count.The same as Image / Positive Color above.Chart Margin. Min or Avg. This field is only used by the option Bars Chart.Note: Icon Quantity is 1000. Display value .Chart height in pixels. Default value is 200px.User configurable Chart parameters. Attributes: Group by Label .Determine how many icons (figures) will appear for each value in this field. This parameter is used if the field value is negative. Quantity Icon . is display value divided by 1000. Configurable Chart . Similar to the effect of a group by in a Select. Display Values . Sum. Chart Height. Chart width . Legend height . in pixels.Chart height. in pixels.Column Label.Column for Label . Chart height .Chart width.Maximum height. . in percentage between the chart and the space (on top) reserved for captions. Border . the label is a field nickname in the application layer.Define image width in Pixels. could be label Client Name.Define image height in Pixels. That is. Label .Field title in the display. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name. Alternatively click in "Upload image" to send an image from a different location to the server (images need to be in the same server to be displayed). Width . Html image fields are used to display images. .Html Image Figure1: Field General Settings. . Attributes: Data type ? Define the application field type. Height . DISPLAY SETTINGS Scriptcase will attribute to the field the options bellow.Define the image to display. The icon "Choose image" displays Scriptcase standard images.Image border width in pixels. Field Vertical alignment.Font color (Select from color palette).Horizontal alignment of the title. Number of characters . Height (px) .Uses Italic font.Field width.Apply bold formatting to field title only. .Field height.Vertical alignment of the title. Font Color . Bold Text . Title Horizontal Aligment . Background color .Characters limit in the field.Uses line break in the field. Font Size .Apply bold formatting to the field.Font size. Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment. Title Horizontal Aligment .Uses a background image in the field. Bold . Line Break . Width .Background color (Select from color palette). Vertical Alignment . Background Image .Field font type. Italic Text .Figure5: Display Settings Attributes: Font Style . Calculated Percent fields are calculated based on the total value of a related number field. That is. Replaced by any character. If number of characters entered are less then the mask size.xxxx Field Value 1234567890 12345678 1234567890 12345678 0012345678 Formatted Value (12) 3456 . Label . the field value is completed with zeros (Filling full size field entry is required).xxxx (zz) xxxx .7890 ( ) 1234 .xxxx (zz) xxxx .Display the field only once (for records with equal values).xxxx (xx) xxxx . CharacterDescription X Placeholder to any character. could be label Client Name. Repeating value Without repeating value . For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name.Field title in the display.5678 Do Not Repeat Value . Examples: Mask (xx) xxxx .Calculated Percent Figure1: Field General Settings Attributes: Data type .Define the application field type. See below the characters used to define the mask.Define the field display mask. Grid Mask . Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional).7890 (00) 1234 .5678 (12) 3456 . When used combined with the mask character X it should be placed at the mask left. Related Field . See below.Related number field to calculate the total value.5678 ( ) 1234 . the label is a field nickname in the application layer.xxxx (zz) xxxx . Z Replaced by any character retrieved from database. Define the decimal precision to be completed with zeros at the right. Decimal Separator .Define the character used as decimal separator. Digit Grouping Separator . Using Complete with zeros the field is displayed $125. Negative Signal. Before Lookup After Lookup Grid Lookup . Negative Sign and Negative number format are displayed.Value decimal precision. Decimal Format Image: Values Format Interface.500. Example: The value is $125. (See regional settings). Complete with Zeros . Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field.SQL Type .Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically.50 with decimal precision of 3. For example.Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field.Define a different color to negative values. Decimal Separator. .Define the character used as unit separator.Define the field type in the database. retrieving the values from a database table. Negative Color . a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic).Define the character used to display negative values. When selecting No the attributes Digit Grouping Separator. Attributes: Regional Settings .Define the negative sign display position (relative to the field). Decimal Precision . Number negative format . Display original and lookup value . Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface.Select No. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command.Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. Attributes : .Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value.Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML.Select a different connection available in the project. Separated by . the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by. The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . Delimiter .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. XML . During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value. to display only the Select Command return value. Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes. Attributes : SQL Select Statement . CSV e RTF). Multiple Options . Otherwise. Grid Lookup . The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}". Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF). Choose connection .Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface. PDF. Label . Multiple Values (Delimiter) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.Attribute stored in the table. Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label. For example.2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter). The values are retrieved based on the string position and size.1: Single Value lookup settings. M is displayed Male. Value .Text displayed in the grid.Define the character used to separated string values. The string values are separated by a defined delimiter. the stored value S. Figure1. Label . Delimiter . Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary).Attribute stored in the table.Lookup Types . Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution. Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. start position in the string and size in . Figure1. in a string to save Gender (a byte) .Text displayed in the grid. For example.Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value . Value . Multiple Values (Delimiter). For example.M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list. The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list. (First position is always 1).Text displayed in the grid. In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm.String start position for the data stored. Label .Movies . the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies. Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. Value .3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position). (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports .Attribute stored in the table. For example. Figure1.Data size in bytes in the string.bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books . Size . Start .Traveling) Attributed Lookup . the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Save .4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary).Update selected item.Value 1 2 4 8 16 Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books . Clear . CSV e RTF).Select No. Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF). Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. Insert . Load lookup definitions .Text displayed in the grid.Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Display original and lookup value .Remove selected item.Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse).Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup. Otherwise. .Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music Figure1. PDF. Update .Clear the attributes. XML . Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value .Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Remove . to display only the Label value . Label . Font Color .Uses Italic font.Uses a background image in the field.Font color (Select from color palette).Field width. DISPLAY SETTINGS Scriptcase will attribute to the field the options bellow. Width .Uses line break in the field.Field font type. Bold Text .Separated by . Background color . Font Size . Number of characters .Horizontal alignment of the title. Vertical Alignment .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Figure5: Display Settings Attributes: Font Style .Background color (Select from color palette).Characters limit in the field. Italic Text . Background Image .Field height.Field Vertical alignment. Height (px) .Apply bold formatting to the field.Font size. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Title Horizontal Aligment . Line Break . Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment. . The chart width defines the images size to be displayed. Attributes: Line Chart Type . Icon Chart -Display icons relative to working column.There are two types that can be used: Bar Chart : Display a bar chart relative to working column. the amount of stars beside. is display value divided by 1000.Vertical alignment of the title. Note: Icon Quantity is 1000. Note: Chart width 200px.Apply bold formatting to field title only. Line Chart Image: Line Chart. thus.Title Horizontal Aligment . Bold . . The amount of icons calculated is the division of the column value by icon quantity entered. The calculation of the bars size is done in relation to the Grand Total of the column values. The same as Image / Positive Color above. This field is only used by the option Bar Graph.User configurable Chart parameters. Sum. Image / Negative Color .Display value and chart simultaneously (at the left or right side of the bar or icons). This field is only used by the option Bars Chart. Quantity Icon . Summary Function . Display Values . Configurable Chart . Chart Height. Max. Column Chart Display an icon on the side of the Field Title to display a chart. in pixels.Chart Margin. This parameter is used if the field value is negative.Enter color to be used.Chart height. Chart width . Column for Label . Similar to the effect of a group by in a Select.Display Chart Values.Determine how many icons (figures) will appear for each value in this field. Chart Width .Display value . Margin .Chart width. Image / Positive Color . . Attributes: Group by Label . Default value is 200px. Chart height .Chart width in pixels.Column Label.Column group by label.Chart height in pixels. This field is only used by the option Bars Chart.Summary function applied: Count. Min or Avg. Column Chart Interface. in pixels. in percentage between the chart and the space (on top) reserved for captions. .Maximum height.Legend height . Display the field only once (for records with equal values). (See Regional settings). Otherwise the developer can select the attribute Display . Label . Date fields are formatted according to specific date rules. Do Not Repeat Value . .Define the field type in the database. Image2: Values Format with regional settings. Image3: Values Format without regional settings.Field title in the display. Repeating value Without repeating value SQL Type . When selected (Yes) the option Detail Mask is displayed. could be label Client Name. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name. To set one of the attributes accordingly note the definitions below. That is. See below. Display .Show a list of predefined date display formats.Date General Settings Interface Image1: Attributes: Data type . Attributes: Regional settings .Apply regional settings date formatting rules to the field.Define the application field type. the label is a field nickname in the application layer. according to the PHP Date function. define the internal format as: YYYYMMDD Example2: For a date stored as char(6) SQL where the positions 1 to2 represents the month and the .Define the grid display format to the field. Month and Day to enter the format. d \d\e F \d\e Y Thursday. January 25 2009 h:i:s 11:33:20 #h:i:s 123:43:27 (in hours) Formatting Table j day of the month "1" to "31" d day do month with zero "01" a "31" at left n month "1" a"12" m month with zero at left "01" a"12" M month (written format "Jan" with 3 char) F month (written format "January" complete) y year with 2 digits "09" Y year with 4 digits "2009" D weekday with 3 char "Mon" l weekday (written format "Monday" complete) g hour 12-hours format "1" a "12" G hour 24-hours format "0" a "23" h hour 12-hours format "01" a "12" with zero at left H hour 24-hours format "00" a "23" with zero at left i minutes "00" a "59" s seconds with zero at "00" a "59" left a pre and pos meridian "am" a "pm" A pre and pos meridian "AM" a "PM" #h hours accumulator #i minutes accumulator #s seconds accumulator \ escape Internal Format .Define the field formatting when SQL type is different from Date.Detail Mask . M and D for Year. Examples: d-m-Y F/Y j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25-09-2009 September/2009 25/9/2001 14:30:11 PM l. Example1: For a date stored as char(8) SQL where the positions 1 to 4 represents the year. the position 5 and 6 the month and the positions 7 and 8 the day. Use the characters Y. During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value. Otherwise. Attributes : SQL Select Statement . For example. CSV e RTF). Delimiter .Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. to display only the Select Command return value. . the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by. The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets.Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. Display original and lookup value .Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command.Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically. Multiple Options . PDF.Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value. Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface. Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes.Select No. XML . Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF).positions 3 and 6 the year . a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic). The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}". retrieving the values from a database table. Before Lookup After Lookup Grid Lookup . Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . define the internal format as: MMYYYY Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field. Value .Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value . The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Choose connection . Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution.M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list. Attributes : Lookup Types . For example.Attribute stored in the table. the stored value S.Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values. Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary). Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface. Multiple Values (Delimiter) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. M is displayed Male.Select a different connection available in the project. Figure1. Label .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Multiple Values (Delimiter).Separated by .1: Single Value lookup settings. Grid Lookup . . For example.Text displayed in the grid. The string values are separated by a defined delimiter. Attribute stored in the table. For example. Label .Text displayed in the grid. Delimiter .Define the character used to separated string values. in a string to save Gender (a byte) . . Value . (First position is always 1). The values are retrieved based on the string position and size.Attribute stored in the table.String start position for the data stored. Figure1.Text displayed in the grid.3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position). start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books . Label . Value .Figure1. Size . Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label. Start .2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter). Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.Data size in bytes in the string. Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books .Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value.Text displayed in the grid.Movies .4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary). Update . Label . In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm. the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies.Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music Figure1. (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports . . Insert . For example.Update selected item. Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. CSV e RTF). Load lookup definitions . the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. DISPLAY SETTINGS Scriptcase will attribute to the field the options bellow. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. XML .Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup. Separated by .Select No.Remove selected item. Save .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value.Clear the attributes. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. Clear .Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse). Figure5: Display Settings Attributes: . PDF. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . Display original and lookup value . Otherwise.Remove . to display only the Label value . Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF). Height (px) . Vertical Alignment . Background Image . Line Break .Background color (Select from color palette).Apply bold formatting to field title only.Characters limit in the field. Bold Text . Title Horizontal Aligment . Title Horizontal Aligment .Horizontal alignment of the title.Field height.Field Vertical alignment. Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment. Font Color . Width . Number of characters . Attributes: . Font Size .Apply bold formatting to the field.Font Style .Uses Italic font. Italic Text .Field width.Font size. Bold .Field font type.Font color (Select from color palette). Column Chart Interface.Vertical alignment of the title. Column Chart Display an icon on the side of the Field Title to display a chart.Uses line break in the field. Background color .Uses a background image in the field. Column for Label .Column Label.Column group by label.Group by Label . Max. Configurable Chart .Maximum height.Summary function applied: Count. in pixels. Similar to the effect of a group by in a Select. Chart height . Summary Function . Display Values . in percentage between the chart and the space (on top) reserved for captions. Legend height . in pixels.Chart height. Min or Avg. Sum.User configurable Chart parameters.Chart width. .Display Chart Values. Chart width . See below. That is. Image2: Values Format with regional settings.Field title in the display.Define the application field type. could be label Client Name. Do Not Repeat Value . To set one of the attributes accordingly note the definitions below. Attributes: Regional settings . .Apply regional settings time formatting rules to the field. (See Regional settings).Time Image1: General Settings Interface Attributes: Data type .Time fields are formatted according to specific time rules. the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Label .Display the field only once (for records with equal values). When selected (Yes) the option Detail Mask is displayed. Repeating value Without repeating value SQL Type . Otherwise the developer can select the attribute Display .Define the field type in the database. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name. Image3: Values Format without regional settings. Show a list of predefined date display formats. the position 5 and 6 the month and the positions 7 and 8 the day. M and D for Year. Example1: For a date stored as char(8) SQL where the positions 1 to 4 represents the year. Use the characters Y. Detail Mask .Define the grid display format to the field. Month and Day to enter the format. Examples: d-m-Y F/Y j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25-09-2009 September/2009 25/9/2001 14:30:11 PM l.Display . according to the PHP Date function. January 25 2009 h:i:s 11:33:20 #h:i:s 123:43:27 (in hours) Formatting Table j day of the month "1" to "31" d day do month with zero "01" a "31" at left n month "1" a"12" m month with zero at left "01" a"12" M month (written format "Jan" with 3 char) F month (written format "January" complete) y year with 2 digits "09" Y year with 4 digits "2009" D weekday with 3 char "Mon" l weekday (written format "Monday" complete) g hour 12-hours format "1" a "12" G hour 24-hours format "0" a "23" h hour 12-hours format "01" a "12" with zero at left H hour 24-hours format "00" a "23" with zero at left i minutes "00" a "59" s seconds with zero at "00" a "59" left a pre and pos meridian "am" a "pm" A pre and pos meridian "AM" a "PM" #h hours accumulator #i minutes accumulator #s seconds accumulator \ escape Internal Format . define the internal format as: YYYYMMDD . d \d\e F \d\e Y Thursday.Define the field formatting when SQL type is different from Date. Example2: For a date stored as char(6) SQL where the positions 1 to2 represents the month and the positions 3 and 6 the year . . XML . Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface. Delimiter . The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}". Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. PDF. Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes. define the internal format as: MMYYYY Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field. CSV e RTF).Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically. Multiple Options . retrieving the values from a database table. For example. Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF). Before Lookup After Lookup Grid Lookup . Attributes : SQL Select Statement . a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic).Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML.Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value.Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command. The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets. to display only the Select Command return value.Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values. Multiple Values (Delimiter).Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Grid Lookup . Separated by . Multiple Values (Delimiter) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface. Choose connection .Attribute stored in the table.Display original and lookup value . the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by.M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list.Select No. Attributes : Lookup Types .1: Single Value lookup settings. The string values are separated by a defined delimiter. Otherwise. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. For example. . The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list. Figure1. M is displayed Male.Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value . the stored value S. For example. Label .Text displayed in the grid.Select a different connection available in the project. Value . Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution. Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary). Value . Value .Attribute stored in the table. Label . start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books . Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size. Figure1. (First position is always 1). .Figure1. Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label. Label .Text displayed in the grid. in a string to save Gender (a byte) .String start position for the data stored.Text displayed in the grid.2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter).Define the character used to separated string values. For example. Start . Delimiter .3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position).Attribute stored in the table. Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music Figure1. For example.4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary).Movies . (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports .Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books .Text displayed in the grid. In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm. Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies.Size .Data size in bytes in the string. Label . . the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Save .Remove selected item. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value .Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse). . to display only the Label value . XML .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. DISPLAY SETTINGS Scriptcase will attribute to the field the options bellow.Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. PDF. Clear . CSV e RTF). Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF). Remove .Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. Otherwise. Display original and lookup value .Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup.Select No. Separated by . Update .Insert . Load lookup definitions .Update selected item.Clear the attributes. Apply bold formatting to field title only. Font Color . Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment. Line Break . Italic Text . Font Size .Characters limit in the field.Uses Italic font. Width . Title Horizontal Aligment .Vertical alignment of the title. Background color .Uses line break in the field. Background Image .Figure5: Display Settings Attributes: Font Style . Title Horizontal Aligment . Vertical Alignment .Field Vertical alignment. . Bold Text .Field font type.Font size.Font color (Select from color palette).Apply bold formatting to the field. Bold .Field width.Horizontal alignment of the title.Field height.Background color (Select from color palette). Number of characters .Uses a background image in the field. Height (px) . could be label Client Name.Define the application field type.Date And Time Image1: General Settings Interface Attributes: Data type . the label is a field nickname in the application layer.Define the field type in the database. Date and Time fields are formatted according to specific date and time rules. Repeating value Without repeating value SQL Type .Display the field only once (for records with equal values). Label . Attributes: . Image2: Values Format with regional settings. See below. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name. Image3: Values Format without regional settings. That is.Field title in the display. Do Not Repeat Value . Decimal of seconds . (See Regional settings).Define the grid display format to the field. When selected (Yes) the option Detail Mask is displayed. according to the PHP Date function. Detail Mask .Show a list of predefined date display formats. Display . January 25 2009 h:i:s 11:33:20 #h:i:s 123:43:27 (in hours) Formatting Table j day of the month "1" to "31" d day do month with zero "01" a "31" at left n month "1" a"12" m month with zero at left "01" a"12" M month (written format "Jan" with 3 char) F month (written format "January" complete) y year with 2 digits "09" Y year with 4 digits "2009" D weekday with 3 char "Mon" l weekday (written format "Monday" complete) g hour 12-hours format "1" a "12" G hour 24-hours format "0" a "23" h hour 12-hours format "01" a "12" with zero at left H hour 24-hours format "00" a "23" with zero at left i minutes "00" a "59" s seconds with zero at "00" a "59" left a pre and pos meridian "am" a "pm" A pre and pos meridian "AM" a "PM" #h hours accumulator #i minutes accumulator #s seconds accumulator \ escape .Regional settings . d \d\e F \d\e Y Thursday. Examples: d-m-Y F/Y j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25-09-2009 September/2009 25/9/2001 14:30:11 PM l. Otherwise the developer can select the attribute Display.Apply regional settings date and time formatting rules to the field.Number os decimals for seconds. To set one of the attributes accordingly note the definitions below. For example. The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets.Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. XML . M and D for Year.Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command. Attributes : SQL Select Statement . Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes.Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value. define the internal format as: YYYYMMDD Example2: For a date stored as char(6) SQL where the positions 1 to2 represents the month and the positions 3 and 6 the year . Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF). define the internal format as: MMYYYY Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field.Define the field formatting when SQL type is different from Date. PDF. the position 5 and 6 the month and the positions 7 and 8 the day.Internal Format .Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically. Example1: For a date stored as char(8) SQL where the positions 1 to 4 represents the year. Month and Day to enter the format. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary . CSV e RTF). During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value. Before Lookup After Lookup Grid Lookup . The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}". Use the characters Y. Delimiter . retrieving the values from a database table. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface. a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic). Multiple Options . Text displayed in the grid. Figure1.Select a different connection available in the project. Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution. Choose connection . the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by. Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary).Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Multiple Values (Delimiter). The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list. Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface. to display only the Select Command return value. Display original and lookup value . Value .Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value . Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values.Select No. Attributes : Lookup Types .Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Separated by .Attribute stored in the table. M is displayed Male. Multiple Values (Delimiter) . For example. Grid Lookup . Label .Default Value . Otherwise.1: Single Value lookup settings. 3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position).Define the character used to separated string values.2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter). Label . Figure1. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size. For example. the stored value S. Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label. Value .M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list.Attribute stored in the table. start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books .Text displayed in the grid. Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. Label . The string values are separated by a defined delimiter.Text displayed in the grid. Figure1. Delimiter . For example. .Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. in a string to save Gender (a byte) . String start position for the data stored. the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies.Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music .Attribute stored in the table. (First position is always 1). In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm.Movies .Data size in bytes in the string.Value . Start . (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports . Size . Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books . For example. Update . Remove .4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary). Separated by .Select No. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Insert . Load lookup definitions . Otherwise. the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . Clear . DISPLAY SETTINGS Scriptcase will attribute to the field the options bellow.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Label . CSV e RTF).Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse). Save . to display only the Label value . PDF.Remove selected item. . Display original and lookup value . Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF).Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup.Text displayed in the grid.Update selected item.Figure1. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML.Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value.Clear the attributes. XML . Field Vertical alignment.Background color (Select from color palette). Italic Text .Field width. Bold Text .Field font type. Title Horizontal Aligment .Horizontal alignment of the title.Field height.Vertical alignment of the title. Vertical Alignment . Background color . Number of characters . Title Horizontal Aligment . Background Image . Line Break . Height (px) .Font color (Select from color palette). Bold .Characters limit in the field.Uses a background image in the field. Width .Font size.Figure5: Display Settings Attributes: Font Style . Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment.Apply bold formatting to the field. .Uses line break in the field. Column Chart Display an icon on the side of the Field Title to display a chart. Font Color .Apply bold formatting to field title only. Font Size .Uses Italic font. Maximum height. Summary Function . Max. Sum. . Similar to the effect of a group by in a Select.Display Chart Values. Min or Avg. in pixels.Column Label. Display Values .Summary function applied: Count.User configurable Chart parameters. Configurable Chart . in percentage between the chart and the space (on top) reserved for captions.Column Chart Interface. Chart height .Chart height. Legend height .Chart width.Column group by label. in pixels. Attributes: Group by Label . Chart width . Column for Label . Image Border Image Height Image border width in pixels.Image(database) Image (database) Image1: General Settings Interface. Image Width . Using this field the images are retrieved from the database in binary. . . DISPLAY SETTINGS Scriptcase will attribute to the field the options bellow.Define image width (in Percent or Pixels).Define the application field type.Define image height (in Percent or Pixels). Attributes: Data type . Label . For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name. Open in Another Window . SQL Type . the label is a field nickname in the application layer. could be label Client Name.Open another window and displays original image. Maintain Aspect . That is.Maintain the image aspect ratio when resizing it.Define the field type in the database.Field title in the display. Apply bold formatting to field title only. Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment.Horizontal alignment of the title. Height (px) .Uses Italic font. Bold Text .Uses line break in the field. Number of characters . Bold .Field Vertical alignment. Title Horizontal Aligment .Background color (Select from color palette).Figure5: Display Settings Attributes: Font Style . Line Break .Vertical alignment of the title. Background color . Title Horizontal Aligment . Background Image .Field width.Font color (Select from color palette).Field height.Font size. Font Size . Vertical Alignment . Font Color . . Italic Text .Apply bold formatting to the field.Field font type.Characters limit in the field.Uses a background image in the field. Width . the label is a field nickname in the application layer. . Maintain Aspect . in the subdirectory name. Image Cache . could be label Client Name. That is. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name.Image (file Name) Image1:General SettingsInterface Attributes: Data type ? Define the application field type.Define image width (in Percent or Pixels).Field title in the display. The images are saved in a sever directory and the file name in a table field in the database. See Settings).Maintain the image aspect ratio when resizing it.Enter a subdirectory name to save the files (it is added under the directory defined in Images Directory. Image Border Image Height Image border width in pixels. Label .Open another window and displays original image. Open in Another Window .Define the field type in the database. Image Width . DISPLAY SETTINGS Scriptcase will attribute to the field the options bellow.Define image height (in Percent or Pixels). .Time in minutes to keep the image in cache memory. Subfolder . It is possible to use global or local variables. SQL Type . Bold Text .Field width.Uses a background image in the field. Font Size . . Title Horizontal Aligment .Font size.Apply bold formatting to the field.Vertical alignment of the title. Line Break . Background Image .Field font type. Font Color . Background color .Characters limit in the field.Field height.Background color (Select from color palette). Number of characters . Height (px) . Bold . Width .Font color (Select from color palette).Field Vertical alignment. Italic Text . Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment. Vertical Alignment .Figure5: Display Settings Attributes: Font Style .Horizontal alignment of the title.Uses line break in the field. Title Horizontal Aligment .Apply bold formatting to field title only.Uses Italic font. Define the field type in the database. the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Display Icon . For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name. That is. Using this field the files are retrieved from the database in binary.Field title in the display.Define the application field type. could be label Client Name.Define the field to store the document file name (it is database field).Document (database) General SettingsInterface Image1: Attributes: Data type . SQL Type . DISPLAY SETTINGS Scriptcase will attribute to the field the options bellow.Display an icon by the field side identifying the file type. Label . File name . . Field Vertical alignment. . Title Horizontal Aligment . Line Break . Vertical Alignment . Background Image . Italic Text .Field font type. Font Color . Height (px) . Width . Font Size .Vertical alignment of the title. Number of characters . Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment. Title Horizontal Aligment .Uses a background image in the field.Font color (Select from color palette).Field width.Characters limit in the field.Figure5: Display Settings Attributes: Font Style .Field height.Horizontal alignment of the title. Bold .Apply bold formatting to the field.Uses Italic font.Font size.Apply bold formatting to field title only.Background color (Select from color palette). Bold Text . Background color .Uses line break in the field. Document (file Name) Image1:General SettingsInterface Attributes: Data type -Define the application field type. Font Size . Label . Subfolder . DISPLAY SETTINGS Scriptcase will attribute to the field the options bellow.Display an icon by the field side identifying the file type. The file is saved in a server directory and the file name in a table text field.Font size.Define the field type in the database. the label is a field nickname in the application layer. .Enter a subdirectory name to save the files.Field font type. Display Icon .Field title in the display. Figure5: Display Settings Attributes: Font Style . could be label Client Name. That is. SQL Type . For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name. Title Horizontal Aligment . Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment.Vertical alignment of the title.Uses Italic font. Height (px) . Bold . Title Horizontal Aligment . Bold Text .Field height. Background Image .Background color (Select from color palette).Italic Text . Font Color .Apply bold formatting to field title only. Vertical Alignment .Field Vertical alignment.Field width.Characters limit in the field. Line Break .Horizontal alignment of the title.Apply bold formatting to the field.Uses line break in the field. Number of characters .Font color (Select from color palette).Uses a background image in the field. . Background color . Width . See below. Label .Credit Card Number fields are formatted according to specific rules. a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic).Credit Card Number Image1:General SettingsInterface Attributes: Data type .Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically. retrieving the values from a database table.Display the field only once (for records with equal values). .Field title in the display. For example. Do Not Repeat Value . That is. could be label Client Name.Define the field type in the database. the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Repeating value Without repeating value SQL Type . Before Lookup After Lookup Grid Lookup . Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value .Select a different connection available in the project.Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes. CSV e RTF).Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value. the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by. Delimiter . Multiple Options . The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets.Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface.Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command. PDF. Attributes : .Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values. The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}". Grid Lookup .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Display original and lookup value .Select No. Choose connection . Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface. XML . Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Attributes : SQL Select Statement . Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF). to display only the Select Command return value. Separated by . Otherwise. Define the character used to separated string values.2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter).Lookup Types . Value . in a string to save Gender (a byte) . Figure1. Multiple Values (Delimiter). M is displayed Male. The string values are separated by a defined delimiter. Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.Attribute stored in the table. For example. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size. For example. Multiple Values (Delimiter) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list. Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary).Attribute stored in the table. start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: . Delimiter .Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value . For example. Value .1: Single Value lookup settings. Figure1. Label .Text displayed in the grid. The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list. Label . Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution. Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label. the stored value S.Text displayed in the grid. Text displayed in the grid. Size . Figure1.Attribute stored in the table.Movies .String start position for the data stored.Traveling) Attributed Value Lookup Description . Label .Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books . (First position is always 1). Value . (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports . For example.3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position). Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm.Data size in bytes in the string. the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies. Start . CSV e RTF). Display original and lookup value . Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. Otherwise.Select No. Load lookup definitions .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select . Save .Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Clear . Update . PDF. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . Insert . the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Remove .Text displayed in the grid.Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup.Update selected item.Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music Figure1. Separated by .4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary).1 2 4 8 16 Sports Movies Books Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books . Label . Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF).Remove selected item. to display only the Label value .Clear the attributes.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. XML .Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse). Uses line break in the field. Font Size .Uses Italic font.Field height.Field Vertical alignment. Figure5: Display Settings Attributes: Font Style . Height (px) . Background color .Vertical alignment of the title. Line Break . . Font Color . Italic Text .Apply bold formatting to the field.Background color (Select from color palette). Title Horizontal Aligment .Field width. Width .Font color (Select from color palette). Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Vertical Alignment . Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment. Background Image . DISPLAY SETTINGS Scriptcase will attribute to the field the options bellow.Command return value. Title Horizontal Aligment .Uses a background image in the field. Number of characters .Horizontal alignment of the title.Font size. Bold Text .Field font type.Characters limit in the field. Maximum height. Configurable Chart . in pixels.Chart width.Chart height.Bold . Column Chart Display an icon on the side of the Field Title to display a chart. Summary Function . Max. Min or Avg. . Chart width .Summary function applied: Count. in pixels. Similar to the effect of a group by in a Select.Column group by label.Display Chart Values. Sum.Column Label.User configurable Chart parameters. Column Chart Interface.Apply bold formatting to field title only. Legend height . Column for Label . Display Values . Attributes: Group by Label . Chart height . in percentage between the chart and the space (on top) reserved for captions. the label is a field nickname in the application layer. a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic). For example. Label . Before Lookup After Lookup Grid Lookup .E-mail General SettingsInterface Image1: Attributes: Data type ? Define the application field type. Do Not Repeat Value . could be label Client Name. Repeating value Without repeating value SQL Type .Display the field only once (for records with equal values).Email fields are formatted according to specific email rules.Define the field type in the database. Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field. retrieving the values from a database table. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name.Field title in the display. See below. That is. .Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically. Select a different connection available in the project. to display only the Select Command return value. The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}". PDF. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Multiple Options . XML . Delimiter . Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF). The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface.Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value.Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface. Display original and lookup value .Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Attributes : . the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by. Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes.Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values.Select No. Choose connection . Attributes : SQL Select Statement .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. CSV e RTF).Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. Otherwise. Grid Lookup . During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value. Separated by . the stored value S. M is displayed Male.2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter).Lookup Types . Multiple Values (Delimiter) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. Multiple Values (Delimiter). Value . Delimiter . Figure1. The string values are separated by a defined delimiter. Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. For example. Label .Text displayed in the grid.Define the character used to separated string values. Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary). Value . Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution.Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value .1: Single Value lookup settings. The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size.Text displayed in the grid. Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label. For example. Figure1. Label . start position in the string and size in . For example. in a string to save Gender (a byte) .Attribute stored in the table.Attribute stored in the table.M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list. bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books . (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports . In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm. Value . For example.Attribute stored in the table.String start position for the data stored.3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position). Start .Text displayed in the grid. Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. (First position is always 1). Size .Movies . the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies.Traveling) Attributed Lookup . Figure1. Label .Data size in bytes in the string. CSV e RTF).Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Otherwise.Clear the attributes.4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary). Remove .Update selected item.Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music Figure1.Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse). Save . Label . Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML.Value 1 2 4 8 16 Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books . . Insert . PDF. to display only the Label value .Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup. XML . Update .Remove selected item.Text displayed in the grid. Display original and lookup value .Select No. the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF). Clear .Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . Load lookup definitions . Height (px) .Horizontal alignment of the title.Field width. Title Horizontal Aligment .Field Vertical alignment.Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Background color . DISPLAY SETTINGS Scriptcase will attribute to the field the options bellow. Italic Text .Apply bold formatting to the field. Width .Uses a background image in the field.Uses Italic font. Bold Text . Font Size . Vertical Alignment .Background color (Select from color palette).Field height.Font size.Font color (Select from color palette).Separated by . Background Image . Number of characters . Figure5: Display Settings Attributes: Font Style . Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.Characters limit in the field.Uses line break in the field. Font Color .Field font type. . Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment. Line Break . Chart width. Column for Label . Configurable Chart . Bold .Column group by label. Chart width . Sum.Summary function applied: Count. Chart height . Min or Avg. Legend height . in pixels. Column Chart Display an icon on the side of the Field Title to display a chart. Column Chart Interface.Vertical alignment of the title. Display Values .Column Label.User configurable Chart parameters.Chart height. Attributes: Group by Label . in percentage between the chart and the space (on top) reserved for captions.Maximum height.Display Chart Values. in pixels.Apply bold formatting to field title only. . Max. Similar to the effect of a group by in a Select.Title Horizontal Aligment . Summary Function . Field title in the display. Repeating value Without repeating value Other Page .Open the link in another page. . Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field. Label .Define the field type in the database.Url Image1: General SettingsInterface Attributes: Data type . retrieving the values from a database table.Define the application field type. a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic). See below.Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically. That is. For example. Do Not Repeat Value .Display the field only once (for records with equal values). could be label Client Name. SQL Type . For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name.URL fields are formatted according to specific URL rules. Before Lookup After Lookup Grid Lookup . the label is a field nickname in the application layer. During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value. XML . Multiple Options . The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}".Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF). PDF. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value .Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command.Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface.Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value. Attributes : SQL Select Statement . the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by. Grid Lookup . Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface. Choose connection .Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. Delimiter . Otherwise. Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes. CSV e RTF). Display original and lookup value . The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets. to display only the Select Command return value. Separated by .Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value.Select No. .Select a different connection available in the project. Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary). in a string to save Gender (a byte) .Text displayed in the grid. Figure1. For example.Attribute stored in the table. Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution. The string values are separated by a defined delimiter. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size. Label . Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list. Label .Attributes : Lookup Types .M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list. Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby . For example.Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value . M is displayed Male.Attribute stored in the table.Text displayed in the grid.Define the character used to separated string values.2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter).1: Single Value lookup settings. Value . For example. Delimiter . Figure1. Multiple Values (Delimiter) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. the stored value S. Value . Multiple Values (Delimiter). Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm. Start .Movies . Value . Size .Traveling) . (First position is always 1).3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position).String start position for the data stored.Text displayed in the grid. Figure1. (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports . For example.Attribute stored in the table. Label . start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books .Data size in bytes in the string.(two bytes) the information stored includes label. the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies. Clear the attributes.4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary). Display original and lookup value .Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music Figure1. Remove . Label .Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value.Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse). Update . .Select No. Clear . PDF. Save . CSV e RTF). Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . Load lookup definitions . Insert . to display only the Label value .Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value.Update selected item. XML . Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF).Remove selected item.Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books .Text displayed in the grid. Otherwise.Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup. Bold Text . Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Height (px) .Field font type.Apply bold formatting to the field. Font Color .Characters limit in the field. Italic Text . Background Image . Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment. Width . Title Horizontal Aligment .Font size. Figure5: Display Settings Attributes: Font Style .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Background color .Separated by . DISPLAY SETTINGS Scriptcase will attribute to the field the options bellow.Uses line break in the field.Field height.Uses a background image in the field.Field width.Horizontal alignment of the title. Font Size .Background color (Select from color palette). Vertical Alignment .Uses Italic font. Number of characters . .Field Vertical alignment. Line Break .Font color (Select from color palette). Min or Avg.Column group by label. Max. Column Chart Display an icon on the side of the Field Title to display a chart. Chart height . Bold . Column for Label .Maximum height. Similar to the effect of a group by in a Select. Legend height .Column Label. Summary Function . . Attributes: Group by Label . Chart width .Chart width. in percentage between the chart and the space (on top) reserved for captions. Display Values .Chart height. Column Chart Interface.User configurable Chart parameters. Sum.Summary function applied: Count. in pixels. in pixels.Apply bold formatting to field title only.Display Chart Values.Title Horizontal Aligment .Vertical alignment of the title. Configurable Chart . Database Field type.Field title. Text .Bar Code General Settings Atributtes: Data Type . SQL Type . Label . which are listed below: .Field data type.Text to designate the barcode.Type of barcode. There are 18 types of barcode. Barcode Attributes: Type . Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. .DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Background color . Title CSS Attributes: Font . Font Size . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Font Color . bottom.Sets the title width. center or justify). right. Border Size .Sets the field height. Underlined . sub. sub. Background color .Bold . text-top.Used to increase the border size of the title.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Vertical Alignment . Font Color . middle. top. Border Size . super. Vertical Alignment . . Width . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . super.Used to apply bold type to the font. top. Underlined . Border color . bottom. text-bottom). Field CSS Attributes: Font . Horizontal Alignment .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Background color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Font Color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Font Size . text-bottom). Font Size . Width . text-top. Bold .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the field width.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. center or justify).Sets the title height.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Height . Height . right. HorizontalAlignment .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. middle.Used to apply bold type to the font. Bold .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. text-top. Hint .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Create on-line instructions.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. text-bottom).Underlined . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. . Height . super. Vertical Alignment . Help Type: Pop-up . right. Border Size .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Attributes: Tooltip . Width .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Help Settings Document the application.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Used to increase the border size of the object. top.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Sets the object width. center or justify). bottom.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Horizontal Alignment . sub. Border color .Sets the object height. middle. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. .Display the specified help text beside the field.Text . Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". modal or new window. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". Height . Label .Video width in pixels.Application field type.Field label in the application.Database Field type.Youtube General settings Attributes Data Type . Width . Display Mode . Disable Field .Video height in pixels. . Link Text . Link Type . SQL Type .Text of the link. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.The way the video is displayed.Type of the link: button or text. Bold . right. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Bold . middle.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. bottom. Underlined . Font Color . Underlined .Sets the title height. center or justify).Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. . Font Color . Font Size .Used to increase the border size of the title.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Background color . sub. Background color . Font Size . Border Size . top. text-top.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Border color .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the title width.Used to apply bold type to the font. Horizontal Alignment . Width .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. text-bottom). Vertical Alignment . Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. super. Height . Width . Horizontal Alignment .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. bottom. center or justify). top. text-top. Border color . Create on-line instructions. Border color . Font Color .Sets the object height. text-top. Attributes: Tooltip .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. right. Border Size . bottom. top. Help Settings Document the application.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Width . super. text-bottom). middle. sub. Height . Vertical Alignment . Vertical Alignment . Font Size . middle.Sets the field height.Used to apply bold type to the font. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Sets the object width.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. center or justify). describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Background color . HorizontalAlignment . .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Height . Underlined . Bold .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Sets the field width. text-bottom). Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . sub.Border Size . super.Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to increase the border size of the object. right.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Help Type: Pop-up . Hint . .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. Height .Defines the width of the map. you can just get a key for local testing. Label . and that's specified as http://localhost in the field during registration.Google Maps This feature allows you to display maps using the Google API. Display Mode . This can be a text link or a button link. When you register to use the service. Width . For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table and is displayed as Client Name. the key is tied to a domain and a directory on the server. Home .com/intl/en/apis/maps/signup. If you have a web server on your machine. .html Link Type . To get your API Key just visit the following site: http://code. API Key.Define the link type.Define the method for passing parameters to the Google API. Note: The API Key is a unique key composed of an alphanumeric string (text).Defines the height of the map.Select Google maps as the data type.You need to enter your Authorization Key to view maps using Google API.Defines how the map will be opened. Zoom . which is nothing more than the license to use this service.google. Data Type: .Defines the initial zoom factor (available on the Google API) for the map. It can either be opened in Modal window or in a New window. All pages (ScriptCase applications) that are using the API must be located in the directory that was specified when registering for the Google Maps API.Field title in application. Font Size . Background color .Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode".Used to increase the border size of the title. Border Size .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Text Link .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Specify the text for the link to the map. Bold .Used to apply bold type to the font. Title CSS Attributes: Font . Disable Field . SQL Type . Underlined .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Font Color .Displays the SQL (database) field type. Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Sets the title height. bottom.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to apply bold type to the font. top.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Vertical Alignment . Background color . top.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Bold . Underlined .Used to increase the border size of the field.Sets the field width.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Background color . right.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. super. Horizontal Alignment . text-bottom). bottom. text-top. Height . super. Font Size .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Font Color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Width .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. sub. Height . Border Size . center or justify). Border color .Border color . right. Vertical Alignment .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Field CSS Attributes: Font . middle. Font Size . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . center or justify). text-top.Sets the field height. Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. sub.Used to increase the border size of the object. Width .Sets the title width. HorizontalAlignment .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. middle. Border Size . Bold .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Underlined . right. text-bottom). center . Font Color . Border color .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. bottom. Hint . Attributes: Tooltip . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Height . text-top. .Sets the object height. top.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Help Settings Document the application. middle. super. text-bottom). Create on-line instructions. sub. Vertical Alignment .Sets the object width.or justify).Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Width . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Display the specified help text beside the field. .Text . .Field title.Database Field type.Qr Code General Settings Atributtes: Data Type . Image Size .Field data type. SQL Type . Margin .Codewords are 8 bits long and use the Reed?Solomon error correction algorithm with four error correction levels. the less storage capacity. The higher the error correction level. Label . Values Format Atributtes: Level of error correction .Size of the QR code.Margin of the QR code image. Font Size . Horizontal Alignment .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Border color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Border Size .Used to increase the border size of the title.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Underlined .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color . right. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Title CSS Attributes: Font . center or justify). Font Color .Used to apply bold type to the font. . Bold . . Border color . Horizontal Alignment . top.Sets the title height. middle. super. Font Color . super. Underlined .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. text-top.Used to increase the border size of the object. bottom.Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. sub.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. bottom. Border Size . text-top. Border Size . Font Color . text-top.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. center or justify). top.Used to increase the border size of the field. Background color . top. middle.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Bold . Bold .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. right. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Vertical Alignment .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Height .Sets the field height. text-bottom). right. sub. Font Size . Font Size .Sets the title width. Border color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. middle. Background color . sub. Vertical Alignment .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Sets the field width.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. text-bottom).Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Underlined .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . super. text-bottom).Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. bottom. Vertical Alignment . HorizontalAlignment . Width . Width .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. center or justify). Height . Sets the object height. .Sets the object width. Height .Width . Start Date .Field containing the name of the resource allocated to the task in the Gantt chart. End Date . Percent Completed .Field containing the end date of registration in the Gantt chart.Field containing information regarding the percent completed of the task in the Gantt chart Resource .Field containing the start date of the registration in the Gantt chart.Field containing the record label of the Gantt chart.Gantt The Gantt chart is used to illustrate the progress of the different stages of a project. . Field label . Gantt Chart options: Output Format .Output format of the Gantt chart. amongst other options.Layout Layout Configure display formats by determining attributes such as display schemes. organizing fields in blocks. and defining header formats. . To change the page block is displayed in. and to delete the block. Control or Grid fields are located. all you have to do is drag it to the desired page as indicated below. Organising Blocks and Changing position See below how to modify the page block display order. Click to select the block in order to modify its position. used to define the position of the next block (positioned to the side or below in the series of blocks).Blocks Conceptually a block is a “container” in which a Form Application. . The Figure bellow shows an ORGANIZATION column. This is how to remove a block from being displayed. You can add as many blocks as you need and you can organize them to best suit your purpose. To the left of each block there are two icons: to edit the block properties. Click on the block and drag it to “Blocks not shown”. By default the applications created in ScriptCase only consist of one block. bearing the same name as the application. Figure 1: Block settings interface. Title (Display) . Fields (Columns) .Number of columns to be displayed side by side within the block. . Fields (Position) .Attributes: Block (name) .The fields are displayed below each other while observing the number of columns.Position of fields within the block: “Below” .Displays the label beside the field.Displays the label below the field. "Line" . Label (Position) .Displays the label above the field. "Beside" .Flag that controls whether the block title is displayed.The label options are: "Above" .Block title header displayed.Flag that controls whether the field label is displayed inside the block.The fields are displayed beside one another while observing the number of columns.The fields are displayed side by side (in line) without tabulation (aligned in columns). "Beside" . Label (Display) . "Below" . "Beside" .Indicates that the next block is displayed as a tab.Indicates that the next block is displayed below the previous one. . "Tabs" . just click . Organization (Height).Defines the height of the block in pixels or as a percent.Defines the width of the block in pixels or as a percent. Add New Block To add new blocks to an application.Organization (Next) .Indicates that the next block is displayed beside the previous one.Organization of blocks on the page: "Below" . Organization (Width) . Block title font size applied. Title . Edit Block Click to edit the block properties and click Save.Block title background image. Attributes: Name . Font size . Font color . Background color .Block Title. Figure 2: Edit Block interface.Block title font color. Background image . . Label .Block name.Figure 2: Add New Block interface.Block name.Block label.Block title line background color.Block title font applied. Display Title . Attributes: Name .Whether to display a line containing the block title.Block title line height (in pixels). Title Font . Title Height . Columns . Center or Right).Field label display color.Block title vertical alignment (Top.Position of the next block in relation to the current one. Label Position . Middle or Bottom).Spacing between the block cells.Block border color. . Block height .Field label position. Label color .Calculate the block columns.Block height.Block border width.Display block field labels. Vertical Alignment . Border width .Block title horizontal alignment (Left. Next Block . Display Label . Field Organization . Cellspacing .Block field organization.Number of block field columns.Horizontal Alignment . Block width .Block width. Border color . Column Width . . fonts. (CSS) Attributes: Header Template .Used to select the Header format. Footer Template .Used to select the Footer format. etc) for the application.Settings Figure 1: Layout Settings interface Is used to define the Application Theme.Used to select an existing Theme (colors. Theme . the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the header line. click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples. and another one for Update mode). There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time.Header Figure 1: Header Interface. Date: Displays the system date in the header line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. Title: Displays the value entered in “Select Title” in the header . Search Criteria . To locate existing images and select one. To see all the available date formats. click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon . Header Variables . you may need to associate content with it. Each condition is displayed on a new line. A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the application's data source (“Select” query) are displayed beside the header variable when the “Field” type is selected. Depending on the type. The selected field value is then displayed in the header line. Enter the format in the text field alongside it. Display Header . Value: When the “Value” type is selected. This interface format can change depending on the selected option in "Layout >> Settings >> Header Template".The variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combobox. Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”.Defines the Header title to be displayed in the application. (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) . Enter text and/or “Global Variables”.This flag determines whether or not the Header is displayed Application Title . (A Form Applications has 2 titles: one for Insert mode. See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox.The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the header. (available only in Grid applications) FOOTER .The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header. For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”. The selected field value is displayed in the footer line. Enter the format in the text field alongside it. A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the “Select” (application's data source) are displayed beside the Footer variable when the “Field” type is selected.The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header. the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the footer line. See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. Footer Variables . (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) . Each condition is displayed on a new line. Value: When the “Value” type is selected. click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon . This format of this interface may change depending on the option selected in "Layout >> Settings >> Footer Template".This flag determines whether or not the footer will be displayed. (available only in Grid applications) . To locate existing images and select one.Figure 2: Footer Interface. Enter text and/or “Global Variables”.The variable fields can be populated with any of the types listed in the Combobox.The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the footer. Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. Display Footer . you may need to associate content with it. click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples. Date: Displays the system date in the footer line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. Title: Display in the Footer the value entered in “Select Title”. Depending on the type. to see all the available date formats. Search Criteria . . In this scope. After a record is inserted. Events allow the developer to define custom actions at a specific execution time (e. normally.This event is executed immediately before displaying the grid header. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros".sc_select_where(add) and etc. OnInit. Use this event to print some calculated value in the header for example. upon submitting a form. onHeader.This event is executed before displaying each grid record.. before the main select of the application execution. Write in this event the necessary calculation to display the result in the footer. onFooter-Used to display some calculated value. as these: sc_select_field. when it is loaded. sc_select_order.) and for a specific type of application.g. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase.This event is executed just one time. Read more about Scriptcase Macros.Events Events Scriptcase uses the concept of events to enable to developer to customize application code. onRecord.. . are executed the macros that update the select. . For valid users it returns the name. onBlur . onFocus .This events fires when the field is clicked. Figure 1: AJAX event interface. onChange .This event fires when the field has focus and the field value is changed and the focus is then directed to another object. Passing parameters is optional.This events fires when the field has focus. Example: 1 .Select the field and the event used by the AJAX process.This events fires when the field has focus. the field value is NOT changed and the focus is directed to another object. For invalid users a message is displayed. It allows individual data components on a page to be updated without the need to refresh the entire page. (in PHP code). The following events are available in ScriptCase. See the example below: The user field is validated against a database (table). onClick . Only the onClick event is available to Grid applications.Ajax Events Using AJAX reduces the amount of unnecessary data traffic with the server thereby speeding up application processing. Figure 2: Selecting fields and events for AJAX processing. 2 -Enter the PHP business rule in the PHP editor. The code is processed by the Server and the XML result is sent to the browser.Use it to type in your PHP code. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". 3. 1. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase.ScriptCase provides you with a number of predefined blocks of code that can be inserted into the PHP editor and then amended accordingly. PHP editor . Insert Code . Read more about Scriptcase Macros. Figure 3: Programming PHP with AJAX.Use this to create parameters retrieving field values. 2. . Parameters (Fields) . Deleting a button To delete a button click the Delete icon in the right of the button name at the application menu under the Buttons option. Figure 1: Create new button. New Button To create a new button. click on the New Button option and enter a name and the type of the button. Link). Image2: Edit button function. Buttons Types : (Javascript. PHP. .Buttons Buttons There is the option to create buttons that will be visible in the Toolbar. Image2: Edit button function. There are three types of display buttons: (Button. Figure 1: Create new button. To create a new button.Defines the button title to be displayed in the application. Image and Link). Button or Image. . enter the name and select the type of button. click on "New button". Display mode . You can set it as a Link.Javascript Button Creating a Javascript Type Button There is the option to create buttons that will be visible in the Toolbar. Button Display Mode Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. Label .Defines the button will be displayed. Display mode .Button display icon.Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. Hint .Hint . created in the buttons schema editor. Button or Image.Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. CSS Style . leave this field blank. Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. Icon . Figure 1: Buttons Settings Interface. . Confirmation Message .Defines the button will be displayed. Confirmation Message . Image Button Display Mode Figure 1: Button Settings Interface.Defines a hint message. You can set it as a Link. To not display a message.Defines a hint message. To not display a message. leave this field blank.CSS style class name. Defines the button title displayed in the application.Defines the button will be displayed.CSS style class name. CSS Style . Label . leave this field blank. Confirmation Message .Defines a hint message.Link Button Display Mode Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. Deleting a button To delete a button click the Delete icon in the right of the button name at the application menu under the Buttons option. To not display a message. . You can set it as a Link. Button or Image. Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. Display mode . Hint . created in the buttons schema editor.Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. Defines the button will be displayed. Button or Image. Label . .Defines the button title to be displayed in the application. enter the name and select the type of button. There are three types of display buttons: (Button. You can set it as a Link. click on "New button". Display mode . Image and Link). Button Display Mode Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. Figure 1: Create new button.Php Button Creating a Php Type Button There is the option to create buttons that will be visible in the Toolbar. Image2: Edit button function. To create a new button. You can set it as a Link. Icon . Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. Image Button Display Mode Figure 1: Button Settings Interface.Defines the button will be displayed. Confirmation Message . Confirmation Message . leave this field blank.Defines a hint message. leave this field blank. created in the buttons schema editor.CSS style class name. .Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. Figure 1: Buttons Settings Interface. Button or Image. CSS Style . To not display a message. To not display a message. Hint .Defines a hint message.Hint .Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. Display mode .Button display icon. Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box.Defines the button will be displayed.CSS style class name. Confirmation Message . CSS Style . Label .Link Button Display Mode Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. Hint . You can set it as a Link. Display mode . created in the buttons schema editor.Defines a hint message. There is the option to create buttons that will be visible in the Toolbar.Defines the button title displayed in the application. leave this field blank. Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. To not display a message. . Button or Image. Figure 1: Create new button. . There are three types of display buttons: (Button. Button Display Mode Figure 1: Button Settings Interface.Defines the button title to be displayed in the application. Figure 1: Create new button. Image and Link). enter the name and select the type of button. Label . To create a new button. . Button or Image.Link Button Creating a Link type button There is the option to create buttons that will be visible in the Toolbar. Image2: Edit button function. Display mode . You can set it as a Link. click on "New button".Defines the button will be displayed. Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. leave this field blank. created in the buttons schema editor. Display mode .CSS style class name. Figure 1: Buttons Settings Interface. Hint . Confirmation Message . To not display a message.Defines a hint message. Figure 1: Button Settings Interface.Button display icon. Confirmation Message . You can set it as a Link. Image Button Display Mode Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. leave this field blank.Defines a hint message. To not display a message. Button or Image.Defines the button will be displayed.Hint .Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. . Icon . CSS Style . Defines a hint message. Button or Image. CSS Style . leave this field blank. Display mode .Defines the button will be displayed. In the application menu (on the left side of the window) there is an option to create new links. Confirmation Message .Using the link option click in new link. as in the image below. Label . . Follow the steps below to create the link required and configure the new Link button to complete the operation. The link button requires a link associated to it.CSS style class name. You can set it as a Link. To not display a message.Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. Hint .Defines the button title displayed in the application.Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. created in the buttons schema editor. Creating a new Link 1 . Iframe display.Select the link type Buttons and click in next (as Image below).Field. Image4: List of Applications Interface.Define the form link properties .Enter a fixed content to be passed. 3 . 4 . Fixed .Image2:Create new Link. Image6: Parameters Definition Interface . Variable .Enter a global variable existing in the application. Empty .Define the parameters passed. Image3: Link Type Interface.Enter the field used to pass the content. 2 . Image5: Parameters Definition Interface . Image5: Parameters Definition Interface . Value or Empty. It can be of three types: Field. Field .No value will be pass. Image7: Parameters Definition Interface .Field. . 5 .Value. Variable.Empty.Select the application that will be called and click in Next. Web address accessed when the user exit the grid. Link Hint . Below the search an Iframe is created to display the form. Figure 1: Create new button. Form Properties . Exit URL for the target application .Image8: Link/Form Properties Interface.How the link is displayed Open in the same window.Message shown when the mouse is over the selected link field.Open another window to show the form. Open in other window. Open in a Iframe. . Link Operation Mode . exiting the search and going to the form.Select the buttons displayed.Show the form in the same window that the search.Show the form in the same browser window. There is the option to create buttons that will be visible in the Toolbar. There is the option to create buttons that will be visible in the Toolbar. Image and Link). Edit Button: Display Mode (Button) . click on "New button". enter the name and select the type of button. Figure 1: Create new button. Image1: Button Configuration Interface.Run Button Creating a run type button This new option in the Grid allows to create a button to process a PHP code for selected records (checkbox). There are three types of display buttons: (Button. To create a new button. Image2: Edit button function. Label . Css Style . leave the field empty. Hint .Button Title in the application.Display mode of the button in the toolbar (Button). (Layout buttons) Image1: Buttons Settings Interface. Display mode . . Confirmation Message .CSS style class name. created in the schema editor buttons.To not display the message.Image1: Buttons Settings Interface.Display mode of the button in the toolbar (Link).Hint message. Edit Button: Display Mode (Image) Image1: Buttons Settings Interface. Display mode . Image1: Buttons Settings Interface.To not display the message.Hint message.Button Title in the application. Label .Hint message. leave the field empty. Confirmation Message .Button display icon. Css Style . Hint . Edit Button: Display Mode (Link) Image1: Buttons Settings Interface.Display mode of the button in the toolbar (Link). Confirmation Message . Display mode . leave the field empty.To not display the message. (Layout buttons) .Icon . created in the schema editor buttons. Hint .CSS style class name. OnRecord: Executed on each selected record. This button Type Uses 2 events to process PHP Codes. . OnFinish: Executed after process all selected records. Figure 1: Create new button. Image3:PHP Code Interface There is the option to create buttons that will be visible in the Toolbar.Image1: Buttons Settings Interface. Image2: PHP Code Interface. Detail About The detail is an interesting grid feature. go to the Grid Settings. Click on displayed at each grid line to enable the feature. and enable the checkbox: . It allows to organize the information displayed according to its importance. as shown below. Display more important information in the grid and complementary data in detail form. To enable the details. In another page .Display detail in popup window. in the same window that displays the grid.Define detail alignment configuration of each field (left.Define the grid detail page HTML width. Alignment . . Attributes Choose the fields to display in detail page .Define display detail according to following options: Beside the Grid . Display Detail .Display selected record detail.Display detail at the right side of the record. Detail Keys Define the fields that will be a part of the where clause to search selected record. right. Detail's page width .Click field and click in On/Off to select (or unselect) fields.Display just the detail for the selected record hiding the grid. Measure unit of the detail . below the record at same window (use the detail button to select the record detail). Below the Grid .Detail Settings Select the fields to display in detail page. Image1:Detail Settings. In another window . center).Define grid detail page HTML width unit as percent or pixel. All .Image2: Detail Keys. None .Configure the fields to be passed by the WHERE clause: Turn On/Off . .Select all fields. Choose detail field keys to display .Select field to display in the detail. An asterisk is displayed by the selected field .Uncheck all fields. Exit Quit the application. The ScriptCase can generate: PrintCreate the grid in HTML format.Toolbar The application toolbar is divided in two parts: superior and inferior. Buttons Settings Image2: Buttons Settings. A button can even be part of both parts simultaneously. PDF Create a complete report. Image1: Toolbar. having all grid data in PDF format. Separator Separator Image used to separate the buttons group.Define the formats that must be generated. Exports . Attributes: Navigation . .Display navigation checkboxes that can be displayed in the grid. It is possible to select the buttons for each part independently. Date: Displays the system date in the header line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples. Image: Enter an image name saved on the server.The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header.The variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combobox. There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time.Defines the Header title to be displayed in the application. A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the application's data source (“Select” query) are displayed beside the header variable when the “Field” type is selected. For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”. To see all the available date formats.This flag determines whether or not the Header is displayed Application Title . Display Header . and another one for Update mode). Enter text and/or “Global Variables”. The selected field value is then displayed in the header line.Header Figure 1: Header Interface. Search Criteria . (A Form Applications has 2 titles: one for Insert mode. Title: Displays the value entered in “Select Title” in the header . the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the header line. you may need to associate content with it. (available only in Grid applications) FOOTER . Each condition is displayed on a new line. click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon . To locate existing images and select one. See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) .The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the header. This interface format can change depending on the selected option in "Layout >> Settings >> Header Template". Enter the format in the text field alongside it. Value: When the “Value” type is selected. Header Variables . Depending on the type. Search Criteria . Date: Displays the system date in the footer line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy.Figure 2: Footer Interface. (available only in Grid applications) . Title: Display in the Footer the value entered in “Select Title”. There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”. Value: When the “Value” type is selected.The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the footer. To locate existing images and select one. The selected field value is displayed in the footer line.The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header. to see all the available date formats. A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the “Select” (application's data source) are displayed beside the Footer variable when the “Field” type is selected. Display Footer . See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples.This flag determines whether or not the footer will be displayed.The variable fields can be populated with any of the types listed in the Combobox. This format of this interface may change depending on the option selected in "Layout >> Settings >> Footer Template". the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the footer line. Footer Variables . Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) . you may need to associate content with it. Each condition is displayed on a new line. Enter the format in the text field alongside it. Depending on the type. Enter text and/or “Global Variables”. click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon . Keep Group By Order . Before the records . . Group By Header .Select the breaking position: Before and after the records.It shows the Group By Title after its records.Turn on/off the group by.Group By Group By Settings Define the Group By criteria.Order the fields in group.Define a separator between the title and the value of a field in the breaking. Record Count . After the records . Group By Line . Attributes: Enable Treeview . Value Separator .Define a column title for the amount of registers.Display break header in all pages.It defines the left margin of the Group By.It defines the margin from a Grouping to the next one. Separates the Group By .Display fields label on the breaking line. The fields that will be grouped and the sequence the field breaks should occurs.It shows the Group By Title before its records. Display Titles . Image 1: Group by Interface. Tab a Group By . Group By Sorting It defines the selection sorting of the Group By rules created. . Image 2: Group by Rules Sorting. Group By Rules The Group By rules is where we can select the fields to Grouping the records. Label . . Image 1: Interface of Group By rules. Example: Image 2: Group By Rule settings.It is the rule name that will be displayed to the end-user. It is possible to create several Group By rules allowing the end-user to select what rule he wants and change the Group By dinamically in the application.There you can check/uncheck one or more fields to create the Group By and define the level of each Group By field. attributes: Name . Fields .Each rule must have a name to identify it. Image 4: Selecting the Group By Rule. .Image 3: Button to select a Group By Rule in a generated application. Image 5: Results of a Group By Rule selected. . of the breaking which has been processed. the special variables of totalization. The ScriptCase have all totalization variables of the grid scope.contains the total sum of the field “balance”.contains the total sum of the field “parcel” of the breaking of “city” which has been processed.contains the total sum of the field “parcel”. in the scope of ”calculate for each register”. {sum_state_parcel} .contains the total sum of the field “parcel”. {count_breaking} . {sum_city_parcel} . {sum_parcel} .contains the total sum of the field “balance” of the breaking of “city” which has been processed.contains the total amout of the registers of the breaking of “state” which has been processed.contains the total amount of the registers.contains the total amout of registers.contains the total amout of registers of the breaking of “city” which has been processed. {count_state} . {sum_balance} .This event is always performed when breakings occurs.contains the total sum of the field “parcel” of the breaking which has been processed. Considering that the formulas defined to be processed in the scope of “calculate during the breakings” will be acting for the some levels of breaking. {count_city} . {sum_breaking_balance} . {sum_city_balance} . independently of the level. we can have access to the totals. Guessing that an application which have two levels of breakings (state and city) and which totalize two fields (parcel and balance). {sum_parcel} .contains the total amount of registers.contains the total sum of the field “parcel” of the field of “state” which has bem processed.contains the total sum of the field “balance” of the field of “state” which has bem processed. {sum_breaking_parcel} . they are mentioned substituting the breaking name by the key word “breaking” that means: {count_ger} . in the following way: {count_ger} .Events OnGroupBy .contains the total sum of the field “balance” of the breaking which has been . {sum_balance} . {sum_state_balance} .contains the total sum of the field “balance”. in this scope. and allow the manipulation of the totalization fields. Ex: In an application which has breakings by state and city and which totalizes a field balance in the breakings total.processed. . It creates a method in the event OnGroupBy with the following content: {sum_breaking_balance}= {sum_breaking_balance} / {count_breaking}. we wish to show the average in substitution to the balance. 5678 SQL Type .xxxx (zz) xxxx . Z Replaced by any character retrieved from database.xxxx (zz) xxxx . the field value is completed with zeros (Filling full size field entry is required). Examples: Mask (xx) xxxx .Define the application field type.7890 ( ) 1234 .xxxx Field Value 1234567890 12345678 1234567890 12345678 0012345678 Formatted Value (12) 3456 . Label . If number of characters entered are less then the mask size. could be label Client Name.5678 (12) 3456 . Replaced by any character. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name.Define the field display mask.Fields Data Type .xxxx (xx) xxxx .Converts the field text depending on the option: Grid Mask . the label is a field nickname in the application layer.xxxx (zz) xxxx . CharacterDescription X Placeholder to any character.Field title in the display. Case Settings .5678 ( ) 1234 . Before Lookup After Lookup . That is. For example.7890 (00) 1234 . When used combined with the mask character X it should be placed at the mask left. Suppress zeros at field left (Complete field filling is optional). Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field. a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic). See below the characters used to define the mask.Define the field type in the database. During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value.Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by. Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF).Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value. Separated by . Attributes : SQL Select Statement . XML . CSV e RTF).Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command.Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically.Select No.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets. retrieving the values from a database table. PDF.Grid Lookup . The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}". Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML.Select a different connection available in the project. Display original and lookup value . .Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . Otherwise. Grid Lookup . to display only the Select Command return value. Choose connection . Delimiter .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes. Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Multiple Options . The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list.1: Single Value lookup settings. Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary). Value . . The string values are separated by a defined delimiter. Delimiter . Multiple Values (Delimiter) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.Define the character used to separated string values.Text displayed in the grid. Label . Figure1.2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter). For example. Label .M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list. Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution. For example.Text displayed in the grid. Value . Multiple Values (Delimiter).Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value . M is displayed Male. Figure1. the stored value S.Attribute stored in the table.Attribute stored in the table.Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface. Attributes : Lookup Types . Start . in a string to save Gender (a byte) . Figure1.Data size in bytes in the string. Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label. Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position). Label . For example. (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling . For example. start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books . Value .Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.Attribute stored in the table.Text displayed in the grid. Size . (First position is always 1).String start position for the data stored. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size. the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies. In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm. Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music Figure1. Clear . Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. Load lookup definitions .Remove selected item. Label . Insert . PDF.Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup.Text displayed in the grid.Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse). Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary . CSV e RTF).16 Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports .Update selected item. XML .4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary). Update .Movies . Save .Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books . Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF).Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Remove .Clear the attributes. Summary line (grid) .Define the text message displayed in the total line.Define how many columns are used to display the break down info. Ex.Display the field label on break down.Default Value .Select No. to display only the Label value .Display break down line. . Otherwise. Group By Settings Image1: Group By Fields Interface. Display original and lookup value . Attributes: Fields Position .Define the group by fields display organization.Display each grid break in a separate PDF page.: Display each state orders in a different report page.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value.Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Columns .Display summary line in the grid. PDF Grid Break Pages . Total line (summary) . Ex. Display Label.: Orders total in the state.Display the amount of records displayed in the break down.Display line total in the summary. Records amount . the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Total line message . Separated by . Line break . Group by line layout (Label) Image2:Group by line layout (Label) Interface. HTML Grid Break Pages .TreeView initial state.Breaking background color.Allow to define the font size used on the breaking label. Attributes: Text Font . Attributes: Text font .Display each summary break in a separate HTML page.Allow to define the font size used on the breaking label. Fields .Select the fields (VALUE and SUM) displayed in the group by line. Group by line layout (Value) Image3: Group by line layout(Value) Interface. Bold text . Background Color . Font Size . Bold Text .Display each summary break in a separate PDF page. Start TreeView .Label color on the breaking.Allow to turn on or turn off the bold label of the breaking.Allow to turn on or turn off the bold label of the breaking.Order in which the field will appear in the Group By. HTML Summary break pages . Sorting . Text Color .PDF Summary break page .Allow to define the font used on the breaking label. Text color .Display each grid break in a separate HTML page. .Allow to define the font used on the breaking label. Font size .Label color on the breaking. Allow to define the font used on the breaking label. Font size .Allow to define the font size used on the breaking label. . Attributes: Text font .Label color on the breaking. Background color .Configure the total line layout Image4: Configure the total line layout Interface. Bold text -Allow to turn on or turn off the bold label of the breaking.Breaking background color. Text color . . Choose from : "Display in all pages ". Group SubTotal . Attributes: Group By field .Display the record count beside the General Total.Group By Selected fields. "Yes" "No" This interface defines the "Group By" field labels: Image2: Layout Settings Interface.Define pages to display the General Total.Display the title General Total and the total values in a single line. " Display in last page" or "Do not display". Record Count .Show sub-totals of the breaking in the beginning before it occurs. “No ” . "Yes" "No" Display Total .Totals Settings Use this option to define fields with totals (on breaks or at the end).It respects as the way will be visualized the totals of the breaking: “Yes” . Attributes: Results in a single line . Image1: Summarization Functions Interface.Show sub-totals of the breaking after it occurs. Label .Label Description displayed in the end application. Display .Allows to display or hide the record count. . just select the field and check the operation button. To attribute an operation to be used in a column (field). .Select Fields Image1: Summarization fields Interface. Minimun .Highlights the lower identified value for the selected field.Calculates an arithmetic average for the selected field. Average .Highlights the higher identified value for the selected field. The buttons at the left side of the combobox allow the user to select the fields that will have to be totalized. Maximun . Select the fields to be summarized. Note: The selected fields are displayed when a break down occurs or in the end of the report. Sum -Define that a sum to the selected field values is generated. Grouped or By field: Default Grouped By field .Positioning Overview The positioning of the summary fields can be Default. The Total line is displayed in Credit Lmit column. See below: Image2: Default Order generated. Left and Right: "Left" "Center" "Right" Label It allows to define what message will be displayed instead of Total: . Aligment Total aligment is the position where will display the "Total line message".Default Default option returns a value just below the column that is being summarized. They can be: Center. Image1:Summary Fields Order Interface (Default). Image3: Label Settings Interface. . Grouped Grouped option returns a value just below the column that is being summarized. But in different lines to each summarization type (Sum. This example . It is possible to change the summary positions clicking and dragging to up or down. Max and Min). Image1: Summary fields Order Interface (Grouped). Image2: Changing the line positions. Average. the Total displays the sum and average of Credit Limit : . Image4: Edting labels.Image3: Grouped Order. They can be: Center. . Aligment Total aligment is the position where will display the "Total line message". Left and Right: "Left" "Center" "Right" Label This Settings allows to change the labels of Summarization Types. Disabling "break line per field" checkbox it displays each field side by side. Break Line per Field Enabling "break line per field" checkbox. Image2: "Break line per Field" enabled.By Field By Field option organizes each summarized field by field name. Image1: Summary Fields Order Interface (By Field). . it will display an unique field per line with selected summarizations (Sum. Average. Max and Min). It doesn't follow the columns layout. Label This Settings allows to change the labels of Summarization Types.Image3: "Break line per Field" disabled. . Figura4: Edição dos Labels. Text color .Allow to format the text in bold.Allow to define the background color. Font size . Bold text .Allow to define the font size.Allow to define the text color. Background color . Example: Total Line (Data) Display Settings .Fields Total Label Settings Figura1: Total Label Settings Interface Text font .Allow to define a font to the text field. Font size . Text color . Text font .Allow to define the font size. Bold text .Figura2: Total Line Display Settings Interface.Allow to define the background color. Background color .Allow to format the text in bold.Allow to define the text color.Allow to define a font to the text field. Example: . Positioning of the Total icon. Scriptcase uses the default title for the summary : "Summary ". On the last page . Record Count: Do not show . Positioning of the Total icon .In the end of each search result page the summary is displayed below the grid. Page width . Show just in he summary .Display vertical total on summaries. Image2: Title Field informed with the HTML Tag.Defines a title for the summary. but if you want no title to be displayed enter on the title a HTML tag "  .Chart icon positioning. Summary Display: On every page .Show in the summary the total of records per breaking and show chart. Vertical total . if not informed. Show in the summary and in the Chart .Summary Summary Settings Image1: Summary Settings Interface. . On another page . Horizontal total .The summary is displayed in a separated page that is opened with a button the toolbar is clicked (the summary button).Show in the summary the total of records per breaking.Page width value for the summary.Display horizontal total on summaries.Records count title. " as below.In the end of the last search result page (and only in this page) the summary is displayed below the grid.Do not show the total of records per breaking. Attributes: Title . The chart icon positioning . Quantity title . Link Grid . Pixels and Percent). Alignment .Creates a link in the selected field.Selected break fields.Width unit . layout settings Attributes: GroupBy field . .Sets he tabular format for the summary. Tabular format . Position . Fill empty labels .Sets position on the x-axis or y-axis. Sorting .Measure unit used in the widths (Automatic.Sets the sorting by the database value or the display value.Defines whether the labels will be filled.Defines the layout alignment :centered. left or right. hot key. The summary always occurs when the application of search have to show the summary. summary width and width unit of the summary. Buttons . Buttons Order . Chart height.Allow to select the buttons which are shown in the toolbar. graph type.Allow to select the formats of summary generation. Chart edge. Chart in other window. summary position. Attributes: Formats . summary type. summary ordinance. using the selection bar (right side of the table). Chart width. amount of registers. Chart aspect.Toolbar In this screen we can do the referring configurations to the summary.Allow to order the buttons in the toolbar as necessary. Image1: Interface of Summary Configuration. . Calculates an arithmetic average for the selected field. Note: The selected fields are displayed when a break down occurs or in the end of the report.Select Fields Image1: Summarization fields Interface. just select the field and check the operation button. Minimun . Sum -Define that a sum to the selected field values is generated. Maximun . The buttons at the left side of the combobox allow the user to select the fields that will have to be totalized. .Highlights the lower identified value for the selected field. To attribute an operation to be used in a column (field). Select the fields to be summarized.Highlights the higher identified value for the selected field. Average . we must configure the chart options for each Group By rule created in the application. chart height . etc. Image1: Generate Column Chart Interface . Image2: Generate Lines Chart Interface (Total). . These options are available only to Group By rules with more than one field. For example: chart type. note: If you we have 2 or more Group By rule.Chart Settings Here we can configure the chart settings. chart width. Define the "Default" chart type displayed when the chart option is clicked and which chart types will be available in the application. Bar .Sort the pie chart.Values format .Define the subtitle displayed in the chart.Stacks areas in the chart. Line: Font Size-Define the font size used in the chart. Subtitle.Sorting . Line .Dimension .Bars dimension (2D or 3D) on the chart. Pie .Series Group . Line .Define the subtitle displayed in the chart.Place the values on the side of the bars.Group series in bar charts Bar .How to group series in the . Subtitle.Values on the side . Area .Bars orientation .Stacking .Stacking .Image3: Chart Stettings Interface.Define the subtitle displayed in the chart. Area: Font Size-Define the font size used in the chart.Image dimension on the pie chart.Define the subtitle displayed in the chart.Displays the format of the line. Subtitle.Area shape displayed in the chart. Area .Shape .Format . Area .vertical or horizontal on the chart. Bar .Data format displayed. Pie .Series Group . Subtitle. Pie . Bar .Series group . All charts are using HTML5 Attributes: Chart Type.Orientation . Pie . Pie: Font Size-Define the font size used in the chart.Stacks the bars in a single bar (By series ). Bar: Font Size-Define the font size used in the chart. Bar .Line grouping type.Dimension .Shape .Forms pie or donut formats. Pyramid: Font Size-Define the font size used in the chart.Data format displayed. Radar: Font Size-Define the font size used in the chart.Shape displayed in the chart.Displays values on generated chart . Pyramid .Bars dimension (2D or 3D) on the chart.Define the subtitle displayed in the chart. Displays Values .chart. Gauge . Gauge: Font Size-Define the font size used in the chart.Method of generation of graphics.Define the subtitle displayed in the chart.Shape .Shape . .Shape displayed in the chart. Subtitle. Subtitle.Define the subtitle displayed in the chart. Subtitle. Common Options Summary chart type .Dimension . Subtitle.Dimension .Values format . Funnel . Pyramid . Funnel: Font Size-Define the font size used in the chart. Pyramid .Define the subtitle displayed in the chart.Funnel dimension (2D or 3D) on the chart. Generated chart height in pixels.Define the color used in the chart background. Palette color for data plots . . Chart Layout Image 4: Chart Layout Color Settings Interface. Legend height .Display charts in another window.Sort chart values. Chart display mode .Define the color used in the chart data plot.Display the chart of the General Total as a column or a line.Display Y-Axis With Zero. in percentage between the chart and the space (on top) reserved for captions. Display Y-Axis With Zero . Values sorting .Generated chart width in pixels. Chart Height . Options Chart palette color .Axis of Chart General Total . Chart width .Maximum height. Drag'n drop the options to the desired position.Positioning Select the positioning of the totals in the summary. Image1: Summary fields positioning Interface. . Select one field to initial sorting in the summary.Choose if the sorting will be ascending or descending. Attributes: Fields . Sorting Order .Select one of the GROUP BYs to the initial sorting.Sorting Select which fields can use sorting in the summary. .Select the fields you want to allow the sorting. Initial Sorting by the GROUP BY . Default Sorting column . Image1: Summary fields sorting Interface. The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header.The variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combobox. This interface format can change depending on the selected option in "Layout >> Settings >> Header Template". click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon .This flag determines whether or not the Header is displayed Application Title . (A Form Applications has 2 titles: one for Insert mode. (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) . (available only in Grid applications) FOOTER . Search Criteria . Title: Displays the value entered in “Select Title” in the header .The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the header. Enter text and/or “Global Variables”. the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the header line. you may need to associate content with it. There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. and another one for Update mode). A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the application's data source (“Select” query) are displayed beside the header variable when the “Field” type is selected. For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”. To see all the available date formats. Depending on the type. To locate existing images and select one. Header Variables . The selected field value is then displayed in the header line. Value: When the “Value” type is selected.Header Figure 1: Header Interface. See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. Display Header . Each condition is displayed on a new line. Enter the format in the text field alongside it.Defines the Header title to be displayed in the application. click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples. Date: Displays the system date in the header line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the footer line.The variable fields can be populated with any of the types listed in the Combobox. click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon . Depending on the type. (available only in Grid applications) . Display Footer . Search Criteria . (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) .The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the footer.Figure 2: Footer Interface. Enter the format in the text field alongside it. Date: Displays the system date in the footer line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. to see all the available date formats. There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. Value: When the “Value” type is selected. Each condition is displayed on a new line.The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header. Title: Display in the Footer the value entered in “Select Title”. To locate existing images and select one. you may need to associate content with it. See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. Enter text and/or “Global Variables”. This format of this interface may change depending on the option selected in "Layout >> Settings >> Footer Template".This flag determines whether or not the footer will be displayed. A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the “Select” (application's data source) are displayed beside the Footer variable when the “Field” type is selected. Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. The selected field value is displayed in the footer line. Footer Variables . For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”. click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples. For example the orders grid are nested to the customers grid. On the picture bellow.Nested Grids What Is Nested Grids? Nested grids are used to display information in reports hierarchically. . Read more: How to use nested grids. for each customer a nested grid containing that customer's orders is displayed. It is possible create as many nested grids as necessary. Image1: Nested orders grid. Enable Treeview .Nested Grid. PDF .Settings Nested Grid Settings On the Settings menu it is possible to edit nested grids general attributes of the Image1: Nested grids menu. Attributes: Title in the same line.This parameter defines where the nested grids will be displayed in reference to the main grid: Option In one column Description Display the nested grid in a new column after the last one. Image2: Nested grids settings page.This attribute lets you configure the way you view the subquery. Bellow the record Displays the nested grid below the main grids rows .This option allows to enable / disable the nested grids exporting to the pdf report. Watch it at the picture bellow.This option will force all the nested grids to be displayed using a "+" button on the "main record". when disabling this option only the "main grid" will be exported. If the title is displayed on the same line. the table of the subquery will be incorporated into the main query. Position . Select between left. right and center. (see Editing nested grids ). . Define Individually Any attribute that uses the option Define individually forces this attribute to be configured in each one of the links.. This option only works when using the Position option Bellow the record.Allows to set up the nested grid horizontal alignment relative to the main grid.Alignment . Image2: Name and label for the new "link". Image1: Create a new link. Define name and label to new nested grid. Applications list All the projects grids which uses or references global variables on SQL statement are displayed.New Nested Grid To create a new nested grid link click on the New Link item as displayed on the picture bellow. . See picture4. IMPORTANT: To use a grid as a nested grid is required that the nested application uses at least one parameter or global variable in its SQL statement as on the picture bellow. Image3: Target application selection. Used to pass a fixed value as parameter. .Nothing is passed as parameter. Parameters Settings Define the parameter(s) that are passed between application. its SQL statement uses a parameter.Image4: An order details grid. Button Save . On the picture above on the left side are displayed the nested grid inbound parameters (global variables). Empty . Select one option and value to each variable located on the target application (on the right side of the above image): Field .Saves all the link parameters and closes the "link wizard". Fixed . Image5: Parameter var_cliente linkage.Used to pass a field's value from the master grid. General settings Image2: Nested grid general settings.Header 2 .Nested grid title.Editing Nested Grids Find all the nested grids of your grid in the Links folder located in the Nested Grids Application menu. define each nested grid parameters on .Display or hide nested grid following items: 1 . It is possible to edit the following attributes: Label .Sequential 3 . Display . Define Individually If any nested grid settings is defined individually.Total Visualization .Nested grid theme is equal to grid´s theme. Link .Define target application and the passed parameters info. as on picture4. Attribute Title in the same line Enable treeview Position Value No No In one column HorizontalAlignment .Define nested grid vertical alignment: Top. "Enable treeview" and PDF at: Nested grids settings Display settings This options is displayed only if the info bellow is true. Bold . Image4: Nested grids update.the nested grids edit screen. Vertical Alignment . Title horizontal alignment . Image3: Nested grids settings defined individually.Define nested grid background. Title vertical alignment . Middle or Bottom.Defines nested grid title line horizontal alignment.Defines nested grid title line vertical alignment. Background color .Define nested grid horizontal alignment: Left. Empty forces the use of the default application color. "Position". Right or Center. Read more about the attributes "Title in the same line".Define the nested grid label in bold. All the options defined individually are displayed on the linking edit interface. . .allow to apply the sort according to the rules that were created. Attributes: Order of the rule order . Integrate and Sort .Allow to apply the the fields sort (ascendant or descendant) or sorting rules . When you configure this option.Allow to choose the sort type.Sorting Rules Sorting Rules Settings Image1: Sorting rules settings interface. The options are: fields/rules sort .Allow to update the sorting rule display order. will be shown an icon (config sort) which when it is clicked.allow to apply the rules which were created and the field order (ascendant or descendant). fields sort . it allow the choice of the field and its display order ascendant (ASC) or descendant (DESC). where will show beside the field a + or if the ordinance is descendant. Select the sorting rules fields . Label. . Attributes: Name .Field to inform the name that will be shown in the application.New Rule New Sorting Rule Image1: Sorting Rule Interface. To order the fields in the wanted way .Allow to select through the selection bar what fields will be shown (fields which are found in the right side box) and the fields which are not shown (fields which are found in the left side box). To apply the ordinance type to the field.Field to inform the rule name. use the ordinance bar located at the right side of the box. Attributes: Label .Allow to inform a name which will be shown when the application is executed. Sorting Rule Settings Image2: Sorting Rule Settings Interface. you only have to select the field of the box at the right side and select the ascendant mode. displays the search form and the search results in the same browser window. Keep Values .Define the search form position (margins).Allows to define the search form horizontal aligment vertical Alignment . one above the other. EmptySearch . Search Criteria . displays just the search form. Attributes Ajax .Determine which values to keep to each search form. Preserver fields and orders .Unit used in width measurement.Search form HTML width value.Keep last form values and display it upon return. Table width Unit . Horizontal Alignment. Initial State .Iframe height in pixels where the data retrieved by the search form is displayed.Use Ajax technology on Search form.Display all records (for empty fields).Display search condition to user selection.Select the SQL "AND" or"OR" commands to define the search criteria.When activated. This option is associated to “Using Iframe”. Table width . Image1: Search Settings Interface.When activated displays the search form first with the grid in the iframe positioned below the search form. . Iframe Height . Display Condition . in two FRAMES. Use Iframe . when deactivated.Search Settings The search settings allows to define all Search application atributes.>Allows to define the search form vertical aligment Margins . .Use the enter key to tabulate. Use Enter to tab .This option is associated to “Using Iframe”. The list on the right displays which fields will be displayed in the application (select a field and click on the right arrow to include it in the form).Select Fields Fields Positioning Defines which fields are displayed in the application. Note: The list on the left displays all fields retrieved from the SQL select query for the application. . Figure 1: Select Fields. . The required fields are validated and a message is displayed if the field is empty. Display message .Displays or not a message upon validation.Required Fields Define the required fields in the application. Image 1: Required Fields Interface.Where the marker will be displayed in relation to the field. A marker (*) is displayed beside the field in the generated application. Markers Positioning . Beginning with.Unmark all fields or options. Allows to define filter options (SQL) for each field..Search Criteria Image1: Search Criteria Interface.Enable or Disable the field or selected option. .) and click on "Turn On / Off" button. Buttons: Turn On/Off .This option is displayed just if a field has only one option selected. .. None . Contains. To select options click on one option (Equal to. It allows do not display the criteria beside the field. The left list displays the fields and the right list has the filter options. All .Mark all fields or options. Show the condition . . buttons settings Image2: Settings Buttons. A button can even be in both parts simultaneously.Select the buttons displayed in the search form toolbars and the buttons position. Attributes: Toolbar (Top / Bottom) .Toolbar The toolbar is divided in two parts: top and bottom.Button name.Define a hint in the button. Access Key . Image1: Search Toolbar Interface. Attributes: Button . Hint . It is possible to select the buttons for each part independently. Label .Define the buttons alignment in the toolbar. Buttons Position (Top / Bottom) .Define the label displayed on the button.Allows to define acess keys shortcuts. Layout Layout OverView Configure display formats by determining attributes such as display schemes. . and defining header formats. organizing fields in blocks. amongst other options. bearing the same name as the application. . all you have to do is drag it to the desired page as indicated below. Figure 1: Block settings interface. Click on the block and drag it to “Blocks not shown”. The Figure bellow shows an ORGANIZATION column. This is how to remove a block from being displayed. To the left of each block there are two icons: to edit the block properties. By default the applications created in ScriptCase only consist of one block. and to delete the block.Blocks Conceptually a block is a “container” in which a Form Application. To change the page block is displayed in. Click to select the block in order to modify its position. Organising Blocks and Changing position See below how to modify the page block display order. You can add as many blocks as you need and you can organize them to best suit your purpose. used to define the position of the next block (positioned to the side or below in the series of blocks). Control or Grid fields are located. Flag that controls whether the block title is displayed. Fields (Columns) .Position of fields within the block: “Below” .Attributes: Block (name) .The fields are displayed below each other while observing the number of columns.Displays the label below the field. "Beside" . .Displays the label above the field.The fields are displayed beside one another while observing the number of columns. Label (Position) . "Line" . Fields (Position) .The fields are displayed side by side (in line) without tabulation (aligned in columns). Label (Display) .Displays the label beside the field.Flag that controls whether the field label is displayed inside the block.The label options are: "Above" . "Below" . Title (Display) .Block title header displayed.Number of columns to be displayed side by side within the block. "Beside" . "Tabs" . just click .Indicates that the next block is displayed beside the previous one. "Beside" . .Defines the width of the block in pixels or as a percent.Indicates that the next block is displayed as a tab.Organization (Next) .Organization of blocks on the page: "Below" . Add New Block To add new blocks to an application.Defines the height of the block in pixels or as a percent. Organization (Height).Indicates that the next block is displayed below the previous one. Organization (Width) . Edit Block Click to edit the block properties and click Save. Title Font . Background image .Block name. .Block title background image.Whether to display a line containing the block title. Display Title . Figure 2: Edit Block interface.Block label.Block Title.Block title line height (in pixels).Figure 2: Add New Block interface. Title . Background color . Title Height . Attributes: Name .Block title line background color.Block title font color. Font size .Block title font size applied.Block name. Label . Attributes: Name . Font color .Block title font applied. Block border width. Border width . Middle or Bottom). Block height . Label Position . .Calculate the block columns. Block width . Display Label .Block height. Label color .Field label position. Center or Right). Field Organization .Block title horizontal alignment (Left. Border color .Block border color. Next Block . Column Width .Block width. Cellspacing . Columns .Block title vertical alignment (Top.Position of the next block in relation to the current one.Horizontal Alignment .Number of block field columns.Field label display color.Block field organization. Vertical Alignment .Spacing between the block cells.Display block field labels. Used to select the Footer format.Display Settings Layout Settings Figure 1: Layout Settings interface Is used to define the Application Theme. fonts. Footer Template .Used to select the Header format. etc) for the application. (CSS) Attributes: Header Template . Theme . .Used to select an existing Theme (colors. A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the application's data source (“Select” query) are displayed beside the header variable when the “Field” type is selected.This flag determines whether or not the Header is displayed Application Title . For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”. Depending on the type. The selected field value is then displayed in the header line. Enter text and/or “Global Variables”.The variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combobox.The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header.Defines the Header title to be displayed in the application.The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the header. Enter the format in the text field alongside it. the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the header line. See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. (A Form Applications has 2 titles: one for Insert mode. Header Variables . To see all the available date formats. Display Header . click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon . To locate existing images and select one. click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples. and another one for Update mode). Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. Value: When the “Value” type is selected. Search Criteria . you may need to associate content with it. This interface format can change depending on the selected option in "Layout >> Settings >> Header Template". There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. (available only in Grid applications) . (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) . Date: Displays the system date in the header line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. Title: Displays the value entered in “Select Title” in the header .Header And Footer HEADER Figure 1: Header Interface. Each condition is displayed on a new line. Each condition is displayed on a new line. Enter the format in the text field alongside it. click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples. the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the footer line. A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the “Select” (application's data source) are displayed beside the Footer variable when the “Field” type is selected. to see all the available date formats. Date: Displays the system date in the footer line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy.The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header. Display Footer . Value: When the “Value” type is selected.The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the footer.This flag determines whether or not the footer will be displayed.FOOTER Figure 2: Footer Interface. Enter text and/or “Global Variables”. Search Criteria . There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. Footer Variables . (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) . Depending on the type. To locate existing images and select one. click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon . you may need to associate content with it. (available only in Grid applications) . See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. Title: Display in the Footer the value entered in “Select Title”. The selected field value is displayed in the footer line. For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”. This format of this interface may change depending on the option selected in "Layout >> Settings >> Footer Template".The variable fields can be populated with any of the types listed in the Combobox. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". onInit .) and for a specific type of application. upon submitting a form.. before execute the application SQL Select Statement.Occurs when the application is loaded. . sc_select_where(add) and etc. For example: sc_select_field.g..Is executed before submit the form. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. Read more about Scriptcase Macros. . onRefresh . normally are executed macros that modify the SELECT command. onSave . After a record is inserted.. In this scope.This event is executed an unique time. when it is loaded. Events allow the developer to define custom actions at a specific execution time (e. sc_select_order. onValidate .Events Scriptcase uses the concept of events to enable to developer to customize application code.Runs when the application is saved. . Image1: Search Fields Interface.Fields Overview This session displays to edit just the fields that are in the search. (Fields selected in “GRID->SEARCH>FIELDS”. Image2: Interface of the Properties of the new field. where we determine the amount of fields that will be added.After we determine the amount of fields that will be added. Image1: Amount of fields Interface.New Field It allows to add a new field in the application. . Note: The description of the field type is modified as the selection of the filed type. it is necessary to define the settings of the new field (data type.When click on a new button it is shown the image below. 2º. name and label). 1º. Attributes: Case Settings . numbers and characters. AJAX PROCESSING . allows you to use the title of the field that is set in the grid.This option when enabled. When the field is defined as a text it accepts letters. That is. Maximum Size . Attributes: Data type . For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_name. Use same Label used on the Grid . Search Label .Allows when activated. Show Condition .Converts the field letters. Field's Behavior Image1: Field's Behavior Interface. the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option.Text Image1: General Settings Interface.Allows when activated. SQL Type . to show or don't show the filter condition.Define the application field type. the label is a field nickname in the application layer. to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. Submit on OnChange . in this case the option filter label can not be used. if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name.Define the application field title.Maximum Field Size.Field type in the database. For example: a Select field "list of states".Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title . Font Size .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Background color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected.Reloads other selection type fields (Select. CheckBox. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. and a second one list of cities. Font Color . Title CSS Attributes: Font . Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. sub. right. text-bottom). Border color .Sets the title width.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Border Size . sub.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Underlined .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . super. Bold . middle. center or justify). Bold . Bold . Vertical Alignment .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Sets the field width. text-top.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. text-top.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Background color . Field CSS Attributes: Font . Vertical Alignment . Border color . HorizontalAlignment .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. text-bottom). Height . center or justify). Font Size .Sets the title height.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Used to apply bold type to the font. right. Font Size .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Underlined . Width . Font Color . bottom. middle. Horizontal Alignment . super.Sets the field height. bottom. top. top. Border Size . Background color .using a color palette. Width .Used to increase the border size of the title. Font Color . . Height .Used to apply bold type to the font. Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. sub.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Underlined . top. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. center or justify). text-top. Border Size . Border color .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. middle.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. . Vertical Alignment . bottom.Sets the object width. Horizontal Alignment . text-bottom).Sets the object height. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Hint . Help Type: Pop-up . Attributes: Tooltip . super. Create on-line instructions. Height . Help Settings Document the application.Used to increase the border size of the object.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Width . right. Text . .Display the specified help text beside the field. VALUES FORMAT Regional Settings .Allows when activated. Maximum Size .The field accepts negative values. to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field.Field type in the database.Allows when activated. in this case the option filter label can not be used.Define the application field type.This option when enabled. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_name. Accepts negative . to show or don't show the filter condition.Define the application field title. if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name. Attributes: Submit on OnChange . Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. the label is a field nickname in the application layer.Group Separator.Define if the Regional Settings will be used (default values). Separator .Integer Image1: General Settings Interface. Data type . .Maximum Field Size. Show Condition . allows you to use the title of the field that is set in the grid. Use same Label used on the Grid . the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. SQL Type . Search Label . That is. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Used to increase the border size of the title. Vertical Alignment . Font Size .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. text-bottom).Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font. sub. Border Size .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. center or justify). Background color . Bold . middle. right. Underlined . Border color . text-top.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Font Color . top. Title CSS Attributes: Font . bottom.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment . . super.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. text-top. Bold . bottom.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Underlined . center or justify). Background color .Sets the title width. bottom. Font Size . Width .Sets the field width.Used to increase the border size of the object. Field CSS Attributes: Font . right. Height . Font Size .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Used to apply bold type to the font. right.Sets the field height.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Font Color . sub.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. top. Vertical Alignment . super. super.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Bold . Border Size . text-top.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Width . text-bottom).Used to apply an underlined type to the font. center or justify).Used to apply bold type to the font. Border color .Width . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. text-bottom).Sets the object width.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Height .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Border color . Horizontal Alignment . top.Sets the title height. Border Size . sub. Background color . Vertical Alignment .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. HorizontalAlignment . middle.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the field. middle. Font Color .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Underlined . Display the specified help text beside the field. Help Type: Pop-up .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Height .Sets the object height. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Attributes: Tooltip . . Text . Hint . Help Settings Document the application.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Create on-line instructions. . Use same Label used on the Grid .Define the application field title. Maximum Size .Precision of the decimal field. the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Search Label . Data type . in this case the option filter label can not be used. to show or don't show the filter condition. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_name. SQL Type . Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface.Currency Image1: General Settings Interface. if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name.Maximum Field Size. .Allows when activated. That is. VALUES FORMAT Precision . the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option.Field type in the database.This option when enabled. Attributes: Submit on OnChange . to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. Show Condition .Define the application field type.Allows when activated. allows you to use the title of the field that is set in the grid. Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Decimal separator of the field. Font Size . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.The field accepts negative values. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to apply bold type to the font. Border Size . Bold .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Decimal Separator .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Underlined . Title CSS Attributes: Font . Border color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to increase the border size of the title.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Group Separator. Background color . Font Color . Accepts negative .Separator . .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Border color . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . bottom.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Height .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Bold . text-bottom). . Bold .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to increase the border size of the object. HorizontalAlignment . center or justify). Font Size . text-bottom).Horizontal Alignment . Underlined . Border color . Background color . super.Sets the field width. Font Color . middle.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Width . text-top. right.Sets the title height.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. sub.Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. middle. right.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. sub.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. super.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Vertical Alignment . Font Color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Border Size .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Height .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Underlined .Sets the title width.Sets the field height.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. center or justify). top.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Border Size .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Field CSS Attributes: Font . text-top. center or justify). Background color . Horizontal Alignment . right. bottom. Font Size . Vertical Alignment . top. Width .Used to apply bold type to the font. Sets the object height. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. middle. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. text-bottom). Hint . . Attributes: Tooltip .Vertical Alignment . super.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. top. Height . Width . Help Settings Document the application.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Sets the object width. text-top.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Help Type: Pop-up . sub. Create on-line instructions. bottom. Text . .Display the specified help text beside the field. Field type in the database.Define the application field type. Width . Decimal Separator . Search Label .Allow to determine the field width. That is.Precision of the decimal field.Allows when activated. VALUES FORMAT Precision .Maximum Field Size.Decimal Image1: General Settings Interface. . Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. Show Condition . the label is a field nickname in the application layer. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_name. the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. Maximum Size . Data type . to show or don't show the filter condition. Separator .Allows when activated. SQL Type . if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name.Define the application field title. Attributes: Submit on OnChange .Group Separator.Decimal separator of the field. to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.The field accepts negative values. Font Size . Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to increase the border size of the title.Accepts negative .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Font Color . Background color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Underlined . Border color . . center or justify). right.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Border Size . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Bold . bottom. text-top.Vertical Alignment . Background color . Height .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. text-bottom).Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. middle. text-bottom). text-top. center or justify). HorizontalAlignment . Font Size .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Border Size . text-bottom). super. Bold . Border Size . Border color . right.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. super. right. Vertical Alignment . Height .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font. Border color .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the title width.Used to increase the border size of the object. top. Background color . top. bottom. middle.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Font Color . Width . Underlined . sub. top. Vertical Alignment .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Horizontal Alignment . Font Color . middle. Width . . sub. text-top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Field CSS Attributes: Font . sub.Sets the title height.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Underlined .Used to increase the border size of the field. super. Font Size .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. bottom.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the field height. Bold .Sets the field width.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. center or justify). Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Sets the object height.Sets the object width. Create on-line instructions. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Help Type: Pop-up . Attributes: Tooltip . Height . Hint .Width . . Help Settings Document the application. Text . .Display the specified help text beside the field. Allow to show beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field. this makes possible the selection of the month and year passing to the field the value which was defined in the calendar.Allow to select the storage mode of the field in the database.Date Image1: General Settings Interface.Selects the display format of the field. if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name. Use Combobox . . allows you to use the title of the field that is set in the grid.Field type in the database. Display .Define the application field type. Maximum Size . VALUES FORMAT Figure2: Interface of Filter Configuration.Allow to select the data and the month through the combobox. Data type .Define the application field title. Display Format . Search Label .Maximum Field Size. in this case the option filter label can not be used.Allows you to apply regional settings to the field. Use same Label used on the Grid -This option when enabled. Attributes: Regional Settings . For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_name. Display Calendar . SQL Type . Internal Format .Allow to show beside the field a calendar icon. That is. the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Search last 7 days.Allows when activated.Allows when activated. Last month . to show or don't show the filter condition. Last week(sun-sat) .Search entire period.Search today.Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface.Search last week business days. Last week business days (mon-fri) .Search last month.Search yesterday. (Sun-Saturday). Ex: ((21/12/2007 27/12/2007). Show Condition . Attributes: Submit on OnChange .Search last week. Yesterday . Today . the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option.(Mon-Fri). Last 7 days . Note: Use the function Turn On/Off to add or remove a condition. All period . . SPECIAL CONDITIONS Special conditions available to Date fields allows the end user select common time periods to search. This month -Search from beginning current month until current day. to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to apply bold type to the font. Font Size . Font Color . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Bold .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Note: Special condition filter form interface .Used to increase the border size of the title. Background color . . Border Size . Underlined . Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Background color . Vertical Alignment .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the title width. center or justify). Font Size . Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Height . sub. text-bottom).Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Border color . bottom. Underlined .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Border Size .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Font Size . sub. Width . text-top.Border color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Vertical Alignment . text-bottom). Bold . Height .Used to increase the border size of the object. Background color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the field width.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. . Width .Sets the title height. center or justify). right. text-top. Font Color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment . middle. Bold . right. middle. Border Size . Horizontal Alignment . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . top.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. super. super.Used to increase the border size of the field. bottom. Underlined .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. top. Border color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Sets the field height.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font. Font Color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Help Type: Pop-up .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. bottom. center or justify). Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Vertical Alignment . right. sub.Sets the object height. Create on-line instructions.Horizontal Alignment . Width .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Sets the object width. Attributes: Tooltip .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. . top. text-bottom). Height . Help Settings Document the application. middle. super. text-top. Hint . Text - Display the specified help text beside the field. Time Image1: General Settings Interface. Data type - Define the application field type. Search Label - Sets the field label in the application. Use same Label used on the Grid - Use the field label s configured in the grid . Maximum Size - Maximum field size SQL Type - Field type in the database. VALUES FORMAT Image2: Interface of Filter Configuration. Attributes: Regional Settings - Allows you to apply regional settings to the field. Display - Selects the display format of the field. Internal Format - Allow to select the storage mode of the field in the database. Display Format - Allow to show beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field. Display Calendar - Allow to show beside the field a calendar icon, this makes possible the selection of the month and year passing to the field the value which was defined in the calendar. Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. Attributes: Submit on OnChange - Allows when activated, to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. Show Condition - Allows when activated, to show or don't show the filter condition, the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height. Help Settings Document the application. Create on-line instructions, describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Attributes: Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Hint - Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text - Display the specified help text beside the field. Date And Time Image1: General Settings Interface. Data type - Define the application field type. Filter Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_date_hour, if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Date. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Use Gird Label - This option when activated, allows to use the field title that is configured in the grid, in this case the option filter label can't be used. Width - Allow to determine the field width. SQL Type VALUES FORMAT Image2: Interface of Filter Configuration. Attributes: Regional Settings - Allows you to apply regional settings to the field. Display - Selects the display format of the field. Internal Format - Format that will be recorded in the database. Use ComboBox - Use a combox to select the field info Display Format - Allow to show beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field. Display Calendar - Allow to show beside the field a calendar icon, this makes possible the selection of the month and year passing to the field the value which was defined in the calendar. Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. Attributes: Submit on OnChange - Allows when activated, to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. Show Condition - Allows when activated, to show or don't show the filter condition, the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height. Help Settings Document the application. Create on-line instructions, describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Attributes: Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Hint - Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text - Display the specified help text beside the field. Select Allows to use in the form field an object type select (combobox). General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface. Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. Search Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_date_hour, if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Date. That is, the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Use same Label used on the Grid - This option when activated, allows to use the field title that is configured in the grid, in this case the option filter label can't be used. Maximum Size - Maximum field size . SQL Type - Database Field type. Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. Attributes: Submit on OnChange - Allows when activated, to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. Show Condition - Allows when activated, to show or don't show the filter condition, the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. Edition Lookup Edition lookup enables a a list of values display on forms fields. Note on the screen bellow the State field, before and after enabling the edition lookup to display a select object containing a custom list of KEYS / VALUES. These lists of KEYS / VALUES can be defined in two ways: based on a database table (Automatic lookup ) or from custom arrays (lookup manual) Before Lookup After Lookup Lookup method There are available two options: Automatic, based in a SQL statement to feed the list of values or Manual which is based on a custom entered list of values. Image1: Lookup method selection. Edition Lookup - Automatic Populates the select object dynamically, based on a SQL statement, note the SQL statement on the picture bellow, it is required to retrieve a key (insert / update) and a value to display on the object field on the SQL command. Image1: Automatic lookup settings. Attributes : SQL Select Statement - The query used to feed the select object on the form application, The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field , display_field FROM table ", retrieving always two fields. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables , views on it. Delimiter - The character used to separate the items on generated string, only applicable when using the multiple values option, the default delimiter is semicolon ( ; ). Height - Select object rows quantity. Multiples Values - By selection yes, it is possible to select many items on the fields list. the list of values will be saved on the table's field as a string containing the text: KEY1;KEY2;KEY3 using an specified delimiter like ; or - defined in Delimiter Single value Multiple Values Use Title - Allows to display a title line on the select object. this option works combined with Title and Title internal value. Title - The object title or its default option displayed as the first line. Title internal value - The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected. Reload form when value has changed - Forces a form reload when the OnChange event occurs on the select field, it is frequently used to re-load other lists which uses this field as parameter. Display original and lookup value- Displays the key field and the lookup field retrieved by the SQL statement. lookup value original & lookup values Separated by- Character used to separate KEY and LOOKUP values displayed on the list of values. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value. Use specific connection- Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project. Create Link - Allows to create a link to a list update form. In the picture bellow, the select object is automatically reloaded after the popup form update. Use specific connection - Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project. Checkbox Use the drop down - Display the field Select as a drop down list of checkboxes. Edition Lookup - ManuaL Enables a select object based on a list of values filled manually as an array. See picture bellow. Image1: Manual edition lookup. Attributes: Lookup type- Selects the lookup type: Single Value , Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple values (binary). Single Value Creates a simple select object, allows only one item selection. Image2: Single value lookup settings. Label- Text displayed value. Value- When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. Default - Selected value by default. Height- The quantity of rows displayed in this select object. Multiple values (delimiter) Saves a single string on the table's field based on a list of values displayed. For example the selection: Sports, Movies and Traveling is saved on the table's field as a string like S;M;T. Note the default delimiter ( ; ) semicolon. ) Image3: Multiple values lookup (delimiter Label- Text displayed value. Value- When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. Delimiter - The character used to separated the items on generated string, only applicable when using the multiple values option.The default delimiter is semicolon ( ; ). Height - Object number of lines. Multiple Values (Position) Saves on a string type field a list of values, for example it is possible to save answers to the topics: Gender , Civil Status and Hobby in only one table field. See in the table bellow the positions used by each answers on the saved string. Label Male Female Single Value M F S Start 1 1 2 Size 1 1 1 Married Sports Movies Books Traveling M SP MO BO TR 2 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 Example: By selecting on the generated form: Male, Married and Books, the table's value saved a string is MMBO Image4: Multiple Values lookup settings (position). Label- Text displayed value. Value- When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. Negative - Value saved on the string when no value is selected. Start- Saved string initial position. (The string position counting start with 1) Size- Bytes quantity into the saved string. Height- Object number of lines. Multiple Values (Binary) Allows to save a multiple selection as an integer value on a table field See the examples bellow. On this lookup field interface the Value to each item is a integer number generated automatically. Implicit Value 1 2 4 8 16 Item Description Sports Movies Traveling Books Music The selection is converted into a integer which is the sum of the items implicit values before saving. Example 1: By selecting Sports and Movies on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 3. Implicit Value 1 2 4 8 16 Item Description Sports Movies Traveling Books Music 1 (Sports) + 2 (Movies) = 3 Example 2: By selecting Sports, Traveling and Books on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 13. Implicit Value 1 2 4 8 16 Item Description Sports Movies Traveling Books Music 1(Sports) + 4 (Traveling) + 8 (Books) = 13 Image5: Multiple Values settings(Binary) Label - Item displayed text . Height- Object number of lines. Insert Button - Inserts the item into the list of values Update Button - Update all the item properties. Remove Button - Removes the item from the list. Clear Button - Clear the item edit form. Save Button - Saves the current list of values for re-usable purpose, the saved lists are displayed on the Load lookup definitions field. Load lookup definitions - Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list. Use Title - Allows to display a title line on the select object. This option works combined with Title and Title internal value. Title - The object title or its default option displayed as the first line. Title internal value - The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected. Reload form when value has changed - Forces a form reload when the OnChange event occurs on the select field, it is frequently used to re-load other lists which uses this field as parameter. Display original and lookup value- Displays the key field and the lookup field retrieved by the SQL statement. lookup value original & lookup values Separated by- Character used to separate KEY and LOOKUP values displayed on the list of values. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value. Checkbox using drop down - Display the field Select as a drop down list of checkboxes. AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select, CheckBox, Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. For example: a Select field "list of states", and a second one list of cities. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height. Help Settings Document the application. Create on-line instructions, describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Attributes: Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Hint - Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text - Display the specified help text beside the field. Double Select Component that displays two lists of values. In the first list are the values available for selection and the second are the values actually selected. General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface. Attributes: Data type The data type Double Select is an drop-down object which allow multiple selection through of two selection windows and a navigator betwen them (<< < > >>). Search Label- Allow to define the field title in the search. Use same Label used on the Grid - Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid. Maximum Size - Maximum field size . SQL Type - Database Field type. Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. Attributes: Submit on OnChange - Allows when activated, to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. Show Condition - Allows when activated, to show or don't show the filter condition, the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. Edition Lookup Edition lookup enables a list of values display on forms fields. Before Lookup After Lookup Figure1: Edition lookup Interface Attributes : SQL Select Statement - The query used to feed the select object on the form application, The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field , display_field FROM table ", retrieving always two fields. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables , views on it. Height - Select object rows quantity Delimiter - The character used to separate the items on generated string, the default delimiter is semicolon ( ; ). Reload form when value has changed - Forces a form reload upon selected field update. Display original and lookup value- Displays the field value and the lookup return value. Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by- Character used to separate the field value and the lookup return value. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value. Use specific connection- Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project. AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select, CheckBox, Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. For example: a Select field "list of states", and a second one list of cities. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height. Help Settings Document the application. Create on-line instructions, describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Attributes: Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Hint - Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text - Display the specified help text beside the field. Checkbox Allows you to use in the form field an object of type checkbox. General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface. Attributes: Data type - Checkbox is an object which allows the selction of one or more information through a marking object. Search Label - Allow to define the field title in the search. Use same Label used on the Grid - Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid. Maximum Size - Maximum field size. SQL Type - Database Field type. Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. Attributes: Submit on OnChange - Allows when activated, to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. Show Condition - Allows when activated, to show or don't show the filter condition, the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. Edition Lookup Edition lookup is a way to display checkbox list of values on forms fields. See the image below. It is possible to populate the checkboxes objects based on a database table (Automatic lookup ) or from custom arrays (Manual lookup) Before Lookup After Lookup Lookup Methods There are available two options: Automatic, based in a SQL statement to feed the list of values or Manual which is based on a custom entered list of values. Image1: Lookup method selection. Edition Lookup - Automatic Populates the checkbox object dynamically, based on a SQL statement. Note the SQL statement on the picture bellow, it is required to retrieve a key ( insert / update) and a value to display on the object as fields on the SQL command. Image2: Automatic lookup settings. Attributes: SQL Select Statement - The query used to feed the checkbox object on the form application, The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field , display_field FROM table ", retrieving always two fields. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables , views on it. Columns - checkbox number of columns. Delimiter - The character used to separate the items on generated string, the default delimiter is semicolon ( ; ). NOTE: The automatic lookup option requires the form field to be string type because multiple selection saves a single string on database table field like AK;ID>;UT when using the semicolon delimiter. Reload form when value has changed - Forces a form reload when the OnClick event occurs on the checkbox field, it is frequently used to re-load another lists of values which requires this field as parameter. Option check all - Display an object to check all items and another to uncheck all items. Display original and lookup value - Select No, to display only the value retrieved by the lookup. Otherwise, the field original value and the value retrieved by lookup are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by - Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the lookup return value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Choose connection - Run the select statement in a different connection available in the project. Edition Lookup - Manual Allows the developer to manually crete a list of values saved in the application when there is no table available with the information needed. See picture bellow. Image1: Edition Lookup Manual Interface. Attributes : Lookup type- Selects the lookup type: Single Value , Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple values (binary). Single Value Selects only on value on the list. Image2: Edition lookup - Single Value settings. Label- Text displayed value in the checkbox object.. Value- When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. For example when Ipho Coffee is selected the value saved is 43. Default - Selected value by default. Columns - Checkbox columns quantity. Multiple values (Delimiter) Saves a single string on the table's field based on a list of values displayed. For example the selection: Sports, Movies and Traveling is saved on the table's field as a string like S;M;T. Note the default delimiter ( ; ) semicolon. Image3: Edition lookup - Multiple Values (delimiter) settings. Label- Text displayed value in the checkbox object. Value- When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. Delimiter- The character used to separated the items on generated string, only applicable when using the multiple values option.The default delimiter is semicolon ( ; ). Columns - Checkbox columns quantity. Multiple Values (Position) Saves multiple values on a single string. Using the Multiple Values (Position) mode is required to enter the label, start position in the saved string and size in bytes each item. For example, to save Gender (1byte), Civil Status(1byte) and Hobby (2bytes) in a single use the table bellow (with the positions used by each item). Label Male Female Single Married Value M F S M Start 1 1 2 2 Size 1 1 1 1 Sports Movies Books Traveling SP MO BO TR 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 Example: By selecting on the generated form: Male, Married and Books, the table's value saved a string is MMBO Image4: Edition lookup - Multiple Values (position) settings Label- Text displayed value in the checkbox object. Value- When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field at the specified position. Negative - Value saved on the string when no value is selected. Start- Saved string initial position. (The string position counting start with 1) Size- Bytes quantity into the saved string. Columns - Checkbox columns quantity. Multiple Values (Binary) Allows to save a multiple selection as an integer value on a field See the examples bellow. On this lookup field interface the Value to each item is a integer number generated automatically. AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music The selection is converted into a integer which is the sum of the items implicit values before saving. Example 1: By selecting Sports and Movies on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 3. AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music 1 (Sports) + 2 (Movies) = 3 Example 2: By selecting Sports, Traveling and Books on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 13. AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music 1 (Sports) + 4 (Books) + 8 ( Traveling) = 13 Image5: Edition lookup - Multiple Values (binary) settings Label- Text displayed value in the checkbox object. Columns - Checkbox columns quantity. Insert - Insert Label and Value in the values list. Update - Update selected item. Remove - Remove selected item. Clear - Clear the item edit form. Save - Saves the current list of values for re-usable purpose, the saved lists are displayed on the Load lookup definitions field. Load lookup definitions - Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list. Reload form when value has changed - Forces a form reload when the OnClick event occurs on the checkbox field, it is frequently used to re-load another lists of values which requires this field as parameter. Option check all - Display an object to check all items and another to uncheck all items. Display original and lookup value - Select No, to display only the value retrieved by the lookup. Otherwise, the field original value and the value retrieved by lookup are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by - Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the lookup return value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select, CheckBox, Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. For example: a Select field "list of states", and a second one list of cities. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height. Help Settings Document the application. Create on-line instructions, describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Attributes: Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Hint - Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text - Display the specified help text beside the field. Radio Allows you to use in the form field an object of type radio. General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface. Attributes: Data Type - Radio is an object which allows the selection fof just an information of all that are shown by it. Search Label - Allow to define the field title in the search. Use same Label used on the Grid - Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid. Maximum Size - Maximum field size . SQL Type - Database Field type. Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. Attributes: Submit on OnChange - Allows when activated, to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. Show Condition - Allows when activated, to show or don't show the filter condition, the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. Edition Lookup Display a radio object list to use in the form (see manual lookup and automatic lookup ) . views on it. The values are retrieved with a Select Statement from a database table. . the developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field .Automatic Lookup used to display values in a Radio field. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. retrieving always two fields. Before Lookup After Lookup Lookup Method There are available two options: Automatic. display_field FROM table ".The query used to feed the checkbox object on the form application. Image1: Lookup type selection Edition Lookup .radio number of columns. Columns . It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables . based in a SQL statement to feed the list of values or Manual which is based on a custom entered list of values. Image2: Automatic Edition lookup Interface Attributes : SQL Select Statement . Title internal value .Forces a form reload upon selected field update. Edition Lookup . Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by.Manual Enables a radio object based on a list of values filled manually as an array. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value. Title .The object title or its default option displayed as the first line.The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected.Single column Radio double columns Radio Use Title . Image1: Manual Edition lookup Interface.Character used to separate the field value and the lookup return value. See picture bellow. Use Manual lookup when the database does not have a table with required information. .Display a different radio option in the field (See None on the image bellow ) referring to a value filled manually (Title Internal value ). Use specific connection.Displays the field value and the lookup return value. Display original and lookup value. Reload form when value has changed .Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project. Load lookup definitions .Define a selection default value. Update . Title .Saves the list values entered (for reuse with Load lookup definitions ).Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list. Insert . Value . Title internal value . Save .Forces a form reload upon selected field update. Remove . Display original and lookup value.Clear the attributes.The object title or its default option displayed as the first line.Display a different radio option in the field (See None on the image bellow ) referring to a value filled manually (Title Internal value ).Text displayed in the radio object. Default .Remove selected item. Columns .Define number of columns used to display the radio items. Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by.The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected. Use Title .Value store in the table. the value M is added upon selecting Male. For example.Attributes : Label . Reload form when value has changed .Character used to separate the field value and the lookup return value. Clear .Displays the field value and the lookup return value.Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. AJAX PROCESSING . Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value.Update selected item. . Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Font Color . Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. Font Size .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. For example: a Select field "list of states".Reloads other selection type fields (Select. Background color . CheckBox.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. and a second one list of cities. Bold . Horizontal Alignment . Border Size . text-bottom).Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. center or justify). text-top.Sets the field width.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. text-top. Border color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Underlined .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. super.Sets the title width.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font. HorizontalAlignment . top. Font Size .Sets the field height. right. bottom. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Background color . Border color . Bold . right. center or justify).Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Height .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. top.Sets the title height. Underlined .Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to increase the border size of the title.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Bold . Height . text-bottom). Font Color . sub. middle. Font Size . Underlined . Vertical Alignment .Used to apply bold type to the font. middle.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. bottom. . super. Vertical Alignment . Background color . sub. Border Size . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Width .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Width . right. Hint . super.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. text-bottom). Vertical Alignment .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Border color .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. sub. Create on-line instructions.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Used to increase the border size of the object. center or justify).Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Height . Attributes: Tooltip . middle. Width . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. bottom. Help Type: Pop-up . top. Help Settings Document the application.Sets the object width.Sets the object height.Border Size . . text-top. Horizontal Alignment . Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. . Grid Fields Image1: Field General Settings Interface. Search Label . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.It defines the field data type on the search. .Define the field height SQL Type. Use same Label used on the Grid .The field label used on the search.Allows to use the same field label used on the grid.SQL Field Type in the database. Attributes: Data type . Height . Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Font Size .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Sets the title height.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Field CSS Attributes: Font . Border color . top. middle.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. sub. text-top.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Underlined . Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Border Size .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Vertical Alignment . center or justify). Bold .Sets the field width. text-bottom). text-bottom). center or justify). Background color .Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. super. Border Size . sub.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. text-top.Used to increase the border size of the title. HorizontalAlignment . Font Color . top. right.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. bottom.Used to apply bold type to the font. Font Color . super. Width . Background color . Horizontal Alignment . right. middle. Border color .Used to apply bold type to the font. Height .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the field height.Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Vertical Alignment . Height . Bold .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Font Size .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. . Underlined . Width .Sets the title width. bottom. Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. . text-bottom).Used to increase the border size of the object. right. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Font Color . center or justify). describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Vertical Alignment .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Height . bottom. Border Size .Sets the object width. Border color . Width .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Underlined . Horizontal Alignment . Background color . Bold .Sets the object height.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. text-top.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Help Settings Document the application. Help Type: Pop-up . Font Size . super. middle.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Used to apply bold type to the font. top.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Attributes: Tooltip . sub. Create on-line instructions. Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text .Hint .Display the specified help text beside the field. . Use same Label used on the Grid . SQL Type .Database Field type.Sorting Image1: General Settings Interface.Maximum field size . Attributes: Data Type . ."Sorting Fields" is a new feature that enables to be selected the order fields (ORDER BY clause) that are part of the body of the Grid. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Allow to define the field title in the search.Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid. Search Label . Maximum Size . Border Size . Font Size . center or justify). right.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. top. text-bottom). middle.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Horizontal Alignment . Border color . super. Font Size . Vertical Alignment . right. bottom. Vertical Alignment .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. middle. Height .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Bold . Background color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. center or justify). HorizontalAlignment .Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the field width. Background color . text-bottom). Underlined . Border Size . bottom.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to apply bold type to the font. super. Font Color . top.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. text-top.Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color . Width . Font Color .Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. sub.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Title CSS Attributes: Font . .Sets the title width. Bold . Underlined .Sets the title height. Width .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. sub.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to increase the border size of the title.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Field CSS Attributes: Font . text-top. Height . bottom. Border color . right. Width . middle. text-bottom).Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the object width.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . center or justify).Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. top.Height . Help Settings Document the application. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Font Color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. sub. Help Type: Pop-up . Vertical Alignment . super. Font Size .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Sets the object height. Create on-line instructions.Sets the field height.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Border Size . Underlined . Background color .Used to apply bold type to the font. Horizontal Alignment . text-top. Attributes: Tooltip .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the object. Bold .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Hint . Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Use same Label used on the Grid .Database Field type. Maximum Size . Show Condition . Attributes: Case Settings . it provides the fulfillment of a field with more agility. Attributes: Data Type . to show or don't show the filter condition. using the technology Ajax.Allows when activated.Maximum field size. Submit on OnChange .Allows when activated. allow to fill a field with more agility.Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid. to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field.Text Auto-complete This data type is one of the great news of the ScriptCase5.Converts the field letters. Search Label.This type when selected.Allow to define the field title in the search. Edition Lookup . Image1: General Settings Interface. SQL Type . the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. Field's Behavior Image1: Field's Behavior Interface. Display label with the description .When this option is not selected.Qualquer parte e Final igual). Rows .Define the number of records displayed on each search. Display original and lookup value . for example. Permite determinar o modo de busca do texto(Início igual. Search options .Select a different connection. See an example in the link below. in the application is displayed only a field to data entry.Define the capture box width (Capture Text).Define the texts earch mode (Begin equals. Capture Text .Figure3: Edition Lookup Interface.Enter a select comand use to capture the text. Width .Allows you to display the label with the description. Any part.With this option disabled (=No) displays. only the name of the State in the Capture. End equals). Attributes: SQL Select Statement . Choose connection . AJAX PROCESSING . Title CSS Attributes: Font . Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. Font Size .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. . and a second one list of cities. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. For example: a Select field "list of states". DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. CheckBox.Reloads other selection type fields (Select. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. text-bottom). Font Color . Font Size .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color . bottom. text-top.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Vertical Alignment .Sets the title width. center or justify).Used to increase the border size of the title. Border Size .Used to apply bold type to the font. sub. Height .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. right. sub.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . bottom. Height . center or justify).Font Color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. super. Background color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Bold .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment .Used to apply bold type to the font. Background color .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. top.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Sets the field width.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Vertical Alignment .Sets the field height. Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Field CSS Attributes: Font . Underlined .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. middle. super. Width . Font Color . Font Size .Sets the title height. Background color . Bold . right.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. text-bottom). top. Width .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Underlined .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Border Size . Border color . text-top. middle. center or justify). text-bottom).Used to increase the border size of the object. middle.object using a color palette.Sets the object height. . text-top. top.Sets the object width.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Bold . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Create on-line instructions.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Border Size . super.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Help Type: Pop-up . bottom. Hint . Width .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Vertical Alignment . sub.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Height . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Help Settings Document the application. Attributes: Tooltip .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Underlined . Border color .Used to apply bold type to the font. right. Horizontal Alignment . .Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. Attributes: Submit on OnChange . Use same Label used on the Grid . Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. to show or don't show the filter condition. Image1: General Settings Interface. allow to fill a field with more agility. Show Condition .This type when selected. Attributes: Data Type . it provides the fulfillment of a field with more agility. That is. Search Label . the label is a field nickname in the application layer. to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field.Number Auto-complete This data type is one of the great news of the ScriptCase5.Allows when activated. Maximum Size . For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_number. the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. SQL Type .Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid.Define the application field title.Maximum field size . Edition Lookup .Allows when activated.if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Number. using the technology Ajax.Database Field type. Capture Text . Attributes: SQL Select Statement .Qualquer parte e Final igual). Display original and lookup value . Any part. AJAX PROCESSING .Define the texts earch mode (Begin equals. Width . Rows .Select a different connection. Choose connection . only the name of the State in the Capture. Permite determinar o modo de busca do texto(Início igual.Allows you to display the label with the description. End equals).When this option is not selected.Enter a select comand use to capture the text. in the application is displayed only a field to data entry.Figure3: Edition Lookup Interface.Define the capture box width (Capture Text). for example. Display label with the description . See an example in the link below. Search options .With this option disabled (=No) displays.Define the number of records displayed on each search. Font Color . Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. Background color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. and a second one list of cities.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Reloads other selection type fields (Select. For example: a Select field "list of states". Bold . Font Size . Title CSS Attributes: Font . CheckBox. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. .Used to apply bold type to the font. Background color . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Underlined . Bold . Width . Font Size . Vertical Alignment . center or justify). text-bottom). Border Size . super.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the field width.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Background color . Border color . right.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size . Border color .Used to increase the border size of the title. Width . middle.Sets the title height. Height .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Border Size . Border Size .Underlined . Font Color . middle. bottom. sub. center or justify).Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to increase the border size of the object. Bold .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. text-bottom). .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. bottom.Used to apply bold type to the font. right.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. sub. Underlined . Font Color . Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Height . Vertical Alignment .Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. text-top.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. super. top.Sets the title width. Horizontal Alignment . text-top. top.Sets the field height. super. center or justify). Width . text-bottom). middle. bottom.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Height .Sets the object width. Horizontal Alignment . right.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Hint .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Create on-line instructions. Vertical Alignment .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Attributes: Tooltip . sub.Border color . Help Type: Pop-up .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the object height. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Help Settings Document the application.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. top. text-top. . Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. . Rules can be added and with this feature is possible to save search forms criteria by user login.Save Criteria This resource allows to organize search profiles. so it is possible to save a search form with criteria to be used afterwards. Image1: Save Criteria Interface Image2: New/Edit Rules Interface . it creates the option Save Criteria in the Search application. Application Settings In this configuration the are the common attributes to the created applications through the ScriptCase. Image Directory . Language . Attributes: Application code .Defines a specific charset used in the application. all the hints and messages will be put inside the chosen language.The absolute path where the application documents are stored. Image1: Interface of Application Configuration.Option to use the old pdf exporter (in java) or the new exporter(webkit). Documents Path . Description .Shares location with other applications based on the session values. this code can be renamed through the main menu.Application code determined in the moment of the application creation.Language of the generated application.This field can be used to describe of the application objectives. Charset . . without using macro sc_image.To Use in business rules implemention.The base directory where the application images are stored. Share theme variable . Application Images . Use old PDF exporter .Shares theme with other applications based on the session values. following we will describe this attributes. Share location variable . SQL Error . Attributes: Script Error .Allow that other users of the group edit the application. .Folder where the application will be stored in the workspace.Allow to show the information of the script and the line where the error occurred.Folder .Time of execution timeout in seconds. Debug Mode . Ajax Error Output .It opens a window with the ajax output.Allow to show the SQL command which originated the error. Zero is the standard value of the PHP. Timeout . showing the SQL Command in the moment of its using.Run the application in debug mode. HelpCase Link .Associate a this application to a page of project documentation. Edit Project . Image 2: Interface of Error Settings. which is used to store the URL of the current application. Attributes: Exit URL .Specify the URL to which the user will be redirected upon exiting the aplication.Navigation Define the navigation attributes of an application. Redirecting Variable . Figure 1: Navigation interface.Variable name. Close Window . .URL to which the user will be redirected in case a global variable is not available inside the application for any reason is not avaliable. this global is most commonly used to filter the form in the SQL menu. Redirecting URL . close the browser window.When exiting the application. These variables should be passed to the application that is being implemented through one of the methods (Session. the global variable is a external parameter required to application execution.Defines variables behavior. Post.In this option the variable must be created as a session variable in the PHP by other application before the search call which is being defined.Global Variables GLOBAL VARIABLE This menu shows the global variables being used within the application. if has been defined that a variable is received by a Post Method and it has been passed by get method the content won't be accepted. Value . Variable passing methods : Session . this content is subdivided in three blocks. The application may contain global variables in the Where Clause.Variable name in the application. created by special fields.Defines how the variable is received by the application. Select the way it is passed to the Control application. Shows all global variables used in the application. Image 2: Variables Settings Interface. in Lookups. Get . being visible to the browser. Attribute .Defines that the variable must be passed through the post method of the form. etc. customername from customers where customerid ='[v_customerid]' In this case. they are: Scope . Post . or entering a variable in Application General Data field to replace the field name. Get) Image 1: Global Variables Interface. . that means. Global variables are defined in square brackets ([variable]). Example: Select customerid. the variables "v_customerid" appears in the variables configuration.Defines that the variable must be passed by the HTML command line. Do not validate (checking) the variable at execution time.Settings . Description. a form requesting the input variables used by the application is displayed. Type (Input/Output) .Defines if the variable is an input or an output. .Determines where the variable was defined. At execution time in the development environment. Using a link between a grid and a form update the grid record. See more: How to link a grid with another. It is also possible to create links to import data from other applications in search forms. How to edit grid records linked with form. menus and forms. control applications. Application Link Field Link Capture Link .Links Grid Links Links are used to navigate between project applications. From a grid it is possible to create links with other grids. . Used to edit the grid records through a form. Application . . In the generated grid a link record is displayed on each line . Capture .New Link The image below is displayed by selecting the New Link option from ScriptCase´s application menu. In the search is displayed an icon next to the field. to edit the Field . In this link type a field is used as a link between the grid and other applications.Used to import data from other grid to a search field.Used to link it to any other type of application. in the same window or in a new window). the selected form is displayed according to selected format (in an iframe. Application: Select the form application called by the grid. In the generated grid a link will appear on each line to edit the record. Parameters definition .Application Image1: Selecting link type. Used to edit the grid records through a form. Clicking in the link. Applications List Image2: List of Applications. Link Properties Image4: Link Properties Interface. Another window is open to display the form . right or left to the grid. The form is displayed in an frame. Select on the right side.Image3: Parameters Definition Interface. in the left side. below.Used to pass a global variable value. Link Operation Mode .The button New is displayed on the grid´s toolbar to add new records. global variables).Used to pass a grid field value as parameter. the form display substitute the grid). Enter the selected option to customize the link properties. Link Properties The image below display the attributes that define the link behavior.The options are: Mode Open in the same window Open in another window Open in Iframe Description Display the form in the same browser window.Used to pass a fixed value as parameter. the value to pass to the parameter. used by the grid as parameter. in the same page. On the image above is displayed. (in another page. Value .No value is passed as a parameter. Variable . the application form parameters (primary key. The options are: Field . Display the New button on the grid . above. . Empty . Enable the navigation buttons (First .Enable the buttons New and Insert in form. Enable Navigation buttons . Enable Update button . Last) in form. Options are: Bellow.Define the shortcut key to the add New button. Enable Delete button . Right and Left. Action Refresh current page Navigate the grid to the last page . Next. Form Properties Select the buttons to be displayed in form. Previous.Enable the delete button in form. Enable button to edit a grid record - Iframeproperties .Called form exit URL. Enable Insert button .Iframe Width in pixels.Iframe Height in pixels IframeWidth . Iframe position relative to the main application .Display form header. Default address (back button) is the calling grid.See table below: Attribute Reload the grid Move to the grid end IframeHeight . Display the called application header .End the link wizard. Above. Called application exit URL .Shortcut Key to the New button .Displayed only when Link Operation Mode is Open in Iframe. Save Button .The form is displayed together with the grid application according to selected position. Action after insert .Enable the Update button in form. The image below display all the project applications (menus. (See Select Fields ). Select the form application called by the grid.Field Image1: Selecting link type. When you select link type field. tabs and control forms. . Applications List Image2: Link between application Interface. forms.Field Link Links . reports pdf. Used to create a link from grid field to any existing project application. search. grid. a drop down list is displayed with all fields available (displayed) in the grid for selection. below.Used to pass a grid field value as parameter. global variables). the application form parameters (primary key. Link Properties Image5: Link Properties Interface.Used to pass a global variable value. Called application exit URL: Called form exit URL. Variable . Value . On the image above is displayed.Message displayed when mouse is dragged over the linking field. above.in the left side. Empty .Parameters definition Image4: Parameters Definition Interface. Select on the right side. used by the grid as parameter. (in another page. Link Properties The image below display the attributes that define the link behavior. . Default address (back button) is the calling grid.The options are: Mode Open in same window Open in another window Open in Iframe Description Display the form in the same browser window. right or left to the grid.No value is passed as a parameter. in the same page. Enter the selected option to customize the link properties. the value to pass to the parameter. Link Operation Mode . The form is displayed in an frame.Used to pass a fixed value as parameter. Another window is open to display the form . The options are: Field . Link hint . the form display substitute the grid). Previous.Iframe Height in pixels IframeWidth .Iframe Width in pixels. Save Button .Enable the delete button in form. . Options are: Bellow. Next.Sets the link title in the application. Allow to select the buttons displayed in the form.End the link wizard.The form is displayed together with the grid application according to selected position. Iframeproperties . Form Property These options are displayed only when the called application is a form.Enable the navigation buttons (First . Enable Insert button. Enable Navigation buttons. Used when there is more then one link in the same field. Above. Enable Update button .Enable the Update button in form .Displayed only when Link Operation Mode is Open in Iframe Iframe position relative to the main application . Last) in form.Label .Enable the buttons New and Insert in form. Right and Left. Enable Delete button. IframeHeight . a list with the fields search form is displayed. Select a grid application according to the search form field that receives the data.Capture Image1: Capture Link The capture link is used specifically in the grid search form. When capture link type is selected. Choose a field to receive data through the link. Applications List Image3:Applications List Interface In the image above a list with project available grid applications is displayed.Capture Link Links . This type of link imports data from another grid to the field search form. Parameters definition . Variable .This options is displayed when the called grid have a parameter to pass (for example Where clause with a global variable). The options are: Fixed .Select a called grid field.Used to pass a fixed value as parameter. Fetch field value: . used by the grid as parameter.Used to pass a global variable value. Save Button . This field have the value received by the search form. .End the link wizard. Empty.Image4: Parameters Definition Interface. Enter the values to pass to the parameters .No value is passed as a parameter. Edit a Link Delete Delete a link . Actions Properties Link Editing the link properties.Editing Image1: Links Menu In the Connections folder in the of application menu (Image1)are displayed the links existent in the application and the item New Connection.Editing Links Links . When an existent link name is selected the image below is displayed allowing it to be edit. Programming Overview ScriptCase has incorprated the concept of Object Oriented programming. . using attributes. It is possible to create your own business rules in applications. and by using these concepts you can reap huge rewards in terms of better organization and improved development. resources. methods and libraries. Attributes: Attributes . Click the clean button to clean the attributes list.Attributes Attributes are variables containing a global variable passed from one application to another. Image 1: Attribute Settings interface. To modify it click on the attribute's name (located to the left of the buttons) and click the Update button to save your changes. To remove an attribute.Enter the attribute's name and click on the include button to add it. . An attribute can be referenced in all of the methods and events of an application. click on the delete button after selecting the atribute. To manage libraries.g. Public Libraries. .Libraries To use a library you need to select the corresponding library type (e. access them via the main menu: Configuration ==> Libraries. All methods in the library are visible in all application events and methods. Project Libraries or User Libraries) and enable the applicable php library file(s). Figure 3: Adding a Method. 2 Methods may involve parameters being passed. to support the implementation of business rules for an application. Define the name for the new method then click the Create button. click the 'Var' button: . See the Figure below. Figure 1: Method menu interface. 1. To include a parameter variable in a method.Methods Methods are functions or procedures declared by the developer. Creating a new method Figure 2: Create a new Method. Using methods in applications it is possible to reuse code and thus improve development productivity. It is possible to create PHP and JAVASCRIPT methods. To Edit a parameter variable in a method.Figure 4: Parameter Variable icon. Add the number of variables: Figure 5: Define Parameters interface Defining a variable: Figure 6: Add Parameters interface. * References allow you to create a second name for a variable so you can use it to read or modify the original data stored in that variable. Type: Select the variable type as: For value or For reference. * 10270 Value Default: The default value used to initialize the parameter variable when called. Name: Input a variable name. click the button: . Edit the variable selected in the Parameters field.Figure 7: Define Method Parameters interface. Delete the variable selected in the Parameters field. 3 In order to run a method. See how simple it is to call the method in the example below: Using a method : Figure 9: Event method interface Thus we get the following result when running the application. Unmark all parameter variables selected in the Parameters field. In this example we are using the onLoad event to call our method when the record is loaded. it needs to be called within an event. Select all parameter variables in the Parameters field. See the example below: Figure 8: Events. . . UPDATE and DELETE) or using stored procedures.Form Applications Overview Forms Application This application type updates information in the database using web forms. See the different formats in the image below. Single Record Multiple Records Editable Grid Editable Grid (view) The created form applications have many build-in features the table below list some examples according to the features: Feature Description . The update may be direct (INSERT. A form can be displayed in several formats. It can edit a single record or multiple records in a single page. Fields Format According to the field type required validation are generated as well as different formats area available. Criticisms are automatically generated according to the definition. Procedures Use stored procedures for data manipulation. Master / Detail Update various related tables in a single page. The form events are triggered during the processing in the server or by the browser (AJAX).Hidden Fields Hide fields in forms display while update field. Required Fields Fields with obligatory entry. Update link table Handles N:N relations in a single form. Form applications examples: . primary keys are automatically defined as required Fields. Events Programming Allow the developer to add business rules in PHP code. Read-Only Fields Fields are displayed but update are not allowed. Unique Key Define unique keys with update validation. Links creation Link a form with other applications. Values must be entered. Dependencies Define form table dependencies. . Form Settings In this module are congregated diverse configurations linked to the exhibition format of the form application.It allows to break the line of the Titles Display Line Number (Editable Grid and Editable Grid View) . Horizontal Alignment . Attributes: Orientation .Define if the update mode of the Editable Grid (view) will open in a modal window. Table Width .Amount of registers shown for inclusion.It allows to display the line number Pagination (not available to Single Record) . bottom) in pixels. can be: unique register and multiple registers.This parameter define the table columns width.Define the magins of the form(right. Editable Grid View: A record can be edited only if open the edit box of a record. Percentage. Table Columns . . See the image below each row represents a record in the table. See in the image below that each line represents a register in the table. Image1: Interface Configuration.Measurement unit used to the table width defined in the previous item. Single Record: Edit/Add a register per time. Multiple Records: Multiple records can be edited at a time.This parameter define the table width of the application.Allow to define the alignment of the application in the page. Lines for inclusion (Multiple Records). See the image below each row represents a record in the table. Margins .Amount of lines of registers per page. left. Use Modal (Editable Grid View) .Orientation of the registers in the form. Table Width Unit .Define how to display the records in the screen. All records in the screen or using pagination. top. Lines per page (not available to Single Record) . Editable Grid: Some registers can be edited per time. pixel or automatic. Line Breaks in Title . Advance the focus to the next field after completing the maximum number of characters allowed in the field. Focus on field with error . Highlight Text upon focus .Focus on the first field with an error when submiting the form.Define the modal window width. . If any validation errors occur.Modal Width (Editable Grid View) . the focus will advance to the first field with an error.Define the modal window height. if the "use modal" option is enabled. if the "use modal" option is enabled. Layout and Behavior Automatic tab .Highlight field contents when the field receives focus.Use the "Enter" key to tab from one field to the next field.Field that receives focus when the application is loaded. Use Enter to tab . Modal Height (Editable Grid View) . Field with initial focus . datetime and IP. This option allows you to set a default value to the field. Remember: Fields are grouped in Blocks and Blocks are grouped in Pages.Indicates that there is a Block in the application. It is not available for Grid Applications.4 .Data type . 5 .Form option. 4.Edit Fields The Edit Fields options was included to Scriptcase on the version six. 2 .This contains all fields that will not be displayed in the generated application. 4.6 . 4. 4.Check the checkbox to specify that the field must be displayed when entering a new record (Addition mode).Defines if the field will become a read-only field.5 .Check the checkbox to specify that the field must be displayed when editing a record (Edition mode).7 . Select the desired data type from the dropdown box. Options: 1 . date. such as autoincrement. date. 7 . 4.Block . An application may have multiple pages.DB Value (Insert) .Label .3 . Note: Please note that each line is draggable. This allows you to define the position of fields. If only one field is selected it will work as a regular primary key.This allows the change of the field's type. this way it cannot be edited. which are arranged as high-level tabs.Fields . Each page can contain one or more blocks.2 .PK .This option defines whether it is to be given internal values to the selected field when inserting a new record. . Not available for Grid Applications 4.Indicates that there is a Page in the application.1 . such as autoincrement. 4 .Required .This column is used to show the field's name. this new menu option groups the most commonly used field configuration for all fields at the same place. 3 .Page .Column to edit the field's label displayed in the generated application. Display Available just to Forms and Control applications. if two or more fields were selected it will work as a composite key. datetime and IP.Read-Only .Update .Page: Fields not shown .Defines if the field will become a required field.New . 6 .This option defines whether it is to be given internal values to the selected field when updating a record.Will set a field or fields as a primary key for the application. 4. blocks and pages by dragging fields up or down to a different block or page.DB Value (Update) . Figure 1: Edit Fields Interface. .Indicates where the marker will be displayed in relation to the field.Determine whether or not to display a message upon validation. Options: Markers Positioning .Figure 2: Display Interface. Display message . Figure 1: Select Fields. . The list on the right displays which fields will be displayed in the application (select a field and click on the right arrow to include it in the form). Note: The list on the left displays all fields retrieved from the SQL select query for the application.Select Fields Fields Positioning Defines which fields are displayed in the application. .Unique Key Its provide validation of unique key at web server side. A button can even be in both parts simultaneously. The selection of these buttons vary according to the form application. The selection of these buttons vary according to the form application. Attributes: Navigation .Display the buttons that can be shown in the form anad used for navigation. Image1: Interface of toolbar.Toolbar The toolbar is divided in two parts: top and bottom. Update .Display the buttons that can be shown in the form and used for data update. Button Settings Image2: Button Settings Interface. It is possible to select the buttons for each part independently. . General Help .Define the label displayed on the button. Is possible to define a help text to each field and a icon is displayed in the block title bar linked to the help page.Attributes: Button . Hint .Button name.Group help by block.Allows to define fast acess keys using the keyboard. Attributes: JS Formatting . OPTIONS Image3: Interface of Tool Options."Consolidates" all field help in a unique page linked to the help page.Define a hint for the button. . Help by Block . Label . Access Key .Use automatic filed format . Image 1: Log Interface. All Fields . Events .Use all fields in the log.Which event the log will save the application changes. Options: Scheme .Log New interface included in the V6.Scheme of log to be used for the application. . It will allow the user to change the log's configuration for the application. ). Image3: HTML Print Interface. Configurable PDF . Image1: PDF Settings Interface.Export This screen allows to configure the PDF file generated by the form.Selecting the print mode (color): Both. Open PDF directly . HTML Print Configure the HTML format of the grid. Print type . Attributes: PDF Orientation .Define the PDF form type (letter.Opens the generated PDF file without displaying an intermediated link page. Black and White and Colorful.Defining the printing mode: colorful or economic. Attributes: Print Type .Allows the user to configure the PDF parameters during the application. Print Background . JS Execution Time .Allow the user to print the PDF with the background or not. PDF Format . Print Background .Show Background printing HTML. etc. A4.Define the printing orientation: Picture or Landscape. .The max execution time to wait the JS proccess. None .Give or remove the attribute from the primary key of the field. Image1: Interface of SQL Configuration. See how the buttons act: On/Off Button . the user will must do this identification. that indicates what are the fields that compose the primary key of the SQL table. By default the records are ordered by primary key. for the cases that this don't happen. In the majority cases.Define all fields as primary key. filters. Order By . putting it in the desired ordinance. Choosing the fields that are primary key . the Scriptcase identifies it. These fields become to present an asterisk at the left side of its name.Show the connection name (database) that the application is using for its execution. The defined field as primary key presents an asterisk at the left side of its name. All Button .Remove all fields. To order click on the field and use the arrows to do the movement Where Condition .Table name that the form application is using. . Allow to order the fields of the primary key. Ordinance Buttons .Allows the user write an ORDER BY clause that will determine the order of the records. Normally it is used to clean all definitions of the On/Off and restart the process.They are the arrows that stay at the right side of the combobox. We can define the primary key. using the buttons beside to do the choose of the key.Option to the user enter the WHERE clause to filter sql records. ordinances for the create form.Sql In this module are defined the attributes relative to the connection with the table in that the form was created. Table Name . Connection . this connection can be traded for another that have the same tables (SQL).In this function it is shown an combobox object with an asterisk beside. Case Sensitive . The second field must be filled with the part of the table name to be traded.Set it to "No" only if the database is configured for case-sensitive and it is desired that the filter does not respect this setting.These filled fields allows that part of the table name defined in the select to be traded before the execution of the command by a content of a variable. Note: In the first field you must fill it with the variable name. .Variable for Table . Image1: Fields with Sort. just by clicking on the column name (field) to order it. Note: Use the function on/off to include or remove a field. The application fields are sorted at running time. . the six first fields already come checked (with an asterisk at the field left side). By default breaks are respected in the fields sort.Sorting Define the sorting of the fields. Also by default. Let's mark the first option: “I want to use Procedure to do INSERT”. UPDATE and DELETE. we click on the button save to finalize this process. and exclusion. being thus the options that are not configured to use procedures will continue with the Scriptcase standard that are the commands INSERT. update.Procedures In this module we can configure a form application so that it use Stored Procedure (defined by the database) in the operations of insertion.Now we define the fields that will be reference to the parameters of the Stored Procedure. See below pass-by-pass the implementation if a Stored Procedure for Insertion in the Database. inform the procedure name and the amount of parameters. Afterwards. Image2: Defining procedure parameters. 2. . It isn't necessary to use the three options at the same time. as like the type of each parameter (input or output). Image3: Passing of values to the Stored Procedure. Afterwards. Image1: Interface of Stored Procedures for Form. 1. Occurs always that the object lose focus and the value is modified. etc). Choose event. See example Events linked to the form .In this combobox we must choose the event associated to the field.Always that the mouse pointer goes out of the field.Javascript The concept of Edit Javascript is to associate to the form fields events in Javascript.This event occurs when the page is loaded. OnLoad .Occurs on the mouse click over the field See Example onblur . previous. In this screen we can type customized javascript actions or we can use default Scriptcase events.Occurs always that the mouse pointer is over the field.The events below are directly linked to the form.In this combobox are shown all fields that are part of the form application. for whom we will write the Javascript code. See example onChange . See example onMouseOut . when you navigate from a register to other. insert. then click on the button "Edit" opening a window to edit the javascript action that will be executed when the selected event is actioned.Occurs when the objects lose focus. for each field you can edit actions associated to its events. as the object form “form”. . that means. OnSubmit . See example onFocus . “update” and “remove” Edit Javascript Selecting the object and its event. See example onMouseOver . Image1: Edit Javascript Interface Attributes: Choose the object . for example: nm_reload_form().Occurs always that the object gains focus.This event occurs when click on the buttons “insert”. that means. See the available events: onclick . When click on the buttons (new. that do a reload on the form. value.disabled = true.payway [document.background='FCEEBC' } Note: To access a field of the radio time it is necessary to use an index.value = document.F1.aux_maternity . document.parcelvalue.selectedIndex].sex[1]. } onChange examples: When modify the “Salary” of an employee and go out of the field.tp_folha[0].parcelvalue. } if (document.F1.purchasevalue. OnClick Example: When click on a field of the radio type can be turned on/off a series of form fields according to the selected value. if(document. in this moment we use advantage to check if the “position” is “gardener”. document.F1. document. the javascript code below calculates the value of the parcel.F1.disabled = false.value / 2.F1. Save the javascript command clicking on the button "update".F1.value > '20') { alert("job hour above the allowed.F1. will occur an “onChange”.00 && document. } After informing the value of the purchase and select the modality of the payment in an object of the “Select: type payment_way”. OnBlur Example: We can define a criteria around the field “weekly_hour_job” when it loose focus.aux_maternity.position.text == '30/60/90') { .value = document. document.").F1.F1.salary.Image2: Interface of Javascript Edition.F1.F1.F1.weekly_hour_job.value = "".weekly_hour_job.weekly_hour_job.checked){ document.F1.style.F1.F1. if(document. we recommend to make tests in different browsers.checked && document. if (document.purchasevalue.payment_way.sex[0].text == '30/60') { document.selectedIndex].payway[document. If it's necessary to type a complex rotine using Javascript.F1.payway[document. Note: Javascript language doesn't have the same behavior to each browser available in the market.F1.style. } if (document.F1.selectedIndex].payment_way.F1.value > 5000.focus().checked){ document.F1.aux_maternity.value == 'gardener'){ alert('when you grow i want to be a gardener').payment_way. if (document.text == 'avista') { document.F1.aux_maternity.F1.background='FFFFFF' } if(document. parcelvalue.document.F1.bgColor = "0FFCCA" onMouseOut example: Set a background color when the mouse loose focus of the field.F1.field_name. document.field_name.value / 3. etc.style. document.value = document.F1.purchasevalue.F1. font color. } onMouseOver Example: We can trade the stile (background color.style.bgColor = "FFFFFF" .) when the mouse is over the field. Click on the button new dependency.Now we just need to define if it will just show an error message or it will make a cascade delete. it means tables that exist dependences. It is possible to remove a register from the Orders table and all its items.First we must define a new dependence. 3º . Lets see how to do it. In this example only one field will be related that it is the customer id. 2º . such as the tables: orders and items.We must select the dependent table and inform the amount of fields related between the father and child table.Then we must select the key fields: customers -> CustomerID .orders ->CustomerID. 4º .Dependencies This resource allows to associate tables. 1 . . In this example we will create a dependency between Orders (Dependent table) and the table Customer (Current application). . sc_apl_status('grid_products'. sc_apl_status('form_products'.Security Attribute: Use Security: With this option selected.'on'). In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user). sc_apl_status('form_categories'. sc_apl_status('form_categories'. Example 1: Activating an application called grid_categories. insert the following macro call: sc_apl_status('grid_categories'.'off'). sc_apl_status('form_products'. sc_apl_status('grid_products'. Access to applications may be granted through a control application to authenticate users.'on'). the application is only accessible when enabled using the sc_apl_status macro. } .'on').'on').'on'). In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user). insert the following code: // two users: john and mary with permission to access different applications if({userid} == 'john') { sc_apl_status('grid_categories'. See the examples below.'on').'on').'off'). Example 2: Creating a rule to authenticate by user type in a login form containing a field called userid. } else{ sc_error_message("Unauthorized user!"). Disabled applications display the message "Unauthorized user" when accessed. } elseif({userid} == 'mary') { sc_apl_status('grid_categories'. If the password is not entered correctly. Disable the options Enable use of security and Enable Use of Password in the Configuration menu | My ScriptCase. enter the following code: URL output safety (denied access URL redirection): It redirects the user to this URL. It requires direct user interaction. (See image below). CAPTCHA This is a feature used to increase the level of security in the form. In the login application onValidate event. Use Password: An application password setting is required. an "Unauthorized user" message is displayed. CAPTCHA means "Completely Automated Public Turing test to tell Computers and Humans Apart". through the entry of a random sequence of characters. In the development environment it is possible to suppress the above steps purely for testing purposes.Example 3: Authenticating applications using a database table. thereby avoiding repeated password requests (or access denied) for each application execution. Read more: Using CAPTCHA on a login form . displayed on a dynamically generated image. At run time a text box is displayed requiring the access password. if he does not have access to the application. Error message displayed when the user input does not match the generated image. Font Size . Error message . List . .Use CAPTCHA .This option allows the developer to set how the CAPTCHA should be displayed in the application.Number of characters displayed in the automatically generated image. Height . Width .Captcha font size Reload .Characters to be used in the generated image.Width of the generated image in pixels.Option for the user to request a new code. Label .Enable CAPTCHA in the application.Height of the generated image in pixels.Message containing instructions on how to use the CAPTCHA feature. Select one layout . Quantity . in the left side of the “Form” folder. just complete the others fields of this window and click on the button Save. in the existing list. Being thus. after the choose of the data type.Fields Overview This interface allow to inform the validation rules abd formatting of the content of each form field . Afterwards. Image1: List of fields. Compile or Run. For each Data type selected will be formated a window with diferent characteristics. where must verify if in the field Data type the value attributed by ScriptCase through the SQL table analysis is according to the existing content. . Done this. Example: A field of type Text have diferent characteristics of a field of date type. the user will must select in the list (combobox) an adjusted type to the content of its field. the formatting of the screen will be according to the chosen type. the system opens a screen at the right side of this list. In case that it isn't. The configuration of the form fields is done clicking on the field to be formated. Text General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface Attributes: Data type . it accept letters.Width or chars quantity displayed on input object.The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Width . Watermark .Uses the server date.Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Defined Value . System Date .Transforms the input type field to password. Initial Value .Allows to show an image when validating a field.Creates a watermark in the input object. numbers. Password field . . Label . characters. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value.Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. When the field is defined as text. Validation Image . Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. Initial Value (Type).Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button.Define the application field type. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Hidden Field . in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). Field is filed from left to complete the size defined on Field Size in Database.Defines the field display mask.9999 999 9999. (0-9) A Replaced by any alpha charactere entered by the user. The replacement occurs during data entry when amout of characters exceeds the smaller masks size. For example. Field Mask . Label Field .Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Field size in database . Note: It is possible to combine two or more masks simultaneously.1234 A999A999A999.Shows an error if the end-user don't enter a complete mask. separated by semicolon with the larger mask starting it.0-9) entered by the user. (A-Z. Variable Name . Complete to the Left .Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).a-z) * Replaced by any alphanumeric character (A-Z.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information.(99) 9999-9999. Examples: Field Telephone number Software Key (Only letters) Software Key (Letters and Numbers) Car Plate Scriptcase's serial key Multiple Masks (Telephone) Mask +99 99 9999 9999 AAAA-AAAAAAAA-AAAA ****-****-****-**** Value entered 123456789012 Value formatted +12 34 5678 9012 QWERTYUIASDFGHJKQWER-TYUIASDF-GHJK Q1W2E3R4T5Y6U7I8 Q1W2-E3R4T5Y6-U7I8 AAA . There are three masks types available and they can be merged: CharacterDescription 9 Replaced by any numeric character entered by the user.Only displays the field value.Max length used when updating the table field. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute .a-z.Text field Password field Save Variable .+99 99 9999-9999 Validate with Mask .Defines the character used to complete the field selected.9999 QWE1234 QWE .D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111**** DG2P 9999-9999. Does not allow updates. Minimum Size . Allowed Characters .HTML object used to display the field on generated form. The letters a b c (defined in the Less attribute) are not accepted. Selected . Using the settings below the field accepts letter. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". Values Format Image1: Values Format Interface. Uppercase all Capitalizes each word (converts the first words letter of every to capital letter).Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode".Disable Field .Select and define the character set accepted: All .Defined the maximum size accepted.Converts the field text depending on the option: Uppercase Converts all text to capital letters.Define the character set accepted. HTML Type .Define the field type in the database. Uppercase first Capitalizes only first word (converts only the word first letter of the first word to capital letter).Accepts all characters. Lowercase Converts all text to lower case. numbers and " / " (defined in the More attribute).Defined the minimum size accepted. Attributes: Case Settings . SQL Type . . Max length. User IP . if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) . Image1: Database value interface. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser).DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction.The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Database Defined . .Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. Image1: Grid Lookup.The field in SQL table is filled with (null). Insert Date . It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user. Defined value . See an example in the image below.You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var].When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. Very useful to passing parameters. Auto increment (automatic) . Null . The field is not used in the process of updating.The field value is assigned by the database . For example: will be updated through a trigger.The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. SQL Statement . .Field automatic validation based in the lookup.Font size used to display the lookup.Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup.Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. and a second one list of cities. Font Color .SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. For example. Choose connection . Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected.Font type used to display the lookup. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . For example: a Select field "list of states". Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours.When selected enable the Grid lookup. CheckBox. to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font . EOFMessage . AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select. Font Size .Run SQL statement in different connection. Attributes: Use lookup to display field description .Message displayed when no info is retrieved. To use in Validation . Used to increase the border size of the title.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to apply bold type to the font. Font Size . sub. Font Size . bottom. center or justify).Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment .Sets the title height.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Vertical Alignment . Background color . Width .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Border color . text-bottom). Height .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. text-top. Border Size .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. right. super. Font Color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Underlined .Sets the title width. middle.Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Bold . . top. Height .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. bottom. Underlined . center or justify).Sets the object width. right.Used to apply bold type to the font. Font Size . bottom. Border Size .Sets the field width. center or justify). super. text-top.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Font Color . Help Settings Document the application. Underlined . text-bottom). sub. Height .Sets the object height. middle. Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the object.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. right.Used to apply bold type to the font. Create on-line instructions. middle. super. Border color . Background color . Width . Font Color . .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold . top. Bold . sub. Width . HorizontalAlignment . Border color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. text-top.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Background color . Vertical Alignment . text-bottom).Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to increase the border size of the field. top. Vertical Alignment .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Sets the field height.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Border Size . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Hint .Display the specified help text beside the field. Attributes: Tooltip .Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text . .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Help Type: Pop-up . . Lines . It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality.Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute.Allows to configure the field height defining the lines quantity.Creates a watermark in the input object. Watermark . characters. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen.Uses the server date. When the field is defined as text. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Attributes: Data type .Multiple Lines Text General Settings Image1: General SettingsInterface. Initial Value . numbers. Width . .Width or chars quantity displayed on input object.Define the application field type.Field title in application. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. it accept letters. Label . Defined Value .The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. System Date . Initial Value (Type). Attributes: Case Settings . Lowercase Converts all text to lower case. Hidden Field .Max length used when updating the table field.HTML object used to display the field on generated form.Select and define the character set accepted: All .Save Variable .Converts the field text depending on the option: Uppercase Converts all text to capital letters.Defined the minimum size accepted. .Defined the maximum size accepted. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field . Minimum Size . Values Format Image1: Values Format Interface. in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". Variable Name .Define the field type in the database.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. For example.Accepts all characters.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Does not allow updates.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). HTML Type . Uppercase all Capitalizes each word (converts the first words letter of every to capital letter).Only displays the field value. Allowed Characters . SQL Type . Label Field . Field size in database . Max length.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Uppercase first Capitalizes only first word (converts only the word first letter of the first word to capital letter).Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). The field is not used in the process of updating. Null . Database Defined . User IP .Define the character set accepted.The field in SQL table is filled with (null). Using the settings below the field accepts letter. numbers and " / " (defined in the More attribute). This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. . Very useful to passing parameters. DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. Insert Date . For example: will be updated through a trigger. if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) . Defined value .The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application.When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server.The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. The letters a b c (defined in the Less attribute) are not accepted.You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var].The field value is assigned by the database . It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user. Auto increment (automatic) . Image1: Database value interface.Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar.Selected . SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database.Message displayed when no info is retrieved.See an example in the image below. To use in Validation . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. EOFMessage . Font Size .Font size used to display the lookup. to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font . Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard .Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. Font Color . Attributes: Use lookup to display field description . Image1: Grid Lookup.Run SQL statement in different connection. For example. Choose connection .Field automatic validation based in the lookup.When selected enable the Grid lookup. .Font type used to display the lookup. SQL Statement . Underlined . Title CSS Attributes: Font . right.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to increase the border size of the title. Font Size .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Color .Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. center or justify).Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Border color . text-top.Used to apply bold type to the font. middle. Vertical Alignment . sub. top.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment . Width .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Field CSS Attributes: Font . super. .Sets the title width.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Bold . bottom. Font Size .Sets the title height. Height .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. text-bottom). Background color . Bold . Border Size . text-bottom). Width . sub. Vertical Alignment .Sets the field height.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment . Vertical Alignment .Background color . center or justify). bottom.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. bottom.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. super. Underlined . Height . right.Sets the field width.Sets the object height. middle.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. right. center or justify). Font Color . Font Size . HorizontalAlignment .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to increase the border size of the field. Help Settings Document the application. Background color .Used to apply bold type to the font. sub. Width . Height . Create on-line instructions.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. text-bottom).Used to increase the border size of the object. middle. top. Bold .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the object width. Border Size .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Border color . Underlined . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. text-top. text-top. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. . super. top. Border color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. . Text . Attributes: Tooltip .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Hint . Help Type: Pop-up .Display the specified help text beside the field.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Initial Value (Type). Defined Value . For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name.Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. it accept only integer numbers. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Validation Image . Initial Value .Define the application field type. Save Variable .Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications).The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. System Date .Integer General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface Attributes: Data type . When the field is defined as integer. For .Allows to show an image when validating a field.Uses the server date. Width . Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen.Field title in application. Label . Values Format .This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. SQL Type .Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). (A-Z.Defines the field display mask. Does not allow updates.a-z.HTML object used to display the field on generated form. (0-9) A Replaced by any alpha charactere entered by the user.Max length used when updating the table field. Variable Name . There are three masks types available and they can be merged: CharacterDescription 9 Replaced by any numeric character entered by the user.1234 A999A999A999.9999 999 9999. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field .Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode".example. separated by semicolon with the larger mask starting it.9999 QWE1234 QWE . in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".a-z) * Replaced by any alphanumeric character (A-Z.Define the field type in the database. Field Mask . The replacement occurs during data entry when amout of characters exceeds the smaller masks size. Label Field . HTML Type .Only displays the field value. Note: It is possible to combine two or more masks simultaneously. Hidden Field . Examples: Field Telephone number Software Key (Only letters) Software Key (Letters and Numbers) Car Plate Scriptcase's serial key Multiple Masks (Telephone) Mask +99 99 9999 9999 AAAA-AAAAAAAA-AAAA ****-****-****-**** Value entered 123456789012 Value formatted +12 34 5678 9012 QWERTYUIASDFGHJKQWER-TYUIASDF-GHJK Q1W2E3R4T5Y6U7I8 Q1W2-E3R4T5Y6-U7I8 AAA .(99) 9999-9999.0-9) entered by the user.+99 99 9999-9999 Field size in database .D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111**** DG2P 9999-9999. Auto increment (automatic) . Image1: Database value interface.You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. Negative number format . Negative Sign and Negative number format are displayed. Defined value .Define the field minimum value.Define the character used as the decimal separator. Show a calculator. Accept . Digit Grouping . Very useful to passing parameters.Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. Negative Sign . Maximum Value .Define the maximum size of the field.Displays a calculator.Define the character used as negative sign. if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed . When selecting No the attributes Digit Grouping Separator.The field can accepts only positive values.Figure2: Values Format Interface Regional Settings . Decimal Separator .Define the negative sign position (related to the value).Define the character used as unit separator. (See regional settings). DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field.Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. Digit Grouping Separator . only negative values or positive and negative values. Decimal Precision .Define if the field will show the grouping separator. Maximum Size . It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user.Define the field decimal precision.Define the field maximum value. Minimum Value . Attributes: Use lookup to display field description .SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. Null . Database Defined . GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. For example. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font .When selected enable the Grid lookup.Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. Insert Date .The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. Image1: Grid Lookup. See an example in the image below. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . Font Color .The field in SQL table is filled with (null). SQL Statement . The field is not used in the process of updating.Font size used to display the lookup.The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record.The field value is assigned by the database . To use in Validation .Font type used to display the lookup. Font Size . For example: will be updated through a trigger.When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. .Auto increment (manual) .Message displayed when no info is retrieved. User IP . EOFMessage .Field automatic validation based in the lookup. Underlined . . Font Size .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Background color .Used to apply bold type to the font.Run SQL statement in different connection. Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to increase the border size of the title. Font Color . Border color . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Choose connection . Border Size . Used to apply bold type to the font. top. Background color . Horizontal Alignment .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. text-bottom).Sets the title height. Underlined .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. sub. middle. Border Size . Bold . center or justify). Width . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . center or justify). Font Size . Border color . Width . center or justify). top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Font Size . Font Color . .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. right.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Color . Height .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. middle.Used to apply bold type to the font. text-top. right. bottom. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. HorizontalAlignment .Sets the field width. Vertical Alignment .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Border color .Used to increase the border size of the object.Sets the title width.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Border Size . right. bottom. Height .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Horizontal Alignment . sub. Vertical Alignment . super. text-bottom).Used to increase the border size of the field. Underlined .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Bold . text-top. super.Sets the field height.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Background color . middle. text-top. .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Hint . Help Type: Pop-up . text-bottom). sub.Vertical Alignment .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Attributes: Tooltip . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. bottom. super.Sets the object height.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Height . Create on-line instructions.Sets the object width. Help Settings Document the application.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. top. Width . Display the specified help text beside the field. .Text . For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen.Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. Defined Value .Field title in application. Width . For .Width or chars quantity displayed on input object.Define the application field type.The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Label . Initial Value (Type). Save Variable . It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality.Allows to show an image when validating a field. Initial Value . it accepts real numbers.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. When the field is defined as decimal. System Date .Uses the server date.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). Validation Image .Decimal General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface Attributes: Data type . Regional Settings .The field accepts negative value. Decimal Separator. Negative Sign . in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications.Define the character used as the decimal separator. When selecting No the attributes Digit Grouping Separator. Values Format Figure2: Values Format Interface. Maximum Value . .example. Hidden Field . SQL Type . Digit Grouping . Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field . Decimal Precision .Define the character used as negative sign.Define if the field will show the grouping separator.Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. Label Field . Accept Negative .Only displays the field value.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Decimal Separator .Define the field minimum value.Define the field decimal precision. HTML Type .* Maximum Size .HTML object used to display the field on generated form. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.Define the maximum size of the field.Define the field type in the database. (See regional settings). Minimum Value .Define the field maximum value. Digit Grouping Separator .Define the negative sign position (related to the value).Define the character used as unit separator. Negative Sign and Negative number format are displayed. Does not allow updates. Variable Name . Number negative format . The field in SQL table is filled with (null).The field value is assigned by the database . User IP . Image1: Grid Lookup.The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record.Show a calculator . Image1: Database value interface. Complete with zeros . Auto increment (automatic) .* * "Format as you type" must be enabled in "Form>>Settings" menu to use this option. For example: will be updated through a trigger. if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) . GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction.If enabled. it fills decimal digits automatically. Very useful to passing parameters.Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. Null . . The field is not used in the process of updating. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user.Displays a calculator. Insert Date . This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser).When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. See an example in the image below.You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var].The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. Database Defined . Defined value . otherwise the end-user should always enter the decimals digits. DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. To use in Validation .Font type used to display the lookup. .Message displayed when no info is retrieved.Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. Font Size .Font size used to display the lookup. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Attributes: Use lookup to display field description . For example. Font Color . to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font .Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard .Field automatic validation based in the lookup.Run SQL statement in different connection. SQL Statement .When selected enable the Grid lookup. Choose connection . EOFMessage .SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. Title CSS Attributes: Font . Font Size .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the title.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. top. middle. Font Color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Border Size . bottom. Field CSS Attributes: Font . Font Color . text-bottom).Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Bold . Bold .Used to apply bold type to the font. . text-top.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size . right. sub.Sets the title width. Vertical Alignment . Height .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Border Size . Background color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Underlined .Used to apply bold type to the font. super.Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Sets the title height. Horizontal Alignment . Background color .Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. center or justify).Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Underlined .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Width . Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Width . Help Type: Pop-up . super. Height . text-bottom).Sets the object height.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . middle. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Font Color .Used to apply bold type to the font. bottom. Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. top. right. right.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. sub.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. bottom. text-top. Bold . Height . top. Border color . Font Size .Sets the object width. Create on-line instructions. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. middle. Background color .Sets the field width.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside . center or justify).HorizontalAlignment .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Help Settings Document the application. Vertical Alignment . Vertical Alignment . Border Size .Sets the field height. sub. Width . Attributes: Tooltip . Underlined . center or justify).Used to apply an underlined type to the font. super.Used to increase the border size of the object.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. text-bottom). text-top. the field is clicked. . Hint .Display the specified help text beside the field.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text . Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value.Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute.The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. . When the field is defined as value. Validation Image .Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). For example.Define the application field type.Uses the server date. Save Variable . Attributes: Data type . It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality.Currency General Settings Image1:General Settings Interface.Allows to show an image when validating a field. Initial Value . Variable Name . Label . System Date .Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). Initial Value (Type).Field title in application.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. it accept letters. Width . characters. Defined Value . For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. numbers. When selecting No the attributes Digit Grouping Separator.Define the field type in the database. Negative Sign and Negative number format are displayed.Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. SQL Type . Decimal Separator. .* Maximum Size . Does not allow updates. Maximum Value .Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Digit Grouping . Label Field . HTML Type . Values Format Figure2: Values Format Interface.Define the maximum size of the field.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Regional Settings .Define the field maximum value. Minimum Value .Define the field decimal precision. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field .Define if the field will show the grouping separator. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". Accept Negative .Only displays the field value. Negative number format .Define the field minimum value.Define the character used as unit separator.The field accepts negative value.HTML object used to display the field on generated form.Define if the field will show the currency symbol. Decimal Precision . Digit Grouping Separator . Decimal Separator .Define the character used as the decimal separator.* Currency Symbol Usage .Define the negative sign position (related to the value). (See regional settings). Negative Sign .Define the character used as negative sign.Hidden Field . Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). The field is not used in the process of updating. . User IP . if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) .If enabled. otherwise the end-user should always enter the decimals digits.You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user.Displays a calculator.When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. Image1: Database value interface. Defined value .* * "Format as you type" must be enabled in "Form>>Settings" menu to use this option. See an example in the image below. Image1: Grid Lookup.The field in SQL table is filled with (null). Null . Insert Date . Auto increment (automatic) . it fills decimal digits automatically. DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field.Show a calculator. Database Defined .The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record.The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. Very useful to passing parameters. Complete with zeros . For example: will be updated through a trigger. GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction.The field value is assigned by the database . To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard .SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. SQL Statement .Font type used to display the lookup. Font Color . .Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. Font Size . Attributes: Use lookup to display field description .Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font .Message displayed when no info is retrieved.Run SQL statement in different connection. For example.Font size used to display the lookup. EOFMessage .When selected enable the Grid lookup. To use in Validation . Choose connection .Field automatic validation based in the lookup. Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Height . middle.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to increase the border size of the title. Font Size .Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Field CSS Attributes: Font . Border color . text-bottom). right. center or .Sets the title width.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Bold . Background color . right. Underlined . sub.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font. center or justify). Underlined . HorizontalAlignment .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Vertical Alignment . top.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. text-top. Horizontal Alignment . Width .Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Font Color . Title CSS Attributes: Font . bottom. Border Size .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Bold .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Size .Sets the title height.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Border Size . Border color . super. Background color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Font Color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Width .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Height .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Bold . Font Color . Vertical Alignment .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Background color . Border Size . Underlined .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. text-bottom).Sets the field width. bottom. text-top.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Sets the object width.Used to increase the border size of the object.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Vertical Alignment . super. text-top. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. sub. middle.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. . Help Type: Pop-up . text-bottom). sub. Width .Used to apply bold type to the font. center or justify). Create on-line instructions. bottom. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the field height. right.Sets the object height.justify). Help Settings Document the application. top. super. Height . Attributes: Tooltip . top. Font Size . Border color . Horizontal Alignment .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. middle. Display the specified help text beside the field. Text . .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Hint . System Date . Initial Value . Variable Name .Uses the server date. Attributes: Data type -Define the application field type.Field title in application.The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Validation Image . Label .Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Date fields are formatted according to specific date rules.Allows to show an image when validating a field. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications.Date General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface. Defined Value . Width . Save Variable . Initial Value (Type). Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. For example.Width or chars quantity displayed on input object.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. . Display .Allows you to select the date and month by combobox.Define the minimum year selectable. Values Format Image1:Interface of Values Format. HTML Type .Insert a minimum date that the scriptcase will criticize in the field of the date type in the format as it is presented.Allows you to select the year by combobox.When click on the icon beside of the box.Hidden Field .HTML object used to display the field on generated form. Does not allow updates.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode".Allows you to select the display format of the field. Year as Combo .Allows you to apply regional settings date format to the field.Will define the actual date as the maximum date.Define the maximum year selectable.Only displays the field value. that means.Define the field type in the database. Use ComboBox . Minimum date: Fixed Date . "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". it . Attributes: Regional Settings . (See regional settings). Label Field . "Actual Year +" .Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. the scriptcase have the following options: Simple Actual Date . Actual Date . SQL Type . "Initial Year" . Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field . Actual Date with increment . Auto increment (automatic) . Actual Date . Display Calendar -Allow to show beside the field a calendar icon.won't accept anyone in the form who was born after the corrent date.Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. Very useful to passing parameters. Actual Date with decrement .The maximum date will be the actual date (-) the days or month or years that you decrement. the scriptcase have the following options: Simple Actual Date .Allows you to display next to the field how to complete the date field. this allow the selection of the month and year passing to the field the value that was defined in the calendar.The minimum date will be the actual date (+) the days or month or years that you increment.The maximum date will be the actual date (+) the days or month or years that you increment.The minimum date will be the actual date (-) the days or month or years that you decrement. Actual Date with decrement . Actual Date with increment .When click on the icon beside of the box. Image1: Database value interface. Insert Date .Will define the actual date as the maximum date. DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) . Defined value . it won't accept anyone in the form who was born after the corrent date.Insert a maximum date that the scriptcase will criticize in the field of the date type in the format as it is presented. that means.When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. Display Format . Years Limit -Defines a limit of years used in the calendar. . It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user. Maximum Date: Fixed Date .The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record.You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. Attributes: Use lookup to display field description .Run SQL statement in different connection.Message displayed when no info is retrieved. To use in Validation . to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font . EOFMessage . Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . The field is not used in the process of updating.The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application.Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup.SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). Font Size . Database Defined . Font Color .Font size used to display the lookup. Null .Font type used to display the lookup. For example. Image1: Grid Lookup. For example: will be updated through a trigger.When selected enable the Grid lookup. DISPLAY SETTINGS .User IP . Choose connection .Field automatic validation based in the lookup. SQL Statement . GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. See an example in the image below.The field in SQL table is filled with (null).The field value is assigned by the database . Font Color . Border Size . text-bottom).Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. center or justify). Background color . bottom. Horizontal Alignment .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Font Size . top. Bold .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to apply bold type to the font. super. text-top.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Vertical Alignment .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Border color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. middle.Sets the title width. Underlined . Width . sub.Defines the CSS values for fields individually. .Used to increase the border size of the title. right. Title CSS Attributes: Font . Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. center or justify).Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Sets the field width. Font Color .Sets the title height. Underlined .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Height . right.Used to increase the border size of the object. HorizontalAlignment . Underlined . super.Height .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Bold . super. Font Size . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the object width. Border color . Font Color . text-bottom). . middle.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the object height. Background color . sub.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Horizontal Alignment . Background color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to increase the border size of the field. Border Size . bottom. Border Size . Width . text-top. sub. Height . right. Vertical Alignment . text-bottom). Font Size . top.Sets the field height.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Border color . Width .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Vertical Alignment .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. top. Field CSS Attributes: Font . bottom. Bold .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. text-top. middle. center or justify). Display the specified help text beside the field.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Hint . Create on-line instructions. Attributes: Tooltip . .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Help Type: Pop-up .Help Settings Document the application. Text . . Initial Value . Initial Value (Type).The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.Time General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface Attributes: Data type. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. For example.Field title in application. Save Variable .Allows to show an image when validating a field. System Date .Uses the server date.Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Defined Value . in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications.Define the application field type.Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Validation Image . Variable Name . Width . It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. .Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. Label .Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). Time fields are formatted according to specific time rules. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Displays the field format beside the field hour.Define the time separator used in the field.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. . Does not allow updates. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".Determine the field display format from a list of predefined formats. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user. Display Format . SQL Type . Values Format Figure2:Values Format Interface Attributes: Regional settings .Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Display . Label Field . (See Regional settings). DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. Image1: Database value interface.You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var].Only displays the field value.HTML object used to display the field on generated form. Very useful to passing parameters.Define the field type in the database.Hidden Field . Time Separator . HTML Type . Defined value . Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field .Apply regional settings time formatting rules to the field. Font type used to display the lookup.The field value is assigned by the database .SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. For example: will be updated through a trigger.Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. Image2: Grid Lookup Interface.The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font .When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server.Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. Font Size . This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). See an example in the image below. Image1: Grid Lookup. Insert Date . GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard .When selected enable the Grid lookup.Font size used to display the lookup. The field is not used in the process of updating. if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) . Attributes: Use lookup to display field description . . Database Defined .Auto increment (automatic) . Font Color .The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. SQL Statement .The field in SQL table is filled with (null). User IP . Null . For example. Background color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold .Run SQL statement in different connection. To use in Validation .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Title CSS Attributes: Font . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Choose connection .Field automatic validation based in the lookup.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. .EOFMessage .Message displayed when no info is retrieved. Font Size . Font Color . Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Underlined .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. super. Background color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Vertical Alignment .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Background color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . text-bottom). Horizontal Alignment . middle.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Underlined . sub.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. top.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the field height. sub. center or justify). text-top. super. Vertical Alignment . top.Used to apply bold type to the font. Font Color . Border Size .Used to increase the border size of the field. HorizontalAlignment . middle.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the field width.Sets the title height. right. Font Size . Width . Width .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Border color . Font Size .Sets the title width.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Height . Bold . right. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. bottom. Bold . Height .Used to increase the border size of the object. text-bottom). bottom. Border Size . Font Color . text-top. Border color .Used to increase the border size of the title. center or justify). Underlined . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Width . right. Attributes: Tooltip .Border color . Height . sub. . Help Settings Document the application. text-top. Hint . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Help Type: Pop-up .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. top.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Create on-line instructions.Sets the object width. super. center or justify). text-bottom).Sets the object height. bottom. middle. Vertical Alignment . Display the specified help text beside the field. .Text . Defined Value . Save Variable . Date and Time fields are formatted according to specific date rules. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). Variable Name .The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. For example.Uses the server date. in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name.Define the application field type.Width or chars quantity displayed on input object.Date And Time General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface. . Attributes: Data type . Width .Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).Allows to show an image when validating a field. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. Initial Value (Type).Field title in application. System Date . Label . Validation Image .Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button.Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. Initial Value . SQL Type . Values Format Image1:Values Format Interface.Display field the format at the field´s side. Time separator . Date separator . When not selected ( NO) the options Date separator and Time separator are displayed.Select the field format from a list of predefined date/time display formats.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Attributes: Regional settings .Only displays the field value.Time separator symbol used. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". Does not allow updates. DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. Display calendar .Display the Date and Time in the same input field. Years Limit -Defines a limit of years used in the calendar. HTML Type . Display Format .Display a calendar a calendar to select the date. Group Date and Time . Decimal of Seconds -Defines how many decimal of seconds the field will use. Display .Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.Apply regional settings time formatting rules to the field. Label Field . It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user. (See Regional settings). Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field .Define the field type in the database.HTML object used to display the field on generated form.Hidden Field .Date separator symbol used. . When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. Database Defined . The field is not used in the process of updating. For example.Image1: Database value interface.The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser).The field value is assigned by the database . Auto increment (automatic) . to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : . Null .You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) .The field in SQL table is filled with (null). Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. Very useful to passing parameters. Defined value .Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . SQL Statement . User IP . Insert Date . GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. Image1: Grid Lookup.When selected enable the Grid lookup.The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. See an example in the image below. For example: will be updated through a trigger.SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. Attributes: Use lookup to display field description . Font Color . Choose connection . Title CSS Attributes: . To use in Validation .Message displayed when no info is retrieved.SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font . Font Size .Font size used to display the lookup. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. EOFMessage .Font type used to display the lookup.Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup.Run SQL statement in different connection.Field automatic validation based in the lookup. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Height .Sets the title height.Used to increase the border size of the title. Background color . Vertical Alignment . Font Size . text-top. super.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. top. Width . Font Size .Font . bottom.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Border Size .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Border color . super. HorizontalAlignment . middle. sub. right. right. Font Color . text-bottom).Used to increase the border size of the field. center or justify).Sets the title width. Font Size .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. text-top.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Vertical Alignment . Border Size .Used to apply bold type to the font. Bold . Underlined . top.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. bottom. text-bottom).Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Background color . sub. Underlined . Font Color . center or justify). . Width .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Bold .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. middle.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the field height.Sets the field width. Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Border color . Height . sub.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. center or justify).Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. middle. Vertical Alignment . . Bold . Background color . Attributes: Tooltip . Help Settings Document the application.Font Color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the object height. super.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Underlined . Height . text-top. text-bottom). Horizontal Alignment . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. right. Width . Create on-line instructions.Used to increase the border size of the object. Help Type: Pop-up .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Sets the object width. top. Border Size . bottom.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Border color . Hint .Display the specified help text beside the field.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. . Text . Progress bar . .Define if a drag'n drop area is used to upload files. Maintain Aspect .Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Image Width . Display link only . Image Border . The link will open in a (pop-up) window with the image in its original size (without redirection). It´s used in conjunction with Image Height and Image Width. Note that the images are stored in the database as text.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Fields type Image (Field Name) uses server stored images in the. Attributes: Data Type .Image (database) General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface.Defines the image display height in pixels.Field title in application. Label . Separate several extensions using semicolon. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".HTML object used to display the field on generated form.Display or not a progress bar when uploading files.Defines the field type. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Hidden Field . HTML Type . Extensions to allow . Open in Another Window .Image border width in pixels. Upload Area . Disable Field . Image Height .Define which extensions are allowed to upload.Displays the original image in another browser window.Maintains the image aspect ratio when resizing it.Defines the Image display width in pixels.Displays only a link in the field with the image name. Date of inclusion . Manual increment . Calculated by the database . Foreign Key . Multi Upload Settings Attributes: Table .Get the data and time from the server upon inserting.The field value is assigned by the database.The field will be filled with the IP of the computer that is accessing the application.Gets the file name that is being uploaded.The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record.Get the data from the server upon inserting. Defined . Multi-Upload It allows to upload multiple files and store the information in a relative database table. User IP .Choose the database table to store the files.Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar.Allows to associate a field value from the current form. if your DBMS uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed . Auto increment .SQL Type .Define the field type in the database.You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var].Gets the bynary of the file. Datetime of inclusion . Very useful to passing parameters.. . Multi Upload Fields Settings The options are: File name . After choose the table. Upload . it will display all fields from that table and we should associate parameters to fill the fields upon inserting or updating. Calculated by the database if empty .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Null . Border color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Background color . Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. .Used to increase the border size of the title. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Underlined .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Bold .The field value is assigned by the database if no value is passed to it.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font.The field in SQL table is filled with (null). Font Size . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Border Size . Font Color . Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. super.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. center or justify).Horizontal Alignment .Used to apply bold type to the font. Field CSS Attributes: Font . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Font Size . Font Color .Sets the title height. Border Size . Vertical Alignment . Border color .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. right. super.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. text-top. .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. top. Bold . center or justify). sub. middle. Border color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Background color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Underlined . Font Size . Border Size . Width .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. top. Vertical Alignment . text-bottom). right. bottom.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Background color . text-top.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Bold . text-bottom).Used to apply bold type to the font. middle.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the title width.Sets the field height. right. Width . Underlined . bottom. Horizontal Alignment . Font Color .Used to increase the border size of the object. sub.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Height . HorizontalAlignment . Height . center or justify).Sets the field width. Width . super.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Attributes: Tooltip . . sub. Height . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Create on-line instructions.Sets the object width. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Help Settings Document the application.Sets the object height. Hint .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. top. middle. text-bottom).Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. text-top. Help Type: Pop-up . bottom.Vertical Alignment . Display the specified help text beside the field. .Text . Defines the Image display width in pixels.Display or not a progress bar when uploading files.Defines a sub folder to organize the files stored.Image border width in pixels. When a field is defined as Image(file name) type.Image(file Name) IMAGE (FILE NAME) Allows the developer to use fields in the forms to upload images. The images are stored separately in the server and automatically displayed when the file name is referenced.Define if a drag'n drop area is used to upload files. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Label .Maintains the image aspect ratio when resizing it. Image Width . Image Border . Maintain Aspect . SubFolder . General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface. it stores a file name that is available to the application to process as such. The images are save in the server in a directory defined using the Application Settings menu in the attribute Image Directory (see Settings). Attributes: Data type . Upload Area . . It´s used in conjunction with Image Height and Image Width. Image Height . Progress bar .Defines the image display height in pixels.Field title in application.Define the application field type. Open in Another Window . The link will open in a (pop-up) window with the image in its original size (without redirection).Displays the original image in another browser window.Choose the database table to store the files.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Extensions to allow . Separate several extensions using semicolon. Display link only . Resize function generates temporary image copies that are kept in the cache. Disable Field . Example of field of the image type in a cadastre of products. HTML Type .Displays only a link in the field with the image name. it will display all fields from that table and we should associate parameters to fill .Define the field type in the database. SQL Type .Creates the subfolder if it does not exist. After choose the table.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Multi-Upload It allows to upload multiple files and store the information in a relative database table. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".Create Subfolder . Multi Upload Settings Attributes: Table .Time in minutes the image cache will be kept for on the server before being deleted.Define which extensions are allowed to upload. Image Caching . Hidden Field .HTML object used to display the field on generated form. Gets the file name that is being uploaded. Manual increment .The field value is assigned by the database. Datetime of inclusion .Gets the bynary of the file. Calculated by the database . Very useful to passing parameters.. Defined . Multi Upload Fields Settings The options are: File name . Foreign Key .You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var].The field will be filled with the IP of the computer that is accessing the application.Get the data and time from the server upon inserting. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. if your DBMS uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed . .Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar.The field value is assigned by the database if no value is passed to it.Get the data from the server upon inserting. User IP . Calculated by the database if empty . Auto increment .the fields upon inserting or updating.The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record.The field in SQL table is filled with (null).Allows to associate a field value from the current form. Upload . Date of inclusion . Null . Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. text-bottom).Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. sub.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Width . Font Color . bottom. Font Color . Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Sets the title height. Font Size .Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. . Vertical Alignment . Bold .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the title width.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Border color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Height . text-top. top. right. middle. Font Size . Border Size .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font. Field CSS Attributes: Font . center or justify). super.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Underlined . Background color . Horizontal Alignment .Used to increase the border size of the title. Background color . Font Color . center or justify).Used to apply an underlined type to the font. top. bottom. Background color . HorizontalAlignment . Bold . Horizontal Alignment .Used to increase the border size of the field.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Create on-line instructions. super. Vertical Alignment . bottom.Sets the field height. text-bottom). Border Size . Width .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. center or justify). Bold . right. super. Border color . Height . Underlined .Used to increase the border size of the object. Vertical Alignment . text-bottom).Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Sets the object width.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. top.Sets the object height. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. . text-top. Help Settings Document the application.Used to apply bold type to the font. right. Border Size .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Height .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border color . middle. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. middle. Width .Sets the field width. Underlined .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. sub. sub. text-top. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Hint . Text .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. .Display the specified help text beside the field. Attributes: Tooltip .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Help Type: Pop-up .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Separate several extensions using semicolon. Disable Field . "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type . Multi-Upload It allows to upload multiple files and store the information in a relative database table. File Name . creating a link for each existent document in the database.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". .Define if a drag'n drop area is used to upload files.Define the field type in the database.Field that contains the document file name. it accept the opening of the file directly. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name.Display or not a progress bar when uploading files. Icon . Extensions to allow .Defines the field that contains the file size. File Size .Define the application field type. When the field is defined as Document. Upload Area .Document (database) DOCUMENT(Database) General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface Attributes: Data type . Hidden Field . Progress bar .HTML object used to display the field on generated form.Field title in application.Define which extensions are allowed to upload.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. SQL Type . Label .Display an icon by the field side identifying the file type. it will display all fields from that table and we should associate parameters to fill the fields upon inserting or updating. Foreign Key .Multi Upload Settings Attributes: Table .Get the data and time from the server upon inserting.Gets the file name that is being uploaded. Datetime of inclusion .The field in SQL table is filled with (null).The field will be filled with the IP of the computer that is accessing the application. Manual increment . if your DBMS uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed . Null . Date of inclusion .The field value is assigned by the database if no value is passed to it. Very useful to passing parameters. User IP .The field value is assigned by the database.. Multi Upload Fields Settings The options are: File name .Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar.Allows to associate a field value from the current form.Get the data from the server upon inserting.You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. DISPLAY SETTINGS . Defined . Calculated by the database if empty .Gets the bynary of the file. Auto increment . Upload .The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. After choose the table.Choose the database table to store the files. Calculated by the database . sub. right.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. middle. Background color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Font Size . Font Color . Width .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Sets the title width. top.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Title CSS Attributes: Font . center or justify). bottom. text-bottom). Underlined . Horizontal Alignment . .Used to increase the border size of the title. text-top.Used to apply bold type to the font. Height .Sets the title height.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Border Size . Vertical Alignment . Bold .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Border color . super. Font Color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font. Background color .Used to increase the border size of the object. Height .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Border Size . text-bottom).Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Sets the object width.Sets the field width. super.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. middle. .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. top. text-top. top.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Bold . right. Underlined . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Field CSS Attributes: Font . center or justify).Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. sub. Vertical Alignment .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Used to increase the border size of the field. Horizontal Alignment . HorizontalAlignment . Font Size . Bold . super. Vertical Alignment . Width .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. right. Width . Height . Background color . Underlined . text-bottom). middle. Border color . bottom. Font Color .Sets the object height. Border color . text-top.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. center or justify). bottom. Border Size . Font Size .Sets the field height. sub. Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Hint .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Display the specified help text beside the field. Create on-line instructions. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Help Type: Pop-up .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Attributes: Tooltip . Text . .Help Settings Document the application. . Upload Area . Separate several extensions using semicolon. Create Subfolder . Multi-Upload It allows to upload multiple files and store the information in a relative database table. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".Define the application field type. Hidden Field .Creates the subfolder if it does not exist. SQL Type . See Settings). For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name.Define if a drag'n drop area is used to upload files.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.HTML object used to display the field on generated form.Display or not a progress bar when uploading files.Display an icon by the field side identifying the file type. Extensions to allow . Label . The documents are stored separately in the server. . Disable Field . It is possible to use global or local variables in the subdirectory name.Document (file Name) General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface Attributes: Data type .Enter a subdirectory name to save the files in (it is added under the directory defined in the Documents Path attribute in the Application Settings menu.Field title in application. HTML Type .Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Icon .Define the field type in the database.Define which extensions are allowed to upload. Subfolder . it stores a file name that is available to the application to process as such. When a field is defined as Document (file name ) type. Progress bar . if your DBMS uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed .Choose the database table to store the files.Get the data from the server upon inserting. Upload .. Multi Upload Fields Settings The options are: File name . Auto increment .Multi Upload Settings Attributes: Table .Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar.The field in SQL table is filled with (null). Null .The field value is assigned by the database. Defined . it will display all fields from that table and we should associate parameters to fill the fields upon inserting or updating. Manual increment . Calculated by the database .Gets the bynary of the file.The field value is assigned by the database if no value is passed to it. Foreign Key . After choose the table.You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var].Get the data and time from the server upon inserting. User IP . Calculated by the database if empty . Very useful to passing parameters. DISPLAY SETTINGS .The field will be filled with the IP of the computer that is accessing the application.The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Datetime of inclusion .Gets the file name that is being uploaded.Allows to associate a field value from the current form. Date of inclusion . Used to apply an underlined type to the font. . Width . middle. Background color .Used to apply bold type to the font. center or justify). text-bottom). sub. bottom.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Underlined . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Border Size .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to increase the border size of the title.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Font Color .Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Border color . Horizontal Alignment .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Font Size .Sets the title width. top. Bold . super. Vertical Alignment . Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. text-top. right.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. text-bottom). top.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to apply bold type to the font. Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Vertical Alignment . right.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Height .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border color . Bold .Sets the title height.Sets the object height.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Width . text-bottom). Vertical Alignment .Used to increase the border size of the object.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Border Size . center or justify). Background color .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. super.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Bold .Used to increase the border size of the field.Sets the field height. sub. center or justify). bottom. bottom. middle. Font Color .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Width .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Sets the object width. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. top. super. HorizontalAlignment .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Sets the field width. right.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Font Color . Underlined . Height . Font Size . middle. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. text-top. sub. Underlined . Font Size . Border color . Background color . Height . Border Size . text-top.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. . Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Display the specified help text beside the field. Text . . Help Type: Pop-up . Attributes: Tooltip .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Hint .Help Settings Document the application. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Create on-line instructions. . Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Initial Value (Type). Width . MASTERCARD and DINER cards.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen.Field title in application. General Settings Figure1: General Settings Interface Attributes: Data type . For . Save Variable . Label .Credit Card Number The ScriptCase provides credit card numbers validation routines in its applications. System Date . Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value.Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. VISA. When a field is defined as Credit Card Number it is formatted upon losing focus and validated according to specific rules. Initial Value . Currently ScriptCase applications supports validation routines to handle AMERICAN EXPRESS.The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.Uses the server date. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name.Define the application field type.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). Defined Value . 1234 A999A999A999. The replacement occurs during data entry when amout of characters exceeds the smaller masks size. Field Mask .9999 QWE1234 QWE .Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field . Label Field . "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".Define the field type in the database.+99 99 9999-9999 Hidden Field . (0-9) A Replaced by any alpha charactere entered by the user.HTML object used to display the field on generated form.(99) 9999-9999.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).Defines the field display mask.example.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information.Max length used when updating the table field. Complete to the Left . Field is filed from left to complete the size defined on Field Size in Database.a-z. HTML Type . separated by semicolon with the larger mask starting it. DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field.a-z) * Replaced by any alphanumeric character (A-Z.9999 999 9999. There are three masks types available and they can be merged: CharacterDescription 9 Replaced by any numeric character entered by the user. SQL Type .Only displays the field value. (A-Z. Examples: Field Telephone number Software Key (Only letters) Software Key (Letters and Numbers) Car Plate Scriptcase's serial key Multiple Masks (Telephone) Mask +99 99 9999 9999 AAAA-AAAAAAAA-AAAA ****-****-****-**** Value entered 123456789012 Value formatted +12 34 5678 9012 QWERTYUIASDFGHJKQWER-TYUIASDF-GHJK Q1W2E3R4T5Y6U7I8 Q1W2-E3R4T5Y6-U7I8 AAA . It is frequentlly used when not displaying the .D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111**** DG2P 9999-9999. in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications.0-9) entered by the user. Field size in database . Note: It is possible to combine two or more masks simultaneously. Does not allow updates. Variable Name .Defines the character used to complete the field selected. You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var].field to the final user. Attributes: . if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) .Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. Defined value . Database Defined . See an example in the image below. Auto increment (automatic) . User IP . Image1: Database value interface. Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. Insert Date . The field is not used in the process of updating.The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. For example: will be updated through a trigger.The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. Very useful to passing parameters. Null .The field in SQL table is filled with (null). Image1: Grid Lookup. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser).The field value is assigned by the database .When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. Message displayed when no info is retrieved.When selected enable the Grid lookup.SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. EOFMessage .Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup.Use lookup to display field description . .Font size used to display the lookup. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard .Font type used to display the lookup.Run SQL statement in different connection.Field automatic validation based in the lookup. SQL Statement . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. To use in Validation . Choose connection . For example. Font Color . Font Size . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font . bottom.Sets the field width. HorizontalAlignment . right. Font Color .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Width . Bold . Background color . Border Size . text-top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Underlined .Title CSS Attributes: Font . sub. Font Size . Vertical Alignment . center or justify).Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. super. Object Input CSS .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font. Vertical Alignment . Horizontal Alignment .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Font Size . Height .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the title width. Border color . Font Color .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. right.Sets the field height. Field CSS Attributes: Font . Border color . text-top. top.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Background color . Width .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. bottom. middle. Bold .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to apply bold type to the font. sub.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. top. text-bottom). text-bottom). Height .Used to increase the border size of the title. super.Sets the title height. middle.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. center or justify). Underlined .Used to increase the border size of the field. Border Size . Sets the object width. Vertical Alignment .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. center or justify). Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Width .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Create on-line instructions.Used to increase the border size of the object. right.Used to apply bold type to the font. Height . Border Size . Border color . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Attributes: Font . middle. . Bold .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Horizontal Alignment . super. Background color . Attributes: Tooltip .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Help Type: Pop-up .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. bottom.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Help Settings Document the application. Underlined . text-bottom). top.Sets the object height.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. text-top. sub. Font Size . Font Color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Display the specified help text beside the field. . Text .Hint .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. It relates to a Credit Card Field and used by the validation routines to validate according to the specific company rules. Hidden Field . For example.Credit Card Define the Credit Card Company (flag).Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label . Does not allow updates. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". HTML Type . SQL Type .HTML object used to display the field on generated form.Define the field type in the database. Save Variable . in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications.Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". Variable Name . Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field . Values Formats The picture below show how to related the Credit Card Number field with the Credit Card field. .Only displays the field value.Define the application field type. Label Field .Field title in application. General Settings Image1:General SettingsInterface Attributes: Data type . Reload Form .Reload the form After after field value update. if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) . Use Title/Deny . Image1: Database value interface.When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server.Define the field that contains the values to validate. DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field.Display a selection box with available card companies (flag). Negative value . Diners.New option value. Defined value . Title .You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var].Figure2: Values Format Interface Attributes: Card Type . User IP . The label and value for these options are defined in Negative Value and Title. Master Card and Visa).Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar.The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. Related Field . It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user. Insert Date . Very useful to passing parameters.Allows the user to enter an different option from the options available in the ScriptCase (American Express.New option label.The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. . Auto increment (automatic) . DISPLAY SETTINGS .SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. SQL Statement . Attributes: Use lookup to display field description . Font Color . Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. Font Size . GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction.Run SQL statement in different connection.The field value is assigned by the database . to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font .When selected enable the Grid lookup. Choose connection . See an example in the image below.Font type used to display the lookup. Null .Database Defined . To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . The field is not used in the process of updating. To use in Validation . EOFMessage . For example.Font size used to display the lookup. Image1: Grid Lookup. For example: will be updated through a trigger.Message displayed when no info is retrieved.Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup.The field in SQL table is filled with (null).Field automatic validation based in the lookup. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. super. Border Size .Sets the title width. Underlined .Sets the title height. Border color .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to increase the border size of the title.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Title CSS Attributes: Font . bottom.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. center or justify). text-top. Font Size . Width . top. Height . Vertical Alignment .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Font Color .Used to apply bold type to the font. text-bottom).Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Background color . Bold . . sub. right.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. middle.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Bold . Font Color . HorizontalAlignment . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . center or justify).Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. text-bottom). Border color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Underlined . bottom. . Border Size .Sets the field height. top.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. middle. sub.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the object width. Font Size . Background color . bottom. Horizontal Alignment . text-bottom). super. Vertical Alignment .Sets the object height. Font Size .Used to apply bold type to the font. Height .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to apply bold type to the font. Width . top.Sets the field width.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Background color .Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. right. right. super.Field CSS Attributes: Font . sub. center or justify).Used to apply an underlined type to the font. text-top.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Vertical Alignment . Border color . middle. Underlined . Width . Font Color .Used to increase the border size of the object. Border Size . text-top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Height . Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Attributes: Tooltip . Text . Hint . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Help Type: Pop-up .Display the specified help text beside the field. Create on-line instructions.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Help Settings Document the application. . For example. clicking on the icon opens the e-mail reader. Validation Image . Initial Value (Type).Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications).Uses the server date. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Label . in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the .Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. When the field is defined as E-mail an icon is displayed by its side. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value.The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. System Date . Initial Value .E-mail General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface Attributes: Data type .Field title in application. Save Variable .Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. Defined Value .Allows to show an image when validating a field. Width . Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. It validates the field value according to standard e-mail formats.Define the application field type. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. Does not allow updates. if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) . Hidden Field .When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server.You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. Defined value . SQL Type .The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record.Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).Define the field type in the database.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Null . Database Defined . Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Display Icon . Auto increment (automatic) . "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".The field in SQL table is filled with (null). For example: will be updated through a trigger. User IP .Display an email icon by the field side Disable Field . Variable Name . DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. Very useful to passing parameters.The field value is assigned by the database . HTML Type .applications.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Label Field . It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user. . Insert Date .Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. Image1: Database value interface. The field is not used in the process of updating.Only displays the field value.HTML object used to display the field on generated form. Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup.GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. See an example in the image below. Choose connection . This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser).SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . SQL Statement .Font type used to display the lookup. For example. To use in Validation . Font Color . Image1: Grid Lookup. Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. EOFMessage .Run SQL statement in different connection. Font Size .Font size used to display the lookup.Message displayed when no info is retrieved. to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Field automatic validation based in the lookup.When selected enable the Grid lookup. Attributes: Use lookup to display field description . . top.Used to increase the border size of the title. bottom. Border Size . Horizontal Alignment .Sets the title width.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Field CSS Attributes: Font . sub.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. center or justify). Underlined . right. . Background color .Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Height . middle. Bold . text-bottom). text-top.Sets the title height.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Font Size .Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Vertical Alignment . Title CSS Attributes: Font . Width .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Border color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. super.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Font Color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to increase the border size of the object. right.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. super. Background color . Bold .Sets the field width. Height . Horizontal Alignment . Font Color . Border Size . Vertical Alignment . sub.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. text-top. text-top. right.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. text-bottom).Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Underlined . sub. center or justify).Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment . Background color . Bold .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Sets the object height.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Border color . text-bottom). describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Font Size .Sets the field height. Font Size . top. middle.Used to apply bold type to the font. Border Size . Border color . Font Color .Used to increase the border size of the field. Underlined . middle.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. . Width . Width .Sets the object width. bottom. center or justify). Create on-line instructions. super.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Help Settings Document the application. Vertical Alignment . top. Height . bottom.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Text . Hint . Attributes: Tooltip .Display the specified help text beside the field. Help Type: Pop-up . .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. . Uses the server date.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). Validation Image . Label .The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Attributes: Data type .Define the application field type. in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the . it is shown a link of access. Save Variable . Width . For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Defined Value . When the field is defined as text.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Initial Value (Type).Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. For example.Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date .Field title in application.Allows to show an image when validating a field. Initial Value .Url General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface . HTML object used to display the field on generated form. Hidden Field .The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application.Only displays the field value. Database Defined .The field value is assigned by the database . Does not allow updates. Auto increment (automatic) .Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Display Icon . The field is not used in the process of updating. Null . . Defined value . SQL Type .Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Label Field .Display an icon by the field side Disable Field . if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) .Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Variable Name .Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".Define the field type in the database. DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. User IP . For example: will be updated through a trigger.applications. Very useful to passing parameters.You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. Insert Date . HTML Type .The field in SQL table is filled with (null).The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user. Image1: Database value interface.When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). To use in Validation .Run SQL statement in different connection.Field automatic validation based in the lookup.SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. Attributes: Use lookup to display field description . Image1: Grid Lookup. EOFMessage . For example. . SQL Statement . See an example in the image below.Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup.Font type used to display the lookup.Message displayed when no info is retrieved.GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font . Font Color .Font size used to display the lookup. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard .When selected enable the Grid lookup. Font Size . Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. Choose connection . Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. super. right. Border Size . bottom.Sets the title width. Title CSS Attributes: Font . text-top. top. Underlined .Sets the title height. Bold .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Border color . Field CSS Attributes: Font . Background color .Used to increase the border size of the title. sub.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. . Vertical Alignment . Font Size . Font Color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. middle.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. center or justify). Height .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. text-bottom). Width . Horizontal Alignment . sub.Sets the object height. bottom. Background color . Font Color . Underlined .Sets the field height. text-top. bottom.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Font Color . Border Size .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. top. .Sets the object width. Background color .Used to increase the border size of the object. Vertical Alignment .Used to increase the border size of the field. Font Size . right.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Underlined . super.Used to apply bold type to the font. Width .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. top. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Sets the field width. center or justify).Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Height . Vertical Alignment . sub. middle. text-bottom). text-top.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Create on-line instructions.Font Size . right. middle.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Width .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment . Bold .Used to apply bold type to the font. HorizontalAlignment . Border color . Bold . Border color .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. super. center or justify).Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. text-bottom). Height . Help Settings Document the application.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Border Size . Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Attributes: Tooltip .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. . Help Type: Pop-up . Text . Hint .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Display the specified help text beside the field. . Html Color General Settings Image1:General Settings Interface.Define the application field type. Label . It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. When the field is defined as HTML Color is shown beside of the field an icon with a pallet of colors. Initial Value (Type).Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. Defined Value .Field title in application. Attributes: Data type . For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. .Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. For example.Define the field type in the database.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value.Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Does not allow updates. Label Field .Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications).HTML object used to display the field on generated form. Image1: Database value interface. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications.Only displays the field value. if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed . Save Variable . Hidden Field . Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field .The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user. SQL Type . Initial Value .You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. Very useful to passing parameters.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Variable Name .Uses the server date. Width . Defined value .Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Auto increment (automatic) . DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. HTML Type .System Date . Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. . Database Defined .When selected enable the Grid lookup. Null .Font type used to display the lookup.Auto increment (manual) .Message displayed when no info is retrieved. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font .The field value is assigned by the database . EOFMessage . The field is not used in the process of updating. To use in Validation .SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. SQL Statement . GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. Font Size .When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. Font Color . Image1: Grid Lookup.The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Attributes: Use lookup to display field description .Field automatic validation based in the lookup. See an example in the image below. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard .The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. For example. Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. Insert Date . User IP .Font size used to display the lookup.The field in SQL table is filled with (null). For example: will be updated through a trigger. . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to apply bold type to the font.Choose connection . Underlined .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Background color . Border Size .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Font Color .Used to increase the border size of the title.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Border color . Bold .Run SQL statement in different connection. Font Size . Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Width .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. super. Border Size .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Border Size .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Sets the field height. Underlined .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. sub. sub.Sets the field width. Height . Horizontal Alignment . . middle.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. super. Font Size . top. Border color .Used to apply bold type to the font. Vertical Alignment .Sets the title width. Vertical Alignment . Background color . text-top. Font Color . Font Size .Sets the title height. top. Width . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. center or justify). Underlined .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. text-bottom).Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. text-top.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. center or justify).Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Bold . Height . HorizontalAlignment . Border color . right.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. middle. Background color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. bottom. text-bottom). Font Color . Bold .Used to increase the border size of the object. center or justify).Used to apply bold type to the font. right. bottom. right. Field CSS Attributes: Font . Height . text-top. top. sub. Attributes: Tooltip . middle. super. Help Settings Document the application.Vertical Alignment . text-bottom).Sets the object width.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Width . bottom. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Create on-line instructions. .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Sets the object height. Help Type: Pop-up . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Hint . .Display the specified help text beside the field.Text . General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface Attributes: Data type . It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. System Date .Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button.Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. Initial Value .The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Label . Defined Value .The data type Select is a drop-down object which allow the selection of information through a sliding window.Select Use select object (combobox) in the form field. . Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen.Uses the server date. Initial Value (Type). Max length used when updating the table field.When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server.Define the field type in the database. The field is not used in the process of updating. Null . DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. Insert Date . if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) .You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var].The field in SQL table is filled with (null).The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Disable Field .The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Hidden Field .Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Variable Name . It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user. Database Defined . For example: will be updated through a trigger.Save Variable . Defined value . Edition Lookup . User IP . HTML Type .The field value is assigned by the database . For example.Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. Field size in database .HTML object used to display the field on generated form. Auto increment (automatic) . Image1: Database value interface.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information.Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). SQL Type . "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Very useful to passing parameters.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). before and after enabling the edition lookup to display a select object containing a custom list of KEYS / VALUES.The query used to feed the select object on the form application. Image1: Automatic lookup settings. display_field FROM table ". note the SQL statement on the picture bellow. retrieving always two fields. These lists of KEYS / VALUES can be defined in two ways: based on a database table (Automatic lookup ) or from custom arrays (lookup manual) Before Lookup After Lookup Lookup method There are available two options: Automatic. Edition Lookup . Image1: Lookup method selection. The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field . it is required to retrieve a key (insert / update) and a value to display on the object field on the SQL command. Note on the screen bellow the State field. . Attributes : SQL Select Statement . based in a SQL statement to feed the list of values or Manual which is based on a custom entered list of values.Edition lookup enables a a list of values display on forms fields. based on a SQL statement.Automatic Populates the select object dynamically. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. Create Link .Forces a form reload when the OnChange event occurs on the select field. only applicable when using the multiple values option. Title internal value . Height . Multiples Values . the select object is automatically reloaded after the popup form update.KEY3 using an specified delimiter like . Delimiter . it is possible to select many items on the fields list. lookup value original & lookup values Separated by. the default delimiter is semicolon ( . the list of values will be saved on the table's field as a string containing the text: KEY1. Reload form when value has changed . views on it.Allows to display a title line on the select object. this option works combined with Title and Title internal value. . ). or . Display original and lookup value.KEY2. In the picture bellow.By selection yes.Displays the key field and the lookup field retrieved by the SQL statement. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value. it is frequently used to re-load other lists which uses this field as parameter.Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project. Use specific connection.The object title or its default option displayed as the first line.The character used to separate the items on generated string. Title . It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables .Character used to separate KEY and LOOKUP values displayed on the list of values.The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected.defined in Delimiter Single value Multiple Values Use Title .Allows to create a link to a list update form.Select object rows quantity. Use specific connection - Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project. Checkbox Use the drop down - Display the field Select as a drop down list of checkboxes. Edition Lookup - ManuaL Enables a select object based on a list of values filled manually as an array. See picture bellow. Image1: Manual edition lookup. Attributes: Lookup type- Selects the lookup type: Single Value , Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple values (binary). Single Value Creates a simple select object, allows only one item selection. Image2: Single value lookup settings. Label- Text displayed value. Value- When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. Default - Selected value by default. Height- The quantity of rows displayed in this select object. Multiple values (delimiter) Saves a single string on the table's field based on a list of values displayed. For example the selection: Sports, Movies and Traveling is saved on the table's field as a string like S;M;T. Note the default delimiter ( ; ) semicolon. ) Image3: Multiple values lookup (delimiter Label- Text displayed value. Value- When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. Delimiter - The character used to separated the items on generated string, only applicable when using the multiple values option.The default delimiter is semicolon ( ; ). Height - Object number of lines. Multiple Values (Position) Saves on a string type field a list of values, for example it is possible to save answers to the topics: Gender , Civil Status and Hobby in only one table field. See in the table bellow the positions used by each answers on the saved string. Label Male Female Single Married Sports Value M F S M SP Start 1 1 2 2 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 Movies Books Traveling MO BO TR 3 3 3 2 2 2 Example: By selecting on the generated form: Male, Married and Books, the table's value saved a string is MMBO Image4: Multiple Values lookup settings (position). Label- Text displayed value. Value- When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. Negative - Value saved on the string when no value is selected. Start- Saved string initial position. (The string position counting start with 1) Size- Bytes quantity into the saved string. Height- Object number of lines. Multiple Values (Binary) Allows to save a multiple selection as an integer value on a table field See the examples bellow. On this lookup field interface the Value to each item is a integer number generated automatically. Implicit Value 1 2 4 8 16 Item Description Sports Movies Traveling Books Music The selection is converted into a integer which is the sum of the items implicit values before saving. Example 1: By selecting Sports and Movies on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 3. Implicit Value Item Description 1 2 4 8 16 Sports Movies Traveling Books Music 1 (Sports) + 2 (Movies) = 3 Example 2: By selecting Sports, Traveling and Books on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 13. Implicit Value 1 2 4 8 16 Item Description Sports Movies Traveling Books Music 1(Sports) + 4 (Traveling) + 8 (Books) = 13 Image5: Multiple Values settings(Binary) Label - Item displayed text . Height- Object number of lines. Insert Button - Inserts the item into the list of values Update Button - Update all the item properties. Remove Button - Removes the item from the list. Clear Button - Clear the item edit form. Save Button - Saves the current list of values for re-usable purpose, the saved lists are displayed on the Load lookup definitions field. Load lookup definitions - Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list. Use Title - Allows to display a title line on the select object. This option works combined with Title and Title internal value. Title - The object title or its default option displayed as the first line. Title internal value - The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected. Reload form when value has changed - Forces a form reload when the OnChange event occurs on the select field, it is frequently used to re-load other lists which uses this field as parameter. Display original and lookup value- Displays the key field and the lookup field retrieved by the SQL statement. lookup value original & lookup values Separated by- Character used to separate KEY and LOOKUP values displayed on the list of values. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value. Checkbox using drop down - Display the field Select as a drop down list of checkboxes. AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select, CheckBox, Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. For example: a Select field "list of states", and a second one list of cities. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height. Help Settings Document the application. Create on-line instructions, describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Attributes: Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Hint - Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text - Display the specified help text beside the field. Double Select Resource to display two values: A list with values to select and a list with selected values. General Configuration Image1: Interface of General Configuration. Attributes: Data type - The data type double select is a drop-down object which allow the multiple selection through two window of selection and a navigator between them( << < > >> ). Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Field size in database - Max length used when updating the table field.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database. DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user. Image1: Database value interface. Defined value - You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. Very useful to passing parameters. Auto increment (automatic) - Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar, if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) - The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Insert Date - When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. User IP - The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. Database Defined - The field value is assigned by the database . The field is not used in the process of updating. For example: will be updated through a trigger. Null - The field in SQL table is filled with (null). Edition Lookup Edition lookup enables a list of values display on forms fields. Before Lookup After Lookup Figure1: Edition lookup Interface Attributes : SQL Select Statement - The query used to feed the select object on the form application, The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field , display_field FROM table ", retrieving always two fields. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables , views on it. Height - Select object rows quantity Delimiter - The character used to separate the items on generated string, the default delimiter is semicolon ( ; ). Reload form when value has changed - Forces a form reload upon selected field update. Display original and lookup value- Displays the field value and the lookup return value. Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by- Character used to separate the field value and the lookup return value. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value. Use specific connection- Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project. AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select, CheckBox, Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. For example: a Select field "list of states", and a second one list of cities. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height. Help Settings Document the application. Create on-line instructions, describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Attributes: Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Hint - Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text - Display the specified help text beside the field. Checkbox Use checkbox object in the form field. General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface Attributes: Data type - The type checkbox is an object that allows the selection of one or more information through a box of marking objects. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database. DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user. Image1: Database value interface. Defined value - You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. Very useful to passing parameters. Auto increment (automatic) - Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar, if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) - The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Insert Date - When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. User IP - The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. Database Defined - The field value is assigned by the database . The field is not used in the process of updating. For example: will be updated through a trigger. Null - The field in SQL table is filled with (null). Edition Lookup Edition lookup is a way to display checkbox list of values on forms fields. See the image below. It is possible to populate the checkboxes objects based on a database table (Automatic lookup ) or from custom arrays (Manual lookup) Before Lookup After Lookup Lookup Methods There are available two options: Automatic, based in a SQL statement to feed the list of values or Manual which is based on a custom entered list of values. Image1: Lookup method selection. Edition Lookup - Automatic Populates the checkbox object dynamically, based on a SQL statement. Note the SQL statement on the picture bellow, it is required to retrieve a key ( insert / update) and a value to display on the object as fields on the SQL command. Image2: Automatic lookup settings. Attributes: SQL Select Statement - The query used to feed the checkbox object on the form application, The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field , display_field FROM table ", retrieving always two fields. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables , views on it. Columns - checkbox number of columns. Delimiter - The character used to separate the items on generated string, the default delimiter is semicolon ( ; ). NOTE: The automatic lookup option requires the form field to be string type because multiple selection saves a single string on database table field like AK;ID>;UT when using the semicolon delimiter. Reload form when value has changed - Forces a form reload when the OnClick event occurs on the checkbox field, it is frequently used to re-load another lists of values which requires this field as parameter. Option check all - Display an object to check all items and another to uncheck all items. Display original and lookup value - Select No, to display only the value retrieved by the lookup. Otherwise, the field original value and the value retrieved by lookup are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by - Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the lookup return value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Choose connection - Run the select statement in a different connection available in the project. Edition Lookup - Manual Allows the developer to manually crete a list of values saved in the application when there is no table available with the information needed. See picture bellow. Image1: Edition Lookup Manual Interface. Attributes : Lookup type- Selects the lookup type: Single Value , Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position) and Multiple values (binary). Single Value Selects only on value on the list. Image2: Edition lookup - Single Value settings. Label- Text displayed value in the checkbox object.. Value- When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. For example when Ipho Coffee is selected the value saved is 43. Default - Selected value by default. Columns - Checkbox columns quantity. Multiple values (Delimiter) Saves a single string on the table's field based on a list of values displayed. For example the selection: Sports, Movies and Traveling is saved on the table's field as a string like S;M;T. Note the default delimiter ( ; ) semicolon. Image3: Edition lookup - Multiple Values (delimiter) settings. Label- Text displayed value in the checkbox object. Value- When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. Delimiter- The character used to separated the items on generated string, only applicable when using the multiple values option.The default delimiter is semicolon ( ; ). Columns - Checkbox columns quantity. Multiple Values (Position) Saves multiple values on a single string. Using the Multiple Values (Position) mode is required to enter the label, start position in the saved string and size in bytes each item. For example, to save Gender (1byte), Civil Status(1byte) and Hobby (2bytes) in a single use the table bellow (with the positions used by each item). Label Value Start Size Male Female Single Married Sports Movies Books Traveling M F S M SP MO BO TR 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 Example: By selecting on the generated form: Male, Married and Books, the table's value saved a string is MMBO Image4: Edition lookup - Multiple Values (position) settings Label- Text displayed value in the checkbox object. Value- When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field at the specified position. Negative - Value saved on the string when no value is selected. Start- Saved string initial position. (The string position counting start with 1) Size- Bytes quantity into the saved string. Columns - Checkbox columns quantity. Multiple Values (Binary) Allows to save a multiple selection as an integer value on a field See the examples bellow. On this lookup field interface the Value to each item is a integer number generated automatically. AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music The selection is converted into a integer which is the sum of the items implicit values before saving. Example 1: By selecting Sports and Movies on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 3. AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music 1 (Sports) + 2 (Movies) = 3 Example 2: By selecting Sports, Traveling and Books on the list of values, the saved value on table field is 13. AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music 1 (Sports) + 4 (Books) + 8 ( Traveling) = 13 Image5: Edition lookup - Multiple Values (binary) settings Label- Text displayed value in the checkbox object. Columns - Checkbox columns quantity. Insert - Insert Label and Value in the values list. Update - Update selected item. Remove - Remove selected item. Clear - Clear the item edit form. Save - Saves the current list of values for re-usable purpose, the saved lists are displayed on the Load lookup definitions field. Load lookup definitions - Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list. Reload form when value has changed - Forces a form reload when the OnClick event occurs on the checkbox field, it is frequently used to re-load another lists of values which requires this field as parameter. Option check all - Display an object to check all items and another to uncheck all items. Display original and lookup value - Select No, to display only the value retrieved by the lookup. Otherwise, the field original value and the value retrieved by lookup are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by - Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the lookup return value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select, CheckBox, Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. For example: a Select field "list of states", and a second one list of cities. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height. Help Settings Document the application. Create on-line instructions, describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Attributes: Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Hint - Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text - Display the specified help text beside the field. Radio Use radio object in the form field. General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface . Attributes: Data type - The type radio is an object that allows the selection of only one information of all shown by it. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database. DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user. Image1: Database value interface. Defined value - You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. Very useful to passing parameters. Auto increment (automatic) - Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar, if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) - The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Insert Date - When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. User IP - The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. Database Defined - The field value is assigned by the database . The field is not used in the process of updating. For example: will be updated through a trigger. Null - The field in SQL table is filled with (null). Edition Lookup Display a radio object list to use in the form (see manual lookup and automatic lookup ) . Before Lookup After Lookup Lookup Method There are available two options: Automatic, based in a SQL statement to feed the list of values or Manual which is based on a custom entered list of values. Image1: Lookup type selection Edition Lookup - Automatic Lookup used to display values in a Radio field. The values are retrieved with a Select Statement from a database table. Image2: Automatic Edition lookup Interface Attributes : SQL Select Statement - The query used to feed the checkbox object on the form application, the developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field , display_field FROM table ", retrieving always two fields. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables , views on it. Columns - radio number of columns. Single column Radio double columns Radio Use Title - Display a different radio option in the field (See None on the image bellow ) referring to a value filled manually (Title Internal value ). Title - The object title or its default option displayed as the first line. Title internal value - The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected. Reload form when value has changed - Forces a form reload upon selected field update. Display original and lookup value- Displays the field value and the lookup return value. Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by- Character used to separate the field value and the lookup return value. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value. Use specific connection- Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project. Edition Lookup - Manual Enables a radio object based on a list of values filled manually as an array. See picture bellow. Use Manual lookup when the database does not have a table with required information. Image1: Manual Edition lookup Interface. Attributes : Label - Text displayed in the radio object. Value - Value store in the table. For example, the value M is added upon selecting Male. Default - Define a selection default value. Columns - Define number of columns used to display the radio items. Insert - Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Update - Update selected item. Remove - Remove selected item. Clear - Clear the attributes. Save - Saves the list values entered (for reuse with Load lookup definitions ). Load lookup definitions - Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list. Use Title - Display a different radio option in the field (See None on the image bellow ) referring to a value filled manually (Title Internal value ). Title - The object title or its default option displayed as the first line. Title internal value - The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected. Reload form when value has changed - Forces a form reload upon selected field update. Display original and lookup value- Displays the field value and the lookup return value. Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by- Character used to separate the field value and the lookup return value. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value. AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select, CheckBox, Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. For example: a Select field "list of states", and a second one list of cities. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height. Help Settings Document the application. Create on-line instructions, describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Attributes: Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Hint - Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text - Display the specified help text beside the field. Text Auto-complete This field displays a list of items obtained from a Select command. The information entry serves as a filter of items that will be displayed as it is typed. This list structure is similar to Select HTML object where each item has a value and label associated. For the Text Auto-Complete each item value of must be alpha-numeric. This list is dynamically loaded with Ajax technology. Figure1:General SettingsInterface Data Type - Defines the data type as text auto-complete. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Password field - Transforms the input type field to password. Text field Password field Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Field size in database - Max length used when updating the table field.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Validate on submit - Validate fields only when submit. Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database. Values Format Image1: Values Format Interface. Attributes: Case Settings - Converts the field text depending on the option: Uppercase Converts all text to capital letters. Lowercase Converts all text to lower case. Uppercase first Capitalizes only first word (converts only the word first letter of the first word to capital letter). Uppercase all Capitalizes each word (converts the first words letter of every to capital letter). Minimum Size - Defined the minimum size accepted. Max length- Defined the maximum size accepted. Allowed Characters - Select and define the character set accepted: All - Accepts all characters. Selected - Define the character set accepted. Using the settings below the field accepts letter, numbers and " / " (defined in the More attribute). The letters a b c (defined in the Less attribute) are not accepted. DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user. Image1: Database value interface. Defined value - You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. Very useful to passing parameters. Auto increment (automatic) - Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar, if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) - The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Insert Date - When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. User IP - The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. Database Defined - The field value is assigned by the database . The field is not used in the process of updating. For example: will be updated through a trigger. Null - The field in SQL table is filled with (null). Edition Lookup Figure3: Edition Lookup Interface. Attributes: SQL Select Statement - Enter a select comand use to capture the text. Rows - Define the number of records displayed on each search. Width - Define the capture box width (Capture Text). Search options - Define the texts earch mode (Begin equals, Any part, End equals). Permite determinar o modo de busca do texto(Início igual,Qualquer parte e Final igual). Capture Text - When this option is not selected, in the application is displayed only a field to data entry. See an example in the link below. Display original and lookup value - With this option disabled (=No) displays, for example, only the name of the State in the Capture. Display label with the description . Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Choose connection . For example: a Select field "list of states". DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. and a second one list of cities.Allows you to display the label with the description. CheckBox.Select a different connection. Width .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. super. Border color .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Border color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to increase the border size of the title. text-top.Used to apply bold type to the font. top.Used to apply bold type to the font. Vertical Alignment .Sets the title width.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Sets the field width. Font Size . super.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. middle.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Background color . Bold .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Height .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Background color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. bottom. Width . right.Title CSS Attributes: Font . Underlined . Border Size . Height . sub. center or justify).Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. text-bottom). Font Size .Sets the field height. right. Object Input CSS . text-bottom). Border Size . Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Underlined .Sets the title height. Horizontal Alignment . text-top. Font Color . middle.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. center or justify). Vertical Alignment . top. sub. bottom.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold . HorizontalAlignment . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. . Border Size . Underlined . Help Settings Document the application.Sets the object width.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment .Sets the object height. super.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. middle.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Help Type: Pop-up . Bold . center or justify). Width . sub. Height .Attributes: Font .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Used to apply bold type to the font. Border color . Vertical Alignment . text-bottom). text-top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. right. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Font Size . Create on-line instructions. top. Attributes: Tooltip . Font Color . Background color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to increase the border size of the object. bottom.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. . Text .Hint .Display the specified help text beside the field. System Date .Define the application field type. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name.Number Auto-complete This field displays a list of items obtained from a Select command.Field title in application. Width . This list structure is similar to Select HTML object where each item has a value and label associated.The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. The information entry serves as a filter of items that will be displayed as it is typed. in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Initial Value . . Image1: General Settings Interface Attributes: Data Type . When the field is defined as Number Auto-Complete Label .Uses the server date. Save Variable .Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Variable Name . For the number Auto-Complete each item value of must be numeric.Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Initial Value (Type). Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button.Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. For example. Defined Value . This list is dynamically loaded with Ajax technology. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). Only displays the field value. DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information.Define the field type in the database. Defined value . Attributes: Maximum Size . Image1: Database value interface. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Label Field . Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Validate on submit .You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. Very useful . Accepts Negative .Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.Allow to determine the minimum value of the field Maximum Value . "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".Field size in database .Allow the field to accept negative value.Allow to define the decimal separator.Validate fields only when submit. Hidden Field .Max length used when updating the table field.Allow to determine the maximum size of the field. HTML Type . VALUES FORMAT Image1:Interface of Values Format. Does not allow updates.Allow to determine the maximum value of the field Grouping .HTML object used to display the field on generated form. Disable Field . SQL Type . Minimum Value . Rows .Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) .Define the texts earch mode (Begin equals. Capture Text . Attributes: SQL Select Statement . Null .The field value is assigned by the database . Any part. End equals). Auto increment (automatic) .Qualquer parte e Final igual). Edition Lookup Figure3: Edition Lookup Interface.When this option is not selected.The field in SQL table is filled with (null). Width . Insert Date . For example: will be updated through a trigger. The field is not used in the process of updating.Enter a select comand use to capture the text.Define the number of records displayed on each search. in the application is displayed only a field to data entry. Search options .Define the capture box width (Capture Text). User IP .The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record.The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. Permite determinar o modo de busca do texto(Início igual.to passing parameters. . See an example in the link below.When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. Database Defined . For example: a Select field "list of states".Select a different connection.Allows you to display the label with the description. and a second one list of cities. Choose connection . Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours.Display original and lookup value . . AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. CheckBox. for example. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. only the name of the State in the Capture. Display label with the description .With this option disabled (=No) displays. text-top.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Border Size . Font Color . Font Color . Bold .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. middle.Used to apply bold type to the font. Background color . Horizontal Alignment . .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Title CSS Attributes: Font . sub. Vertical Alignment . bottom. center or justify).Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Border color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. text-bottom).Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Underlined . super.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Field CSS Attributes: Font . top. Font Size . right. Font Size .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Width .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Used to increase the border size of the title. Height .Sets the title width.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Background color .Sets the title height. sub.Sets the field width. bottom. Underlined .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Vertical Alignment . Width . HorizontalAlignment .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. text-top.Used to apply bold type to the font. Horizontal Alignment . text-bottom).Used to apply bold type to the font. Help Settings Document the application. text-top.Sets the object width.Sets the field height.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. middle. top. text-bottom). Height .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. . Vertical Alignment . sub. Border Size .Sets the object height. top.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. super.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Bold . center or justify). describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Height .Used to increase the border size of the field. bottom. Border color . center or justify). Create on-line instructions. Border Size . Width . Font Size . Background color .Bold . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Font Color .Used to increase the border size of the object.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Underlined . super.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. right. middle. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . right. Border color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Text . .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Hint .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Attributes: Tooltip .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Display the specified help text beside the field. Help Type: Pop-up . Defines the Image display width in pixels. it allows to insert in the field an image.Define the application field type.Defines the image display height in pixels. When the fields is of the type html image. The icon "Choose image".Image border width in pixels. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. list ScriptCase standard images for selection.Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Image Border . Attributes: Data type . Image Width .Sets the image to be displayed. Imagem . Label . The icon "Upload an image" allows the developer to send the server an image located on another machine. Image Height . .Html Image Image1: Interface of General Configuration. Background color . Width .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. center or justify).Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Font Size . Border Size . Border color . Font Color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Border color . text-top.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. top. text-bottom). Height .Used to increase the border size of the field. Underlined . bottom.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to increase the border size of the title.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Bold .Sets the title width.Used to apply bold type to the font. Title CSS Attributes: Font . middle. Font Size .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Bold .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Background color . Border Size .Sets the title height. right. .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Underlined . sub. Font Color . Vertical Alignment .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. super. super.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. center or justify). text-top. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Horizontal Alignment . top. Font Color . Width .Used to increase the border size of the object.Sets the field width. Vertical Alignment .Sets the object height. middle. Help Type: Pop-up . bottom. super. Background color . text-bottom).HorizontalAlignment .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Width . middle. Border color . right.Sets the object width. Font Size . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Underlined . sub. right.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Height . Bold .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. text-bottom).Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Vertical Alignment .Sets the field height. sub.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Border Size . bottom.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Height . text-top.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. top. Create on-line instructions.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside . center or justify). Attributes: Tooltip . Help Settings Document the application.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Hint . .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Display the specified help text beside the field.the field is clicked. Text . Field title in application. Text . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Label . Attributes: Data type .Define the application field type.Position the field on the selected block. Reload . it is shown as just an output.Label Image1: Interface of General Configuration. Position . . For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. When the field is of the type label.Text box to enter a text displayed by the field side.Reload the form when clicking in the link created with the text entered in the Text attribute. when reloading the form. Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Font Size . center or justify). super.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. bottom.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Title CSS Attributes: Font . Font Color . Border Size .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. sub. Underlined .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. right. Font Size . Bold . Vertical Alignment . Height .Used to increase the border size of the field. Width .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. HorizontalAlignment . top. middle.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Background color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. right. . Horizontal Alignment .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Bold . Background color . Underlined .Sets the title height.Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. text-top. Border color . Border Size .Sets the title width.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Border color .Used to increase the border size of the title. Font Color . text-bottom). Field CSS Attributes: Font . center or justify).Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. middle.Sets the field width. Vertical Alignment . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Width .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. text-top. Font Size . Help Settings Document the application. Font Color . text-bottom).Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. top. Help Type: Pop-up .Used to increase the border size of the object. Width . Bold . Border Size . sub. super. Create on-line instructions.Sets the object height.Sets the field height. Background color . center or justify). text-top. Underlined . Height .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. middle.Used to apply bold type to the font. Horizontal Alignment .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Attributes: Tooltip .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. right. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Sets the object width.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border color . super. bottom. top.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Vertical Alignment . text-bottom). Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . bottom.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Height .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. sub. Display the specified help text beside the field.Hint .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. . Text . numbers and special characters.Button alignment in the toolbar.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Status . "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". Choose the position in which to display the toolbar: . For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Toolbar Attributes: Properties : Position . Height . Alignment .Field title in application. SQL Type .Html Editor General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface . Disable Field .Define the field type in the database.Define the field data type. Hidden Field . Attributes: Data Type . HTML editor type fields accept letters.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.Toolbar position in the HTML Editor.Hides or displays the status bar. Label .Define the editor box height in pixels. Preview the toolbar display settings defined.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold . Button layout .Number of Toolbar lines in the HTML Editor. Preview . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Font Color .Top or Bottom.Define the toolbar display settings.Used to apply bold type to the font. Amount (Toolbar lines) . Underlined .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. . Background color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Font Size . Bold . Vertical Alignment . Height .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Border color . Border Size . sub. super.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. center or justify).Sets the title height. Border Size . middle. Font Color . Width .Sets the field width.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Underlined . top.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Font Color . super. bottom. right. sub.Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to increase the border size of the object.Used to increase the border size of the title.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. right. Width .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. middle. center or justify).Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Background color . Field CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the title width. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . text-bottom). Border color . bottom.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. text-bottom).Border Size .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. text-top. . Vertical Alignment . Underlined . Background color . Height .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Sets the field height.Used to apply bold type to the font. Border color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Font Size . Bold .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. text-top. Horizontal Alignment . HorizontalAlignment . top. Font Size . Attributes: Tooltip . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. text-top.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Sets the object height. Help Type: Pop-up .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Height . middle. text-bottom). sub. top. bottom.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. .Sets the object width.Horizontal Alignment .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Hint . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. center or justify). super.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Create on-line instructions. right. Vertical Alignment . Width . Help Settings Document the application. Display the specified help text beside the field. .Text . .Theme General Settings Attributes: Data Type . Reload .Reloads form after updates.Application field type Label .Field label in the application. Application field type. Reload . Label .Localization General Settings Attributes: Data Type .Field label in the application. .Reloads form after updates. Video´s width in pixels. SQL Type . "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode".The way the video is displayed. .Youtube General settings Attributes Data Type .Video´s height in pixels. Height . Display Mode .Field label in the application. Label . modal or new window. Disable Field . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Database Field type.Application field type. Width . Font Size . Font Color . sub.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Height .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. middle. Underlined .Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Border color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Sets the title height. bottom.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to increase the border size of the field. Vertical Alignment . super. Font Size .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Field CSS Attributes: Font . Background color . Horizontal Alignment . .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. text-top.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Sets the title width.Used to increase the border size of the title.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Background color .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. top. center or justify). Bold .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. text-bottom). Underlined . Bold . Font Color . Title CSS Attributes: Font . Border Size .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Width . right. Attributes: Tooltip . text-top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Width . right. Border Size . middle.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Sets the field height. Width . Create on-line instructions. right. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Border color . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Used to increase the border size of the object.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Height . super.Used to apply bold type to the font. Vertical Alignment .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Help Type: . top. Background color . bottom. Font Size .Sets the object width.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. sub. super.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment . text-top. Vertical Alignment . bottom.Sets the field width. Help Settings Document the application.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. HorizontalAlignment . text-bottom). Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Underlined . Bold . center or justify). Font Color . center or justify).Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. text-bottom).Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Height . sub.Sets the object height. middle. top.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Border color . Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Display the specified help text beside the field. Hint . Text .Pop-up . . To get your API Key just visit the following site: http://code. Display Mode . Zoom .Field title in application. If you have a web server on your machine. Label . Note: The API Key is a unique key composed of an alphanumeric string (text). API Key. This can be a text link or a button link. you can just get a key for local testing. Width .You need to enter your Authorization Key to view maps using Google API. and that's specified as http://localhost in the field during registration. It can either be opened in Modal window or in a New window. Data Type: .google. Height .Define the link type.Defines the initial zoom factor (available on the Google API) for the map.com/intl/en/apis/maps/signup.Defines the height of the map.Select Google maps as the data type. When you register to use the service.Defines the width of the map.html Link Type . For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table and is displayed as Client Name. Home . All pages (ScriptCase applications) that are using the API must be located in the directory that was specified when registering for the Google Maps API.Defines how the map will be opened. which is nothing more than the license to use this service.Define the method for passing parameters to the Google API. the key is tied to a domain and a directory on the server.Google Maps This feature allows you to display maps using the Google API. . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font. Background color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. .Used to increase the border size of the title. Font Size .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Title CSS Attributes: Font . Underlined . SQL Type .Displays the SQL (database) field type.Text Link . Border Size . Font Color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Disable Field . "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Specify the text for the link to the map.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Bold . Border color . sub.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Background color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the title height. Horizontal Alignment . Horizontal Alignment .Border color . center . text-top.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Width .Sets the title width.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Border color . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . right. Background color . super. Height .Used to increase the border size of the object.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Border Size . Height . text-bottom). bottom. Bold . Font Size . super. Underlined . HorizontalAlignment .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. text-bottom). middle.Used to apply bold type to the font. Font Size .Sets the field height. Vertical Alignment . Vertical Alignment . middle. Border Size . Font Color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Font Color . Underlined .Sets the field width.Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. top.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. center or justify).Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. right. right.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Field CSS Attributes: Font . Width . center or justify). bottom.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. text-top.Used to apply bold type to the font. top. sub. Help Settings Document the application.or justify).Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. middle. Hint . super. Height .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Sets the object height.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Width . top. bottom. text-top. Create on-line instructions.Sets the object width. Help Type: Pop-up . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. sub. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. text-bottom). Vertical Alignment . . Attributes: Tooltip . .Display the specified help text beside the field.Text . Bar Code General Settings Atributtes: Data Type .Type of barcode. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".Define the field type in the database.Field title in application.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". There are 18 types of barcode. Label .Field data type. Barcode Attributes: Type .Text to designate the barcode. Disable Field . which are listed below: . For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. SQL Type . Text . Font Size . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Height . bottom. Underlined .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. right. Border Size .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application . middle.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. text-top.Font Color . right.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. sub. center or justify).Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the title width. Background color . HorizontalAlignment . top.Sets the field width. Width . Bold . middle.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. bottom.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Font Color . super. Underlined . sub.Sets the title height.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Border color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Border color . Font Size . Bold .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. top. center or justify).Used to apply bold type to the font. Width . Border Size .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Vertical Alignment .Used to increase the border size of the field. super.Used to increase the border size of the title. Background color . text-bottom). Vertical Alignment . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Height .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the field height. Horizontal Alignment . Background color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. text-bottom). Font Size . text-top.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Font Color . Field CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Width .Sets the object width. Bold . Border Size .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Underlined . Height . middle. Horizontal Alignment . super. Vertical Alignment . text-top. bottom. Border color . text-bottom).Used to apply bold type to the font.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.object using a color palette. . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. right. Attributes: Tooltip . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Help Settings Document the application. center or justify).Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Help Type: Pop-up . Hint . top. sub.Sets the object height.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Used to increase the border size of the object.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Create on-line instructions. .Display the specified help text beside the field.Text . It will allow the user to change the log's configuration for the application. Options: Scheme . Events . Image 1: Log Interface.Which event the log will save the application changes. .Log New interface included in the V6. All Fields .Use all fields in the log.Scheme of log to be used for the application. Pages Blocks Colors Schema Header & Footer .Layout Overview In this module we can see how to customize layout of applications and its settings. Allowing us to add Themes(colors) to the application. organize the application fields in different blocks and pages or define heading and footer values. and in each of them. . In applications of form. a page is a container of blocks. identified by pag1. Image1: Interface of Configuration of the pages (available only to applications of form. The form application already bring a standard page. with the creation of new pages. The pages are show in the application in tabs mode. you can include a lot of blocks. Image2: Form application using resources of pages.Pages Using the definition of blocks. The use of pages is very indicated when we have an application that involves a lot of fields of a table (more than 20 for example). where each tab has the blocks defined in Organization of Blocks. See below an example of a form application using two pages: General Data and Documents (see Image2). control and filter it is possible to create more pages to an application. A form with more than 20 fields in the vertical would be difficult to use. control an filter). Where in each application it is created a page which has default name “ pag1” . An application can have a lot of pages. that can be renamed. Field to the color definition to the text that will have the selected tab. Selecting the desired color.Allow to define what font and characters are going to be shown in the field. just click on the update button and the correspondent code to the selected code will be automatically transferred to the field. it is opened a window having a color palette.Inform the font size desired.Allow to define the background color that will have the non selected tab. just click on the update button and the correspondent code to the selected color will be automatically transferred to the field. Clicking on the existing icon at the right side of the field. The window is closed and the option is transferred to the field in the main window. NOTE: The definition of the pages is only considered by the form in the orientation Unique Register Configurations relative to the folder tab. To delete a page. Click on the existing icon at the right side of the field. it is opened a window having a color palette. Font Size . just click on the update button and the correspondent code to the selected color will be automatically transferred to the field. just click on the delete button presented on the line of the correspondent page. it is opened a window having a color palette. Click on the icon that is at the right side of the field it is opened a window to font selection. just click on the update button and the correspondent code to the selected color will be automatically transferred to the field. in the first field fill the page name and in the second field select the image that will be presented as folder icon. Click on the existing icon at the right side of the field. and afterwards click on the button INSERT. Selecting the desired color. that it is transferred to the field below of the list and click on the button Confirm.Allow to define the background color that will have the selected tab. Attributes: Font Name . Selecting the desired color. Selecting the desired color. Color of the non selected background . Just select the font in the existing list. To include a new page. Color of the selected font . . just fill the two text above of the buttons Insert. it is opened a window having a color palette.Allow to define the font color that will have the non selected tab.Image3: Interface of Configuration of the Pages. Color of the non selected font . Click on the existing icon at the right side of the field. Color of the selected background . Figure 1: Block settings interface. .Blocks Conceptually a block is a “container” in which a Form Application. The Figure bellow shows an ORGANIZATION column. Control or Grid fields are located. Click to select the block in order to modify its position. You can add as many blocks as you need and you can organize them to best suit your purpose. By default the applications created in ScriptCase only consist of one block. all you have to do is drag it to the desired page as indicated below. bearing the same name as the application. and to delete the block. To change the page block is displayed in. Organising Blocks and Changing position See below how to modify the page block display order. To the left of each block there are two icons: to edit the block properties. This is how to remove a block from being displayed. Click on the block and drag it to “Blocks not shown”. used to define the position of the next block (positioned to the side or below in the series of blocks). Attributes: Block (name) . "Line" .The fields are displayed below each other while observing the number of columns. "Below" . . "Beside" .Flag that controls whether the field label is displayed inside the block.Displays the label below the field.The label options are: "Above" .The fields are displayed side by side (in line) without tabulation (aligned in columns). Fields (Position) .Displays the label beside the field. "Beside" . Fields (Columns) . Label (Position) .Number of columns to be displayed side by side within the block.Block title header displayed.Position of fields within the block: “Below” . Label (Display) .Displays the label above the field.The fields are displayed beside one another while observing the number of columns.Flag that controls whether the block title is displayed. Title (Display) . Defines the width of the block in pixels or as a percent.Indicates that the next block is displayed below the previous one. "Beside" . "Tabs" . Organization (Width) .Organization (Next) .Indicates that the next block is displayed beside the previous one. Organization (Height).Defines the height of the block in pixels or as a percent.Indicates that the next block is displayed as a tab. just click . Add New Block To add new blocks to an application. .Organization of blocks on the page: "Below" . Figure 2: Edit Block interface. Title Font .Block title background image. .Block label.Block title font size applied. Title Height .Figure 2: Add New Block interface. Font color . Background image .Block title line background color. Title .Block title font color.Block Title. Attributes: Name . Font size . Display Title .Block title line height (in pixels). Attributes: Name .Block title font applied.Block name. Background color . Edit Block Click to edit the block properties and click Save.Whether to display a line containing the block title.Block name. Label . Center or Right).Block height. Label Position .Calculate the block columns.Block title horizontal alignment (Left.Display block field labels. Border color . Middle or Bottom). Column Width . Block height . Next Block . . Columns .Block border color. Vertical Alignment .Block width. Label color . Display Label .Spacing between the block cells.Horizontal Alignment . Block width .Field label position.Position of the next block in relation to the current one. Cellspacing .Field label display color.Block title vertical alignment (Top.Block field organization. Border width .Number of block field columns.Block border width. Field Organization . . Theme .Layout Settings Figure 1: Layout Settings interface Is used to define the Application Theme.Used to select an existing Theme (colors. Footer Template . (CSS) Attributes: Header Template . etc) for the application.Used to select the Footer format.Used to select the Header format. fonts. Header & Footer HEADER Figure 1: Header Interface. Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. Enter the format in the text field alongside it.Defines the Header title to be displayed in the application. Header Variables . For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”.The variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combobox. Value: When the “Value” type is selected.The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the header. (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) . To locate existing images and select one. The selected field value is then displayed in the header line. the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the header line. This interface format can change depending on the selected option in "Layout >> Settings >> Header Template". A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the application's data source (“Select” query) are displayed beside the header variable when the “Field” type is selected. Enter text and/or “Global Variables”. Date: Displays the system date in the header line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. (A Form Applications has 2 titles: one for Insert mode.This flag determines whether or not the Header is displayed Application Title .The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header. Display Header . you may need to associate content with it. Search Criteria . Each condition is displayed on a new line. See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples. and another one for Update mode). There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. (available only in Grid applications) FOOTER . To see all the available date formats. click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon . Depending on the type. Title: Displays the value entered in “Select Title” in the header . There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. Date: Displays the system date in the footer line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the footer line. click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples. Value: When the “Value” type is selected. This format of this interface may change depending on the option selected in "Layout >> Settings >> Footer Template". to see all the available date formats. Title: Display in the Footer the value entered in “Select Title”.The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the footer. you may need to associate content with it. The selected field value is displayed in the footer line. Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. Search Criteria . Enter the format in the text field alongside it. For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”. Footer Variables . Each condition is displayed on a new line. Display Footer . (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) . (available only in Grid applications) .The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header.The variable fields can be populated with any of the types listed in the Combobox.Figure 2: Footer Interface. To locate existing images and select one. Enter text and/or “Global Variables”. See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. Depending on the type.This flag determines whether or not the footer will be displayed. A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the “Select” (application's data source) are displayed beside the Footer variable when the “Field” type is selected. click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon . Events allow the developer to define custom actions at a specific execution time (e.This event runs before insert a record. earlier.This event runs when navigating from one record to another one. insert. onAfterInsert .This event runs if the validation is failured. onAfterDelete . . Insert. onValidateSuccess . clicking on the buttons (new. etc. Filter) depending on application.) and for a specific type of application.This event runs after updating a record. onLoad .This event runs when the application is loading just for the first time.This event runs by clicking on the validation (OK. onAfterUpdate . onBeforeInsert .This event occurs when the page is loaded.This event runs if the validation is successfully.This event runs after the deletion. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". upon submitting a form. onScriptInit . Read more about Scriptcase Macros.This event runs when the application is loading.. onRefresh . onBeforeDelete .Events Events Scriptcase uses the concept of events to enable to developer to customize application code. when it is loaded. onApplicationInit . With errors. onValidateFailure .This event is executed before the deletion. Update.This event runs after insert a record.This event runs before updating a record. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. After a record is inserted. .g. onValidate . onNavigate . ie when navigating from one record to another one. Without errors.This event runs to reload the page of the application. Delete..). onBeforeUpdate . This event fires when the field has focus and the field value is changed and the focus is then directed to another object. the field value is NOT changed and the focus is directed to another object. onBlur . Passing parameters is optional. See the example below: The user field is validated against a database (table). Example: 1 . onChange .Ajax Events Using AJAX reduces the amount of unnecessary data traffic with the server thereby speeding up application processing. Only the onClick event is available to Grid applications.This events fires when the field has focus.This events fires when the field has focus. onFocus . Figure 1: AJAX event interface. onClick .This events fires when the field is clicked. For valid users it returns the name. It allows individual data components on a page to be updated without the need to refresh the entire page. (in PHP code). . For invalid users a message is displayed. The following events are available in ScriptCase.Select the field and the event used by the AJAX process. 2 -Enter the PHP business rule in the PHP editor. 3. 1.ScriptCase provides you with a number of predefined blocks of code that can be inserted into the PHP editor and then amended accordingly.Use this to create parameters retrieving field values.Use it to type in your PHP code. . Insert Code . 2. Parameters (Fields) . These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. PHP editor . Read more about Scriptcase Macros.Figure 2: Selecting fields and events for AJAX processing. Figure 3: Programming PHP with AJAX. The code is processed by the Server and the XML result is sent to the browser. And we can select several search criterias. Then we must select which fields can be searched. Quicksearch show combobox . In the Quicksearch settings we have the following options: Button within the search . Quicksearch Watermark .Option to inform if the search button is inside of the text box (input object). .Show combobox if there is only one quicksearch option.Watermark showed in quicksearch Quicksearch width .Quicksearch width in pixels.Quick Search Quick Search is an option that allow us to make searches in multiple fields through a text input field in the toolbar. Note: You must add the quicksearch button on the "Toolbar" Settings to use it. . Linking).Buttons Buttons There is the option to create buttons that will be visible in the Toolbar. PHP. . New Button To create a new button. Deleting a button To delete a button click the Delete icon in the right of the button name at the application menu under the Buttons option. Figure 1: Create new button. click on the New Button option and enter a name and the type of the button. Types button: (Javascript. Image2: New button function. Image and Link). . Image2: New button function. There are three types of display buttons: (Button. You can set it as a Link.Javascript Button Creating a Javascript Type Button There is the option to create buttons that will be visible in the Toolbar. Display mode .Defines the button will be displayed. Label . Figure 1: Create new button. Button or Image. Button Display Mode Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. click on "New button". enter the name and select the type of button.Defines the button title displayed in the application. To create a new button. Figure 1: Button Settings Interface.Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode.Defines a hint message. Display mode .Button display icon.Destination window where the code will be executed (in the Same Window / in some Other Window). Icon . . created in the buttons schema editor.Defines the button will be displayed. leave this field blank. Confirmation Message . To not display a message. CSS Style .Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode. Hint . Show in Addition (Insert) mode .CSS style class name. Image Button Display Mode Figure 1: Button Settings Interface.Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box.Defines a hint message.Hint . leave this field blank. You can set it as a Link. Confirmation Message . To not display a message.Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. Target . Show in Edition (Update) mode . Button or Image. Hint .Defines the button will be displayed.Destination window where the code will be executed.Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode.Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode. You can set it as a Link. Confirmation Message . . Button or Image. Show in Edition (Update) mode . To not display a message.Target . Show in Addition (Insert) mode .Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode.Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box.Defines the button title displayed in the application. Display mode . Show in Edition (Update) mode . created in the buttons schema editor. Target .Defines a hint message. leave this field blank.CSS style class name. Show in Addition (Insert) mode .Destination window where the code will be executed (in the Same Window / in some Other Window). (Same Window / Other Window).Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode. Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. Label . Link Button Display Mode Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. CSS Style . Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. Deleting a button To delete a button click the Delete icon in the right of the button name at the application menu under the Buttons option. Code Image2: JavaScript Interface. . Defines the button title displayed in the application. click on "New button". To create a new button. enter the name and select the type of button. Display mode .Defines the button will be displayed. Label . There are three types of display buttons: (Button. Image and Link). Image2: New button function. Button or Image. Figure 1: Create new button.Php Button Creating a Php Type Button There is the option to create buttons that will be visible in the Toolbar. Button Display Mode Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. . You can set it as a Link. Target . CSS Style .Defines a hint message. Show in Edition (Update) mode . leave this field blank.Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode.Defines the button will be displayed.Button display icon. Hint .CSS style class name. .Hint . Display mode .Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode. To not display a message. Icon . leave this field blank. Image Button Display Mode Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. Button or Image. Confirmation Message .Destination window where the code will be executed (in the Same Window / in some Other Window). Show in Addition (Insert) mode . Figure 1: Button Settings Interface.Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. You can set it as a Link. Confirmation Message . To not display a message. created in the buttons schema editor.Defines a hint message.Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode.Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box.Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode. created in the buttons schema editor. Show in Edition (Update) mode . To not display a message.Defines the button title displayed in the application. Hint .Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode.Defines the button will be displayed. Display mode .Target . Target .Destination window where the code will be executed. CSS Style . Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. (Same Window / Other Window).Destination window where the code will be executed (in the Same Window / in some Other Window). Label . Show in Addition (Insert) mode . Link Button Display Mode Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. Confirmation Message . You can set it as a Link. leave this field blank.Defines a hint message.CSS style class name.Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode. Show in Addition (Insert) mode . Show in Edition (Update) mode . . Button or Image. . Code Image2: Php Interface. Deleting a button To delete a button click the Delete icon in the right of the button name at the application menu under the Buttons option.Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. Button or Image.Link Button Creating a Link type button There is the option to create buttons that will be visible in the Toolbar. Figure 1: Create new button. Display mode . Label .Defines the button title displayed in the application. To create a new button. enter the name and select the type of button. click on "New button". Image and Link). .Defines the button will be displayed. Image2: New button function. You can set it as a Link. Button Display Mode Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. There are three types of display buttons: (Button. Target .Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode. You can set it as a Link.Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode. Display mode .Defines a hint message. To not display a message.Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. leave this field blank. leave this field blank.Defines the button will be displayed.Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. CSS Style .Hint .Defines a hint message. Show in Addition (Insert) mode . Button or Image. Target . To not display a message.Destination window where the code will be executed (in the Same Window / in some Other . Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. Image Button Display Mode Figure 1: Button Settings Interface.Button display icon. Confirmation Message .Destination window where the code will be executed (in the Same Window / in some Other Window). Show in Edition (Update) mode . created in the buttons schema editor. Confirmation Message .CSS style class name. Hint . Icon . Show in Addition (Insert) mode .Defines the button will be displayed.CSS style class name.Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode. Display mode .Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode.Defines the button title displayed in the application. To not display a message. Button or Image.Destination window where the code will be executed. Label .Window). leave this field blank.Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode. Hint . Show in Edition (Update) mode . Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. You can set it as a Link. CSS Style . Show in Addition (Insert) mode .Defines a hint message.Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode. Show in Edition (Update) mode . (Same Window / Other Window). Target . created in the buttons schema editor. . Confirmation Message .Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. Select the link type Buttons and click in next (as Image below). . The link button requires a link associated to it. 2 . and follow the steps below to create the link required to complete the operation.Figure 1: Button Settings Interface.Using the link option click in new link.Select the application that will be called and click in Next. Creating a new Link 1 . Image4: List of Applications Interface. 3 . In the application menu (on the left side of the window) there is an option to create new links configure the new Link button . Image2:Create new Linking. as in the image below. Image3: Link Type Interface. Image8: Link/Form Properties Interface.4 . Empty .How will be presented the link. Link Operation Mode . Image7: Parameters Definition Interface .Value.Define the parameters passed. Value or Empty. 5 . Image5: Parameters Definition Interface . Field . Image6: Parameters Definition Interface .Define the form link properties .Field. .Enter the field used to pass the content. Fixed .Enter a fixed content to be passed.No value will be pass.Iframe display. It can be of three types: Field.Empty. Open in a Iframe .Open another window to show the form. Deleting a button To delete a button click the Delete icon in the right of the button name at the application menu under the Buttons option.Show the form in the same in the same window that the search.Open in the same window . below of search an Iframe is created to display the form. Form Properties . Output URL of the called application .Select the buttons that will be shown. .web address accessed when the user exit the grid. Hint of the Link .Show the form in the same browser window. Open in other window .Message shown when the mouse is over the selected link field. exiting the search and going to the form. Master/detail Form Overview MASTER/DETAIL FORM Allow to create update forms to update tables 1:N in a single window. Image1: Master / Details orders and orders Items Form. See more: How to create a Master Detail . Note: The detail form required type is Grid.New Detail In the application menu . Application List The Wizard lists the project applications available to link. Parameters settings In the column Field (image left side) all master form fields are displayed. Editable grid or Editable grid view. Image1: Creating a new Master/Detail. . Select the called application from the list by checking the box. Usually the detail form foreign key are associated to the primary key to the master form. clicking in the item New Detail from the folder Master/Detail Form create a new detail link. Only these types are listed by the Wizard. In the column Key (image right side) is displayed the detail form fields. Defining name and label Enter detail link name and label. . Total Display all records.configure the lines number (records displayed) for Partial paging. Other Properties: Editable Grid . Paging .Select if the detail form is editable. Iframe properties .Select paging mode: PartialPaging according to number of records configured. Lines per page .Choose dependency treatment mode: .Editing Form Detail Link Property It´s possible to change the Link properties by clicking in the created link. Attributes: Form properties .Select the buttons displayed (operations performed) in the detail form.Configurein pixels the iframe height and width where to display the detail form. When deleting . Criticize if child row exists Also delete child row Display error message for form dependencies with the detail record. . Exclude all dependent records in detail form.This button update the detail application link. Edit Link . Label and specific Connection for this link. For specific connection is displayed a select with the project available connections. Define Field name. See more : Update related table Updating Many-to-Many Relationship via CheckBox List Image1: Generated application with associated tables Identification This link is treated as a field in the Form application. Data type.Many-to-many Relationships Configure M:N relationship tables. Image2: Create a relationship field . Enter a select command or base it on a table. Image4: Select command base on a table. Image5: Select Command. Define the update display format.Value displayed in the update field. Lookup Display Image6: Lookup display field.Grid Information Define the select (lookup) data source. For the option Choose Table 3 objects select are displayed allowing to choose the table and the fields Key and Description. .Value stored in the relationship table. Image3: Enter a select command. Key . Image7: Field object type. Command Select Select Command to display the update field values available. Description . Columns . (see relationship attribute). Object .Define a delimiter between key and description when the option selected is Display key and description.Display key and description .Lookup object type to display in the form.Display the relationship attribute title. Define the relationship table updated. Available types: Select. Relationship Table Image8: Relationship table.Display the key and the description entered in the select command. Image9: Select table. Relationship Key Image10: Link key. Separator . Define the application fields related to the relationship table fields. Check and Uncheck all . Double Select.Define number of columns displayed (available only to objects Checkbox and Radio). . Checkbox and Radio.Enable an option to check or uncheck all values( available only to Checkbox). Display Title . Dados Entry . Define the lookup table field related to the relationship table. Image13: Defining table foreign key. Create a field and relate it via the select.Store a value entered by the user. Define the values stored in the relationship table fields that are not foreign keys. Relationship Attributes Image14: Application view generate with the relationship attribute type Access Type. Image15: Defining field attribute.Image11: Defining update table field values. . Attribute .Store an application field value. Lookup Field Image12: Lookup field. Display Settings (optional) Define relationship field display settings such as CSS field attributes.Define search fields (Key and/or Description) to display. Image17: Search field settings. Initial State . Search fields . Help Settings Document the application. Create on-line instructions. Limit of Records . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. title and object. Define a search to the relationship table. Image18: Display Settings. .Define the object load state.Search (only for Double Select) Image16: Double Select Filter..Maxim quantity of records return by the search. Attributes: Tooltip . Text .Display the specified help text beside the field.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Hint . Help Type: Pop-up . .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. . The absolute path where the application documents are stored. Share theme variable .Timeout for Ajax update message.Allow all project users to edit this application. Zero is the standard value of PHP.Folder where the application will be stored in the workspace. Application Images . . Documents Path . Edit Project . Localization .This field can be used to describe of the application objectives.Timeout time in seconds. Image1: Application Settings Interface.Application code determined in the moment of the application creation.Specific images used by this application.Use the session theme variable in this application. Description . Folder . Share location variable .Use the session location variable in this application. all the hints and messages are converted to the chosen language.Generated application language used. Timeout .The base directory where the application images are stored. Timeout Message . Attributes: Application code . this code can be renamed through the main menu.Application Settings Define applications attributes. Image Directory . .. HelpCase Link . Message Title . Values: right. Image2: ErrorSettingsInterface. showing the SQL Commands in the moment of its use.Max upload file size for this application. Show error title in the field .Records can be selected in the checkbox to be updated or removed. The standard value is deactivate. Debug Mode . Error title . Maximum File Size . Error Script .Allow to show the title line of the error message in the field.Update and removes lines. Error SQL ..Time to display the validation error message.Title of the error message in the application. top and bottom. Timeout Error .Error position in the application. Show error title in the application .Show information of the script and line where the error occurs. Ajax error output . Attributes: Error Position .Associate a HelpCase manual to your application.Text used in title line as label.Open a widow to display Ajax error messages output during debug mode. Use Enter to Tab . left.Allow to show the title line of the error message.Show the SQL command that originated the error.Run the application in debug mode.Use the enter key to tabulate. . Exit application after the form processing. Redirecting Variable . close the browser window. Exit Application .Define the application return mode: return to edit a record after insert it or open the new record mode after insertion. Return After inserting . Attributes: Exit URL . this global is most commonly used to filter the form in the SQL menu.Specify the URL to which the user will be redirected upon exiting the aplication.Variable name. which is used to store the URL of the current application. Figure 1: Navigation interface. Redirecting URL . Close Window . .URL to which the user will be redirected in case a global variable is not available inside the application for any reason is not avaliable.When exiting the application.Navigation Define the navigation attributes of an application. Messsage displayed when there is no records to show. Message to confirm insert .Messages This interface is used to configure the messages of the application. Interface used to configure the messages upon Delete a record.Message displayed after the insertion of a record.Message displayed when validating an unique key. Attributes: Message after insert . Image 1: Validation messages. Interface used to configure the messages upon insert a record. Image 2: Insertion messages interface. Attributes: Message after Update .Message displayed after the Update of a record. Interface used to configure the messages upon Update a record. Image 3: Update messages interface. Unique key violation . Message to confirm Update . Attributes: No records message . Primary key violation .Message displayed when there is an error with the primary key.Confirmation message displayed before the insertion of a record. .Confirmation message displayed before the Update of a record. Image 4: Exclusion messages interface. Attributes: Message after Delete .Message displayed after the Delete of a record. . Message to confirm Delete .Confirmation message displayed before the Delete of a record. Get) Image 1: Global Variables Interface.Defines how the variable is received by the application. the global variable is a external parameter required to application execution. Image 2: Variables Settings Interface. Get . Select the way it is passed to the Control application.In this option the variable must be created as a session variable in the PHP by other application before the search call which is being defined. Shows all global variables used in the application.Defines variables behavior.Defines that the variable must be passed by the HTML command line. . etc. if has been defined that a variable is received by a Post Method and it has been passed by get method the content won't be accepted. Variable passing methods : Session . created by special fields. that means. Value . Example: Select customerid. customername from customers where customerid ='[v_customerid]' In this case. being visible to the browser. Post. or entering a variable in Application General Data field to replace the field name. this content is subdivided in three blocks. Attribute . Global variables are defined in square brackets ([variable]).Variable name in the application. in Lookups. the variables "v_customerid" appears in the variables configuration. they are: Scope . These variables should be passed to the application that is being implemented through one of the methods (Session. The application may contain global variables in the Where Clause.Global Variables GLOBAL VARIABLE This menu shows the global variables being used within the application. Defines that the variable must be passed through the post method of the form.Do not validate (checking) the variable at execution time.Determines where the variable was defined. Description.Post . Type (Input/Output) .Defines if the variable is an input or an output. a form requesting the input variables used by the application is displayed. At execution time in the development environment. Settings . . In case that in origin table occurs any update. the effect of the table synchronization. or still a change in the data type. so they suffer type update in the database. After accessing the function from the link “Synchronize table” is show a comparison table between the application fields (left table) and the table fields of the database (right table). the marked fields in “red” will be deleted of the application. the marked fields in “Green” will be inserted in the form. this update will show it visible as seen in the image below: Image1: Synchronize table function interface. and the marked fields in “orange” will be updated. as for example the inclusion of a new field. or exclusion. comparatively. .Synchronize Table This process will realize a comparison between the definitions of the application fields and the table fields that has origin in the database. above Image. will be the same of the exclusion of a field that exist in the application plus the inclusion of a new field. Note: When a table field in the database is renamed. Used to link our form to each other type of the application. Menu and Tab. This linking type is associated to events of Inclusion and/or Alteration. Creating Links In the screen below the user will must specify which the linking type to be effected. the user will be able to edit an existent linking or to do a creation of a new application. Image1: Menu of Links. “Application”. when being selected it opens other window showing a search application. Capture . . when occurs one of this events the navigation will be effected to the application that we are calling.Used to link our form to any other type of application. when occurs one of those events the navigation will be effected to the application that we are calling. we can link our form with application of the types: Search. In the windows below.Will be created an icon beside the field inside the form. In this application that will be opened can do searches and return a value to text field. This linking type is associated to events of Inclusion and/or alteration. The window below “Application List” show the form applications. Image2: Interface of Linking between applications.Link We use to link the form application which we are defining with other applications.Used to link our form through a link to any other type of application. Form. There are three types of links available: Application . Field . For effecting this linking we have to create a special field of the type Formula Label and associate to it the linking. the user will must choose the application which will must be linked and clink on Continue >>. “”Field” or “Capture”. Control. In the window below “Definition of Parameters”.With this option activated.Choosing this option it will be passed no value to the field. they are: Field . Redirecting after Update . at the left side. there are three options. Empty .With this option activated. will must be selected the option for passing value.Image3: Interface Linking between application. . Value . when occurring the alteration will be done the navigation for the application that we are linking. at the right side. is shown the application fields which we are linking and that need to receive parameters to execution and. Attributes: Redirecting after insert .When choosing this option have to inform the field to be used for passing content.In case of selecting this option in the text field inform fixed content to be passed. In the window below “Linking Properties” will must be filled the relative attributes to the linking. Image4: Interface of Definition of the Parameters. when occurring the inclusion will be done the navigation for the application that we are linking. Image5: Interface of Linking Properties. Image6: Interface Parameter Definition. The window below “Linking Type” show that when it is selected the linking “Capture Type”. will must be selected the option for passing value.Choosing this option it wil be passed no value to the field. at the left side. Will be created an icon beside the field in the filter form. In this application that will be opened we can do searches and return a value to the text field. Value . The window below “Application List” show the search applications. there are three options. they are: Field .In case of selecting this option in the text field inform fixed content to be passed. when being selected it opens another window showing a search application. Image7:Application Link Interface In the window below “Definition of Parameters”. . at the right side. Empty . the user will must choose the application which will must be linked and click on Continue >>. is shown the application fields which we are linking and that need to receive parameters to execution and.Form property .Allow to select the buttons that will be shown in the toolbar of the filter.When choosing this option have to inform the field to be used for passing content. appears a combobox with the fields of the origin application to be selected the field that will be used for the link. so its content return for the field the filter form. .Recovering the field value . Concluding the linking. Image8: Interface Parameter Definition. as its necessary. the user will be able to update and remove the linking done.It should be selected the field of the search application to the linking object. Programming Overview ScriptCase has incorprated the concept of Object Oriented programming. . resources. using attributes. and by using these concepts you can reap huge rewards in terms of better organization and improved development. methods and libraries. It is possible to create your own business rules in applications. Click the clean button to clean the attributes list.Attributes Attributes are variables containing a global variable passed from one application to another. Attributes: Attributes .Enter the attribute's name and click on the include button to add it. click on the delete button after selecting the atribute. To modify it click on the attribute's name (located to the left of the buttons) and click the Update button to save your changes. Image 1: Attribute Settings interface. . To remove an attribute. An attribute can be referenced in all of the methods and events of an application. Using methods in applications it is possible to reuse code and thus improve development productivity.Methods Methods are functions or procedures declared by the developer. Figure 3: Adding a Method. to support the implementation of business rules for an application. See the Figure below. 2 Methods may involve parameters being passed. Define the name for the new method then click the Create button. To include a parameter variable in a method. 1. Creating a new method Figure 2: Create a new Method. Figure 1: Method menu interface. It is possible to create PHP and JAVASCRIPT methods. click the 'Var' button: . To Edit a parameter variable in a method.Figure 4: Parameter Variable icon. Add the number of variables: Figure 5: Define Parameters interface Defining a variable: Figure 6: Add Parameters interface. Type: Select the variable type as: For value or For reference. * 10270 Value Default: The default value used to initialize the parameter variable when called. * References allow you to create a second name for a variable so you can use it to read or modify the original data stored in that variable. click the button: . Name: Input a variable name. Unmark all parameter variables selected in the Parameters field. it needs to be called within an event. . Edit the variable selected in the Parameters field. Delete the variable selected in the Parameters field. See the example below: Figure 8: Events. 3 In order to run a method. Select all parameter variables in the Parameters field. In this example we are using the onLoad event to call our method when the record is loaded.Figure 7: Define Method Parameters interface. See how simple it is to call the method in the example below: Using a method : Figure 9: Event method interface Thus we get the following result when running the application. . access them via the main menu: Configuration ==> Libraries. Public Libraries. All methods in the library are visible in all application events and methods.g.Libraries To use a library you need to select the corresponding library type (e. . Project Libraries or User Libraries) and enable the applicable php library file(s). To manage libraries. Tabs Applications Overview Tabs applications This application type allows to organize multiple applications display in one single screen in a tab structure. . Image1: TABS application. Usually applications related to a common topic are grouped into a tab application for example: Employees / Projects. Menu below . Application Alignment .Have the same principle of 'Folder below'. Can be: Pixel or percentage. one next other. Table size . but its visual schema has the menu style. next to the footer. This property. Exit .Allow that the application run in the folders through an iframe or normal.Tabs Tab Settings Image1: Tab Settings Interface.Show all applications in folders order.Align the folders in the left.Size of the main table. left.Define the application position. like a vertical menu. Side by Side . but its visual schema has the menu style. Folder below . but its visual schema has the menu style.Display the folders above the application. Folder in the right .Have the same principle of 'Folder in the left'. Can be: center. Organization . Type . left or right.Align the folders in the right. but its visual schema has the menu style. Menu in the left . it can be: Folder above .Define how the app will be presented.Define the tab position. can be: . Menu above .Have the same principle of 'Folder in the right'.Have the same principle of 'Folder above'. Menu in the right .Display the folders below the application.How the folders organization will be presented. Measurement Unit . Can be: center. or right. Tab Settings. allows to define the following attributes: Title .Application title that will be shown in the toolbar.The unit used by table size. Folder in the left . Tab Alignment . Button in the toolbar Exit Icon . .You can define the icon of the exit button on the toolbar.Button on the bottom of the page. Folder. Use the image selection resource to visualize and select in easy way the desired image. click on the 'update' button. Finally.Choose an image that will be used on this tab.Double click on the folder name (left column / list of folders) and then delete the item. Update .Folder Settings This function serve to link each folder with a pre-existent application.). Clean . etc. Add a folder . Finance Data. Delete .Double click on the folder name (left column / list of folders) and then update the desired data. Image .To create a tab.Application name that will be shown in the tab or menu (examples: Personal Data.Clean all data of selected item. click in 'Add' and fill these fields: Label . . Image1: Folder Settings Interface. click on edit button. Edit . The following steps are selection of the application and the definition of the iframe size (Picture 3). Initially the user must click on the tab that want to update. You have the following options: Add .Application Settings Here we define the application for each tab. (Picture 2).Select the application and then.When you click in 'Add'. Remove . requested in the add application process. How to Add and Edit Applications Selecting the application and click on 'Next'. See the picture: Image1: Application Settings Interface. On the next screen you define a few parameters of the link: . a screen with app list will show up to choose the application. as the screen below: Image2: Application Link Interface.Select the application that you want to delete and click on remove. If you put in 100% the application will be adjusted more easily.For each parameter of the application that we choose. If this size is small than your app. to be reloaded each time you change the tab. Parameters / Value . Iframe width .Width size of the iframe. .When this option is enabled makes the application of the tab.Image3: Parameters Definition Interface. they are: Variable . Empty .Static content to be loaded for the parameter in the execution time. Reload Iframe .Height size of the iframe. Value .Name of the global variable to get the content. a scrollbar will appear automatically. Iframe height . you have options to be chosen.Leave empty or do not change if it has some value. 'off'). Access to applications may be granted through a control application to authenticate users.'on'). In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user).'off'). insert the following code: // two users: john and mary with permission to access different applications if({userid} == 'john') { sc_apl_status('grid_categories'.'on').'on').'on'). sc_apl_status('form_products'. See the examples below. } else{ sc_error_message("Unauthorized user!"). } elseif({userid} == 'mary') { sc_apl_status('grid_categories'. sc_apl_status('form_products'. sc_apl_status('grid_products'.Security Attribute: Use Security: With this option selected. Example 1: Activating an application called grid_categories.'on'). sc_apl_status('form_categories'. } . sc_apl_status('form_categories'. insert the following macro call: sc_apl_status('grid_categories'. the application is only accessible when enabled using the sc_apl_status macro. Disabled applications display the message "Unauthorized user" when accessed.'on'). In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user). Example 2: Creating a rule to authenticate by user type in a login form containing a field called userid.'on'). sc_apl_status('grid_products'. Disable the options Enable use of security and Enable Use of Password in the Configuration menu | My ScriptCase. In the login application onValidate event. If the password is not entered correctly. an "Unauthorized user" message is displayed. In the development environment it is possible to suppress the above steps purely for testing purposes.Example 3: Authenticating applications using a database table. Use Password: An application password setting is required. enter the following code: URL output safety (denied access URL redirection): It redirects the user to this URL. (See image below). . thereby avoiding repeated password requests (or access denied) for each application execution. At run time a text box is displayed requiring the access password. if he does not have access to the application. PDF Format . A4. available in tab application.This option allow that the user modify the PDF. A5. Allow to modify . Allow to print . as: Letter.Define how will be the orientation sense of the generated reports in PDF. You have the following attributes: Create PDF . as following: Image1: PDF Settings Interface. the user will define the configuration of the PDF.Pdf Settings In this window. etc. can be: picture or landscape. PDF Orientation .Indicate if the application will allow to generate the PDF directly by the button or if will be through a link to the PDF.Define if the app will have the output in PDF format.This option allow that the user print the PDF. Open PDF Directly . .Format of the pages generated in PDF. .Used to select the Footer format.Used to select an existing Theme (colors.Layout Layout Settings Figure 1: Layout Settings interface Is used to define the Application Theme. Footer Template . Theme . (CSS) Attributes: Header Template .Used to select the Header format. etc) for the application. fonts. Each condition is displayed on a new line.The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the header. Value: When the “Value” type is selected. Header Variables . See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. (A Form Applications has 2 titles: one for Insert mode. Date: Displays the system date in the header line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. and another one for Update mode). Enter text and/or “Global Variables”. Display Header . the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the header line.The variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combobox. (available only in Grid applications) FOOTER .Defines the Header title to be displayed in the application. The selected field value is then displayed in the header line. To locate existing images and select one.This flag determines whether or not the Header is displayed Application Title . Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples.Header Figure 1: Header Interface. click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon . you may need to associate content with it.The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header. This interface format can change depending on the selected option in "Layout >> Settings >> Header Template". Depending on the type. For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”. Search Criteria . (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) . Enter the format in the text field alongside it. To see all the available date formats. A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the application's data source (“Select” query) are displayed beside the header variable when the “Field” type is selected. Title: Displays the value entered in “Select Title” in the header . For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”. The selected field value is displayed in the footer line. (available only in Grid applications) . See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. Each condition is displayed on a new line. A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the “Select” (application's data source) are displayed beside the Footer variable when the “Field” type is selected. the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the footer line. Enter the format in the text field alongside it.The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the footer. (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) . Image: Enter an image name saved on the server.The variable fields can be populated with any of the types listed in the Combobox.Figure 2: Footer Interface. This format of this interface may change depending on the option selected in "Layout >> Settings >> Footer Template". There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. Footer Variables . To locate existing images and select one. Value: When the “Value” type is selected.The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header.This flag determines whether or not the footer will be displayed. Search Criteria . Date: Displays the system date in the footer line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon . Display Footer . click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples. you may need to associate content with it. Title: Display in the Footer the value entered in “Select Title”. Depending on the type. to see all the available date formats. Enter text and/or “Global Variables”. Events .Log New interface included in the V6. Options: Scheme . All Fields .Use all fields in the log. It will allow the user to change the log's configuration for the application.Scheme of log to be used for the application.Which event the log will save the application changes. Image 1: Log Interface. . Localization .Use the session location variable in this application.ScriptCase connection used by this application. Folder .Application Settings Here we have the general application settings: Application Code . all the hints and messages are converted to the chosen language. Share theme variable . Exit URL . Share location variable .Default connection profile to be used on production environment. Description .Name descriptive of the application. Connection . . HelpCase Link .URL address to be when the user click in exit button.Folder where the application will be placed in scriptcase work area. Default Profile .Generated application language used.Use the session theme variable in this application.Associate a this application to a page of project documentation.Application name and code for ScriptCase internal use. the global variable is a external parameter required to application execution.Defines how the variable is received by the application.Defines that the variable must be passed by the HTML command line. These variables should be passed to the application that is being implemented through one of the methods (Session. or entering a variable in Application General Data field to replace the field name. Get) Image 1: Global Variables Interface. Post.Defines that the variable must be passed through the post method of the form. etc. Variable passing methods : Session .Variable name in the application.Defines variables behavior. Image 2: Variables Settings Interface. Post . Shows all global variables used in the application. if has been defined that a variable is received by a Post Method and it has been passed by get method the content won't be accepted. in Lookups. Global variables are defined in square brackets ([variable]). customername from customers where customerid ='[v_customerid]' In this case.Global Variables GLOBAL VARIABLE This menu shows the global variables being used within the application. being visible to the browser. created by special fields. Attribute . . the variables "v_customerid" appears in the variables configuration.In this option the variable must be created as a session variable in the PHP by other application before the search call which is being defined. they are: Scope . that means. Value . Get . Example: Select customerid. The application may contain global variables in the Where Clause. Select the way it is passed to the Control application. this content is subdivided in three blocks. Do not validate (checking) the variable at execution time. Description.Determines where the variable was defined.Settings . Type (Input/Output) . . At execution time in the development environment. a form requesting the input variables used by the application is displayed.Defines if the variable is an input or an output. Container Applications Overview Container Application Allows you to display various types of applications nested on Widgets similar to those for iGoogle. . also can be displayed information external URL's. They are usually incorporated into reports and / or Charts that display information from the database. Image1: Containers Display. Container Container Settings Image1: Container Settings Interface. This property Container Settings allows to set the following attributes: Column Width -Column width where will be the Widget. Add Column - Adds a Widget to the selected column. Remove Column - Removes the selected column and all the Widgets that are associated with the column. Widget Title - Title that will appear in the Widget. Link - Application or URL to be loaded into the Widget selected. Height - Height of the Widget in pixels. Reload time - Charging time of application or URL selected in the Widget, it must be defined in seconds. Mobile - Allows to change the Widget column at run time. Removable - Allows to be remove the Widget at runtime. Collapsible - Allows to expand the Widget at run time. Maximize - Allows to maximize the Widget at run time. At the page bottom we can see two more options: Add Column - Adds a column to the Container application. Save - Saves the Columns and Widgets information. Security Attribute: Use Security: With this option selected, the application is only accessible when enabled using the sc_apl_status macro. Disabled applications display the message "Unauthorized user" when accessed. Access to applications may be granted through a control application to authenticate users. See the examples below. Example 1: Activating an application called grid_categories. In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user), insert the following macro call: sc_apl_status('grid_categories','on'); Example 2: Creating a rule to authenticate by user type in a login form containing a field called userid. In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user), insert the following code: // two users: john and mary with permission to access different applications if({userid} == 'john') { sc_apl_status('grid_categories','on'); sc_apl_status('form_categories','on'); sc_apl_status('grid_products','on'); sc_apl_status('form_products','on'); } elseif({userid} == 'mary') { sc_apl_status('grid_categories','on'); sc_apl_status('form_categories','on'); sc_apl_status('grid_products','off'); sc_apl_status('form_products','off'); } else{ sc_error_message("Unauthorized user!"); } Example 3: Authenticating applications using a database table. In the login application onValidate event, enter the following code: URL output safety (denied access URL redirection): It redirects the user to this URL, if he does not have access to the application. Use Password: An application password setting is required. (See image below). At run time a text box is displayed requiring the access password. If the password is not entered correctly, an "Unauthorized user" message is displayed. In the development environment it is possible to suppress the above steps purely for testing purposes, thereby avoiding repeated password requests (or access denied) for each application execution. Disable the options Enable use of security and Enable Use of Password in the Configuration menu | My ScriptCase. Layout Layout Settings Figure 1: Layout Settings interface Is used to define the Application Theme. (CSS) Attributes: Header Template - Used to select the Header format. Footer Template - Used to select the Footer format. Theme - Used to select an existing Theme (colors, fonts, etc) for the application. Header & Footer HEADER Figure 1: Header Interface. This interface format can change depending on the selected option in "Layout >> Settings >> Header Template". Display Header - This flag determines whether or not the Header is displayed Application Title - Defines the Header title to be displayed in the application. (A Form Applications has 2 titles: one for Insert mode, and another one for Update mode). Header Variables - The variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combobox. Depending on the type, you may need to associate content with it. See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the application's data source (“Select” query) are displayed beside the header variable when the “Field” type is selected. The selected field value is then displayed in the header line. Title: Displays the value entered in “Select Title” in the header . Date: Displays the system date in the header line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. To see all the available date formats, click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples. Enter the format in the text field alongside it. Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. To locate existing images and select one, click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon . Value: When the “Value” type is selected, the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the header line. Enter text and/or “Global Variables”. For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”. Search Criteria - The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header. (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) - The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the header. Each condition is displayed on a new line. (available only in Grid applications) FOOTER Figure 2: Footer Interface. This format of this interface may change depending on the option selected in "Layout >> Settings >> Footer Template". Display Footer - This flag determines whether or not the footer will be displayed. Footer Variables - The variable fields can be populated with any of the types listed in the Combobox. Depending on the type, you may need to associate content with it. See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the “Select” (application's data source) are displayed beside the Footer variable when the “Field” type is selected. The selected field value is displayed in the footer line. Title: Display in the Footer the value entered in “Select Title”. Date: Displays the system date in the footer line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. to see all the available date formats, click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples. Enter the format in the text field alongside it. Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. To locate existing images and select one, click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon . Value: When the “Value” type is selected, the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the footer line. Enter text and/or “Global Variables”. For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”. Search Criteria - The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header. (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) - The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the footer. Each condition is displayed on a new line. (available only in Grid applications) Log New interface included in the V6. It will allow the user to change the log's configuration for the application. Image 1: Log Interface. Options: Scheme - Scheme of log to be used for the application. All Fields - Use all fields in the log. Events - Which event the log will save the application changes. Application Settings Image1: Settings Interface. In this folder you define the application attributes , such as: Application Code - Application code for ScriptCase internal use. Should begin by letter. Connection - Connection name used by ScriptCase to access the tables. User can select it. Locales - Application language. Session Locales - Provides a variable locales in session. Folder - A folder containing the application. Editing by Project - If you have Not checked the application can only be edited by the owner. Description - Application descriptive name. HelpCase Link - Help Page. Control Applications Overview Control Application This application type is structured differently from form applications. It is not based on a database table, allowing the form creation using fields added manually and source validation. Common examples of this application type are the forms for login and batch processing. Figure1: Control Interface Functionality Description Hidden Fields Hide fields in forms display while keep the field value from form to submit. Read-Only Fields Fields are displayed but edit are not allowed. Fields Required Fields with obligatory entry. Values must be entered. Fields Format According the field type required validation are generated, different formats area are available. Events Programming Allow the developer to add business rules in PHP code. The form events are triggered during the processing in the server or by the browser (AJAX). Links creation Link a form with other applications.. Control Settings In this window are congregated diverse configurations linked to the exhibition format and the way of update. Figure 1: Settings Interface. See below the attributes description: Attributes: Keep Values - Allow to keep the values of the last access to the form, thus having this value in the next access. Line Breaks in Title - It allows to break the line of the Titles Horizontal Alignment - Allow to define the horizontal alignment of the application. The options are: center, left and right. Margins - Allow to define the application margins (Above, below, right and left). Table Width - Allow to define the table width of the application. Table width unit - When defining the property “Table width” can determinate the width unit, they are: Percentage, Pixels and Automatic. Layout and Behavior Automatic tab - Advance the focus to the next field after completing the maximum number of characters allowed in the field. Highlight Text upon focus - Highlight field contents when the field receives focus. Use Enter to tab - Use the "Enter" key to tab from one field to the next field. Field with initial focus - Field that receives focus when the application is loaded. Focus on field with error - Focus on the first field with an error when submiting the form. If any validation errors occur, the focus will advance to the first field with an error. Edit Fields New interface included in the V6. It allows the user to arrange and edit the fields Image 1: Edit Fields Interface. Options: 1 - Fields - This column is used to show the name of the field. 2 - Label - Column to edit the field label displayed in the end application. 3 - Datatype - It allows to change the field type. 4 - Read-Only - Define if the field is just read-only. 5 - Required - Define if the field is required or not. Note: Observe that all lines are draggable. There you can define the position of fields, blocks and pages. Remember: Fields are grouped in Blocks and Blocks are grouped in Pages. Display Available just to Forms and Control applications. It is not available for Grid Applications. Figure 2: Display Interface. Options: Markers Positioning - Indicates where the marker will be displayed in relation to the field. Display message - Determine whether or not to display a message upon validation. Select Fields Fields Positioning Defines which fields are displayed in the application. Figure 1: Select Fields. Note: The list on the left displays all fields retrieved from the SQL select query for the application. The list on the right displays which fields will be displayed in the application (select a field and click on the right arrow to include it in the form). Toolbar Define toolbar attributes and options such as validation, formatting and help settings. Figure 1: Toolbar Interface The application toolbar is divided in two parts:Top and bottom. It is possible to select the buttons for each part independently. A button can even be part of both parts simultaneously. Attributes: Navigation - Buttons used to navigate on the application or exit from control application. Other - Other buttons type: Theme, Webhelp, PHP, Javascript or link button. Ordinance of the buttons - This option lets you define what will be the display order of buttons used in the application. sEttings buttons Figure 3: Toolbar Settings Interface. Attributes: Button - Show all buttons selected in application. Label - Set a label for button. Hint - Set a message that will show when the mouse is on the button. Access Keys - Allows you to set hotkeys keyboard to a button. OPTIONS Figure 4: Toolbar Options Interface. Attributes: JS Formatting - Allow to define if there is automatic fields formatting on the form. Help by Block - Indicates if the helps of the relative fields, will be grouped per block. In each field we can define a text of help to it, with this option activated appear an icon in the title bar of the block to the calling of the help page . General Help - General help “consolidates” all fields help in a unique page, placing an icon in the toolbar to calling the help page. Log New interface included in the V6. It will allow the user to change the log's configuration for the application. Image 1: Log Interface. Options: Scheme - Scheme of log to be used for the application. All Fields - Use all fields in the log. Events - Which event the log will save the application changes. Sql In this group is defined the attributes relative to the connection to the database. Figura1: SQL Settings Interface. Attributes: Connection - Show the connection name (database) that the application is using for its execution, this connection can be changed with another that have the same tables (SQL). Case Sensitive - This option should be set to "No" only if the database is configured for casesensitive and it is should not respect this setting. Fields Overview This interface allows informing the rules of validation and formatting of the content of each field of the control. The configuration of the fields is made giving a click in the field to be formatted, in the existing list, the left part of the folder ?Form?. . Made this, the system opens a screen to the right of this list, where it must be verified if in the field Type of the Data the value attributed for the ScriptCase through the analysis of table SQL is in accordance with the existing content. In case that he isn?t, the user will have selecting in the list (combobox) a type adjusted for the content of its field. For each Type of selected Data a screen with different characteristics will be formatted. Example: Fields of the type Text possess different characteristics of a field of the type Date. Thus being, the formatting of the screen will be in accordance with the chosen type. Text General Settings Figure1: General Settings Interface Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as text, it accept letters, numbers, characters. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Watermark - Creates a watermark in the input object. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Validation Image - Allows to show an image when validating a field. Password field - Transforms the input type field to password. Text field Password field Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Field Mask - Defines the field display mask. There are three masks types available and they can be merged: CharacterDescription 9 Replaced by any numeric character entered by the user. (0-9) A Replaced by any alpha charactere entered by the user. (A-Z,a-z) * Replaced by any alphanumeric character (A-Z,a-z,0-9) entered by the user. Note: It is possible to combine two or more masks simultaneously, separated by semicolon with the larger mask starting it. The replacement occurs during data entry when amout of characters exceeds the smaller masks size. Examples: Field Telephone number Software Key (Only letters) Software Key (Letters and Numbers) Car Plate Scriptcase's serial key Multiple Masks (Telephone) Mask +99 99 9999 9999 AAAA-AAAAAAAA-AAAA ****-****-****-**** Value entered 123456789012 Value formatted +12 34 5678 9012 QWERTYUIASDFGHJKQWER-TYUIASDF-GHJK Q1W2E3R4T5Y6U7I8 Q1W2-E3R4T5Y6-U7I8 AAA - 9999 QWE1234 QWE - 1234 A999A999A999- D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111**** DG2P 9999-9999;(99) 9999-9999;9999 999 9999;+99 99 9999-9999 Validate with Mask - Shows an error if the end-user don't enter a complete mask. Complete to the Left - Defines the character used to complete the field selected. Field is filed from left to complete the size defined on Field Size in Database. Field size in database - Max length used when updating the table field.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database. Values Format Image1: Values Format Interface. Attributes: Case Settings - Converts the field text depending on the option: Uppercase Converts all text to capital letters. Lowercase Converts all text to lower case. Uppercase first Capitalizes only first word (converts only the word first letter of the first word to capital letter). Uppercase all Capitalizes each word (converts the first words letter of every to capital letter). Minimum Size - Defined the minimum size accepted. Max length- Defined the maximum size accepted. Allowed Characters - Select and define the character set accepted: All - Accepts all characters. Selected - Define the character set accepted. Using the settings below the field accepts letter, numbers and " / " (defined in the More attribute). The letters a b c (defined in the Less attribute) are not accepted. GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). See an example in the image below. Image1: Grid Lookup. Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. Attributes: Use lookup to display field description - When selected enable the Grid lookup. SQL Statement - SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . For example, to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font - Font type used to display the lookup. Font Color - Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. Font Size - Font size used to display the lookup. EOFMessage - Message displayed when no info is retrieved. To use in Validation - Field automatic validation based in the lookup. Choose connection - Run SQL statement in different connection. AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select, CheckBox, Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. For example: a Select field "list of states", and a second one list of cities. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height. Help Settings Document the application. Create on-line instructions, describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Attributes: Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Hint - Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text - Display the specified help text beside the field. Multiple Lines Text General Settings Figure1: General Settings Interface. Attributes Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as multiple lines text, it accepts letters, numbers, characters. Upon selecting the data type as multiple lines text the attribute Lines is enabled to definethe number of lines is selected. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Watermark - Creates a watermark in the input object. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Lines - Allows to configure the field height defining the lines quantity. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Field size in database - Max length used when updating the table field.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database. Values Format Image1: Values Format Interface. Attributes: Case Settings - Converts the field text depending on the option: Uppercase Converts all text to capital letters. Lowercase Converts all text to lower case. Uppercase first Capitalizes only first word (converts only the word first letter of the first word to capital letter). Uppercase all Capitalizes each word (converts the first words letter of every to capital letter). Minimum Size - Defined the minimum size accepted. Max length- Defined the maximum size accepted. Allowed Characters - Select and define the character set accepted: All - Accepts all characters. Selected - Define the character set accepted. Using the settings below the field accepts letter, numbers and " / " (defined in the More attribute). The letters a b c (defined in the Less attribute) are not accepted. AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select, CheckBox, Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. For example: a Select field "list of states", and a second one list of cities. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height. Help Settings Document the application. Create on-line instructions, describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Attributes: Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Hint - Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text - Display the specified help text beside the field. Integer General Settings Figure1: General Settings Interface Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as integer, it accepts only integer numbers. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Validation Image - Allows to show an image when validating a field. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Field Mask - Defines the field display mask. There are three masks types available and they can be merged: CharacterDescription 9 Replaced by any numeric character entered by the user. (0-9) A Replaced by any alpha charactere entered by the user. (A-Z,a-z) * Replaced by any alphanumeric character (A-Z,a-z,0-9) entered by the user. Note: It is possible to combine two or more masks simultaneously, separated by semicolon with the larger mask starting it. The replacement occurs during data entry when amout of characters exceeds the smaller masks size. Examples: Field Telephone number Software Key (Only letters) Software Key (Letters and Numbers) Car Plate Scriptcase's serial key Multiple Masks (Telephone) Mask +99 99 9999 9999 AAAA-AAAAAAAA-AAAA ****-****-****-**** Value entered 123456789012 Value formatted +12 34 5678 9012 QWERTYUIASDFGHJKQWER-TYUIASDF-GHJK Q1W2E3R4T5Y6U7I8 Q1W2-E3R4T5Y6-U7I8 AAA - 9999 QWE1234 QWE - 1234 A999A999A999- D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111**** DG2P 9999-9999;(99) 9999-9999;9999 999 9999;+99 99 9999-9999 Field size in database - Max length used when updating the table field.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database. Values Format Figure2: Values Format Interface Regional Settings - Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. When selecting No the attributes Digit Grouping Separator, Negative Sign and Negative number format are displayed. (See regional settings). Digit Grouping - Define if the field will show the grouping separator. Maximum Size - Define the maximum size of the field. Minimum Value - Define the field minimum value. Maximum Value - Define the field maximum value. Decimal Precision - Define the field decimal precision. Digit Grouping Separator - Define the character used as unit separator. Decimal Separator - Define the character used as the decimal separator. Negative Sign - Define the character used as negative sign. Negative number format - Define the negative sign position (related to the value). Accept - The field can accepts only positive values, only negative values or positive and negative values. Show a calculator- Displays a calculator. GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). See an example in the image below. Image1: Grid Lookup. Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. Attributes: Use lookup to display field description - When selected enable the Grid lookup. SQL Statement - SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . For example, to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font - Font type used to display the lookup. Font Color - Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. Font Size - Font size used to display the lookup. EOFMessage - Message displayed when no info is retrieved. To use in Validation - Field automatic validation based in the lookup. Choose connection - Run SQL statement in different connection. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height. Help Settings Document the application. Create on-line instructions, describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Attributes: Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Hint - Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text - Display the specified help text beside the field. Decimal General Settings Figure1: .General Settings Interface. Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as decimal, it accepts real numbers. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Validation Image - Allows to show an image when validating a field. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Accept Negative .Only displays the field value. Values Format Figure2: Values Format Interface. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field .The field accepts negative value.Displays a calculator. Label Field .Hidden Field . otherwise the end-user should always enter the decimals digits. Regional Settings . Decimal Separator .If enabled. HTML Type .Define if the field will show the grouping separator. When selecting No the attributes Digit Grouping Separator. SQL Type . it fills decimal digits automatically. Maximum Value .Define the field decimal precision.Define the character used as the decimal separator.Define the field maximum value. Does not allow updates. Decimal Precision . Negative Sign and Negative number format are displayed.Define the negative sign position (related to the value). (See regional settings). Show a calculator .Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field.* .* Maximum Size . "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". Negative Sign .Define the maximum size of the field. Number negative format .Define the character used as unit separator.Define the character used as negative sign. Decimal Separator.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode".HTML object used to display the field on generated form.Define the field type in the database. Digit Grouping . Digit Grouping Separator . Minimum Value .Define the field minimum value. Complete with zeros . Run SQL statement in different connection. EOFMessage .SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. For example.Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup.When selected enable the Grid lookup.Field automatic validation based in the lookup. Choose connection . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Font Size . . See an example in the image below.Font size used to display the lookup. SQL Statement . Image1: Grid Lookup.* "Format as you type" must be enabled in "Form>>Settings" menu to use this option. to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font . To use in Validation . To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . Font Color . This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). Image2: Grid Lookup Interface.Message displayed when no info is retrieved. GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction.Font type used to display the lookup. Attributes: Use lookup to display field description . Used to increase the border size of the title.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Bold . Background color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. top.Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Border Size . Width . Field CSS . sub. Font Size .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. center or justify). super.Sets the title width. bottom.Sets the title height. Horizontal Alignment . Vertical Alignment .Used to apply bold type to the font. Title CSS Attributes: Font . Font Color . middle.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. text-bottom). text-top.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Underlined . Height .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Border color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. right. Background color .Sets the field height. Width . Height . right. Font Color . Bold .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. text-bottom). Width .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Border color . right. Vertical Alignment .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. HorizontalAlignment .Sets the object height. Border Size . Height . Vertical Alignment . Border color . bottom. Help Settings Document the application. bottom.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Background color .Attributes: Font . text-bottom). Underlined . Create on-line instructions.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. center or justify).Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. text-top. Underlined . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Border Size . Font Size . top.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Bold .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. center or justify). Font Size . describe business rules and save comments in . top.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. text-top. Font Color .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Horizontal Alignment . middle.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Sets the field width.Used to increase the border size of the field. super. sub.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the object width. sub.Used to increase the border size of the object. super. middle.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Display the specified help text beside the field. Help Type: Pop-up .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Text . Hint . Attributes: Tooltip . . . Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Save Variable . For example. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Label .Currency General Settings Image1:General Settings Interface.The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Defined Value . . in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. System Date . Initial Value .Width or chars quantity displayed on input object.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). Attributes: Data Type . Width .Define the application field type. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. When the field is defined as currency.Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. Variable Name .Allows to show an image when validating a field. it accepts only decimal values. Validation Image .Uses the server date. Initial Value (Type).Field title in application.Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Minimum Value . Regional Settings . Decimal Separator. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field .Define the character used as unit separator. .HTML object used to display the field on generated form. Decimal Precision .Define the field minimum value.Hidden Field . SQL Type . HTML Type .* Maximum Size .Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode".Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field.Define the field type in the database.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Negative Sign . Accept Negative .The field accepts negative value.Define the negative sign position (related to the value). Decimal Separator .* Currency Symbol Usage . "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". Digit Grouping . Negative number format .Define the field maximum value.Define if the field will show the currency symbol. Digit Grouping Separator .Define the character used as the decimal separator. When selecting No the attributes Digit Grouping Separator.Only displays the field value. Negative Sign and Negative number format are displayed.Define the maximum size of the field.Define the character used as negative sign. Maximum Value . (See regional settings).Define the field decimal precision. Does not allow updates. Values Format Figure2: Values Format Interface. Label Field .Define if the field will show the grouping separator. For example.Field automatic validation based in the lookup. EOFMessage . GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. Font Color . SQL Statement . Complete with zeros . Choose connection .SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database.Message displayed when no info is retrieved.Displays a calculator.* * "Format as you type" must be enabled in "Form>>Settings" menu to use this option. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard .If enabled. Attributes: Use lookup to display field description . it fills decimal digits automatically. See an example in the image below.Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup.Font type used to display the lookup. Image1: Grid Lookup.When selected enable the Grid lookup. otherwise the end-user should always enter the decimals digits. To use in Validation . This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). DISPLAY SETTINGS . Font Size . Image2: Grid Lookup Interface.Show a calculator.Run SQL statement in different connection.Font size used to display the lookup. to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font . Defines the CSS values for fields individually. super. Width .Sets the title width. Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. sub. Bold .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. bottom. Underlined . Font Color .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Border Size .Used to increase the border size of the title. Vertical Alignment . center or justify). middle.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Font Size . text-bottom).Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font. Background color . top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. . Title CSS Attributes: Font . right. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. text-top. Border color . center or justify). Background color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the object height.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Height . Font Color .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Underlined . super. Horizontal Alignment .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border color . HorizontalAlignment . sub.Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to apply bold type to the font. Background color . Width . text-top.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. top. Font Size .Height . Border color . text-top. middle.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. super. text-bottom). Width . Vertical Alignment .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Bold . Bold .Used to increase the border size of the object. Height . . bottom.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. bottom. Font Color .Sets the title height. Underlined .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Border Size . Font Size .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. right.Sets the field height. text-bottom). Vertical Alignment .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. middle. right.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the object width. Border Size . sub. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . top. center or justify).Sets the field width. Create on-line instructions.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Hint . Attributes: Tooltip . . Text . Help Type: Pop-up .Display the specified help text beside the field. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Help Settings Document the application.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. . Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value.Date General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface. System Date . Save Variable .Uses the server date. Date fields are formatted according to specific date rules Label .Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).Field title in application. Width .Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. . For example. in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Initial Value . Validation Image .Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button.Allows to show an image when validating a field. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name.Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Defined Value . Attributes Data type . Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen.Define the application field type. Initial Value (Type).The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Variable Name .Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). that means.Define the maximum year selectable. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field .Insert a minimum date that the scriptcase will criticize in the field of the date type in the format as it is presented. Display . Values Format Image1:Interface of Values Format.Define the field type in the database. Label Field .Allows you to select the date and month by combobox. HTML Type . "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". it .Define the minimum year selectable. "Actual Year +" . Use ComboBox . Attributes: Regional Settings .Hidden Field . Year as Combo .HTML object used to display the field on generated form.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.Only displays the field value.Allows you to select the display format of the field.When click on the icon beside of the box. Actual Date . "Initial Year" .Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode".Will define the actual date as the maximum date. Minimum date: Fixed Date . the scriptcase have the following options: Simple Actual Date . (See regional settings). Does not allow updates. SQL Type .Allows you to apply regional settings date format to the field.Allows you to select the year by combobox. Image1: Grid Lookup. Maximum Date: Fixed Date . Actual Date with increment .SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database.When click on the icon beside of the box. Display Format . Actual Date with decrement . GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. that means.won't accept anyone in the form who was born after the corrent date.Insert a maximum date that the scriptcase will criticize in the field of the date type in the format as it is presented. this allow the selection of the month and year passing to the field the value that was defined in the calendar.The maximum date will be the actual date (-) the days or month or years that you decrement.The maximum date will be the actual date (+) the days or month or years that you increment. Display Calendar -Allow to show beside the field a calendar icon. the scriptcase have the following options: Simple Actual Date . Actual Date with increment . Actual Date with decrement . Years Limit -Defines a limit of years used in the calendar. To build the statement it is . SQL Statement . See an example in the image below.Allows you to display next to the field how to complete the date field. Attributes: Use lookup to display field description . This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). Image2: Grid Lookup Interface.When selected enable the Grid lookup.The minimum date will be the actual date (-) the days or month or years that you decrement.The minimum date will be the actual date (+) the days or month or years that you increment.Will define the actual date as the maximum date. it won't accept anyone in the form who was born after the corrent date. Actual Date . Font type used to display the lookup.Field automatic validation based in the lookup.Run SQL statement in different connection. Font Size . to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font .Message displayed when no info is retrieved.Font size used to display the lookup. To use in Validation . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. For example. Title CSS Attributes: . Font Color . EOFMessage . Choose connection .possible to use the select wizard . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. top. Width .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Font Size . Height . super. bottom. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Underlined . sub.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Used to apply bold type to the font. text-bottom).Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Font . Font Color . Width .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Used to increase the border size of the title. text-top.Used to increase the border size of the field. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the title width.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Background color . Vertical Alignment .Sets the field width.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Border Size . sub. Bold . Font Size . Border color . text-bottom). super. HorizontalAlignment . Background color . Bold . middle.Used to apply bold type to the font. Vertical Alignment .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. bottom. Font Color . center or justify).Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Height . Border color . center or justify). Horizontal Alignment . right. text-top. Border Size . Underlined .Sets the field height.Sets the title height. . right.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. middle. Horizontal Alignment .Sets the object height.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. super. . sub. center or justify).Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. text-bottom). Background color . Underlined .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Attributes: Tooltip . top. bottom. Border color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. right. Help Settings Document the application.Used to increase the border size of the object. Border Size . Width .Sets the object width. Help Type: Pop-up . Font Color . text-top.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. middle. Bold . Vertical Alignment . Height .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Create on-line instructions.Used to apply bold type to the font. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Font Size . Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Hint . . Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value.The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Width .Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Variable Name . Attributes: Data type .Define the application field type. For example. Initial Value . Save Variable . Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. Label .Uses the server date.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button.Time General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface. Time fields are formatted according to specific Time rules. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. System Date . Defined Value . Initial Value (Type).Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. Validation Image .Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).Allows to show an image when validating a field.Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). . HTML Type .Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates. Label Field . Display . "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".Hidden Field . Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field .HTML object used to display the field on generated form. . Image1: Grid Lookup.Apply regional settings time formatting rules to the field. Values Format Figure2:Values Format Interface Attributes: Regional settings . Time Separator .Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". See an example in the image below.Determine the field display format from a list of predefined formats.Define the time separator used in the field. GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser).Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.Displays the field format beside the field hour. SQL Type .Define the field type in the database. (See Regional settings). Display Format . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. EOFMessage .SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. Attributes: Use lookup to display field description .Field automatic validation based in the lookup.Image2: Grid Lookup Interface.Message displayed when no info is retrieved. To use in Validation . . to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font .Run SQL statement in different connection.Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. Font Color . Choose connection .Font type used to display the lookup.When selected enable the Grid lookup. For example.Font size used to display the lookup. SQL Statement . Font Size . To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Font Color . sub.Sets the title height.Used to increase the border size of the title.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. super. Font Size . Font Size . Height . Border Size . Field CSS Attributes: Font .Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Background color . Bold . Underlined . Horizontal Alignment .Sets the title width.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. super.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Vertical Alignment . center or justify). right.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Background color . Border Size .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Title CSS Attributes: Font . sub.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Font Color . Vertical Alignment .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. . top. Width . Bold .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. center or justify).Used to apply an underlined type to the font. text-top. Border color . text-bottom).Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. right.Used to increase the border size of the field. middle. HorizontalAlignment . bottom. Underlined .Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to apply bold type to the font. Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Sets the object width. Vertical Alignment . Underlined . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. top.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. . super. text-bottom).Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Height . text-bottom). Help Settings Document the application. right. bottom.Sets the field height.Sets the object height. Border Size . Font Color . text-top. bottom. Border color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Sets the field width. Help Type: Pop-up . center or justify). Horizontal Alignment . Width . Font Size . sub.top. Bold .Used to apply bold type to the font.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Attributes: Tooltip .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Width .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Used to increase the border size of the object. Background color .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. middle. middle. Height . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. text-top.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Create on-line instructions. Text . .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Display the specified help text beside the field.Hint . in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. System Date . . Variable Name .Date And Time General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface.Field title in application.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications).Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button.Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).Uses the server date. Initial Value (Type). Save Variable .Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Attributes : Data type . Date and Time fields are formatted according to specific Data and Time rules. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value . For example. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. Validation Image .Allows to show an image when validating a field.Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Label .The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Width .Define the application field type. Defined Value . SQL Type .Define the field type in the database. See an example in the image below. Values Format Image1:Values Format Interface. Does not allow updates. Group Date and Time .Display field the format at the field´s side. Years Limit -Defines a limit of years used in the calendar.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.Time separator symbol used.Select the field format from a list of predefined date/time display formats. Display calendar . Decimal of Seconds -Defines how many decimal of seconds the field will use. Display .Display a calendar a calendar to select the date. Attributes: Regional settings . This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". Time separator .Display the Date and Time in the same input field. HTML Type . . GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. Display Format . Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field .Apply regional settings time formatting rules to the field. Date separator . (See Regional settings). When not selected ( NO) the options Date separator and Time separator are displayed.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Label Field .HTML object used to display the field on generated form.Date separator symbol used.Only displays the field value.Hidden Field . Font Size . To use in Validation .SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database.Font type used to display the lookup. EOFMessage . to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font . To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . SQL Statement . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Font Color . Attributes: Use lookup to display field description .When selected enable the Grid lookup.Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. .Message displayed when no info is retrieved. For example.Image1: Grid Lookup.Run SQL statement in different connection.Field automatic validation based in the lookup. Choose connection . Image2: Grid Lookup Interface.Font size used to display the lookup. Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color . Bold . Font Color . Font Size .Used to apply bold type to the font. middle.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. text-bottom). bottom. text-top.Sets the title width. Background color . Height .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color . Vertical Alignment .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. right. Title CSS Attributes: Font . Border Size .Sets the title height. Horizontal Alignment . super. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to apply bold type to the font. top.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Bold . sub.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Width . Background color . Underlined .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. center or justify).Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Size . Border Size . Border Size . text-top. right.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. middle. text-top. Height . text-bottom). Bold . bottom. text-bottom). Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Font Size . center or justify). Background color . sub.Underlined .Sets the field height. Vertical Alignment . Help Settings Document the application. Horizontal Alignment . Create on-line instructions. Underlined .Used to increase the border size of the object.Sets the object width. Font Color .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Height . top. super. Border color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. sub.Used to increase the border size of the field.Sets the object height. Width . middle. right. Border color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. HorizontalAlignment . center or justify). Vertical Alignment .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. top. Attributes: .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Width . super.Sets the field width. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. bottom. Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Hint .Display the specified help text beside the field. Text . . Help Type: Pop-up .Tooltip .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Upload Area .Defines a sub folder to organize the files stored. SubFolder . General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface. Image Border .Image border width in pixels.Display or not a progress bar when uploading files. Image Width .Defines the Image display width in pixels. Maintain Aspect . . The images are save in the server in a directory defined using the Application Settings menu in the attribute Image Directory (see Settings). When a field is defined as Image(file name) type. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Progress bar .Defines the image display height in pixels.Define the application field type. It´s used in conjunction with Image Height and Image Width. Image Height . Label .Field title in application. Attributes: Data type .Define if a drag'n drop area is used to upload files. The images are stored separately in the server and automatically displayed when the file name is referenced.Maintains the image aspect ratio when resizing it.Image(file Name) IMAGE (FILE NAME) Allows the developer to use fields in the forms to upload images. it stores a file name that is available to the application to process as such. Example of field of the image type in a cadastre of products.Define which extensions are allowed to upload. Separate several extensions using semicolon. Multi-Upload It allows to upload multiple files and store the information in a relative database table. Display link only . Hidden Field .Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Resize function generates temporary image copies that are kept in the cache. SQL Type .Define the field type in the database. Extensions to allow .Displays the original image in another browser window. Open in Another Window .Create Subfolder . Multi Upload Settings Attributes: Table .Choose the database table to store the files. it will display all fields from that table and we should associate parameters to fill . "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". After choose the table.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". HTML Type . Image Caching . The link will open in a (pop-up) window with the image in its original size (without redirection). Disable Field .HTML object used to display the field on generated form.Displays only a link in the field with the image name.Creates the subfolder if it does not exist.Time in minutes the image cache will be kept for on the server before being deleted. The field will be filled with the IP of the computer that is accessing the application. Foreign Key .Gets the file name that is being uploaded. Very useful to passing parameters. Manual increment . Auto increment .Get the data and time from the server upon inserting.. Defined .The field value is assigned by the database. Date of inclusion . if your DBMS uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed .the fields upon inserting or updating.The field in SQL table is filled with (null). Calculated by the database .Gets the bynary of the file. Upload .Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar.The field value is assigned by the database if no value is passed to it. Calculated by the database if empty . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. .Allows to associate a field value from the current form.Get the data from the server upon inserting.You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. User IP .The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Null . Multi Upload Fields Settings The options are: File name . Datetime of inclusion . super.Sets the title height. middle. Font Color . Font Size . .Sets the title width.Used to apply bold type to the font. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Border color . Bold .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Width . Background color . sub.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. text-top. Vertical Alignment .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. center or justify).Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Font Color . Height . Font Size .Used to increase the border size of the title.Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment . text-bottom). top. Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. right.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Border Size . Underlined . bottom. middle. Width . Help Settings Document the application. top.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. center or justify). right. Border Size . HorizontalAlignment . text-bottom). middle. Create on-line instructions. Border color . text-top.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the object height. bottom.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Vertical Alignment .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Underlined .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Sets the object width. Border Size .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Vertical Alignment . super. text-top.Used to increase the border size of the object.Background color . Height . top.Sets the field width. super. Border color . center or justify). Background color . sub. Bold . bottom. Height . Font Color . Underlined .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Width .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Bold .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment . right.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the field.Sets the field height. text-bottom). sub. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Used to apply bold type to the font. Font Size . Hint .Display the specified help text beside the field.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Text .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. . Attributes: Tooltip . Help Type: Pop-up .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. . The documents are stored separately in the server. Extensions to allow . it stores a file name that is available to the application to process as such.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".Define which extensions are allowed to upload.Define the field type in the database.Creates the subfolder if it does not exist.Define if a drag'n drop area is used to upload files.Document (file Name) General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface Attributes: Data type . When a field is defined as Document (file name ) type.HTML object used to display the field on generated form.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode".Field title in application.Enter a subdirectory name to save the files in (it is added under the directory defined in the Documents Path attribute in the Application Settings menu. HTML Type . Upload Area . Label . See Settings).Define the application field type. Icon . For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name.Display or not a progress bar when uploading files.Display an icon by the field side identifying the file type. Multi-Upload It allows to upload multiple files and store the information in a relative database table. Separate several extensions using semicolon. Progress bar . Create Subfolder . SQL Type . Hidden Field . It is possible to use global or local variables in the subdirectory name. Subfolder . Disable Field . DISPLAY SETTINGS .Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. Manual increment .The field value is assigned by the database. Date of inclusion . User IP . Upload .Gets the bynary of the file. Auto increment .The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Multi Upload Fields Settings The options are: File name . Foreign Key . Defined .Multi Upload Settings Attributes: Table . it will display all fields from that table and we should associate parameters to fill the fields upon inserting or updating. After choose the table. if your DBMS uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed .The field will be filled with the IP of the computer that is accessing the application. Null . Very useful to passing parameters.Get the data from the server upon inserting. Calculated by the database .The field in SQL table is filled with (null).Gets the file name that is being uploaded.You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var].Choose the database table to store the files.The field value is assigned by the database if no value is passed to it.Allows to associate a field value from the current form..Get the data and time from the server upon inserting. Calculated by the database if empty . Datetime of inclusion . text-top. Font Color .Used to increase the border size of the title. . Underlined . sub.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Border Size . Bold .Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Width . Vertical Alignment . Background color . Border color . bottom.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. top. middle. Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. right.Used to apply bold type to the font. center or justify). Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Horizontal Alignment . super.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Font Size .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the title width. text-bottom).Used to apply an underlined type to the font. right.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. HorizontalAlignment . Font Size .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Background color . Font Size . Field CSS Attributes: Font . sub. bottom. Vertical Alignment .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Height .Used to increase the border size of the field. Underlined .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. center or justify). sub. Vertical Alignment . text-bottom). bottom. Bold . text-top. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. text-bottom).Sets the field width.Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font. Font Color . Border color . super. center or justify). middle. right.Sets the field height.Used to increase the border size of the object.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. .Sets the title height.Sets the object height. super.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. text-top.Height . Width . Height . Background color . Font Color . Border Size . middle. top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size . Border color . Width .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Bold . Underlined .Sets the object width. top. . Hint .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text .Help Settings Document the application.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Attributes: Tooltip . Help Type: Pop-up . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Display the specified help text beside the field. Create on-line instructions. . Defined Value .Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button.Define the application field type.The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Image1:General SettingsInterface Attributes: Data type . Initial Value . When a field is defined as Credit Card Number it is formatted upon losing focus and validated according to specific rules. Initial Value (Type). For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen.Uses the server date.Credit Card Number The ScriptCase provides credit card numbers validation routines in its applications. VISA. Label .Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. MASTERCARD and DINER cards. System Date . It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality.Field title in application. . Currently ScriptCase applications supports validation routines to handle AMERICAN EXPRESS. 9999 QWE1234 QWE . Field Mask . Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field . Variable Name .a-z) * Replaced by any alphanumeric character (A-Z.Only displays the field value. Examples: Field Telephone number Software Key (Only letters) Software Key (Letters and Numbers) Car Plate Scriptcase's serial key Multiple Masks (Telephone) Mask +99 99 9999 9999 AAAA-AAAAAAAA-AAAA ****-****-****-**** Value entered 123456789012 Value formatted +12 34 5678 9012 QWERTYUIASDFGHJKQWER-TYUIASDF-GHJK Q1W2E3R4T5Y6U7I8 Q1W2-E3R4T5Y6-U7I8 AAA .Width or chars quantity displayed on input object.a-z.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. separated by semicolon with the larger mask starting it. HTML Type .Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications).D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111**** DG2P 9999-9999.Defines the field display mask. Field size in database .+99 99 9999-9999 Hidden Field .Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).Max length used when updating the table field.Define the field type in the database. (0-9) A Replaced by any alpha charactere entered by the user. . Does not allow updates.Width .(99) 9999-9999.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. Note: It is possible to combine two or more masks simultaneously. Label Field .Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode".HTML object used to display the field on generated form. The replacement occurs during data entry when amout of characters exceeds the smaller masks size.9999 999 9999.1234 A999A999A999.0-9) entered by the user. Complete to the Left . There are three masks types available and they can be merged: CharacterDescription 9 Replaced by any numeric character entered by the user. Field is filed from left to complete the size defined on Field Size in Database. For example. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". Save Variable . in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. (A-Z.Defines the character used to complete the field selected. SQL Type . Run SQL statement in different connection.SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database.Font size used to display the lookup.Field automatic validation based in the lookup.Font type used to display the lookup.Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. Choose connection .When selected enable the Grid lookup. to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font . To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. See an example in the image below. EOFMessage . SQL Statement . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. . Font Color .Message displayed when no info is retrieved. For example. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). Attributes: Use lookup to display field description . Font Size .GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. To use in Validation . Image1: Grid Lookup. Sets the title height.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Border Size . text-bottom).Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the title width. Underlined . . Height . Width .Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color . Background color .Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. sub. top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. middle. Font Color . Horizontal Alignment . super.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. center or justify).Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Title CSS Attributes: Font . Vertical Alignment . text-top.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Bold . Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. bottom.Used to apply bold type to the font. right. Font Size . Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Used to increase the border size of the object.Sets the field width.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Width . right.Sets the field height. top. middle. Help Settings Document the application. Horizontal Alignment . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Border Size . .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Underlined .Used to increase the border size of the field. text-top. Font Color . middle.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Bold .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. super.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Height .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Vertical Alignment . top.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the object height. bottom. Underlined . center or justify).Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Sets the object width.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Bold . center or justify). text-bottom). Vertical Alignment . HorizontalAlignment . Height . Font Size .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Border Size .Used to apply bold type to the font. Border color . Font Color . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Width . right. Create on-line instructions. Border color .Used to apply bold type to the font. Background color . Background color . sub.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. bottom. sub. text-top.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. super.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Font Size . text-bottom). Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Attributes: Tooltip .Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Display the specified help text beside the field. . Text . Help Type: Pop-up .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Hint . . Save Variable . Does not allow updates. .Define the application field type. in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode".Define the field type in the database. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field . It relates to a Credit Card Field and used by the validation routines to validate according to the specific company rules. SQL Type . For example.Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". Values Formats The picture below show how to related the Credit Card Number field with the Credit Card field.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). Attributes : Data type .Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Variable Name .Credit Card Define the Credit Card Company (flag). For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Label Field . HTML Type .Field title in application. General Settings Image1:General SettingsInterface. Label .HTML object used to display the field on generated form.Only displays the field value. Hidden Field . Attributes: Use lookup to display field description . For example. Reload Form . To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . Master Card and Visa).Reload the form After after field value update. Title .When selected enable the Grid lookup. Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. Diners. Image1: Grid Lookup.New option value. See an example in the image below.Display a selection box with available card companies (flag). Negative value . The label and value for these options are defined in Negative Value and Title. GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. Related Field . This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser).Figure2: Values Format Interface Attributes: Card Type .Define the field that contains the values to validate. Use Title/Deny . SQL Statement .SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. to display the customer name by the customer Id .Allows the user to enter an different option from the options available in the ScriptCase (American Express.New option label. EOFMessage . Font Size .Font type used to display the lookup. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Run SQL statement in different connection.Message displayed when no info is retrieved.Font size used to display the lookup. Title CSS Attributes: .code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font . To use in Validation .Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Choose connection . Font Color .Field automatic validation based in the lookup. Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the field width. Bold .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Background color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the title width. Border color . Underlined . text-top.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. top.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Underlined .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. bottom. Height .Sets the title height. text-top. middle. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . HorizontalAlignment . Font Size .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Sets the field height.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Font .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. text-bottom). middle. Vertical Alignment . super. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to increase the border size of the title. .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to apply bold type to the font. Border color .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Font Color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. center or justify). Width . Height . super. Font Color . Horizontal Alignment . Border Size . top.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the field. Bold . Font Size . right. bottom. text-bottom). Vertical Alignment .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. sub. center or justify). sub. Width .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size . Background color . right. bottom. super.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Bold .Sets the object width.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. sub. right. Help Type: Pop-up . Create on-line instructions.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Border Size . Background color . Width . Help Settings Document the application.Used to increase the border size of the object.Sets the object height. center or justify).Used to apply bold type to the font. top.Font Size . text-bottom). Height .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Underlined . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Vertical Alignment . .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. text-top. Font Color . Horizontal Alignment . Attributes: Tooltip . middle. Border color . Text .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Display the specified help text beside the field. .Hint . Populates the field with a pre-defined value when the end-user clicks on the "new" button. Save Variable .Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications).Define the application field type. clicking on the icon opens the e-mail reader. in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. you do not need to enter an Initial value. Initial Value . When the field is defined as E-mail an icon is displayed by its side.The value displayed for the field when using the Defined Value option.E-mail General Settings Image1:General Settings Interface. Width . It validates the field value according to standard e-mail formats. Select from the options below: Defined Value . Field size in database . Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created at a login screen. .Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Initial Value . Attributes: >Data type . It is possible to receive parameters by using this function. Note: When you use the System Date option. For example. Variable Name .Field title in application.Uses the value entered for the Initial Value attribute. System Date .Uses the server date. Label .Max length used when updating the table field. Message displayed when no info is retrieved. For example.HTML object used to display the field on generated form.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.Hidden Field . Font Color . to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font . SQL Type .Font type used to display the lookup. Attributes: Use lookup to display field description . SQL Statement . Field with label attribute. Image2: Grid Lookup Interface.Define the field type in the database. Font Size . HTML Type . See an example in the image below.SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. EOFMessage .When selected enable the Grid lookup.Only displays the field value. Field without label attribute. Does not allow updates.Field automatic validation based in the lookup. . This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser).Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. To use in Validation . To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . Image1: Grid Lookup.Font size used to display the lookup. Label Field . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. .Run SQL statement in different connection. Underlined .Choose connection . Border Size . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Font Size .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Background color . Border color . Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Font Color .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Bold .Used to increase the border size of the title. Height .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. center or justify). text-bottom). Border Size . Border Size . text-top.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Color . sub. Bold .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. top. top. Underlined . Height . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . center or justify). Underlined . middle. Border color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Sets the title height.Used to apply bold type to the font. right.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Vertical Alignment . Horizontal Alignment . bottom. Vertical Alignment . center or justify). Background color . Font Size . bottom. sub.Sets the field height. text-top.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Used to increase the border size of the object. super.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Horizontal Alignment .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the title width. Font Size .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. middle. text-bottom). Width .Used to increase the border size of the field. right.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Background color . HorizontalAlignment . Border color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. right. Width .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. . Bold .Sets the field width. super. Font Color . Width . top.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Settings Document the application. sub.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. text-bottom). Help Type: Pop-up . text-top. Attributes: Tooltip . Height .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Sets the object width. super.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. bottom.Vertical Alignment . Create on-line instructions. middle. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Hint .Sets the object height. . .Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. Width . Attributes Data type. .Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen.Define the application field type. Validation Image .Url General Settings Figure1:General SettingsInterface. Label . For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. For example.Field title in application. Save Variable . Defined Value .The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.Uses the server date. Initial Value (Type).Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. System Date .Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). Initial Value . It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications.Allows to show an image when validating a field. URLfields display links. Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Image1: Grid Lookup. SQL Type . SQL Statement . Attributes: Use lookup to display field description . To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard .Only displays the field value. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".Define the field type in the database. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser).Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction.Font type used to display the lookup.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. See an example in the image below. . Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Display Icon . Does not allow updates. Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. Label Field .HTML object used to display the field on generated form. For example. to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font . Hidden Field . HTML Type .When selected enable the Grid lookup. Font Color .Display an icon by the field side Disable Field .Variable Name . Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. To use in Validation . EOFMessage .Font size used to display the lookup.Field automatic validation based in the lookup.Font Size .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Message displayed when no info is retrieved. Choose connection . Background color . . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Title CSS Attributes: Font . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Font Size .Run SQL statement in different connection. Font Color . Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to increase the border size of the title. super.Used to apply bold type to the font. text-top. Bold .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. middle. center or justify). Background color . Bold . Field CSS Attributes: Font . right. Width .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Border color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Font Color . Horizontal Alignment . center or justify). Height .Bold .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. sub. bottom. Underlined .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Underlined . super. . Border color .Sets the field width.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Background color . Font Color . top. Vertical Alignment .Used to increase the border size of the field. Vertical Alignment . text-bottom). Height .Sets the title height.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Border Size .Sets the field height. bottom. HorizontalAlignment .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font. sub. Font Size .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the title width.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. top. text-top. Border Size . Font Size . Width . text-bottom). middle. right. Help Type: Pop-up . . Vertical Alignment .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. middle. Width .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Hint .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. text-bottom). Horizontal Alignment . sub.Underlined . text-top. Attributes: Tooltip .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Height . center or justify). Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Help Settings Document the application.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Sets the object height.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. top.Sets the object width. Border color . bottom. super. Border Size . right.Used to increase the border size of the object. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Create on-line instructions. .Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. Label .Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value.Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. Defined Value . Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications).Field title in application.Field title in application. Width .The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.Uses the server date. Label . Save Variable . Attributes: Data type . For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name.Define the application field type.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. System Date .Html Color General Settings Figure1:General Settings Interface. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. For . Initial Value (Type). Initial Value . When the field is defined as HTML Color an icon is displayed by its side with a colors palette. For example. . Does not allow updates.When selected enable the Grid lookup.HTML object used to display the field on generated form. See an example in the image below. Label Field . Attributes: Use lookup to display field description .Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Hidden Field .example. SQL Type .Define the field type in the database. Variable Name . in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font .Font type used to display the lookup. GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. Image2: Grid Lookup Interface.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser).Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type .Only displays the field value. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field .SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. Image1: Grid Lookup. SQL Statement . Font Color .Font Color .Message displayed when no info is retrieved. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Font Size .Font size used to display the lookup.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Run SQL statement in different connection. EOFMessage . To use in Validation . Font Size . Choose connection . Background color .Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Title CSS Attributes: Font .Field automatic validation based in the lookup. Background color . middle. bottom.Used to increase the border size of the title.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Width . Border color .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. text-top. Font Color . center or justify).Used to apply bold type to the font. . Bold . Bold .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Border Size . Underlined . Border color .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. HorizontalAlignment . Horizontal Alignment . top.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. right.using a color palette. sub. Field CSS Attributes: Font . middle. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. super. sub. Border Size . super. Underlined .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. text-top.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Sets the title width.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Sets the field width.Sets the title height. center or justify).Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Width . Bold . text-bottom). top. Height . Vertical Alignment . Font Color . right.Sets the field height.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. bottom.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to apply bold type to the font. Height .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. text-bottom).Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Background color .Used to increase the border size of the field. Font Size . Font Size . Vertical Alignment . Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Vertical Alignment .Sets the object height. center or justify).Used to increase the border size of the object. right. middle. Horizontal Alignment . Width .Sets the object width.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. super. Height . Hint .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Help Type: Pop-up . sub. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border color . .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Border Size .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. bottom.Underlined . Help Settings Document the application. text-top.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Attributes: Tooltip . Create on-line instructions. text-bottom). top. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Text . .Display the specified help text beside the field. Select Use a select (combobox)) object in form field. Image1: Lookup method selection. Edition lookup enables a a list of values display on forms fields. based in a SQL statement to feed the list of values or Manual which is based on a custom entered list of values. it is required to retrieve a key (insert / update) and a value to display on the object field on the SQL command. Note on the screen bellow the State field.Automatic Populates the select object dynamically. before and after enabling the edition lookup to display a select object containing a custom list of KEYS / VALUES. note the SQL statement on the picture bellow. . based on a SQL statement. Edition Lookup . These lists of KEYS / VALUES can be defined in two ways: based on a database table (Automatic lookup ) or from custom arrays (lookup manual) Before Lookup After Lookup Lookup method There are available two options: Automatic. it is possible to select many items on the fields list. views on it.By selection yes. retrieving always two fields. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables .Allows to display a title line on the select object. Height . The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field .KEY2.Forces a form reload when the OnChange event occurs on the select field. ). it is frequently used to re-load other lists which uses this field as parameter. only applicable when using the multiple values option. Attributes : SQL Select Statement . Display original and lookup value.The object title or its default option displayed as the first line. display_field FROM table ".The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected.The query used to feed the select object on the form application.Displays the key field and the lookup field retrieved by the SQL statement. this option works combined with Title and Title internal value. Reload form when value has changed . the list of values will be saved on the table's field as a string containing the text: KEY1.Image1: Automatic lookup settings. the default delimiter is semicolon ( . . Delimiter .defined in Delimiter Single value Multiple Values Use Title . Title internal value . Title .The character used to separate the items on generated string.Select object rows quantity. Multiples Values . or . NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row.KEY3 using an specified delimiter like . Checkbox Use the drop down . Edition Lookup .Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project.Display the field Select as a drop down list of checkboxes. Create Link . Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value. Use specific connection .Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project. Use specific connection. the select object is automatically reloaded after the popup form update.ManuaL Enables a select object based on a list of values filled manually as an array. See picture bellow.Character used to separate KEY and LOOKUP values displayed on the list of values. .lookup value original & lookup values Separated by.Allows to create a link to a list update form. In the picture bellow. M. Default . Image2: Single value lookup settings. Attributes: Lookup type.T.Text displayed value. Movies and Traveling is saved on the table's field as a string like S. For example the selection: Sports.When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. Multiple Values (delimiter). Multiple values (delimiter) Saves a single string on the table's field based on a list of values displayed. Note the default delimiter ( . Single Value Creates a simple select object.Selected value by default.The quantity of rows displayed in this select object.Selects the lookup type: Single Value . Value. Label. ) semicolon. Multiple Values (position) and Multiple values (binary). Height.Image1: Manual edition lookup. allows only one item selection. ) Image3: Multiple values lookup (delimiter . The default delimiter is semicolon ( . Height. Delimiter . Multiple Values (Position) Saves on a string type field a list of values. the table's value saved a string is MMBO Image4: Multiple Values lookup settings (position). Civil Status and Hobby in only one table field.Object number of lines. Multiple Values (Binary) . Married and Books. See in the table bellow the positions used by each answers on the saved string.Bytes quantity into the saved string.Object number of lines. ). Height .Text displayed value. Value. Negative .Text displayed value.Label. (The string position counting start with 1) Size.When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. Label.The character used to separated the items on generated string.Saved string initial position. Value.When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field.Value saved on the string when no value is selected. Start. Label Male Female Single Married Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F S M SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 Example: By selecting on the generated form: Male. only applicable when using the multiple values option. for example it is possible to save answers to the topics: Gender . Example 1: By selecting Sports and Movies on the list of values.Allows to save a multiple selection as an integer value on a table field See the examples bellow. the saved value on table field is 3. On this lookup field interface the Value to each item is a integer number generated automatically. Implicit Value 1 2 4 8 16 Item Description Sports Movies Traveling Books Music The selection is converted into a integer which is the sum of the items implicit values before saving. Traveling and Books on the list of values. the saved value on table field is 13. Implicit Value 1 2 4 8 16 Item Description Sports Movies Traveling Books Music 1(Sports) + 4 (Traveling) + 8 (Books) = 13 Image5: Multiple Values settings(Binary) . Implicit Value 1 2 4 8 16 Item Description Sports Movies Traveling Books Music 1 (Sports) + 2 (Movies) = 3 Example 2: By selecting Sports. Title internal value . Height.The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value.Item displayed text . .Forces a form reload when the OnChange event occurs on the select field.Saves the current list of values for re-usable purpose. the saved lists are displayed on the Load lookup definitions field. This option works combined with Title and Title internal value. Display original and lookup value.Displays the key field and the lookup field retrieved by the SQL statement. Save Button .Display the field Select as a drop down list of checkboxes.Removes the item from the list. Use Title .Object number of lines. it is frequently used to re-load other lists which uses this field as parameter.Update all the item properties. lookup value original & lookup values Separated by.The object title or its default option displayed as the first line. Title .Allows to display a title line on the select object. Checkbox using drop down .Character used to separate KEY and LOOKUP values displayed on the list of values.Label . Insert Button .Clear the item edit form. Load lookup definitions .Inserts the item into the list of values Update Button . Reload form when value has changed . Remove Button .Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list. Clear Button . Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Title CSS . CheckBox. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. and a second one list of cities. For example: a Select field "list of states". Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours.AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select. Used to increase the border size of the title. Font Color .Sets the field width. text-top. Bold . super. right. Font Size .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Underlined . Border color . sub. middle. top. sub. bottom. Width . Border Size .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Font Color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Vertical Alignment .Sets the title height. top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. HorizontalAlignment . right. Field CSS Attributes: Font . Bold .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. text-bottom).Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. . center or justify).Used to apply bold type to the font. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Font Size . text-bottom).Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. super. Height . Width . middle.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Vertical Alignment .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Sets the field height.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. bottom. Underlined .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. center or justify).Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Height . Border color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment . text-top.Sets the title width. Border Size .Attributes: Font .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Background color . Background color .Used to increase the border size of the field. Height . middle.Used to apply bold type to the font. sub. Background color . super. .Font Size . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Attributes: Tooltip . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Horizontal Alignment . Help Settings Document the application. Vertical Alignment . Font Color . Help Type: Pop-up .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. center or justify). top. text-bottom).Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Width . Bold . bottom. Border Size . right.Sets the object height.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the object width. Underlined . Create on-line instructions.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. text-top. Display the specified help text beside the field.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Hint . Text . . Initial Value (Type). General Settings Figure1: General Settings Interface Attributes: Data type.The field type Double Select is a drop-down object that allows the selection of multiple information using two list boxes and a navigator ( << < > >> ). Figure1: Double Select object . Initial Value . A list with values available to select and another with the selected values.Uses the server date.The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. System Date .Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button.Available values/ Selected values.Double Select Component that displays two value lists. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. .Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen.Field title in application. Defined Value . Label . Field size in database . Height . Variable Name . . Reload form when value has changed .The query used to feed the select object on the form application. in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field .Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row.Define the field type in the database.HTML object used to display the field on generated form. Edition Lookup Edition lookup enables a list of values display on forms fields.Displays the field value and the lookup return value. HTML Type . the default delimiter is semicolon ( .Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.The character used to separate the items on generated string.Save Variable . It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables . ). Before Lookup After Lookup Figure1: Edition lookup Interface Attributes : SQL Select Statement . SQL Type . Hidden Field .Forces a form reload upon selected field update. retrieving always two fields. display_field FROM table ".Select object rows quantity Delimiter . views on it. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). For example.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Display original and lookup value.Max length used when updating the table field. Disable Field . Use specific connection. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours.Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by. CheckBox.Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project. and a second one list of cities. . AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select. For example: a Select field "list of states". DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Character used to separate the field value and the lookup return value. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value. Font Color .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. HorizontalAlignment .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Sets the title width. Height .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Background color . top.Used to increase the border size of the field. middle. Width .Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the title height.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment . sub.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. text-top. Field CSS Attributes: Font . super. Border color . Underlined .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Vertical Alignment . bottom. Border Size . right. sub.Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Font Color . Title CSS Attributes: Font . Bold .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Underlined .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. center or justify). Bold . Background color . Border color . text-bottom).Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Vertical Alignment . center or justify).Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size . right. super.Used to apply bold type to the font. Border Size .Used to increase the border size of the title. Font Size . Sets the field width. middle. Attributes: Tooltip . text-bottom). Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Border Size .Used to apply bold type to the font. middle. Font Color .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . text-top.Sets the field height. Background color . Underlined . center or justify). Help Settings Document the application. Height . Width .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Bold .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. super.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Font Size . top. right. sub.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the object.top. Create on-line instructions.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. text-bottom). Horizontal Alignment . bottom.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. bottom. . Help Type: Pop-up .Sets the object width. text-top.Sets the object height. Width . Height . Vertical Alignment . Border color .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Text . .Display the specified help text beside the field.Hint .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. System Date .Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. Initial Value .Check Box CHECKBOX Use a checkbox objecto in form field. Initial Value (Type). It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Defined Value .The field type checkbox is an object that allows the single or multiple information using an objects selection box. General Settings Figure1: General Settings Interface Atributos: Data type . Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. . Label .Field title in application.Uses the server date.The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. For example.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode".Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field . Hidden Field .Define the field type in the database.HTML object used to display the field on generated form. . It is possible to populate the checkboxes objects based on a database table (Automatic lookup ) or from custom arrays (Manual lookup) Before Lookup After Lookup Lookup Methods There are available two options: Automatic.Only displays the field value. Image1: Lookup method selection. SQL Type . based in a SQL statement to feed the list of values or Manual which is based on a custom entered list of values. Edition Lookup . in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications.Width or chars quantity displayed on input object.Automatic Populates the checkbox object dynamically.Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). based on a SQL statement. HTML Type .Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). Save Variable . Label Field . it is required to retrieve a key ( insert / update) and a value to display on the object as fields on the SQL command. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".Width . Note the SQL statement on the picture bellow. See the image below. Variable Name . Edition Lookup Edition lookup is a way to display checkbox list of values on forms fields. Does not allow updates. Columns . NOTE: The automatic lookup option requires the form field to be string type because multiple selection saves a single string on database table field like AK. ). Edition Lookup .Image2: Automatic lookup settings.Run the select statement in a different connection available in the project.The query used to feed the checkbox object on the form application. Option check all .Select No.The character used to separate the items on generated string. views on it.ID>.checkbox number of columns. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. the default delimiter is semicolon ( . Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by . Delimiter . it is frequently used to re-load another lists of values which requires this field as parameter.Display an object to check all items and another to uncheck all items.Manual .UT when using the semicolon delimiter. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the lookup return value. Otherwise. to display only the value retrieved by the lookup. Reload form when value has changed . The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field .Forces a form reload when the OnClick event occurs on the checkbox field. the field original value and the value retrieved by lookup are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables . Attributes: SQL Select Statement . display_field FROM table ". retrieving always two fields. Choose connection . Display original and lookup value . Single Value Selects only on value on the list. For example the selection: Sports. See picture bellow.Checkbox columns quantity. Multiple values (Delimiter) Saves a single string on the table's field based on a list of values displayed.Selects the lookup type: Single Value . Image2: Edition lookup . Value. Note the default delimiter ( . Image1: Edition Lookup Manual Interface. Multiple Values (position) and Multiple values (binary).T.Allows the developer to manually crete a list of values saved in the application when there is no table available with the information needed. ) semicolon. .When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field.Single Value settings.Text displayed value in the checkbox object. Label. Default .M. For example when Ipho Coffee is selected the value saved is 43. Attributes : Lookup type..Selected value by default. Movies and Traveling is saved on the table's field as a string like S. Multiple Values (delimiter). Columns . (The string position counting start with 1) Size. Negative . only applicable when using the multiple values option.The character used to separated the items on generated string. Value.When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field.Multiple Values (delimiter) settings. to save Gender (1byte).When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field at the specified position.Text displayed value in the checkbox object.Image3: Edition lookup . Label Male Female Single Married Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F S M SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 Example: By selecting on the generated form: Male.Value saved on the string when no value is selected. the table's value saved a string is MMBO Image4: Edition lookup . Columns .Saved string initial position. .Checkbox columns quantity. Delimiter.Bytes quantity into the saved string. Using the Multiple Values (Position) mode is required to enter the label.Multiple Values (position) settings Label. Multiple Values (Position) Saves multiple values on a single string. Married and Books. Label.The default delimiter is semicolon ( . start position in the saved string and size in bytes each item. Civil Status(1byte) and Hobby (2bytes) in a single use the table bellow (with the positions used by each item). ).Checkbox columns quantity. Columns . Start. For example.Text displayed value in the checkbox object. Value. Example 1: By selecting Sports and Movies on the list of values. AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music 1 (Sports) + 4 (Books) + 8 ( Traveling) = 13 Image5: Edition lookup .Multiple Values (Binary) Allows to save a multiple selection as an integer value on a field See the examples bellow.Multiple Values (binary) settings . AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music 1 (Sports) + 2 (Movies) = 3 Example 2: By selecting Sports. AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music The selection is converted into a integer which is the sum of the items implicit values before saving. Traveling and Books on the list of values. On this lookup field interface the Value to each item is a integer number generated automatically. the saved value on table field is 13. the saved value on table field is 3. Load lookup definitions .Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list.Saves the current list of values for re-usable purpose.Select No.Remove selected item.Forces a form reload when the OnClick event occurs on the checkbox field. Reload form when value has changed . Columns . Update . Remove .Update selected item. the field original value and the value retrieved by lookup are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. the saved lists are displayed on the Load lookup definitions field. Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by . to display only the value retrieved by the lookup.Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the lookup return value.Checkbox columns quantity. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes AJAX PROCESSING . Insert . Display original and lookup value .Display an object to check all items and another to uncheck all items. it is frequently used to re-load another lists of values which requires this field as parameter. Otherwise.Clear the item edit form. Clear . Save .Label.Text displayed value in the checkbox object. Option check all .Insert Label and Value in the values list. Font Color . Font Size . Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected.Used to apply bold type to the font. Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. Border Size .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to increase the border size of the title. Background color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Reloads other selection type fields (Select. Bold .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. CheckBox. .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Title CSS Attributes: Font . Border color . Underlined . For example: a Select field "list of states". and a second one list of cities. Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Bold . Width .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. text-top. right.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Border color . middle. Height . Border Size . Vertical Alignment . right. Font Color . HorizontalAlignment .Used to apply bold type to the font. text-top. Width .Sets the title height. bottom. super. Bold .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. text-bottom).Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Sets the title width. center or justify). Underlined .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Background color . Font Color . Border Size . super. top.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. text-bottom).Used to increase the border size of the object.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment . Border color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. sub. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the field height. .Used to increase the border size of the field. sub.Used to apply bold type to the font. center or justify). Underlined . bottom. center or justify).Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. top. Background color . Height . Font Size .Sets the field width. right. Vertical Alignment . middle. Font Size . top. middle. super. bottom.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Settings Document the application. Width . . sub. Height .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Vertical Alignment .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Sets the object height. Hint . text-bottom). Attributes: Tooltip .Sets the object width. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. text-top.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Help Type: Pop-up . Create on-line instructions. Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. . Radio Use a radio object in form field. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. .Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. Initial Value (Type). Defined Value .The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.Width or chars quantity displayed on input object.The field type Radio is an object that allows the selection of a single information from all information displayed. Label . For example.Field title in application.Uses the server date. in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). System Date . Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Save Variable . Initial Value . It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality.Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. General Settings Figure1: General Settings Interface Attributes: Data type. Width . Only displays the field value.Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). based in a SQL statement to feed the list of values or Manual which is based on a custom entered list of values. Image1: Lookup type selection Edition Lookup . Does not allow updates. SQL Type .HTML object used to display the field on generated form.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Before Lookup After Lookup Lookup Method There are available two options: Automatic. HTML Type .Define the field type in the database.Automatic Lookup used to display values in a Radio field.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field . . Hidden Field . "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".Variable Name . Label Field . Edition Lookup Display a radio object list to use in the form (see manual lookup and automatic lookup ) . The values are retrieved with a Select Statement from a database table. The query used to feed the checkbox object on the form application. Single column Radio double columns Radio Use Title . NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. Columns .The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected. the developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field . views on it. Title .Image2: Automatic Edition lookup Interface Attributes : SQL Select Statement .Character used to separate the field value and the lookup return value. Display original and lookup value. display_field FROM table ".Displays the field value and the lookup return value.radio number of columns. Title internal value .The object title or its default option displayed as the first line. Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables . retrieving always two fields.Forces a form reload upon selected field update.Display a different radio option in the field (See None on the image bellow ) referring to a value filled manually (Title Internal value ). Use specific connection.Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current . Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value. Reload form when value has changed . Use Manual lookup when the database does not have a table with required information. For example.Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Use Title .The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected. Value . Edition Lookup . See picture bellow. Clear . Remove . the value M is added upon selecting Male.Remove selected item. Title . Display original and lookup value.Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list. . Attributes : Label .Update selected item.project.Clear the attributes.Text displayed in the radio object.Saves the list values entered (for reuse with Load lookup definitions ).Forces a form reload upon selected field update.Manual Enables a radio object based on a list of values filled manually as an array.The object title or its default option displayed as the first line. Update . Insert . Load lookup definitions .Display a different radio option in the field (See None on the image bellow ) referring to a value filled manually (Title Internal value ).Define a selection default value.Displays the field value and the lookup return value. Default .Define number of columns used to display the radio items. Reload form when value has changed . Columns .Value store in the table. Save . Title internal value . Image1: Manual Edition lookup Interface. For example: a Select field "list of states". DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. and a second one list of cities. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value. CheckBox.Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by. AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select. .Character used to separate the field value and the lookup return value. Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. Border color . sub.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. middle. Border Size .Used to increase the border size of the field. Bold . . Horizontal Alignment . Font Color . Font Color . Width . Underlined . sub. right.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Font Size . Title CSS Attributes: Font . bottom. Border color . Vertical Alignment . Field CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to increase the border size of the title. Underlined .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. center or justify). Vertical Alignment .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. top. center or justify).Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Height . text-bottom). text-top. Background color . HorizontalAlignment . super. right. Bold .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Border Size .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Font Size .Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the title width. super.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Sets the title height.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to apply bold type to the font. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. right.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. top.Sets the field width. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Help Type: Pop-up . middle. Height . Height . text-bottom). Attributes: Tooltip . bottom.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Width .Sets the object width. super. text-top. sub.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Font Size . Background color .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Used to increase the border size of the object. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . text-top.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Border color .Sets the object height. Border Size .Used to apply bold type to the font. Help Settings Document the application. Underlined . middle.top. Width . .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Create on-line instructions. bottom.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Vertical Alignment .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. text-bottom). center or justify).Sets the field height. Font Color . Bold . Horizontal Alignment . . Text .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Hint .Display the specified help text beside the field. Image Height . .Defines the Image display width in pixels. The icon "Choose image".Html Image Figure1:General SettingsInterface Attributes: Data type . list ScriptCase standard images for selection.Defines the image display height in pixels. Image Width . Image Border .Define the application field type. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. The icon "Upload an image" allows the developer to send the server an image located on another machine. Imagem . Label .Image border width in pixels.Sets the image to be displayed.Field title in application. When the field is defined as HTML Image it displays an image. Height .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. center or justify).Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. sub. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. text-top. right.Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. right.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to increase the border size of the title. super. HorizontalAlignment . top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Horizontal Alignment .Used to apply bold type to the font. Font Color . . Font Size . center or justify).Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. middle. Underlined . Underlined .Sets the title width.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Font Color . Width . Background color . Border color . bottom. Vertical Alignment . text-bottom). Bold . Border Size . Bold . Background color . Border color .Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Sets the title height.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Border Size .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Font Size . Used to apply an underlined type to the font. text-bottom).Used to apply bold type to the font. text-top.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Height .Vertical Alignment . Width . Underlined .Sets the field height. super.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Height . Border color . Background color . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Sets the object width. text-bottom).Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Width . text-top. Font Size .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. center or justify). middle. sub.Used to increase the border size of the object.Sets the object height.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Bold . Attributes: Tooltip .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Create on-line instructions. Font Color . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Help Type: Pop-up . sub. right.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. super. Help Settings Document the application. top. bottom. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Horizontal Alignment . .Sets the field width. top.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Vertical Alignment . bottom. Border Size . middle. .Display the specified help text beside the field. Text .Hint .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Label . Reload . . when reloading the form. Position . Text . Attributes: Data type . Label fields are display only fields.Field title in application.Define the application field type.Position the field on the selected block.Label Figure1:General Settings Interface.Reload the form when clicking in the link created with the text entered in the Text attribute.Text box to enter a text displayed by the field side. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Border color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Font Color . middle.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. sub. bottom. sub. Bold .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Bold . Underlined . text-top.Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Border Size .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Width . bottom. Font Color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. text-bottom). HorizontalAlignment . right. super. Vertical Alignment . center or justify).Used to increase the border size of the field. Border Size . top. text-top. Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. text-bottom). Vertical Alignment .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Border color . Font Size .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to apply bold type to the font. middle. Background color . Underlined .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the title width. top. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to increase the border size of the title. Font Size . Title CSS Attributes: Font . .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. right.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the title height. super. center or justify).Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Background color .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Height . Background color . . Font Size . Underlined . Border Size . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Vertical Alignment . Attributes: Tooltip .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. center or justify).Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the object height. right.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Width . sub. Bold .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Border color . top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Width . Help Settings Document the application.Used to apply bold type to the font. Create on-line instructions. Height .Sets the field height. super.Sets the object width. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to increase the border size of the object. Help Type: Pop-up . middle. text-top.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Height . text-bottom). Font Color . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. bottom.Sets the field width.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Hint . Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. . System Date . It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality.Width or chars quantity displayed on input object.Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute.Transforms the input type field to password. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. The information entry serves as a filter of items that will be displayed as it is typed.Field title in application.Text Auto-complete This field displays a list of items obtained from a Select command. .Defines the data type as text auto-complete. This list is dynamically loaded with Ajax technology General Settings Figure1:General SettingsInterface Data Type . Defined Value . For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value . For the Text Auto-Complete each item value of must be alpha-numeric. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. Width . This list structure is similar to Select HTML object where each item has a value and label associated. Label .The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Password field . Initial Value (Type).Uses the server date. Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Hidden Field .Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).Define the field type in the database. . Disable Field . "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". Variable Name . Field size in database .HTML object used to display the field on generated form. For example.Validate fields only when submit. Values Format Image1: Values Format Interface. Label Field . Attributes: Case Settings .Only displays the field value.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. HTML Type .Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.Converts the field text depending on the option: Uppercase Lowercase Converts all text to capital letters. Does not allow updates. Converts all text to lower case. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Validate on submit .Max length used when updating the table field.Text field Password field Save Variable . SQL Type .This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. Using the settings below the field accepts letter. in the application is displayed only a field to data entry. Permite determinar o modo de busca do texto(Início igual. Uppercase all Capitalizes each word (converts the first words letter of every to capital letter).When this option is not selected. Allowed Characters . See an example in the link below. Selected .Define the capture box width (Capture Text).Define the texts earch mode (Begin equals. Max length. Attributes: SQL Select Statement .Enter a select comand use to capture the text.Qualquer parte e Final igual).Accepts all characters. Width .Define the character set accepted. Capture Text . End equals).Defined the maximum size accepted. Edition Lookup Figure3: Edition Lookup Interface.Uppercase first Capitalizes only first word (converts only the word first letter of the first word to capital letter). The letters a b c (defined in the Less attribute) are not accepted. Any part. numbers and " / " (defined in the More attribute). Minimum Size .Defined the minimum size accepted. Search options .Define the number of records displayed on each search. .Select and define the character set accepted: All . Rows . Select a different connection. . For example: a Select field "list of states".With this option disabled (=No) displays. only the name of the State in the Capture. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Display label with the description . Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected.Allows you to display the label with the description.Display original and lookup value . for example. Choose connection . CheckBox. AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select. and a second one list of cities. Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. Font Size . Width . Vertical Alignment .Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. super.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. sub.Used to increase the border size of the title. Background color .Sets the title height.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. top.Sets the title width. Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to apply bold type to the font. text-bottom). Border color . .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. bottom.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. right. center or justify).Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. text-top. Border Size . Horizontal Alignment . Bold .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Height .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Font Color . Underlined . middle. Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Font Size .Used to apply bold type to the font. middle.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold . bottom.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the object. top.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. right. HorizontalAlignment . Font Color . Underlined . Width .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. text-bottom).Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Sets the object width. sub. Font Size . Help Settings Document the application. center or justify). Border Size . Background color . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Background color . super.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Border Size .Used to apply bold type to the font. text-top. Create on-line instructions.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Vertical Alignment . middle.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. center or justify).Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Height . super. Height . text-top. sub. text-bottom). . bottom.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color . Bold .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. top. Border color . Vertical Alignment . Border color . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Width .Sets the field height. right.Sets the field width.Used to increase the border size of the field. Underlined .Sets the object height. Horizontal Alignment . Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up .Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Attributes: Tooltip . Text . Hint .Display the specified help text beside the field. .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. . Initial Value . Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen.Uses the server date. .Define the application field type.Field title in application. Defined Value . For the number Auto-Complete each item value of must be numeric.Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. When the field is defined as Number Auto-Complete Label .The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.Number Auto-complete This field displays a list of items obtained from a Select command. This list structure is similar to Select HTML object where each item has a value and label associated. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. The information entry serves as a filter of items that will be displayed as it is typed. System Date . Attributes: Data Type . Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Initial Value (Type). This list is dynamically loaded with Ajax technology General Settings Figure1:General Settings Interface. VALUES FORMAT Image1:Interface of Values Format.HTML object used to display the field on generated form.Max length used when updating the table field. For example. Variable Name . Edition Lookup . SQL Type . Accepts Negative .Allow to define the decimal separator.Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).Allow the field to accept negative value.Allow to determine the minimum value of the field Maximum Value .Allow to determine the maximum size of the field. Save Variable . HTML Type .Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Field size in database . Minimum Value . in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Label Field . Does not allow updates.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode".Validate fields only when submit. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Validate on submit . Attributes: Maximum Size . "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information.Define the field type in the database.Only displays the field value. Disable Field .Width or chars quantity displayed on input object.Width . Hidden Field .Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications).Allow to determine the maximum value of the field Grouping . Qualquer parte e Final igual). Attributes: SQL Select Statement .Figure3: Edition Lookup Interface. in the application is displayed only a field to data entry. AJAX PROCESSING . See an example in the link below. Permite determinar o modo de busca do texto(Início igual. for example. End equals).Define the capture box width (Capture Text).Allows you to display the label with the description.Enter a select comand use to capture the text.Define the texts earch mode (Begin equals. only the name of the State in the Capture. Choose connection . Capture Text . Any part.Select a different connection. Rows .With this option disabled (=No) displays. Search options .When this option is not selected. Display label with the description .Define the number of records displayed on each search. Width . Display original and lookup value . Background color . For example: a Select field "list of states".Reloads other selection type fields (Select. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected.Used to apply bold type to the font. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. CheckBox. Font Size . Bold . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Font Color . Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. and a second one list of cities. Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. . middle. right. Border color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Width .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. bottom.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. middle. Height . top. Underlined . center or justify).Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . sub. Border Size .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. text-top. super. right.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Background color . text-bottom).Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to increase the border size of the field.Underlined .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the field height.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Vertical Alignment .Sets the field width. Font Color . sub.Sets the title width. Vertical Alignment .Used to increase the border size of the title. text-bottom).Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Underlined .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Font Color . Bold .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Border color . text-top. Height . Border Size . Background color . bottom.Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Font Size . top. Width . Bold . Font Size . HorizontalAlignment . center or justify). Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. super.Used to apply bold type to the font. Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. bottom. Hint .Sets the object height. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. center or justify). sub. Border color . Horizontal Alignment .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. . Vertical Alignment . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. text-bottom). super. Attributes: Tooltip . Height .Used to increase the border size of the object. text-top.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Border Size . Help Type: Pop-up . top. Create on-line instructions. Help Settings Document the application.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Width .Sets the object width. middle.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. right. .Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. Menu Links Create a menu structure in the form.Define the field type in the database.Define the application field type.Define menu item label. Icon .Field title in application.Define it the menu item is selected by default in the display modes (Select and Radio ). Update and Remove menu items control.Insert . Label . Proprieties: Data type . Link . Values Format Proprieties: Menu Item . . Hidden Field . Insert . HTML Type . SQL Type . Default . Label .Define the icon displayed at the item link side for the display Link mode.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.Define an application or extern link called when a menu item is selected.HTML object used to display the field on generated form.Insert new menu item Update -Update menu item. Remove all menu items data. Clear. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Remove menu item. This option is available to the Display Link mode.Clear a menu item data Clear all .Menu Links generation format : Select . .Do not display the link labels. Radio or Link: Example using Select mode : Example using Radio mode : Example using Link mode : Hide Label .Remove . Display Mode . text-bottom).Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Background color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Object Input CSS . Underlined . super. right. Horizontal Alignment . Font Color . Font Size . Border color . Font Color . Height . bottom. text-top. right.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. sub. HorizontalAlignment .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Border Size . Bold . Background color .Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Sets the title height. center or justify). super. Underlined .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Vertical Alignment .Sets the title width. Font Size . top. Height .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Border color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. center or justify).Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Bold . Width . bottom.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Title CSS Attributes: Font . Vertical Alignment .Used to apply bold type to the font. top.Used to apply bold type to the font. middle.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Width .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the title.Sets the field height.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the field width.Used to increase the border size of the field. middle. text-top.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. sub. text-bottom). Border Size .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Vertical Alignment .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. super. Horizontal Alignment .Sets the object height. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. right.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Font Color . center or justify).Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Create on-line instructions. Underlined .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Background color .Sets the object width. Help Type: Pop-up .Attributes: Font .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Border color . Font Size .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. top. text-top. Width . Height . bottom. Help Settings Document the application. Attributes: Tooltip . sub.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Used to apply bold type to the font. Bold . Border Size . middle. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Used to increase the border size of the object. text-bottom). Display the specified help text beside the field. .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text .Hint . Label .Profile Display the production environment connections available in a Select object at run time. To use this option do not enter the connection name at deployment time. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Field title in application. Title CSS Attributes: . See deployment. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Vertical Alignment .Sets the field width.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Underlined .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Underlined . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Font Color .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Bold . Height . Horizontal Alignment . text-top.Sets the field height. text-top. Width . Border Size . Bold .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Height .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. top.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Background color . sub.Sets the title width.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Field CSS Attributes: Font . Border color . Font Size . middle. bottom.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Sets the title height.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. center or justify). Border color . super. text-bottom). super. Font Size . middle. bottom.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Width . HorizontalAlignment . right. Border Size .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. center or justify).Font .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Font Size . . sub. top. text-bottom). Font Color .Used to increase the border size of the title.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Vertical Alignment . right.Used to increase the border size of the field. Background color . bottom.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Used to apply bold type to the font. Create on-line instructions.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Help Type: Pop-up . Attributes: Tooltip . sub.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. super. Width .Sets the object height. Border Size .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Height .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Background color . right. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Vertical Alignment . Underlined .Sets the object width. Bold . text-top. Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. middle. text-bottom).Font Color . center or justify). Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color . top. . Help Settings Document the application.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Display the specified help text beside the field.Hint .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text . . SQL Type .Define the editor box height in pixels. Choose the position in which to display the toolbar: Top or Bottom. numbers and special characters. Status . Hidden Field .Define the field type in the database.Editor Html Attributes: Data Type . Height . . Label . Disable Field .Button alignment in the toolbar. Alignment . "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Toolbar Attributes: Properties : Position .Define the field data type. HTML editor type fields accept letters.Toolbar position in the HTML Editor.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name.Field title in application.Hides or displays the status bar. Background color . Preview . Font Color .Define the toolbar display settings.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Font Size . Bold . Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Number of Toolbar lines in the HTML Editor.Used to increase the border size of the title. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Button layout . Border Size .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Amount (Toolbar lines) .Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined .Preview the toolbar display settings defined.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. right.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Font Color . Border Size . Bold . right. Horizontal Alignment . bottom.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Underlined .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Background color . HorizontalAlignment . Field CSS Attributes: Font .Border color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to apply bold type to the font. super.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Sets the title height. Border color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. super. sub. center or justify). text-top. right. Background color . text-bottom).Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. middle. sub. center or justify). Font Size .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Underlined . Bold . center . Height .Sets the field height.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. top. Horizontal Alignment . Border Size .Used to increase the border size of the object.Used to increase the border size of the field. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Width .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. top. Vertical Alignment .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Border color . bottom. text-bottom).Used to apply bold type to the font. Font Size . Font Color .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Width .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. text-top.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Sets the title width. Height .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Sets the field width. Vertical Alignment . middle. or justify). text-bottom). sub. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Attributes: Tooltip .Sets the object height. middle. super.Sets the object width. Help Type: Pop-up . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. text-top. Height . top.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Settings Document the application. Width . Vertical Alignment . Hint . Create on-line instructions. bottom.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. . Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. . Data type . The object allows to select a language for the project application. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Locales Add an select object to the application. Title CSS Attributes: . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Define the application field type.Field title in application. Label . Used to apply bold type to the font. text-bottom). Bold . Vertical Alignment . Bold .Used to increase the border size of the field.Sets the title height.Font .Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the title width.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Vertical Alignment . text-top. Width .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to increase the border size of the title. center or justify).Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size . super. Width .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Font Color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size . Underlined .Sets the field width. text-bottom). Height . Border color . bottom.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. text-top. Field CSS Attributes: Font . Border color . .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Sets the field height. Background color . Horizontal Alignment .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. center or justify). Font Color . middle. sub.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. bottom.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . right.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Height . HorizontalAlignment . Underlined . middle. top. Background color . super.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. right. sub. Border Size . Border Size . top. Used to increase the border size of the object. text-bottom). Underlined . Width .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. bottom. right. Vertical Alignment . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. text-top. Attributes: Tooltip . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Background color .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. center or justify). top.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Border Size .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. super. Create on-line instructions.Font Size .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Settings Document the application. Font Color . . middle. sub. Border color . Height . Help Type: Pop-up . Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the object height.Sets the object width. Bold . . Text .Hint .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Display the specified help text beside the field. that means. OnSubmit . See example onMouseOver . See the available events: onclick . Choose event . etc).Occurs when the objects lose focus. for whom we will write the Javascript code.Occurs always that the object gains focus.Occurs always that the mouse pointer is over the field.The events below are directly linked to the form. for example: nm_reload_form(). “update” and “remove” Edit Javascript Selecting the object and its event. OnLoad . . See example onFocus . Image1: Edit Javascript Interface Attributes: Choose the object . When click on the buttons (new. insert. that do a reload on the form. then click on the button "Edit" opening a window to edit the javascript action that will be executed when the selected event is actioned.In this combobox are shown all fields that are part of the form application. See example Events linked to the form . previous. See example onMouseOut . In this screen we can type customized javascript actions or we can use default Scriptcase events. that means.This event occurs when the page is loaded. See example onChange . for each field you can edit actions associated to its events. as the object form “form”. when you navigate from a register to other.Always that the mouse pointer goes out of the field.In this combobox we must choose the event associated to the field.Occurs always that the object lose focus and the value is modified.This event occurs when click on the buttons “insert”.Javascript The concept of Edit Javascript is to associate to the form fields events in Javascript.Occurs on the mouse click over the field See Example onblur . OnBlur Example: We can define a criteria around the field “weekly_hour_job” when it loose focus. If it's necessary to type a complex rotine using Javascript.style.F1.F1.checked && document.").value == 'gardener'){ alert('when you grow i want to be a gardener').F1.value / 2. if(document. in this moment we use advantage to check if the “position” is “gardener”.payment_way.selectedIndex].weekly_hour_job.F1.value.F1. Note: Javascript language doesn't have the same behavior to each browser available in the market.F1.F1.focus().weekly_hour_job.F1.purchasevalue. document.00 && document. document. Save the javascript command clicking on the button "update".weekly_hour_job. } if (document.position.payment_way.F1. will occur an “onChange”.checked){ document.aux_maternity.F1.F1.F1.F1. the javascript code below calculates the value of the parcel. we recommend to make tests in different browsers.parcelvalue.text == '30/60') { document.background='FCEEBC' } Note: To access a field of the radio time it is necessary to use an index.F1.F1.Image2: Interface of Javascript Edition.checked){ document.F1.text == 'avista') { document.background='FFFFFF' } if(document.purchasevalue.aux_maternity .aux_maternity.value = document.parcelvalue.F1.F1.value > '20') { alert("job hour above the allowed.payway[document.disabled = false.payway[document. document.salary.style. . if (document. } onChange examples: When modify the “Salary” of an employee and go out of the field.value = "".aux_maternity.tp_folha[0]. document. if (document. } After informing the value of the purchase and select the modality of the payment in an object of the “Select: type payment_way”.sex[1].F1.selectedIndex].value > 5000.value = document.disabled = true. OnClick Example: When click on a field of the radio type can be turned on/off a series of form fields according to the selected value. if(document.sex[0].F1. F1.purchasevalue.F1.selectedIndex]. } onMouseOver Example: We can trade the stile (background color.F1.) when the mouse is over the field.payway [document.value / 3. font color.parcelvalue.} if (document.F1. document.value = document.bgColor = "FFFFFF" .F1.field_name.payment_way.bgColor = "0FFCCA" onMouseOut example: Set a background color when the mouse loose focus of the field.style.text == '30/60/90') { document.field_name. etc. document.style.F1. Example 1: Activating an application called grid_categories.'off'). Access to applications may be granted through a control application to authenticate users. insert the following macro call: sc_apl_status('grid_categories'.Security Attribute: Use Security: With this option selected. In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user). sc_apl_status('form_products'.'on'). sc_apl_status('grid_products'. } . } else{ sc_error_message("Unauthorized user!"). } elseif({userid} == 'mary') { sc_apl_status('grid_categories'.'on').'on'). the application is only accessible when enabled using the sc_apl_status macro. sc_apl_status('form_categories'. sc_apl_status('form_products'.'on'). In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user). sc_apl_status('form_categories'.'on'). sc_apl_status('grid_products'.'on'). Example 2: Creating a rule to authenticate by user type in a login form containing a field called userid. See the examples below. Disabled applications display the message "Unauthorized user" when accessed.'off').'on'). insert the following code: // two users: john and mary with permission to access different applications if({userid} == 'john') { sc_apl_status('grid_categories'. If the password is not entered correctly. CAPTCHA means "Completely Automated Public Turing test to tell Computers and Humans Apart". It requires direct user interaction. At run time a text box is displayed requiring the access password. Read more: Using CAPTCHA on a login form . if he does not have access to the application. (See image below). In the login application onValidate event. CAPTCHA This is a feature used to increase the level of security in the form.Example 3: Authenticating applications using a database table. In the development environment it is possible to suppress the above steps purely for testing purposes. Use Password: An application password setting is required. Disable the options Enable use of security and Enable Use of Password in the Configuration menu | My ScriptCase. thereby avoiding repeated password requests (or access denied) for each application execution. enter the following code: URL output safety (denied access URL redirection): It redirects the user to this URL. through the entry of a random sequence of characters. an "Unauthorized user" message is displayed. displayed on a dynamically generated image. Enable CAPTCHA in the application.Captcha font size Reload . Width .Message containing instructions on how to use the CAPTCHA feature.Height of the generated image in pixels. List . Label .Width of the generated image in pixels.Use CAPTCHA . Height . Select one layout . . Error message . Font Size .Characters to be used in the generated image.Error message displayed when the user input does not match the generated image. Quantity .Option for the user to request a new code.This option allows the developer to set how the CAPTCHA should be displayed in the application.Number of characters displayed in the automatically generated image. and defining header formats. organizing fields in blocks. amongst other options.Layout Layout Configure display formats by determining attributes such as display schemes. Blocks Settings Header & Footer . Figure 1: Block settings interface.Blocks Conceptually a block is a “container” in which a Form Application. all you have to do is drag it to the desired page as indicated below. Click to select the block in order to modify its position. used to define the position of the next block (positioned to the side or below in the series of blocks). The Figure bellow shows an ORGANIZATION column. and to delete the block. You can add as many blocks as you need and you can organize them to best suit your purpose. . By default the applications created in ScriptCase only consist of one block. This is how to remove a block from being displayed. bearing the same name as the application. Organising Blocks and Changing position See below how to modify the page block display order. To change the page block is displayed in. Click on the block and drag it to “Blocks not shown”. Control or Grid fields are located. To the left of each block there are two icons: to edit the block properties. Displays the label above the field. "Beside" . Title (Display) . .The fields are displayed beside one another while observing the number of columns.Block title header displayed. "Below" .Flag that controls whether the field label is displayed inside the block.Attributes: Block (name) . Fields (Position) . "Beside" . Fields (Columns) . Label (Position) .The fields are displayed below each other while observing the number of columns.Displays the label below the field.Flag that controls whether the block title is displayed. Label (Display) .Displays the label beside the field.Position of fields within the block: “Below” . "Line" .The fields are displayed side by side (in line) without tabulation (aligned in columns).The label options are: "Above" .Number of columns to be displayed side by side within the block. Organization of blocks on the page: "Below" . Organization (Width) . .Indicates that the next block is displayed beside the previous one. Add New Block To add new blocks to an application.Indicates that the next block is displayed below the previous one.Organization (Next) .Defines the width of the block in pixels or as a percent.Defines the height of the block in pixels or as a percent. Organization (Height). "Beside" . "Tabs" . just click .Indicates that the next block is displayed as a tab. Background image . Attributes: Name . Title Height .Figure 2: Add New Block interface. Title .Whether to display a line containing the block title.Block label. .Block title background image.Block title line background color.Block title font applied. Title Font . Font color .Block title font color. Display Title .Block name.Block title font size applied.Block Title. Font size . Edit Block Click to edit the block properties and click Save. Attributes: Name .Block title line height (in pixels). Label . Background color . Figure 2: Edit Block interface.Block name. Block title horizontal alignment (Left. Block height .Block border color.Position of the next block in relation to the current one. Next Block .Number of block field columns.Block height. Label Position . Label color .Field label display color. Display Label . Column Width . Vertical Alignment .Block border width. Block width .Spacing between the block cells. Border width .Field label position. .Block title vertical alignment (Top. Columns .Display block field labels. Middle or Bottom). Field Organization .Horizontal Alignment . Border color . Center or Right). Cellspacing .Block field organization.Calculate the block columns.Block width. Theme . (CSS) Attributes: Header Template . etc) for the application. fonts.Used to select the Header format. .Colors Schema Layout Settings Figure 1: Layout Settings interface Is used to define the Application Theme.Used to select the Footer format.Used to select an existing Theme (colors. Footer Template . you may need to associate content with it. the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the header line.The variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combobox. Header Variables . click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon . Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. To locate existing images and select one. (A Form Applications has 2 titles: one for Insert mode. Search Criteria .The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header. (available only in Grid applications) FOOTER .Defines the Header title to be displayed in the application. A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the application's data source (“Select” query) are displayed beside the header variable when the “Field” type is selected.This flag determines whether or not the Header is displayed Application Title . Display Header . The selected field value is then displayed in the header line. Date: Displays the system date in the header line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. To see all the available date formats. Each condition is displayed on a new line. See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. Value: When the “Value” type is selected. click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples. Enter the format in the text field alongside it. For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”. Depending on the type.The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the header. Enter text and/or “Global Variables”.Header & Footer HEADER Figure 1: Header Interface. and another one for Update mode). Title: Displays the value entered in “Select Title” in the header . This interface format can change depending on the selected option in "Layout >> Settings >> Header Template". (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) . (available only in Grid applications) .Figure 2: Footer Interface. A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the “Select” (application's data source) are displayed beside the Footer variable when the “Field” type is selected. Enter text and/or “Global Variables”. Date: Displays the system date in the footer line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. This format of this interface may change depending on the option selected in "Layout >> Settings >> Footer Template". Enter the format in the text field alongside it. (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) . Value: When the “Value” type is selected. Footer Variables .The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the footer. There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. Each condition is displayed on a new line. Title: Display in the Footer the value entered in “Select Title”.This flag determines whether or not the footer will be displayed.The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header. to see all the available date formats. For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”. click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon . Search Criteria . Depending on the type. To locate existing images and select one. See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. Display Footer . Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. you may need to associate content with it.The variable fields can be populated with any of the types listed in the Combobox. click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples. the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the footer line. The selected field value is displayed in the footer line. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". onApplicationInit . onScriptInit -Occurs when the application is loaded onRefresh -This event is executed during the application page reload. upon submitting a form. .This event is executed by clicking on validation buttons (ok. onValidateFailure -Occurs when a validation failure is found.This event occurs when the browser loads the window. update. insert. onValidateSucess -Occurs when validation is successful. In case of form the buttons are: update.) and for a specific type of application. when it is loaded. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. search) depending on the used application. . delete. Events allow the developer to define custom actions at a specific execution time (e.. After a record is inserted.Occurs once when the application is loaded (first time).. insert and delete.g.Events Events Scriptcase uses the concept of events to enable to developer to customize application code. onLoad . . onValidate . Read more about Scriptcase Macros. Image 1: Event Button access of Control application. Ajax Events Using AJAX reduces the amount of unnecessary data traffic with the server thereby speeding up application processing.Select the field and the event used by the AJAX process. Figure 1: AJAX event interface. onBlur . Only the onClick event is available to Grid applications.This events fires when the field has focus. For valid users it returns the name. See the example below: The user field is validated against a database (table). onChange .This events fires when the field has focus. the field value is NOT changed and the focus is directed to another object. Passing parameters is optional. Example: 1 . It allows individual data components on a page to be updated without the need to refresh the entire page. . onClick . The following events are available in ScriptCase. (in PHP code).This events fires when the field is clicked.This event fires when the field has focus and the field value is changed and the focus is then directed to another object. For invalid users a message is displayed. onFocus . The code is processed by the Server and the XML result is sent to the browser. 2 -Enter the PHP business rule in the PHP editor. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. Parameters (Fields) . Insert Code . PHP editor . These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". Read more about Scriptcase Macros. 3.Use it to type in your PHP code.ScriptCase provides you with a number of predefined blocks of code that can be inserted into the PHP editor and then amended accordingly. 1.Use this to create parameters retrieving field values. Figure 3: Programming PHP with AJAX. 2.Figure 2: Selecting fields and events for AJAX processing. . These methos will allow us to integrate our project with these data sources: Facebook Twitter Google+ PayPal . Scriptcase can us to link our applications using OAuth methods.Authentications Overview Authentication Image1: Authentication Option. you need to fill these fields: App ID . Image2: Facebook developpers page.Facebook Image1: Facebook authentication Fields. When creating a Facebook Authentication Button. Click on + Create New App .facebook. (01/29/2013) To create Facebook application and receive your key and secret for your website. Login to your Facebook account 2.Method to be ran when Facebook service return the data requested. This Id will be given by the Facebook Developer's page. Go to https://developers.com/apps and register your account 3.Facebook Application ID.Facebook service will give you a secret key to enable your application to run on a website. you must follow these steps: 1. Method return . Secret . . On the top of the page you can find your APP ID and APP Secret for your SC application only. Image4: Website details You can use this APP ID and App Secret to connect this SC application to Facebook. Enter your APP Display Name. Image3: App Name and Namespace Enter your SC application details and save changes.4. App Name Space and click on continue. Image3: Application details.Twitter service will give you a secret key to enable your application to run on a website. Enter your Application details as asked and proceed with the application creation. Go to https://dev.Twitter Application ID. you must follow these steps: 1. This Id will be given by the Twitter Developer's page. When creating a Twitter Authentication Button.com/ and register your account 2. Secret . (01/29/2013) To create a Twitter application and receive your key and secret for your website. Image2: Twitter developpers page.Twitter Image1: Twitter authentication Fields. Method return . you need to fill these fields: Key . On the "My Applications" page click on Create New Application 3.twitter.Method to be ran when Twitter service return the data requested. . Image4: OAuth keys You can use this Consumer ID and Consumer Secret to connect this SC application to Twitter.On the top of the page you can find your Consumer ID and Consumer Secret at the OAuth tool tab for your SC application only. . Image2: Google+ developpers page. On the "API Access" page click on "Create an OAuth2. Secret . you must follow these steps: 1. Go to https://code. Client ID . you need to fill these fields: Application Name . This Id will be given by the Google+ Developer's page.Google+ service will give you a secret key to enable your application to run on a website.Google+ Image1: Google+ authentication Fields. (01/29/2013) To create a Google+ application and receive your key and secret for your website.google.URL to where Google+ must redirect the user with the data retrieved.com/apis/console/ and register your account 2. When creating a Google+ Authentication Button.Method to be ran when Google+ service return the data requested. Enter your Application details as asked and click "Next".Google+ Application Name.0 client ID" 3. . Redirect URL . Method return .Google+ Application ID. 4. Image3: Application details. On the next Page. . Enter the Client ID as requested in the page and click "Create Client ID". you will find the data required by Scriptcase.3. Image4: Client ID Details 5. Image5: OAuth Keys You can use this Client ID and Secret to connect an SC application to Google+.5. . Method to be ran when PayPal service return the data requested.Here will be.Method to be ran when PayPal service return the data requested.Paypal Image1: PayPal authentication Fields. Method IPN . Variable with the description . This method is comonly used to modify the database and register the purchase as complete.This url may be to the PayPal SandBox or the PayPal API itself.This order number must . Order number .Method to be ran when PayPal service confirm the payment.URL to where PayPal must redirect the user with the data retrieved. you need to fill these fields: PayPal URL . . Paypal Method . Variable with the Total amount .The PayPal ID to receive the payment.Method to be ran when the user cancel the purchase. Customized field . The SandBox is the place for tests before the application runs in a real environment. Id . When creating a PayPal Authentication Button. Method Cancel . 4. . (01/29/2013) To create a PayPal payment method you must fill the fields correctly. activate your newly created account. On the Test Accounts page. Image3: Test account details. Enter the test account details as asked and save the changes. you must use the PayPal SandBox and create a fake PayPal account: 1.Image2: PayPal developpers page. 3.com/ and register your account 2. Go to https://developer.paypal. In order to test your application. Click on "create a preconfigured account". 4. Image4: Info about the test account The variables returned by the request can be find below: [mc_gross] [invoice] [protection_eligibility] [address_status] [payer_id] [tax] => [address_street] [payment_date] [payment_status] [charset] [address_zip] [first_name] [mc_fee] [address_country_code] [address_name] [notify_version] [custom] [payer_status] [business] [address_country] [address_city] [quantity] [verify_sign] [payer_email] [txn_id] [payment_type] [last_name] [address_state] [receiver_email] [payment_fee] . [receiver_id] [txn_type] [item_name] [mc_currency] [item_number] [residence_country] [test_ipn] [handling_amount] [transaction_subject] [payment_gross] [shipping] [ipn_track_id] . Buttons Buttons New Button To create a new button. Linking). . PHP. Types button: (Javascript. click on the New Button option and enter a name and the type of the button. Deleting a button To delete a button click the Delete icon in the right of the button name at the application menu under the Buttons option. Image2: Edit button function. This event fires when the field has focus and the field value is changed and the focus is then directed to another object. onFocus .Javascript Button Creating a Javascript Type Button AJAX EVENTS Using AJAX reduces the amount of unnecessary data traffic with the server thereby speeding up application processing. For invalid users a message is displayed. onClick . It allows individual data components on a page to be updated without the need to refresh the entire page.This events fires when the field is clicked. See the example below: The user field is validated against a database (table). onChange . Figure 1: AJAX event interface. For valid users it returns the name. Example: .This events fires when the field has focus. The following events are available in ScriptCase. the field value is NOT changed and the focus is directed to another object. onBlur .This events fires when the field has focus. Only the onClick event is available to Grid applications. 3. Parameters (Fields) . To create a new button. 2. Insert Code . . Figure 2: Selecting fields and events for AJAX processing. (in PHP code).Select the field and the event used by the AJAX process. The code is processed by the Server and the XML result is sent to the browser.ScriptCase provides you with a number of predefined blocks of code that can be inserted into the PHP editor and then amended accordingly. Passing parameters is optional. Figure 3: Programming PHP with AJAX. enter the name and select the type of button. click on "New button". 1.Use it to type in your PHP code. 2 -Enter the PHP business rule in the PHP editor.1 . PHP editor .Use this to create parameters retrieving field values. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. Code Image2: JavaScript Interface. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. There are three types of display buttons: (Button. Read more about Scriptcase Macros.Image2: Edit button function. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". Read more about Scriptcase Macros. Image and Link). . For valid users it returns the name. onFocus .Php Button Creating a Php Type Button AJAX EVENTS Using AJAX reduces the amount of unnecessary data traffic with the server thereby speeding up application processing. Only the onClick event is available to Grid applications. It allows individual data components on a page to be updated without the need to refresh the entire page. onChange . the field value is NOT changed and the focus is directed to another object. For invalid users a message is displayed.This events fires when the field has focus. Figure 1: AJAX event interface. See the example below: The user field is validated against a database (table). onClick .This event fires when the field has focus and the field value is changed and the focus is then directed to another object.This events fires when the field is clicked. onBlur . The following events are available in ScriptCase.This events fires when the field has focus. Example: . ScriptCase provides you with a number of predefined blocks of code that can be inserted into the PHP editor and then amended accordingly. To create a new button.1 .Select the field and the event used by the AJAX process. 2. Parameters (Fields) . Insert Code . PHP editor . click on "New button". Figure 2: Selecting fields and events for AJAX processing. The code is processed by the Server and the XML result is sent to the browser.Use it to type in your PHP code. 3. enter the name and select the type of button. 1.Use this to create parameters retrieving field values. Passing parameters is optional. . Figure 3: Programming PHP with AJAX. 2 -Enter the PHP business rule in the PHP editor. (in PHP code). These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". Read more about Scriptcase Macros. Image and Link). These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". Read more about Scriptcase Macros. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. Code Image2: PHP Interface.Image2: Edit button function. There are three types of display buttons: (Button. . For invalid users a message is displayed. onClick . For valid users it returns the name.This event fires when the field has focus and the field value is changed and the focus is then directed to another object.Link Button Creating a Linking type button AJAX EVENTS Using AJAX reduces the amount of unnecessary data traffic with the server thereby speeding up application processing. onBlur . See the example below: The user field is validated against a database (table). onFocus . Figure 1: AJAX event interface. onChange . The following events are available in ScriptCase. Only the onClick event is available to Grid applications.This events fires when the field has focus. It allows individual data components on a page to be updated without the need to refresh the entire page.This events fires when the field has focus. the field value is NOT changed and the focus is directed to another object. Example: .This events fires when the field is clicked. (in PHP code). PHP editor .1 . Figure 3: Programming PHP with AJAX. 3. To create a new button.Use this to create parameters retrieving field values. 2 -Enter the PHP business rule in the PHP editor. Insert Code . 2.Use it to type in your PHP code. enter the name and select the type of button. Passing parameters is optional. Figure 2: Selecting fields and events for AJAX processing. The code is processed by the Server and the XML result is sent to the browser. click on "New button".ScriptCase provides you with a number of predefined blocks of code that can be inserted into the PHP editor and then amended accordingly. Parameters (Fields) . . 1.Select the field and the event used by the AJAX process. . There are three types of display buttons: (Button.Using the link option click in new link. 3 . In the application menu (on the left side of the window) there is an option to create new links configure the new Linking button. The linking button requires a link associated to it. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". Image3: Link Type Interface.Select the link type Buttons and click in next (as Image below).Select the application that will be called and click in Next. as in the image below. Read more about Scriptcase Macros. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase.Image2: Edit button function. and follow the steps below to create the link required to complete the operation. Image and Link). Creating a new Link 1 . Image2:Create new Linking. 2 . Image5: Parameters Definition Interface . Link Operation Mode .Iframe display.Value.Empty. . Field . Image6: Parameters Definition Interface . 4 . Value or Empty. Image7: Parameters Definition Interface . 5 .How will be presented the link.Enter the field used to pass the content.Define the form link properties . Fixed .Image4: List of Applications Interface.No value will be pass.Define the parameters passed. Empty .Field. Image8: Link/Form Properties Interface.Enter a fixed content to be passed. It can be of three types: Field. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. . Open in other window .Message shown when the mouse is over the selected link field. exiting the search and going to the form.Show the form in the same browser window.Select the buttons that will be shown. Open in a Iframe . below of search an Iframe is created to display the form. Output URL of the called application . These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". Form Properties .web address accessed when the user exit the grid.Open another window to show the form. Read more about Scriptcase Macros. Linking Link Hint.Show the form in the same in the same window that the search.Open in the same window . Application Settings Define common ScriptCase application attributes. Image 1: Settings Interface See below the attributes description: Image 2: Settings Interface Attributes: . Generated application language (all the hints and messages) and locales (specific data types format) Folder .Application Code . . The absolute path where the application documents are stored. Description . Error Settings Define ScriptCase applications error settings.168.The base directory where the application images are stored.Used to describe application goals.Display error message line with the error title.Application error position : right. Display error title in field . application. Timeout .Display line with title in error field.Error title message in application.Associate a Help Manual to your application. Images Directory . See below the attributes description: <img src="http://192.Specific images used by this application. Maximum file size .Display script line and info where the error occurred.Message box displayed title Use Enter to tab -The 'Enter' key have the same function of 'Tab' key...254.png" "> Image 3: Error Settings Interface Attributes: Error Position . This option deploys the images called in event with the application. up and down. HelpCase Link .Show a message after timeout limit. left. Edit Project .Folder where the application will be stored in the workspace. Upload new image. Error Title .png' width='30' height='30' />" . Zero is the standard value of the PHP Timeout Message. Example: echo "<img src='image_button.Application Code assigned during application creation.Set the upload maximum file size for image or document field.Execution timeout in seconds.Allow other users of the group to edit the application. Message title. Display error title in application . Script Error . Remove the image in Localization . ApplicationImages . Documents Path . Choose an image uploaded to ScriptCase before.248/tools/nm/sc_helpv7/gerado/en_us/pdfhelp_en_us/img/0634_confi_erro. Display Ajax events SQL and PHP output in a window.SQLError .Display SQL command that originated the error. .Run application in debug mode displaying SQL commands Ajax Error output . DebugMode . Attributes: Exit URL .Variable name. Redirecting Variable .Navigation Define the navigation attributes of an application. . Figure 1: Navigation interface. Redirecting URL .URL to which the user will be redirected in case a global variable is not available inside the application for any reason is not avaliable. Close Window . close the browser window.Specify the URL to which the user will be redirected upon exiting the aplication. which is used to store the URL of the current application. this global is most commonly used to filter the form in the SQL menu.When exiting the application. Defines variables behavior. they are: Scope . . in Lookups. Select the way it is passed to the Control application. the variables "v_customerid" appears in the variables configuration. Image 2: Variables Settings Interface. Get . Value . this content is subdivided in three blocks. etc. Get) Image 1: Global Variables Interface. or entering a variable in Application General Data field to replace the field name. Shows all global variables used in the application. Global variables are defined in square brackets ([variable]). being visible to the browser.Defines that the variable must be passed by the HTML command line. customername from customers where customerid ='[v_customerid]' In this case.Defines how the variable is received by the application.Global Variables GLOBAL VARIABLE This menu shows the global variables being used within the application. that means.In this option the variable must be created as a session variable in the PHP by other application before the search call which is being defined.Variable name in the application. Attribute . Example: Select customerid. The application may contain global variables in the Where Clause. These variables should be passed to the application that is being implemented through one of the methods (Session. created by special fields. the global variable is a external parameter required to application execution. Variable passing methods : Session . if has been defined that a variable is received by a Post Method and it has been passed by get method the content won't be accepted. Post. Defines if the variable is an input or an output. Type (Input/Output) .Post . Description.Do not validate (checking) the variable at execution time.Determines where the variable was defined.Defines that the variable must be passed through the post method of the form. Settings . . a form requesting the input variables used by the application is displayed. At execution time in the development environment. Field Link Type . The user can edit an existing link or create a new one using the "New LInk" option.Links created.Application Linking Type .Used to connect the form to another application by clicking on the button previously created (link type Button ). This type of link call the other application during onsubmit event of calling application. In the open application the user can start a search and return a value to a text box. Form. Link Type . Control.Used to connect the control via a to any other type of application. Button .Capture Link Type . There are 4 links types available: Application .Buttons .It is used to link the control to another application type. Figura Link between applications interface . Menu and Tab.Links Links Links the control application that we are defining with other applications of the following types: Grid.Creates an icon next to the field inside the control application. Capture . when selected it opens another window displaying a grid application. Field . To make this connection we should create a special field type Label and associate the same connection. at left side. Empty .Inform the field to be use its value.Application Link Type .inform a fixed value. there are three options: Field . Link to an Application: Figure5: Parameters Definition with global Variable Interface “ Link Properties” define the link attributes . When an event occurs then the application is redirected to the called application. Fixed .No value is passed to the field. display the global variablename or field name which we are linking and that needs to receive parameters. Select the option to inform the value. The “Applications List ” displayall applications. This link type is associated to submit events.Application Used to link the Form to any other applications type. The user can choose the application that will be linked and click in Next >> Figure4: Link between applications Interface “Parameter definition”.Links . Form Properties .Select the target where application will open. Figure10: Link between applications Interface .Allow to select the buttons that will be shown in the toolbar. Grid Property .Link to Grid Application: Link to Form Application: Figure8: Link to Grid Application Properties Figure9: Link to Form Application Properties Attributes: Link Propreties .Define the grid settings "Linking" display the link created with action buttons. there are two options. the user must seelect the application to be linked and click in Next >> Figure 32: Interface of linking between applications. Using the opened application to search for information.Buttons A button is created in the toolbar inside the control form. will have to be selected the option to inform the value. edit or delete a record. add.Links . when clicked it opens the window displaying a grid or form application.Button Link Type . Figure 30: Capture Link in Control Application. “List of Applications”displays all applications. and they are: . it is displayed the global variablename or field name which we are linking and that need to receive parameters for running and at the right side. Figure 31: Link Type Interface Below. In “ Parameter definition”. at left side. Select the link button to enable. Form Properties .Fixed . in the text field.Allows to select the buttons displayed in the toolbar.Choosing this option will not be passed any value to the field. Link to Form Application: Figura 35: Parameters Definition Interface In “ Linking Properties” enter the link relative attributes. .In this case. you must inform a fixed value. Exit URL for the Target Application Hint of The link . Figure 37: Link Properties to Form and Control Application. Attributes: Link Operation Mode. Link to Grid Application: Link to Form Application: Figure 36: Link Properties to Grid Application.Allows choose the target where application will open.Enter a text to display when the mouse is over the button. Grid Property . Link to Grid Application: Figure 33: Parameters Definition Interface with global Variable.Allows configure the grid settings. Empty . Figure 38: Link Interface .Below "Linking" displays the link created with button to edit the actions. when it is selected the linking type “Capture”.Links . The screen below “Linking Type” shows that.Capture LinkType . “List of Applications”displays all applications.Capture A button is created in the toolbar inside the control form. the user must select the application to be linked and click in Next >> Figure13: Interface of Linking between applications . when clicked it opens the window displaying a grid or form application. to be selected the field that will be used for the Link. Below. Figure12: Interface of Definition of the Parameters. it appears a combobox with the fields of the origin application. Figure 30: Capture Link in Control Application. In this application that will be opened we can do searches and return a value for the text field. . you must inform a fixed Value. there are two options. will have to be selected the option to inform the value. Below. Figure17 : Example of capture link using modal target.Displays the called application with dark background.Choosing this option will not be passed any value to the global variable. Figure16 : Link Properties Interface Modal . at left side.In “ Parameter definition”. Fixed . and they are: Figure15: Parameters Definition Interface with parameters. "Linking" displays the link created with button to edit the actions. In “ Linking Properties” enter the link relative attributes.In this case. Empty . it is displayed the the application fields which we are linking and that need to receive parameters for running and at the right side. in the text field. .Figure18: Linking Interface Figure19: Linking Interface Recover the field value .Selected a field of the grid application called linking object and it returns a value to a field of the control form. Field A button is created in the toolbar inside the control form. Using the opened application to search for information.Links . edit or delete a record. . add. Click here to see a tutorial. More details. This link mode only enables when the control application have a label type field created. Figure 30: Capture Link in Control Application. Select the Label field to enable. Figure 21: Option to create a label field.Field Link Type . when clicked it opens the window displaying a grid or form application. In this case. there are two options. it is displayed the global variablename or field name which we are linking and that need to receive parameters for running and at the right side.No value is passed to the field. Link to Grid Application: Link to Form Application: . Link to an Application: Figura 26: Parameters Definition Interface In “ Linking Properties” enter the link relative attributes. Fixed . and they are: Field . “List of Applications”displays all applications. in the text field inform a fixed value.Enter the field used to get the value. will have to be selected the option to inform the value. the user must select the application to be linked and click in Next >> Figure23: Link between applications Interface In “ Parameter definition”.Figure 22: Link Type Interface Below. at left side. Empty . Allows to configure the grid settings Below. Figure 28: Link Properties to Form and Control Application.Allows to select the target where application will open. Figure18: Linking Interface .Allows to select the buttons shown in the toolbar. Grid Property . "Linking" displays the link created with button to edit the actions. Attributes: Link Propreties .Figure 27: Link Properties to Grid Application. Form Properties . and by using these concepts you can reap huge rewards in terms of better organization and improved development.Programming Overview ScriptCase has incorprated the concept of Object Oriented programming. resources. . It is possible to create your own business rules in applications. using attributes. methods and libraries. .Enter the attribute's name and click on the include button to add it. To remove an attribute. click on the delete button after selecting the atribute. To modify it click on the attribute's name (located to the left of the buttons) and click the Update button to save your changes. Click the clean button to clean the attributes list.Attributes Attributes are variables containing a global variable passed from one application to another. Image 1: Attribute Settings interface. Attributes: Attributes . An attribute can be referenced in all of the methods and events of an application. Creating a new method Figure 2: Create a new Method. Figure 1: Method menu interface.Methods Methods are functions or procedures declared by the developer. to support the implementation of business rules for an application. Using methods in applications it is possible to reuse code and thus improve development productivity. Figure 3: Adding a Method. To include a parameter variable in a method. click the 'Var' button: . Define the name for the new method then click the Create button. 2 Methods may involve parameters being passed. See the Figure below. 1. It is possible to create PHP and JAVASCRIPT methods. Name: Input a variable name. click the button: .Figure 4: Parameter Variable icon. Add the number of variables: Figure 5: Define Parameters interface Defining a variable: Figure 6: Add Parameters interface. * References allow you to create a second name for a variable so you can use it to read or modify the original data stored in that variable. Type: Select the variable type as: For value or For reference. * 10270 Value Default: The default value used to initialize the parameter variable when called. To Edit a parameter variable in a method. See how simple it is to call the method in the example below: Using a method : Figure 9: Event method interface Thus we get the following result when running the application. See the example below: Figure 8: Events. Edit the variable selected in the Parameters field. it needs to be called within an event. Select all parameter variables in the Parameters field. . Delete the variable selected in the Parameters field.Figure 7: Define Method Parameters interface. In this example we are using the onLoad event to call our method when the record is loaded. Unmark all parameter variables selected in the Parameters field. 3 In order to run a method. . g. . Project Libraries or User Libraries) and enable the applicable php library file(s). To manage libraries.Libraries To use a library you need to select the corresponding library type (e. All methods in the library are visible in all application events and methods. access them via the main menu: Configuration ==> Libraries. Public Libraries. . A good example of its use is called the batch process.Blank Applications Overview This type of application allows the developer to write PHP / HTML code and display a process result.php program manually outside the ScriptCase is the possibility of using ScriptCase macros well as native integration with control access to their systems. the advantage of using this application instead of creating a . Blank Onexecute In this menu is entered the PHP code that will run by the application. ScriptCase macros and to use code libraries. Image1: OnExecute. Attributes: OnExecute .Allows to entry PHP commands. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". Any event can use pre-defined functions available in Scriptcase. . See more about Scriptcase Macros. Sql In blank applications you can use one connection to access the database by default but as in other application types (forms. Image1: SQL Settings. inquiries and control ) you can run SQL commands using other connections than the native application connection.Allows you to choose one of your project databases connections. Attributes: Connection . . read more. Image1: Security Options. .Set a password for this particular application. Use security .Disable access to this application and only allow access to authorized users. Use Password . see below the two options highlighted.Security The blank applications can have their access password-protected or use your project security settings. It will allow the user to change the log's configuration for the application.Log New interface included in the V6.Scheme of log to be used for the application.Use all fields in the log. Events .Which event the log will save the application changes. . Image 1: Log Interface. Options: Scheme . All Fields . eliminating the use of macro sc_image. Application Images . Editing by Project . Error Settings Image2: Error Settings Interface .Application generated language . Image1: Settings Interface Atributos: Application Code . all the hints and messages will be placed in the chosen language.Application code given when creating the application..Applications Settings In this folder are common attributes to applications created by ScriptCase.To use images within the application in implementations of Business Rules. Description . this code can be renamed via the main menu. bellow is described these attributes.This field can be used to enter a brief application description. Folder .Allow other project users to edit the application.Folder where the application will be stored in the workgroup. Locales . displaying the SQL commands as they are executed.Run the application in debug mode. .Atributos: Debug Mode . Variable name in the application. The application may contain global variables in the Where Clause. Attribute .Defines that the variable must be passed through the post method of the form.In this option the variable must be created as a session variable in the PHP by other application before the search call which is being defined.Defines variables behavior. Get . Get) Image 1: Global Variables Interface. the variables "v_customerid" appears in the variables configuration. that means. Post . Post. . Variable passing methods : Session . Shows all global variables used in the application. created by special fields. or entering a variable in Application General Data field to replace the field name. Value . Global variables are defined in square brackets ([variable]). they are: Scope .Global Variables GLOBAL VARIABLE This menu shows the global variables being used within the application. in Lookups.Defines that the variable must be passed by the HTML command line. customername from customers where customerid ='[v_customerid]' In this case. Example: Select customerid. being visible to the browser. the global variable is a external parameter required to application execution. if has been defined that a variable is received by a Post Method and it has been passed by get method the content won't be accepted. Select the way it is passed to the Control application. etc. this content is subdivided in three blocks.Defines how the variable is received by the application. Image 2: Variables Settings Interface. These variables should be passed to the application that is being implemented through one of the methods (Session. Defines if the variable is an input or an output. At execution time in the development environment.Do not validate (checking) the variable at execution time. Description.Determines where the variable was defined. Type (Input/Output) . a form requesting the input variables used by the application is displayed. .Settings . using attributes. resources. and by using these concepts you can reap huge rewards in terms of better organization and improved development. It is possible to create your own business rules in applications. .Programming Overview ScriptCase has incorprated the concept of Object Oriented programming. methods and libraries. To modify it click on the attribute's name (located to the left of the buttons) and click the Update button to save your changes. To remove an attribute. click on the delete button after selecting the atribute. Attributes: Attributes . An attribute can be referenced in all of the methods and events of an application. Image 1: Attribute Settings interface. .Attributes Attributes are variables containing a global variable passed from one application to another.Enter the attribute's name and click on the include button to add it. Click the clean button to clean the attributes list. to support the implementation of business rules for an application. Creating a new method Figure 2: Create a new Method.Methods Methods are functions or procedures declared by the developer. 1. Define the name for the new method then click the Create button. Figure 1: Method menu interface. Figure 3: Adding a Method. click the 'Var' button: . To include a parameter variable in a method. It is possible to create PHP and JAVASCRIPT methods. Using methods in applications it is possible to reuse code and thus improve development productivity. 2 Methods may involve parameters being passed. See the Figure below. Name: Input a variable name. click the button: .Figure 4: Parameter Variable icon. * 10270 Value Default: The default value used to initialize the parameter variable when called. * References allow you to create a second name for a variable so you can use it to read or modify the original data stored in that variable. Type: Select the variable type as: For value or For reference. Add the number of variables: Figure 5: Define Parameters interface Defining a variable: Figure 6: Add Parameters interface. To Edit a parameter variable in a method. it needs to be called within an event.Figure 7: Define Method Parameters interface. See how simple it is to call the method in the example below: Using a method : Figure 9: Event method interface Thus we get the following result when running the application. See the example below: Figure 8: Events. Select all parameter variables in the Parameters field. 3 In order to run a method. Unmark all parameter variables selected in the Parameters field. . Delete the variable selected in the Parameters field. Edit the variable selected in the Parameters field. In this example we are using the onLoad event to call our method when the record is loaded. . Libraries To use a library you need to select the corresponding library type (e. All methods in the library are visible in all application events and methods. To manage libraries. access them via the main menu: Configuration ==> Libraries.g. Public Libraries. . Project Libraries or User Libraries) and enable the applicable php library file(s). . The menus structure can be modified at run time depending on the user profile. Image1:Horizontal menu. Image2: Vertical Menu Interface.Menu Applications Overview Menu application Menu applications are used to offer a single access point to the project applications. it is also possible to create external links on the menu items. Orientation of the menu in the screen : horizontal line or vertical. Horizontal Vertical .Menu Settings Using the menu settings interface the user can define the application attributes as following: Image1: Menu Settings Interface. Attributes: Orientation . Open items with OnClick . . Select Language . Horizontal Alignment Of the Menu . center or bottom.Menu start application: an application. when using security schemes or access control.Themes and language items horizontal alignment in the menu. Default Application . Vertical Alignment of the items . Menu Height . blank or an URL.Opens menu items only with the mouse onclick.Align menu items vertically as: top.Heightin pixels or percentage of the size of the iframe where the applications are opened.Select the option to hide an item. Iframe Width . Aligment of Theme and Language .Note: If the vertical orientation is used.Enables the scroll bar.Show the items of the menu even if the applications do not exist or they weren't generated. Menu Width . Preserves icons space . instead of disabling it.Select the theme from the menu bar.Define the application horizontal alignment in the page as: left or rigth.Selects the language from the menu bar.Width in pixels or percentage of the menu. if the security option is enabled in the applications.Preserves icons space in the menu even if the item has no icon. Iframe Height .Height in pixels or percentage of the menu. Hide the menu toolbar . Horizontal alignment of the items .Align menu items horizontally as: left or rigth. Always show items .Width in pixels or percentage of the size of the iframe where the applications are opened. Select Theme . Hide menu items .Remove the toolbar items instead of disabling them. it is necessary to adjust the menu width. Scrollbar . Creating a Menu .Enter the image name to display as icon to the side the application label in the menu. (Optional) Hint .Enter a descriptive text to assist the application identification by the user. (Optional). Remove .Application name. Select the item or sub-item. removing a level from it. Target . Import . Image1: Menu Settings Interface Label .Move an item or sub-item to the left.Add a sub-item to the menu. Insert item .Move up a menu item or sub-item.Import applications from the project creating links to them.Removes an item from the menu. Move Down .Add a menu item. Move Left . .Defines how to display the applications in the menu: in the same window or another window. adding a level to it.Application title in the menu.Menu Items Use this interface to structure the menu. and click in the button to remove. indicating which the applications are called.Move Down an item or sub-item. Click in to select the image desired. Move Up . Move Right .. Insert Sub-Item . Icon .Move an item or sub-item to the right. Link .Resources & process (Icons on the top of the menu list). The user can click in to select the application. Linking applications is easy and fast. Image2: Import Application Interface. . Select an application from a list to add to the menu after we click on the icon on the side of the link text box. To structure the menu use the structure buttons. Move Up . Click in . a button or an incon. Image1: Toolbar Interface Creating items (Icons on the top of the menu list). Type .Toolbar Use this interface to build a quick bar in the menu application linking applications through buttons. Move Right .Enter the image name to display as icon to the side the application label in the menu. Remove . Move Left . Label .Removes an item from the menu. adding a level to it. Moving items (Arrows). Icon .Application title in the menu. Insert Separator .Move Down a toolbar item or sub-item.Add a new item on the toolbar of the menu.Move up a toolbar item or sub-item. Items settings.Add a separator into the toolbar.Move a toolbar item or sub-item to the left. Move Down .Move a toolbar item or sub-item to the right. The user can click in to select the application. Select the item or sub-item.Application name. Link . icons and text links. Insert item . removing a level from it. and click in the button to remove.It can be a link. (Optional) Hint . Display .This option allows to choose if the item will display only texts. .Defines how to display the applications: on the same window or on another one. only an image or both.to select the image desired. (Optional).It defines if the image will be displayed on the right or on the left side.Enter a descriptive text to assist the application identification by the user. Target . Image Position . 'on'). } else{ sc_error_message("Unauthorized user!").'on'). sc_apl_status('form_categories'. insert the following code: // two users: john and mary with permission to access different applications if({userid} == 'john') { sc_apl_status('grid_categories'. Disabled applications display the message "Unauthorized user" when accessed.'on'). sc_apl_status('form_categories'. insert the following macro call: sc_apl_status('grid_categories'. sc_apl_status('grid_products'. sc_apl_status('form_products'. sc_apl_status('form_products'. See the examples below.'off'). In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user). } . } elseif({userid} == 'mary') { sc_apl_status('grid_categories'. sc_apl_status('grid_products'. In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user).'on').Security Attribute: Use Security: With this option selected.'on'). Access to applications may be granted through a control application to authenticate users.'on'). Example 1: Activating an application called grid_categories. Example 2: Creating a rule to authenticate by user type in a login form containing a field called userid. the application is only accessible when enabled using the sc_apl_status macro.'off').'on'). In the login application onValidate event.Example 3: Authenticating applications using a database table. If the password is not entered correctly. Disable the options Enable use of security and Enable Use of Password in the Configuration menu | My ScriptCase. . thereby avoiding repeated password requests (or access denied) for each application execution. an "Unauthorized user" message is displayed. At run time a text box is displayed requiring the access password. (See image below). if he does not have access to the application. In the development environment it is possible to suppress the above steps purely for testing purposes. Use Password: An application password setting is required. enter the following code: URL output safety (denied access URL redirection): It redirects the user to this URL. g.Occurs only one time when the application is initialized.Occurs a when a menu loads. Events allow the developer to define custom actions at a specific execution time (e. . These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". upon submitting a form. Figure 1:Menu´s Event Interface.. OnApplicationInit . Execute . .. After a record is inserted.Events Events Scriptcase uses the concept of events to enable to developer to customize application code. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. when it is loaded. Onload . Read more about Scriptcase Macros.) and for a specific type of application.Occurs at the moment where an item in the menu is executed or an application is chosen. amongst other options. organizing fields in blocks. .Layout Overview Configure display formats by determining attributes such as display schemes. and defining header formats. Used to select an existing Theme (colors. (CSS) Attributes: Header Template .Used to select the Header format.Used to select the Footer format. etc) for the application. fonts. . Footer Template .Layout Settings Figure 1: Layout Settings interface Is used to define the Application Theme. Theme . Header Figure 1: Header Interface. Each condition is displayed on a new line.The variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combobox. Title: Displays the value entered in “Select Title” in the header . Search Criteria .This flag determines whether or not the Header is displayed Application Title . (available only in Grid applications) FOOTER . Enter the format in the text field alongside it. click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples. the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the header line. Enter text and/or “Global Variables”. (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) . For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”. Header Variables . A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the application's data source (“Select” query) are displayed beside the header variable when the “Field” type is selected. and another one for Update mode). There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. Date: Displays the system date in the header line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. This interface format can change depending on the selected option in "Layout >> Settings >> Header Template". Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. you may need to associate content with it. To locate existing images and select one. See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox.Defines the Header title to be displayed in the application. Display Header . The selected field value is then displayed in the header line.The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header. (A Form Applications has 2 titles: one for Insert mode. To see all the available date formats. click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon .The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the header. Value: When the “Value” type is selected. Depending on the type. Title: Display in the Footer the value entered in “Select Title”. to see all the available date formats.The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the footer. Enter the format in the text field alongside it. See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. Display Footer . A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the “Select” (application's data source) are displayed beside the Footer variable when the “Field” type is selected. There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. Each condition is displayed on a new line. Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. Enter text and/or “Global Variables”. (available only in Grid applications) . For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”. This format of this interface may change depending on the option selected in "Layout >> Settings >> Footer Template". (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) . you may need to associate content with it. To locate existing images and select one. Depending on the type. Date: Displays the system date in the footer line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. Footer Variables .Figure 2: Footer Interface. click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon . The selected field value is displayed in the footer line.The variable fields can be populated with any of the types listed in the Combobox.The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header.This flag determines whether or not the footer will be displayed. Value: When the “Value” type is selected. Search Criteria . the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the footer line. click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples. It will allow the user to change the log's configuration for the application. Image 1: Log Interface.Scheme of log to be used for the application. Events .Which event the log will save the application changes.Log New interface included in the V6. All Fields . .Use all fields in the log. Options: Scheme . . Connection . Applications Icons .Shares location with other applications based on the session values. An application can be renamed using the main menu.Icons that will be used by the application. all hints and messages are displayed in selected language.Language of the generated application.Descriptive application name and information. HelpCase Link .Application Settings Below some menu application settings description: Figure1: Settings Interface. Folder .Folder where the application will be stored in the work group. Share location variable . Description .Shares location with other applications based on the session values. Share location variable .Associate a HelpCase manual to your application. Charset .Selects the charset that will be used on the application. Language .Application code determined at the application creation to identify it .Defines the connection used by the ScriptCase to access database tables. Attributes: Application Code . It does not change any of the application orginal settings except for the format. .Convert Menu CONVERT MENU It is used to convert an Menu application to a Tree Menu format. resources. using attributes.Programming Overview ScriptCase has incorprated the concept of Object Oriented programming. . It is possible to create your own business rules in applications. and by using these concepts you can reap huge rewards in terms of better organization and improved development. methods and libraries. . Attributes: Attributes .Attributes Attributes are variables containing a global variable passed from one application to another. To modify it click on the attribute's name (located to the left of the buttons) and click the Update button to save your changes. Click the clean button to clean the attributes list. To remove an attribute. Image 1: Attribute Settings interface. click on the delete button after selecting the atribute. An attribute can be referenced in all of the methods and events of an application.Enter the attribute's name and click on the include button to add it. To include a parameter variable in a method. Figure 1: Method menu interface. See the Figure below. Figure 3: Adding a Method. It is possible to create PHP and JAVASCRIPT methods. click the 'Var' button: . 2 Methods may involve parameters being passed.Methods Methods are functions or procedures declared by the developer. Define the name for the new method then click the Create button. to support the implementation of business rules for an application. Using methods in applications it is possible to reuse code and thus improve development productivity. 1. Creating a new method Figure 2: Create a new Method. click the button: . * References allow you to create a second name for a variable so you can use it to read or modify the original data stored in that variable. Type: Select the variable type as: For value or For reference. * 10270 Value Default: The default value used to initialize the parameter variable when called. Name: Input a variable name. Add the number of variables: Figure 5: Define Parameters interface Defining a variable: Figure 6: Add Parameters interface. To Edit a parameter variable in a method.Figure 4: Parameter Variable icon. it needs to be called within an event. Unmark all parameter variables selected in the Parameters field. Edit the variable selected in the Parameters field.Figure 7: Define Method Parameters interface. See the example below: Figure 8: Events. Select all parameter variables in the Parameters field. In this example we are using the onLoad event to call our method when the record is loaded. . See how simple it is to call the method in the example below: Using a method : Figure 9: Event method interface Thus we get the following result when running the application. 3 In order to run a method. Delete the variable selected in the Parameters field. . g. Project Libraries or User Libraries) and enable the applicable php library file(s). Public Libraries. access them via the main menu: Configuration ==> Libraries.Libraries To use a library you need to select the corresponding library type (e. To manage libraries. . All methods in the library are visible in all application events and methods. Image1: Tree menu application. it is also possible to create external links on the menu items. The menus structure can be modified at run time for example depending on the user profile.Menu Tree Applications Overview Tree Menu application Tree Menu applications are used to offer a single access point to the project applications. . Opens menu items only with the mouse onclick.Height in pixels or percentage of the size of the iframe where the applications will be opened. MenuHeight .Enables the scroll bar. Scrollbar . Iframe Width .Width in pixels or percentage of the menu. Horizontal alignment of items . when using security schemes or access control.Preserves icons space in the menu even if the item has no icon. Select Language . Iframe Height .Define the application horizontal alignment in the page as: left or rigth. Open items with OnClick .Height in pixels or percentage of the menu. Hide menu items . center or bottom. Attributes: Horizontal Alignment Of Menu .Width in pixels or percentage of the size of the iframe where the applications will be opened.Select the option to hide an item. instead of disabling it.Align menu items vertically as: top.Selects the language from the menu bar.Align menu items horizontally as: left or rigth. Vertical Alignmentof the items . .Menu Settings Using the menu settings interface the user can define the application attributes as follows: Image1: Menu SettingsInterface. MenuWidth. Preserves icons space . Menu start application: an application.Select Theme . .Select the theme from the menu bar. Theme and language alignment . Default Application .Themes and language items horizontal alignment in the menu. blank or an URL . Modify a menu item or sub-item.Select the applications that will be called. Using this option define the menu structure and the called applications.Resources & process.Menu Items Image1: Menu Settings Interface.Enter a descriptive text to assist the application identification by the user.Application title in the menu. Select the item or sub-item. Link .Clean the picture of attributes.Application name.Add a sub-item to the menu.. (Optional).Removes an item from the menu.Excludes all items and sub-items from the menu. Remove . Insert item . Clean Menu . To structure the menu use the structure buttons. ( as an item) Insert Sub-Item . Enter the following attributes: Label . Click in to select the image desired. .Enter the image name to display as icon to the side the application label in the menu. Icon .Defines how to display the applications in the menu: in the same window or another window.Add an application to the menu. Importing applications is easy and fast. Clean item . . Creating a Menu . The user can click in to select the application. (Optional) Hint . and click in the button to remove. Target . Selects applications from a list to add to the menu. Update . Import Applications . Image2: Import Application Interface. the link receives the name from the application as below: . After importing the applications. sc_apl_status('form_products'. In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user).'on').Security Attribute: Use Security: With this option selected.'off'). sc_apl_status('grid_products'. } .'on'). Access to applications may be granted through a control application to authenticate users. sc_apl_status('form_categories'.'on').'on'). See the examples below.'off'). } elseif({userid} == 'mary') { sc_apl_status('grid_categories'. Disabled applications display the message "Unauthorized user" when accessed. In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user). sc_apl_status('form_categories'.'on'). Example 2: Creating a rule to authenticate by user type in a login form containing a field called userid. the application is only accessible when enabled using the sc_apl_status macro. insert the following macro call: sc_apl_status('grid_categories'. sc_apl_status('grid_products'.'on'). sc_apl_status('form_products'.'on'). insert the following code: // two users: john and mary with permission to access different applications if({userid} == 'john') { sc_apl_status('grid_categories'. } else{ sc_error_message("Unauthorized user!"). Example 1: Activating an application called grid_categories. Disable the options Enable use of security and Enable Use of Password in the Configuration menu | My ScriptCase. enter the following code: URL output safety (denied access URL redirection): It redirects the user to this URL. Use Password: An application password setting is required. if he does not have access to the application. At run time a text box is displayed requiring the access password.Example 3: Authenticating applications using a database table. In the development environment it is possible to suppress the above steps purely for testing purposes. thereby avoiding repeated password requests (or access denied) for each application execution. (See image below). If the password is not entered correctly. In the login application onValidate event. an "Unauthorized user" message is displayed. . These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros".g. upon submitting a form. .. when it is loaded. Onload . OnApplicationInit . Figure 1: Event button access of Menu application.Events Events Scriptcase uses the concept of events to enable to developer to customize application code. Events allow the developer to define custom actions at a specific execution time (e. Execute . After a record is inserted. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase.. Read more about Scriptcase Macros.Occurs only one time when the application is initialized.Occurs a when a menu loads. .Occurs at the moment where an item in the menu is executed or an application is chosen.) and for a specific type of application. Layout Overview Configure display formats by determining attributes such as display schemes. amongst other options. and defining header formats. organizing fields in blocks. . Layout Settings Figure 1: Layout Settings interface Is used to define the Application Theme.Used to select an existing Theme (colors.Used to select the Header format.Used to select the Footer format. . etc) for the application. Theme . (CSS) Attributes: Header Template . fonts. Footer Template . Depending on the type.Defines the Header title to be displayed in the application. click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples.Header Figure 1: Header Interface.The variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combobox. click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon . This interface format can change depending on the selected option in "Layout >> Settings >> Header Template". you may need to associate content with it.The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header.The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the header. Search Criteria . There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. The selected field value is then displayed in the header line. See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the header line. Each condition is displayed on a new line. To see all the available date formats. Enter text and/or “Global Variables”. Display Header . Title: Displays the value entered in “Select Title” in the header . (A Form Applications has 2 titles: one for Insert mode. For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”. Header Variables . and another one for Update mode). Enter the format in the text field alongside it. Value: When the “Value” type is selected. (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) . Date: Displays the system date in the header line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. To locate existing images and select one.This flag determines whether or not the Header is displayed Application Title . Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the application's data source (“Select” query) are displayed beside the header variable when the “Field” type is selected. (available only in Grid applications) FOOTER . the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the footer line. Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. Date: Displays the system date in the footer line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples.The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the footer. click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon . Display Footer . (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) . to see all the available date formats. Title: Display in the Footer the value entered in “Select Title”. Footer Variables .Figure 2: Footer Interface. The selected field value is displayed in the footer line.The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header. Value: When the “Value” type is selected. A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the “Select” (application's data source) are displayed beside the Footer variable when the “Field” type is selected.The variable fields can be populated with any of the types listed in the Combobox. Enter text and/or “Global Variables”. you may need to associate content with it. To locate existing images and select one. There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”. Each condition is displayed on a new line. This format of this interface may change depending on the option selected in "Layout >> Settings >> Footer Template". Enter the format in the text field alongside it. (available only in Grid applications) .This flag determines whether or not the footer will be displayed. Search Criteria . Depending on the type. All Fields .Scheme of log to be used for the application. . Events . It will allow the user to change the log's configuration for the application.Use all fields in the log. Options: Scheme .Log New interface included in the V6. Image 1: Log Interface.Which event the log will save the application changes. HelpCase Link .Descriptive application name and information. Applications Icons . Localization .Defines the connection used by ScriptCase to access database tables. Share theme variable .Shares themes with other applications based on the session values.Icons that will be used by the application.Application code determined at the application creation to identify it . Attributes: Application Code .Language of the generated application. Folder . Share location variable .Associate a HelpCase manual to your application.Folder where the application will be stored in the work group.Shares location with other applications based on the session values. all hints and messages are displayed in selected language. Edit Project . Connection . Description .Application Settings Below some menu application settings description: Figure1: Settings Interface. . An application can be renamed using the main menu.Allow users to edit the application. Convert Menu CONVERT MENU It is used to convert a Tree Menu application to a Menu application format. It does not change any of the application orginal settings except for the format. . numbers. this application type works necessarily linked to a form application Some search form features: Feature Description Fields formatting The search form automatically formats several fields types such as date. etc. Image1: Search form application.Search Applications Overview Search applications Used to search data to form applications. Search condition Define the search criteria individually for each search field. It is created based on a SELECT statement. time. Save search Save the data entered on the search form for reusability. etc. time. . Fields validation The search form automatically validates several fields types such as date. numbers. This option is associate “To use Iframe”.Select “Yes”.Allows to use the commands SQL “AND” or "OR" in the search criteria.Define the search form HTML width value. Preserver fields and Orders . Iframe Height .Define the position to align the search form horizontally. Criteria. Margins . Table Width .Considers Case Sensitive.When enbaled the values of the last filter are saved and displayed when the user return the search screen.Height in pixels of the serach form results iframe. This option is associate “To use Iframe”. Horizontal Alignment. (including empty (blank) search fields) Search Criteria . one above of the other.Display search condition so that the user can choose an option. etc). Case Sensitive . . Keep Values . Attributes: Empty Search .Define the search form margins . in two FRAMES. Use Iframe .Search Settings Attributes to define the search form (filter) settings (Alignment. Initial State .When enbaled it displays initially the filter with grid inside of the located iframe below the filter.When enbaled it displays the search form and results in the same window . Figure1: Search Settings Interface.Determine which values to keep to each search form. to display all the records. Width. Display Condition . Figure 1: Select Fields. . The list on the right displays which fields will be displayed in the application (select a field and click on the right arrow to include it in the form).Select Fields Fields Positioning Defines which fields are displayed in the application. Note: The list on the left displays all fields retrieved from the SQL select query for the application. Display message . The required fields are validated and a message is displayed if the field is empty. .Required Fields Define the required fields in the application. A marker (*) is displayed beside the field in the generated application. Image 1: Required Fields Interface. Markers Positioning .Displays or not a message upon validation.Where the marker will be displayed in relation to the field. Buttons: Turn On/Off ... Allows to define filter options (SQL) for each field. Contains. None .Enable or Disable the field or selected option.Unmark all fields or options. The left list displays the fields and the right list has the filter options. To select options click on one option (Equal to. .) and click on "Turn On / Off" button.Search Criteria Image1: Search Criteria Interface. . Beginning with.Mark all fields or options. All . Options . A button can even be part of both parts simultaneously. Figure1: Toolbar Interface. Use the arrows on the right side of the button selection box to order the toolbar buttons.Select the buttons that are displayed in the search toolbar. It is possible to select the buttons for each part independently. Attributes: Toolbar (top / bottom) .Toolbar The application toolbar is divided in two parts:superior and inferior. Buttons Settings Attributes: Access Keys .Define the access keys shortcuts. Attributes: Buttons Position(Top/Bottom) .Figure3: Options Interface.Positioning of the buttons on the Top and Bottom toolbars. . it creates the option Save filter in the Search application. Figure2: Save Criteria Interface. With this feature is possible to save searches by user login. so it is possible to save a search to be used afterwards. . Rules can be added. Figure1: Save Criteria Interface.Save Criteria This resource allows to organize search profiles. Use all fields in the log.Which event the log will save the application changes. Image 1: Log Interface. Options: Scheme . .Scheme of log to be used for the application.Log New interface included in the V6. It will allow the user to change the log's configuration for the application. Events . All Fields . g:: procedure).Sql This module is used to edit the Search application SQL. SQL Preparation . Image1: SQL Settings Interface. before the execution of SQL Select Statement (if necessary).Variables for substitution of the field names of the application.Displays connection name used for that application.Allows to execute a SQL command (e.Variable name used for replacing the table name. Image2:Variable for Table Interface. Also inform the part of the table name that will be changed by the contents of the variable. For each dynamically determined field. enter the name of the variable and the field that will be substituted. Connection . Attributes: SQL Select Statement . .Shows the SQL Select statement that is being used. Fields Variable . Variable for Table . the application is only accessible when enabled using the sc_apl_status macro.'off'). insert the following code: // two users: john and mary with permission to access different applications if({userid} == 'john') { sc_apl_status('grid_categories'.Security Attribute: Use Security: With this option selected.'on'). See the examples below.'off'). sc_apl_status('form_categories'. Disabled applications display the message "Unauthorized user" when accessed.'on'). Example 1: Activating an application called grid_categories. } elseif({userid} == 'mary') { sc_apl_status('grid_categories'. sc_apl_status('grid_products'. Example 2: Creating a rule to authenticate by user type in a login form containing a field called userid. In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user). } else{ sc_error_message("Unauthorized user!").'on'). Access to applications may be granted through a control application to authenticate users. sc_apl_status('form_categories'. sc_apl_status('form_products'. } .'on'). sc_apl_status('grid_products'. sc_apl_status('form_products'.'on').'on').'on'). insert the following macro call: sc_apl_status('grid_categories'. In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user). In the development environment it is possible to suppress the above steps purely for testing purposes. Use Password: An application password setting is required. enter the following code: URL output safety (denied access URL redirection): It redirects the user to this URL. (See image below). Disable the options Enable use of security and Enable Use of Password in the Configuration menu | My ScriptCase. At run time a text box is displayed requiring the access password. if he does not have access to the application. If the password is not entered correctly. .Example 3: Authenticating applications using a database table. In the login application onValidate event. thereby avoiding repeated password requests (or access denied) for each application execution. an "Unauthorized user" message is displayed. Layout Overview Configure display formats by determining attributes such as display schemes. amongst other options. . organizing fields in blocks. and defining header formats. Organising Blocks and Changing position See below how to modify the page block display order.Blocks Conceptually a block is a “container” in which a Form Application. Control or Grid fields are located. To change the page block is displayed in. You can add as many blocks as you need and you can organize them to best suit your purpose. and to delete the block. bearing the same name as the application. The Figure bellow shows an ORGANIZATION column. This is how to remove a block from being displayed. Figure 1: Block settings interface. By default the applications created in ScriptCase only consist of one block. Click on the block and drag it to “Blocks not shown”. all you have to do is drag it to the desired page as indicated below. Click to select the block in order to modify its position. used to define the position of the next block (positioned to the side or below in the series of blocks). To the left of each block there are two icons: to edit the block properties. . Displays the label below the field.Number of columns to be displayed side by side within the block. Label (Display) .Attributes: Block (name) .The fields are displayed below each other while observing the number of columns. .The fields are displayed beside one another while observing the number of columns.Flag that controls whether the field label is displayed inside the block. "Beside" . Label (Position) .Flag that controls whether the block title is displayed.The label options are: "Above" .Displays the label above the field. "Below" . Title (Display) . Fields (Columns) .Block title header displayed.Position of fields within the block: “Below” . "Line" . "Beside" .Displays the label beside the field.The fields are displayed side by side (in line) without tabulation (aligned in columns). Fields (Position) . Defines the width of the block in pixels or as a percent. "Tabs" .Organization (Next) .Defines the height of the block in pixels or as a percent. Organization (Height).Indicates that the next block is displayed below the previous one. "Beside" . just click . Add New Block To add new blocks to an application.Organization of blocks on the page: "Below" . Organization (Width) .Indicates that the next block is displayed beside the previous one. .Indicates that the next block is displayed as a tab. Block title font color. Title Height . Figure 2: Edit Block interface. Attributes: Name . Title . Background color . Attributes: Name . Label .Figure 2: Add New Block interface.Whether to display a line containing the block title. Background image .Block title line background color.Block Title.Block title font applied.Block title font size applied. Title Font .Block title line height (in pixels). Edit Block Click to edit the block properties and click Save.Block name.Block label.Block title background image. . Font color . Font size .Block name. Display Title . Block height.Block width.Block title horizontal alignment (Left. Columns . Middle or Bottom). Block height . Column Width .Number of block field columns. Display Label .Block border width.Position of the next block in relation to the current one. Cellspacing . Label color .Display block field labels. Border color . Center or Right).Field label display color. Block width . Label Position . Vertical Alignment .Block field organization. Border width .Horizontal Alignment . . Field Organization .Field label position.Block title vertical alignment (Top.Block border color.Calculate the block columns. Next Block .Spacing between the block cells. (CSS) Attributes: Header Template . fonts. etc) for the application. . Footer Template . Theme .Layout Settings Figure 1: Layout Settings interface Is used to define the Application Theme.Used to select the Footer format.Used to select the Header format.Used to select an existing Theme (colors. The variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combobox. Enter text and/or “Global Variables”. For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”. (A Form Applications has 2 titles: one for Insert mode.This flag determines whether or not the Header is displayed Application Title . Search Criteria . click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon . To see all the available date formats. Value: When the “Value” type is selected. the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the header line. To locate existing images and select one. Enter the format in the text field alongside it. See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. and another one for Update mode).Defines the Header title to be displayed in the application. The selected field value is then displayed in the header line. Date: Displays the system date in the header line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. you may need to associate content with it. There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time.The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the header. (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) . Each condition is displayed on a new line.Header And Footer HEADER Figure 1: Header Interface. This interface format can change depending on the selected option in "Layout >> Settings >> Header Template". Depending on the type. click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples. (available only in Grid applications) FOOTER . Title: Displays the value entered in “Select Title” in the header .The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header. Header Variables . A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the application's data source (“Select” query) are displayed beside the header variable when the “Field” type is selected. Display Header . Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. This flag determines whether or not the footer will be displayed. Footer Variables . click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples.The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header. the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the footer line. For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”.The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the footer. There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. Enter text and/or “Global Variables”. Enter the format in the text field alongside it. Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. (available only in Grid applications) . Title: Display in the Footer the value entered in “Select Title”. Date: Displays the system date in the footer line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. To locate existing images and select one. you may need to associate content with it. Search Criteria . Display Footer . (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) . The selected field value is displayed in the footer line. Value: When the “Value” type is selected. Depending on the type. A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the “Select” (application's data source) are displayed beside the Footer variable when the “Field” type is selected. click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon .The variable fields can be populated with any of the types listed in the Combobox. to see all the available date formats. Each condition is displayed on a new line. This format of this interface may change depending on the option selected in "Layout >> Settings >> Footer Template".Figure 2: Footer Interface. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase.Events Events Scriptcase uses the concept of events to enable to developer to customize application code.Occurs when a validation is carried through.Occurs when the application is initiated. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". onValidate . when it is loaded..Occurs every time the application is loaded. . . Image 1: Search´s Event Interface. Read more about Scriptcase Macros.. After a record is inserted.) and for a specific type of application.Occurs when the application is loaded. onApplicationInit . onScriptInit .Occurs when the application is saved. onRefresh. Events allow the developer to define custom actions at a specific execution time (e. upon submitting a form. onSave .g. When selecting a data type. These types are: Text Integer Currency Decimal Date Time Date and Time Select Double Select CheckBox Radio Text Auto-Complete Number Auto-Complete . the edit page is refreshed to show specific seetings to each data type. To each field we can define a lot of attributes. Image1: Search Fields Interface.Fields Overview It shows just selected fields in the Search ("SEARCH->SELECT FIELDS”). Image1: Amount of fields Interface. 1º. it is necessary to define the settings of the new field (data type. name and label). where we determine the amount of fields that will be added. Note: The description of the field type is modified as the selection of the filed type. .After we determine the amount of fields that will be added. 2º.When click on a new button it is shown the image below. Image2: Interface of the Properties of the new field.New Field It allows to add a new field in the application. SQL Type .Define the field width. Show Condition .Field type in the database. the label is a field nickname in the application layer. AJAX PROCESSING . the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. to show or don't show the filter condition. Submit on OnChange .Text Image1: General Settings Interface. Width . numbers and characters. That is.Allows when activated. Search Label .Define the application field title. When the field is defined as a text it accepts letters. to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field.Converts the field letters.Maximum Field Size. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_name.Allows when activated. Field's Behavior Image1: Field's Behavior Interface. Attributes: Data type . if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name.Define the application field type. Attributes: Case Settings . Maximum Size . Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color . Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. Background color .Reloads other selection type fields (Select. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. . For example: a Select field "list of states". DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. CheckBox. and a second one list of cities.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size . Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Width .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Width .Sets the title height.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. text-bottom). Background color . text-bottom).Sets the title width. text-top.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. text-top. sub.Used to increase the border size of the field. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. right.Sets the field width.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. bottom. HorizontalAlignment . Vertical Alignment . Font Size . top. Border color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold . super. Height . Bold .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. right. Font Color . Border Size . Height . Background color . Font Color . bottom. Underlined . Horizontal Alignment .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Bold . middle. Font Size . Vertical Alignment .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the title. Underlined . Border Size . middle. Border color .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Sets the field height. top.Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined . center or justify).Used to apply bold type to the font. . sub.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. center or justify).Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. super. text-bottom). bottom. Attributes: Tooltip . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Border Size . Help Type: Pop-up . sub. top. Horizontal Alignment .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Sets the object height. .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. text-top. Help Settings Document the application. center or justify). super. Height .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the object width.Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color . right. middle. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Create on-line instructions. Vertical Alignment . Width . Hint .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. .Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. Allows when activated.Allow to determine the field width. Accepts negative .Define if the Regional Settings will be used (default values). That is.Integer Image1:Interface of General Configuration. to show or don't show the filter condition.Group Separator. if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name. Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. VALUES FORMAT Regional Settings .Allows when activated. the label is a field nickname in the application layer.Define the application field title. Width .The field accepts negative values.Define the application field type. Show Condition .Field type in the database. Maximum Size . to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. Attributes: Submit on OnChange . Atributos: Data type . Separator . SQL Type .Maximum Field Size. the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_name. Search Label . . Font Color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the title. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Vertical Alignment . .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Border color . center or justify).Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. sub. super. Border Size .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. right.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to apply bold type to the font.DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Font Size . Underlined . Bold . top. Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Title CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Background color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Background color . center or justify).Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Font Color . Bold . Width . text-bottom). Horizontal Alignment . sub.Used to increase the border size of the object. super. text-bottom).Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to increase the border size of the field. Height . Font Size . bottom. Border color .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Height . .Sets the field width. Field CSS Attributes: Font . middle.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Font Color . Underlined .Sets the title height.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. super. text-bottom). center or justify).Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. bottom.Sets the title width.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.text-top. Border Size .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. middle. right. Border color . Bold . Background color .Sets the field height. bottom. Font Size . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Border Size . Vertical Alignment . HorizontalAlignment . text-top. sub. text-top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Width . right.Sets the object width.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Width . middle.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Underlined . top.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Vertical Alignment .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. top. Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Hint . Help Type: Pop-up . Attributes: Tooltip . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Help Settings Document the application.Sets the object height.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Height . Create on-line instructions. . .Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. Maximum Field Size.Group Separator. Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface.Precision of the decimal field. That is.Define the application field type. SQL Type . For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_name. if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name. Data type .Allow to determine the field width. to submit the filter when it will have alterations in .Field type in the database. Separator . Attributes: Submit on OnChange . Search Label . Maximum Size .Currency Image1: General Settings Interface.Allows when activated.The field accepts negative values. VALUES FORMAT Precision . Width . Decimal Separator . the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Accepts negative .Decimal separator of the field.Define the application field title. Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Show Condition .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Underlined .the field. the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. Title CSS Attributes: Font . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Font Size .Used to increase the border size of the title. Background color . Font Color . Border Size .Allows when activated.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. to show or don't show the filter condition. Bold .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Used to increase the border size of the field.Sets the field height. HorizontalAlignment .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Border color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Width . Vertical Alignment .Sets the title width. Underlined .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Font Size . text-top.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Bold . Vertical Alignment . Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to apply bold type to the font. text-top.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. center or justify).Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Sets the title height. Font Color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. top.Border color . Height . Font Size . Height .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. super. Border Size . Background color . Horizontal Alignment . sub.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. bottom. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . bottom. Width . Horizontal Alignment . top. center . text-bottom). sub.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Used to increase the border size of the object. center or justify).Used to apply an underlined type to the font. middle. Border Size .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. right.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Sets the field width. right. Font Color . right. Underlined .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Border color . Bold . text-bottom). super. middle. bottom. text-bottom).Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. .Sets the object width. Attributes: Tooltip .Sets the object height.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. top. Hint . sub. Height . super. Help Settings Document the application. Help Type: Pop-up . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. middle. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Width .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. text-top.or justify).Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Vertical Alignment . Create on-line instructions. .Display the specified help text beside the field.Text . if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name.Maximum Field Size. Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. Width .Field type in the database.Allows when activated.The field accepts negative values. the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Decimal Separator .Allows when activated. Separator .Define the application field title.Precision of the decimal field.Group Separator. Maximum Size . VALUES FORMAT Precision . to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. Accepts negative .Decimal Image1: General Settings Interface. SQL Type . Data type . Search Label . the same just . For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_name. to show or don't show the filter condition.Decimal separator of the field.Define the application field type.Allow to determine the field width. That is. Show Condition . Attributes: Submit on OnChange . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Border Size .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Border color . Background color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to increase the border size of the title. Bold . right. .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Underlined .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Font Size . Font Color .Used to apply bold type to the font. Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.functions if the filter will have at least one option. center or justify). Title CSS Attributes: Font . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. super. super. Border color .Used to increase the border size of the field.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. text-top. bottom. text-top.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. text-top. Border color .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. top. top. Bold .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. middle. Vertical Alignment .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the title height. Horizontal Alignment . Font Color . Underlined . sub.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Field CSS Attributes: Font . Height .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Sets the title width. Width . text-bottom). Vertical Alignment . middle. Border Size . sub.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. super.Used to apply bold type to the font. Background color . Font Size .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. center or justify). Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Font Color . Border Size . center or justify).Vertical Alignment . middle. top. HorizontalAlignment . Font Size . Bold .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. . bottom. Background color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the field height.Used to increase the border size of the object.Sets the field width. right. text-bottom). right. Underlined .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font. text-bottom). Width . bottom. sub.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Height . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. . Create on-line instructions.Width .Sets the object height.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Hint . Attributes: Tooltip . Help Type: Pop-up . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Height .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Settings Document the application.Sets the object width.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. . Data type . For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_name.Date Image1: General Settings Interface.Maximum Field Size.Allow to select the storage mode of the field in the database. Maximum Size .Allow to display beside the field a calendar icon.Allows you to apply regional settings to the field. SQL Type .Allow to select the data and the month through the combobox. Attributes: Regional Settings . Display Calendar . the label is a field nickname in the application layer. if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name. Internal Format .Field type in the database. this makes possible the selection of the month and year passing to the field the value which was defined in the calendar.Allow to determine the field width.Allow to display beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field. Use Combobox . Field's Behavior . Display .Define the application field type. Display Format . Width . Search Label .Allow to select the fielddisplay format.Define the application field title. VALUES FORMAT Figure2: Interface of Filter Configuration. That is. Allows when activated.Search last week business days. Note: Use the function Turn On/Off to add or remove a condition. Last week business days (mon-fri) . Show Condition .Search last 7 days. .(Mon-Fri).Search entire period. Last week(sun-sat) . to show or don't show the filter condition. Ex: ((21/12/2007 27/12/2007). to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. Today .Allows when activated. Last month .>Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. (Sun-Saturday). All period . This month -Search from beginning current month until current day. Note: Special condition filter form interface . the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option.Search last week.Search last month. Attributes: Submit on OnChange .Search today.Search yesterday. SPECIAL CONDITIONS Special conditions available to Date fields allows the end user select common time periods to search. Yesterday . Last 7 days . .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Title CSS Attributes: Font . right. top. Border Size . Vertical Alignment . Font Size . Horizontal Alignment . center or justify).Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Underlined . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Bold . Font Color . super.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the title. sub. Border color . Background color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Height . Border Size .Used to apply bold type to the font. sub. Font Size . super.Used to increase the border size of the field. text-bottom).Sets the object width. Horizontal Alignment . Width .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Border Size . text-bottom).Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Background color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Vertical Alignment .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . right. HorizontalAlignment . super.Sets the title height. Vertical Alignment . text-top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. center or justify). Font Size . bottom.text-top. middle. sub. . Underlined .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Height . Font Color . Bold . text-top.Sets the field width.Sets the title width. right. Background color . Border color . Bold . bottom.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Underlined .Used to increase the border size of the object. Width . Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. center or justify). top.Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the field height.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Border color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. text-bottom).Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Font Color . top.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Width . bottom. middle. middle.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Height .Sets the object height. Hint . Attributes: Tooltip . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Create on-line instructions.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Settings Document the application. Help Type: Pop-up . . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Display the specified help text beside the field.Text . . Define the application field type. That is. this makes possible the selection of the month and year passing to the field the value which was defined in the calendar. Field's Behavior . Display Calendar . Use Combobox .Allows you to apply regional settings to the field. Search Label . Display.Allow to display beside the field a calendar icon. Internal Format . the label is a field nickname in the application layer.Field type in the database. Attributes: Regional Settings .Allow to display beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field.Allow to select the field display format. Width .Allow to select the storage mode of the field in the database.Maximum Field Size. if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name. SQL Type . Maximum Size . Data type .Time Image1: General Settings Interface.Allow to determine the field width. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_name.Allow to select the data and the month through the combobox. Display Format .Define the application field title. VALUES FORMAT Figure2: Interface of Filter Configuration. Show Condition . the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Background color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title .Allows when activated. Font Color .Allows when activated. Font Size . Attributes: Submit on OnChange . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. to show or don't show the filter condition.>Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Vertical Alignment .Used to apply bold type to the font. Background color .Sets the title height. text-top.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Size . Background color . bottom.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. HorizontalAlignment . Bold . Underlined . Font Color . text-bottom). Field CSS Attributes: Font . Width . text-top. Border color . middle.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Vertical Alignment . text-bottom).Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Border color . Border Size . bottom. Font Size . Bold .Sets the title width. Bold .Used to apply bold type to the font. .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.using a color palette. middle. Border Size . sub.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. sub. top. Font Color .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Sets the field height. top. Height . Underlined . right.Sets the field width. center or justify). Height .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to increase the border size of the title. super. center or justify).Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Width .Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. right. super. Attributes: Tooltip . sub. bottom. Help Type: Pop-up .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size . Create on-line instructions. text-top. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. text-bottom). super. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. top. middle. Border color .Underlined .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Width .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Sets the object height. right.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Sets the object width. center or justify). .Used to increase the border size of the object. Horizontal Alignment .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Hint . Vertical Alignment . Help Settings Document the application. Height . Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. . Search Label . For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_name. Maximum Size . Data type . Display Calendar . That is.Allow to select the display format of the field. this makes possible the selection of the month and year passing to the field the value which was defined in the calendar.Allow to display beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field.Allow to determine the field width.Allows you to apply regional settings to the field. if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name. Display Format . Field's Behavior . Display .Date And Time Image1: General Settings Interface. SQL Type .Allow to select the storage mode of the field in the database. the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Attributes: Regional Settings .Define the application field type.Allow to display beside the field a calendar icon. Internal Format . VALUES FORMAT Figure2: Interface of Filter Configuration.Maximum Field Size.Define the application field title.Field type in the database. Width . Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Allows when activated.>Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface.Allows when activated. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Attributes: Submit on OnChange .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Font Size . Background color . Font Color . to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. Title CSS Attributes: Font . the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Show Condition . to show or don't show the filter condition. Width .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Border Size .Sets the title width.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Height . Bold . Bold .Used to apply bold type to the font. middle. Border color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Underlined . text-bottom). text-top.Sets the title height. Font Color .Bold .Sets the field width.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Vertical Alignment . Vertical Alignment . Background color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. super. middle. Background color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. center or justify). Underlined .Sets the field height. right. HorizontalAlignment . sub.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. top. center or justify). Border Size . Font Size . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . bottom.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. bottom. Width . Font Size . Font Color .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. text-bottom). text-top.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. right. sub.Used to increase the border size of the title. super. top. Border color .Used to apply bold type to the font. Height .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to increase the border size of the field. Border Size . middle.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. bottom. Create on-line instructions. Height .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Sets the object width. center or justify). Help Type: Pop-up .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Settings Document the application. Border color .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. top. super. Vertical Alignment . sub. Width . text-bottom). Hint . text-top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. .Sets the object height.Used to increase the border size of the object. Horizontal Alignment . Attributes: Tooltip .Underlined . right. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Display the specified help text beside the field. .Text . These lists of KEYS / VALUES can be defined in two ways: based on a database table (Automatic lookup ) or from custom arrays (lookup manual) . to show or don't show the filter condition. before and after enabling the edition lookup to display a select object containing a custom list of KEYS / VALUES.Database Field type. Search Label .Maximum field size SQL Type . the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option.if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Date. numbers and characters. Edition Lookup Edition lookup enables a a list of values display on forms fields.Allows when activated.Define the application field type. Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface.Select General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface. the label is a field nickname in the application layer.Define the application field title.Allow to determine the field width. That is. Show Condition . Maximum Size .Allows when activated. When the field is defined as a textm it accepts letters. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_date_hour. Note on the screen bellow the State field. Width . to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. Attributes: Data type . Attributes: Submit on OnChange . Attributes : SQL Select Statement .Select object rows quantity. retrieving always two fields. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. the default delimiter is semicolon ( . it is required to retrieve a key (insert / update) and a value to display on the object field on the SQL command. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables . Height . ). Image1: Automatic lookup settings. only applicable when using the multiple values option. Delimiter . Edition Lookup . note the SQL statement on the picture bellow. views on it. The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field . display_field FROM table ". based on a SQL statement. . based in a SQL statement to feed the list of values or Manual which is based on a custom entered list of values.The query used to feed the select object on the form application.Automatic Populates the select object dynamically.Before Lookup After Lookup Lookup method There are available two options: Automatic.The character used to separate the items on generated string. Image1: Lookup method selection. lookup value original & lookup values Separated by.Character used to separate KEY and LOOKUP values displayed on the list of values. the list of values will be saved on the table's field as a string containing the text: KEY1. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value. it is frequently used to re-load other lists which uses this field as parameter. Checkbox Use the drop down .KEY2.Allows to create a link to a list update form. .Multiples Values .Forces a form reload when the OnChange event occurs on the select field. In the picture bellow.The object title or its default option displayed as the first line.The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected. Display original and lookup value. Reload form when value has changed . Use specific connection.KEY3 using an specified delimiter like .Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project.defined in Delimiter Single value Multiple Values Use Title .Displays the key field and the lookup field retrieved by the SQL statement. the select object is automatically reloaded after the popup form update. Create Link . this option works combined with Title and Title internal value. Title internal value .Display the field Select as a drop down list of checkboxes. it is possible to select many items on the fields list.By selection yes.Allows to display a title line on the select object. or . Use specific connection .Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project. Title . ManuaL Enables a select object based on a list of values filled manually as an array. allows only one item selection. Single Value Creates a simple select object. . Attributes: Lookup type. Image2: Single value lookup settings. Multiple Values (delimiter). Image1: Manual edition lookup. Multiple Values (position) and Multiple values (binary).Edition Lookup .Selects the lookup type: Single Value . See picture bellow. Object number of lines. Delimiter . Label Male Female Single Married Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F S M SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 Example: By selecting on the generated form: Male. ) semicolon. Default . For example the selection: Sports. for example it is possible to save answers to the topics: Gender .The character used to separated the items on generated string.The default delimiter is semicolon ( . Married and Books.When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. See in the table bellow the positions used by each answers on the saved string. Civil Status and Hobby in only one table field. ) Image3: Multiple values lookup (delimiter Label. only applicable when using the multiple values option. Height.Text displayed value.When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. Multiple Values (Position) Saves on a string type field a list of values. the table's value saved a string is MMBO . Value. Value.Text displayed value.T. ).The quantity of rows displayed in this select object. Height . Multiple values (delimiter) Saves a single string on the table's field based on a list of values displayed. Movies and Traveling is saved on the table's field as a string like S.Label. Note the default delimiter ( .Selected value by default.M. Object number of lines. On this lookup field interface the Value to each item is a integer number generated automatically. Negative . Implicit Value 1 2 4 8 16 Item Description Sports Movies Traveling Books Music The selection is converted into a integer which is the sum of the items implicit values before saving. Value. Height.Bytes quantity into the saved string. Multiple Values (Binary) Allows to save a multiple selection as an integer value on a table field See the examples bellow. Implicit Value 1 2 4 8 16 Item Description Sports Movies Traveling Books Music 1 (Sports) + 2 (Movies) = 3 .Image4: Multiple Values lookup settings (position). Label.Text displayed value. Start. Example 1: By selecting Sports and Movies on the list of values.When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. the saved value on table field is 3. (The string position counting start with 1) Size.Saved string initial position.Value saved on the string when no value is selected. Height.Update all the item properties.Inserts the item into the list of values Update Button . the saved lists are displayed on the Load lookup definitions field. Insert Button . Traveling and Books on the list of values.Clear the item edit form.The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is .Example 2: By selecting Sports. the saved value on table field is 13.Saves the current list of values for re-usable purpose.Object number of lines. Title internal value .Item displayed text . Remove Button . Clear Button . Title .Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list. Save Button .Allows to display a title line on the select object. Load lookup definitions .The object title or its default option displayed as the first line. Use Title . This option works combined with Title and Title internal value. Implicit Value 1 2 4 8 16 Item Description Sports Movies Traveling Books Music 1(Sports) + 4 (Traveling) + 8 (Books) = 13 Image5: Multiple Values settings(Binary) Label .Removes the item from the list. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value. Checkbox using drop down .Character used to separate KEY and LOOKUP values displayed on the list of values.selected. . Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. it is frequently used to re-load other lists which uses this field as parameter. Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. Display original and lookup value. CheckBox. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Reload form when value has changed . AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select.Display the field Select as a drop down list of checkboxes.Forces a form reload when the OnChange event occurs on the select field. lookup value original & lookup values Separated by. For example: a Select field "list of states".Displays the key field and the lookup field retrieved by the SQL statement. and a second one list of cities. Horizontal Alignment . Field CSS Attributes: .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. sub. bottom.Used to increase the border size of the title.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Height .Sets the title height. Underlined .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Font Color . Background color . Vertical Alignment .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. center or justify). text-top. text-bottom).Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the title width. right. top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Font Size . super.Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Border Size . Bold .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Border color . Title CSS Attributes: Font . middle. Width . text-top. Vertical Alignment . bottom. super.Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined . text-top.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Height .Used to increase the border size of the object.Font . center or justify).Sets the object width.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Help Settings Document the application.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Width .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Font Color . sub. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of .Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. top. middle. super. Border Size .Used to increase the border size of the field. text-bottom).Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. sub. Background color . Border color . Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Sets the object height. Underlined . Font Size . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Vertical Alignment . center or justify). Border color .Sets the field width.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Bold .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. top. Bold . Background color . right.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. right. bottom.Sets the field height. middle.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. text-bottom). Width .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. HorizontalAlignment . Font Size .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Height . Border Size . Create on-line instructions.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Help Type: Pop-up .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Display the specified help text beside the field. Hint . Text . Attributes: Tooltip .interacting with the applications. .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. . Width .Allows when activated. Show Condition . Before Lookup After Lookup .The data type Double Select is an drop-down object which allow multiple selection through of two selection windows and a navigator betwen them (<< < > >>). Edition Lookup Edition lookup enables a list of values display on forms fields.Database Field type. to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field.Double Select General Settings Figure1: General Settings Interface.Allow to determine the field width. Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. Maximum Size . to show or don't show the filter condition.Allow to define the field title in the filter. SQL Type .Allows when activated.Maximum field size. Label Search . the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. Attributes: Submit on OnChange . Attributes: Data type . The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field . Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. Display original and lookup value. . retrieving always two fields. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value.The query used to feed the select object on the form application. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row.Character used to separate the field value and the lookup return value. AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select.Displays the field value and the lookup return value. Reload form when value has changed . ).Forces a form reload upon selected field update. Height . display_field FROM table ".Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project. views on it.Figure1: Edition lookup Interface Attributes : SQL Select Statement .The character used to separate the items on generated string. Use specific connection. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables .Select object rows quantity Delimiter . Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. the default delimiter is semicolon ( . CheckBox. and a second one list of cities. For example: a Select field "list of states". Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by. Background color . . Border Size . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. right. center or justify).Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to increase the border size of the title. middle.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Font Size .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Color . Title CSS Attributes: Font . bottom.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Underlined . Horizontal Alignment . super. top.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. text-top. Border color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Bold . sub.DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. text-bottom). Vertical Alignment . middle. Background color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Height . sub. right.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Used to apply bold type to the font. Width . text-top.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. bottom.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the object. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. text-bottom). text-top. middle.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Border Size . bottom.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. top. Font Color . Horizontal Alignment . center or justify). Width .Sets the object height. Border Size .Sets the title height.Width .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font. Vertical Alignment .Sets the field width. Font Color . .Sets the object width. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color . Border color .Sets the title width. top.Sets the field height. super. Border color . sub. Font Size .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Underlined . Height .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. center or justify). Vertical Alignment . right.Used to increase the border size of the field. Underlined . Bold . HorizontalAlignment . text-bottom). Font Size .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Bold . Height .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. super. Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Text . Help Type: Pop-up .Help Settings Document the application. Hint .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Create on-line instructions. Attributes: Tooltip . . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Display the specified help text beside the field.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. . Checkbox General Settings Image1:General Settings Interface. Edition Lookup Edition lookup is a way to display checkbox list of values on forms fields. It is possible to populate the checkboxes objects based on a database table (Automatic lookup ) or from custom arrays (Manual lookup) . That is. See the image below. SQL Type .Allows when activated.Define the application field title.Allow to determine the field width.if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Date.Database Field type. Attributes: Submit on OnChange . Show Condition . Maximum Size .Checkbox is an object which allows the selction of one or more information through a marking object.Allows when activated. Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. Width . the label is a field nickname in the application layer. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_date_hour. to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. Attributes: Data type . to show or don't show the filter condition. Search Label .Maximum field size. . Edition Lookup . retrieving always two fields. Note the SQL statement on the picture bellow. Delimiter . it is frequently used to re-load another lists of values which requires this field as parameter. The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field . it is required to retrieve a key ( insert / update) and a value to display on the object as fields on the SQL command. views on it. ). Reload form when value has changed . Attributes: SQL Select Statement .ID>. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables . based on a SQL statement.Forces a form reload when the OnClick event occurs on the checkbox field. Image1: Lookup method selection. NOTE: The automatic lookup option requires the form field to be string type because multiple selection saves a single string on database table field like AK.The character used to separate the items on generated string. based in a SQL statement to feed the list of values or Manual which is based on a custom entered list of values. the default delimiter is semicolon ( .UT when using the semicolon delimiter.The query used to feed the checkbox object on the form application.checkbox number of columns.Automatic Populates the checkbox object dynamically. display_field FROM table ". Columns . Image2: Automatic lookup settings.Before Lookup After Lookup Lookup Methods There are available two options: Automatic. Choose connection .Run the select statement in a different connection available in the project. the field original value and the value retrieved by lookup are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Attributes : Lookup type. . Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by .Display an object to check all items and another to uncheck all items. Image1: Edition Lookup Manual Interface. Multiple Values (delimiter).Selects the lookup type: Single Value . Otherwise.Manual Allows the developer to manually crete a list of values saved in the application when there is no table available with the information needed. to display only the value retrieved by the lookup. Single Value Selects only on value on the list. Display original and lookup value .Select No.Option check all .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the lookup return value. Multiple Values (position) and Multiple values (binary). Edition Lookup . See picture bellow. Image2: Edition lookup . Civil Status(1byte) and Hobby (2bytes) in a single use the table bellow (with the positions used by each item). For example the selection: Sports. Label Male Female Single Married Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F S M SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 Example: By selecting on the generated form: Male. Note the default delimiter ( . Value.Checkbox columns quantity. Default . Movies and Traveling is saved on the table's field as a string like S. Label. Value. ). Delimiter. Multiple Values (Position) Saves multiple values on a single string. For example when Ipho Coffee is selected the value saved is 43. Label. For example. Multiple values (Delimiter) Saves a single string on the table's field based on a list of values displayed. Image3: Edition lookup .Text displayed value in the checkbox object. Using the Multiple Values (Position) mode is required to enter the label.When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field.Single Value settings.Checkbox columns quantity. Columns .The default delimiter is semicolon ( . only applicable when using the multiple values option. Married and Books.The character used to separated the items on generated string.M.Text displayed value in the checkbox object. start position in the saved string and size in bytes each item.When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field.T.. to save Gender (1byte). ) semicolon. the table's value saved a string is MMBO .Selected value by default. Columns .Multiple Values (delimiter) settings. (The string position counting start with 1) Size. Example 1: By selecting Sports and Movies on the list of values. On this lookup field interface the Value to each item is a integer number generated automatically.Image4: Edition lookup . AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music The selection is converted into a integer which is the sum of the items implicit values before saving.Text displayed value in the checkbox object.Bytes quantity into the saved string.Multiple Values (position) settings Label. Traveling and Books on the list of values.When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field at the specified position. the saved value on table field is 3. . Value. Start. Columns . AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music 1 (Sports) + 2 (Movies) = 3 Example 2: By selecting Sports. Multiple Values (Binary) Allows to save a multiple selection as an integer value on a field See the examples bellow.Saved string initial position. Negative .Checkbox columns quantity. the saved value on table field is 13.Value saved on the string when no value is selected. Display original and lookup value .Multiple Values (binary) settings Label. Insert . to display only the value retrieved by the lookup.Clear the item edit form.Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list. Update . it is frequently used to re-load another lists of values which requires this field as parameter.Insert Label and Value in the values list. the field original value and the value retrieved by lookup are displayed separated by the . Remove .Forces a form reload when the OnClick event occurs on the checkbox field. Columns . Otherwise.Text displayed value in the checkbox object. Option check all .Display an object to check all items and another to uncheck all items. Load lookup definitions .Saves the current list of values for re-usable purpose. Clear . the saved lists are displayed on the Load lookup definitions field. Reload form when value has changed .AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music 1 (Sports) + 4 (Books) + 8 ( Traveling) = 13 Image5: Edition lookup .Checkbox columns quantity.Select No. Save .Remove selected item.Update selected item. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select. Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by .character defined in Separated by. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. . For example: a Select field "list of states". CheckBox. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the lookup return value. and a second one list of cities. text-bottom).Used to increase the border size of the title. Horizontal Alignment .Used to apply bold type to the font. Border Size . text-top. Bold . Underlined . sub.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. middle. Font Color . Title CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the title height. Background color . top.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Field CSS Attributes: Font . bottom. Font Size . right.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. bottom. sub.Used to apply bold type to the font.Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Sets the title width. Font Color . Background color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Width . Bold . right. text-top. Vertical Alignment . Border Size .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. super. top. Border color . . Vertical Alignment . center or justify).Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. super. text-bottom).Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Underlined . Height . Font Size . center or justify). Border color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. middle.Used to increase the border size of the field. Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Help Settings Document the application. text-top.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Width . Width . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Height . Border color .Sets the field height. middle. Underlined . Font Color .Sets the field width. top. super. sub.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. bottom. Vertical Alignment . Border Size .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Used to increase the border size of the object.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. . center or justify). text-bottom). Horizontal Alignment . Attributes: Tooltip . Background color . Help Type: Pop-up .Sets the object height. Height .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the object width.Used to apply bold type to the font. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Font Size . Bold . right. Create on-line instructions. Display the specified help text beside the field.Hint .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. . Text . For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_name.Field type in the database. Show Condition . Data type . SQL Type .Define the application field title. Search Label . to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field.Allow to determine the field width. if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name. Attributes: Submit on OnChange . Maximum Size .Radio General Configuration Image1: General Settings Interface.Allows when activated. Edition Lookup Display a radio object list to use in the form (see manual lookup and automatic lookup ) . the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Before Lookup After Lookup . the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option.Define the application field type.Maximum Field Size. Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. Width .Allows when activated. to show or don't show the filter condition. That is. Columns . NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. based in a SQL statement to feed the list of values or Manual which is based on a custom entered list of values. retrieving always two fields. the developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field .Lookup Method There are available two options: Automatic.Display a different radio option in the field (See None on the image bellow ) referring to a value filled manually (Title Internal value ). Single column Radio double columns Radio Use Title .The query used to feed the checkbox object on the form application. .radio number of columns. views on it. Image1: Lookup type selection Edition Lookup . Image2: Automatic Edition lookup Interface Attributes : SQL Select Statement . It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables . The values are retrieved with a Select Statement from a database table.Automatic Lookup used to display values in a Radio field. display_field FROM table ". Reload form when value has changed .Text displayed in the radio object. Use Manual lookup when the database does not have a table with required information. Value .Displays the field value and the lookup return value. Columns .Define a selection default value. Edition Lookup . See picture bellow. Insert .Character used to separate the field value and the lookup return value. the value M is added upon selecting Male.Manual Enables a radio object based on a list of values filled manually as an array.The object title or its default option displayed as the first line. Display original and lookup value.Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. . Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value.The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected. Default . For example. Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by.Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project. Use specific connection. Attributes : Label . Title internal value .Value store in the table. Image1: Manual Edition lookup Interface.Define number of columns used to display the radio items.Title .Forces a form reload upon selected field update. Remove .Saves the list values entered (for reuse with Load lookup definitions ). Display original and lookup value.Character used to separate the field value and the lookup return value. For example: a Select field "list of states".Remove selected item. Load lookup definitions . Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by. Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select. Title . Save . and a second one list of cities.Update selected item.Display a different radio option in the field (See None on the image bellow ) referring to a value filled manually (Title Internal value ). CheckBox. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value.The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected.Displays the field value and the lookup return value. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected.Update . Title internal value . Clear . Use Title .Clear the attributes. .Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list. Reload form when value has changed .The object title or its default option displayed as the first line.Forces a form reload upon selected field update. middle.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. bottom. Vertical Alignment .Used to increase the border size of the title.DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Horizontal Alignment . Background color .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. right. Border Size . Font Size . . Border color .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. sub. Underlined . text-top.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Title CSS Attributes: Font . super. Bold . text-bottom). Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. top. Font Color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. center or justify). Font Size . Height .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Border color . top. Underlined .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. right.Sets the field height. .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. text-top. Height .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Height . Font Color .Sets the title width.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Bold . Field CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the title height. super. Background color . Vertical Alignment .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Border color .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Width . Bold . Border Size .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. middle. Font Color .Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to increase the border size of the object. Horizontal Alignment .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. right. Border Size . Width .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Font Size . center or justify).Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Sets the field width.Sets the object height. text-bottom).Width . Underlined .Sets the object width.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. sub. HorizontalAlignment . sub. center or justify). text-bottom). Background color . super. Vertical Alignment . bottom. middle.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font. bottom. top. text-top. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Create on-line instructions. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Help Type: Pop-up .Display the specified help text beside the field. Attributes: Tooltip . Hint .Help Settings Document the application. Text . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. . Text Auto-complete AUTO-COMPLETE TEXT Image1: General Settings Interface. Width . Attributes: Case Settings .Allows when activated. to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field.Converts the field letters. Show Condition .Define the application field title. Data type . if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name. Field's Behavior Image1: Field's Behavior Interface.Define the application field type.Allows when activated.Allow to determine the field width. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_name. the label is a field nickname in the application layer. SQL Type . Search Label . the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. Maximum Size . to show or don't show the filter condition. Edition Lookup .Field type in the database.Maximum Field Size. That is. Submit on OnChange . for example.Qualquer parte e Final igual). Display original and lookup value . Attributes: SQL Select Statement . only the name of the State in the Capture. Capture Text . Width . Permite determinar o modo de busca do texto(Início igual.Define the number of records displayed on each search.Select a different connection.When this option is not selected. Rows .Allows you to display the label with the description. Choose connection .Define the capture box width (Capture Text). End equals). Search options . Display label with the description .Define the texts earch mode (Begin equals.Enter a select comand use to capture the text. in the application is displayed only a field to data entry.With this option disabled (=No) displays. AJAX PROCESSING . See an example in the link below. Any part.Figure3: Edition Lookup Interface. Background color . . For example: a Select field "list of states".Used to apply bold type to the font. CheckBox. Font Size .Reloads other selection type fields (Select.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Title CSS Attributes: Font . Bold .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. and a second one list of cities. Font Color . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Vertical Alignment . bottom. middle. bottom. Background color .Used to increase the border size of the title. center or justify). top.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Width . Height .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. super. Underlined . Height . Horizontal Alignment . text-bottom). HorizontalAlignment .Underlined . Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the title width.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size . top. .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. text-top. Border color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the field. Font Size .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Border color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the title height. Bold . center or justify). middle. right. Background color .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. right. Underlined .Sets the field width. Border Size . Vertical Alignment .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Font Size . Font Color .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. text-top. Width . sub. Bold .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Font Color . sub. super. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the field height. text-bottom). Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Create on-line instructions. super.Used to increase the border size of the object.Border Size . Vertical Alignment . Border color .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. text-bottom). bottom. middle. Hint .Sets the object width.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Sets the object height. center or justify). Help Settings Document the application. Attributes: Tooltip . top.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. . right. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Height . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. sub. text-top.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Width . Help Type: Pop-up . Horizontal Alignment . .Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. Allows when activated. SQL Type . if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name. to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option.Define the application field title. Edition Lookup . That is. Show Condition .Allows when activated.Define the application field type. Attributes: Submit on OnChange . the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Width .Field type in the database.Allow to determine the field width.Maximum Field Size. to show or don't show the filter condition. Search Label . Maximum Size . Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_name. Data type .Number Auto-complete AUTO-COMPLETE NUMBER Image1: General Settings Interface. When this option is not selected. AJAX PROCESSING . End equals).Figure3: Edition Lookup Interface. Attributes: SQL Select Statement .With this option disabled (=No) displays. Width . Display original and lookup value . Choose connection .Define the number of records displayed on each search.Define the capture box width (Capture Text). Permite determinar o modo de busca do texto(Início igual. Capture Text .Allows you to display the label with the description. Display label with the description . in the application is displayed only a field to data entry.Select a different connection. Any part.Qualquer parte e Final igual). See an example in the link below. Search options . only the name of the State in the Capture.Enter a select comand use to capture the text.Define the texts earch mode (Begin equals. for example. Rows . Bold .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. For example: a Select field "list of states".Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Font Size .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. CheckBox.Reloads other selection type fields (Select. Border Size . and a second one list of cities.Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined . Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Border color . Font Color .Used to increase the border size of the title. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. . Title CSS Attributes: Font . center or justify). Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Underlined . text-top. top. HorizontalAlignment .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. right. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . text-bottom).Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Border color .Sets the field height.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined . . Vertical Alignment . sub.Sets the title width.Horizontal Alignment . center or justify). super. middle. top. Background color . Border Size . Bold .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. center or justify).Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Sets the field width.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Bold . Font Size . bottom. sub. right. Border Size .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Font Size .Used to apply bold type to the font. Font Color . Font Color .Used to increase the border size of the object.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Height . Field CSS Attributes: Font . Width .Used to increase the border size of the field. middle. Border color . Background color .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. right. Vertical Alignment .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. text-bottom). super.Sets the title height.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. text-top. bottom. Width . Height .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. super. Width . Help Settings Document the application.Vertical Alignment . Height .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the object height. middle.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. top. bottom. Create on-line instructions. Hint . .Sets the object width. Attributes: Tooltip . text-bottom). sub. text-top. Help Type: Pop-up .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. .Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. Edit Project .Shares themes with other applications based on the session values Folder . HelpCase Link .Generated application language . . Description . It can be renamed through the main menu.Allows other users of the group edit the application.Application Settings Figure1: Settings Interface Attributes: Application Code .Associate a this application to a project documentation page.Use the enter key to tabulate. Timeout. Zero assume the PHP default value.Execution timeout in seconds.Determine the application name.This field can be used to describe the application objectives. Figure2: Error Settings Interface .Folder where the application will be stored in the work group.Shares location with other applications based on the session values Share theme variable . Localization . Share location variable . Use Enter to tab . all the hints and messages are displayed in selected language. Display the error message in the application. .To run the application in debug mode. above and below. SQL Error . Values: right.Error Position in the application.Display script information where the error occurred. >Script Error . left.Error message Title in the application. Error Title .Show the SQL command in the error.> Show the Error Title in the application . Show the Error Title in the field . showing all SQL commands used in that application. Debug Mode .Display the error message in thefield.Attributes: Error Position . Redirecting URL . this global is most commonly used to filter the form in the SQL menu. Figure 1: Navigation interface. which is used to store the URL of the current application. Attributes: Exit URL .When exiting the application. close the browser window.Specify the URL to which the user will be redirected upon exiting the aplication.Variable name. Redirecting Variable .Navigation Define the navigation attributes of an application. .URL to which the user will be redirected in case a global variable is not available inside the application for any reason is not avaliable. Close Window . Defines how the variable is received by the application. The application may contain global variables in the Where Clause. Select the way it is passed to the Control application. if has been defined that a variable is received by a Post Method and it has been passed by get method the content won't be accepted. . Global variables are defined in square brackets ([variable]).In this option the variable must be created as a session variable in the PHP by other application before the search call which is being defined. Variable passing methods : Session .Defines variables behavior. Example: Select customerid. they are: Scope . customername from customers where customerid ='[v_customerid]' In this case. Attribute . Get . this content is subdivided in three blocks. etc. Post. in Lookups.Defines that the variable must be passed by the HTML command line.Global Variables GLOBAL VARIABLE This menu shows the global variables being used within the application.Variable name in the application. the variables "v_customerid" appears in the variables configuration. These variables should be passed to the application that is being implemented through one of the methods (Session. Shows all global variables used in the application. that means. the global variable is a external parameter required to application execution. Value . being visible to the browser. or entering a variable in Application General Data field to replace the field name. Get) Image 1: Global Variables Interface. created by special fields. Image 2: Variables Settings Interface. Determines where the variable was defined.Defines if the variable is an input or an output. Description.Defines that the variable must be passed through the post method of the form. At execution time in the development environment. Settings .Do not validate (checking) the variable at execution time.Post . Type (Input/Output) . a form requesting the input variables used by the application is displayed. . Used to get a value from a Grid application record to the field. Next to each record an icon link to a Form application. Image2: Linking between Applications-Link Type Interface.Application List Interface.Used to link to a Form application. Link a Search with a Form application. There are two link types available in a Search: Application . The screen bellow displays all applications available in the project. is displayed to . In Image4 the Search fields must be associated with the Form fields.Link Used to link the Search form with Form applications. Image3: LinkbetweenApplications . Capture . Image1: New Link Menu Select the link type. Link Properties: Link Operation Mode . "Open in Parent" . . Form Property Enable or Disable buttons in the target Form application.Open the form in the same window. In the screen below. "Modal" . but in a different frame(Below). “ Link Properties” enter the link attributes.Open the Form in a Modal window. Image6: Grid Search with link of type capture in the field.Parameters Interface . "Open in Iframe" . "Open in the same Window" . Image5: Link Properties Interface.Image4: LinkbetweenApplications .Open the form in the same window. but in the frame where is calling the Search. "Open in another Window" .Define how the linked Form will be displayed.Open the linked application in the same window. The icon allows to retrieve the field a value from a Grid Application record. Select a Grid application.Open the linked application in another window. Create and displays an icon beside the field. Empty .Use the text box to informa a fixed value or a variable. . The parameters options are: Fixed .Image8:Application List Interface.Choose this option to pass no value to the Grid. Image9: Parameter definition Interface Image10: Links created. It shows which fields or variables should receive parameters to execute the Grid. Actions Properties Link Editing the link properties. Image9 displays the parameters definition. Edit a Link Delete Delete a link In the link properties you can modify the link to modal. Image11: Link properties . Programming Overview ScriptCase has incorprated the concept of Object Oriented programming. and by using these concepts you can reap huge rewards in terms of better organization and improved development. methods and libraries. . resources. using attributes. It is possible to create your own business rules in applications. An attribute can be referenced in all of the methods and events of an application. . To modify it click on the attribute's name (located to the left of the buttons) and click the Update button to save your changes.Attributes Attributes are variables containing a global variable passed from one application to another. Attributes: Attributes . Click the clean button to clean the attributes list. Image 1: Attribute Settings interface. To remove an attribute. click on the delete button after selecting the atribute.Enter the attribute's name and click on the include button to add it. click the 'Var' button: . Define the name for the new method then click the Create button. Figure 3: Adding a Method. Creating a new method Figure 2: Create a new Method.Methods Methods are functions or procedures declared by the developer. Using methods in applications it is possible to reuse code and thus improve development productivity. To include a parameter variable in a method. It is possible to create PHP and JAVASCRIPT methods. Figure 1: Method menu interface. to support the implementation of business rules for an application. See the Figure below. 1. 2 Methods may involve parameters being passed. * References allow you to create a second name for a variable so you can use it to read or modify the original data stored in that variable. Type: Select the variable type as: For value or For reference. To Edit a parameter variable in a method. * 10270 Value Default: The default value used to initialize the parameter variable when called. click the button: . Add the number of variables: Figure 5: Define Parameters interface Defining a variable: Figure 6: Add Parameters interface.Figure 4: Parameter Variable icon. Name: Input a variable name. In this example we are using the onLoad event to call our method when the record is loaded. See the example below: Figure 8: Events.Figure 7: Define Method Parameters interface. . it needs to be called within an event. 3 In order to run a method. See how simple it is to call the method in the example below: Using a method : Figure 9: Event method interface Thus we get the following result when running the application. Edit the variable selected in the Parameters field. Unmark all parameter variables selected in the Parameters field. Delete the variable selected in the Parameters field. Select all parameter variables in the Parameters field. . g.Libraries To use a library you need to select the corresponding library type (e. . All methods in the library are visible in all application events and methods. access them via the main menu: Configuration ==> Libraries. To manage libraries. Public Libraries. Project Libraries or User Libraries) and enable the applicable php library file(s). Picture1: PDF Report in action. This application is used to format PDF files. it is possible to build PDF files by defining each field´s position on the generated report. This application type is based on SELECT statements. .Report Pdf Applications Overview Report PDF application. in the same measurement unit specified for your pdf report. millimeters. Ex. in this case you must specify the filename. Records per Line: Used to display the records as a conventional grid. Right Margin .Define the pdf right margin.Generate a filter form displayed before running your pdf application.Output print (paper) size.Define the report page orientation: Landscape or Portrait. Create Search .Report Settings Attributes: PDF Orientation . PDF measure unit . Bottom Margin . Left Margin .Define the pdf upper margin. in the same measurement unit specified for your pdf report.Define the pdf bottom margin. .:c:\folder\file. PDF Destination: Send the output to de selected destination: Browser: Open the pdf file immediately on a browser. in the same measurement unit specified for your pdf report.Set the amount of pages on the pdf report. centimeters and counts. Server: The pdf files are stored on the server side specified by the path.Define the pdf left margin. Ex. Type: Records per Page: Used to print a record on a single page.Unit used in printing format-: points. PDF format . in the same measurement unit specified for your pdf report.: myfile. Page Amount .pdf Download: Creates a link to download the file.pdf Upper Margin . Columns height .Set the columns height.Set the number of columns by page.Amount of columns . Columns width .Set the columns width. . Print the file directly.Text Color. help rulers. the image will be position. the image will be position. .Image width. Underlined. images.Bold.Font And Background Here you can define some layout settings such as font. Height . To print . on Y axis.Font face for your pdf report. Width . Text color .Background Image for your report. Image . Position Y . Position X . Text font style . Text Font size . Italic.Image Height.Where. on X axis. Show ruler .A useful X & Y ruler will be displayed on you pdf to help you with the coordinates settings. Font face .Font size.Where. Use Customized Message . Field associated to “ Use Customized Message”. this connection can be changed for another that has the same tables (SQL). Font color . Connection .Enter the SQL commands or procedure names to be executed before the application main select.Shows the connection name (database) that the application is using.Choose the font size.Message to be shown. Field associated to “ Use Customized Message”.Font name used.Sql Figure1: Interface of SQL Configuration SQL Select Statement .Displays the SQL select command. SQL Preparation . Field associated to “ Use Customized Message”. Tip: The user can use the SQL Builder for fast assembly of the command. click on the icon and choose a font. Font Size . . Variable for table .Table name variable.Font color.Allows defining the message to be shown if the grid do not return a record (EOF). Field associated to “ Use Customized Message”. No Records Message . Font Face . The second field must be filled with part of the table name to be replaced. . Fields Variables . Note: In the first field must be filled in the name of the variable in the second field should be selected the name of the field to be replaced.Variable to replace select field name.Note: In the first field should be filled with the variable name. insert the following code: // two users: john and mary with permission to access different applications if({userid} == 'john') { sc_apl_status('grid_categories'. In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user). sc_apl_status('form_products'.'on'). insert the following macro call: sc_apl_status('grid_categories'.Security Attribute: Use Security: With this option selected. Example 1: Activating an application called grid_categories.'on'). } . the application is only accessible when enabled using the sc_apl_status macro. sc_apl_status('form_categories'. sc_apl_status('grid_products'. sc_apl_status('form_categories'. } elseif({userid} == 'mary') { sc_apl_status('grid_categories'. See the examples below. Disabled applications display the message "Unauthorized user" when accessed.'off').'off').'on'). sc_apl_status('form_products'. } else{ sc_error_message("Unauthorized user!"). In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user). Access to applications may be granted through a control application to authenticate users.'on'). Example 2: Creating a rule to authenticate by user type in a login form containing a field called userid.'on').'on'). sc_apl_status('grid_products'.'on'). enter the following code: URL output safety (denied access URL redirection): It redirects the user to this URL. Disable the options Enable use of security and Enable Use of Password in the Configuration menu | My ScriptCase. Use Password: An application password setting is required.Example 3: Authenticating applications using a database table. In the development environment it is possible to suppress the above steps purely for testing purposes. an "Unauthorized user" message is displayed. At run time a text box is displayed requiring the access password. . thereby avoiding repeated password requests (or access denied) for each application execution. (See image below). If the password is not entered correctly. if he does not have access to the application. In the login application onValidate event. Cell's Horizontal Alignment. Field .Data displayed on the cell. It is automatically set by the interface.Cell number. Pos Y . on Y (vertical) axis.Cell's width.Pdf Layout Interface Interface to define where each field is displayed on the PDF report.Defines the field position. Attributes: Seq . . Alignment .Cell name. Pos X . Cell . on X (horizontal) axis. Width .Defines the field position. SetAutoPageBreaksc_pdf_set_auto_page_breakActivates/deactivates automatic page break. AddLink sc_pdf_add_link Create internal link. Click here to access the FDPF a documentation. AliasNbPages sc_pdf_alias_nb_pages Define alias to page number. PageNo sc_pdf_page_no Page number. Header sc_pdf_header header. Footer sc_pdf footer. Ln sc_pdf_ln ConImagethe line break. error sc_pdf_error Display error message. SetDrawColor sc_pdf_set_draw_color Define the color used to picture. AddPage sc_pdf_add_page Add new page. The Report PDF application is based on the fpdf class. Close sc_pdf_close: close the document. Link sc_pdf_link Inserts link. Line sc_pdf_line Draws a line. SetFontSize sc_pdf_set_font_size Define font size. Image sc_pdf_image Puts an image on the page. exemplo: $pdf>AcceptPageBreak(parameters). . SetFillColor sc_pdf_set_fill_color Define fill color. SetCompression sc_pdf_set_compression Turns on/off page compression. Method FPDF Macro ScriptCase Description AcceptPageBreak sc_pdf_accept_page_break Accept an automatic page break. Use the object $pdf with the selected method.Code Use a set of commands to manipulate the pdf report. GetStringWidth sc_pdf_get_string_length Calculate string seize. SetAuthor sc_pdf_set_author Define document author. AddFont sc_pdf_add_font Add new font. Rect sc_pdf_rect Draws a rectangle. GetY sc_pdf_get_y Returns Y position . The class methods are available to the user as well macros listed in the table bellow. GetX sc_pdf_get_x Returns X position. SetFont sc_pdf_set_font Define font settings. MultiCell sc_pdf_multi_cell print text with line break. SetCreator sc_pdf_set_creator Define document creator. Output sc_pdf_output Saves or send a document. SetDisplayMode sc_pdf_set_display_mode Define display mode. Cell sc_pdf_cell Print cell. SetKeywords SetLeftMargin SetLineWidth SetLink SetMargins SetRightMargin SetSubject SetTextColor SetTitle SetTopMargin SetX SetXY SetY Text Write sc_pdf_set_keywords sc_pdf_set_left_margin sc_pdf_set_line_width sc_pdf_set_link sc_pdf_set_margins sc_pdf_set_right_margin sc_pdf_set_subject sc_pdf_set_text_color sc_pdf_set_title sc_pdf_set_top_margin sc_pdf_set_x sc_pdf_set_xy sc_pdf_set_y sc_pdf_text sc_pdf_write Set document keywords. Define X position. Define XY position. Print string. Define left margin . Define Y position. Set internal link. . Define right margin. Define margins. Define document title. Define subject. Define line width. Define text color. Define top margin. Print characters string. Positioning Interface to define the field display sequence (use the arrows to set a field position). . Field .SELECT FIELDS ".Fields Fields In this sessions is display toConfigureonly the grid selected in the menu "GRID . The edit page is re-loaded to display/configure each field specific attributes depending on field type. .field is possible to define the attributes. Determine the field type in database. For example. .Define the field content as HTML. All upper case. only first letter of first word to upper case. Grid Mask . if the select option is Capitalize first word. all lower case if the select option is Lower Case. where X enable zero and Z disable zero. A field type text it accepts letters. Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field.Convert the field font case.Define the application field type. The mask uses the characters "X" and "Z". first letter of each word to upper case if the select option is Capitalize all word. a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic).Text Image1: Field General Settings Interface. Attributes: Data Type . SQL Type .Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically. For example.Define the field grid mask. HTML Content . An HTML Content field process html tags. numbers and special characters. Before Lookup After Lookup Grid Lookup . retrieving the values from a database table. Case Settings . if the select option is Upper Case. to format a phone number with parentheses and dashes. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value .Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values. Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes. Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary). Separated by .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value.Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. Delimiter . Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. to display only the Select Command return value. the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by. Multiple Values (Delimiter).Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value.Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value . CSV e RTF). Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF). Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Display original and lookup value . PDF.Select No. Multiple Options .Select a different connection available in the project. Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface. Choose connection . During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value. The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets. Otherwise. XML .Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface. The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}".Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command. Attributes : SQL Select Statement . . Grid Lookup . Attributes : Lookup Types . The string values are separated by a defined delimiter. Figure1.Define the character used to separated string values.Text displayed in the grid.Text displayed in the grid. start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Value M Start 1 Size 1 . Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. in a string to save Gender (a byte) .Attribute stored in the table. For example.Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution. The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list. Label . For example. Label .2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter). The values are retrieved based on the string position and size. M is displayed Male. Delimiter . the stored value S. Multiple Values (Delimiter) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label.Attribute stored in the table. Value . Value . For example.1: Single Value lookup settings.M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list. Figure1. Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books .Data size in bytes in the string.3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position). Start .Attribute stored in the table. (First position is always 1). For example. the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies.Text displayed in the grid. In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm.Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling F C S SP MO BO TR 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books . Label .Movies . Size . Value . (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports . Figure1. Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.String start position for the data stored. Clear the attributes.Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse). Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. CSV e RTF). Load lookup definitions . Save . Insert . Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value .Update selected item. Update .Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. PDF.8 16 Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books . Clear . .Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music Figure1. Separated by . Remove . to display only the Label value .Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Display original and lookup value .Select No.Text displayed in the grid. XML . Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF). Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML.Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup.4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary).Remove selected item. Otherwise. Label .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. . Field width.Define the field grid mask. For example.Convert the field font case. Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field.Define the application field type. The mask uses the characters "X" and "Z".Define the field content as HTML. All upper case. if the select option is Upper Case. Case Settings . where X enable zero and Z disable zero. SQL Type . first letter of each word to upper case if the select option is Capitalize all words. For example. only first letter of first word to upper case. to format a phone number with parentheses and dashes. An HTML Content field process html tags. retrieving the values from a database table. . Width . A field type multiple lines text is basically a text box. Grid Mask . if the select option is Capitalize first word.Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically. a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic).Determine the field type in database. Before Lookup After Lookup Grid Lookup . Attributes: Data Type .Multiple Lines Text Image1: Field General Settings Interface. HTML Content . all lower case if the select option is Lower Case. Grid Lookup . Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. Otherwise. Separated by .Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values. CSV e RTF). The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets. Attributes : .Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value.Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface. Multiple Options . Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes.Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value. Delimiter . to display only the Select Command return value. Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface. Attributes : SQL Select Statement . PDF.Select No. The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}". Choose connection .Select a different connection available in the project.Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value .Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value.Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command. Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF). Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Display original and lookup value . XML . Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value .2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter). Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary). Value .Text displayed in the grid.Lookup Types . Multiple Values (Delimiter). Label . Multiple Values (Delimiter) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. Figure1.M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list.Define the character used to separated string values. The string values are separated by a defined delimiter. Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. For example. the stored value S. Figure1. Delimiter .Text displayed in the grid. Label . For example. Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label. M is displayed Male.Attribute stored in the table.1: Single Value lookup settings. in a string to save Gender (a byte) . The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list.Attribute stored in the table. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size. For example. start position in the string and size in . Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution. Value . 3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position).Data size in bytes in the string. the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies. Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. (First position is always 1). Value .Traveling) Attributed Lookup .Attribute stored in the table.String start position for the data stored. Label .Text displayed in the grid.Movies . (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports . Size . For example.bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books . Figure1. Start . In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm. CSV e RTF).Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music Figure1. Label . XML .Clear the attributes. Insert . Update .Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse).Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup. Otherwise. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML.Select No. . Display original and lookup value . Remove .Update selected item.Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF). PDF.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value .Value 1 2 4 8 16 Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books .Text displayed in the grid. Load lookup definitions .Remove selected item. to display only the Label value . Save .4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary). Clear . Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value.Separated by . Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. . Negative Color . For example.Define the field grid mask. a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic).Define the character used as unit separator. Negative Sign. SQL Type . If No is selected the attributes Digit Grouping Separator.Integer Image1: Field General Settings Interface. Figure2: Values Format Interface.Define the negative sign display position (relative to the field). Regional Settings . Number negative format . where X enable zero and Z disable zero. Attributes: Data Type . Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field. to format a phone number with parentheses and dashes.Define a different font color to negative values. An integer type field accepts only integers. Grid Mask .Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. Digit Grouping Separator .Determine the field type in database.Define the application field type. . The mask uses the characters "X" and "Z". For example.Define the character used to display negative values.(See regional settings). Negative Sign and Negative format of number are displayed. Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF).Before Lookup After Lookup Grid Lookup . Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value.Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically. XML . Display original and lookup value . Multiple Options . The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}".Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value. Attributes : SQL Select Statement . PDF.Select No. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. retrieving the values from a database table. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. Separated by .Select a different connection available in the project. Choose connection . the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by. The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . Otherwise. Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface. Grid Lookup .Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values. CSV e RTF). to display only the Select Command return value.Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command. Delimiter . .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Label . The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list. the stored value S. Value . Multiple Values (Delimiter) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. M is displayed Male. Figure1. Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary).M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list. Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution.1: Single Value lookup settings. Multiple Values (Delimiter). The string values are separated by a defined delimiter. Attributes : Lookup Types .2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter). For example. Figure1. .Attribute stored in the table.Text displayed in the grid.Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface. Label .Text displayed in the grid.Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value . For example. In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm. Figure1. Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. For example. For example.String start position for the data stored. (the values are displayed): Attributed Lookup . start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books . (First position is always 1).Define the character used to separated string values.Text displayed in the grid. Size . Delimiter .Attribute stored in the table.3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position).Attribute stored in the table. Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. Start .Data size in bytes in the string. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size. in a string to save Gender (a byte) . Label .Value . the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies. Value . Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label. Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music Figure1.4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary).Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup.Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books .Value 1 2 4 8 16 Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports .Remove selected item.Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Save .Text displayed in the grid.Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse). Load lookup definitions . Label . Clear . Remove . Update .Update selected item.Clear the attributes. Insert .Movies . Use lookup in: . Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. to display only the Label value . Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.Select No. XML . Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF). PDF. the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Display original and lookup value . Otherwise.Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value .Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. CSV e RTF). Separated by . . Grid Mask . a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a . SQL Type .Define the field grid mask. The mask uses the characters "X" and "Z".Field's Decimal precision. For example.Applies regional settings to the field.Determine the field type in database. to format a phone number with parentheses and dashes. Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field.50.Negative value's color. Example: The value is R$ 125. Attributes: Data Type .Define the application field type. To learn more about regional settings click here. A decimal type field accepts decimal values. Values Format Regional Settings ..Complete the field value with zeros.Define the field title.Skip repeated information displaying a field value only once.Decimal Image1: Field General Settings Interface. Do Not Repeat Value . Complete with Zeros . Label . with number of decimals digits defined to 3 and the option Complete with Zeros selected to Yes the valued displayed is R$ 125. Decimal Precision . where X enable zero and Z disable zero. For example.500. Negative Color . the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by. CSV e RTF).Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command.Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. . Separated by . Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML.Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically. The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets. During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Choose connection . Otherwise. Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF).Select No. to display only the Select Command return value. Multiple Options . Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . Before Lookup After Lookup Grid Lookup .database table (see lookup automatic). XML . Display original and lookup value .Select a different connection available in the project.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. retrieving the values from a database table. Delimiter . Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface.Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value. The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}". Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes.Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. Attributes : SQL Select Statement . PDF. The string values are separated by a defined delimiter.Text displayed in the grid. Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface.Grid Lookup . For example. Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution. Multiple Values (Delimiter). The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list. For example. Attributes : Lookup Types . Label . Figure1.Attribute stored in the table. Value .Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value . Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary). . M is displayed Male. the stored value S.M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list. Multiple Values (Delimiter) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values.1: Single Value lookup settings. Text displayed in the grid.Figure1. . The values are retrieved based on the string position and size.String start position for the data stored. Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. Value . Start . (First position is always 1). Label .Attribute stored in the table. Value .Text displayed in the grid. in a string to save Gender (a byte) .Data size in bytes in the string.2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter). In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm. Size . Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.Attribute stored in the table.Define the character used to separated string values. start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books . Delimiter .3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position). Figure1. Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label. For example. Label . 4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary).Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Label . Remove . the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies.Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music Figure1. .Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books . Save . Update .Movies .Clear the attributes.Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse).Text displayed in the grid. Clear .Update selected item. Insert . (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports .For example.Remove selected item. Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF). Otherwise. . Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. to display only the Label value .Load lookup definitions . Display original and lookup value . Separated by .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value .Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. PDF.Select No. XML . CSV e RTF). Values Format Regional Settings .Define the application field type. Currency Format . For example. Negative Color .. Decimal Precision . Attributes: Data Type .Negative value's color. to format a phone number with parentheses and dashes. For example. with number of decimals digits defined to 3 and the option Complete with Zeros selected to Yes the valued displayed is R$ 125. Complete with Zeros . where X enable zero and Z disable zero. Example: The value is R$ 125. The mask uses the characters "X" and "Z".Currency Image1: Field General Settings Interface.Applies regional settings to the field. Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field. To learn more about regional settings click here.Define the field grid mask. .Field's Decimal precision. Grid Mask .Complete the field value with zeros.Determine the field type in database.500. SQL Type . a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic).Display field with currency format.50. Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}".Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Display original and lookup value . Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface.Before Lookup After Lookup Grid Lookup . Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. CSV e RTF).Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. XML . Delimiter . During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value. Grid Lookup .Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value. Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes. PDF.Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically. Multiple Options .Select a different connection available in the project.Select No. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . Attributes : SQL Select Statement . Separated by . the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by. Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF). . The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets.Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command.Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values. Otherwise. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. Choose connection . to display only the Select Command return value. retrieving the values from a database table. . Value . Attributes : Lookup Types . the stored value S. Multiple Values (Delimiter) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. Label .M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list.2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter). The string values are separated by a defined delimiter. Figure1. The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list.1: Single Value lookup settings. Multiple Values (Delimiter).Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface. For example. Figure1.Text displayed in the grid. M is displayed Male. Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary). Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution.Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value . For example.Attribute stored in the table. in a string to save Gender (a byte) . Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size.String start position for the data stored. (First position is always 1). start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books . Size .Label .Attribute stored in the table. Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label.Data size in bytes in the string.Text displayed in the grid.3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position). Value . In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm. Delimiter . the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies. Start . Label . Figure1.Attribute stored in the table. Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. Value .Define the character used to separated string values. For example.Text displayed in the grid. (the values are displayed): . For example. Text displayed in the grid. Update .Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse).Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Save . Label . Clear .Clear the attributes. Insert .Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books .Movies . Use lookup in: .Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music Figure1.Update selected item.Remove selected item. Load lookup definitions . Remove .Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup.Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports .4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary). CSV e RTF).Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Otherwise.Select No. Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF). XML . . PDF. Separated by . the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. to display only the Label value .Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. Display original and lookup value . Height .Image border size. May be expressed in percent or pixels.Image height size. Use the icons to select between scriptcase standard available images or upload an image from any directory. An HTML IMAGE field is used for images processing.Html Image Image1: Field General Settings Interface.Image width size. Border .Search images to display. . Image . Width . Attributes: Data Type . May be expressed in percent or pixels.Define the application field type. Determine the field type in database. Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field.Field format for database storage. retrieving the values from a database table. A field type Date is formatted as in the option Values format (Image2). a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic). Attributes: Data Type . Before Lookup After Lookup Grid Lookup . Values Format Image2: Values Format.Date Image1: Field General Settings Interface. .Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically. To learn more about regional settings click here. Display .Define the application field type. SQL Type . For example.Applies regional settings to the field.Format of the field display. Internal Format . Regional Settings . Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML.Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command. Choose connection . Grid Lookup . Separated by . Attributes : SQL Select Statement . Otherwise. The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface.Select No. the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by. CSV e RTF).Select a different connection available in the project. Multiple Options . Delimiter .Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface. Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF). The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}".Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value.Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values.Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value .Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value.Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value. . During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value. PDF. to display only the Select Command return value. Display original and lookup value . XML . Attributes : Lookup Types . Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary). Delimiter . The string values are separated by a defined delimiter. Value .1: Single Value lookup settings. For example.Text displayed in the grid. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size.M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list. Multiple Values (Delimiter). Multiple Values (Delimiter) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby .Attribute stored in the table. For example. Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution. Label .Define the character used to separated string values.Text displayed in the grid. M is displayed Male. Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter). Figure1. Value .Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value . The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list. in a string to save Gender (a byte) . the stored value S. For example. Label . Figure1.Attribute stored in the table. (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports .Data size in bytes in the string. Figure1.3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position). (First position is always 1). Start . start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books . For example.(two bytes) the information stored includes label. Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.Traveling) . Size .Text displayed in the grid.String start position for the data stored. In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm. Label . Value .Movies .Attribute stored in the table. the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies. Remove . Insert . Update . the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . Label .Text displayed in the grid. Load lookup definitions . to display only the Label value .Update selected item.Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup.4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary).Remove selected item. Display original and lookup value . PDF. Otherwise. Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF). . XML .Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse). Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML.Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music Figure1. Save . Clear . CSV e RTF).Select No.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value.Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value.Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books .Clear the attributes. .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value.Separated by . Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. For example. Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field. retrieving the values from a database table. Before Lookup After Lookup Grid Lookup . Regional Settings . a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic).Format of the field display. A field type Time is formatted as in the option Values format (Image2).Time Image1: Field General Settings Interface. Internal Format .Field format for database storage. Values Format Image2: Values Format. To learn more about regional settings click here. . SQL Type . Display . Attributes: Data Type .Define the application field type.Applies regional settings to the field.Determine the field type in database.Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically. the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by.Select a different connection available in the project. Otherwise. Delimiter .Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value. During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value. . The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets. Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF).Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command. Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes. Multiple Options .Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface. Separated by .Select No.Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. CSV e RTF). XML . Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface. The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}". Choose connection .Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value.Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . Display original and lookup value . PDF.Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Grid Lookup . Attributes : SQL Select Statement . to display only the Select Command return value. Value . . Multiple Values (Delimiter).2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter). For example. Value . Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary).Attribute stored in the table.Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value . Label .Define the character used to separated string values. Delimiter .1: Single Value lookup settings. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size. M is displayed Male. Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. The string values are separated by a defined delimiter. Figure1.Text displayed in the grid. Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution. The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list. the stored value S.Attribute stored in the table.Text displayed in the grid. Label . For example.M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list. Multiple Values (Delimiter) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.Attributes : Lookup Types . Figure1. in a string to save Gender (a byte) . Value . In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm.Text displayed in the grid.Traveling) . Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label. Start . For example. (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports . start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books . (First position is always 1).For example. the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies.Movies . Size .Data size in bytes in the string. Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.String start position for the data stored.Attribute stored in the table. Figure1. Label .3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position). Remove . CSV e RTF). Clear . Save .Text displayed in the grid.Remove selected item.Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup. Load lookup definitions . XML . Label . to display only the Label value . the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in .Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books . Display original and lookup value .Clear the attributes. Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF). Otherwise.Select No.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Update .Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse). PDF.4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary).Update selected item.Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music Figure1. Insert . Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML.Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . Separated by .Separated by. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Date And Time Image1: Field General Settings Interface. Attributes: Data Type .Format of the field display.Determine the field type in database. For example.Define the application field type.Field format for database storage. Internal Format . Before Lookup After Lookup Grid Lookup . Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field. retrieving the values from a database table.Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically.Applies regional settings to the field. Display . . Values Format Regional Settings . a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic). SQL Type . To learn more about regional settings click here. A field type Date and Time is formatted as in the option Values format (Image2). Grid Lookup . to display only the Select Command return value.Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values. XML .Select a different connection available in the project. Display original and lookup value . Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML.Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command. the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by. Multiple Options . Choose connection . Otherwise.Select No. Attributes : SQL Select Statement . . During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value.Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value.Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value. The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}".Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets. CSV e RTF). Separated by . Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF). Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . Delimiter . PDF.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value.Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. For example.Attribute stored in the table. For example. M is displayed Male. The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list.Attribute stored in the table.Text displayed in the grid. Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary). Attributes : Lookup Types . Multiple Values (Delimiter).1: Single Value lookup settings.M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list. Label . The string values are separated by a defined delimiter.Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value . Multiple Values (Delimiter) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.Text displayed in the grid. The values are retrieved based on the string position and . Value . Figure1. Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. Label . the stored value S. Figure1.Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface. Value . Delimiter . Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution.2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter).Define the character used to separated string values. size. in a string to save Gender (a byte) .3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position).String start position for the data stored.Text displayed in the grid.Attribute stored in the table. For example. Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label. (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: . Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. Size . In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm. the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies. Label . Start . Value .Data size in bytes in the string. Figure1. start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books . For example. (First position is always 1). Insert .Clear the attributes.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Label . Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value .Movies . Remove . CSV e RTF). Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF). Update .Text displayed in the grid.4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary).11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports .Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music Figure1. Clear . Load lookup definitions .Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup. .Remove selected item. PDF. Save .Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books .Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. XML . Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML.Update selected item.Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse). Otherwise.Select No. to display only the Label value . Separated by . .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.Display original and lookup value . Image width . Open in another window . . Image Border . Image Height .Define the application field type. SQL Type .Image height in pixels. Attributes: Data Type .Open the original image in another window. Maintain aspect .Image width in pixels.Image border width in pixels.Maintain the image aspect ratio when resizing it.Image (database) IMAGE (DATABASE) Image1: Field General Settings Interface. in the database. An Image (Database) field process images stored in binary format.Determine the field type in database. Open the original image in another window. Image Caching .SubFolder where the files are stored. . Open in another window . Maintain aspect .Image width in pixels. Image Height . Attributes: Data Type . Image Border . SQL Type .Image height in pixels.Maintain the image aspect ratio when resizing it. Image width .Time in minutes the image cache will be kept in the server before being deleted.Image border width in pixels.Image (file Name) Image1: Field General Settings Interface. SubFolder .Determine the field type in database.Define the application field type. An Image (File Name ) field process images. it will be stored on the database. Display Icon . A Document (Database) field creates a link to each document in the database.Field that contains document's file name. . File Name .Define the application field type. SQLType .Determine the field type in database.Document (database) Image1: Field General Settings Interface Attributes: Data Type .Display the file type icon. it will be stored on the database.Document (file Name) Image1: Field General Settings Interface. Display Icon . .Define Document (File Name) field creates a link to each document. SQL Type . Attributes: Data Type .Determine the field type in database.Field that contains document's file name.Display the file type icon. File Name . Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface.Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically. retrieving the values from a database table.Determine the field type in database. a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic).Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. For example. During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value.Define the application field type. Before Lookup After Lookup Grid Lookup . Attributes: Data Type . Delimiter .Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value. Multiple Options . Attributes : SQL Select Statement . A Card field is formatted and validate accordingly. The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets. The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}".Credit Card Number Image1: Field General Settings Interface. SQL Type . Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field. Use .Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command. Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary). Display original and lookup value . Choose connection . Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML.Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values. Otherwise.Select a different connection available in the project. Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface. Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF).Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Grid Lookup . Separated by .Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value . PDF. XML .Select No. Attributes : Lookup Types . The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value .this option when Multiple Options = Yes. Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution. . Multiple Values (Delimiter). the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by.Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. to display only the Select Command return value. CSV e RTF). Define the character used to separated string values. Label . Label . . The string values are separated by a defined delimiter.Attribute stored in the table. M is displayed Male. start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books .Text displayed in the grid.Figure1. Delimiter .1: Single Value lookup settings. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size. For example. For example. in a string to save Gender (a byte) . Multiple Values (Delimiter) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. Value . For example. Value .Attribute stored in the table.2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter). the stored value S. Figure1. Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label.M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list.Text displayed in the grid. Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. Value . the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies. Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. Size . (First position is always 1).String start position for the data stored.Text displayed in the grid. In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm.Movies .Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books . Start .Figure1. For example.Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music .Attribute stored in the table. (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports .3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position).Data size in bytes in the string. Label . CSV e RTF). Save .Clear the attributes.Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Insert . Clear . .Remove selected item. Remove .Figure1. Update . Otherwise.Text displayed in the grid. the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Load lookup definitions .Select No. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . PDF. Label . Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Separated by . XML . Display original and lookup value .Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse).Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value.Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup.Update selected item. to display only the Label value .Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF).4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary). Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface. An E-mail field display an icon linking to outlook. retrieving the values from a database table.Define the application field type.Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value.Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value. For example. Multiple Options . Before Lookup After Lookup Grid Lookup . SQL Type . . During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is substituted by its table value. The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}".E-mail Image1: Field General Settings Interface. Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field. Attributes: Data Type . a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic).Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically. Attributes : SQL Select Statement . The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets.Determine the field type in database. Separated by . Display original and lookup value . Grid Lookup . PDF. CSV e RTF).Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value .Select No.Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes. Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface. Multiple Values (Delimiter). Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF). Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary). Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution.Delimiter . Attributes : Lookup Types .Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. to display only the Select Command return value. Choose connection .Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by. Otherwise. XML . Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list. .Select a different connection available in the project.Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values. Figure1. the stored value S. M is displayed Male. . Value . Value . Label . Multiple Values (Delimiter) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. For example. Delimiter . For example.Text displayed in the grid.Attribute stored in the table. Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size.M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list. The string values are separated by a defined delimiter.Text displayed in the grid.Figure1.1: Single Value lookup settings. Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. in a string to save Gender (a byte) . Label . For example.Define the character used to separated string values.Attribute stored in the table.2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter). start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books . Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music . Value . Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.Data size in bytes in the string.Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books .3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position). For example. Label . In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm.Figure1.Text displayed in the grid. the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies.Attribute stored in the table. Size .String start position for the data stored. (First position is always 1).Movies . Start . (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports . Remove .Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF). the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by.Select No.Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value.Figure1. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.Text displayed in the grid. Otherwise. to display only the Label value .Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup. .Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse).Remove selected item. Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML.Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Insert . Display original and lookup value . Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . CSV e RTF). Clear . XML .Clear the attributes. Load lookup definitions . PDF.Update selected item. Save . Update . Label .4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary). Separated by . Automatic Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically. Before Lookup After Lookup Grid Lookup .Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. Attributes : SQL Select Statement . The grid field should be reference enclosed in curly brackets. Other Page . a field gender in the database with values M or F is displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or have the display values retrieved from a database table (see lookup automatic). Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface. Attributes: Data Type .Open link in another page.Determine the field type in database. During execution the field enclosed in .Define the application field type. SQL Type . The statement has the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}". For example.Url Image1: Field General Settings Interface. Grid Lookup Used to modify the display of a grid field. An URL field display an linking icon. retrieving the values from a database table. Manual Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values. Multiple Options .Select No.Select a different connection available in the project. Multiple Values (Delimiter). Choose connection . to display only the Select Command return value. Separated by . The value store in the database is substituted by a label defined in a list.Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value .Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value. . Multiple Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary). CSV e RTF). Use this option when Multiple Options = Yes.Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface. Grid Lookup . Attributes : Lookup Types . Single Value Display a single value to the field by direct substitution.curly brackets is substituted by its table value.Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command. Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . Otherwise. Display original and lookup value . PDF.Select Yes when the Select Command entered return more than one informed value. the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined in Separated by. Delimiter . XML . Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML e PDF). Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Attribute stored in the table.M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list. . Value . The values are retrieved based on the string position and size. Figure1. the stored value S. Multiple Values (Delimiter) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. Label . in a string to save Gender (a byte) . M is displayed Male. For example. The string values are separated by a defined delimiter. Multiple Values (Position) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description.Attribute stored in the table. For example. start position in the string and size in bytes that each info occupies according a defined the list: Label Male Female Married Single Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F C S SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books .Define the character used to separated string values.Figure1.Text displayed in the grid. Delimiter .2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter). Value . Marital Status (a byte) and Hobby (two bytes) the information stored includes label.Text displayed in the grid. Label .1: Single Value lookup settings. For example. In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific algorithm.Data size in bytes in the string. (the values are displayed): Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music To display the info 11 e 12 (stored in the database) according to the list above use the following algorithm: 11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports . the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed relative to the position that each value occupies.3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position). Multiple Values (Binary) Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by full description. Size .String start position for the data stored.Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 4 8 16 Lookup Description Sports Movies Books Traveling Music 12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books .Traveling) Attributed Value 1 2 Lookup Description Sports Movies . For example. Label . (First position is always 1).Figure1.Attribute stored in the table.Text displayed in the grid. Value . Start .Movies . Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse). to display only the Label value . the field original value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Update . Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary Default Value . Insert .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command return value. .Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value.4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary). Clear .Remove selected item.Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup.4 8 16 Books Traveling Music Figure1. Separated by .Update selected item. XML . Label . Save .Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. CSV e RTF). Remove . Otherwise.Select No. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.Text displayed in the grid. Load lookup definitions . Use lookup in: Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML. Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML e PDF).Clear the attributes. Display original and lookup value . PDF. .Image height.Image format output.Barcode text font.Type of bar code. Output .Rotate image. Label . Attributes: Type .Field data type. DPI . SQL Type .Bar Code General Settings Atributtes: Data Type . Rotation .Image quality. Barcode Values Format interface.Field title. Font . Thickness . Resolution .Resolution of the image.Database Field type. . right.Background image Field. Style of the font .Sets the Search form label in the desired location (top.Sets the Search form label in the desired location (left.Used to select the font style that will be applied to the application object. middle or bottom). Background Color . Horizontal Alignment . center or justify). Width . Background Image . Font Color . right or center).Text to designate the barcode.Text .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the title width. Display Settings Display Settings interface.Sets the Search form label in the desired location (left. middle or bottom).Used to apply bold type to the font.Number of characters to be displayed.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Italic. Number of characters . Vertical Alignment . Font Size .Allow line breaks. Attributes: Font Style . Line Break .Sets the Search form label in the desired location (top.Sets the title height in pixels. Height (px) . Underline). Bold .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Title Horizontal Alignment .Style of the text font displayed in the pdf (Bold. Title Vertical Alignment . . The space between two lines.SQL example SELECT ProdName.New Field Subselect New SubSelect Field This resource is very useful when you need to make a master-detail report. . PriceUnit. UnitsStored FROM adm_products where categoryID = {categoyid} Note the parameter {categoryid} passed. Step2:Choose the "Subselect" type. Subselect . Step1:Create a new field. You must create a new "Subselect" field.Detail is stored on another database Table . for example Categories and Products. Connection . For this field type we can set up the following parameters: Increment .To write the SQL instruction to retrieve the data. on the fields list you can expand the SubSelect Field to see it?s 'fields'.Now. . Occurs when the application is initiated.Events Events If you need do something more specific on you reports. Read more about Scriptcase Macros. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". Here you are free to program PHP. Scriptcase uses the concept of events to enable to developer to customize application code.) and for a specific type of application.. onScriptInit . . For example if you want to sum two fields and move this result to another one. After a record is inserted. upon submitting a form. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. just remember the character { } . before printing the record.This event is used to show some calculated value on the footer. onHeader . for example.. using [ ]. onRecord . just edit the event OnRecord and write a code similar to this: {field_c} = {field_b} + {field_a}. . when it is loaded. you can program it.This event is executed immediately before printing the header. around the field name to make reference the local variables. using events. to print a calculated value in the header. onFooter . onApplicationInit .This event is executed before printing each record. you are making reference to global variables. Use this event.Occurs every time the application is loaded. Events allow the developer to define custom actions at a specific execution time (e.g. All Fields . . It will allow the user to change the log's configuration for the application.Which event the log will save the application changes. Events . Image 1: Log Interface.Use all fields in the log.Scheme of log to be used for the application. Options: Scheme .Log New interface included in the V6. Attributes Empty Search . Vertical Alignment . Preserver fields and Orders .Define the search form HTML width value. “ AND” or “ OR” appears in the search form for selection. no register is displayed. Horizontal Alignment .Display search condition so that the user can choose an option.When activated the values of the last search are kept and shown when the user return the search screen. Keep Values . Margins .Define the search form position (margins). Table width . Search Criteria .Search Settings Define all Search form attributes. “No”. . if search fields are empty.Define the search form horizontal alignment.“Yes”. Figure1: Search Settings Interface.Define the search form vertical alignment.Allows to select the SQL command “AND” or “OR” to define the search criteria to be used. display all records.Allows the end user to select form order. Display Condition . Iframe Height . in two FRAMES. This option is associated to “Using Iframe”.Display search first the grid in the iframe positioned below the search. Initial State . Case Sensitive .Iframe height in pixels where the data retrieved by the search is displayed. Use Iframe . This option is associated to “Using Iframe”.Unit used in width measurement.Table Width Unit . one above the other. Or displays just the search .Define the search operation mode. .Display search form and the search results in the same browser window. Select Fields Fields Positioning Defines which fields are displayed in the application. The list on the right displays which fields will be displayed in the application (select a field and click on the right arrow to include it in the form). . Note: The list on the left displays all fields retrieved from the SQL select query for the application. Figure 1: Select Fields. All . Contains. Buttons: Turn On/Off . . The left list displays the fields and the right list has the search options. None . .This option is displayed just if a field has only one option selected.Search Criteria Image1: Search Criteria Interface.Unmark all fields or options. Allows to define search options (SQL) for each field. Beginning with. To select options click on the option (Equal to. Show the condition . It allows do not display the criteria beside the field..Mark all fields or options.) and click on "Turn On / Off" button.Enable or Disable the field or selected option.. Define the label displayed on the button.Select the buttons displayed in the filter toolbars and the buttons position. It is possible to select the buttons for each part independently. buttons Settings Image2: Buttons Settings.Button name. Hint . Buttons Position (Top / Bottom) . Attributes: Toolbar (Top / Bottom) . A button can even be in both parts simultaneously.Define a hint in the button. Image1: Search Toolbar Interface. Label . Attributes: Button .Allows to define acess keys shortcuts. Access Key . .Toolbar The toolbar is divided in two parts: top and bottom.Define the buttons alignment in the toolbar. so it is possible to save a search to be used afterwards. . with this feature is possible to save searches by user login. Image2: New/Edit Rules Interface. Image1: Save Criteria Interface.Rules Edit Save criteria This resource allows to organize search profiles. Rules can be added. It creates the option Save criteria in the Search application. . and defining header formats. amongst other options. organizing fields in blocks.Layout Overview Configure display formats by determining attributes such as display schemes. By default the applications created in ScriptCase only consist of one block. and to delete the block. Figure 1: Block settings interface. all you have to do is drag it to the desired page as indicated below. Organising Blocks and Changing position See below how to modify the page block display order.Blocks Conceptually a block is a “container” in which a Form Application. Click on the block and drag it to “Blocks not shown”. To the left of each block there are two icons: to edit the block properties. This is how to remove a block from being displayed. Click to select the block in order to modify its position. Control or Grid fields are located. . bearing the same name as the application. used to define the position of the next block (positioned to the side or below in the series of blocks). The Figure bellow shows an ORGANIZATION column. You can add as many blocks as you need and you can organize them to best suit your purpose. To change the page block is displayed in. Flag that controls whether the block title is displayed.Number of columns to be displayed side by side within the block. . Fields (Position) . Fields (Columns) .Attributes: Block (name) . "Line" .Block title header displayed.Position of fields within the block: “Below” .The fields are displayed below each other while observing the number of columns. Label (Position) .The label options are: "Above" . Title (Display) .Displays the label below the field. "Beside" . "Below" .Displays the label beside the field.Displays the label above the field.The fields are displayed beside one another while observing the number of columns.The fields are displayed side by side (in line) without tabulation (aligned in columns).Flag that controls whether the field label is displayed inside the block. "Beside" . Label (Display) . "Tabs" .Organization of blocks on the page: "Below" .Defines the height of the block in pixels or as a percent. Organization (Width) .Indicates that the next block is displayed beside the previous one. just click . "Beside" .Indicates that the next block is displayed below the previous one.Indicates that the next block is displayed as a tab. Add New Block To add new blocks to an application. Organization (Height).Defines the width of the block in pixels or as a percent.Organization (Next) . . Title Height . Attributes: Name .Block title font color. Title .Block Title. Background image .Block title line height (in pixels).Block label.Block name. Edit Block Click to edit the block properties and click Save. Attributes: Name .Block title font applied.Block name. Label . .Whether to display a line containing the block title. Background color .Figure 2: Add New Block interface. Font color . Title Font .Block title font size applied. Display Title .Block title background image. Figure 2: Edit Block interface. Font size .Block title line background color. Border width . Field Organization . Block height .Block height.Block border width. Vertical Alignment . Block width . Center or Right). Columns .Number of block field columns.Field label position. Label color . Display Label .Block field organization.Horizontal Alignment .Calculate the block columns. Middle or Bottom).Block title vertical alignment (Top.Block width.Position of the next block in relation to the current one.Spacing between the block cells. Next Block . Cellspacing . .Block border color. Column Width . Border color .Block title horizontal alignment (Left.Display block field labels.Field label display color. Label Position . . fonts.Used to select the Header format. Theme .Used to select an existing Theme (colors. Footer Template .Used to select the Footer format.Display Settings Layout Settings Figure 1: Layout Settings interface Is used to define the Application Theme. (CSS) Attributes: Header Template . etc) for the application. There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. (A Form Applications has 2 titles: one for Insert mode. click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon .Header Figure 1: Header Interface.The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header. The selected field value is then displayed in the header line. the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the header line. Search Criteria . Date: Displays the system date in the header line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. and another one for Update mode). To see all the available date formats. click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples. (available only in Grid applications) FOOTER .Defines the Header title to be displayed in the application.This flag determines whether or not the Header is displayed Application Title . Depending on the type. Image: Enter an image name saved on the server.The variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combobox. you may need to associate content with it. To locate existing images and select one. This interface format can change depending on the selected option in "Layout >> Settings >> Header Template". Value: When the “Value” type is selected. See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox.The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the header. (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) . For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”. A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the application's data source (“Select” query) are displayed beside the header variable when the “Field” type is selected. Title: Displays the value entered in “Select Title” in the header . Header Variables . Enter text and/or “Global Variables”. Each condition is displayed on a new line. Enter the format in the text field alongside it. Display Header . For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”.This flag determines whether or not the footer will be displayed. (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) . There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples. click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon . (available only in Grid applications) . To locate existing images and select one. Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. Enter text and/or “Global Variables”.The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the footer.The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header. Enter the format in the text field alongside it. The selected field value is displayed in the footer line. to see all the available date formats. Footer Variables .The variable fields can be populated with any of the types listed in the Combobox. This format of this interface may change depending on the option selected in "Layout >> Settings >> Footer Template". See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox.Figure 2: Footer Interface. you may need to associate content with it. Title: Display in the Footer the value entered in “Select Title”. A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the “Select” (application's data source) are displayed beside the Footer variable when the “Field” type is selected. the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the footer line. Value: When the “Value” type is selected. Depending on the type. Display Footer . Search Criteria . Each condition is displayed on a new line. Date: Displays the system date in the footer line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. are executed the macros that modify the select. such as: sc_select_field. normally.Events In ScriptCase was incorporated the concept of Events in the applications. sc_select_where(add) and etc. It was also created a documentation system in the ScriptCase to display the ScriptCase macros that have reference to each selected event.Occurs when a validation is performed. In this scope. sc_select_order. onSave . onRefresh .This event is executed once.Occurs when the application is loaded. making possible a more standard development. . onScriptInit . onValidate . before the execution of the main select of the application.Occurs when the application is saved. the edit page is refreshed to show specific seetings to each data type.Fields Overview It shows just selected fields in the Search ("GRID->SELECT FIELDS”). To each field we can define a lot of attributes. Image1: Search Fields Interface. When selecting a data type. These types are: . Note: The description of the field type is modified as the selection of the filed type. Image1: Amount of fields Interface. where we determine the amount of fields that will be added. 2º. Image2: Interface of the Properties of the new field. 1º.When click on a new button it is shown the image below. it is necessary to define the settings of the new field (data type.After we determine the amount of fields that will be added. .New Field It allows to add a new field in the application. name and label). All in capital letters. The first letter of the first word in capital letter. Attributes: Data type . the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Field's Behavior Figure2: Interface of Filter Configuration. if the chosen option is Uppercase first word. to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. if the chosen option is Uppercase. in this case the option filter label can't be used. if the chosen option is Lowercase. Show Condition .Define the application field title.Field type in the database. SQL Type . if the chosen option is Uppercase all words.This option when activated.Text Image1: Interface of General Configuration. to show or don't show the filter condition. it is important to point out that the other words do not receive this configuration. if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name. Use same label used on the Grid. . numbers and characters. Submit on OnChange .Define the application field type. When the field is defined as a textm it accepts letters. Search Label .Convert the letters of the field when it loose focus.Allow when activated. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_name.Field Size. That is. the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. all in small letters. allows to use the field title that is configured in the grid. The first letter of all word in capital letters.Allow when activated. Width. Attributes: Convert Letter. . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. For example: a Select field "list of states".Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select. Title CSS Attributes: Font . and a second one list of cities. CheckBox. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. Font Size . Font Color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Underlined . Underlined . Height .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. middle. Border Size .Sets the title width.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Horizontal Alignment . center or justify). top.Sets the field width. Background color . Height . Width . Vertical Alignment . Font Color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. middle. Background color . bottom. bottom. right.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Vertical Alignment . Border Size . Font Color . text-bottom).Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Font Size . Bold . . Border color .Used to increase the border size of the field. Width . center or justify). right. Bold .Sets the field height.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. sub.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to increase the border size of the title. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. text-top. text-top. text-bottom). super. HorizontalAlignment .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Sets the title height. top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to apply bold type to the font. super.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Border color . sub.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Font Size . bottom. middle.Used to apply bold type to the font. Attributes: Tooltip . Hint . Border Size .Background color . Underlined . super. Help Settings Document the application.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Border color .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Horizontal Alignment . .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Create on-line instructions. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Help Type: Pop-up .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Sets the object width. top. Width .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. text-bottom). right. center or justify).Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. text-top. Bold .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the object.Sets the object height. sub. Height . Vertical Alignment . Text . .Display the specified help text beside the field. Group Separator. Use same Label on the Gridl -This option when activated. Attributes: Submit on OnChange . to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. allows to use the field title that is configured in the grid. the label is a field nickname in the application layer. When the field is defined as a textm it accepts letters.Allows when activated. Width . . VALUES FORMAT Regional Settings .Define the application field title.if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Number. Show Condition . That is.Allows when activated. to show or don't show the filter condition.Define the application field type. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_number. in this case the option filter label can't be used. numbers and characters. Separator . Filter Label . SQL Type .Define the SQL Type of the field.Integer Figure1: Interface of General Configuration.Allow to determine the field width.Define if the Regional Settings will be used (default values). Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. Data type . Accepts negative . right. Title CSS Attributes: Font . Border color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Background color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. center or justify). . Underlined .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Font Color . Bold . Font Size .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to increase the border size of the title.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Border Size .The field accepts negative values. Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Height .Used to apply bold type to the font.Vertical Alignment . text-top. Font Color . Border Size .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Field CSS Attributes: Font . right.Used to apply bold type to the font. bottom. Vertical Alignment .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment . text-bottom).Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Bold .Used to increase the border size of the field. Width . middle. bottom. center or justify).Sets the field width.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Vertical Alignment . top.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Font Color . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . text-top. text-bottom).Used to apply an underlined type to the font. top. Underlined .Sets the title width. super. sub. text-bottom). Underlined . Border color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. top. sub.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. . Background color . middle.Sets the title height. Border color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. super. Border Size . sub.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Background color .Sets the field height. right. middle. Bold .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Width .Used to increase the border size of the object.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. bottom. Font Size . super. center or justify). Height . text-top. Font Size .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. HorizontalAlignment . Height .Width . Help Settings Document the application. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Sets the object width.Sets the object height. Hint . Help Type: Pop-up .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Create on-line instructions. Attributes: Tooltip . . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. .Display the specified help text beside the field.Text . Separator . numbers and characters. the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option.Precision of the decimal field. Filter Label . . to show or don't show the filter condition.Allow when activated to show the field as a label. Data type . For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_number. to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field.This option when activated.Allows when activated.Define the application field title.Group Separator. Label field. That is.Allow to determine the field width. When the field is defined as a textm it accepts letters. in this case the option filter label can't be used. allows to use the field title that is configured in the grid. VALUES FORMAT Precision .Allows when activated. Attributes: Submit on OnChange . Width . Use Gird Label .Define the application field type.if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Number. do not allowing the data input. Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Show Condition .Decimal Figure1: Interface of General Configuration. Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Background color .Decimal Separator . Accepts negative .Used to increase the border size of the title.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Title CSS Attributes: Font . Bold .Decimal separator of the field.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. . Underlined .The field accepts negative values. Border Size .Used to apply bold type to the font. Font Size . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Border color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Color . super. Font Size . Font Color . Font Color .Sets the field width. text-bottom). middle. right.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. text-bottom). Background color . sub.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Horizontal Alignment .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. right. Underlined .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Bold . Border color . middle.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. bottom. bottom. Underlined . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Border Size . Border color .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the field height. Bold .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Vertical Alignment .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. top. HorizontalAlignment .Sets the title width. Font Size .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. center or justify). right. Height . center or justify). super. top. .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. center or justify).Used to increase the border size of the object.Used to increase the border size of the field. Height . Width . Border Size .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. text-top. sub. Vertical Alignment . Background color . text-top.Sets the title height. Width . Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to apply bold type to the font. Width . Create on-line instructions. sub. Help Type: Pop-up . super. middle. Height . Attributes: Tooltip .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. text-bottom).Vertical Alignment . . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Hint .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Sets the object width. top. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Help Settings Document the application.Sets the object height. bottom. text-top. .Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. Currency Image1: Interface of General Configuration. When the field is defined as a textm it accepts letters.Allow when activated to show the field as a label. the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. allows to use the field title that is configured in the grid. to show or don't show the filter condition. Separator .Allows when activated.Define the application field type.This option when activated. in this case the option filter label can't be used. VALUES FORMAT Precision . Use Gird Label .Precision of the decimal field. the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. Filter Label . Label field. to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_number.if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Number.Allow to determine the field width. Attributes: Submit on OnChange .Allows when activated.Define the application field title.Group Separator. . That is. Show Condition . numbers and characters. do not allowing the data input. Data type . Width . Accepts negative .The field accepts negative values. center or . Background color . Font Color .Decimal separator of the field. Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font. Title CSS Attributes: Font . Border color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Underlined .Decimal Separator .Used to increase the border size of the title. Border Size . Bold . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. right. Font Size . Border color . bottom.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the object. Font Color . Height . Field CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the field height. Background color . Underlined . Horizontal Alignment . text-bottom).Used to apply an underlined type to the font. sub. top.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. text-top.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Sets the title height. Border Size .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. right.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Width .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. center or justify). top. Border color .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Font Color .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. bottom.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Background color . middle. Underlined . Font Size . Vertical Alignment . HorizontalAlignment . Vertical Alignment . super. Bold . right.Sets the field width. super. Font Size .justify).Sets the title width. center or justify).Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. text-top. Border Size .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. text-bottom).Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Bold . Width . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . sub. Vertical Alignment . sub.Used to apply bold type to the font. middle. Height .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. super. . Hint . middle. Help Type: Pop-up .top. Height . text-bottom). describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. text-top. Create on-line instructions.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Sets the object width. Attributes: Tooltip . Help Settings Document the application. . Width .Sets the object height. bottom.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Text . .Display the specified help text beside the field. in this case the option filter label can't be used.Define the application field type. Label field.Define the application field title. Exibition . That is. Data type .Allow when activated to show the field as a label. the label is a field nickname in the application layer. allows to use the field title that is configured in the grid. Width . For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_date.Allow to select the data and the month through the combobox. Use Gird Label -This option when activated.if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Date. this makes possible the selection of the month and year passing to the field the value which was defined in the calendar. Internal Format . Attributes: Use Combobox .Allow to show beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field.Allow to determine the field width.Allow to select the exhibition format of the field. Display Format .Date Figure1: Interface of General Configuration. do not allowing the data input. Display Calendar . VALUES FORMAT Figure2: Interface of Filter Configuration. Field's Behavior . When the field is defined as a textm it accepts letters.Allow to show beside the field a calendar icon.Allow to select the storage mode of the field in the database. Filter Label . numbers and characters. >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. Show Condition .Allows when activated.Search yesterday.Search last week business days. This month -Search from beginning current month until current day.Search last 7 days. Yesterday .Search entire period. Last 7 days .Allows when activated. to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. Last week(sun-sat) . (Sun-Saturday). to show or don't show the filter condition. Today .Search last week. Note: Use the function Turn On/Off to add or remove a condition. the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. All period . . Last week business days (mon-fri) .(Mon-Fri). Ex: ((21/12/2007 27/12/2007).Search last month. Last month .Search today. SPECIAL CONDITIONS Special conditions available to Date fields allows the end user select common time periods to search. Attributes: Submit on OnChange . Bold .Note: Special condition filter form interface .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Background color . Font Color . Border color .Used to increase the border size of the title. Font Size . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Underlined .Used to apply bold type to the font. Border Size . Border Size . bottom.Used to increase the border size of the object. Font Size .Sets the field height. bottom. Font Color . Border Size . Bold . HorizontalAlignment .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Height . sub.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. top.Horizontal Alignment . center or justify). text-top. Horizontal Alignment . Bold . right. Width . sub. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Background color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. text-bottom). text-top.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Color . middle.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Width .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. right. Vertical Alignment . Border color . center or justify). Border color . Vertical Alignment .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. middle.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Used to increase the border size of the field. Background color . text-bottom).Sets the field width.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. super. Height .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. center or justify). right.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Underlined . Font Size .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. top.Sets the title height. super. .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Sets the title width. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. top.Sets the object width.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. super. Hint . middle. Create on-line instructions.Sets the object height. Height . Help Settings Document the application. text-top. Width . sub. .Vertical Alignment . Help Type: Pop-up . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. text-bottom). bottom. Attributes: Tooltip . .Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. Show Format . Use Gird Label .Allow to select the storage mode of the field in the database. Width . Attributes: Use Combobox . do not allowing the data input. Filter Label . That is. Exhibition . Data type .Allow to show beside the field a calendar icon. allows to use the field title that is configured in the grid. When the field is defined as a textm it accepts letters. this makes possible the selection of the month and year passing to the field the value which was defined in the calendar.Allow to determine the field width. Field's Behavior . VALUES FORMAT Figure2: Interface of Filter Configuration.Time Figure1: Interface of General Configuration. Show Calendar . Label field. in this case the option filter label can't be used.Allow to select the data and the month through the combobox.Allow to select the exhibition format of the field.Define the application field title. Internal Format .if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Hour.Define the application field type. numbers and characters. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_hour.Allow to show beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field.Allow when activated to show the field as a label.This option when activated. the label is a field nickname in the application layer. Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Allows when activated.Allows when activated. . to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. Show Condition . to show or don't show the filter condition.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Attributes: Submit on OnChange .>Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Font Color . Font Size . the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Title CSS Attributes: Font . Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Border Size .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Vertical Alignment . right. Border color . center or justify).Sets the field height.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Border color . Font Size .Used to increase the border size of the field. middle.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font.Background color . text-top.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. text-bottom).Sets the title width. Height . super.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. text-top. Horizontal Alignment . Background color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Used to increase the border size of the title. Background color . Border Size . Height .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. text-bottom). Width . bottom.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. bottom. HorizontalAlignment . Bold . right.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. center or justify). sub. top.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the field width.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Vertical Alignment . Font Color . Field CSS Attributes: Font . super.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Width . Bold . Underlined . top. middle. Font Color .Sets the title height.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. sub.Used to apply bold type to the font. Font Size . Underlined . Sets the object width. Underlined . Vertical Alignment .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Border Size .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Hint . right. Help Settings Document the application. center or justify).Sets the object height. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. . bottom. text-top.Used to apply bold type to the font.Bold . Attributes: Tooltip . super.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Border color . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Horizontal Alignment .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to increase the border size of the object. top. Help Type: Pop-up . Width .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Create on-line instructions. sub. text-bottom).Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. middle. Height . .Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. When the field is defined as a textm it accepts letters. Filter Label . Width . For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_date_hour. do not allowing the data input.Define the application field title. Show Format . Internal Format . the label is a field nickname in the application layer.Allow to determine the field width. allows to use the field title that is configured in the grid.Allow to show beside the field a calendar icon. numbers and characters. VALUES FORMAT Figure2: Interface of Filter Configuration.Allow to show beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field. Use Gird Label .Allow to select the storage mode of the field in the database.Date And Time Image1: Interface of General Configuration. Data type .Allow to select the exhibition format of the field. Attributes: Exhibition . Show Calendar .Define the application field type. if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Date. this makes possible the selection . Label field. in this case the option filter label can't be used. That is.Allow when activated to show the field as a label.This option when activated. Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. Attributes: Submit on OnChange . Show Condition .Allows when activated. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. to show or don't show the filter condition. the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option.of the month and year passing to the field the value which was defined in the calendar. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field.Allows when activated. Title CSS Attributes: . Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . center or justify). super.Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. bottom. Border color .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. right.Used to increase the border size of the title. Width . Font Color .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. text-bottom).Font .Sets the field width.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Font Size . middle. Field CSS Attributes: Font . top.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Height .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Height . middle. text-top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Underlined . sub. Background color . Bold .Sets the title height. super. Vertical Alignment . Border color . Underlined . Border Size .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the title width. bottom.Sets the field height. Bold .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color . top. Width . .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. sub.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. center or justify). HorizontalAlignment . Vertical Alignment .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment . right. text-bottom). Border Size . Font Size .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Font Color . text-top. .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. super.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Font Color . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Bold .Used to increase the border size of the object. top. Create on-line instructions. Help Type: Pop-up . Attributes: Tooltip .Font Size .Sets the object width.Sets the object height. Background color . sub. right.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Height .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Border color . bottom. text-bottom). Width .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font. Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Border Size . Vertical Alignment . center or justify). Help Settings Document the application. text-top. middle.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Underlined . Hint .Display the specified help text beside the field.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text . . the label is a field nickname in the application layer.This option when activated. Width . numbers and characters.Allows when activated. to show or don't show the filter condition. the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. allows to use the field title that is configured in the grid. Attributes: Submit on OnChange . in this case the option filter label can't be used. Search Label. When the field is defined as a textm it accepts letters.Maximum field size. Use same Label used on the Grid . Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface.Define the application field type. to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field.Define the application field title.Allow to determine the field width.Select Image1: General Settings Interface. Maximum Size .Allows when activated. Attributes: Data type . SQL Type . For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_date_hour.if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Date. Edition Lookup Edition lookup enables a a list of values display on forms fields.Database Field type. Show Condition . before and after enabling the edition lookup to display a select object containing a custom list of KEYS / VALUES. That is. Note on the screen bellow the State field. These lists of KEYS / VALUES can be defined in two ways: based on a database table (Automatic lookup ) or from custom arrays (lookup manual) . The query used to feed the select object on the form application. Attributes : SQL Select Statement . NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. Height . based in a SQL statement to feed the list of values or Manual which is based on a custom entered list of values.The character used to separate the items on generated string.Before Lookup After Lookup Lookup method There are available two options: Automatic. the default delimiter is semicolon ( . based on a SQL statement. Multiples Values .By selection yes. Image1: Automatic lookup settings. note the SQL statement on the picture bellow. views on it. retrieving always two fields. display_field FROM table ". it is possible to select many items on the fields list. only applicable when using the multiple values option.Select object rows quantity. ). It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables . Delimiter . the list of . Image1: Lookup method selection.Automatic Populates the select object dynamically. it is required to retrieve a key (insert / update) and a value to display on the object field on the SQL command. The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field . Edition Lookup . lookup value original & lookup values Separated by.KEY3 using an specified delimiter like .defined in Delimiter Single value Multiple Values Use Title . Title internal value . or . Use specific connection . Use specific connection.Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project. this option works combined with Title and Title internal value.The object title or its default option displayed as the first line. Checkbox Use the drop down .Character used to separate KEY and LOOKUP values displayed on the list of values.values will be saved on the table's field as a string containing the text: KEY1. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value.Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project. . Display original and lookup value.Displays the key field and the lookup field retrieved by the SQL statement. Reload form when value has changed .Allows to create a link to a list update form. the select object is automatically reloaded after the popup form update. Create Link . it is frequently used to re-load other lists which uses this field as parameter.Display the field Select as a drop down list of checkboxes. Title .KEY2.Forces a form reload when the OnChange event occurs on the select field. In the picture bellow.The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected.Allows to display a title line on the select object. Image2: Single value lookup settings. Image1: Manual edition lookup. Single Value Creates a simple select object.ManuaL Enables a select object based on a list of values filled manually as an array. Attributes: Lookup type. allows only one item selection. Multiple Values (position) and Multiple values (binary).Edition Lookup . . See picture bellow. Multiple Values (delimiter).Selects the lookup type: Single Value . ) Image3: Multiple values lookup (delimiter Label. Civil Status and Hobby in only one table field.When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. Value. Movies and Traveling is saved on the table's field as a string like S.M. For example the selection: Sports. Multiple values (delimiter) Saves a single string on the table's field based on a list of values displayed. Value. Delimiter .Label. Default .Object number of lines.The default delimiter is semicolon ( . See in the table bellow the positions used by each answers on the saved string.When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. for example it is possible to save answers to the topics: Gender . Multiple Values (Position) Saves on a string type field a list of values. Height. ). only applicable when using the multiple values option.Selected value by default. Note the default delimiter ( . Married and Books. Label Male Female Single Married Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F S M SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 Example: By selecting on the generated form: Male.T. the table's value saved a string is MMBO .The quantity of rows displayed in this select object. Height .Text displayed value.The character used to separated the items on generated string.Text displayed value. ) semicolon. (The string position counting start with 1) Size.When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. the saved value on table field is 3. Start. Implicit Value 1 2 4 8 16 Item Description Sports Movies Traveling Books Music The selection is converted into a integer which is the sum of the items implicit values before saving. Height. Implicit Value 1 2 4 8 16 Item Description Sports Movies Traveling Books Music 1 (Sports) + 2 (Movies) = 3 . Value. On this lookup field interface the Value to each item is a integer number generated automatically. Multiple Values (Binary) Allows to save a multiple selection as an integer value on a table field See the examples bellow. Negative . Example 1: By selecting Sports and Movies on the list of values.Value saved on the string when no value is selected.Text displayed value.Image4: Multiple Values lookup settings (position).Bytes quantity into the saved string. Label.Saved string initial position.Object number of lines. Inserts the item into the list of values Update Button .Item displayed text . the saved value on table field is 13. Insert Button . This option works combined with Title and Title internal value.The object title or its default option displayed as the first line.Removes the item from the list. Implicit Value 1 2 4 8 16 Item Description Sports Movies Traveling Books Music 1(Sports) + 4 (Traveling) + 8 (Books) = 13 Image5: Multiple Values settings(Binary) Label . Clear Button .Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list. Load lookup definitions .Object number of lines. the saved lists are displayed on the Load lookup definitions field. Title . Traveling and Books on the list of values. Title internal value .Example 2: By selecting Sports.Clear the item edit form. Use Title .Allows to display a title line on the select object.Update all the item properties.Saves the current list of values for re-usable purpose. Save Button .The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is . Height. Remove Button . Display the field Select as a drop down list of checkboxes. it is frequently used to re-load other lists which uses this field as parameter. Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. Checkbox using drop down .Character used to separate KEY and LOOKUP values displayed on the list of values. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. For example: a Select field "list of states".Forces a form reload when the OnChange event occurs on the select field. CheckBox. Display original and lookup value. Reload form when value has changed . . lookup value original & lookup values Separated by. and a second one list of cities. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select.selected.Displays the key field and the lookup field retrieved by the SQL statement. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value. text-bottom). Width . super.Used to apply bold type to the font. Border color .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. right. Font Size .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Title CSS Attributes: Font . text-top.Used to increase the border size of the title.Sets the title width. Font Color . bottom. Field CSS Attributes: .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Underlined . top.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Height .Sets the title height. Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Border Size .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Background color . Bold . sub.Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. center or justify). Vertical Alignment . middle. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. top. Font Size . Vertical Alignment . Bold . HorizontalAlignment . sub.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. top. Height . Font Color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Size .Sets the field height.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Vertical Alignment . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. sub. Width .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Background color .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Help Settings Document the application. Border color . super.Sets the object height. Width . Create on-line instructions.Used to increase the border size of the object. Bold . Horizontal Alignment . text-top. . text-bottom).Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. right. super.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Height .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Border Size . bottom. Background color .Used to increase the border size of the field. Font Color .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. right. Border Size .Font . text-bottom). text-top. Border color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the object width. center or justify). bottom. Underlined . middle. Underlined .Used to apply bold type to the font. center or justify).Sets the field width.Used to apply bold type to the font. middle. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Text .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Display the specified help text beside the field.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Attributes: Tooltip . Hint . Help Type: Pop-up . . Show Condition . Attributes: Submit on OnChange .The data type Double Select is an drop-down object which allow multiple selection through of two selection windows and a navigator betwen them (<< < > >>). SQL Type . Attributes: Data type . Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface.Database Field type. Before Lookup After Lookup . Use same Label used on the Grid .Allow to define the field title in the filter. Label Search .Allows when activated.Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid. to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field.Allows when activated. to show or don't show the filter condition. Width .Allow to determine the field width. the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. Edition Lookup Edition lookup enables a list of values display on forms fields.Double Select General Settings Figure1: Interface of General Configuration. views on it. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field .Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project. the default delimiter is semicolon ( .Character used to separate the field value and the lookup return value.The query used to feed the select object on the form application. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables .Forces a form reload upon selected field update. display_field FROM table ". retrieving always two fields. DISPLAY SETTINGS .The character used to separate the items on generated string.Select object rows quantity Delimiter . For example: a Select field "list of states".Figure1: Edition lookup Interface Attributes : SQL Select Statement . Display original and lookup value.Displays the field value and the lookup return value. Use specific connection. Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. and a second one list of cities. ). Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. Height . AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select. CheckBox. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value. Reload form when value has changed . right.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Background color . Bold . text-top. text-bottom). Title CSS Attributes: Font . sub. Font Size . center or justify).Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. .Used to apply bold type to the font.Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Horizontal Alignment . Vertical Alignment . Width . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Border color . middle. bottom. Font Color . top.Used to increase the border size of the title. Underlined . super.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the title width.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Border Size . Sets the object width. middle. HorizontalAlignment .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Border Size . sub.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Height .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to apply bold type to the font. Horizontal Alignment .Sets the title height. Border Size .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Vertical Alignment . Bold . Vertical Alignment . text-top. bottom. Underlined .Used to increase the border size of the object.Sets the field height.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the field width.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. top. Field CSS Attributes: Font . Width . Height . text-bottom). top.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Font Color . Background color . right. Border color . Font Size . Font Size . right.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Background color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. middle. text-bottom). Width .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Underlined . Height . . super. sub. Border color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. super. center or justify). text-top.Sets the object height.Used to apply bold type to the font. Bold . bottom.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Used to increase the border size of the field. Font Color . center or justify). Hint .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Attributes: Tooltip . Text . . Create on-line instructions. Help Type: Pop-up .Display the specified help text beside the field.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Help Settings Document the application. . to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. Show Condition . Label Search .Maximum field size.Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid. Edition Lookup Edition lookup is a way to display checkbox list of values on forms fields. Attributes: Data type .Checkbox Image1: Interface of General Configuration. See the image below.Checkbox is an object which allows the selction of one or more information through a marking object.Allow to define the field title in the filter. SQL Type . Width . It is possible to populate the checkboxes objects based on a database table (Automatic lookup ) or from custom arrays (Manual lookup) Before Lookup After Lookup .Allow to determine the field width. Maximum Size .Allows when activated. Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. to show or don't show the filter condition.Allows when activated. Attributes: Submit on OnChange .Database Field type. Use same Label used on the Grid . Lookup Methods There are available two options: Automatic. it is frequently used to re-load another lists of values which requires this field as parameter. Image2: Automatic lookup settings.UT when using the semicolon delimiter. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables . the default delimiter is semicolon ( .Forces a form reload when the OnClick event occurs on the checkbox field. Edition Lookup . .Display an object to check all items and another to uncheck all items. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row.The character used to separate the items on generated string.Automatic Populates the checkbox object dynamically. Columns . Attributes: SQL Select Statement . Note the SQL statement on the picture bellow. Image1: Lookup method selection. Delimiter .ID>. display_field FROM table ". views on it. NOTE: The automatic lookup option requires the form field to be string type because multiple selection saves a single string on database table field like AK.checkbox number of columns. it is required to retrieve a key ( insert / update) and a value to display on the object as fields on the SQL command. ).The query used to feed the checkbox object on the form application. retrieving always two fields. Reload form when value has changed . based on a SQL statement. based in a SQL statement to feed the list of values or Manual which is based on a custom entered list of values. The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field . Option check all . Edition Lookup .Single Value settings. Choose connection . the field original value and the value retrieved by lookup are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by.Manual Allows the developer to manually crete a list of values saved in the application when there is no table available with the information needed. Single Value Selects only on value on the list. to display only the value retrieved by the lookup. . Attributes : Lookup type.Run the select statement in a different connection available in the project.Display original and lookup value .. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.Text displayed value in the checkbox object. Label. Otherwise. Image1: Edition Lookup Manual Interface. Multiple Values (position) and Multiple values (binary).Selects the lookup type: Single Value . Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by . See picture bellow.Select No. Multiple Values (delimiter). Image2: Edition lookup .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the lookup return value. The default delimiter is semicolon ( . Value.Text displayed value in the checkbox object. start position in the saved string and size in bytes each item. Multiple Values (Position) Saves multiple values on a single string.The character used to separated the items on generated string. Default . Civil Status(1byte) and Hobby (2bytes) in a single use the table bellow (with the positions used by each item).Checkbox columns quantity. Columns .When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field.Selected value by default. ). Note the default delimiter ( . For example the selection: Sports. only applicable when using the multiple values option. For example.M. For example when Ipho Coffee is selected the value saved is 43. ) semicolon.Multiple Values (delimiter) settings.Value.Checkbox columns quantity. Label Male Female Single Married Sports Movies Books Traveling Value M F S M SP MO BO TR Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 Example: By selecting on the generated form: Male. Married and Books. Image3: Edition lookup . Columns . to save Gender (1byte).T. Movies and Traveling is saved on the table's field as a string like S. Using the Multiple Values (Position) mode is required to enter the label. Multiple values (Delimiter) Saves a single string on the table's field based on a list of values displayed.When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. Label. Delimiter. the table's value saved a string is MMBO . Value.Checkbox columns quantity. Example 1: By selecting Sports and Movies on the list of values. Negative .Saved string initial position. (The string position counting start with 1) Size.Value saved on the string when no value is selected. Start. the saved value on table field is 13.Multiple Values (position) settings Label.Image4: Edition lookup . On this lookup field interface the Value to each item is a integer number generated automatically.Text displayed value in the checkbox object. the saved value on table field is 3. Columns . AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports . Multiple Values (Binary) Allows to save a multiple selection as an integer value on a field See the examples bellow.When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field at the specified position. AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music 1 (Sports) + 2 (Movies) = 3 Example 2: By selecting Sports. Traveling and Books on the list of values. AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music The selection is converted into a integer which is the sum of the items implicit values before saving.Bytes quantity into the saved string. 2 4 8 16 Movies Books Traveling Music 1 (Sports) + 4 (Books) + 8 ( Traveling) = 13 Image5: Edition lookup . it is frequently used to re-load another lists of values which requires this field as parameter. . the field original value and the value retrieved by lookup are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Clear . Option check all . Update .Remove selected item.Checkbox columns quantity. Load lookup definitions . Display original and lookup value . Remove .Display an object to check all items and another to uncheck all items.Insert Label and Value in the values list.Update selected item. Reload form when value has changed . Save .Saves the current list of values for re-usable purpose. the saved lists are displayed on the Load lookup definitions field. Columns .Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list.Select No.Clear the item edit form.Text displayed value in the checkbox object. Otherwise.Multiple Values (binary) settings Label. to display only the value retrieved by the lookup.Forces a form reload when the OnClick event occurs on the checkbox field. Insert . Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the lookup return value. Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select.Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by . Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. . CheckBox. and a second one list of cities. For example: a Select field "list of states". Border Size .Used to increase the border size of the title.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Height . Font Color .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Horizontal Alignment . Font Size . Bold . middle. Field CSS Attributes: Font . Underlined . right.Sets the field width. Object Input CSS . Border Size . Font Size .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Width . text-bottom).Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. bottom. Vertical Alignment . Vertical Alignment .Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Font Color . Underlined .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. super. right. Bold . center or justify). text-top.Sets the title width.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. top.Sets the field height. middle. text-bottom). HorizontalAlignment .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. text-top. top. Height . Border color . Width . Background color .Used to increase the border size of the field.Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. bottom. Border color . center or justify). Background color . sub. super. sub.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the title height. Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. center or justify).Sets the object height.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. super.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Font Size . middle. Underlined . Vertical Alignment .Used to increase the border size of the object. Height .Used to apply bold type to the font.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Help Type: Pop-up . sub. top. . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. bottom. Width .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Attributes: Font .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Help Settings Document the application.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. right. text-bottom).Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. text-top.Sets the object width. Background color . Bold . Attributes: Tooltip .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Border color . Horizontal Alignment . Border Size . Font Color . Create on-line instructions. Display the specified help text beside the field.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. .Hint . Text . Width . Use Grid Label . the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option.Allow to determine the field width.Radio Image1: Interface of General Configuration.Allows when activated. do not allowing the data input. Filter Label . Attributes: Data Type . Edition Lookup Display a radio object list to use in the form (see manual lookup and automatic lookup ) . to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. Attributes: Submit on OnChange .Allow to define the field title in the filter.Allow when activated to show the field as a label.Radio is an object which allows the selection fof just an information of all that are shown by it.Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid. Show Condition . to show or don't show the filter condition. Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. Label field.Allows when activated. Before Lookup Lookup Method After Lookup . based in a SQL statement to feed the list of values or Manual which is based on a custom entered list of values.There are available two options: Automatic. . NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. the developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field . It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables . Image1: Lookup type selection Edition Lookup . Single column Radio double columns Radio Use Title . Columns .The query used to feed the checkbox object on the form application. retrieving always two fields.Automatic Lookup used to display values in a Radio field. The values are retrieved with a Select Statement from a database table. display_field FROM table ".Display a different radio option in the field (See None on the image bellow ) referring to a value filled manually (Title Internal value ). Image2: Automatic Edition lookup Interface Attributes : SQL Select Statement . views on it.radio number of columns. Insert . Title internal value . Use specific connection. Edition Lookup .Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. Update . the value M is added upon selecting Male.Manual Enables a radio object based on a list of values filled manually as an array.Text displayed in the radio object.Displays the field value and the lookup return value. Columns .Forces a form reload upon selected field update.Define a selection default value.Value store in the table. Attributes : Label . Display original and lookup value.Title . See picture bellow.Character used to separate the field value and the lookup return value.Update selected item.The object title or its default option displayed as the first line. Reload form when value has changed .Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project. Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by.Define number of columns used to display the radio items. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value. Value . For example. Image1: Manual Edition lookup Interface. Default . Use Manual lookup when the database does not have a table with required information.The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected. . Forces a form reload upon selected field update. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. Reload form when value has changed . and a second one list of cities. Save .Display a different radio option in the field (See None on the image bellow ) referring to a value filled manually (Title Internal value ). AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select. Use Title . Title internal value . Title .Remove . Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value.The object title or its default option displayed as the first line.Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list. For example: a Select field "list of states".The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected. Display original and lookup value.Clear the attributes.Remove selected item.Saves the list values entered (for reuse with Load lookup definitions ).Displays the field value and the lookup return value. Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by. Load lookup definitions . DISPLAY SETTINGS .Character used to separate the field value and the lookup return value. CheckBox. Clear . Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. Horizontal Alignment . text-top. Border color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Vertical Alignment . Border Size . bottom. Background color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Sets the title width.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Height . Font Size . text-bottom).Used to apply bold type to the font. top. sub.Sets the title height. center or justify). middle.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. .Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Width . Font Color .Used to increase the border size of the title. Bold . Title CSS Attributes: Font . right.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Underlined . super.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Underlined .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Underlined .Field CSS Attributes: Font . Bold .Used to apply bold type to the font. top. middle. right. Height .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Bold . right. middle.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. . sub. Border Size . Height . Border Size . Background color . Font Size .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. bottom. super.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. text-bottom). center or justify). text-bottom).Sets the object height.Used to increase the border size of the field. Width .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. top.Sets the field width.Used to increase the border size of the object.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Width . Vertical Alignment .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. sub.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. bottom. Border color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment . Font Color . Font Size .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color . text-top. Vertical Alignment .Sets the field height. Border color . Font Color . super. text-top.Sets the object width. Horizontal Alignment . center or justify). Hint .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. . Create on-line instructions. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Help Type: Pop-up . Text . Attributes: Tooltip .Display the specified help text beside the field.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Help Settings Document the application. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. . Attributes: Data type . Use Grid Label . . Filter Label .Grid Fields General Configuration Figure1: Interface of General Configuration. Label field.Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid. do not allowing the data input. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Allow when activated to show the field as a label.Allow to define the field title in the filter.“Search Fields” is a new resource which allow the selection of the fields that will be part of the grid body of the search. Used to increase the border size of the title.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size . right. middle.Sets the title width. text-top.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Vertical Alignment .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font. text-bottom). Font Color . Font Color . Underlined . HorizontalAlignment . top. Width .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Sets the field height.Sets the title height. Height .Sets the field width.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Border color . sub.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. super. Border Size .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Underlined .Used to apply bold type to the font. Bold . Height . Border Size .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. middle. bottom. Background color . Bold . center or justify). center or justify). Border color . Font Size .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Title CSS Attributes: Font . Vertical Alignment . text-top. sub. text-bottom). right. bottom. super. top. Width . Object Input CSS . Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Background color . Attributes: Font . super.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. . Width .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. bottom. text-top. right. Border Size .Sets the object height. Height .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Attributes: Tooltip . Help Type: Pop-up . Help Settings Document the application. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border color . Font Color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Sets the object width. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Font Size . Background color .Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Underlined . Bold . text-bottom). Vertical Alignment .Used to increase the border size of the object. Create on-line instructions. middle. sub.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Horizontal Alignment .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. center or justify). Display the specified help text beside the field. .Hint .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text . Filter Label . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. .Allow to define the field title in the filter. Use Grid Label . Attributes: Tipo do Dados .Sorting Figure1: Interface of General Configuration."Ordenação dos Campos" é um novo recurso que permite de sejam selecionados os ordem campos ( clausula ORDER BY) que fazem parte do corpo da GRID da Consulta. Height .Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid.Allow to determine the field height. Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. center or justify). Border Size . . middle. Border Size . Font Size . Height .Sets the title height.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. sub. Border color . right. top. Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. super. center or justify).Sets the field height. Background color . Underlined . Vertical Alignment .Sets the title width. Vertical Alignment . text-top.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. bottom. sub. Width . middle. text-bottom). Field CSS Attributes: Font . Border color . Title CSS Attributes: Font . Background color . Font Size . right.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Font Color . Underlined .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Font Color .Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Bold .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Height .Sets the field width.Used to increase the border size of the title. Bold . HorizontalAlignment .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. top. super.Used to increase the border size of the field. Width .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. bottom. text-bottom).Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. text-top.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. sub. Font Color . text-bottom). Horizontal Alignment .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Font Size .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Vertical Alignment . Create on-line instructions. Width . Attributes: Tooltip .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the object. Underlined .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Help Settings Document the application. right. Border color .Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the object height. Background color . middle. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Border Size . super.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Help Type: Pop-up . Bold . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. bottom.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Sets the object width.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. center or justify). text-top. Height . top.Used to apply bold type to the font. . Display the specified help text beside the field.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Hint . Text . . Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface.This type when selected.Allow to define the field title in the filter. it provides the fulfillment of a field with more agility.Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid. the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field.Allow when activated to show the field as a label. Label field .Allows when activated. Filter Label . to show or don't show the filter condition.Allows when activated. Figure1: Interface of General Configuration of the field. Width . Attributes: Submit on OnChange . Use Grid Label . Edition Lookup . Show Condition .Text Auto-complete AUTO-COMPLETE TEXT This data type is one of the great news of the ScriptCase5.Allow to determine the field width. do not allowing the data input. Attributes: Data Type . allow to fill a field with more agility. using the technology Ajax. When this option is not selected. Permite determinar o modo de busca do texto(Início igual. Width . Attributes: SQL Select Statement .Select a different connection. Any part. Capture Text .Define the capture box width (Capture Text). for example.Define the number of records displayed on each search. AJAX PROCESSING . only the name of the State in the Capture.Figure3: Edition Lookup Interface.With this option disabled (=No) displays. See an example in the link below.Allows you to display the label with the description.Enter a select comand use to capture the text.Qualquer parte e Final igual). Display label with the description . End equals).Define the texts earch mode (Begin equals. Choose connection . Display original and lookup value . Rows . in the application is displayed only a field to data entry. Search options . Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. and a second one list of cities. . Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. For example: a Select field "list of states". Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. CheckBox. Font Color . Font Size . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to apply bold type to the font. Title CSS Attributes: Font . Background color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Underlined .Reloads other selection type fields (Select. Bold . Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Border Size . middle.Used to increase the border size of the object. Background color . text-top. text-bottom). Border color .Sets the field width. .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. bottom. Height .Used to apply bold type to the font. right. right.Sets the field height.Border Size . text-bottom).Used to apply an underlined type to the font. top. super.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the title. Bold . Bold . Vertical Alignment .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Underlined .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Underlined .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Width . Font Size . Border Size . Background color . Font Size . center or justify). Border color . sub.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. sub. Border color . Vertical Alignment .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Width . top. Horizontal Alignment .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Sets the title height.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. super. text-top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. bottom.Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. HorizontalAlignment . middle. Font Color . Height .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the title width. center or justify).Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Font Color . Field CSS Attributes: Font . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Help Type: Pop-up . right. bottom. Vertical Alignment .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Width . center or justify). . middle.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Help Settings Document the application. Height .Sets the object height.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. sub. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. text-bottom). Attributes: Tooltip . top.Sets the object width.Horizontal Alignment . super. text-top. Create on-line instructions. Hint . .Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. Field's Behavior >Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface. the same just functions if the filter will have at least one option. That is. to show or don't show the filter condition. Attributes: Submit on OnChange . Filter Label .if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Number.Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid. Edition Lookup .Allows when activated. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as nm_number.This type when selected. Show Condition . Use Grid Label . Attributes: Data Type . Image1: Interface of General Configuration of the field.Define the application field title. it provides the fulfillment of a field with more agility.Number Auto-complete This data type is one of the great news of the ScriptCase5. the label is a field nickname in the application layer. allow to fill a field with more agility. Width .Allow when activated to show the field as a label. Label field.Allows when activated. to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field. using the technology Ajax. do not allowing the data input.Allow to determine the field width. Search options . Rows . Capture Text .Define the capture box width (Capture Text). Width .Enter a select comand use to capture the text. in the application is displayed only a field to data entry.Figure3: Edition Lookup Interface. End equals).Qualquer parte e Final igual). Any part. Permite determinar o modo de busca do texto(Início igual.Allows you to display the label with the description. Display label with the description . only the name of the State in the Capture.Define the number of records displayed on each search. Choose connection . AJAX PROCESSING . Display original and lookup value . for example.With this option disabled (=No) displays. See an example in the link below.When this option is not selected.Define the texts earch mode (Begin equals. Attributes: SQL Select Statement .Select a different connection. Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to apply bold type to the font. Bold . Background color . and a second one list of cities.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Font Color . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Border Size .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. CheckBox. Font Size . Underlined . Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. . Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to increase the border size of the title. For example: a Select field "list of states".Reloads other selection type fields (Select.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Sets the field width. Bold .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Underlined .Used to apply bold type to the font. Font Size . text-bottom).Sets the title height.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Border Size . Height . Bold .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. super. Border color . Font Size .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Border Size .Sets the title width.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to increase the border size of the field.Sets the field height. Height . Background color . Border color . Font Color . text-bottom).Border color .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. center or justify). Horizontal Alignment . bottom. Width . Width . sub. super. Vertical Alignment . middle. right. right. Underlined . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . center or justify). Field CSS Attributes: Font . Font Color . middle. text-top.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. top.Used to increase the border size of the object. bottom.Used to apply bold type to the font. Background color .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Vertical Alignment . top. sub.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. . text-top. .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Sets the object height. middle. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. super.Sets the object width. Height . Create on-line instructions. text-top.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Help Type: Pop-up .Horizontal Alignment . bottom. Help Settings Document the application. Vertical Alignment . Hint . Width .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. top. Attributes: Tooltip .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. text-bottom). sub. right. center or justify). .Display the specified help text beside the field.Text . The absolute path where the application documents are stored.Application code determinated in the moment of the application creation. Localization .Run the application in debug mode. Share theme variable . all the hints and messages are displayed in selected language. Debug Mode .Use the session location variable in this application.This field can be used to describe of the application objectives.Generated application language . Description . Application images . this code can be renamed through the main menu. Share location variable . Image Directory .Specific images used by this application. showing the SQL Command in the moment of its using. Script Error .Displays the SQL command which originated the error.Application Settings Define the common ScriptCase applications attributes. SQL Error .The base directory where the application images are stored. . See below the attributes description: Attributes: Application code .Displays the script and the line where the error occurred.Use the session theme variable in this application. Documents Path . HelpCase Link -Associate a this application to a project documentation page.Folder where the application is stored in the workspace. .Folder . Zero is the standard value of the PHP. Edit Project -Allows other group users to edit the application. Timeout .Time of execution timeout in seconds. which is used to store the URL of the current application. Redirecting URL . this global is most commonly used to filter the form in the SQL menu.Variable name. Attributes: Exit URL .Navigation Define the navigation attributes of an application.When exiting the application.Specify the URL to which the user will be redirected upon exiting the aplication.URL to which the user will be redirected in case a global variable is not available inside the application for any reason is not avaliable. . Figure 1: Navigation interface. close the browser window. Close Window . Redirecting Variable . Attribute . Post. etc.Defines that the variable must be passed by the HTML command line.Defines that the variable must be passed through the post method of the form. Variable passing methods : Session . Image 2: Variables Settings Interface.Variable name in the application. being visible to the browser. that means. Global variables are defined in square brackets ([variable]). Example: Select customerid.Defines how the variable is received by the application. . Get) Image 1: Global Variables Interface. Value . Select the way it is passed to the Control application.Global Variables GLOBAL VARIABLE This menu shows the global variables being used within the application. the global variable is a external parameter required to application execution. customername from customers where customerid ='[v_customerid]' In this case. These variables should be passed to the application that is being implemented through one of the methods (Session. Get . they are: Scope . the variables "v_customerid" appears in the variables configuration. The application may contain global variables in the Where Clause.Defines variables behavior. Post . this content is subdivided in three blocks.In this option the variable must be created as a session variable in the PHP by other application before the search call which is being defined. if has been defined that a variable is received by a Post Method and it has been passed by get method the content won't be accepted. created by special fields. in Lookups. or entering a variable in Application General Data field to replace the field name. Shows all global variables used in the application. Description.Settings . a form requesting the input variables used by the application is displayed.Determines where the variable was defined. At execution time in the development environment.Do not validate (checking) the variable at execution time.Defines if the variable is an input or an output. Type (Input/Output) . . Image 1: Attribute Settings interface.Programming Attributes Attributes are variables containing a global variable passed from one application to another. Attributes: Attributes . To modify it click on the attribute's name (located to the left of the buttons) and click the Update button to save your changes. .Enter the attribute's name and click on the include button to add it. Click the clean button to clean the attributes list. click on the delete button after selecting the atribute. An attribute can be referenced in all of the methods and events of an application. To remove an attribute. click the 'Var' button: . To include a parameter variable in a method. 2 Methods may involve parameters being passed. Using methods in applications it is possible to reuse code and thus improve development productivity. It is possible to create PHP and JAVASCRIPT methods. Define the name for the new method then click the Create button. 1. See the Figure below. Figure 1: Method menu interface. Figure 3: Adding a Method.Methods Methods are functions or procedures declared by the developer. to support the implementation of business rules for an application. Creating a new method Figure 2: Create a new Method. * 10270 Value Default: The default value used to initialize the parameter variable when called. Type: Select the variable type as: For value or For reference. click the button: . To Edit a parameter variable in a method.Figure 4: Parameter Variable icon. Name: Input a variable name. * References allow you to create a second name for a variable so you can use it to read or modify the original data stored in that variable. Add the number of variables: Figure 5: Define Parameters interface Defining a variable: Figure 6: Add Parameters interface. . Unmark all parameter variables selected in the Parameters field.Figure 7: Define Method Parameters interface. it needs to be called within an event. See how simple it is to call the method in the example below: Using a method : Figure 9: Event method interface Thus we get the following result when running the application. In this example we are using the onLoad event to call our method when the record is loaded. Edit the variable selected in the Parameters field. See the example below: Figure 8: Events. 3 In order to run a method. Select all parameter variables in the Parameters field. Delete the variable selected in the Parameters field. . Libraries To use a library you need to select the corresponding library type (e. Public Libraries. access them via the main menu: Configuration ==> Libraries.g. . Project Libraries or User Libraries) and enable the applicable php library file(s). All methods in the library are visible in all application events and methods. To manage libraries. The record title is displayed in the hour line. Image1: Calendar for a month application interface. weeks. religious. The main concept is defined time periods. typically days. Calendar for Day This option shows all hours in a selected day. Calendar for Month This option shows all days in a selected month.Calendar Applications Overview Calendar A calendar is an organizer application for social. The record title is displayed in the day slot. months. . commercial. and years. or administrative purposes. Calendar for Week This option shows all days in a selected week. The record title is displayed in the hour line and day columm cell. .Image2: >Calendar for a day application interface. . Creating or Editing the record. double click in calendar to open the form to insert a new schedule.Image3:Calendar for a week application interface. Upon selecting day and hour. Image4:Editing record in calendar application. Settings Settings Use this option to define the application. Horizontal Alignment . * * The form application that insert a new schedule in calendar application. Attributes: Ajax . and are organized in tables. pixel or automatic.Iframe form width. . Margins . open in modal iframe on top of calendar. Image1: Settings Interface. etc. For the automatic option the '%' or 'px' is omitted and the browser will automatically dimension the table. When using percentage is generated a HTML with the format <TABLE WIDITH="70%"> (as an example with 70 as the field width input).Allows to define the application horizontal alignment in the page.Application width value. In pixel. * Height . The ScriptCase applications are generated in the HTML standard.Allows to activate the use of ajax resources (Ajax Events. Table Width . the generated html to the same application has the tag <TABLE WIDITH="70px">. lines and cells.Measurement unit used in table width defined in the previous item: percentage.Iframe form height. right and left). Auto-complete text. Table Width Unit. Width .Defines the application margins (up.) in the generated application. This parameter defines the most external application table width. down. Block .PK .This option defines whether it is to be given internal values to the selected field when inserting a new record. Figure 1: Edit Fields Interface. such as autoincrement.Update . datetime and IP. which are arranged as high-level tabs. 4.Required . 4.Page: Fields not shown . Select the desired data type from the dropdown box. blocks and pages by dragging fields up or down to a different block or page. 5 .Edit Fields The Edit Fields options was included to Scriptcase on the version six. Each page can contain one or more blocks.Data type .3 .Defines if the field will become a read-only field. date. 7 .7 .Will set a field or fields as a primary key for the application.Defines if the field will become a required field. this new menu option groups the most commonly used field configuration for all fields at the same place.Check the checkbox to specify that the field must be displayed when editing a record (Edition mode).DB Value (Update) .Indicates that there is a Page in the application. An application may have multiple pages. Display Available just to Forms and Control applications.1 . such as autoincrement. Note: Please note that each line is draggable.Label . 2 .Column to edit the field's label displayed in the generated application.5 . This option allows you to set a default value to the field.Fields . 4.This column is used to show the field's name. 4. date. 4. 4.New .DB Value (Insert) . Options: 1 . this way it cannot be edited. 4 . 6 .Indicates that there is a Block in the application.Check the checkbox to specify that the field must be displayed when entering a new record (Addition mode). Remember: Fields are grouped in Blocks and Blocks are grouped in Pages.2 .Page . datetime and IP.4 .Form option. If only one field is selected it will work as a regular primary key. if two or more fields were selected it will work as a composite key. 3 .6 . This allows you to define the position of fields. .This option defines whether it is to be given internal values to the selected field when updating a record. Not available for Grid Applications 4. It is not available for Grid Applications.Read-Only .This contains all fields that will not be displayed in the generated application.This allows the change of the field's type. Determine whether or not to display a message upon validation. .Figure 2: Display Interface.Indicates where the marker will be displayed in relation to the field. Options: Markers Positioning . Display message . The list on the right displays which fields will be displayed in the application (select a field and click on the right arrow to include it in the form). Note: The list on the left displays all fields retrieved from the SQL select query for the application. Figure 1: Select Fields. .Select Fields Fields Positioning Defines which fields are displayed in the application. Unique Key It provides unique key validation at web server side. . Image 1: Unique Fields Interface. Update .Toolbar The toolbar is divided in two parts: top and bottom. It is possible to select the buttons for each part independently. Attributes: .Displays the buttons used to modify recorded information on the form (insert. Attributes: Navigation . delete) .Displays the buttons used to navigate on the form (first. previous. update. The selection of these buttons vary according to the form application. next. last. exit ). A button can even be in both parts simultaneously. Image1: Interface of toolbar. Buttons Settings Image2: Buttons Settings Interface. The selection of these buttons vary according to the form application. OPTIONS Image3: Options Interface.Group help by block. ."Consolidates" all field help in a unique page linking to the help page. General Help .Button .Defines a hint to the button. Help by Block .Defines the label displayed on the button. Is possible to define a help text to each field and an icon is displayed in the block title bar linking to the help page. Access Key .Button name.Allows to define fast access keys using the keyboard. Label .Use automatic filled format . Hint . Attributes: JS Formatting . Log New interface included in the V6. Options: Scheme .Use all fields in the log. Events .Which event the log will save the application changes. All Fields . It will allow the user to change the log's configuration for the application. Image 1: Log Interface.Scheme of log to be used for the application. . Connection -Displays the connection name (database) that the application is using for its execution.Enter the ORDER BY clause to determine the order that the records are displayed. note: On/Off Button . To order click on the field and use the arrows. filters and ordinances for the form.Table name that the form application is using.In this function it is displayed a combobox object with an asterisks that indicate what are the fields that are SQL table primary key fields . Define primary key. For cases that are not identifiable by the Scriptcase the user must use the buttons to select the field as key.Defines that no field is primary key (unselect all). Table Name . this connection can be replaced by another that have the same tables (SQL). Normally it is used to clean all definitions of the On/Off and restart the process. Interface Image1: SQL Settings Select primary key fields . . In the majority of cases. Order By .Sql Define the attributes relative to the connection to the table used by the form. the order is determinated by the primary key. Where Condition .Enter the WHERE to retrieve the records to edit. All Button .Defines all fields as primary key. When the navigation is used by default.Select/unselect the field as primary key displaying an asterisk at its left side. the Scriptcase identifies it. Ordinance Buttons .Allows to order the primary key fields. None . Note: In the first field enter the variable name.Fields to allow to be replaced part of the table name defined in the select.Set it to "No" only if the database is configured for case-sensitive and it is desired that the filter does not respect this setting. .Variable for Table . Case Sensitive . In the second field enter the part of the table name to be replaced. before the execution. .Define the fields that reference to the Stored Procedure parameters and each parameter type (input or output). Image2: Defining procedure parameters.Procedures Configures a form application to use Stored Procedure (defined by the database) for adding. 2. Enter the procedure name and the amount of parameters. UPDATE and DELETE.Mark the option: “I want to use Procedure to do INSERT”. Click on the button save to complete this process. and excluding information. updating. See below step-by-step implementation for Stored Procedure Database Insertion. Image1: Stored Procedures Interface 1 . When not configured to use procedures the default is to use Scriptcase standards for the commands INSERT. Image3: Passing values to the Stored Procedure. . When click on the buttons (new.Occurs always that the object gains focus. that do a reload on the form. insert. See example onMouseOut . for each field you can edit actions associated to its events.Javascript The concept of Edit Javascript is to associate to the form fields events in Javascript.Occurs always that the mouse pointer is over the field. that means. previous. In this screen we can type customized javascript actions or we can use default Scriptcase events. OnLoad .In this combobox we must choose the event associated to the field. See example Events linked to the form . Choose event . that means. See example onChange . when you navigate from a register to other. OnSubmit . Image1: Edit Javascript Interface Attributes: Choose the object .Occurs on the mouse click over the field See Example onblur . etc). then click on the button "Edit" opening a window to edit the javascript action that will be executed when the selected event is actioned. for whom we will write the Javascript code.In this combobox are shown all fields that are part of the form application.Always that the mouse pointer goes out of the field.The events below are directly linked to the form. “update” and “remove” Edit Javascript Selecting the object and its event.Occurs always that the object lose focus and the value is modified.Occurs when the objects lose focus. See the available events: onclick . for example: nm_reload_form(). as the object form “form”. .This event occurs when click on the buttons “insert”. See example onMouseOver .This event occurs when the page is loaded. See example onFocus . value > 5000.weekly_hour_job.F1.payway[document. if(document.tp_folha[0].aux_maternity.aux_maternity.").F1. Note: Javascript language doesn't have the same behavior to each browser available in the market. } onChange examples: When modify the “Salary” of an employee and go out of the field. in this moment we use advantage to check if the “position” is “gardener”. the javascript code below calculates the value of the parcel. document. If it's necessary to type a complex rotine using Javascript.F1.aux_maternity.F1.F1.text == 'avista') { .sex[1].checked){ document.F1. } After informing the value of the purchase and select the modality of the payment in an object of the “Select: type payment_way”.F1.value > '20') { alert("job hour above the allowed.disabled = false. will occur an “onChange”.salary. if(document.F1.disabled = true.background='FCEEBC' } Note: To access a field of the radio time it is necessary to use an index. Save the javascript command clicking on the button "update". if (document.focus().F1.00 && document. document.style. if (document. OnClick Example: When click on a field of the radio type can be turned on/off a series of form fields according to the selected value.position. document.value == 'gardener'){ alert('when you grow i want to be a gardener').F1.value = "".aux_maternity .sex[0]. OnBlur Example: We can define a criteria around the field “weekly_hour_job” when it loose focus. document.background='FFFFFF' } if(document.F1. we recommend to make tests in different browsers.F1.checked){ document.weekly_hour_job.Image2: Interface of Javascript Edition.checked && document.style.F1.weekly_hour_job.selectedIndex].payment_way.F1. F1.value.F1.F1. document.value = document.F1.parcelvalue.purchasevalue.F1.value = document.payment_way.field_name.style. } if (document.) when the mouse is over the field.text == '30/60') { document.bgColor = "FFFFFF" . } if (document.field_name.bgColor = "0FFCCA" onMouseOut example: Set a background color when the mouse loose focus of the field.document.F1. etc.F1.value / 2.F1.F1.value = document.payment_way.payway [document.payway[document.value / 3.selectedIndex]. font color. } onMouseOver Example: We can trade the stile (background color.text == '30/60/90') { document.F1.purchasevalue.selectedIndex].F1.style.parcelvalue. document.parcelvalue.purchasevalue.F1. In this example we will create an dependency between adm_suppliers_products (Dependent table) with the table adm_supplier (Actual application). For example. Click on the button new dependency to begin. In this example only one field is related : the supplier code.First define a new dependence.Select the dependent table and inform the amount of fields related to the father and child table.Select the keys (linking fields) : adm_suppliers -> supplierID . defining a dependency between tables. 2º . 3º .Dependencies A resource to allow to link related tables. removing a record from the table of orders.adm_suppliers_products ->supplierID. 4º . 1º. . all its items also have to be removed. See an example using this resource below.Click on the button generate Scripts to define the dependence rule. the table of orders and items. 5º . Click on the button Generate to complete this process. . the position of the ScriptCase in the Event (onBeforeDelete).Select the script type to be generated. Access to applications may be granted through a control application to authenticate users. In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user). } .'on'). } elseif({userid} == 'mary') { sc_apl_status('grid_categories'.'on'). Disabled applications display the message "Unauthorized user" when accessed.'on'). Example 1: Activating an application called grid_categories. Example 2: Creating a rule to authenticate by user type in a login form containing a field called userid.'on'). sc_apl_status('form_products'.'on'). the application is only accessible when enabled using the sc_apl_status macro. See the examples below.'off'). } else{ sc_error_message("Unauthorized user!"). insert the following macro call: sc_apl_status('grid_categories'.'off'). insert the following code: // two users: john and mary with permission to access different applications if({userid} == 'john') { sc_apl_status('grid_categories'. sc_apl_status('form_categories'.'on'). In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user).Security Attribute: Use Security: With this option selected.'on'). sc_apl_status('form_products'. sc_apl_status('grid_products'. sc_apl_status('form_categories'. sc_apl_status('grid_products'. CAPTCHA means "Completely Automated Public Turing test to tell Computers and Humans Apart". At run time a text box is displayed requiring the access password. Disable the options Enable use of security and Enable Use of Password in the Configuration menu | My ScriptCase. an "Unauthorized user" message is displayed. In the login application onValidate event. enter the following code: URL output safety (denied access URL redirection): It redirects the user to this URL.Example 3: Authenticating applications using a database table. Read more: Using CAPTCHA on a login form . It requires direct user interaction. if he does not have access to the application. In the development environment it is possible to suppress the above steps purely for testing purposes. (See image below). through the entry of a random sequence of characters. If the password is not entered correctly. displayed on a dynamically generated image. CAPTCHA This is a feature used to increase the level of security in the form. thereby avoiding repeated password requests (or access denied) for each application execution. Use Password: An application password setting is required. Use CAPTCHA .This option allows the developer to set how the CAPTCHA should be displayed in the application.Option for the user to request a new code. Font Size .Message containing instructions on how to use the CAPTCHA feature. Label .Error message displayed when the user input does not match the generated image.Enable CAPTCHA in the application.Characters to be used in the generated image. List . Quantity .Captcha font size Reload .Number of characters displayed in the automatically generated image. .Width of the generated image in pixels. Select one layout . Error message . Height . Width .Height of the generated image in pixels. in the left side of the “Calendar” folder. The system opens a screen at the right side of this list. Image1: List of fields. The configuration of the form fields is done by clicking on the field to be formated. the formatting should be set according to the chosen type. in the existing list.Fields Overview This interface allows to inform the validation rules and formatting of each form field. . For each Data type a diferent list of characteristics is presented. where the field Data type is attributed by ScriptCase according to SQL table definition. Example: A field of type Text have diferent characteristics of a field of date type. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. characters. it accept letters.Text General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface. Validation Image .The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. When the field is defined as text. Initial Value . Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value.Define the application field type. System Date .Transforms the input type field to password.Uses the server date. Label .Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. numbers. Password field . For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name.Allows to show an image when validating a field.Creates a watermark in the input object.Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Width . . It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Defined Value . Initial Value (Type).Field title in application. Attributes: Data type . Watermark . Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).0-9) entered by the user. in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. The replacement occurs during data entry when amout of characters exceeds the smaller masks size. Hidden Field . Examples: Field Telephone number Software Key (Only letters) Software Key (Letters and Numbers) Car Plate Scriptcase's serial key Multiple Masks (Telephone) Mask +99 99 9999 9999 AAAA-AAAAAAAA-AAAA ****-****-****-**** Value entered 123456789012 Value formatted +12 34 5678 9012 QWERTYUIASDFGHJKQWER-TYUIASDF-GHJK Q1W2E3R4T5Y6U7I8 Q1W2-E3R4T5Y6-U7I8 AAA .9999 999 9999. Variable Name . Field size in database .Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Does not allow updates.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). Label Field . Field is filed from left to complete the size defined on Field Size in Database. .D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111**** DG2P 9999-9999.Text field Password field Save Variable .Only displays the field value. (A-Z. Field Mask .Defines the character used to complete the field selected. Complete to the Left . For example.(99) 9999-9999.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. separated by semicolon with the larger mask starting it. There are three masks types available and they can be merged: CharacterDescription 9 Replaced by any numeric character entered by the user.1234 A999A999A999.Shows an error if the end-user don't enter a complete mask.+99 99 9999-9999 Validate with Mask . (0-9) A Replaced by any alpha charactere entered by the user. Note: It is possible to combine two or more masks simultaneously.9999 QWE1234 QWE .a-z) * Replaced by any alphanumeric character (A-Z.Defines the field display mask.a-z.Max length used when updating the table field. if the chosen option is Uppercase all words Minimum Size . HTML Type . DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field.Define the field type in the database.Allow to define the maximum size that the field accepts. if the chosen option is Lowercase. space. Attributes: Case Settings . The option Selected allows to select. period. The first letter of the first word in capital letter.Allow to define the minimum size that the field accepts. All in capital letters. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user. accent).You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". add or remove specific types of desired characters. Defined value . Values Format Image2: Values Format Interface.Allow to select a set of valid characters. number. Very useful to passing parameters. SQL Type .Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field . Image1: Database value interface.Convert the letters of the field when it loose focus. Option All defines that field will accept any character (letters.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode".HTML object used to display the field on generated form. all lower case. it is important to point out that the other words do not receive this configuration. Maximum Size . Allowed Characters . . if the chosen option is Uppercase first word. if the chosen option is Uppercase. comma. The first letter of all word in capital letters. When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. See an example in the image below. For example.Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar.The field in SQL table is filled with (null). User IP . SQL Statement . . Insert Date .The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record.When selected enable the Grid lookup.The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. The field is not used in the process of updating. Null . Image1: Grid Lookup. Database Defined . To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . For example: will be updated through a trigger. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser).The field value is assigned by the database . to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font . GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction.Font type used to display the lookup. Image2: Grid Lookup Interface.SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) .Auto increment (automatic) . Attributes: Use lookup to display field description . Message displayed when no info is retrieved. Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. CheckBox. Font Size . EOFMessage . Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. and a second one list of cities. For example: a Select field "list of states". AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select.Font size used to display the lookup. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Field automatic validation based in the lookup.Run SQL statement in different connection. .Font Color . Choose connection . To use in Validation .Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. Font Size .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Underlined . text-top.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Background color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment .Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Vertical Alignment . Background color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. sub.Used to increase the border size of the field.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. bottom. middle. Bold .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Font Color . Width . Font Size . HorizontalAlignment .Sets the title height.Sets the title width. . top.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Border Size . Title CSS Attributes: Font . super.Used to apply bold type to the font. Bold . center or justify). Font Color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size . Height . text-bottom).Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Border color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. right. Border color . center or justify). right.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Underlined .Used to increase the border size of the title. super. Border Size . Underlined . Border color . .Sets the object height.Sets the field width.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. middle. text-top.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Help Settings Document the application. Font Color .Vertical Alignment . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Create on-line instructions.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. sub.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. middle. Height .Sets the object width. Help Type: Pop-up .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. text-top. text-bottom). bottom.Sets the field height. top. Bold .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. right. bottom. Vertical Alignment . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . text-bottom).Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Horizontal Alignment .Used to increase the border size of the object. Width . super. top. sub. Attributes: Tooltip . Width . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Font Size . center or justify). Background color . Height . .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Display the specified help text beside the field.Hint . Text . Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Initial Value .Define the application field type.Creates a watermark in the input object.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name.The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Defined Value . Attributes: Data type . Label . For . numbers. Initial Value (Type). Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. Watermark .Uses the server date. System Date . Width . characters.Allows to configure the field height defining the lines quantity. Save Variable .Width or chars quantity displayed on input object.Field title in application. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value.Multiple Lines Text General Settings Image1:General SettingsInterface. it accept letters.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). Lines . When the field is defined as text. Field size in database . in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. number. The option Selected allows to select. if the chosen option is Uppercase all words.Allow to select a set of valid characters. HTML Type .This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information.Allow to define the maximum size that the field accepts. The first letter of the first word in capital letter.Max length used when updating the table field. Minimum size . Option All defines that field will accept any character (letters. comma. all lower case.Only displays the field value. DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field.HTML object used to display the field on generated form. it is important to point out that the other words do not receive this configuration. Label Field . "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". if the chosen option is Lowercase. add or remove specific types of desired characters.Define the field type in the database. Values Format Image1: Values Format Interface. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field . Maximum size . It is frequentlly used when not displaying the . if the chosen option is Uppercase.Convert the letters of the field when it loose focus. Does not allow updates.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode".Allow to define the minimum size that the field accepts. All in capital letters. space. Allowed Characters . Variable Name . Attributes: Case Settings . Hidden Field . period. accent).example. The first letter of all word in capital letters. if the chosen option is Uppercase first word.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). SQL Type . You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. Database Defined . The field is not used in the process of updating. Insert Date . For example: will be updated through a trigger.The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. See an example in the image below. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). Auto increment (automatic) .field to the final user. if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) . User IP . GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. Defined value .The field in SQL table is filled with (null).The field value is assigned by the database .The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. Image1: Grid Lookup. Image1: Database value interface.When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. Very useful to passing parameters. Null . Attributes: .Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. SQL Statement . For example.SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. To use in Validation . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Message displayed when no info is retrieved. Font Color .Font type used to display the lookup.Run SQL statement in different connection. to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font .Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup.When selected enable the Grid lookup.Use lookup to display field description . .Font size used to display the lookup. Font Size .Field automatic validation based in the lookup. Choose connection . To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . EOFMessage . Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Underlined .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. right. Font Size . Vertical Alignment . Underlined . Background color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. .Sets the field width. sub.Used to increase the border size of the title. Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. center or justify). Width .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Vertical Alignment .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. sub. super. Height .Sets the title width.Sets the title height. top.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. top. text-top. text-top. Border Size . Border Size .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. right.Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Width . Font Size . text-bottom). middle. HorizontalAlignment .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Font Color . Border color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Font Color .Used to apply bold type to the font. Height . super.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Bold . center or justify). bottom. middle. Border color . bottom. Background color . Bold . Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Sets the field height. text-bottom).Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to increase the border size of the field. Horizontal Alignment . Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Sets the object height.Sets the object width.Used to apply bold type to the font. Help Settings Document the application. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Border color .Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Attributes: Tooltip .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Background color . sub. Help Type: Pop-up . . Height .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. right. Horizontal Alignment . middle. Underlined . Bold . Font Color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. text-bottom). Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Font Size . text-top. bottom.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Vertical Alignment . Create on-line instructions.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Width .Used to increase the border size of the object. super. Border Size .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. center or justify). Display the specified help text beside the field. Text .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. .Hint . It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. System Date .Allows to show an image when validating a field.Uses the server date.Define the application field type.Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. . When the field is defined as integer. Label .Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Validation Image .Integer General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value (Type). Initial Value .Width or chars quantity displayed on input object.The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Attributes: Data type .Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value . Width . Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. it accept only integer numbers. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field . separated by semicolon with the larger mask starting it.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications).+99 99 9999-9999 Field size in database .Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). For example. Examples: Field Telephone number Software Key (Only letters) Software Key (Letters and Numbers) Car Plate Scriptcase's serial key Multiple Masks (Telephone) Mask +99 99 9999 9999 AAAA-AAAAAAAA-AAAA ****-****-****-**** Value entered 123456789012 Value formatted +12 34 5678 9012 QWERTYUIASDFGHJKQWER-TYUIASDF-GHJK Q1W2E3R4T5Y6U7I8 Q1W2-E3R4T5Y6-U7I8 AAA . Hidden Field . Label Field . SQL Type .HTML object used to display the field on generated form.0-9) entered by the user.Define the field type in the database. (0-9) A Replaced by any alpha charactere entered by the user.Max length used when updating the table field. HTML Type .9999 999 9999.9999 QWE1234 QWE .Save Variable . Values Format . (A-Z. Note: It is possible to combine two or more masks simultaneously. Variable Name .(99) 9999-9999. There are three masks types available and they can be merged: CharacterDescription 9 Replaced by any numeric character entered by the user.a-z.D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111**** DG2P 9999-9999. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". Field Mask .Only displays the field value. in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications.a-z) * Replaced by any alphanumeric character (A-Z. The replacement occurs during data entry when amout of characters exceeds the smaller masks size.Defines the field display mask. Does not allow updates.1234 A999A999A999.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Define the character used as negative sign.Define the character used as unit separator.Define the field minimum value. Defined value . Minimum Value . Very useful to passing parameters. Negative Sign and Negative number format are displayed.The field can accepts only positive values. only negative values or positive and negative values. Negative number format .Define if the field will show the grouping separator. if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed . Accept .Define the character used as the decimal separator. Auto increment (automatic) . DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. When selecting No the attributes Digit Grouping Separator.You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user. Decimal Separator . Decimal Precision . Digit Grouping Separator . Show a calculator.Displays a calculator. Maximum Value .Define the field decimal precision. (See regional settings).Define the field maximum value. Maximum Size . Image1: Database value interface.Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. Negative Sign .Define the maximum size of the field.Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar.Define the negative sign position (related to the value).Figure2: Values Format Interface Regional Settings . Digit Grouping . EOFMessage . SQL Statement . Database Defined . Font Size .Auto increment (manual) .Message displayed when no info is retrieved.Field automatic validation based in the lookup. For example. Font Color . This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). See an example in the image below.Font size used to display the lookup.When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. Attributes: Use lookup to display field description . To use in Validation . User IP .When selected enable the Grid lookup.Font type used to display the lookup. Null . GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. . For example: will be updated through a trigger.The field value is assigned by the database . Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font .SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database.Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup.The field in SQL table is filled with (null).The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. The field is not used in the process of updating. Insert Date . Image1: Grid Lookup.The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the title. Underlined .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Run SQL statement in different connection. Font Color . . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Choose connection .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size . Background color . Font Size . Title CSS Attributes: Font . Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. text-bottom). Font Color . Border color . Border Size .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Sets the title width.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Vertical Alignment .Sets the title height.Sets the field width. Field CSS Attributes: Font . text-top. super. Horizontal Alignment . Width . Vertical Alignment . super. Border color . text-top. sub. Height .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. text-bottom).Sets the field height. Background color . right.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the object. top. bottom.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Size .Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Border color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. middle. HorizontalAlignment . Underlined . Font Size . Height . Bold .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. top.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. sub. center .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Bold . Width .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. right. Underlined . center or justify). bottom. middle. Background color . Border Size .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font. Font Color . center or justify).Used to increase the border size of the field.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. right. Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Help Type: Pop-up . Height . text-bottom). middle.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Settings Document the application.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Sets the object height. super.Sets the object width. top. sub. text-top. bottom. Hint . Create on-line instructions. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Width . Attributes: Tooltip . Vertical Alignment . .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.or justify). .Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). Initial Value (Type). Validation Image . in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. System Date . Attributes: Data type . Defined Value . Save Variable . Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Initial Value .Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality.Define the application field type.Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. Label . . When the field is defined as decimal.Decimal General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface.The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.Uses the server date. Hidden Field .Field title in application. Width .Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button.Allows to show an image when validating a field. Variable Name . For example. it accepts real numbers. Regional Settings . it fills decimal digits automatically.If enabled.Define the field decimal precision. Number negative format . Decimal Precision .Define if the field will show the grouping separator. Does not allow updates. HTML Type . SQL Type . Negative Sign . Digit Grouping . otherwise the end-user should always enter the decimals digits.Define the character used as the decimal separator.Define the character used as unit separator. (See regional settings). Minimum Value .Define the field type in the database.Define the character used as negative sign.* * "Format as you type" must be enabled in "Form>>Settings" menu to use this option. Values Format Figure2: Values Format Interface. Maximum Value .Define the field minimum value. Digit Grouping Separator . .Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field.Only displays the field value. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field . Decimal Separator.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode".* Maximum Size . When selecting No the attributes Digit Grouping Separator. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". Negative Sign and Negative number format are displayed. Decimal Separator .HTML object used to display the field on generated form.Define the negative sign position (related to the value). Complete with zeros .Displays a calculator.The field accepts negative value. Show a calculator .Label Field .Define the maximum size of the field. Accept Negative .Define the field maximum value. Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. User IP . Database Defined . . Image1: Grid Lookup. GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) . Null . Defined value .When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. Image1: Database value interface. Very useful to passing parameters.DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field.The field in SQL table is filled with (null). Insert Date .The field value is assigned by the database . Auto increment (automatic) . This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). For example: will be updated through a trigger.The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. The field is not used in the process of updating.The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application.You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user. See an example in the image below. Choose connection . For example. to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font .SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database.Font size used to display the lookup.Message displayed when no info is retrieved. EOFMessage . Font Color .When selected enable the Grid lookup. To use in Validation . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Field automatic validation based in the lookup. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . Font Size .Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. .Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. Attributes: Use lookup to display field description .Run SQL statement in different connection. SQL Statement .Font type used to display the lookup. Title CSS Attributes: Font .Sets the field width. Width . Border color . Background color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the field. . right. sub.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Font Size .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Underlined .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Height . middle.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Width . right. bottom. Horizontal Alignment . Bold . center or justify). super. text-top.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. center or justify). Font Color . sub. Border Size . Vertical Alignment .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Font Color .Used to increase the border size of the title. top.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. top.Sets the title height.Used to apply bold type to the font. middle. text-bottom). Vertical Alignment . text-bottom). Border Size . Border color . Background color .Used to apply bold type to the font. Bold . Font Size . HorizontalAlignment .Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. super. bottom.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. text-top.Sets the title width. Underlined . Sets the object width. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Height .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. center or justify). Create on-line instructions.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Sets the object height. Underlined .Sets the field height.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. text-top. . top.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. right.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. super. Font Color . Height .Used to increase the border size of the object.Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. bottom.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Background color . Vertical Alignment . sub. Border color . Bold .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Border Size . text-bottom). middle. Font Size . Width .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Help Type: Pop-up .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Attributes: Tooltip . Help Settings Document the application. Horizontal Alignment . Display the specified help text beside the field. Text .Hint . .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Width . When the field is defined as value. Label . Save Variable . For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. characters. numbers. Initial Value (Type).Define the application field type.Uses the server date.Allows to show an image when validating a field. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). Attributes: Data type . it accept letters.Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute.The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.Field title in application. For example. System Date . Initial Value .Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Defined Value .Currency General Settings Image1:General Settings Interface. . It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Validation Image .Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).Define the field minimum value.Define the character used as the decimal separator. Regional Settings . Maximum Value .Define the field maximum value.Define the negative sign position (related to the value).* Maximum Size .Only displays the field value.Define the character used as negative sign.Define the character used as unit separator. Negative number format . HTML Type . SQL Type . Decimal Precision . When selecting No the attributes Digit Grouping Separator. Values Format Figure2: Values Format Interface. Decimal Separator .Define if the field will show the grouping separator.HTML object used to display the field on generated form. Digit Grouping . Digit Grouping Separator .Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.Define if the field will show the currency symbol.Define the maximum size of the field.Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field.Define the field decimal precision. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field . Decimal Separator. Hidden Field . . (See regional settings).Define the field type in the database.* Currency Symbol Usage .Variable Name . Minimum Value . Does not allow updates. Label Field . Negative Sign . Negative Sign and Negative number format are displayed. Insert Date .Accept Negative .The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction.* * "Format as you type" must be enabled in "Form>>Settings" menu to use this option. The field is not used in the process of updating.The field value is assigned by the database .Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. Image1: Database value interface. Auto increment (automatic) .The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. Database Defined . For example: will be updated through a trigger. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user. Show a calculator. DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. it fills decimal digits automatically. otherwise the end-user should always enter the decimals digits. Defined value . Image1: Grid Lookup. Null . . Complete with zeros . See an example in the image below.Displays a calculator.You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var].The field accepts negative value.When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server.The field in SQL table is filled with (null). User IP . if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) . Very useful to passing parameters.If enabled. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). For example.Message displayed when no info is retrieved.Field automatic validation based in the lookup.Font type used to display the lookup. Font Color . To use in Validation . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard .SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database.Font size used to display the lookup. Choose connection . Font Size .Run SQL statement in different connection. to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font .When selected enable the Grid lookup. EOFMessage . Attributes: Use lookup to display field description . .Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. SQL Statement . text-top. Font Size . right. . center or justify). Width .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the title height. Underlined . Vertical Alignment .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Bold . Font Color . Bold . text-bottom). super. Underlined . sub. Background color .Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Horizontal Alignment . middle. Font Size .Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the title. Border Size . Height .Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the title width. Background color . Border color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Font Color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. top. bottom. Border Size .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height. Help Settings Document the application. Create on-line instructions, describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Attributes: Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Hint - Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text - Display the specified help text beside the field. Date General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface. Attributes: Data type -Define the application field type. Date fields are formatted according to specific date rules. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Validation Image - Allows to show an image when validating a field. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database. Values Format Image1:Interface of Values Format. Attributes: Regional Settings - Allows you to apply regional settings date format to the field. (See regional settings). Display - Allows you to select the display format of the field. Use ComboBox - Allows you to select the date and month by combobox. Year as Combo - Allows you to select the year by combobox. "Initial Year" - Define the minimum year selectable. "Actual Year +" - Define the maximum year selectable. Minimum date: Fixed Date - Insert a minimum date that the scriptcase will criticize in the field of the date type in the format as it is presented. Actual Date - When click on the icon beside of the box, the scriptcase have the following options: Simple Actual Date - Will define the actual date as the maximum date, that means, it won't accept anyone in the form who was born after the corrent date. Actual Date with increment - The minimum date will be the actual date (+) the days or month or years that you increment. Actual Date with decrement - The minimum date will be the actual date (-) the days or month or years that you decrement. Maximum Date: Fixed Date - Insert a maximum date that the scriptcase will criticize in the field of the date type in the format as it is presented. Actual Date - When click on the icon beside of the box, the scriptcase have the following options: Simple Actual Date - Will define the actual date as the maximum date, that means, it won't accept anyone in the form who was born after the corrent date. Actual Date with increment - The maximum date will be the actual date (+) the days or month or years that you increment. Actual Date with decrement - The maximum date will be the actual date (-) the days or month or years that you decrement. Display Format - Allows you to display next to the field how to complete the date field. Display Calendar -Allow to show beside the field a calendar icon, this allow the selection of the month and year passing to the field the value that was defined in the calendar. Years Limit -Defines a limit of years used in the calendar. DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user. Image1: Database value interface. Defined value - You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. Very useful to passing parameters. Auto increment (automatic) - Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar, if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) - The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Insert Date - When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. User IP - The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. Database Defined - The field value is assigned by the database . The field is not used in the process of updating. For example: will be updated through a trigger. Null - The field in SQL table is filled with (null). GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). See an example in the image below. Image1: Grid Lookup. Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. Attributes: Use lookup to display field description - When selected enable the Grid lookup. SQL Statement - SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . For example, to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font - Font type used to display the lookup. Font Color - Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. Font Size - Font size used to display the lookup. EOFMessage - Message displayed when no info is retrieved. To use in Validation - Field automatic validation based in the lookup. Choose connection - Run SQL statement in different connection. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height. Help Settings Document the application. Create on-line instructions, describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Attributes: Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Hint - Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text - Display the specified help text beside the field. Time General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface. Attributes: Data type- Define the application field type. Time fields are formatted according to specific time rules. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Validation Image - Allows to show an image when validating a field. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database. Values Format Figure2:Values Format Interface Attributes: Regional settings - Apply regional settings time formatting rules to the field. (See Regional settings). Time Separator - Define the time separator used in the field. Display - Determine the field display format from a list of predefined formats. Display Format - Displays the field format beside the field hour. DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user. Image1: Database value interface. Defined value - You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. Very useful to passing parameters. Auto increment (automatic) - Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar, if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) - The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Insert Date - When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. User IP - The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. Database Defined - The field value is assigned by the database . The field is not used in the process of updating. For example: will be updated through a trigger. Null - The field in SQL table is filled with (null). GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). See an example in the image below. Image1: Grid Lookup. Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. Attributes: Use lookup to display field description - When selected enable the Grid lookup. SQL Statement - SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . For example, to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font - Font type used to display the lookup. Font Color - Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. Font Size - Font size used to display the lookup. EOFMessage - Message displayed when no info is retrieved. To use in Validation - Field automatic validation based in the lookup. Choose connection - Run SQL statement in different connection. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height. Help Settings Document the application. Create on-line instructions, describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Attributes: Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Hint - Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text - Display the specified help text beside the field. Date And Time General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface. Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. Date and Time fields are formatted according to specific date rules. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. System Date - Uses the server date. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Validation Image - Allows to show an image when validating a field. Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database. Values Format Image1:Values Format Interface. Attributes: Regional settings - Apply regional settings time formatting rules to the field. When not selected ( NO) the options Date separator and Time separator are displayed. (See Regional settings). Date separator - Date separator symbol used. Time separator - Time separator symbol used. Display - Select the field format from a list of predefined date/time display formats. Display Format - Display field the format at the field´s side. Group Date and Time - Display the Date and Time in the same input field. Display calendar - Display a calendar a calendar to select the date. Years Limit -Defines a limit of years used in the calendar. Decimal of Seconds -Defines how many decimal of seconds the field will use. DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user. Image1: Database value interface. Defined value - You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. Very useful to passing parameters. Auto increment (automatic) - Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar, if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) - The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Insert Date - When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. User IP - The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. Database Defined - The field value is assigned by the database . The field is not used in the process of updating. For example: will be updated through a trigger. Null - The field in SQL table is filled with (null). GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). See an example in the image below. Image1: Grid Lookup. Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. Attributes: Use lookup to display field description - When selected enable the Grid lookup. SQL Statement - SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . For example, to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font - Font type used to display the lookup. Font Color - Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. Font Size - Font size used to display the lookup. EOFMessage - Message displayed when no info is retrieved. To use in Validation - Field automatic validation based in the lookup. Choose connection - Run SQL statement in different connection. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height. Help Settings Document the application. Create on-line instructions, describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Attributes: Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Hint - Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text - Display the specified help text beside the field. Image (database) General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface. Attributes: Data Type - Defines the field type. Fields type Image (Field Name) uses server stored images in the. Note that the images are stored in the database as text. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Max File Size - Defines maximum field length. Image Border - Image border width in pixels. Image Height - Defines the image display height in pixels. Image Width - Defines the Image display width in pixels. Maintain Aspect - Maintains the image aspect ratio when resizing it. It´s used in conjunction with Image Height and Image Width. Open in Another Window - Displays the original image in another browser window. Display link only - Displays only a link in the field with the image name. The link will open in a (pop-up) window with the image in its original size (without redirection). Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height. Help Settings Document the application. Create on-line instructions, describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Attributes: Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Hint - Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text - Display the specified help text beside the field. Image(file Name) IMAGE (FILE NAME) Allows the developer to use fields in the forms to upload images. The images are save in the server in a directory defined using the Application Settings menu in the attribute Image Directory (see Settings). General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface. Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When a field is defined as Image (file name) type, it stores a file name that is available to the application to process as such. The images are stored separately in the server and automatically displayed when the file name is referenced. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Image Border - Image border width in pixels. Image Height - Defines the image display height in pixels. Image Width - Defines the Image display width in pixels. Maintain Aspect - Maintains the image aspect ratio when resizing it. It´s used in conjunction with Image Height and Image Width. SubFolder - Defines a sub folder to organize the files stored. Create Subfolder - Creates the subfolder if it does not exist. Image Caching - Time in minutes the image cache will be kept for on the server before being deleted. Resize function generates temporary image copies that are kept in the cache. Display link only - Displays only a link in the field with the image name. The link will open in a (pop-up) window with the image in its original size (without redirection). Open in Another Window - Displays the original image in another browser window. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database. Example of field of the image type in a cadastre of products. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height. Help Settings Document the application. Create on-line instructions, describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Attributes: Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Hint - Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text - Display the specified help text beside the field. Document (database) DOCUMENT(Database) General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface. Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as Document it creates a link for each existent document in the database. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Icon - Display an icon by the field side identifying the file type. File Name - Field that contains the document file name. File Size - Defines the field that contains the file size. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the field width. Height - Sets the field height. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the object width. Height - Sets the object height. Help Settings Document the application. Create on-line instructions, describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Attributes: Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Hint - Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text - Display the specified help text beside the field. Document (file Name) General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface. Attributes: Data type - Define the application field type. When a field is defined as Document (file name ) type, it stores a file name that is available to the application to process as such. The documents are stored separately in the server. Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Subfolder - Enter a subdirectory name to save the files in (it is added under the directory defined in the Documents Path attribute in the Application Settings menu. See Settings). It is possible to use global or local variables in the subdirectory name. Create Subfolder - Creates the subfolder if it does not exist. Icon - Display an icon by the field side identifying the file type. Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form. SQL Type - Define the field type in the database. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Title CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title. Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify). Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom). Width - Sets the title width. Height - Sets the title height. Field CSS Attributes: Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Underlined . super.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Sets the field width. super.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Sets the object width. Bold .Sets the object height.Used to increase the border size of the object. Create on-line instructions. right. sub. Underlined . HorizontalAlignment . Border color . Height .Sets the field height. Bold .Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. top.Used to increase the border size of the field. . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Vertical Alignment . Width . text-bottom). right. middle. Font Color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color . Help Settings Document the application. bottom. text-top.Used to apply bold type to the font. Vertical Alignment . sub. Font Size .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment . Border Size . center or justify). text-bottom).Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Border color . top. bottom. text-top.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Width . Background color . Height . middle.Font Size .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. center or justify). Background color . Border Size .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Hint . Help Type: Pop-up .Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. .Display the specified help text beside the field. Text .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Attributes: Tooltip .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. . Credit Card Number The ScriptCase provides credit card numbers validation routines in its applications. General Settings Figure1: General Settings Interface. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality.The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.Define the application field type. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value.Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. For . When a field is defined as Credit Card Number it is formatted upon losing focus and validated according to specific rules. Initial Value (Type). Save Variable . For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Initial Value . Width .Uses the server date. VISA.Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. MASTERCARD and DINER cards.Field title in application.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). Currently ScriptCase applications supports validation routines to handle AMERICAN EXPRESS.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Label . Defined Value . System Date . Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. Attributes: Data type . SQL Type .a-z. Field size in database .9999 999 9999. Note: It is possible to combine two or more masks simultaneously.Defines the character used to complete the field selected.a-z) * Replaced by any alphanumeric character (A-Z. HTML Type . Variable Name .Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.(99) 9999-9999. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".example. separated by semicolon with the larger mask starting it. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the . Examples: Field Telephone number Software Key (Only letters) Software Key (Letters and Numbers) Car Plate Scriptcase's serial key Multiple Masks (Telephone) Mask +99 99 9999 9999 AAAA-AAAAAAAA-AAAA ****-****-****-**** Value entered 123456789012 Value formatted +12 34 5678 9012 QWERTYUIASDFGHJKQWER-TYUIASDF-GHJK Q1W2E3R4T5Y6U7I8 Q1W2-E3R4T5Y6-U7I8 AAA .0-9) entered by the user.D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111**** DG2P 9999-9999. Does not allow updates.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. There are three masks types available and they can be merged: CharacterDescription 9 Replaced by any numeric character entered by the user.Define the field type in the database.Only displays the field value. Complete to the Left . Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field . (0-9) A Replaced by any alpha charactere entered by the user. The replacement occurs during data entry when amout of characters exceeds the smaller masks size.Max length used when updating the table field.Defines the field display mask. Field Mask .Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Label Field .Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode".1234 A999A999A999.9999 QWE1234 QWE .HTML object used to display the field on generated form.+99 99 9999-9999 Hidden Field . DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. (A-Z. Field is filed from left to complete the size defined on Field Size in Database. Database Defined .The field value is assigned by the database .The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Image1: Grid Lookup. Insert Date . For example: will be updated through a trigger.The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. Attributes: . Null . Image1: Database value interface.field to the final user. Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. User IP . Defined value . See an example in the image below. if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) .Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar.When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. The field is not used in the process of updating.The field in SQL table is filled with (null). This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser).You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. Very useful to passing parameters. Auto increment (automatic) . Choose connection .Message displayed when no info is retrieved. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. SQL Statement .When selected enable the Grid lookup. to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font . To use in Validation .Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. EOFMessage . For example. Font Size .Use lookup to display field description .Font type used to display the lookup. .Run SQL statement in different connection. Font Color .Field automatic validation based in the lookup. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard .Font size used to display the lookup. Sets the field height.Used to increase the border size of the title. top. text-bottom). Field CSS Attributes: Font . Bold . Vertical Alignment .Used to increase the border size of the field.Sets the title height. middle.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. bottom. super. Object Input CSS . Vertical Alignment .Sets the title width.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. sub. HorizontalAlignment .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to apply bold type to the font. Border Size . super. text-bottom). Width . center or justify). Background color .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. text-top. bottom. right. Background color . Font Color . Height .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. middle.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. top. text-top.Used to apply bold type to the font. Horizontal Alignment . Font Size . center or justify).Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Border Size . Height . Font Color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the field width.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Border color . Font Size .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Underlined . Width . Bold . right. Underlined . sub. Border color .Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Background color . super.Sets the object height.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Create on-line instructions. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. text-bottom).Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. text-top.Used to increase the border size of the object.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Sets the object width. Vertical Alignment . Font Size . . Attributes: Tooltip . Underlined .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Horizontal Alignment . Border color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Attributes: Font .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Help Settings Document the application. right. Height . center or justify). Help Type: Pop-up .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. bottom. Bold . Border Size . middle. top.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Used to apply bold type to the font.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Font Color . Width . sub. Text .Hint .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Display the specified help text beside the field. . . Save Variable . Label . For example. Label Field .Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Variable Name . Does not allow updates.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". HTML Type .Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications).HTML object used to display the field on generated form. It relates to a Credit Card Field and is used to validate information according to the specific company rules.Define the field type in the database. Values Formats The picture below show how to related the Credit Card Number field with the Credit Card field. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field .Credit Card Define the Credit Card Company (flag).Only displays the field value. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".Field title in application. Attributes: Data type .Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. SQL Type . General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface.Defines the application field type. Hidden Field . For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Image1: Database value interface. Master Card and Visa).Define the field that contains the values to validate. The label and value for these options are defined in Negative Value and Title. Insert Date . Diners. User IP . Defined value . Auto increment (automatic) . Title .New option label.New option value.Display a selection box with available card companies (flag).Allows the user to enter an different option from the options available in the ScriptCase (American Express. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user.You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var].Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. Very useful to passing parameters. if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) . DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. Use Title/Deny . Negative value .The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Reload Form .The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. . Related Field .When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server.Figure2: Values Format Interface Attributes: Card Type .Reload the form After after field value update. Choose connection . To use in Validation . Image1: Grid Lookup. See an example in the image below. For example: will be updated through a trigger. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard .Font size used to display the lookup.Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. Font Color .The field value is assigned by the database . Image2: Grid Lookup Interface.Font type used to display the lookup. SQL Statement . This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font .Database Defined .When selected enable the Grid lookup. GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction.Run SQL statement in different connection.Message displayed when no info is retrieved.Field automatic validation based in the lookup.The field in SQL table is filled with (null). EOFMessage . Attributes: Use lookup to display field description . Null . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Font Size . .SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. The field is not used in the process of updating. For example. Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Background color . text-top.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. sub. Border color . Border Size . Horizontal Alignment . Font Size . text-bottom). Vertical Alignment .Used to increase the border size of the title. super.Sets the title height. Underlined . .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. center or justify). middle. Bold . right. Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. bottom. top. Font Color .Sets the title width. Height .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Width .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Width . center or justify). sub. Background color . Vertical Alignment .Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Border color . top. bottom.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Background color . text-bottom).Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. HorizontalAlignment .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the field height. text-bottom).Sets the object width.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. right. Height . middle. Font Size .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. text-top. Horizontal Alignment .Sets the field width. middle.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Field CSS Attributes: Font . Border Size . Vertical Alignment .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. right. Underlined . Border Size .Used to increase the border size of the object.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. center or justify). Font Color . Width . Bold . Font Size . Border color . super.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. bottom. Font Color . top.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Height .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the object height. text-top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Bold . Underlined . Help Settings .Used to increase the border size of the field. super. sub.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Text .Document the application.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Attributes: Tooltip .Display the specified help text beside the field. . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Help Type: Pop-up . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Hint . Create on-line instructions. . The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. clicking on the icon opens the e-mail reader.Define the application field type. For . When the field is defined as E-mail an icon is displayed by its side. It validates the field value according to standard e-mail formats. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). System Date . Validation Image .E-mail General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface. Label . Initial Value (Type).Field title in application. Initial Value .Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button.Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Save Variable .Allows to show an image when validating a field. Defined Value . Width . Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name.Uses the server date. Attributes: Data type . Variable Name . "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". SQL Type . HTML Type . For example: will be updated through a trigger. Very useful to passing parameters. if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) . Insert Date .Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar.The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Label Field . Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Display Icon .The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. . DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. Auto increment (automatic) . in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications.Display an email icon by the field side Disable Field .The field value is assigned by the database .Only displays the field value. The field is not used in the process of updating. Null .When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. Does not allow updates. Hidden Field .Define the field type in the database. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode".Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Database Defined .HTML object used to display the field on generated form. User IP .The field in SQL table is filled with (null).You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var].example. Defined value .Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Image1: Database value interface. To use in Validation . EOFMessage .Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. For example.When selected enable the Grid lookup.Run SQL statement in different connection. Font Size . Attributes: Use lookup to display field description . See an example in the image below.Font type used to display the lookup. Image1: Grid Lookup. SQL Statement . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Message displayed when no info is retrieved.Font size used to display the lookup.Field automatic validation based in the lookup. Choose connection . .GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. Font Color . to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font . This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser).SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard . Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Horizontal Alignment . Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. center or justify).Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. right. Height . super. Underlined . Border color . Background color . top.Sets the title height.Used to increase the border size of the title. bottom. Width . Font Color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. text-top. middle.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. sub. Field CSS Attributes: .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Font Size .Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Border Size . Vertical Alignment . text-bottom).Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the title width.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Bold . bottom.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Vertical Alignment .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Horizontal Alignment . Underlined . middle. HorizontalAlignment . super.Sets the object width. Help Settings Document the application.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Height . text-bottom). Border color . bottom. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Font Color . Border Size . top. Border Size . middle. center or justify). text-top. Vertical Alignment .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Bold .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to increase the border size of the object. Width .Font .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. . right.Sets the object height.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. text-top.Used to increase the border size of the field. Font Size . Create on-line instructions. Bold . Width . Height .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. top.Sets the field height. Background color . sub.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. right.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. super. Font Color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. text-bottom). Underlined . sub. Font Size .Sets the field width. center or justify). Background color . Border color . Text . Attributes: Tooltip . Hint .Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Display the specified help text beside the field. Help Type: Pop-up . . . When the field is defined as text. Validation Image . For . Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen.Width or chars quantity displayed on input object.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). Label .Define the application field type.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button.Field title in application.Allows to show an image when validating a field. Width .The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Initial Value . Attributes: Data type . it is shown a link of access. Defined Value . It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value.Url General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface. Initial Value (Type).Uses the server date.Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. System Date . Save Variable . Variable Name . Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Display Icon .Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.The field value is assigned by the database . HTML Type . Very useful to passing parameters. in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Null .HTML object used to display the field on generated form.The field in SQL table is filled with (null). SQL Type . Image1: Database value interface.Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. Auto increment (automatic) .Only displays the field value. DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user. Defined value .Display an icon by the field side Disable Field . . if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) .You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. The field is not used in the process of updating. Database Defined . Hidden Field . Insert Date .Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode".The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Does not allow updates.Define the field type in the database.The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. Label Field . "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".example. For example: will be updated through a trigger. User IP .Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font . To use in Validation . Choose connection . Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard .Font size used to display the lookup. SQL Statement .Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. . EOFMessage .Message displayed when no info is retrieved. For example. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser). See an example in the image below.SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. Attributes: Use lookup to display field description .Field automatic validation based in the lookup.Run SQL statement in different connection.When selected enable the Grid lookup. Font Size .GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. Image1: Grid Lookup.Font type used to display the lookup. Font Color . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. bottom. Background color . Font Color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Underlined . Border Size .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to increase the border size of the title.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. middle. text-top. Width .Sets the title width.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to apply bold type to the font. right. Border color . Font Size . sub.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. text-bottom). Field CSS Attributes: .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Horizontal Alignment . Vertical Alignment . Height . Bold . super.Sets the title height. top. center or justify). right. Vertical Alignment . text-top. middle.Used to increase the border size of the object. Underlined . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Height .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. bottom.Sets the field height.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Vertical Alignment .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Bold . Create on-line instructions. text-top.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Font . center or justify). describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Border color .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Font Size . sub. center or justify). sub. Underlined .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. middle. HorizontalAlignment . Background color . Font Color . Font Color . bottom.Sets the object height. right.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. text-bottom). Border color . text-bottom).Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. Help Settings Document the application. super. top. Horizontal Alignment . Height .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border Size .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the object width.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. . Width .Used to increase the border size of the field. Width . Background color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Border Size .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. super.Sets the field width. top.Used to apply bold type to the font. Bold .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Font Size . Display the specified help text beside the field.Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Text .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Attributes: Tooltip .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Help Type: Pop-up .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. . Hint . . When the field is defined as HTML Color is shown beside of the field an icon with a pallet of colors.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button.Html Color General Settings Image1:General Settings Interface. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name.Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. Defined Value .Define the application field type.Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Label . Label . It is possible to recive . Attributes: Data type . Initial Value (Type).Field title in application. Hidden Field .You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var].Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. Defined value . Does not allow updates.Define the field type in the database. For example. Auto increment (automatic) . Very useful to passing parameters. Initial Value .HTML object used to display the field on generated form. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field . DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed . Variable Name . It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user. Save Variable .Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode".The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.Uses the server date. HTML Type . Label Field .parameters by using this funtionality. System Date . Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Width . in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications.Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". SQL Type .Only displays the field value. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications).Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Image1: Database value interface. Image1: Grid Lookup.SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the following SQL statement : SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}' Font . For example: will be updated through a trigger. Insert Date . To build the statement it is possible to use the select wizard .Field automatic validation based in the lookup. To use in Validation .Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup. See an example in the image below. Database Defined . Image2: Grid Lookup Interface. The field is not used in the process of updating. Null . For example. EOFMessage . .Message displayed when no info is retrieved.Font size used to display the lookup.Auto increment (manual) . Font Color . SQL Statement .Font type used to display the lookup. GRID LOOKUP A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction.The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. User IP .When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. This resource uses AJAX technology (when exchanging information between server and browser).The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application.The field value is assigned by the database .When selected enable the Grid lookup. Font Size .The field in SQL table is filled with (null). Attributes: Use lookup to display field description . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Underlined . Bold . .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Font Size .Run SQL statement in different connection. Font Color . Title CSS Attributes: Font . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Background color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Choose connection .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Font Color . Border Size . Background color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Bold .Used to apply bold type to the font. center or justify). super. Border color . Vertical Alignment . text-top. Background color .Sets the field width. . Border color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. sub. Underlined . Width . text-bottom). Width .Sets the title height.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Font Color .Sets the title width. Border color . Height . sub.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to increase the border size of the object.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. middle. text-top. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. middle. right. bottom. center or justify).Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. bottom.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Field CSS Attributes: Font . Font Size . Underlined . Font Size .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. top.Used to increase the border size of the title.Sets the field height. right. super.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Border Size .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Bold . Height .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. HorizontalAlignment .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. text-bottom).Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. top.Used to increase the border size of the field. Vertical Alignment . Border Size . right. middle.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. super. Help Settings Document the application. Hint . Height .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. . Attributes: Tooltip . text-bottom). text-top. Create on-line instructions. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. bottom. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. top. Vertical Alignment .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. sub. center or justify).Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Help Type: Pop-up .Sets the object width.Horizontal Alignment .Sets the object height. Width . .Display the specified help text beside the field.Text . Field title in application.Select Use select object (combobox) in the field. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value.The data type Select is a drop-down object which allow the selection of information through a sliding window. General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen.The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Initial Value (Type).Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. Initial Value . It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Defined Value . Attributes: Data type .Uses the server date.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. System Date . . Label . SQL Type . Database Defined . Field size in database . "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".Save Variable . The field is not used in the process of updating.The field value is assigned by the database . Variable Name . For example.When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. For example: will be updated through a trigger.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Disable Field . HTML Type .The field in SQL table is filled with (null). Hidden Field .Max length used when updating the table field.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. User IP .The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. .You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var].Define the field type in the database. Auto increment (automatic) .Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. Defined value . in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) .The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. Null . Image1: Database value interface. Insert Date . Very useful to passing parameters.Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).HTML object used to display the field on generated form. Note on the screen bellow the State field. based on a SQL statement. Image1: Lookup method selection. Attributes : SQL Select Statement . These lists of KEYS / VALUES can be defined in two ways: based on a database table (Automatic lookup ) or from custom arrays (lookup manual) Before Lookup After Lookup Lookup method There are available two options: Automatic. before and after enabling the edition lookup to display a select object containing a custom list of KEYS / VALUES. it is required to retrieve a key (insert / update) and a value to display on the object field on the SQL command.Edition Lookup Edition lookup enables a a list of values display on forms fields. Image1: Automatic lookup settings. display_field FROM table ". note the SQL statement on the picture bellow.Automatic Populates the select object dynamically. retrieving always . The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field .The query used to feed the select object on the form application. Edition Lookup . based in a SQL statement to feed the list of values or Manual which is based on a custom entered list of values. Allows to create a link to a list update form. it is frequently used to re-load other lists which uses this field as parameter. Use specific connection. this option works combined with Title and Title internal value. views on it.Displays the key field and the lookup field retrieved by the SQL statement. Create Link .KEY2.Select object rows quantity. . Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value.KEY3 using an specified delimiter like . In the picture bellow. or .defined in Delimiter Single value Multiple Values Use Title . Title .By selection yes. only applicable when using the multiple values option. Delimiter . the list of values will be saved on the table's field as a string containing the text: KEY1.Forces a form reload when the OnChange event occurs on the select field. Reload form when value has changed .Allows to display a title line on the select object.Character used to separate KEY and LOOKUP values displayed on the list of values.The object title or its default option displayed as the first line.The character used to separate the items on generated string. Multiples Values . Height . the default delimiter is semicolon ( . It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables .The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected. ). the select object is automatically reloaded after the popup form update.two fields. lookup value original & lookup values Separated by. Title internal value . Display original and lookup value.Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. it is possible to select many items on the fields list. Multiple Values (delimiter).Use specific connection .ManuaL Enables a select object based on a list of values filled manually as an array.Selects the lookup type: Single Value . . allows only one item selection. Edition Lookup .Display the field Select as a drop down list of checkboxes. See picture bellow. Checkbox Use the drop down . Image1: Manual edition lookup.Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project. Single Value Creates a simple select object. Attributes: Lookup type. Multiple Values (position) and Multiple values (binary). Height . Default . Multiple values (delimiter) Saves a single string on the table's field based on a list of values displayed.The quantity of rows displayed in this select object. See in the table bellow the positions used by each answers on the saved string. Civil Status and Hobby in only one table field. Height.Image2: Single value lookup settings. ) semicolon.Text displayed value. Multiple Values (Position) Saves on a string type field a list of values. ) Image3: Multiple values lookup (delimiter Label. Value. Label.M. for example it is possible to save answers to the topics: Gender .When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. ). Delimiter .The character used to separated the items on generated string.The default delimiter is semicolon ( . Label Male Female Single Value M F S Start 1 1 2 Size 1 1 1 . Value. only applicable when using the multiple values option.When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field.T.Object number of lines.Text displayed value. For example the selection: Sports. Note the default delimiter ( .Selected value by default. Movies and Traveling is saved on the table's field as a string like S. Married and Books.Bytes quantity into the saved string.When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field.Text displayed value. Example 1: By selecting Sports and Movies on the list of values. Value. the saved value on table field is 3. (The string position counting start with 1) Size. Multiple Values (Binary) Allows to save a multiple selection as an integer value on a table field See the examples bellow. Implicit Value 1 2 4 8 16 Item Description Sports Movies Traveling Books Music The selection is converted into a integer which is the sum of the items implicit values before saving.Saved string initial position. Height. Negative . . On this lookup field interface the Value to each item is a integer number generated automatically.Object number of lines. Label. Start.Married Sports Movies Books Traveling M SP MO BO TR 2 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 Example: By selecting on the generated form: Male. the table's value saved a string is MMBO Image4: Multiple Values lookup settings (position).Value saved on the string when no value is selected. Insert Button .Saves the current list of values for re-usable purpose. the saved value on table field is 13. Traveling and Books on the list of values. the saved lists are displayed on the Load lookup definitions field. Save Button .Clear the item edit form.Removes the item from the list. This option works combined with Title and Title internal value. Height.Object number of lines.Item displayed text . Implicit Value 1 2 4 8 16 Item Description Sports Movies Traveling Books Music 1(Sports) + 4 (Traveling) + 8 (Books) = 13 Image5: Multiple Values settings(Binary) Label .Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list.Allows to display a title line on the select object. Use Title . . Remove Button .Implicit Value 1 2 4 8 16 Item Description Sports Movies Traveling Books Music 1 (Sports) + 2 (Movies) = 3 Example 2: By selecting Sports. Clear Button . Load lookup definitions .Update all the item properties.Inserts the item into the list of values Update Button . Is is possible to reload a . Checkbox using drop down . Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value.The object title or its default option displayed as the first line. CheckBox. and a second one list of cities. AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select. it is frequently used to re-load other lists which uses this field as parameter.Character used to separate KEY and LOOKUP values displayed on the list of values. Reload form when value has changed .Display the field Select as a drop down list of checkboxes. Display original and lookup value. Title internal value .Title .Displays the key field and the lookup field retrieved by the SQL statement. Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours.The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected. For example: a Select field "list of states". lookup value original & lookup values Separated by.Forces a form reload when the OnChange event occurs on the select field. cities list field by changing the state selected. right.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color .Used to increase the border size of the title. Bold . Border Size .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Horizontal Alignment .Used to apply bold type to the font. Border color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Size . center or justify). Font Color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Underlined . Title CSS Attributes: Font . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. middle.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the object. Width . Width . HorizontalAlignment . bottom. Background color .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Sets the title height.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Bold . text-top. center or justify). Underlined . Font Size .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Sets the title width.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. center or justify). right.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the field width. super. sub. Vertical Alignment .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. super. text-bottom).Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. bottom.Used to apply bold type to the font. . Font Color . text-top. Field CSS Attributes: Font . Border color . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . top.Used to increase the border size of the field.Sets the field height. sub.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Border Size .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. top. Font Size . middle.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Background color . Bold . super. Vertical Alignment . Height . sub.Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Underlined .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. bottom. Border Size . Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. text-top.Vertical Alignment . middle. top. text-bottom). right. Font Color . Border color . Height .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. text-bottom). Help Type: Pop-up . Height .Sets the object height. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Sets the object width. Attributes: Tooltip . Hint . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Width .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Help Settings Document the application. Create on-line instructions. Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. . General Configuration Image1: Interface of General Configuration. System Date .Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Defined Value . Initial Value (Type).Field title in application. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value.Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen.The data type double select is a drop-down object which allow the multiple selection through two window of selection and a navigator between them( << < > >> ). Attributes: Data type .The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Initial Value . .Double Select Resource to display two values: A list with values to select and a list with selected values. Label . For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name.Uses the server date. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) . For example. Disable Field .The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. SQL Type .The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Null . Insert Date . Hidden Field .When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field.Define the field type in the database. HTML Type .This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. Image1: Database value interface. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". For example: will be updated through a trigger.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode".You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. The field is not used in the process of updating. . It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user.HTML object used to display the field on generated form. Very useful to passing parameters. Database Defined . User IP .Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Auto increment (automatic) . Defined value .The field value is assigned by the database . Field size in database . Variable Name .Save Variable .Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications.Max length used when updating the table field.The field in SQL table is filled with (null). Forces a form reload upon selected field update. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables . the default delimiter is semicolon ( .Select object rows quantity Delimiter . Before Lookup After Lookup Figure1: Edition lookup Interface Attributes : SQL Select Statement . Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by.Character used to separate the field value and the lookup return value. ).Edition Lookup Edition lookup enables a list of values display on forms fields.Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project. The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field .The character used to separate the items on generated string. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value. Height . views on it. retrieving always two fields.Displays the field value and the lookup return value. Display original and lookup value. AJAX PROCESSING . Reload form when value has changed . Use specific connection. display_field FROM table ".The query used to feed the select object on the form application. Font Size .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. and a second one list of cities. Title CSS Attributes: Font . Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected.Reloads other selection type fields (Select. . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. For example: a Select field "list of states". CheckBox. Font Color . Border Size .Background color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. text-top.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. super.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Font Size . bottom.Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. HorizontalAlignment .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Vertical Alignment . Bold . Font Color .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. right.Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the title width. center or justify). Font Size . sub. Vertical Alignment .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to apply bold type to the font. top. bottom. middle.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Underlined .Sets the field height.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to increase the border size of the title. right. Bold .Sets the field width. middle. text-top. super. text-bottom). Background color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Width . Background color . sub. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Border Size . Underlined .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment . center or justify). Height . Border color .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Height . top. Width . Font Color .Sets the title height.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. . text-bottom). Border color . Underlined . Attributes: Tooltip . Help Settings Document the application.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Sets the object height. super. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. sub. text-bottom). Hint . center or justify). Border Size .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. .Sets the object width. middle.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to increase the border size of the object.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Height . top. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Width . Help Type: Pop-up . Border color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Vertical Alignment . Create on-line instructions.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. right. text-top. bottom. Horizontal Alignment .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Bold . Display the specified help text beside the field.Text . . Variable Name .Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications).Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Width . Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. Initial Value .Width or chars quantity displayed on input object.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. For example.Field title in application. Initial Value (Type).Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Defined Value . . Attributes: Data type . For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name.The type checkbox is an object that allows the selection of one or more options (by marking a box).Uses the server date. System Date . Hidden Field . Save Variable .Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface.Checkbox Use checkbox object in the form field. Label . When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. For example: will be updated through a trigger. The field is not used in the process of updating. Insert Date .HTML object used to display the field on generated form. Image1: Database value interface. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". Does not allow updates.Label Field . if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) . Auto increment (automatic) . It is possible to populate the checkboxes objects based on a database table (Automatic lookup ) or from . SQL Type .Define the field type in the database.Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. HTML Type .The field in SQL table is filled with (null). Edition Lookup Edition lookup is a way to display checkbox list of values on forms fields. Null .The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Defined value .The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. Very useful to passing parameters. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user.You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. User IP . DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. Database Defined .The field value is assigned by the database .Only displays the field value. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field . See the image below.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Image1: Lookup method selection. Edition Lookup .checkbox number of columns. The developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field . views on it. it is required to retrieve a key ( insert / update) and a value to display on the object as fields on the SQL command. display_field FROM table ". Attributes: SQL Select Statement . NOTE: The automatic lookup option requires the form field to be string type because multiple selection saves a single string on database table field like .Automatic Populates the checkbox object dynamically. ). the default delimiter is semicolon ( .The query used to feed the checkbox object on the form application.The character used to separate the items on generated string. It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables . Columns . based on a SQL statement. NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row. retrieving always two fields. Image2: Automatic lookup settings. Delimiter . based in a SQL statement to feed the list of values or Manual which is based on a custom entered list of values. Note the SQL statement on the picture bellow.custom arrays (Manual lookup) Before Lookup After Lookup Lookup Methods There are available two options: Automatic. the field original value and the value retrieved by lookup are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Edition Lookup . .Run the select statement in a different connection available in the project. Reload form when value has changed .Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the lookup return value. Attributes : Lookup type. Display original and lookup value .Manual Allows the developer to manually crete a list of values saved in the application when there is no table available with the information needed.Display an object to check all items and another to uncheck all items. Single Value Selects only on value on the list. Choose connection .Selects the lookup type: Single Value . See picture bellow. to display only the value retrieved by the lookup.UT when using the semicolon delimiter. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes. Image1: Edition Lookup Manual Interface. Otherwise. Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by .AK.Forces a form reload when the OnClick event occurs on the checkbox field. Option check all . it is frequently used to re-load another lists of values which requires this field as parameter.ID>.Select No. Multiple Values (delimiter). Multiple Values (position) and Multiple values (binary). Image3: Edition lookup .The character used to separated the items on generated string. Label Male Female Single Married Sports Movies Books Value M F S M SP MO BO Start 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 Size 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 .Image2: Edition lookup . ). Note the default delimiter ( .Text displayed value in the checkbox object. only applicable when using the multiple values option.Checkbox columns quantity. Civil Status(1byte) and Hobby (2bytes) in a single use the table bellow (with the positions used by each item).Selected value by default. Delimiter.Checkbox columns quantity. Columns . Value.Text displayed value in the checkbox object. ) semicolon. Movies and Traveling is saved on the table's field as a string like S. Columns .Multiple Values (delimiter) settings.When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. Multiple values (Delimiter) Saves a single string on the table's field based on a list of values displayed. Multiple Values (Position) Saves multiple values on a single string. For example when Ipho Coffee is selected the value saved is 43.Single Value settings. For example the selection: Sports. to save Gender (1byte).M.T. For example.. Default . Label. Value.The default delimiter is semicolon ( . start position in the saved string and size in bytes each item. Using the Multiple Values (Position) mode is required to enter the label. Label.When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. Negative . AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling . AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music The selection is converted into a integer which is the sum of the items implicit values before saving. Value.Saved string initial position.When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field at the specified position. Multiple Values (Binary) Allows to save a multiple selection as an integer value on a field See the examples bellow. Start.Checkbox columns quantity. Columns . the table's value saved a string is MMBO Image4: Edition lookup . On this lookup field interface the Value to each item is a integer number generated automatically. (The string position counting start with 1) Size.Traveling TR 3 2 Example: By selecting on the generated form: Male.Value saved on the string when no value is selected.Bytes quantity into the saved string.Multiple Values (position) settings Label. Married and Books. the saved value on table field is 3. Example 1: By selecting Sports and Movies on the list of values.Text displayed value in the checkbox object. Columns .Text displayed value in the checkbox object.Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list.Clear the item edit form.Display an object to check all items and another to uncheck all items. Remove .16 Music 1 (Sports) + 2 (Movies) = 3 Example 2: By selecting Sports. the saved lists are displayed on the Load lookup definitions field. Load lookup definitions . AttributedValueLookup Description 1 Sports 2 Movies 4 Books 8 Traveling 16 Music 1 (Sports) + 4 (Books) + 8 ( Traveling) = 13 Image5: Edition lookup .Insert Label and Value in the values list.Checkbox columns quantity.Remove selected item. Reload form when value has changed . Clear . the saved value on table field is 13.Forces a form reload when the OnClick event occurs on the checkbox field. Update . Save . Traveling and Books on the list of values.Update selected item. .Saves the current list of values for re-usable purpose. it is frequently used to re-load another lists of values which requires this field as parameter. Option check all . Insert .Multiple Values (binary) settings Label. . and a second one list of cities. Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by . CheckBox. Otherwise.Display original and lookup value . Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected.Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the lookup return value. Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. For example: a Select field "list of states". DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Select No. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select. to display only the value retrieved by the lookup. the field original value and the value retrieved by lookup are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by. Used to apply bold type to the font. Title CSS Attributes: Font . Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Font Size . text-bottom). Field CSS Attributes: Font . super. Background color . Border color . right. Underlined .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Border Size .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. center or .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Sets the title height. Bold .Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Background color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color . middle.Used to increase the border size of the field. sub. top.Used to increase the border size of the title.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Border color .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Vertical Alignment .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Underlined . Font Size . Border Size . Bold .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. right.Sets the title width. center or justify). bottom.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Width . Font Color .Used to apply bold type to the font. text-top.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Height . HorizontalAlignment .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Help Settings Document the application.Sets the object height.Sets the object width.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Vertical Alignment . Background color .Sets the field height. Bold . text-bottom).Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Height . text-bottom).Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. bottom. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Width . Border color . sub. Help Type: Pop-up . Width .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. center or justify). Attributes: Tooltip . top.Used to apply bold type to the font. middle.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. text-top.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. text-top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Horizontal Alignment . super. Create on-line instructions.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Border Size .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.justify). bottom. top. Height . sub.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Font Color . . right.Sets the field width.Used to increase the border size of the object. Font Size . Vertical Alignment . Underlined . middle. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. super. Text .Hint . .Display the specified help text beside the field.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Label . Initial Value .Uses the server date.Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. Save Variable . in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Attributes: Data type . Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example.The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface. . Defined Value .Width or chars quantity displayed on input object.Radio Use radio object in the field.The type radio is an object that allows the selection of only one information (from the list shown). System Date . It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality.Field title in application. Width . Initial Value (Type). For example: will be updated through a trigger. Hidden Field .Define the field type in the database. DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field.You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var].HTML object used to display the field on generated form.The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". Very useful to passing parameters. Null . Auto increment (automatic) . It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user.Variable Name . Does not allow updates. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Disable Field . Insert Date . Edition Lookup .The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) .Only displays the field value. Image1: Database value interface.The field value is assigned by the database . The field is not used in the process of updating. Label Field .Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. User IP . Database Defined .Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server.The field in SQL table is filled with (null). HTML Type . Defined value . SQL Type .Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". display_field FROM table ". retrieving always two fields. Columns . Image1: Lookup type selection Edition Lookup . .The query used to feed the checkbox object on the form application. based in a SQL statement to feed the list of values or Manual which is based on a custom entered list of values. Before Lookup After Lookup Lookup Method There are available two options: Automatic. The values are retrieved with a Select Statement from a database table. the developer shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field .radio number of columns. Image2: Automatic Edition lookup Interface Attributes : SQL Select Statement . NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row.Automatic Lookup used to display values in a Radio field. views on it.Display a radio object list to use in the form (see manual lookup and automatic lookup ) . It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables . Forces a form reload upon selected field update.Displays the field value and the lookup return value.Character used to separate the field value and the lookup return value.The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected. Reload form when value has changed . . Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by. Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value. Use specific connection.Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project.Single column Radio double columns Radio Use Title .Display a different radio option in the field (See None on the image bellow ) referring to a value filled manually (Title Internal value ).Manual Enables a radio object based on a list of values filled manually as an array. Use Manual lookup when the database does not have a table with required information. Title internal value . See picture bellow. Display original and lookup value. Edition Lookup . Image1: Manual Edition lookup Interface.The object title or its default option displayed as the first line. Title . Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value. the value M is added upon selecting Male.Clear the attributes. Save . AJAX PROCESSING .Forces a form reload upon selected field update. Insert . Only applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value. Value . Display original and lookup value.Define a selection default value. Reload form when value has changed .Saves the list values entered (for reuse with Load lookup definitions ).Displays the field value and the lookup return value.The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected. Columns .Display a different radio option in the field (See None on the image bellow ) referring to a value filled manually (Title Internal value ). Clear . Lookup Value Original Value and lookup Separated by. Use Title . Title internal value .Update selected item.Value store in the table.Attributes : Label .Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list. Remove . Default .Character used to separate the field value and the lookup return value.Define number of columns used to display the radio items. Update .Remove selected item. Title .The object title or its default option displayed as the first line.Text displayed in the radio object. For example. Load lookup definitions . Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. . and a second one list of cities.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. Font Size . For example: a Select field "list of states".Reloads other selection type fields (Select. Background color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. CheckBox. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to apply bold type to the font. Font Color . Bold . center or justify). middle. Border Size .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Vertical Alignment .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . sub.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Font Color . Width .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the field.Sets the field height.Used to apply bold type to the font. Border Size . Background color . Bold . Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Bold .Underlined . text-bottom). Width .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. right.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Sets the title height.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Font Size . Vertical Alignment .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Height . Underlined . Horizontal Alignment . super. Font Size .Used to apply bold type to the font. Background color . Height . text-top. Border color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. right.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. bottom.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Sets the field width. sub. HorizontalAlignment . Font Color . top.Sets the title width.Used to increase the border size of the title. bottom. middle. . top. text-bottom).Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. super.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Underlined . center or justify). text-top.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Border color . center or justify). top.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Help Type: Pop-up . Vertical Alignment . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. bottom. . Hint . text-top. right.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Border color . super.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Border Size . text-bottom). Height . Horizontal Alignment .Sets the object width. Width . Attributes: Tooltip . Help Settings Document the application. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Create on-line instructions. sub. middle.Sets the object height.Used to increase the border size of the object. .Display the specified help text beside the field.Text . Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. This list structure is similar to Select HTML object where each item has a value and label associated. Label . Defined Value . The information entry serves as a filter of items that will be displayed as it is typed. This list is dynamically loaded with Ajax technology.Uses the server date. System Date . It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. Data Type .Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute.The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. Width .Defines the data type as text auto-complete.Field title in application. Figure1:General SettingsInterface. Initial Value (Type).Transforms the input type field to password. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. For the Text Auto-Complete each item value must be alpha-numeric. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen.Text Auto-complete This field displays a list of items obtained from a Select command. Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value. Password field . Initial Value . .Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. Attributes: Case Settings .Text field Password field Save Variable . Uppercase all Capitalizes each word (converts the first . Values Format Image1: Values Format Interface. Variable Name . Lowercase Converts all text to lower case.Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". Label Field . Field size in database . SQL Type . Does not allow updates. For example.Validate fields only when submit.Define the field type in the database.Converts the field text depending on the option: Uppercase Converts all text to capital letters. HTML Type .Only displays the field value. Hidden Field .Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Disable Field . Uppercase first Capitalizes only first word (converts only the word first letter of the first word to capital letter). in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode".Max length used when updating the table field. Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Validate on submit .HTML object used to display the field on generated form.This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information. Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar.words letter of every to capital letter). Insert Date .Accepts all characters.The field value is assigned by the database .You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. Allowed Characters .Defined the maximum size accepted. numbers and " / " (defined in the More attribute).Defined the minimum size accepted. DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field.The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Database Defined . Using the settings below the field accepts letter.The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application.When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server.Select and define the character set accepted: All . if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) . The letters a b c (defined in the Less attribute) are not accepted.Define the character set accepted. User IP . Max length. Selected . The field is not used in the . Auto increment (automatic) . It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user. Very useful to passing parameters. Minimum Size . Defined value . Image1: Database value interface. End equals). Width .Define the capture box width (Capture Text). Permite determinar o modo de busca do texto(Início igual.Define the texts earch mode (Begin equals.Qualquer parte e Final igual).When this option is not selected. Capture Text . Rows . Null . . For example: will be updated through a trigger. See an example in the link below.Enter a select comand use to capture the text.With this option disabled (=No) displays. Edition Lookup Figure3: Edition Lookup Interface. only the name of the State in the Capture.The field in SQL table is filled with (null). in the application is displayed only a field to data entry. Display original and lookup value .process of updating. for example. Search options .Define the number of records displayed on each search. Any part. Attributes: SQL Select Statement . For example: a Select field "list of states".Allows you to display the label with the description. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Display label with the description . CheckBox. Choose connection . AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. .Select a different connection. and a second one list of cities. Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. Used to apply bold type to the font. Width . Border Size .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Height .Used to apply bold type to the font. Border color .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Vertical Alignment . top.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Bold . center or justify). Underlined .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Color .Sets the title height. super.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Background color . bottom. text-top.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. right.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. top.Title CSS Attributes: Font . Font Color . bottom. HorizontalAlignment .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. super. Border Size . Border color .Sets the field height. text-bottom).Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Underlined . right.Used to increase the border size of the field. Width .Used to increase the border size of the title. text-bottom). Font Size . Object Input CSS Attributes: . Height . Bold . text-top. Vertical Alignment . middle.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the title width. middle.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. sub. Horizontal Alignment . Font Size .Sets the field width. Field CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. center or justify).Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. sub.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Background color . Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined . Help Settings Document the application. middle.Font . Help Type: Pop-up . Border Size . Height . Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. text-top.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Attributes: Tooltip .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. center or justify).Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the object width.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Used to increase the border size of the object. . Background color . Font Size .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. bottom. Font Color . Bold . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Create on-line instructions. Border color . top. text-bottom).Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Width .Sets the object height.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. super. Vertical Alignment .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. sub. right. Text .Hint .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Display the specified help text beside the field. . Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable created on a login screen. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Width .Width or chars quantity displayed on input object. in the login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications. Attributes: Data Type . It is possible to recive parameters by using this funtionality. When the field is defined as Number Auto-Complete Label .Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute.Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above). Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value.Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). Save Variable . . Image1: General Settings Interface. System Date . Defined Value . For example.Uses the server date.Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button. This list structure is similar to Select HTML object where each item has a value and label associated. The information entry serves as a filter of items that will be displayed as it is typed.Field title in application. Initial Value . This list is dynamically loaded with Ajax technology. For the number Auto-Complete each item value must be numeric.Number Auto-complete This field displays a list of items obtained from a Select command.Define the application field type. Variable Name . Initial Value (Type).The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option. HTML object used to display the field on generated form. Does not allow updates. SQL Type .You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".Allow to determine the minimum value of the field Maximum Value .Max length used when updating the table field. Disable Field . HTML Type . Without field label attribute Using field label attribute Validate on submit .Allow to define the decimal separator.Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. Attributes: Maximum Size . Hidden Field . DATABASE VALUE It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field.Validate fields only when submit. VALUES FORMAT Image1:Interface of Values Format. Very useful .Define the field type in the database. Minimum Value .Allow to determine the maximum value of the field Grouping .Field size in database . Label Field .Only displays the field value. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the final user.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". Defined value .This value is automatically read from your DB Schema information.Allow the field to accept negative value.Allow to determine the maximum size of the field. Accepts Negative . Image1: Database value interface. End equals). Insert Date .The field in SQL table is filled with (null). Rows . User IP .When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server. Edition Lookup Figure3: Edition Lookup Interface.The field value is assigned by the database . . Database Defined .Qualquer parte e Final igual).Define the number of records displayed on each search. Attributes: SQL Select Statement .The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's value automatically before inserting a record. Width . if your SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed Auto increment (manual) . Permite determinar o modo de busca do texto(Início igual.Define the capture box width (Capture Text).The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application. See an example in the link below.Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar. Null . For example: will be updated through a trigger. Capture Text .Enter a select comand use to capture the text.Define the texts earch mode (Begin equals. The field is not used in the process of updating. Search options . in the application is displayed only a field to data entry.to passing parameters. Any part.When this option is not selected. Auto increment (automatic) . AJAX PROCESSING Reloads other selection type fields (Select. For example: a Select field "list of states". Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event occours. CheckBox.Select a different connection. only the name of the State in the Capture. Display label with the description . and a second one list of cities. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Display original and lookup value . Is is possible to reload a cities list field by changing the state selected. Choose connection . for example. .Allows you to display the label with the description.With this option disabled (=No) displays. Bold . Font Size .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. super. Width .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Font Color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Field CSS Attributes: Font . .Sets the title height. Vertical Alignment .Used to apply bold type to the font. right.Sets the title width.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Background color . top.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Font Color .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Underlined . Border Size . Height . center or justify).Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Horizontal Alignment . Background color .Used to increase the border size of the title. text-top. Border color . bottom. Font Size . Title CSS Attributes: Font . text-bottom).Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. sub. middle. Width . text-bottom). Border color . . right. Border Size . text-bottom). Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . bottom. text-top.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Help Settings Document the application.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Bold . super. Bold . Font Size . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. center or justify). top. super. center or justify).Sets the field height. right. middle. Height .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. text-top.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Used to increase the border size of the field. Vertical Alignment . Create on-line instructions. Height .Used to apply bold type to the font. Underlined . top.Used to increase the border size of the object.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to apply bold type to the font. Border color . middle.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Width . sub. bottom.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Sets the field width.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. sub.Sets the object width. Font Color . Border Size . HorizontalAlignment . Underlined . Vertical Alignment .Sets the object height. Background color .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left. Horizontal Alignment . Help Type: Pop-up .Attributes: Tooltip . Text .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. .Display the specified help text beside the field.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Hint .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Search the image that will must be shown. Image Height . . Label . Attributes: Data type . Image Width . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually.Html Image Image1: General Configuration Interface. When the fields is of the type html image.Defines the Image display width in pixels.Field title in application.Define the application field type.Image border width in pixels. Image Border . Image . For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name.Defines the image display height in pixels. it allows to insert in the field an image. Choose it by using the icon “Choose image” that have standard images or by using the icon “Upload image” that allows the choice of any image. Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Border Size .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Font Size . Field CSS Attributes: Font . center or .Sets the title width. Background color . Border color . Border color .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Title CSS Attributes: Font . bottom.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Vertical Alignment .Sets the title height. top. right. Background color .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. sub. right. Horizontal Alignment .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the title.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Width . Font Size . middle. Underlined . text-bottom).Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Underlined .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Font Color . Bold . Border Size . text-top.Used to apply bold type to the font. Height . HorizontalAlignment . super. Bold . Font Color . center or justify). Used to apply an underlined type to the font. text-bottom). text-top. bottom. center or justify).Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. sub. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.Sets the field height. top.Used to increase the border size of the object. middle. super.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Used to apply bold type to the font. Bold . text-top. Help Settings Document the application. Font Size .Sets the object width. Background color . . super.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.justify). Width . Font Color . middle. Width . top. Height .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Height .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the field width. sub. Create on-line instructions. Border Size . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Horizontal Alignment . text-bottom). Help Type: Pop-up . describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Border color .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. Underlined . Vertical Alignment .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Vertical Alignment .Sets the object height. right. Attributes: Tooltip .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. bottom. .Display the specified help text beside the field.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Hint . Text . Define the application field type. Use to reload .Box where wil be informed the text that will be shown beside the field. Label . it is shown as just an output.Label Image1: General Configuration Interface. When the field is of the type label.Transforms the text that was informed in the property Text. . defined above.Field title in application. Positioning . into a link that reloads the form when it is clicked.Allow to position the form in the chosen block. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Text . Attributes: Data type . Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. middle. Bold . right. Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Vertical Alignment . Background color .Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette. Font Size .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. center or justify).Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. . Height .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left. Font Size . Font Color .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. bottom.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Width . Border Size . super. Field CSS Attributes: Font . Underlined .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. Underlined . text-bottom). text-top. right. sub.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the field. Background color .Sets the title height.Sets the title width. Border color . Border color . Font Color . HorizontalAlignment . top. Horizontal Alignment . Border Size . center or justify). Bold .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to increase the border size of the title. bottom. text-top. text-bottom). Width .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette.Used to increase the border size of the object. bottom. Height .Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Underlined . Horizontal Alignment . Border color .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Vertical Alignment . middle. Font Size . Help Settings Document the application. Background color . . Width . text-bottom). Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. Bold . Create on-line instructions. Font Color . center or justify).Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. text-top.Sets the field width.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object. super. top. super. sub.Sets the object width.Used to apply bold type to the font. middle. right.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. top. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Help Type: Pop-up .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Border Size .Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. Attributes: Tooltip .Sets the object height.Vertical Alignment .Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Height .Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Sets the field height. sub. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. Text .Hint .Display the specified help text beside the field. Define the editor box height in pixels. Status . Disable Field .Html Editor General Settings Image1: General Settings Interface.Define the field data type. Alignment .Toolbar position in the HTML Editor.Hides or displays the status bar.Button alignment in the toolbar. Height .Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed. "update mode" or in "insert and update mode". Label .Define the field type in the database.Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. Hidden Field . Attributes: Data Type . Toolbar Attributes: Properties : Position . numbers and special characters. Choose the position in which to display the toolbar: . HTML editor type fields accept letters. SQL Type .Field title in application. Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Bold .Top or Bottom.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Title CSS Attributes: Font .Preview the toolbar display settings defined.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. Font Size . Background color . .Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette.Define the toolbar display settings. Underlined .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.Number of Toolbar lines in the HTML Editor. Font Color . Preview . DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Amount (Toolbar lines) .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.Used to apply bold type to the font. Button layout . Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline. Width . Border color . bottom.Sets the title width.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using a color palette. text-top. right. Font Color . Bold . Field CSS Attributes: Font . Border color . Border color .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. bottom.Border Size . Font Color . Font Size .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Height .Sets the title height. text-top.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette. Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . Border Size .Used to increase the border size of the title.Sets the field height. right. Width . text-bottom).Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the field width.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Font Size . sub. center or justify). Background color . middle.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. . Underlined .Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. Height . Background color . Border Size . center or justify). middle.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Horizontal Alignment . Bold . super.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Vertical Alignment .Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. top. Vertical Alignment .Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. HorizontalAlignment . top. Underlined . text-bottom). sub.Used to increase the border size of the object. super. Height . top. .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Create on-line instructions.Sets the object width. center or justify).Horizontal Alignment . Vertical Alignment . Attributes: Tooltip . Hint . text-bottom). Help Type: Pop-up . Width .Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.Sets the object height. right.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. bottom. super. text-top.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. Help Settings Document the application. sub. describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications. Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. middle. Text .Display the specified help text beside the field. . Reloads form after updates. Reload . . Label .Theme General Settings Attributes: Data Type .Application field type.Field label in the application. Reloads form after updates. Reload . Label .Field label in the application. .Application field type.Localization General Settings Attributes: Data Type . which are listed below: .Define the field type in the database.Text to designate the barcode. Label . Disable Field .Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode". For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed as Client Name. SQL Type . Text . There are 18 types of barcode.Field data type. Barcode Attributes: Type .Bar Code General Settings Atributtes: Data Type . "update mode" or in "insert and update mode".Type of barcode.Field title in application. DISPLAY SETTINGS Defines the CSS values for fields individually. Title CSS Attributes: Font .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size . Figure 1: CSS Definition interface. Font Color .Used to apply bold type to the font. text-top. Background color . middle.Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field. Font Size .Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. text-bottom).Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a color palette. right. Vertical Alignment . HorizontalAlignment . top. Width . Font Color .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.Sets the field width. right.Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. super.Font Color . Border color . sub. text-bottom).Used to apply an underlined type to the font. Horizontal Alignment . Object Input CSS Attributes: Font . sub. center or justify). top.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a color palette.Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application . Field CSS Attributes: Font . Vertical Alignment .Used to increase the border size of the field.Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette. text-top. Underlined . Underlined . Background color . Border color .Used to apply an underlined type to the font. middle. Height .Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline.Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left.Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object. Height .Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette. center or justify). Bold .Sets the title width. Background color .Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left.Sets the field height.Used to increase the border size of the title.Used to apply bold type to the font.Sets the title height. Border Size . bottom.Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline. Border Size . super. Bold . Font Size . bottom. Width .Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette. Sets the object width.Used to apply bold type to the font.Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left. super. center or justify). Help Settings Document the application.Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field. sub. Border Size . Attributes: Tooltip . . Border color .Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline. Create on-line instructions. bottom.Used to apply an underlined type to the font.Used to increase the border size of the object.Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field. Help Type: Pop-up . Underlined . Width . Hint . Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window. text-bottom). describe business rules and save comments in the System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with the applications.Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is clicked. right.Sets the object height. top. Vertical Alignment . text-top. Height . Bold .object using a color palette. Horizontal Alignment . middle. Display the specified help text beside the field. .Text . define the values and the header format between others.Layout Overview Application attributes and formatting resources such as visualization schemas. Pages Blocks Colors Schema Header & Footer . organizing fields in blocks. where each tab has the blocks defined in Organization of Blocks. The pages are shown in the application in tabs mode.Pages An application page can be deifined as block container. The application has a standard page. It is possible to create more pages. Image2: Application using pages resources. identified by pag1. and in each of them. that can be renamed. The use of pages is indicated when we have an application that involves a lot of table fields (more than 20 for example). with the creation of new pages. Image1: Pages settings interface. For each application it is created a page with default name “ pag1” . An application can have a lot of pages. See below an application example using two pages: General Data and Documents (see Image2). . you can include a lot of blocks. Select the color from a color palette or enter the color information to define the selected text background color. Non selected font Color . in the first field fill the page name and in the second field select the image that will be presented as folder icon. To delete a page. Select background Color . just click on the delete button. or enter a font name to be used in the application. Font Size .Select the color from a color palette or enter the color information to define the selected text color.Select the color from a color palette or enter the color information to define the non selected tab font color.Image3:Page Settings Interface. Attributes: Font Name . To include a new page. . Non selected background Color -Select the color from a color palette or enter the color information to define the non selected tab background color. Select font Color. just fill the boxex above the button Insert.Enter the font size.Select the font in the existing list. and to delete the block. You can add as many blocks as you need and you can organize them to best suit your purpose. This is how to remove a block from being displayed. To change the page block is displayed in. To the left of each block there are two icons: to edit the block properties. . used to define the position of the next block (positioned to the side or below in the series of blocks). Figure 1: Block settings interface. Control or Grid fields are located. all you have to do is drag it to the desired page as indicated below. Organising Blocks and Changing position See below how to modify the page block display order. The Figure bellow shows an ORGANIZATION column.Blocks Conceptually a block is a “container” in which a Form Application. Click on the block and drag it to “Blocks not shown”. bearing the same name as the application. By default the applications created in ScriptCase only consist of one block. Click to select the block in order to modify its position. "Below" . "Line" .The fields are displayed side by side (in line) without tabulation (aligned in columns). Label (Position) . Label (Display) .Displays the label above the field. Fields (Columns) .Number of columns to be displayed side by side within the block.Displays the label below the field. Title (Display) .The fields are displayed beside one another while observing the number of columns.Flag that controls whether the field label is displayed inside the block. Fields (Position) .The fields are displayed below each other while observing the number of columns. .Displays the label beside the field.Position of fields within the block: “Below” .The label options are: "Above" . "Beside" .Flag that controls whether the block title is displayed.Attributes: Block (name) .Block title header displayed. "Beside" . "Tabs" . .Organization (Next) .Indicates that the next block is displayed below the previous one.Defines the width of the block in pixels or as a percent.Indicates that the next block is displayed as a tab. "Beside" . Add New Block To add new blocks to an application.Defines the height of the block in pixels or as a percent. just click . Organization (Width) .Indicates that the next block is displayed beside the previous one. Organization (Height).Organization of blocks on the page: "Below" . Font size .Block label.Block title line height (in pixels).Block Title. Attributes: Name . Figure 2: Edit Block interface. Attributes: Name .Block name. Label .Block title font size applied.Block title background image. Background image . Background color .Whether to display a line containing the block title.Block title line background color. Display Title .Figure 2: Add New Block interface. Title Height . Title Font . Edit Block Click to edit the block properties and click Save.Block title font applied. Font color .Block name. .Block title font color. Title . Middle or Bottom). Border color .Block height.Calculate the block columns. Label color . Vertical Alignment .Position of the next block in relation to the current one.Block width.Block border width. Cellspacing . . Block height . Columns .Block title horizontal alignment (Left. Next Block .Block border color.Spacing between the block cells. Label Position .Number of block field columns. Column Width .Horizontal Alignment .Block title vertical alignment (Top. Display Label .Block field organization. Block width . Center or Right).Display block field labels. Border width . Field Organization .Field label position.Field label display color. Footer Template . Theme . Define the application layout.) is loaded. . etc.Layout Settings Layout Settings Figure1: Layout Settings Interface.Allows to choose the template to compose the application footer.Allows to choose the template to compose the application header.Choose from the available themes. The application visual mode (color. Attributes: Header Template . fonts. (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) . Title: Displays the value entered in “Select Title” in the header . Search Criteria . Each condition is displayed on a new line. the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the header line. Enter the format in the text field alongside it. (A Form Applications has 2 titles: one for Insert mode. Enter text and/or “Global Variables”.This flag determines whether or not the Header is displayed Application Title .The variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combobox. Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. This interface format can change depending on the selected option in "Layout >> Settings >> Header Template". A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the application's data source (“Select” query) are displayed beside the header variable when the “Field” type is selected. For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”. (available only in Grid applications) FOOTER . Value: When the “Value” type is selected. The selected field value is then displayed in the header line.The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header.Header & Footer HEADER Figure 1: Header Interface. Display Header . and another one for Update mode). Header Variables . Depending on the type. click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon . you may need to associate content with it. To locate existing images and select one. To see all the available date formats. There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples.The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the header. Date: Displays the system date in the header line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy.Defines the Header title to be displayed in the application. The selected field value is displayed in the footer line.The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the footer. Date: Displays the system date in the footer line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. to see all the available date formats. Title: Display in the Footer the value entered in “Select Title”. click to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples.Figure 2: Footer Interface. For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”.The variable fields can be populated with any of the types listed in the Combobox. See the available types below: Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. Search Criteria . This format of this interface may change depending on the option selected in "Layout >> Settings >> Footer Template". the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the footer line. Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. Display Footer . (available only in Grid applications) . Footer Variables . A Combobox listing the fields that are part of the “Select” (application's data source) are displayed beside the Footer variable when the “Field” type is selected. Each condition is displayed on a new line. There are many display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. (available only in Grid applications) Search Criteria (one per line) .This flag determines whether or not the footer will be displayed. To locate existing images and select one. Enter the format in the text field alongside it. Value: When the “Value” type is selected. Depending on the type. click on the “Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon .The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header. Enter text and/or “Global Variables”. you may need to associate content with it. This event runs when the application is loading. onLoad .This event runs after the deletion.This event runs to reload the application page onValidate .This event is executed before the deletion.This event occurs when the page is loaded.) Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. when it is loaded. upon submitting a form. Read more about Scriptcase Macros. onAfterDelete . These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". After a record is inserted. .This event runs by clicking on the validation (OK. earlier.Events Events Scriptcase uses the concept of events to enable to developer to customize application code. . onAfterInsert . onBeforeUpdate . onAfterUpdate .This event runs after updating a record. Update. Events allow the developer to define custom actions at a specific execution time (e. insert. clicking on the buttons (new.g.) and for a specific type of application.This event runs after the insertion. etc. ie when navigating from one record to another. onRefresh . Insert.This event runs before updating a record. onBeforeDelete .This event runs after the insertion.. onInit . Delete. Filter) depending on application.. onBeforeInsert . .This events fires when the field has focus. Figure 1: AJAX event interface. Only the onClick event is available to Grid applications. The following events are available in ScriptCase. It allows individual data components on a page to be updated without the need to refresh the entire page. For invalid users a message is displayed. onChange . onBlur .This events fires when the field is clicked.Ajax Events Using AJAX reduces the amount of unnecessary data traffic with the server thereby speeding up application processing. onFocus . For valid users it returns the name. onClick . (in PHP code).Select the field and the event used by the AJAX process. Example: 1 . the field value is NOT changed and the focus is directed to another object.This events fires when the field has focus. See the example below: The user field is validated against a database (table). Passing parameters is optional.This event fires when the field has focus and the field value is changed and the focus is then directed to another object. Insert Code . .Use this to create parameters retrieving field values.Figure 2: Selecting fields and events for AJAX processing.ScriptCase provides you with a number of predefined blocks of code that can be inserted into the PHP editor and then amended accordingly. 3. 2. PHP editor .Use it to type in your PHP code. The code is processed by the Server and the XML result is sent to the browser. Figure 3: Programming PHP with AJAX. 1. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros". Parameters (Fields) . Read more about Scriptcase Macros. 2 -Enter the PHP business rule in the PHP editor. Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in and specific to Scriptcase. click on the New Button option and enter a name and the type of the button. Linking). Types button: (Javascript. PHP. . Deleting a button To delete a button click the Delete icon in the right of the button name at the application menu under the Buttons option. Image2: New button function.Buttons Buttons New Button To create a new button. Confirmation Message . Show in Edition (Update) mode . Button Display Mode Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. To not display a message. Display mode . Hint .CSS style class name.Destination window where the code will be executed (in the Same Window / in some Other Window).Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode. Show in Addition (Insert) mode .Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. Target .Defines a hint message. click on "New button". created in the buttons schema editor. leave this field blank. Image2: New button function. Button or Image. CSS Style . Image and Link).Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode. Label . You can set it as a Link. There are three types of display buttons: (Button. .Defines the button title displayed in the application.Defines the button will be displayed.Javascript Button Creating a Javascript Type Button To create a new button. enter the name and select the type of button. To not display a message. leave this field blank.Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode.Defines the button will be displayed. Image Button Display Mode Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. You can set it as a Link. Confirmation Message .Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box.Destination window where the code will be executed (in the Same Window / in some Other Window). Icon .Defines a hint message. Hint . .Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. Button or Image.Button display icon. Display mode . Show in Addition (Insert) mode .Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode. Show in Edition (Update) mode . Target . Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode. Show in Addition (Insert) mode . Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. Target .Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box.Defines the button will be displayed. (Same Window / Other Window). Hint . CSS Style .Link Button Display Mode Figure 1: Button Settings Interface.Destination window where the code will be executed. Confirmation Message .Defines a hint message.Defines the button title displayed in the application. Show in Edition (Update) mode . leave this field blank. Button or Image. created in the buttons schema editor.CSS style class name. Code .Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode. You can set it as a Link. Label . To not display a message. Display mode . Deleting a button To delete a button click the Delete icon in the right of the button name at the application menu under the Buttons option.Image2: JavaScript Interface. . CSS Style . Button Display Mode Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. Display mode . click on "New button".Defines the button title displayed in the application. Image and Link). created in the buttons schema editor. To not display a message. leave this field blank.Destination window where the code will be executed (in the Same Window / in some Other Window). You can set it as a Link. Show in Addition (Insert) mode . Hint .Defines the button will be displayed. Show in Edition (Update) mode .Php Button Creating a Php Type Button To create a new button.Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode.Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box.Defines a hint message. enter the name and select the type of button. Label .Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode. There are three types of display buttons: (Button. Confirmation Message . . Button or Image. Image2: New button function. Target .CSS style class name. Defines a hint message. Show in Addition (Insert) mode . Button or Image. Confirmation Message . Icon .Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode. Hint .Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box.Button display icon.Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. leave this field blank. To not display a message. Image Button Display Mode Figure 1: Button Settings Interface.Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode. You can set it as a Link. Show in Edition (Update) mode . .Defines the button will be displayed. Display mode .Destination window where the code will be executed (in the Same Window / in some Other Window). Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. Target . Show in Edition (Update) mode . To not display a message. Hint .Defines a hint message.Destination window where the code will be executed. Target . Label . Show in Addition (Insert) mode .Defines the button will be displayed. Confirmation Message . Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. created in the buttons schema editor.Link Button Display Mode Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. Display mode . Code . CSS Style .Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode. (Same Window / Other Window).Defines the button title displayed in the application. You can set it as a Link.CSS style class name. leave this field blank.Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode.Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. Button or Image. Deleting a button To delete a button click the Delete icon in the right of the button name at the application menu under the Buttons option.Image2: Php Interface. . Image and Link).Defines a hint message. Image2: New button function.Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. To not display a message. Show in Edition (Update) mode . Confirmation Message . Show in Addition (Insert) mode . created in the buttons schema editor. Target . leave this field blank.Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode. click on "New button".Defines the button title displayed in the application. Button or Image. You can set it as a Link. enter the name and select the type of button. . There are three types of display buttons: (Button.Destination window where the code will be executed (in the Same Window / in some Other Window). Display mode .Link Button Creating a Link type button To create a new button. Hint . CSS Style .CSS style class name.Defines the button will be displayed. Label . Button Display Mode Figure 1: Button Settings Interface.Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode. Show in Edition (Update) mode . You can set it as a Link. To not display a message. leave this field blank.Defines a hint message.Destination window where the code will be executed (in the Same Window / in some Other Window). Show in Addition (Insert) mode .Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode. Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. .Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode. Confirmation Message . Image Button Display Mode Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. Hint .Figure 1: Button Settings Interface.Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. Target . Button or Image.Button display icon. Icon .Defines the button will be displayed. Display mode . and follow the steps below to create the link required to complete the operation. In the application menu (on the left side of the window) there is an option to create new links configure the new Link button . (Same Window / Other Window). Creating a new Link . The link button requires a link associated to it.Figure 1: Button Settings Interface.Defines a hint message. Figure 1: Button Settings Interface. To not display a message. Hint . CSS Style . leave this field blank.CSS style class name. You can set it as a Link.Defines the button will be displayed. Target . Label . created in the buttons schema editor.Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode. Display mode . Button or Image.Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. Show in Edition (Update) mode . Show in Addition (Insert) mode .Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode.Defines the button title displayed in the application. Confirmation Message .Destination window where the code will be executed. Field . as in the image below. Fixed . Image4: List of Applications Interface. 4 .Field. Image3: Link Type Interface.Select the link type Buttons and click in next (as Image below).Enter the field used to pass the content.Using the link option click in new link. . 3 .Enter a fixed content to be passed. It can be of three types: Field. 2 .1 . Image5: Parameters Definition Interface . Value or Empty.Select the application that will be called and click in Next.Define the parameters passed. Image2:Create new Linking. Show the application in the same browser window.Show the application in the same in the same window that the search. Open in other window . Link Operation Mode .Open another window to show the application Open in a Iframe . . below of search an Iframe is created to display the application.Message shown when the mouse is over the selected link field.No value will be pass.web address accessed when the user exit the grid. Linking Link Hint .Value. Output URL of the called application . Deleting a button To delete a button click the Delete icon in the right of the button name at the application menu under the Buttons option.Iframe display.Image6: Parameters Definition Interface . Form Properties .Define the form link properties .How will be presented the link.Empty. Image8: Link/Form Properties Interface.Select the buttons that will be shown. 5 . Image7: Parameters Definition Interface . Open in the same window . exiting the search and going to the form. Empty . . Application code determined in the moment of the application creation.Allow all project users to edit this application.Max upload file size for this application. Maximum File Size . Documents Path . Description . .Specific images used by this application. HelpCase Link . Zero is the standard value of PHP.Timeout time in seconds. Attributes: Application code .Folder where the application is stored in the workspace. Timeout . Timeout Message . all the hints and messages are converted to the chosen language. Folder .This field can be used to describe the application objectives.The absolute path where the application documents are stored. Localization .Use the session theme variable in this application. Share location variable .Use the session location variable in this application. Edit Project .Associate a HelpCase manual to your application. Share theme variable . Application Images . Image1: Application Settings Interface.Timeout for Ajax update message.Generated application language used.The base directory where the application images are stored. Image Directory .Application Settings Define ScriptCase applications attributes. this code can be renamed through the main menu. Displays SQL command that originated the error.Error message title in the application. Error SQL .Allow to show the title line of the error message in the field. Error Script .Opens a widow to display Ajax error messages output during debug mode.Use the enter key to tabulate. Error Settings Image2: Error Settings Interface. Ajax error output .Message Title .Text used in title line as label.Error position in the application.Runs the application in debug mode. Values: right. Show error title in the field . left. . Timeout Error .Time to display the validation error message. top and bottom. Attributes: Error Position . Show error title in the application .Displays the script and line where the error occurs. Error title .Allows to show the title line of the error message. showing the SQL Commands. Debug Mode . Use Enter to Tab . Will occur the navigation to other page and the message will be shown. close the browser window. this global is most commonly used to filter the form in the SQL menu.When exiting the application.Message to show after the record insertion. Message after update . The message is displayed when navigating to other page. Figure 1: Navigation interface.Specify the URL to which the user will be redirected upon exiting the aplication. Return After inserting .Defines if the form will return to edit the inserted record or a new record can be entered and added. Exit Application . Close Window . . Message after insert .Message to show after the record update. which is used to store the URL of the current application.Navigation Define the navigation attributes of an application.Exit application after the form processing. Message after insertion . Attributes: Exit URL .URL to which the user will be redirected in case a global variable is not available inside the application for any reason is not avaliable. Redirecting URL .Message to be shown after the insertion of a register. Redirecting Variable .Variable name. The message is displayed when navigating to other page. soon below of the message will appear the button OK that when is clicked return to the form. Get) Image 1: Global Variables Interface. or entering a variable in Application General Data field to replace the field name.Defines that the variable must be passed by the HTML command line. this content is subdivided in three blocks. if has been defined that a variable is received by a Post Method and it has been passed by get method the content won't be accepted. Attribute . that means. Value . they are: Scope . etc. Example: Select customerid. . The application may contain global variables in the Where Clause.Defines variables behavior. created by special fields. being visible to the browser.In this option the variable must be created as a session variable in the PHP by other application before the search call which is being defined. Image 2: Variables Settings Interface. the global variable is a external parameter required to application execution. These variables should be passed to the application that is being implemented through one of the methods (Session. Variable passing methods : Session . in Lookups. customername from customers where customerid ='[v_customerid]' In this case. Get .Defines how the variable is received by the application. the variables "v_customerid" appears in the variables configuration. Global variables are defined in square brackets ([variable]).Global Variables GLOBAL VARIABLE This menu shows the global variables being used within the application. Select the way it is passed to the Control application. Shows all global variables used in the application.Variable name in the application. Post. Do not validate (checking) the variable at execution time. Settings . At execution time in the development environment. a form requesting the input variables used by the application is displayed.Defines that the variable must be passed through the post method of the form.Determines where the variable was defined.Post . Type (Input/Output) . .Defines if the variable is an input or an output. Description. . comparatively. the effect of the table synchronization. or exclusion. or a change in the data type. will be the same of the exclusion of a field that exist in the application plus the inclusion of a new field. is displayed as in the image below: Image1: Synchronize table Interface Note: When a table field in the database is renamed.Synchronize Table This process will compare the application fields definitions of the and the table fields definition in the database. inclusion. Changes in database table as an update. Control. Image2:Link between applications Interface. “”Field” or “Capture”. Form. There are three types of links available: Application . Field . In the windows below.Used to link our form through a link Capture . Menu and Tab. Image3: Link between application Interface. .Link Used to link the application with other applications of the following types: Search.Creates an icon to any other type of application. “Application List” shows the applications. Creating Links Select the link type : “Application”. This link type is associated to events. Select the application to link and clink in Continue >>. beside the field inside the form. the user will be able to edit an existent link or create a new link. Image1: Links. This link type is associated to events. Displays a search application.Used to link form to other application. “Link Properties” enter the link attributes. Image5:Link Properties Interface. the application fields being linked and that need to receive parameters to execution is displayed and.Below. Opens another window showing a search application. selected the option for passing value. Attributes: Redirecting after insert .Allows to select the buttons that will be shown in the toolbar. at the left side. they are: Field .Navigates for the application linked when adding information. In the window below. Form property . Empty .Enter a the field used for passing values. Image4: Parameters Definition Interface.. Value . .Enter a fixed value to be passed. Creates an icon beside the field in the search form. Redirecting after Update . there are three options. at the right side.Navigates for the application linked when updting information.No value is passed to the field. “Parameters Definition ”. they are: Fixed . at the right side. . there are three options. Select the application to link and click on Continue >>.No value is passed as a parameter. Below. Image8: Parameter Definition Interface. Image7:Application Link Interface.“Linking Type” (below) shows that when it is selected the link “Capture”. Empty.Used to pass a global variable value. application fields is displayed. selected the option for passing value.Selected the search application field to link object. in “Parameters Definition”. Variable . Below. the application fields being linked and that need to receive parameters to execution is displayed and. “Application List” shows the search applications. a combobox with the Image6: Parameter Definition Interface . used by the grid as parameter. at the left side. Selected the field that is used for the link.Used to pass a fixed value as parameter. Recovering the field value . . resources.Programming Overview ScriptCase has incorprated the concept of Object Oriented programming. and by using these concepts you can reap huge rewards in terms of better organization and improved development. . It is possible to create your own business rules in applications. using attributes. methods and libraries. . To modify it click on the attribute's name (located to the left of the buttons) and click the Update button to save your changes. Click the clean button to clean the attributes list.Enter the attribute's name and click on the include button to add it. An attribute can be referenced in all of the methods and events of an application. Attributes: Attributes . To remove an attribute. Image 1: Attribute Settings interface.Attributes Attributes are variables containing a global variable passed from one application to another. click on the delete button after selecting the atribute. It is possible to create PHP and JAVASCRIPT methods. To include a parameter variable in a method. Creating a new method Figure 2: Create a new Method. 2 Methods may involve parameters being passed. Using methods in applications it is possible to reuse code and thus improve development productivity. Define the name for the new method then click the Create button. See the Figure below. to support the implementation of business rules for an application. Figure 1: Method menu interface. 1. click the 'Var' button: .Methods Methods are functions or procedures declared by the developer. Figure 3: Adding a Method. Add the number of variables: Figure 5: Define Parameters interface Defining a variable: Figure 6: Add Parameters interface.Figure 4: Parameter Variable icon. * References allow you to create a second name for a variable so you can use it to read or modify the original data stored in that variable. Type: Select the variable type as: For value or For reference. To Edit a parameter variable in a method. click the button: . Name: Input a variable name. * 10270 Value Default: The default value used to initialize the parameter variable when called. Delete the variable selected in the Parameters field. Edit the variable selected in the Parameters field. 3 In order to run a method. See the example below: Figure 8: Events. Select all parameter variables in the Parameters field. In this example we are using the onLoad event to call our method when the record is loaded.Figure 7: Define Method Parameters interface. . Unmark all parameter variables selected in the Parameters field. See how simple it is to call the method in the example below: Using a method : Figure 9: Event method interface Thus we get the following result when running the application. it needs to be called within an event. . access them via the main menu: Configuration ==> Libraries. . All methods in the library are visible in all application events and methods. Public Libraries.g. Project Libraries or User Libraries) and enable the applicable php library file(s). To manage libraries.Libraries To use a library you need to select the corresponding library type (e. "Background-Color". "Color". "Fill_Zeros".) This macro is intended to inhibit the query fields on the initial load. "Side_Neg". etc. sc_form_show 'on' or 'off' This macro dynamically show or not the form. "Parameters". "Group_Symb". 'grop2'. sc_field_display ({My_Field}. (disabled by the macro "sc_menu_disable"). buttons. sc_field_readonly ({Field}. "Weight") This macro allolws to modify dinamically the grid field style. manipulate with dates. sc_hide_groupby_rule ('group1'. "Currency_Symb". applications. sc_reset_menu_disable This macro its used to enable a menu item structure. "Size"... Field2.. "Color") This macro changes the color of a determined field text. 'group3') Macro used to disable Group By rules. "Side_Currency_Symb") This macro its used to format numerical values.Scriptcase Macros Scriptcase Macros Scriptcase has macros and special variables that allow the user to manipulate events. "Parameters_Redir") This macro allows the application to display customized messages. "Status") This macro Activate/Deactivate the applications at user level. Security sc_apl_status ("Application". sc_ajax_refresh () Macro to refresh a Grid sc_block_display (Block_Name. sc_field_disabled ("Field_Name = True/False". (removed by the macro "sc_menu_delete"). "Dec_Symb". sc_reset_menu_delete This macro restores a menu item structure. on/off) This macro dynamically show/hide the fields of a specific block. Follows a table of all macros and special variables from ScriptCase. on/off) This macro dynamically set a form field attribute to '"Read-Only" sc_field_style ({My_Field}. "Family". MACROS AND SPECIAL VARIABLES Shows sc_ajax_message ("Message". on/off) This macro dynamically display or not a specific field. "Amount_Dec". security control. "Parameter") This macro its used to block a field to get any data that would be typed on it. . sc_ldap_login sc_reset_apl_conf ("Application". sc_format_num ({My_Field}. "Title". sc_reset_apl_status This macro deletes all the application security status variables. including the list of applications that works for each one. sc_field_color ("Field". "Property") This macro deletes all the modifications effected by "sc_apl_conf" macro. sc_set_focus ('Field') This macro its used to set the focus to a form field. sc_field_init_off (Field1. "Connection") This macro executes the commands passed in the second parameter and returns the dataset in a variable. sc_change_connection ("Old_Connection". sc_sql_injection ({My_Field}) or ($My_Variable) This macro it used protect the field/variable against "SQL injection". sc_commit_trans ("Connection") This macro effective a set of transations in the database. vari?veis database Database Variables Global variables containing database access values used by main connection. "Type". sc_rollback_trans ("Connection") This macro discards a set of transations in the data base.php'. sc_error_continue ("Event") This macro deactivates the Scriptcase standard database error treatment message for an event. Barcode sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_digitavel_banco SQL sc_begin_trans ("Connection") This macro starts a set of transations in the database. "SQL Command". "New_Connection") This macro dynamically change the application connections. sc_error_update This macro configure the variable that contains the database error message that can occurs during the update of a record. "Connection") This macro executes a SELECT command stored in the second parameter and returns the data in a variable. sc_reset_change_connection This macro erases the changes made using "sc_change_connection". Filter sc_where_filter This macro its used to save the where clause content generated through the filter form. "Connection") This macro protects the value passed as parameter according with the used database. sc_sql_protect (Value. sc_select_where (add) This macro adds dynamically a condition to the grid WHERE clause. sc_exec_sql ("SQL Command". sc_select_field ({Field}) This macro modify dynamically a field that will be recovered in the grid. 'apl_redir. "Connection") This macro execute SQL commands passed as parameter or a SQL command in the SQL field action type. 'variable_content'.sc_user_logout ('variable_name'. sc_lookup (Dataset. sc_error_insert This macro configure the variable that contains the database error message that can occurs during the addition of a record. Date . sc_select (dataset. sc_select_order ("Field") This macro modify dynamically the grids "ORDER BY" clause field. 'target') Macro used to log the user out to the system. sc_error_delete This macro configure the variable that contains the database error message that can occurs during the exclusion of a record. "SQL Command". sc_where_current This macro its used to make a reference of the where clause currently used. sc_where_orig This macro saves the where clause content of the original application select. M. This macro its used to send e-mails. Height. Copies. {Date2}. months and years. {Date2}. sc_encode ({My_Field}) This macro returns the field or variable with the content encrypted. sc_label ({My_Field}) This macro its used to modify dynamically the grid form field label. sc_getfield ('myField') This macro assign the properties of a field to a javascript variable. "Lib2". sc_time_diff ({time1}. "Hint". Weights. . "Operator". sc_calc_dv (Digit. sc_error_exit (URL. sc_language This macro returns the language and regional settings. "Target". sc_date_conv ({Field_Date}. sc_changed ({Field_Name}) This macro returns "true" if the field name have been changed. Option) This macro calculates the difference between two dates returning the amount of days.sc_date (Date. sc_log_split ({description}) This macro returns what was inserted in the "description" field of the log table in an array format. {time2}. sc_link (Column.jpg) This macro loads images passed as parameter to use in the application. "Input_Format". Pw. "Format Date2". sc_confirm ("Message") This macro shows a Javascript confirm screen. "Target") This macro Interrupts the application execution if there are error messages generated by the macro "sc_error_message". sc_get_theme This macro returns the application theme name. D. "Value") This macro modify the application execution property. sc_get_regional This macro returns the abbreviation of the regional settings used. sc_decode ({My_Field}) This macro returns the encrypted field or variable to its original value. Copies_Type. sc_apl_conf ("Application".. sc_date_dif_2 ({Date1}. Width) This macro dynamically creates or modifies links between grid applications and other applications. sc_exit (Option) This macro forces the application exit. Y) This macro calculates and returns increments and decrements using dates. "Time2 Format") Control sc_ajax_javascript ( 'JavascriptMethodName'. "Format Date1". . "Output_Format") This macro converts the date field passed as parameter with an input format to another field with an output format. "Format Date1". Rest. Subject. sc_log_add ("action". sc_image (Image01. array("parameter")) This macro allows the execution of JavaScript methods in form/control events sc_alert ("Message") This macro shows a Javascript alert message screen. sc_date_dif ({Date1}. Parameters. "Source") This macro its used to "include" PHP routines. sc_groupby_label ("My_Field") This macro dynamically modify the field label displayed in groupby lines.) This macro its used to select dynamically the application libraries. sc_date_empty ({Field_Date}) This macro checks if a date field its empty retuning a boolean. From. Port. "Property". "description") This macro will add a register into the log table. "Format". sc_mail_send (SMTP. sc_error_message ("Text") This macro generate an error message. Type) This macro calculate verify digits. Application. Mens_Type. sc_include_lib ("Lib1". sc_include ("File". To. Module. "Format Date2") This macro calculates the difference between two dates (passed as parameters) returning the result in days.. sc_get_language This macro returns the abbreviation of the language used. "Target") or (My_Application. Usr. Message. "Time1 Format". Value. sc_set_groupby_rule Macro is used to select an specific GROUP BY rule. sc_btn_new This macro returns "true" when the "Add New" button is selected in a form. "Zip") This macro its used to generate ZIP files from a file list and/or directories. sc_appmenu_create ("Menu_Name") This macro dynamically creates a menu item. "Id_Item". sc_zip_file ("File".Connection_Type. sc_redir (Application. Value) This macro update a Master Application object from a Detail Application. vari?veis report pdf Report PDF Variables Page numbers variables used in Report PDF vari?veis totaliza??o Totalling Variables Variables that contains all the totals (general and for grouping).) This macro delete session variables received as parameter. sc_btn_delete This macro returns "true" when the "Delete" button is selected in a form. Parameters) This macro is used to create a string with the link data to another application. sc_btn_display ("Button_Name". Decimal_Number) This macro its used to set the number of decimals. sc_set_regional ('String Regional') This macros allows to dynamically change the application regional settings. sc_set_language ('String Language') This macro allows to dynamically change the application language. "Label". Attachment) sc_make_link (Application. sc_master_value ('Object'."on/off") This macro activate toolbars buttons on the application in execution time. Menu sc_appmenu_add_item ("Menu_Name". sc_btn_update This macro returns "true" when the "Save" button is selected in a form. [Global_Variable2] . . sc_btn_insert This macro returns "true" when the "Add" button is selected in a form. "Target") This Macro adds dinamically an item to the menu.. sc_reset_global ([Global_Variable1]. "Hint". Parameter01. "Aplication". sc_set_theme ('String Theme') This macro its used to dinamically define the application themes. sc_site_ssl This macro verifies if its been used a safe/secure site.pdf" This macro will change the grid's exported files name. Buttons sc_btn_copy This macro returns "true" when the "copy" button is selected in a form. sc_seq_register This macro provide the register sequential number. "Parameters". (https protocol) sc_trunc_num ({My_Field}. sc_set_global ($variable_01) or ({My_Field}) This macro its used to register session variables. sc_warning 'on' or 'off' This macro dynamically activates or deactivates warning messages control. PDF sc_set_pdf_name "sc_my_file_name. vari?veis totalizacao(quebras) Totalling Variables (group by) Breaking totals variables. sc_url_exit (URL) This macro modifies the application exit URL. "Id_Parent". Error) This macro its used to redirects to other application or URL.. "Icon". Parameter02. Target. "Target") This macro updates a menu item. sc_menu_disable (Id_Item1) This macro deactivate menu structure items. sc_appmenu_update_item ("Menu_Name". array("param1". 3: Method javascript with two paramenters: sc_ajax_javascript('JavascriptMethodName'. "Id_Item". "Id_Item") This macro checks if there is a menu item. sc_menu_force_mobile (boolean) Macro used to force the creation of menus to mobile devices. sc_script_name This macro identifies the application name that was selected in the menu. array("paramameter")). Ex. "Id_Parent". 2: Method javascript with a paramenter: sc_ajax_javascript('JavascriptMethodName'. "Label". 'on/off') Macro used to disable Menu buttons. array("parameter")) This macro allows the execution of JavaScript methods called from events in form/control applications. sc_appmenu_reset ("Menu_Name") This macro reset the array used in the dinamically creation of a menu application. sc_ajax_javascript( 'JavascriptMethodName'. This macro is only valid in applications with AJAX support. sc_btn_disabled ('button_id'. 1: Method javascript without parameters: sc_ajax_javascript('JavascriptMethodName'). "Id_Item") This macro removes dynamically a menu item.sc_appmenu_exist_item ("Menu_Name". "Icon". Macro Scope Control Form Form application . sc_menu_item This macro Identifies the menu item selected. "Hint". sc_appmenu_remove_item ("Menu_Name". Ex. "Aplication". "Parameters". This macro receive two parameters: a required one which recive a the JS method name and an optional that recive an array with the method parameters on it."param2")). Examples: Ex. sc_menu_delete (Id_Item1) This macro remove items of the menu structure. parameter=value. This macro is only available in applications with AJAX support. If there is redirecting enabled. This option String Example modal=Y timeout=5 button=Y button=Y&button_label=OK . Message Message format parameters. This button default function is to close the message. Redirecting In this section is possible to define values for the redirecting target application. button Shows a button inside the Y or N message.: customer_id=ALFKI. button_label Button label.: String modal=Y&button=Y&button_label=Ok&redir=form_employees. see Table2. Title Messagebox title. The properties for this String parameter must be informed in this format: parameter=value. This parameter is required. Ex.onBlur ajaxFieldonBlur onChange onAfterDelete onClick onAfterDeleteAll onFocus onAfterInsert onValidateFailure onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll Onchange OnClick OnFocus onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_ajax_message("Message". If this property is not informed. the application will be redirected after closing the message. This Parameters parameter works only if a "redir" property was informed. "Title". if this parameter is empty.customer_name=ALBERT FRANCINET Table2: Message Parameters String Property Description Values modal Flag to define if the message Y or N will be shown in modal timeout Time in seconds to hide the Seconds message. Parameters Description Message The message to be shown. "Parameters". the title will not be shown. "Parameters_Redir") This macro allows the application to show customizable messages. the message will be shown indefinitely. This property works only if "button" property is not enabled. Parameters Ex. It's use is restricted to AJAX events of Form/Control applications.php&redir_target=_blank For more details about this parameter. When activated. redir_target Target for redirecting. This macro works only if the "button" property is enabled. top Message positioning value in pixels from top margin. Macro Scope Grid application Control Form onClick onBlur onChange onClick onFocus Form application ajaxFieldonBlur onAfterDelete onAfterDeleteAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll Onchange OnClick OnFocus onNavigate onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess left=200 width=320 height=30 button=Y&redir=form_employees. this parameter forces a title bar to be shown.php&redir_target=_blank Y or N show_close=Y Y or N body_icon=N Ex. even if there is no title defined. width Messagebox width value in pixels height Messagebox height value in pixels redir URL or application name for redirecting. 01 sc_ajax_message ("Message". show_close Flag for exhibition of the "close" button on the messagebox title bar. left Message positioning value in pixels from left margin.php . This property works only when the "redir" property is enabled. "Title".works only if the "button" property is enabled. The icon exhibition depends on the applications theme configuration (exhibition schemes). Pixels Number Pixels Number Pixels Number Pixels Number String top=300 String redir=form_employees. "timeout=0"). body_icon Flag for exhibiting a icon on the message body. sc_ajax_refresh() This macro is used especially in Ajax events of a Grid with the purpose of reload the Grid data (refresh). "Property". Qualifies (on) or unqualifies (off) the "delete" button on the form. 1: sc_alert("This is an alert message!!"). Qualifies (on) or unqualifies (off) the "save" button on the form. Macro Scope Grid application onClick sc_alert("Message") This macro shows a Javascript alert message box. Macro Scope Control Form onLoadAll onValidate sc_apl_conf("Application". . "Value") This macro allows to modify the property of the application. The user can determine if a Form will start in insert mode. or a Grid starts by filter. etc. This macro must be used by one application to modify the properties of another application. Ex. Qualifies (on) or unqualifies (off) the "add new" button to allow the addtion of new records. Ex: sc_ajax_refresh(). Properties for Form applications Property start Value new insert on/off update delete on/off on/off Description Forces the form to start in the insert mode in order to add new records. sc_apl_conf("my_form".field_display_off field field_display_on field field_readonly field rows rows_ins Dinamically hides a field. "field_display_off". "filter"). Ex. 6: Forces the "my_grid" application to show 20 lines. "my_field"). sc_apl_conf("my_form". "my_field"). Ex. Ex. "start". (the pencil icon) Property for all applications Property exit Value Description apl/url Forces application to exit to a specified location. Ex. Dinamically shows a field. sc_apl_conf("my_grid". Ex. "rows". sc_apl_conf("my_form". "20"). "add". "field_display_on". 7: Hides "my_field" on the application "my_form" dinamically. 2: Doesn't allow the "my_form" application make addition of new registers. Property for Grid applications Property start cols rows lig_edit Value filter on/off Description Forces the Grid to start by the filter. Forces the number of lines for each page (only for form of multiple records). Qualifies (on) or unqualifies (off) the record edition. Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application onApplicationInit onClick onScriptInit Control Form onApplicationInit onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure Search application onApplicationInit onScriptInit Form application onApplicationInit onScriptInit Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad . (vertical and slide kind) Forces the number of lines per page. "start". Ex. Dinamically set the "readonly" attribute in order to select the field. "off"). "new"). sc_apl_conf("my_form". 5: Forces the "my_grid" application to start by filter. 1: Forces the "my_form" application to start in the addition mode. sc_apl_conf("my_grid". sc_apl_conf("my_form". Forces the number of lines for insert (only for form of multiple records). "my_field"). Ex. Forces the number of columns. 3: Sets "my_field" on the application "my_form" (readonly attribute) to "true" dinamically. "field_display_off". 4: Shows "my_field" on the application "my_form" dinamically. . "Icon". Hint Descriptive hint to menu item. Application: Is the name or the variable that contains the name of the application to be activated/deactivated. 'off'). "Id_Item". "_blank" to a new one and "_parent" to exit the window. "Id_Parent". Ex. Id_Parent Parent menu item id. Aplication Menu item URL or application name Parameters String with parameters to pass to the menu item application. Target Target for menu item link. Status: Is the value or variable that contains the value to be attributed to the application. Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application onApplicationInit onClick onScriptInit Control Form onApplicationInit onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onApplicationInit onScriptInit Form application onApplicationInit onScriptInit Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad sc_appmenu_add_item("Menu_Name". Parameter Description Menu_name Application menu name. "Label". "Hint". 1: sc_apl_status ('atu_cad'. "Aplication". It is only possible to use this macro when there is an array created before by the macro sc_appmenu_create. "Target") Adds dinamically an item to a menu application. The values are: "on" to activate and "off" to deactivate.param2=valor Icon Path to icon used in menu item. "Parameters". 2: sc_apl_status ({var_name_appl}. Ex. {var_status}). Label Menu item description.onValidateSuccess sc_apl_status("Application". These macros activate/deactivate the applications that a user has acess to. Ex. Id_item Menu item id. ("_self" to use the same window. For roots the null/empty value is passed.: param1=valor. "Status") Used to control the security access. 'item_1'.'item_1'. 2: Adds a on the menu_main the the item_1 named Category. 3: Adds a on the menu_main (item_2) the the item_1 named Category linked to the form_category. Macro Scope Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad sc_appmenu_create("Menu_Name") This macro initializes the array used in the dimanically creation of the menu application.'Category'.'form_category').'item_1'.'form_category'). Macro Scope Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad sc_appmenu_exist_item("Menu_Name". 1: Creates a menu named menu_main. Ex.Ex. sc_appmenu_create('menu_main').'item_2'.'item_2'. Ex. Parameter Description menu_name Menu application name id_item Menu item id Ex.'Category Form'. It must be informed the menu application name as parameter. 'item_2')){ sc_appmenu_update_item('menu_main'. This macro must be used in control events or onload menu event. 1: sc_appmenu_create('menu_main'). "Id_Item") Verify if a menu item exists and returns true or false.'').'Category Form'. sc_appmenu_add_item('menu_main'. Ex. sc_appmenu_add_item('menu_main'. 1: if(sc_appmenu_exist_item('menu_main'. .''. 'item_2'. It must be informed the menu application name as parameter. Macro Scope Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad ("Menu_Name") This macro reset the array used in dinamically creation of a menu application.'Category Form'. } Macro Scope Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad sc_appmenu_remove_item("Menu_Name". Ex.'form_category').'item_2'). Macro Scope Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad . 1: sc_appmenu_reset('menu_main').'item_1'.} else{ sc_appmenu_add_item('menu_main'. "Id_Item") Remove dinamically a menu item. 1: sc_appmenu_remove_item('menu_main'. To use this macro it is necessary to execute the macro sc_appmenu_create before. Par?metro Descri??o menu_name Menu application name id_item Menu item id Ex. .: param1=valor.'form_category'). The "connection" parameter is optional. In the other cases. Target for menu item link Ex. if the user wish to make transaction control. onBeforeInsert. "Label". "Id_Parent".sc_appmenu_update_item("Menu_Name". they are automatically protected through transaction control. Parameter menu_name id_item id_parent Label Aplication Parameters Icon Hint Target Description Application menu item name Application menu item id Application menu item parent id. 1: sc_appmenu_update_item('menu_main'. "Hint". Descriptive Hint for menu item. the events that can run this macro is dependent of the database update (onAfterInsert. since the connection is the same of the application.param2=valor Icone path used in menu item.'item_1'. "Parameters". necessary only if the command is executed in a different database from the specified application. "Aplication". "Icon". For roots the null/empty value is passed.'Category Form'. onAfterUpdate. It is only possible to use this macro on items created before by the macro sc_appmenu_add_item. Menu item URL or application name String with parameter to pass to the application menu item Ex. must begin with this macro and finish with the "sc_commit_trans()" macro to confirm the updates or "sc_rollback_trans" to cancel the transactions. In form applications. "Target") Updates an application menu item dinamically It is only possible to use this macro when there is an array created before by the macro sc_appmenu_create. Macro Scope Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad sc_begin_trans("Connection") This macro starts a set of transactions in the database. Application menu item description. onAfterDelete. "Id_Item". onBeforeUpdate or onBeforeDelete).'item_2'. this macro only works with "slide" orientation. off).Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application onClick onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onBlur onChange onClick onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate sc_block_display(Block_Name. } else { sc_block_display(personal. By default all the blocks are displayed ("on" condition). off). on/off) Dynamically determines the display fields of a specific block. Ex. } Obs: In grids. Macro Scope Grid application Control Form Form application Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange onClick OnClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess . 1: if ({type_customeri} == "personal") { sc_block_display(company. 1: if (sc_btn_delete) { sc_error_message("Unable to delete this record"). } Macro Scope sc_btn_delete Available when the "Delete" button is clicked. allowing especific programmation in run time. Ex. Can be tested and used inside the ScriptCase events. Ex. 1: if (sc_btn_copy) { sc_message("Record copied successfully!"). Can be tested and used inside the ScriptCase events. } Macro Scope Form application onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess .onScriptInit onClick onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onAfterDeleteAll onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_btn_copy Available when the "Copy" button is clicked. allowing especific programmation in run time. Generates the XLS. Button_Name: Is the variable name that contains the name of the button to be activated/deactivate. Goes to the last page of the grid.sc_btn_disabled('button_id'. Displays the "Summary" button in the grid. Generates the RTF. Displays the "New" button. or if the form is running in the grid iframe) Displays the "Include" button of the form. Generates the CVS. Generates the Word."on/off") Activate toolbars buttons on the application in execution time. Generates detail PDF. Generates black and white PDF. Buttons Name (Grid): Buttons Name first back forward last filter pdf det_pdf pdfbw xls xml cvs rtf word print det_print summary new insert update Description Goes to the first page of the grid. 'on/off') This macros is used to disable or enable buttons from a Menu application. Macro Scope Menu application onLoad sc_btn_display("Button_Name". Generates colored PDF. Goes to the previous page of the grid. (if the application has link for it. Goes to the next page of the grid. Generates the XML. Displays the "Print" button in the grid. (only for forms running in grid?s iframe) Displays the "Update" button of the form. Displays the "Print" Button in the detail. Displays the "Filter" button. Ex: sc_btn_disable('btn_2'. (only for forms running in grid?s iframe) . 'off'). 'off'). Open the form in print mode. Displays the "Update" button of the form. 'off'). if its off the form will starts in insertion mode. Ex. Displays the "Facebook" button on a control. Displays the "Twitter" button on a control. OBS. 1: sc_btn_display ('new'. Displays the "Copy" button of the form. Buttons Name (Form): Buttons Name first back forward last new insert update delete copy qsearch pdf print Description Goes to the first page of the form. Displays the "Quick Search" button of the form. Displays the "PayPal" button on a control. Displays the "Include" button of the form. Generates PDF file from form. Buttons Name (Control): Buttons Name ok exit facebook twitter google paypal Description Displays the "Ok" button on a control. Ex. Goes to the next page of the form. Displays the "Exit" button on a control. Macro Scope Grid application Control Form Form application onScriptInit onLoadAll onAfterDelete onRefresh onAfterDeleteAll onScriptInit onAfterInsert onValidate onAfterInsertAll onValidateFailure onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onLoad . Goes to the last page of the form. Displays the "Google+" button on a control. Goes to the previous page of the form. sc_btn_display ({variavle_button}. Remember that the buttons name must be lowercase. 2: If we use variables or fields ({Fields} or [Global_Variables]) as parameters its not allowed the use of the quotes or single quotes. Displays the "New" button on the form. Displays the "Delete" button of the form.delete qsearch Displays the "Delete" button of the form (only for forms running in grid?s iframe) Displays the "Quick Search" button in the grid. Ex. allowing especific programmation in run time. } Macro Scope Form application onLoad sc_btn_update Available when the "Save" button is clicked.onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_btn_insert Available when the "Add" button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the ScriptCase events. } Macro Scope Form application onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_btn_new Available when the "Add New" button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the ScriptCase events. allowing especific programmation in run time. Can be tested and used inside the ScriptCase events. Ex. 1: if (sc_btn_insert) { sc_message("Record inserted successfully"). 1: if (sc_btn_new) { {My_Date} = date('Y/m/d'). . allowing especific programmation in run time. Ex. 5x4=20 . Module. {my_rest}. 10. Default value is "1". 11. 6x1=6 . 4x5=20 . 1234567. Parameter Digit Rest Value Module Weights Type Description Variable that will recieve the calculated digit. Value or Variable containing the module to be used. 2). Ex. 1x2=2 Parcels sum: 1 + 4 + 6 + 1 + 0 + 4 + 6 + 2 + 2 = 26 Rest of the division of 26 / 10 = 6 Digit: 10 . Value or Variable to calculate the digit. 2: sc_calc_dv({my_dv}. 1: if (sc_btn_update) { sc_error_message("Record updated successfully"). 1). 2x1=2 . 4x1=4 . Weights. } Macro Scope Form application onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_calc_dv(Digit. Type) Calculate verifier (checksum) digits. Parcels calculation: 7x2= 14 . 5x2=10 . 2x7=14 . 1: sc_calc_dv({my_dv}. Default value is the "98765432" values. 98765432. {my_rest}.2 = 9 Ex. 12.6 = 4 Macro Scope Blank Grid Control Form application application onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onClick onBlur Search Form application application onApplicationInit ajaxFieldonBlur onRefresh onAfterDelete Menu application onApplicationInit onExecute . Parcels calculation: 7x2= 14 . 3x6=18 . Rest. 1x8=8 Parcels sum : 14 + 18 + 20 + 20 + 18 + 14 + 8 = 112 Rest of the division of 112 / 11 = 2 Digit: 11 . Value or Variable containing the parcels calculation to be used: 1 to normal sum of the parcels values and 2 to the sum of each algorithm of the parcels. Value. Default value is module "11". Value or Variable containing the weights to be used. Variable that will recieve the "rest" of the division. 6x3=18 . 3x2=6 . 1234567. Ex. "New_Connection02"). } Macro Scope Grid application Control Form onGroupBy onRefresh Form application onBeforeUpdate onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_change_connection("Old_Connection".onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit onChange onSave onClick onScriptInit onClick OnValidate onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_changed({Field_Name}) Macro to check if the field name have been changed. Ex. "Old_Connection02". . 1: To change the connections: sc_change_connection ( "Old_Connection". "New_Connection") This macro dynamically change the application connections. "New_Connection". 1: if (sc_changed({my_field})) { Echo "Filed have been changed". being necessary. [Test_Connection]). The "connection" parameter is optional. use this macro to guarantee the transactions previously effected. onAfterDelete. If the user. Multiple connections can be passed as parameters that must be separated by ". since the connection is the same of the application. 2: To use variables or change the main connection as follows: sc_change_connection ([Global_Connetion]. in any of these events. Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onBlur onChange onClick onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange onClick OnClick OnFocus . if the command is executed in a different database specified to the application. only. onAfterUpdate.Allows to change more then one application/connection in one command. The exchanges take effect in the following applications Macro Scope sc_commit_trans("Connection") This macro has the objective to confirm a transaction set in the database." (semicolon). onBeforeInsert. Ex. use an application redirectioning (macro "sc_redir") must before the redirect. the events that can run this macro is dependent of the database update (onAfterInsert. Ex. they are automatically protected through transaction control. 3: To delete the exchange: sc_reset_change_connection (). In form applications. onBeforeUpdate or onBeforeDelete). {name of the field date}. "+". Ex. 1). Y) This macro has the aim to calculate the increment or decrement of dates. "Operator". "-". 0. "Format". 15. Ex. OBS: To be certified of the date format. Format Formatting thats the date field is. For its use are necessary some parameters as follows: Parameter Description Date Date field that contains the date to be modified. try it in any event: echo "form_date =". 0. M Number of months to increment or decrement. "-". 1. 0). "dd/mm/yyyy". 30. 2). This macro is used to confirm that the action must be really executed. 3. D. Ex. before use the function. Macro Scope Grid application Control Form onClick onClick Form application onClick sc_date(Date. "yyyymmdd". . 1: {birthdate} = sc_date({birthdate}). Y Number of Years to increment or decrement. Ex. "yyyy-mm-dd". preventing mistakes. 2: $new_date = sc_date({birthdate}. D Number of days to increment or decrement.onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_confirm("Message") Valid only in the PHP programming code that runs when called through a toolbar button. 3: {inclusion_dt} = sc_date(date('Ymd'). 1: sc_confirm ("Do you really wish to execute this action??"). Operator "+" for increment and "-" for decrement. M. Db_Format Used to get the Dadabase date format. 1: Converts the date from "dd/mm/yyyy" format to the "yyyymmdd" format. "db_format". {field_date} = sc_date_conv({field_date}. "dd/mm/aaaa". "dd/mm/aaaa"). 2: Converts the date from the database native format to "dd/mm/yyyy" format. "Output_Format") This macro converts the date field passed as parameter with an input format to another field with an output format. . Ex. Ex. Parameter Description A or Y Used to reference years. "db_format"). D Used to reference Days. M Used to reference Months. {field_date} = sc_date_conv({field_date}. 3: Converts the date from the "dd/mm/yyyy" format to the Database native format. {field_date} = sc_date_conv({field_date}. "Input_Format".Macro Scope Blank Grid Control Form Search application application application onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onClick onBlur onRefresh onFooter onChange onSave onGroupBy onClick onScriptInit onHeader onClick OnValidate onNavigate onFocus onRecord onLoadAll onScriptInit onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_date_conv({Field_Date}. Ex. "aaaammdd"). "dd/mm/aaaa". Ex. Ex. {date2}. .Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application onClick onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onBlur onChange onClick onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_date_dif({Date1}. "Format Date1". "aaaa-mm-dd". {Date2}. "aaaa-mm-dd". "04/21/2004". 1: {amount_days} = sc_date_dif({date1}. 2: {amount_days} = sc_date_dif("2000-05-01". "mm/dd/aaaa"). Parameter Date1 Format Date1 Date2 Format Date2 Description Date1 value or variable. months and years. Value or Variable containing the date format stored on Date2. {amount_days} would be equal to 1451 (days) Note: Formats can be different but must be in days. "Format Date2") Calculates the difference between two dates (passed as parameters) in days. Value or Variable containing the date format stored on Date1. Date2 value or variable. "mm/dd/aaaa"). Value or Variable containing the date format stored on Date2. Parameter Date1 Format Date1 Date2 Format Date2 Option Description Date1 value or variable. 1). "Format Date2". {dif_months} = {differences[1]}. {dif_years} = {differences[2]}. where the index 0 have the amount of days. {dif_days} = {differences[0]}. 1: {differences} = sc_date_dif_2 ({date1}. Option) Calculates the difference between two dates (passed as parameters) returning the amount of days. "yyyy-mm-dd". Date2 value or variable. "mm/dd/yyyy". the index 1 have the amount of months and the index 2 have the amount of years. Ex. . Value or Variable containing the date format stored on Date1. 1 = Doesn't consider the initial day. months and years. {Date2}. The result is returned in an array structure. "Format Date1".Macro Scope Blank Grid Control Form Search application application application onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onClick onBlur onRefresh onFooter onChange onSave onGroupBy onClick onScriptInit onHeader onClick OnValidate onNavigate onFocus onRecord onLoadAll onScriptInit onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_date_dif_2({Date1}. 2 = Considers the initial day. {date2}. Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange onClick OnClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess . "mm/dd/yyyy". {differences[0]} = 20 (days) {differences[1]} = 11 (months) {differences[2]} = 3 (years) Ex. "yyyy-mm-dd". "yyyy-mm-dd". months and years Macro Scope Blank Grid Control Form Search application application application onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onClick onBlur onRefresh onFooter onChange onSave onGroupBy onClick onScriptInit onHeader onClick OnValidate onNavigate onFocus onRecord onLoadAll onScriptInit onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_date_empty({Field_Date}) This macro checks if a date field is empty.Ex. Note: Formats between the two dates can be different but it must have days. "04/21/2004". 2: {differences} = sc_date_dif_2 ("2000-05-01". "04/21/2004". 1). "mm/dd/yyyy". 3: Using the option 2 {differences} = sc_date_dif_2 ("2000-05-01". {differences[0]} = 21 (days) {differences[1]} = 11 (months) {differences[2]} = 3 (years). 2). Ex. } Macro Scope Grid application Control Form onClick onBlur onHeader onChange onRecord onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh Search application onRefresh OnValidate Form application ajaxFieldonBlur onAfterDelete onAfterDeleteAll onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_decode({My_Field}) Returns. 2: Using an user variable: $my_var = sc_decode($field_cript). Note: Netmake isn't responsible by the cryptography algorithm integrity (it is an open source algorithm) . 1: if (sc_date_empty({my_date}) ) { sc_error_message ("Invalid Date").Ex. the encrypted field or variable. Ex. 1: Using a local variable: {my_field} = sc_decode($field_cript). to its original value. Macro Scope Blank Grid Control Form Search application application application onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onClick onBlur onRefresh onFooter onChange onSave onGroupBy onClick onScriptInit onHeader onClick OnValidate onNavigate onFocus onRecord onLoadAll onScriptInit onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_encode({My_Field}) Returns the field or variable with the content encrypted. Note: Netmake isn't responsible by the encrypting algorithm integrity. Macro Scope Blank Grid Control Form application application onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onClick onBlur Search Form application application onApplicationInit ajaxFieldonBlur onRefresh onAfterDelete Menu application onApplicationInit onExecute . (The algorithm provided is open source). 1: Encrypting a local variable: $field_cript = sc_encode({my_field}). Ex. 2: Encrypting an user variable: $field_cript = sc_encode($my_var). Ex. displays a error message in the format [Microsoft] [ODBC SQL Server Driver] [SQL Server] You can't erase the record. which cancels the record exclusion. delete or update. } sc_error_message({sc_error_delete}). It can be used in along with variable: {sc_erro_delete}. "]").onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit onChange onSave onClick onScriptInit onClick OnValidate onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_error_continue("Event") This macro deactivates the Scriptcase standard database error treatment message for the event passed as parameter allowing it to be substituted by the programmer customized error treatment. trigger treatment. Ex. } Macro Scope . 1: Using on the event onDelete for the message returned by mssql. sc_error_exit. $tmp 1). if (!empty({sc_error_delete})) { $tmp = strrpos({sc_error_delete}. {sc_erro_insert} and/or {sc_erro_update} The events to be passed as parameter are: insert. if ($tmp !== false) { {sc_error_delete} = substr({sc_error_delete}. sc_error_continue("delete"). . Ex. sees the macro "sc_error_continue".com). sc_error_exit().? Note: To access the database return error. which occurs by trying to exclude a record. displaying the error messages. sc_error_exit(my_application. Ex. It is used when there is a need to treat these messages. If informed an URL or the name of an Application. opening in another window. bellow the error messages to redirect the processing to the informed URL/Application. in case of database validations via triggers or procedures that they return messages. Ex. "Target") Interrupts the application execution.mysite. if there is error message generated through " sc_error_message" macro. 1: Content of the variable {sc_erro_delete}. 2: Display the error messages and the "OK" button to redirect to URL. Macro Scope Form application onAfterDelete sc_error_exit(URL. sc_error_exit(http://www. 3: Display the error messages and the "OK" button to redirect to Application.?[Microsoft] [ODBC SQL Server Driver] [SQL Server] You can't erase this register. Like for example. "Target") or (My_Application. "_blank"). 1: Displays only the error messages. returning an error message generated by database trigger using MsSQL. Ex. The target parameter its opicional.Control Form onScriptInit Form application onBeforeDelete onBeforeInsert onBeforeUpdate sc_error_delete This variable returns a string with a database error message. an "OK" button is displayed. except when using the "sc_error_exit" macro. in case of database validations via triggers or procedures that return message. returning an error message generated by database trigger the using mssql ?[Microsoft] [ODBC SQL Server Driver] [SQL Server] You can't add this register.? Note: To access the return of the database error. In "Form and Control" applications. the messages are presented together with other error messages found in the application.Macro Scope Control Form onBlur onChange onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application OnValidate Form application ajaxFieldonBlur onAfterDelete onAfterDeleteAll onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange OnClick OnFocus onNavigate onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_error_insert This variable returns a string with the database error. that occurs when adding a record. 1: Variable {sc_erro_insert}. see the macro "sc_error_continue". Macro Scope Form application onAfterInsert sc_error_message("Text") This macro generates an error messages. Ex. In "Grid and Menu" applications the messages only will be presented through the " . For example. It is used when is neede to treat these messages. {discount} .The command must finish with ").? Note: To have access the return of database error see the macro "sc_error_continue". Ex. in case of database validations via triggers or procedures that return message. 1: Variable {sc_erro_update}. Macro Scope Control Form onBlur onChange onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application OnValidate Form application ajaxFieldonBlur onAfterDelete onAfterDeleteAll onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange OnClick OnFocus onNavigate onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_error_update This variable returns a string with a database error message that occurs when updating a record. returning an error message generate by a database trigger using mssql. if the value in the discount field is over 0. For example. " above of the allowed one").10 && [glo_usr] == 'operator') { sc_error_message("Discounting of " ." (close parentheses and semicolon) used as delimiter for the macro interpreter.10 and the user try to add or save this record. 1: if ({discount} > 0. } In this example. ?[Microsoft][ODBC SQL Server Driver][SQL Server] You can't updatethis record. It is used when there is a need to treat these messages. . the operation is finished and the error message is presented. Ex.sc_error_exit" macro. 1: if (sc_after_delete) { sc_exec_sql("delete from mytable where key = {key_ant}").Macro Scope Form application onAfterUpdate sc_exec_sql("SQL Command". Required only. } Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application onClick onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onBlur onChange onClick onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_exit(Option) This macro can be used in the ScriptCase events and created button and may return . Ex. "Connection") This macro allows to condition the circumstances thats the SQL commands are executed. The "Connection" parameter is optional. if the command is executed in a data base different from the application. sc_field_color ("customerid". sc_exit(r) Rollback pending transactions. sc_exit(ok.ref) Same of the sc_exit(ref) function. "#33FF66"). however. sc_field_color ("customerid". } else { sc_field_color ("value_order".sel) Same of the sc_exit(sel) function. Ex. "Color") This macros its used to change/restore a grid field text color dynamically. sc_exit(ref) Doesn't display the window with an OK button refresh data and returns to the current application. 2: Change the "value_order? field text color. sc_exit(ok. } Ex. display the OK button. This option is only valid for Form and Control Applications. Macro Scope Control Form onClick onScriptInit Form application onClick onScriptInit sc_field_color("Field". {fld_color}). Ex. . display the OK button. Displays a window with an OK button adn returns to the previous application. sc_exit(sel) Doesn?t display the window with an OK button and returns to the current application. Option sc_exit() sc_exit(ok) Description Returns to the previous application without display anything. use the default color. repeat the application select. however.values/process after the execution. if ({value_order} > 1000) { sc_field_color ("value_order". 3: Using a local variable. sc_exit(c) Commit pending transactions. ""). "#33FF66"). Opton Description sc_exit() Doesn't complete transactions in database. Otherwise. if the value is greater that 1000. 1: Change the grid text field ?customer_id? color. sc_field_disabled("Field_02=false"). 4: Using a global variable. Field_03". Ex. . The parameter its optional. "I" its used only to block de addition of new records. Ex. Field_03=true"). sc_field_disabled("Field_01=true. 3: Blocks several fields. on/off) This macro dynamically display a specific field. Field_02. for adition and update. Field_02=false. in case of the parameter has not been informed the scriptcase will use both options. 2: Unblocking a field for addtion and update. "Parameter") This macro its used to block a field to get any data that would be typed on it. Macro Scope Control Form onLoadAll Form application onLoad onNavigate sc_field_display({My_Field}. Macro Scope Grid application onRecord onScriptInit sc_field_disabled("Field_Name = True/False". sc_field_disabled("Field_01.Ex. Ex. 1: if ({tp_customeri} == "personal") { sc_field_display({company_name}. "U" to block only the update. By default all the fields are display ("on" condition"). Fields that its going to be blocked should be followed by the option "true" (default) or "false". Ex. "U"). 4: Combination of block and unblock of several fields. [glo_color]). sc_field_disabled("Field_01"). Ex. sc_field_color ("customerid". off). only for update. 1: Blocks only one field for addition and update. . off).} else { sc_field_display({personal_name}.) This macro is intended to inhibit the query fields on the initial load. Field2. Macro Scope Grid application onApplicationInit sc_field_readonly({Field}.. Fields inhibited by this macro can be enabled by using the "Columns" button. {TotalValue}). Ex 01: sc_field_init_off ({orderID}. on/off) . } Macro Scope Grid application Control Form Form application onApplicationInit onBlur ajaxFieldonBlur onClick onChange onAfterDelete onHeader onClick onAfterDeleteAll onNavigate onFocus onAfterInsert onScriptInit onLoadAll onAfterInsertAll onRefresh onAfterUpdate onScriptInit onAfterUpdateAll onValidate onBeforeInsertAll onValidateFailure onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange OnClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_field_init_off(Field1.. 2: To set a field as read only dynamically use: sc_field_readonly({my_field}). used by an ajax event to define if a field its going to be read-only (On) or read-only (Off). section "ReadOnly".This macro dynamically set a form field attribute to 'ReadOnly'. Use this macro only to do it at 'runtime'. "Weight") This macro allows to modify the grid field style dinamically. "Background-Color". "Size". 1: Description Name Field cell background Color Field font size Font Color Font family Font weight . Macro Scope Control Form Form application onBlur ajaxFieldonBlur onChange onAfterDelete onClick onAfterDeleteAll onFocus onAfterInsert onLoadAll onAfterInsertAll onRefresh onAfterUpdate onScriptInit onAfterUpdateAll onValidate onBeforeInsertAll onValidateFailure onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange OnClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_field_style({My_Field}. The on/off parameter its opitional. Parameter Field Background-Color (optional) Size (optional) Color (optional) Family (optional) Weight (optional) Ex. Ex 1: To set a field as read only even when the form is in "Addition mode": if (sc_btn_new) { sc_field_readonly({my_field}). "Family". "Color". } Ex. Otherwise set this parameter on / off on the form interface. 2. '#33FF99'. '1'. "Dec_Symb". 'Arial.90 Ex. Ex.'. 2.678 Ex. ''). Amount_Dec Number of decimals to be displayed. ''. Input value = 0012345678.345. '. '1'. '. '15px'. Input value = 0012345678. 'S'.'. ''). Fill_Zeros Complete decimals with zeros (fill in) (S = yes and N = no). (1 = left and 2 = right). 1: Formatting an integer.890 Ex.90Output value = -12. "Side_Neg".9 Output value = 12. 0. '1'. filling with zeros. 'N'.345. '1'. 'S'. '.'. "Fill_Zeros".'.678.9 Output value = 0. '. ''. "Currency_Symb".'. Input value = 001234567890 Output value = 1. filling with zeros and using monetary symbol. ''). sans-serif'. 'S'. ''). (1 = left and 2 = right) Currency_Symb Monetary symbol to be displayed.234. 0. '. 'N'. "Group_Symb".'. 'bold'). Macro Scope Grid application onRecord onScriptInit sc_format_num({My_Field}.567. '. '#000000'. '1'. '. 2: Formatting a negative value and truncating decimals.9000 Ex.sc_field_style({my_field}. sc_format_num({my_value}. "Amount_Dec". sc_format_num({my_value}.9 Output value = US$ 12. Side_Neg Negative sign position. Group_Symb Integer values grouping symbol. sc_format_num({my_value}.345. 3: Formatting a value with 4 decimals and filling with zeros.'.90 .678. sc_format_num({my_value}. 'US$'). '. 4: Formatting a value with 2 decimals. Input value = . 5: Formatting a value with 2 decimals. Input value = 0012345678. Side_Currency_Symb Currency symbol position.'. Parameter Description My_Field Variable or field to format (The return is in the next variable). 4. Dec_Symb Decimals separator symbol. "Side_Currency_Symb") This macro its used to format numerical values. sc_format_num({my_value}. Macro Scope Blank Grid Control Form Search application application application onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onClick onBlur onRefresh onFooter onChange onSave onGroupBy onClick onScriptInit onHeader onClick OnValidate onNavigate onFocus onRecord onLoadAll onScriptInit onRefresh onScriptInit onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange onClick OnClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_form_show'on' or 'off' This macro dynamically display or not a form. 1: Doesn't display the form. Ex. Macro Scope Control Form onLoadAll onScriptInit Form application onLoad onScriptInit onValidate sc_getfield('myField') This macro is used to assign objects (that represent the field's form) to a javascript . By default. the form is displayed ("on" condition). sc_form_show = 'off'. variable. Macro Scope sc_get_language This macro returns the abbreviation of the language used. Ex. allowing the user to access the object properties. alert (cli_js. Macro Scope Blank Grid Control Form Search application application application onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onClick onBlur onRefresh onFooter onChange onSave onGroupBy onClick onScriptInit onHeader onClick OnValidate onNavigate onFocus onRecord onLoadAll onScriptInit onRefresh onScriptInit onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess . 1: $my_language = sc_get_language(). This macro will run on control and forms at the javascript events and methods.value). EX: Showing the value of the "client" field of a form cli_js = sc_getfield('cliente'). Ex. Macro Scope Blank Grid Control Form Search application application application onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onClick onBlur onRefresh onFooter onChange onSave onGroupBy onClick onScriptInit onHeader onClick OnValidate onNavigate onFocus onRecord onLoadAll onScriptInit onRefresh onScriptInit onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange onClick OnClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_get_theme This macro returns the application theme used. Ex. Macro Scope Blank Grid application application Control Form Search application Form application Menu application . 1: $my_theme = sc_get_theme().sc_get_regional This macro returns the abbreviation of the regional settings used. 1: $my_regional = sc_get_regional(). Ex: . Macro Scope Grid application onGroupBy sc_hide_groupby_rule('group1'. 'grop2'. Ex. 'group3') This macro is used to disable Group By rules in execution time. Ex. 1: sc_groupby_label('state') = "state grouping".onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onClick onBlur onRefresh onFooter onChange onSave onGroupBy onClick onScriptInit onHeader onClick OnValidate onNavigate onFocus onRecord onLoadAll onScriptInit onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_groupby_label("My_Field") This Macro dynamically modify the field label displayed in group by lines. 2: sc_groupby_label('balance') = "balance total". The Group By rules ID should be informed as parameters in the macro. } Macro Scope Grid application onApplicationInit sc_image(Image01.Public: All the projects will have acess.gif. . 1: sc_image (img1. When a script is catalogued. group level or user level. .User: Only the user (the one's that will be loged at that time) will have acess. "Source") The Scriptcase allows the user to catalogue his PHP scripts to use in various applications. All images used in the applications are automatically copied to each application. 'rule_2'). Ex. the user has the option of the context choice where it will be stored./devel/conf/sys/img/img/). img2. Note: The images must exist in the development environment images directory (.Project: Only the project users (the one's that will be loged at that time) will have acess. To catalogue the scripts go to the ScripCase main menu at "Tools > Library" and use the "upload" option existing in the interface.. Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid Control Form Search application application onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onLoadAll onScriptInit onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Form application onApplicationInit onClick onLoad onLoadRecord onScriptInit onValidate Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad sc_include("File". .if( [usr_login_group] == 'seller' ){ sc_hide_groupby_rule('rule_1'. .jpg).jpg) This macro its used to copy images in some events or Javascript commands to load images to an application. global level (Scriptcase). The sc_include macro. The Source context that the script was saved. . sc_include(my_script. usr).php).Script Name: Script name to be included. sc_include(my_script.Sys or Blank: Scriptcase global level. grp). Ex.Usr: User level.php. .php.Prj: Group level. 2: Including a catalogued script to the group level. Macro Scope Blank Grid Control Form Search application application application onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onClick onBlur onRefresh onGroupBy onChange onSave onHeader onClick onScriptInit onNavigate onClick OnValidate onRecord onFocus onScriptInit onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess . 3: Including a catalogued script to the user level. that could be: . . Ex. the user must inform the script name that will be included and the source. 1: Including a catalogued script to global level. Ex. sc_include(my_script. $pdf->Output(). $pdf->SetFont('Arial'.'B'. sc_label({Customer}) = "Cust Name".16). . Macro Scope Grid application onFooter sc_label({My_Field}) This macro its used to modify dynamically the grid form field label. sc_label([global_variable]) = "Cust Name". PHP Libraries fpdf fpdf_html excel rtf JavaScript Libraries Jquery jquery_thickbox jquery_blockui tiny_mce Ex. Macro Scope Grid application Control Form onNavigate onLoadAll Form application onLoad . "Lib2".) This macro its used to select dynamically the application libraries. $pdf->AddPage().. Ex. Ex..sc_include_lib("Lib1".'Hello World!').10. 3: Using a global variable. $pdf->Cell(40. 1: sc_include_lib ("fpdf"). Ex. 2: Using a variable as paramenter. 1: Using the field name. $pdf=new FPDF(). sc_label("Customer") = "Cust Name". onScriptInit onScriptInit onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit sc_language This macro returns the language and regional settings. 1: echo "Language: ". $user.{sc_language}. $group]). $domain. $password. $dn. (resource) Successful connection and bind. Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid Control Form Search application application onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onValidate onValidateSuccess Form application onApplicationInit onScriptInit Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad sc_ldap_login $ldapConn = sc_ldap_login($server [. Parameters. Application. This macro needs the following parameters: Server = Domain = User = Password = DN = Group = There are three possible returns: Macro return Situation (string)'ldap_connect_error' Connection error with LDAP host/service. "Hint". Ex. This macro initiates the connection and bind it to the user credentials. Width) . Macro Scope sc_link(Column. (string)'ldap_bind_error' Authentication error after successfull connection. "Target". Height. product=[global_costumer]. Id={Id}. More than one parameter must be separated by ". 1: Creates a link to the costumer. To run in an iframe. on the Id field. "modal". there are two optional parameters *: *Height: Set the height of the modal window (default 440). Application: Application name to establish the link.com. In the case of modal target.This macro dynamically creates or modifies links between grid applications and other applications. Id={Id}. if ({costumer_type} == "F") { sc_link (costumer_type. Target : Where the application will function call and may be: Target "_self" "_blank" "iframeT" "iframeL" "iframeR" "iframeB" "modal" Descri??o For carrying on the same page (overrides the query).scriptcase. "paramater and target" have no effect.php. To run in an iframe above the Grid (top). . Parameters: Parameters required by the called application. To run on another page (pop-up). type_a. the left of the Grid (Left). will be assigned the value "_self". the left of the Grid (Left). 3: Creating a link to an URL: in this case. http://www." Personal Data ". Ex. "iframeR"). "Client Data". } Ex. Ex. *Width: Set the width of the modal window (default 630)."hint of the link"). product=[global_costumer]. 700)." Company Data ". To run in an iframe. Hint: Observation or tip displayed when the mouse cursor passes over the link. Id={Id}. Column: Grid column field name to generate the link. sc_link (my_field.php application: sc_link(Id. "_blank"). 500. type_f." (semicolon). Macro Scope .php. Must be informed "=" (attribution sign) .php. Opens a new window and blocks any interaction in the main window. costumer. } else{ sc_link (costumer_type. product=[global_costumer]. It will be executed redirecting to a informed URL. To run in an iframe below the Grid (Bot).php application. passing the global variable [global_costumer] as and the product field (local variable) {Id} to the costumer. Note: If omitted. 2: Creating a dynamic link to another application depeding on the field valor {costumer_type} and opening it in a modal. Grid application onRecord sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application Control Form onClick onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Form application onValidate onBeforeInsert onValidateSuccess onBeforeUpdate onClick onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onValidateSuccess sc_lin_cod_barra_banco Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application Control Form onClick onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Form application onValidate onBeforeInsert onValidateSuccess onBeforeUpdate onClick onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onValidateSuccess sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application Control Form onClick onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate Form application onValidate onBeforeInsert onValidateSuccess onBeforeUpdate onClick onLoad onLoadRecord . The macro parameters can use PHP variables. The information is stored in the "description" field of the log table in the string format with delimiters. thereby making the message and / or the name of the action customizable to the developer.onRecord onScriptInit onNavigate onRefresh onValidateSuccess Grid application Control Form Form application sc_lin_digitavel_banco Macro Scope Blank application onExecute onClick onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit onValidate onBeforeInsert onValidateSuccess onBeforeUpdate onClick onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onValidateSuccess sc_log_add("action". "description") This macro is intended to add a record to the log table. Input: -> keys fields Array ( [clientid] => ANTON ) [fields] => Array ( [old] => Array ( [CEP] => 50710500 [Address] => Rua Desembargador Joao Paes 657 [City] => Farol [State] => RS ) [new] => Array ( [CEP] => 53230630 [Address] => Avenida Presidente Kennedy. allowing the manipulation of the data before and after the record update returning it in an array mode. 1001 [City] => Peixinhos [State] => PE ) ) ) . Macro Scope sc_log_split({description}) This macro is intended to provide access to the information written in the last insertion in the log table. Ex: $arr_description = sc_log_split({description}). Ex: sc_log_add ("access". "Application has been accessed by the user trial"). It is also important to verify the select returned data. {credit_limit} = {my_data[0][2]}. "select order_value from orders where clienteid = '{customer_id} ' and salesman_id = [var_glo_salesman]"). to prevent access to inexistent variables. "Connection") This macro allows the user to execute SQL commands and returns the result to the "dataset" variable. {my_data_erro} . if ({my_data} === false) { echo "Access error. } elseif (empty({my_data})) { echo "Select command didn't return data". credit_limit from customers" ). To have access to the second line (Dataset). use: {customer_id} = {dataset[1][0]}. To have access to the first line (Dataset). once the output array only will be created if the select command returns data.Macro Scope sc_lookup(Dataset. {customer_name} = {my_data[0][1]}. 3: The SQL command also can be composed of application fields (local variables) or of global variables: sc_lookup(dataset. use : {customer_id} = {dataset[0][0]}. {credit_limit} = {dataset[1][2]}. customer_name. } else { {customer_id} = {my_data[0][0]}. If occurs error in the execution of the SQL command. {customer_name} = {dataset[1][1]}. 2: sc_lookup(my_data. credit_limit from customers"). Ex. "select customer_id. {credit_limit } = {dataset[0][2]}. The "connection" parameter is optional. Message=". Ex. "SQL Command". The "dataset" structure is an array (line/column). . Use when the command is executed in a database different from that specified for the application. {customer_name} = {dataset[0][1]}. the variable attributed to the dataset will return as "false" and the error message will be available in the "dataset_erro " variable. 1: sc_lookup(dataset. customer_name. "select customer_id. } Ex. Port. Subject. it could be a string or variable that cointains one or more emails separated by ". it could be a string or . List of the emails that will recieve the message. (String or Variable that contains the message) Message format: (T)ext or (H)tml. (String or Variable that contains the password) From email. (String or Variable that contains the subject) Message body. (String or Variable that contains the server name) SMTP user name. Mens_Type. To. Note2: For a big result returned in the dataset we recomend the use of the macro sc_selec instead of this one. Copies. Parameter SMTP Usr Pw From To Subject Message Mens_Type Copies Description SMTP server name or IP address. (String or Variable that contains the user name) SMTP password. Copies_Type. From. Message subject. Message." or one variable that contains one array of emails. Pw.". Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application onClick onClick onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onBlur onChange onClick onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateSuccess sc_mail_send(SMTP. (String or Variable that contains the email) List of the emails that will recieve the message. Connection_Type. Usr.Note: The command must always finished with semicolon ". Attachment) This macro its used to send emails. 'from. 'Test Email Subject'. 'H'.br'. the variable "sc_mail_ok" will recieve "false" and the error message will be stored on the variavle "sc_mail_erro". ''.br'. [glo_copias]. 'H'.4 : sc_mail_send([glo_smtp]. ''. Ex. ''. If omited.br'. {message}. 2: Usising variables and defining the port. Ex. 'c:/test/arq. ' to@netmake. {from}. ''. Ex. {subject}.com. 'S'. {message}.variable that cointains one or more emails separated by ".br'. 'H').br'. {to}. 'Message'. sc_mail_send([glo_smtp]. Port Server port. 'H'. if ({sc_mail_ok}) { echo "sent {sc_mail_count} e-mail(s) with sucess!!". 'from@netmake. the ScripCase will assume the default value: 25 for not secure port and 465 for secure port.txt'). {attached}). {subject}. 'CCC'. '419'." or one variable that contains one array of emails. Note: To use safe connection its required to have the PHP "php_openssl" extension enable. [usuar].com.com. } Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application onClick onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onClick onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application onAfterDelete onApplicationInit onAfterDeleteAll onExecute onAfterInsert onLoad onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert . Connection_Type Connection security (S) or (N).com.br. {message}. [glo_pw].com.br'. ''. Ex.com. '
[email protected]. 3: No user and password. The amount of emails sent will be stored at the special variable "sc_mail_count". 'T'. {to}. ''. Copies_Type Type copies: BCC (Hiden copies) or CCC (Regular copies). ''.zxy@cop. ''. 'pw'. {sunject}. If any error happend when the scriptcase try to send the email. 1: sc_mail_send('smtp. ''. } else { sc_erro_mensagem({sc_mail_erro}). 'from@netmake. ''. {to}.netmake. [glo_att]). sc_mail_send([glo_smtp]. 'usr'.com. onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll onClick onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_make_link(Application.parm2=[glo_office]). In the format: "=" (the attribution sign) . Ex. Parameters) This macro creates a string containing a link to other Scriptcase application (when writing html code). Parameter Description Application Name of the application to establish the link. without parameters passage.php application. Ex.php. 1: Creating a string with a link for the datacli. . parm1={company}. Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application Control Form onClick onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit onValidate onValidateSuccess sc_master_value('Object'. Value) This macro update a Master Application object from a Detail Application.php). $string_link = sc_make_link(datacli. 2: Creating a string with a link for the application datacli. $string_link = sc_make_link(datacli." (semicolon). with parameters passage. Parameters Parameters necessary so called application. More than one parameter must be separated by ". 1: sc_lookup(result."SELECT SUM(Total) FROM adm_pedido_itens WHERE PedidoID = '{PedidoID}'"). [valor]). they will be hidden too. If a menu item its removed and it have "nodes". Can be use in menu applications or tree menu. Observe that the parameters used in this macro are the "ID" of the items. Object value. Its Not necessary the {} in a field name. Macro Scope Control Form onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit Form application onAfterDelete onAfterDeleteAll onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeInsert onBeforeUpdate onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure sc_menu_delete(Id_Item1) This macro removes menu items passed as parameters. [valor] = {result}[0][0]. Ex. Macro Scope Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad . The value can be a field or a variable. sc_master_value('ValorPedido'.Parameter Object Value Description Object name to be updated in Master Application. Menu items are deactivated recursively (when a submenu item is deactivated its ?nodes? are also deactivated). If no value is passed. } .sc_menu_disable(Id_Item1) This macro deactivates menu items pass as parameters. Ex. 1: To clean global variable. [global2]). Macro Scope Menu application onLoad sc_menu_item This variable is only avaliable for menu application and it has the objective of giving acess to a menu item that was selected. The parameter (true or false) is optional. it will use the value "true" ( enable mobile mode) Ex1: sc_menu_force_mobile(true). Ex2: sc_menu_force_mobile(false). this way the user can take desicions before to run the application. The parameters passed are items "ID?. Macro Scope Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad sc_menu_force_mobile(boolean) This Macro is used to force the creation of menus to mobile devices. if ({sc_menu_item} == "item_1") { sc_reset_global([global1]. Can be used in menu applications or tree menus. ) 4) The target determine which application is opened (default=_self): _self. Error) This macro its used to redirect the processing to other application or URL. } Ex. these must be passed in the following format: 1) After the name of the application.Ex. Ex. Parameter01. must be separated by semicolon (. _parent. _blank or modal. onBeforeInsert. if ([global_user] == "test") { sc_redir(application_x. OBS. 3: Application without parameters and with target.php). } Ex. if ([global_user] == "test") { sc_redir(application_x. 2: If an application requires a global variable another application can initialize it accordingly. parm1={var_test}. "". . if ({sc_menu_item} == "item_5" && (!isset([glo_employ]) || empty([glo_employ]))) { sc_redir(apl_inf_emp). 5) Optional parameter to set error messages redirection in the application: "F" redirects if there is error in the application (default value) and "E" does not redirect. 1: Application without parameters nor target. onafterupdate. Target. parm2="xxx"). 3) More than one parameter. use the comma delimiter (. 2: Application with parameters and without target. onbeforeupdate or onBeforeDelete should come after the use of macro sc_commit_trans so this way it will save the form changes. If your connection uses transaction control the use of this macro on the events onAfterInsert. onAfterDelete. Parameter02.) then 2) = (equal sign) . } Macro Scope Menu application onExecute sc_redir(Application. } Ex. "_parent"). if ([global_user] == "test") { sc_redir(application_x. 4: Application with parameter and target. If the redir uses parameters. Ex. In the employee.php application the parameters will be acessible at [parm1] and [parm2] Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application onApplicationInit onClick onNavigate onScriptInit Control Form onApplicationInit onClick onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application onAfterDelete onApplicationInit onAfterDeleteAll onExecute onAfterInsert onLoad onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll onClick onLoad onScriptInit onValidate onValidateSuccess sc_reset_apl_conf("Application". if its passed it will only erase the modification from that specific application. parm1={var_test}. EX: sc_redir(employee. parm1={var_test}. Everthing that was passed as parameter to the called application will be avaliable as global variable. "start").com). sc_reset_apl_conf("my_application". The property parameter its opicional. } OBS.php.if ([global_user] == "test") { sc_redir(application_x. "_blank").my_page. } Ex. 5: URL. parm2="xxx". . "Property") This macro have the objective to delete all modifications effected by the sc_apl_conf macro. "_blank"). if ([global_user] == "test") { sc_redir(http://www. 1: Deleting the modifications of the "my_application" application. property "start". parm2="xxx". set through the sc_apl_status macro. sc_reset_apl_conf(). sc_reset_apl_conf("my_application").Ex. Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application onApplicationInit onClick onScriptInit Control Form onApplicationInit onScriptInit onValidate onValidateSuccess Search application onApplicationInit onScriptInit Form application onApplicationInit onScriptInit Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad sc_reset_apl_status This macro has the objective to clean all security variables. 3: Deleting the modifications of all the applications. 2: Deleting the modifications of the "my_application" application. Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application onApplicationInit onClick onScriptInit Control Form onApplicationInit onScriptInit onValidate onValidateSuccess Search application onApplicationInit onScriptInit Form application onApplicationInit onScriptInit Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad sc_reset_change_connection This macro has the objective to erase the changes made using the macro "sc_change_connection". Ex. Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application Control Form Form application Menu application onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onValidate onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onScriptInit onLoad . Ex. 1: sc_reset_apl_status(). Macro Scope Blank Grid Control Form Search application application application onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onClick onBlur onRefresh onFooter onChange onSave onGroupBy onClick onScriptInit onHeader onClick OnValidate onRecord onFocus onScriptInit onLoadAll onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange onClick OnClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_reset_menu_delete This macro its used to restore a menu item. [Global_Variable2] .. deleted by the macro "sc_menu_delete". [Pass]). Ex. 1: sc_reset_menu_delete().onValidateSuccess sc_reset_global([Global_Variable1]. Ex..) This macro has the objective to delete global variables. stored in the PHP session. 1: sc_reset_global ([Login]. Macro Scope . 1: sc_reset_menu_disable(). disabled by the macro "sc_menu_disable". Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application onClick onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onBlur onChange onClick onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad . The "Connection" parameter is optional. use only if the command is executed in a different data base from the specified to the application. Ex. Macro Scope Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad sc_rollback_trans("Connection") This macro its used to cancel a transaction set in the database.Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad sc_reset_menu_disable This macro have the objective to enable a menu item. onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_script_name This macro is available to the MENU applications to access the application name that was selected in the menu. It allows the user to make dacisions before executing the application if a pre-process is required to that application. if ({sc_script_name} == "apl1") { sc_reset_global([global1]. [global2]). } Macro Scope Menu application onExecute sc_select(dataset. . Ex. limitecred from costumers"). 1: sc_select(my_data. if ({my_data} === false) { echo "Access error. this macro doesn't manipulate the dataset (the user is responsible for all the manipulation). } else { while (!$my_data->EOF) { {clientName} = $my_data->fields[1]. 1: To clean global variables. "Connection") This macro executes the SQL commands passed as parameter and access the "dataset" in the command. use only if the command is executed in a data base different from the specified in the application. the variable attributed to the database returns as "false" and the error message is available in the "dataset_error" variable. clientName. The connection parameter is optional. Ex. If an error occurs in the sql command execution. Different from sc_lookup macro. "SQL Command". {my_data_erro}. Message =". "select clientId. } Ex."select price order from order where clientId = '{clientId}' and cod_Seller = [var_glo_seller]"). 2: The SQL command can passed as application fields (local variables) or of global variables. } $my_data->Close(). Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application onClick onClick onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onBlur onChange onClick onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange onClick OnClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_select_field({Field}) This macro modify dynamically the SELECT: Is possible to modify dynamically the grid fields through the dynamic modification of the original select. Passing the . 1: A table with the columns year and the months from January to December is used to create a grid using a parameter.$my_data->MoveNext(). Ex.". sc_select(dataset. Note: The command must always be finished with semicolon". displays the years and only a specific month. during the grid execution time. At least one ORDER BY is required in the original grid SQL command to allow the substitution during the grid execution time. modify the grid ORDER BY clause. price. Macro Scope Grid application onScriptInit sc_select_order("Field") It is possible. name. Ex. during the grid execution time. Ex. price FROM table ORDER BY code To change the order from code to name. name. date FROM table ORDER BY code. Macro Scope Grid application onScriptInit . 2: Select Clause: select code. from code to name.parameter as a global variable named "show_month". Modify the select. use: sc_select_order("code") = "name". sc_label(pair_month) = [show_month]. Note: This command must be in the context of "process before the select". 1: Select Clause: SELECT code. in the application is found the following structure: Select Clause: select year. we will have: sc_select_order("name") = "date". At least one ORDER BY is required in the original grid SQL command to allow the substitution execution during the grid time. modify the grid ORDER BY clause. pair_month from table sc_select_field(pair_month) = [show_month]. value from table order by code. name. To change the order. price To change the order from name to date. and the grip column label. Note: This command must be in the context of the evento "onInit". It is possible. 2: Select Clause: SELECT code. name. we will have: sc_select_order("code") = "name". Ex. 1: It adds the contente between the quotes (") in the grids select. Macro Scope Control Form Form application . Ex. It can be used. Macro Scope Grid application onScriptInit sc_seq_register This macro provide the record (being processed) grid sequential number. Ex.sc_select_where(add) Is possible. only in onRecord event. } Macro Scope sc_set_focus('Field') This macro its used to set the focus to a form field. 1: if({sc_seq_register} == 10) { // last line of the page {total} = {sum_total}. during grid execution time to add a field/condition to the search WHERE clause. Ex. } else { sc_select_where(add) = "AND campoX > [global_variable]". if (empty({sc_where_current})) { sc_select_where(add) = "where campoX > [global]". 1: sc_set_focus('name'). } Note: This command must be in the context of "process before the select". Ex. 1: Registering a users variable. Creates a session variable with the name "my_var" with the "mary" content. Only register the session variables from PHP. sc_set_global({fieldname}). Create a session variable with the same name and content of the local variable. 2: For register a field value as a session variable. sc_set_global($my_var). Note: This macro doesn't attribute values. $my_var = "mary".onApplicationInit OnClick onLoadAll onLoad onRefresh onRefresh onScriptInit onValidateSuccess sc_set_global($variable_01) or ({My_Field}) This macro its used to register global variables. Macro Scope Blank Grid Control Form Search application application application onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onClick onBlur onRefresh onFooter onChange onSave onGroupBy onClick onScriptInit onHeader onClick OnValidate onRecord onFocus onScriptInit onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess . Ex. sc_set_language('en_us. 3: Changing the language to Germanian and regional settings to Luxembourg. Ex. sc_set_language('sk. 1: Changes the laguage to English. sc_set_language('en_us'). Ex.es_mx'). sc_set_language('es. Ex: sc_set_groupby_rule = "rule id".sk_sk'). It still allows to define the language and regional settings of the applications using a delimiter ". Ex.sc_set_groupby_rule This macro is used to select a GROUPBY rule in execution time in the onApplicationInit event. Macro Scope Grid application onApplicationInit sc_set_language('String Language') This macro allows to define the application language dinamically. 2: Changing the language to Spanish and regional settings to Mexico. Ex. sc_set_language('es').en_ca')." between the parameters. 4: Changing the language to Eslovak and regional settings to Slovak Republic. Macro Scope Blank Grid Control Form Search Form Menu .de_lu'). Ex. Ex. 2: Changes the laguage to Spanish. 1: Changing the language to English and regional settings to Canada. sc_set_language('de. sc_set_rtf_name .sc_set_xls_name Ex1: sc_set_xls_name = "my_file. The prefix "sc_" makes Scriptcase delete the old files.xls". NOTE: 1) These macros should be used in the event "onScriptInit. XML. remained the prefix "sc_" (as Ex2). XLS. Ex2: sc_set_csv_name = "sc_my_new_file. Ex. Macro Scope .sc_set_pdf_name . can use the following macros: . To assign different names Scriptcase patterns." 2) Even using the macro.application onExecute application application application application onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onLoad onValidate OnValidate onValidateSuccess sc_set_pdf_name"sc_my_file_name.csv".sc_set_csv_name . with the prefix "sc_" followed by a unique identification so the file of a user does not overwrite to one another.pdf" The resulting files of the exported data (PDF. Macro Scope sc_set_regional('String Regional') This macros allows to dynamically change the application regional settings. the Scriptcase will delete the file when it reaches the configured timeout limit (see the setting "File Lifetime" in the production environment). 1: sc_set_regional('en_us'). CSV and RTF) are stored in "temporary" directory specified in the Scriptcase's configuration in development and in production.sc_set_xml_name . Safe site". } Ex. 3: Redirecting if the site isn't safe. if (!sc_site_ssl) { echo "Warning . } Ex. if (sc_site_ssl) { echo "ok .Unsafe site". Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid Control Form Search application application onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onValidate OnValidate onValidateSuccess sc_site_ssl This macro its used to verifie if a used site is a safe site. 1: sc_set_theme('Newyellow'). 2: Using a negative. (https protocol) Ex. 1: Using an affirmative. Ex. if (!sc_site_ssl) { .Blank application onExecute Grid Control Form Search application application onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onValidate OnValidate onValidateSuccess Form application onApplicationInit onScriptInit Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad Form application onApplicationInit onScriptInit Menu application onApplicationInit onLoad sc_set_theme('String Theme') This macros allows to define the application theme dinamically. sc_select or sc_exec_sql. Note: that all database accesses. } Note: This macro works only to the web server llS. 2: Protecting an user variable: $field_protect = sc_sql_injection($my_var).sc_redir("http://www. Macro used for protection against "sql injection" in commands generated by the developer when using the macros: sc_lookup. Ex.erro_page. 1: Protecting a local variable: $field_protect = sc_sql_injection({my_field}). Ex.com/") . have protection against "sql injection". generated for the Scriptcase. Macro Scope Blank Grid Control Form Search application application application onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onClick onClick onScriptInit onScriptInit onLoadAll onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Form application Menu application onAfterDelete onApplicationInit onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll onClick onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_sql_injection({My_Field}) or ($My_Variable) This macro its used to protect the field/variable against "sql injection". Macro Scope . sc_sql_protect($data_final. The "Type" parameter so far can only use the "Date" value.noticia_data_pub BETWEEN ". sc_select_where(add) = " AND news_noticias. if not informed scriptcase will use the default connection."". Ex 01: In this example we will protect the dates passed as parameter so this way it can be correctly interpreted to the ACCESS database. "date"). the "Connection" parameter is opicional." AND ".Blank application onExecute Grid application onClick onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onBlur onChange onClick onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onExecute onAfterDelete onLoad onAfterDeleteAll onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_sql_protect(Value. "Connection") This macro will protect the value passed as paramenter according with the used database. "Type".sc_sql_protect($data_inicial. Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application Control Form onRecord onLoadAll onValidate Search application OnValidate Form application onAfterDeleteAll onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdateAll onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdateAll onValidate . "date"). Par?metro Descri??o My_Field Variable with value to format (return in the same variable). [1] and [2] containing hours. for Time2 to specify the format of Time2 Macro Scope sc_trunc_num({My_Field}. Decimal_Number Amount of decimals to display. 2). {time2}. The result will be returned in an array.sc_time_diff({time1}. contendo o formato no qual est? armazenada a hora1.00 Macro Scope Blank Grid Control Form application application onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onClick onBlur onFooter onChange onGroupBy onClick Search application onApplicationInit onRefresh onSave onScriptInit Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert . "Time2 Format"). "Time1 Format". "Time2 Format") sc_time_diff ({time1}.2 Output value = 1250. with the dimensions [0]. Input value = 1250.235 Output value = 1250. Decimal_Number) This macro is used to truncate numerical values which exceed the decimals amount specified. {time2}. This macro clculates the difference between hour. minutes and seconds for two time values. 1: sc_trunc_num({my_value}.23 Input value = 1250. "Time1 Format".20 Input value = 1250 Output value = 1250. Ex. minu Par?meter Description time1 Valor ou vari?vel Time1 Format Valor ou vari?vel time2 Value or variable Time2 Format Value or variable contendo a primeira hora. Ex.php). 1: sc_url_exit(http://www. 2: sc_url_exit(aplx. Ex. Macro Scope Grid application Control Form onApplicationInit onClick onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit onApplicationInit onClick onLoadAll onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onApplicationInit onScriptInit Form application onAfterDelete onAfterDeleteAll onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll onClick .scriptcase.onHeader onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit onClick OnValidate onFocus onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange OnClick onClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_url_exit(URL) This macro modifies the application exit URL.net). '_self'). the default value is "_top".php'. Macro Scope Blank Grid Control Form application application onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFooter onBlur onGroupBy onChange onHeader onClick onNavigate onClick onRecord onFocus onScriptInit onLoadAll onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure Search application onApplicationInit onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application Menu application ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onExecute onAfterDeleteAll onLoad onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert . Ex: sc_user_logout('usr_login'.onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_user_logout('variable_name'. 'variable_content'. an item of an inexistent array. sc_warning = 'off'. 'apl_redir. 'admin'. Warning messages are generated when a reference is made to an inexistent variable. Ex. 'target') This macro is used to log the user out to the system. etc. 1: To deactivate the message (do not display).php'. Macro Scope sc_warning'on' or 'off' This macro dynamically activates or deactivates warning messages control. 'ctrl_login. If the target is not informed. Ex. Macro Scope Grid application onFooter . 1: $save_current_filter = {sc_where_filter}. These are the data which will be added to the application original where clause after filter submition. Reflects the where clause currently used.onValidateSuccess onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll Onchange onClick OnClick OnFocus onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess sc_where_current Variable to reference the application where clause plus the filter selections(if any). Ex. 1: $save_current_where = {sc_where_current}. according with its selections. Macro Scope Grid application onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit sc_where_filter This macro is used to retrieve the content generated by the "filter". Ex. 3: Multiple files and directories in an array. or the path to the file.htm".zip"). . $prep = array(). "Zip") This macro is used to generate ZIP files from a list of files and/or directories. $prep[] = "/test". 1: Single file compressing. $prep[] = "/test/sample.A variable a file or a directory name. to manipulate the data. . sc_zip_file("/test/sample. or to display it anywhere in the grid. sc_zip_file("/test". "/tmp/test. Ex. 1: $save_where = {sc_where_orig}. Can be used inside ScriptCase events.zip").A variable containing array. "/tmp/test.onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit sc_where_orig This macro saves the application original where clause. which contains a files and/or directories list.htm". The file parameter must be one of the following: . 2: Single directory compressing. Macro Scope Grid application onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit sc_zip_file("File". .Directory name . Ex.zip"). Ex.File name . sc_zip_file($prep. which contains a files and/or directories list. "/tmp/test. The zip parameter must contain the name of the zip file generated.A variable containing array. Ex. mysql. sc_glo_tpbanco Database type (mssql. oracle. sc_glo_usuario Connected user name. etc). sc_glo_banco Database name. sc_glo_senha Database password access. To define user and the password to connect to the database. sc_glo_senha_cript Encrypted password (S/N). use the following variables: Variables Description . 1: $my_database = [sc_glo_banco].Macro Scope Blank Grid Control Form Search application application application onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onClick onClick onSave onFooter onLoadAll onScriptInit onGroupBy onRefresh OnValidate onHeader onScriptInit onNavigate onValidate onRecord onValidateFailure onScriptInit onValidateSuccess Form application Menu application onAfterDelete onApplicationInit onAfterDeleteAll onExecute onAfterInsert onLoad onAfterInsertAll onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit onBeforeDelete onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdateAll onClick onLoad onLoadRecord onNavigate onRefresh onScriptInit onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Database Variables Global variables containing database access values used by main connection. sc_glo_decimal_db Used decimal separator (point or comma). Variables Description sc_glo_servidor Server name. These variables only reference the values without updating it (it is not possible to attribute/modify the values). as in: . These data must be used to connect to the database. Scriptcase generates total variables to each group level. during the system applications execution. [sc_db_master_usr] = {login}. $temp_pass = sc_encode({password}). Totals special variables are then referenced substituting the group name for the key word ?groupby?. [sc_db_master_pass] = $temp_pass. sc_db_master_pass Password to be used. Ex. The routines are defined in event ?onGroupBy? determining the break levels and avalilable to each record. {sc_page_tot} Total number of pages. sc_db_master_cript Encrypted password (S/N) (see sc_encode macro). [sc_db_master_cript] = "S".sc_db_master_usr User login to be used. 2: An application type "control" with a form created with information "login" and encrypted "password". Field Description {sc_page_num} Current page number. Macro Scope Blank application onExecute Grid application onClick onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onNavigate onRecord onScriptInit Control Form onBlur onChange onClick onClick onLoadAll onRefresh onValidate onValidateFailure onValidateSuccess Search application onRefresh onSave onScriptInit OnValidate Form application ajaxFieldonBlur Onchange OnClick OnFocus Menu application onApplicationInit onExecute onLoad Report PDF Variables Page numbers variables used in Report PDF. Macro Scope Totalling Variables During group by and summary processing. Important: These variables only take effect during next application execution remaining valid during all the session (unless modified). Ex. in the group totals. {sum_quebra_parcel} Current group level field ?parcels? total. is possible to display the average (avg) instead of the balance as follows. in the group totals. Totals special variables are then referenced substituting the group name for the key word ? quebra?.Variables {count_ger} {sum_parcel} Description Records total amount. Macro Scope Grid application onFooter onGroupBy onHeader onRecord Totalling Variables (group by) During the group by processing. Scriptcase generates total variables to each group level. {sum_groupby_balance} Current Group level sum for the field ?Balance?. The routines are defined in event ?onGroupBy? determining the group levels. 1: In an application with a group by state and city and that totalizes a balance field. . 1: In an application with a group by state and city that totalizes a balance field. {sum_quebra_balance} Current group level field ?Balance? total. as in: Variable Description {count_ger} Records total amount. Ex. Will show the total sum for the field "Parcel" {sum_balance} Will show the total sum for the field "Balance" {count_groupby} Current Group records total. {count_quebra} Current group level records total. {sum_parcel} Field ?parcels? total . {sum_balance} Field ?Balance? total . {sum_groupby_balance} = {sum_groupby_balance} / {count_groupby}. {sum_quebra_balance} = {sum_quebra_balance} / {count_quebra}. is possible to display the average (avg) instead of the balance as follows. {sum_groupby_parcel} Current Group level sum for the field ?Parcel?. Macro Scope Grid application onGroupBy . Blank application ajaxFieldonBlur onAfterDelete Grid application Control Form .Events X Applications Reference table of available macros by Events and Applications. onAfterDeleteAll . onAfterInsert onAfterInsertAll . onAfterUpdate . onAfterUpdateAll onApplicationInit sc_apl_conf sc_apl_status sc_calc_dv sc_date sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode sc_encode sc_field_display sc_field_init_off sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_hide_groupby_rule sc_image sc_include sc_language sc_redir sc_alert sc_apl_conf sc_apl_status sc_calc_dv sc_date sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode sc_encode sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_image sc_include sc_language sc_redir sc_reset_apl_conf sc_reset_apl_status . sc_reset_apl_conf sc_reset_apl_status sc_reset_change_connection sc_reset_global sc_set_global sc_set_groupby_rule sc_set_language sc_set_regional sc_set_theme sc_site_ssl sc_trunc_num sc_url_exit sc_warning sc_zip_file onBeforeDelete sc_reset_change_connectio sc_reset_global sc_set_focus sc_set_global sc_set_language sc_set_regional sc_set_theme sc_site_ssl sc_trunc_num sc_url_exit sc_warning sc_zip_file . onBeforeDeleteAll onBeforeInsert . onBeforeInsertAll onBeforeUpdate . onBeforeUpdateAll . onBlur sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_message sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_empty sc_decode sc_encode sc_error_exit sc_error_message sc_exec_sql sc_field_display sc_field_readonly sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_include sc_lookup sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_set_global sc_sql_injection sc_trunc_num sc_warning vari?veis database onChange sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_message sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_empty sc_decode sc_encode sc_error_exit sc_error_message sc_exec_sql sc_field_display sc_field_readonly sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme . sc_include sc_lookup sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_set_global sc_sql_injection sc_trunc_num sc_warning vari?veis database onClick sc_ajax_message sc_ajax_refresh sc_apl_conf sc_apl_status sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv sc_confirm sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_empty sc_decode sc_encode sc_exec_sql sc_field_display sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_include sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lookup sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_make_link sc_redir sc_reset_apl_conf sc_reset_apl_status sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_select sc_set_global sc_site_ssl sc_sql_injection sc_trunc_num sc_url_exit sc_zip_file vari?veis database sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_message sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans sc_block_display sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans sc_commit_trans sc_confirm sc_date sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_empty sc_decode sc_decode sc_encode sc_encode sc_error_exit sc_error_message sc_exec_sql sc_exec_sql sc_exit sc_field_display sc_field_readonly sc_format_num sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_get_theme sc_include sc_include sc_lookup sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_redir sc_reset_global sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_rollback_trans . sc_select sc_select sc_set_global sc_set_global sc_site_ssl sc_sql_injection sc_trunc_num sc_trunc_num sc_url_exit sc_warning sc_warning sc_zip_file vari?veis database vari?veis database onExecute sc_apl_conf sc_apl_status sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode sc_encode sc_exec_sql sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_image sc_include sc_language sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_make_link sc_redir sc_reset_apl_conf sc_reset_apl_status sc_reset_change_connection sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_set_global sc_set_language sc_set_regional sc_set_theme sc_site_ssl sc_sql_injection sc_sql_protect sc_trunc_num sc_warning sc_zip_file vari?veis database . onFocus onFooter sc_ajax_javascript sc_ajax_message sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_empty sc_decode sc_encode sc_error_exit sc_error_message sc_exec_sql sc_field_display sc_field_readonly sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_include sc_lookup sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_set_global sc_sql_injection sc_trunc_num sc_warning sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode sc_encode sc_exec_sql sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_include_lib sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_make_link sc_reset_global sc_select sc_set_global sc_sql_injection sc_trunc_num sc_warning . sc_where_current sc_where_filter sc_where_orig sc_zip_file vari?veis database vari?veis totaliza??o onGroupBy sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv sc_changed sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode sc_encode sc_exec_sql sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_groupby_label sc_include sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_make_link sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_set_global sc_sql_injection sc_trunc_num sc_warning sc_where_current sc_where_filter sc_where_orig sc_zip_file vari?veis database vari?veis totaliza??o vari?veis totalizacao(quebras) onHeader sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_empty sc_decode sc_encode sc_exec_sql sc_field_display sc_format_num sc_get_language . sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_include sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_make_link sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_set_global sc_sql_injection sc_trunc_num sc_warning sc_where_current sc_where_filter sc_where_orig sc_zip_file vari?veis database vari?veis totaliza??o onLoad . onLoadAll sc_alert sc_begin_trans sc_block_display sc_btn_display sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_empty sc_decode sc_encode sc_error_exit sc_error_message sc_exec_sql sc_field_disabled sc_field_display sc_field_readonly sc_format_num sc_form_show sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_image sc_label sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_master_value sc_redir sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_set_focus sc_set_global sc_site_ssl sc_sql_injection sc_sql_protect sc_trunc_num sc_url_exit sc_warning sc_zip_file vari?veis database . onLoadRecord onNavigate . onRecord sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_empty sc_decode sc_encode sc_exec_sql sc_field_color sc_field_style sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_include sc_link sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_make_link sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_set_global sc_sql_injection sc_sql_protect sc_trunc_num sc_url_exit sc_warning sc_where_current . sc_where_filter sc_where_orig sc_zip_file vari?veis database vari?veis totaliza??o onRefresh onSave sc_begin_trans sc_block_display sc_btn_display sc_calc_dv sc_changed sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_empty sc_decode sc_encode sc_error_exit sc_error_message sc_exec_sql sc_field_display sc_field_readonly sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_include sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_master_value sc_redir sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_set_focus sc_set_global sc_sql_injection sc_trunc_num sc_warning sc_zip_file vari?veis database . onScriptInit sc_alert sc_apl_conf sc_apl_status sc_begin_trans sc_block_display sc_btn_display sc_calc_dv sc_change_connection ( sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode sc_encode sc_error_continue sc_error_exit sc_error_message sc_exec_sql sc_exit sc_field_display sc_field_readonly sc_format_num sc_form_show sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_image sc_include sc_label sc_language sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_master_value sc_redir sc_reset_apl_conf sc_reset_apl_status sc_reset_change_connectio sc_reset_global sc_select sc_set_focus sc_set_global sc_set_language sc_set_regional sc_set_theme sc_site_ssl . sc_sql_injection sc_trunc_num sc_url_exit sc_warning sc_zip_file onValidate onValidateFailure sc_alert sc_apl_conf sc_apl_status sc_begin_trans sc_btn_display sc_calc_dv sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode sc_encode sc_error_exit sc_error_message sc_exec_sql sc_field_display sc_field_readonly sc_get_theme sc_include sc_language sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadac sc_lin_cod_barra_banco sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadaca sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_make_link sc_redir sc_reset_apl_conf sc_reset_apl_status sc_reset_change_connectio sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_set_global sc_set_language sc_set_regional sc_set_theme sc_site_ssl sc_sql_injection sc_sql_protect sc_trunc_num sc_url_exit sc_warning sc_zip_file vari?veis database . onValidateSuccess sc_apl_conf sc_apl_status sc_begin_trans sc_calc_dv sc_change_connection ( sc_commit_trans sc_date sc_date_conv sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode sc_encode sc_error_exit sc_error_message sc_exec_sql sc_format_num sc_get_language sc_get_regional sc_get_theme sc_image sc_include sc_language sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadac sc_lin_cod_barra_banco . sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadaca sc_lin_digitavel_banco sc_lookup sc_mail_send sc_make_link sc_redir sc_reset_apl_conf sc_reset_apl_status sc_reset_change_connectio sc_reset_global sc_rollback_trans sc_select sc_set_global sc_set_language sc_set_regional sc_set_theme sc_site_ssl sc_sql_injection sc_trunc_num sc_url_exit sc_warning sc_zip_file vari?veis database . Configuring a Production environment . Once the applications are satisfactorily tested in a secure environment then applications are released to production environment. The deployment process involves publishing the ScriptCase developed applications (and libraries) in a PHP supported WEB server. Typical Deployment (recommended) Advanced Deployment. The following topics cover the ScriptCase deployment process.Overview It is common to test new applications in a local development environment.Deployment Deployment . Define Project initial application. . Step 1: Select ScriptCase menu item Project Deploy. as in the image below. It is possible to deploy all the Project or select an application set. Step 4: Include the common libraries required by the applications in the production environment in the deployment package.Typical Deployment The user friendly typical deployment process generates a package with selected applications and libraries enabling instant project availability with minimum effort. Step 3: Select Typical deployment. Step 2: Select the applications to deploy. 3 ??? Deploy on FTP server: Deploy the applications automatically in FTP remote server. ScriptCase offers the following options: 1 . 2 . Enter the directory specification as in image bellow. Step 5: Choose Deployment Output.Deploy on a Server directory: ??Deploy the applications in selected directory. This option should only be used case the deployment is in the same ScriptCase server. . Enter remote server required information as in image bellow.Create ZIP with applications (recommended): Upon complete the process is displayed a download link to the deployment package.Note: In case of re-deployment (deploying again same project applications) it is not necessary to select Deploy with common library unless when the common libraries are updated in another ScriptCase release. . Once the applications are deployed is necessary to configure the production environment before using the system for the first time. Click here for more info.Step 6: Upon complete the process is displayed an application deployed report. Step 2: Select the applications to deploy. Step 4: Create a deployment template to save (and re-use) the defined configuration. Step 3: Select Advanced deployment. Step 1: Access the ScriptCase menu item ProjectDeploy. .Advanced Deployment This deployment type is used to manually configure the production environment (common library) in the production server informing the exact environment location. It is possible to deploy the entire Project (the entire application set) or a partial set of Project applications. according to image below. *Note ??? The character "/". means the Server Web root. /prod_scriptcase/tmp Documents Directory (used for upload) .Absolute path (full path) to doc. /prod_scriptcase/file/img Temporary Directory.Relative path to prod (dir). See a configuration example below.Relative path to img. utilized in relative paths. . Consider that environment directory root is prod_scriptcase. Production Directory . /prod_scriptcase/prod Images Directory (used for upload) .Step 5: Define the production environment directory structure according to the common libraries structure defined in the production server. C:/Apache/Apache2/htdocs/prod_scriptcase/file/doc Step 6: Name the connections used for Production.Relative path to tmp. 2 ??? Deploy in Server directory:?? Deploy the applications in selected directory.Step 7: Select used Deployment Output. . 3 ??? Deploy in FTP server: Deploy the applications automatically in FTP remote server. ScriptCase offers the following options: 1 . This option should only be used case the deployment is in the same ScriptCase server.Generate ZIP with applications (recommended): Upon complete the process is displayed a download link to the deployment package. Step 8: Upon complete the process is displayed an application deployed report. Click here for more info.Step 9: The common libraries are methods required by the applications in the production environment being required by the deployment package. Once the applications are deployed is necessary to configure the production environment before using the system for the first time.here . . This info is not valid when the common libraries are update in another ScriptCase release. Note: In case of re-deployment (deploying again same project applications) it is not necessary to download common library again. Access it via browser (example: http://servidor/raiz-ambiente- . image processing and JavaScript libraries. A Production Server. Directory and Files Enabled. XLS (Excel).Production Environment Production Environment Overview Introduction . It includes resources like: PDF?? programming. is the server where the Scriptcase applications are published (a Web Server supporting PHP). conf Configuration directory. ??Access it via browser (example: http://servidor/raiz-environment-produ????o/diagnosis. Database Access Layer.php). where the production environment is installed . info File with info about PHP release. tmp Temporary file directory. file Directory used to upload files/images.Web Server supporting PHP. Enabled Extensions. saved in sub-dir doc and img respectively.Production Environment A production environment includes a common library set used by ScriptCase developed applications. prod Library directory used by the applications. diagnosis Configuration file with settings like: Operating System. ScriptCase production environment is compatible to the following platforms: Windows Linux IBM I5/OS400 FreeBSD Solaris Mac OS Production Server. 2 . Requirements: 1 .Production Server configured with common libraries. php). Production Environment Management Access Interface Production environment configuration resources interface.produ????o/info. Click here to know more about those configurations *Note ??? See the item Connecting with Database from the WebHelp for more info on how connect the ScriptCase. ?? Access it via http://host or ip/raiz-ambiente-produ????o/prod Interface Resources. . Step 1: Locate the production environment management interface. (directoty _lib. and in the CMD files (C:\WINDOWS\system32) for IIS users (IUSR_NOME-DO-SERVIDOR) . is necessary to define the permissions in the directory _lib (common libraries). in the directory _lib.Configuring The Production Environment Production Environment Extract the zip file. subdirectories and files) Example: chmod 777 _lib -R Creating the connection with the Database using the management interface. For Unix environment. For Windows Servers using Web IIS Server. is necessary to set common libraries permissions recursively. Write and Execution. Permissions ??? Reading. Includes the common libraries in the Production environment directory _lib. In the example: http://host or ip/system/_lib/prod . In the example below was created a directory called "system" to store the applications. Step 4: Enter Database information (server id or name). Step 6: Enter the same connection name defined in the development environment (ScriptCase).21 or 1. .248/tools/nm/sc_helpv7/gerado/en_us/pdfhelp_en_us/img/0186_new_deploy3. After clicking in Advanced. In the example was used MySQL Database. <img src="http://192.168. It must be the same name since the applications are configured to use it. Step 9: Select the decimal number separator to use in the database.254. Ex: 1.png" " border="1" /> Step 3: Select the DBMS.21 Step 10: Choose if the connection will be persistent* or not. Step 8: Run the application to verify it. Step 7: Test the connection and save the configurations.Step 2: Select Create new connection. Step 5: Enter Database user id and password. Step 11: If you want to change the default charset (latin1. Step 2: Choose the connection and edit it. to MySQL) to record or edit to the database select the desired encoding. . Editing the connection Step 1: Select Edit connection. Renaming the connection Step 1: Select Rename connection. Step 2: Select the connection then rename it.Persistent Conexion: Persistent connections are connections that do not close when the execution of your script ends. the file will remain stored in the tmp folder. for example. but for IBM. .html The key will be used only for one machine. because it's based on a digital signature.Optional Settings Temporary files directory: Absolute path to the tmp folder. Link to get the authorization key: http://code. in minutes. Language: Select the language that you desire to the Production Environment. Java Binary: Enter the java executable file name.google. Authorization key to view Ggoogle maps: To use the Google Maps you must have the Authorization key. Time to live (minutes) of files: Time.com/intl/en/apis/maps/signup. that is freely generated. you must to inform javac that is the name of the java executable file. If you want to use a java version different from the version installed in your computer inform the absolute path of that java. PDF Server IP: Server's Internal IP on a network (NAT IP used to call the generated html exported by Scriptcase). Change Password Step 1: Inform the current password. Path for Java Binary: Enter the absolute path of the java binary. In Windows and Linux the default is java and you do not have to inform it. Step 3: Confirm the new password.Step 2: Inform the new password. . SQL commands fast formatting tool. Create Web Help Libraries Locales Layout . Data Dictionary .Data Repository with reusable information about your data. Express Edit .Project Applications common attributes editor.Tools Tools ScriptCase has a set of built-in tools to help the user to use its advanced options. The options available in the Tools menu are: SQL Builder . Sql Builder Sql Builder SQL QUERYS building Wizard tool. fields. Allows the choice of databases. joins. the SQL command. tables. order by and where. tables and fields. Each of the sessions below covers a portion of the building process: Database Selection Tables Selection Fields Selection Joins definition Criteria Settings Order Settings Running the query Saving the query . To access it. The builder then assemble the SQL command. the user must choose the database. visually. .Databases DATABASE SELECTION Choose the database that is used by the application. Image1:Databases Folder. Upon completing the operation the wizard proceeds to next step. The user must choose the data base and click in the "Confirm" button. use the arrows.Tables Selection TABLE SELECTION The next step. Figure1:Tables Folder. Click in Confirm to complete the selection proceed. . is the tables selection used in the SQL command. The selected table is displayed on the right. using the Tables Tab. To select a table. Fields Using the Fields tab. Figure1: Fields Folder.Used to create an alias to the table name. It is used normally when a table is used more than once in the SQL command or the original name is too extense or complex. Attributes: Table/Alias . Select the fields as in previous steps. . Click in Confirm to complete the selection and move to next step : JOINS definition. the user should select the fields used by the application. Type . we will use a commom field ("Customer Code") and we will have as result a cartesian product of these two tables in accordance with the kind of defined join (equal to.Join type: Inner . .Presents the join command mounted. It can be acccessed after set the definitions in the Fields Tab. In other words. bigger than. An example of join use would be the following: In a table of customers register T1 there is the "Customer Code" field. smaller than. Figure1: Join folder Table 1 ..Joins Use this tab to create join commands with SQL tables selected on Tables tab. they will be joined and the data ordered in accordance with the kind of defined join.). In a Purchase Order T2 table also there is the "Customer Code" field and the purchase orders of the customers. If we are making a join of the tables CadClientes and CadPedVendas.. Add Button Update Button Remove Button Clean Button Chart .Display a previously selected table list: Select the first join table.Left Join Right Join Bigger Smaller Bigger Equal Smaller Equal Not Equal Table 2 .Display a previously selected table list: Select the second join table. therefore the SQL Buider undrestand that the user wishes to make more joins. the user can leave the folder. If the two lines are fulfilled. Each field contains the list of the table fields selected.Figure 2: Join Folder with fields. will be opened more two fields. . clicking on the Confirm button. The window initially presents two lines of fields for joins realization. therefore the commands were already incorporated in the main command that is being mounted. If not. To being make a join the check box on the left of the field line is automatically fulfilled. Click in Confirm to move to next step. the Criteria settings used to define search conditions. Determines that the application must select in the table or tables all records that contain the selected field.Determines that the application must select in the table or tables all records with field values greater or equal to the value entered in the next box.Criteria Use the Criteria tab to set the search condition used by SQL Buider for each selected field. <.Greater than.To set the search condition for a field. LIKE . when the database doesn't allow the use of the "=" symbol.Determines that the application must select in the table or tables all recordss that don't contain the selected field.Determines that the application must select in the table or tables all recordss that are less or equal to the value entered in the next box.Determines that the application must select in the table or tables all records with field values less than the value entered in the next box.Greater or equal to . select the Date of birth field.Less than .Means equal and is applied to text fields. . the user select the field (from a list of selected fields in the Fields folder) and select the operation: = Equal to . Attributes : Conditions .. Figure1:Conditions Folder. Click in Confirm to move to next step : Execution folder or Saved folder. < . select the symbol >= and enter "01/01/1970". <> Not Equal to .Determines that the application must select in the table or tables all records with field values greater than the value entered in the next box. Example: To search for records of customers born from 01/01/1970. > . >= .Less or equl to . and select the order criteria: ASC = Ascendant or DES = Descendant and click on Confirm.Order By This tab is used to set the order used to display each selected in the application. SQL Builder moves automatically to the next step : Execution folder or Saved folder. Figure1:Order by Folder When confirming it. Select the field in the combo box. . Executes the created command. search and order criteria defined by user. Copy Button .Determine number of records displayed on result. Attributes> SQL command : The SQL command assembled from the user information (selections. Records per Page . . Figure1: Execution Folder. search and order criteria). Run Button . Example: 30 registers per page.Copy the SQL command to save (copied) into the application in the SQL command area.Run Use this tab to execute the SQL command created from the selections. Save SAVING THE QUERY SQL commands can be saved to be use in the future.A list of existing (saved) SQL commands. Remove the command . Figure1: Save Folder. To edit the command . Saved Statments .Edit the the SQL command. . Save statement as: Enter a name to save the SQL command above. The user can create a new command from an already existing command.Deletes the SQL command. Overview Database Builder allows the Scriptcase user to manage his database or create a new one. Image 2: Selecting a database. . Database Builder is available in several languages and it can manage any database enabled in Scriptcase.Database Builder Database Builder Databse Builder . Access it through the menu Tools >> Database Builder Image 1: Database Builder Access. After selected a database connection created in the project we have total control of the database. Allows to edit the database. SQL Command .Shows the path of the current option selected. Dump .View the table structure.It looks inside the database what was typed there.Image 2: Database Builder Interface.There we have options to create: Tables. 3. . schemas and privileges 10. Seearch . 4. Procedures. 5. 6.Executes a SQL command.Execute a function for several tables at the same time. Functions and Events. Views. 2. Options to multi tables . Create Table . 8. Logout . 11.Exit from the current database management. Tables .Move or Copy all information from the current database to another one. Select Database . 12. Database Options .It allows to select any database existing in that connection. Creating .Exports the database as a SQL dump. Selected Option . Select . 13. 7.View the table records. Interface: 1. Move / Copy .Creates new tables in the database. 9. sql file to execute it. .Sql Command It allows us to execute any SQL command or import a . Image 1: Database Builder SQL Command. Image 1: Database Builder SQL Dump.Sql Dump It allows us to export the database through a SQL dump to several export formats. . .Create Table It allows us to create new tables in the database. Image 1: Database Builder Create Table. . It executes a SQL command: SELECT * FROM table Image 1: Database Builder Select.Select This option allows us to see all records from a table. . etc. we can insert a new record into the table. Alter Table . New Item . Image 2: Database Builder Alter Table. types.Clicking on it. By adding or changing field names. we can alter the table structure.Table Options In this screen we can see the structure of the table. Image 1: Database Builder Table.Clicking on it. Foreign Keys and Triggers . Foreign Keys and Triggers.Image 3: Database Builder New Item. .They allows to add or alter Indexes. Indexes. Properties .Removes (deletes) selected repository.Displays and updates selected repository general definitions.the repository . It very useful to create a normalized data environment in an organization.and have it used in all applications). It also improves development by speeding up data update and by minimizing errors (updates data only once in a single place .Determines the tables containing definitions and the fields used. The data associated to database table fields are stored to be used in different applications.Data Dictionary Data Dictionary Using ScriptCase data dictionary users can create a data repository to use in generated applications. . Delete . Allows to standardize: Data Type Label Size Decimals Description OPERATIONS Operations performed in the repositories: Open . Use the Repository Tables tab to update the information about a repository table. Since a Scriptcase repository is associated to database table fields there is a logic relationship between a repository to a database. ScriptCase data dictionaries are organized by database.link your repository with the connection. Add new tables to the repository or update the tables. Attributes: Data Dictionary Name . When a repository is created the system identifies the database tables existent. Figure2:Database Tables.Repository description.Repository Creates new repository for a specific data base.database connection used. Associate dictionary with connection . Use the Database´s Tables tab to select an existent database table and include it to the repository. Connection . It is possible to add a lable to it to be used externenally to the database. Description . .Repository ID. Table Update Attributes: Data Type . Figure4:Language file index generation. .ScriptCase field type.Figure3: Data Dictionary Tables A created repository can be included in the language files. etc. . SQL Type .Enter a label to the field.Define the field length in the applications. Decimals . NUMERIC.Label .Database field type.Use for fields type DECIMAL. Length (DB) . Figure2: Update Data Dictionary properties. Description .Data Dictionary ID. Attributes: Data Dictionary . .Edit Figure1: Data Dictionary Properties.Repository description. Edit the property and click in Update to commit the changes. The Data Dictionary properties are displayed. Connection -Table connection used. See below a minitutorial on how to use the EXPRESS EDITION step-by-step.Selecting a application set to edit.Express Edition Express Edition A new Scriptcase resource now available is APLICATIONS EXPRESS EDITION (by project). 3 .Select the application to edit (edit mode): All or select a set.Select the properties to apply to the selected application as well as the Express Edition type (individually per application or "in bulk"). 1. . Figura2: Select application to edit using Express Edition. Figure1:Selecting the applications. 2 . Using this resource is possible to define attributes common to more then one project application. 4. .Define the selected applications common attributes.Figure3: Select Express Edition type. Figure4: Editing Parameters. Click in Apply to perform the Express Edition. upload images. HTML files.Helpcase Overview This tool is used to create your application?s manual. . Is very easy to integrate your applications with the help files generated by the help case. basically you can create and edit. you can also create navigation menus or bookmarks. searches. As you can see on picture1. Picture1: Creating a new manual. . on the creating interface you don?t need to specify the project because you are already positionated on a project.Creating A Manual Creating a new manual One Manual built on HelpCase is always associated to one ScriptCase project. HTML file Creates a new . The directory that you create will appear in the left treeview menu .Creating a new folder Creates a new folder on the current directory.HTML file on the selected directory. -Creating a new .Editing A Project Picture1: WebHelp main interface.Initially. Top Buttons Bar: This bar is responsible for maintaining the folders and files in the directory selected. . the project contains a single directory called root ( ).HTML to the Manual. . Picture2: Creating a new . .Picture3: Creating a new folder into the /root Picture4: Manual folders.Removing a folder and all it?s files The root folder can?t be removed. . Link to edit your manual?s start page.Link to edit your manual?s header.Link to edit your manual?s CSS.Uploads files to your manual project. with bookmarks and a search page.Here you can crate links from your system?s applications and your manual?s pages. Upload . Header . Links . .Project Maintence Generate Webhelp . Initial Page . CSS .Compiles your manual into a frames page. use the option Default Values in the Menu Project so that each new application already is created with the libraries. .Libraries Libraries resource allows implementing standard routines in many applications and projects. For libraries at Project level . You can use three different levels (Public. by Project and by User). date and time. Languages Regional settings . Using a Language Editor select which languages will be used in a project and maintain texts displayed on applications.Locales Locales Scriptcase allows to create applications with Internationalization. currency. With the Regional Settings Editor define rules to format numbers. A multilanguage project can be developed since language selection can be changed at authentication time or during application execution. . Using this tool is possible to create customized messages to be used in different applications. Selecting a block an available message index is displayed and open to edit. Messages Menu Using the messages menu is possible to select and edit messages by blocks. Figure1: Language Settings. New blocks can be created using the item New Folder.Languages The ScriptCase language tool allows to translate developed application standard messages enabling a comfortable and friendly system usage. divided into ScriptCase Messages and My messages. Figure2: Message Menu. Language Menu . and Date type fields. The item Number define parameters like decimal symbol. date and number formatting according to the region where the application is used. Customizing the Regional Settings. Image1: Regional Settings. Image3: Regional settings . In the Currency unit are available parameters like currency symbol. . negative format. currency positive format among others.Currency parameters. Image2: Regional settings .Regional Settings The regional settings allows to define monetary currency parameters. The items Date and Time define parameters applied in date and time formatting used in Date and Time. and digits grouping. These are parameters applied in applications using decimal type field. These parameters applied in applications using currency type field.Number parameters. Time. Click in customize to enter the values better suitable to the applications. Date parameters.Time parameters.Image4: Regional settings . Image5: Regional settings . . Using Buttons and Group Buttons is possible create or edit Text or Image for buttons to customize the generated applications. edit and/or add Header and Footer templates. Themes option uses a CSS Editor to create applications visualization standards. Themes Buttons Group Buttons Templates CSS Menus .Layout Display Layout It is possible to edit or create layouts to be used in Projects developed with ScriptCase. Buttons. Templates. Group Buttons and CSS Menus options. Figure1: Layout Interface. In Templates. ScriptCase Layouts can be defined using: Themes. CSS Menus uses a menu CSS Editor to create menu themes for menu applications. When creating a new theme. Figure1: ScriptCase CSS Publishing Interface.Themes In Themes using a CSS Editor is possible to create applications visualization standards. It is possible to create new themes or edit an already existing one. . it inherits all attributes of the selected theme. .Figure2: ScriptCase CSS Publishing Interface. Each button can have different characteristics (image. Creating a New Button Schema Click in New in the Button Schema Toolbar. Use this tab to define the CSS button style used in your schema. Editing Buttons style. Figure2: Buttons tab. Buttons set can include text button or image buttons. text or link). For images buttons is displayed an upload field to upload the button image. Figure1: Buttons Management Interface. In the first tab (Buttons) is displayed the buttons used in the ScriptCase. For text and link buttons use the tabs: Button style and link style to edit the CSS style. All schemas already have a default style (it can`t be removed).Buttons Using the Buttons Management option is possible to edit or create new buttons set associated to Schemas. If needed more then one layout for text buttons click in NEW and configure . Configuring a button Link style. default or a new user created style. .the new style. As with text type buttons is possible to define more then one link type button and define each one style as css. Figure5: Link style edit tab. Figure3: Button style edit tab. Back in the Buttons tab is possible to select the new style (see Image4). . Templates Templates resource allows to include HTML files to be used in Headers. business cards. It should be a HTML file. Footers and Custom Grids(User defined orientation). invoices. {Name} {Address} {City}-{State} {ZIP} Remember that everthing that comes insde curly brackets are making reference to the application fields.BEGIN bl2 --> <td width="247" height="96" align="left" valign="center"> <font face="verdana" style="font-size:11px"> <b>{Name}</b><br>{Address}<br>{City}. In the Template we can define a Loop feature using a flag (see in red): Código HTML <table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0"> <tr> <!-. For example: billets. etc. Free Format and Footer. We can stipulate where Scriptcase fields will be displayed on the HTML file using "curly brackets" {variable}. so when there is a {Name} it will be talking about the field "Name" of your application. Figure1: Edit Templates Interface: Heading.{State}<br> {ZIP} . As you can see below: HTML Code <table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0"> <tr> <td width="247" height="96" align="left" valign="center"> <font face="verdana" style="font-size:11px"> <b>{Name}</b><br>{Address}<br>{City}.{State}<br> {ZIP} </font> </td> </tr> </table> Running the HTML code above. Access "Grid>>Layout>>Settings" and select the "Body Template". Then Create a new Grid application and select "User Defined" Option in "Orienation" setting.{State}<br> {ZIP} </font> </td> <td width="247" height="96" align="left" valign="center"> <font face="verdana" style="font-size:11px"> <b>{Name}</b><br>{Address}<br>{City}.</font> </td> <!-. {Name} {Name} {Name} {Address} {Address} {Address} {City}-{State} {City}-{State} {City}-{State} {ZIP} {ZIP} {ZIP} Once ". (Grid>>Select Fields) Format the fields and Run.{State}<br> {ZIP} </font> </td> <td width="247" height="96" align="left" valign="center"> <font face="verdana" style="font-size:11px"> <b>{Name}</b><br>{Address}<br>{City}. . The iterations amount is defined by "Columns per Page" of the Grid.END bl2 --> </tr> </table> The red parts define where the loop will start and finish. eg: If "Columns per Page" is 3 so it will display the following result. Select "Free Format" and Upload the file.html" file iscreated include it in Scriptcase accessing "Tools>>Layout>>Templates". Now associate the template variables with the Grid fields.{State}<br> {ZIP} </font> </td> </tr> </table> Running the HTML Code above. HTML code <table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0"> <tr> <td width="247" height="96" align="left" valign="center"> <font face="verdana" style="font-size:11px"> <b>{Name}</b><br>{Address}<br>{City}. Use this tab to define the CSS button style used in your schema. If needed more then one layout for text buttons click in NEW and configure . For text and link buttons use the tabs: Button style and link style to edit the CSS style. Creating a New Button Schema Click in New in the Button Schema Toolbar. All schemas already have a default style (it can`t be removed). Buttons set can include text button or image buttons. In the first tab (Buttons) is displayed the buttons used in the ScriptCase. text or link).Group Buttons Using the Group Buttons Management option is possible to edit or create new group of buttons set. Figure1: Buttons Management Interface. Editing Buttons style. For images buttons is displayed an upload field to upload the button image. Figure2: Buttons tab. Each button can have different characteristics (image. Back in the Buttons tab is possible to select the new style (see Image4). Figure5: Link style edit tab. default or a new user created style.the new style. Configuring a button Link style. Figure3: Button style edit tab. As with text type buttons is possible to define more then one link type button and define each one style as css. . . . Figure1: ScriptCase CSS Menu editor. font settings. Figure2: ScriptCase CSS Menu editor. On the CSS editor we can edit the CSS settings from the menu and his submenu. it can be saved as Project (the theme will be avaliable only for this particular project) and it can be saved as User (the theme will only be avalibale to the use who create it). alignment and edge configuration. selecting the menu color. menu hover color.Css Menus The CCS menu is used to create/edit styles for the menu layouts. it can be saved as Public (the theme will be avaliable to everyone who uses scriptcase to use it). To create a new menu theme it will needed to chose the target of this new theme. The developer can customize the environment while managers can set security polices and fault recovery process. My ScriptCase .ScriptCase administrative tasks.Password administration. The options in this menu allows the user to install licenses. The management options are grouped in categories as follow: Settings . .Customize the development environment.Options Options ScriptCase´s production and development environments are easy to manage. Change password . define projects security polices. manage fault recovery and Configure systemparameters and attributes. update to new ScriptCase versions. During the ScriptCase installation a system administrator account is created. .Settings Settings The ScriptCase administration is restricted to users with ADMINISTRATOR profile. Figure1: Administration Menu Here is possible to customize the ScriptCase general environment. version control and others. Figure1: System Settings Options. The ScriptCase environment according to the business group needs by selecting from the options below: System Settings .Define attributes used as new projects´ default options. System Folders .Define default path and folders.Define ScriptCase default settlings: language. Default Values . .System System Customize system folders. backup options. system default variables and other system settings. ScriptCase keeps multiple copies of each application. Used to automatic e-mail.Determine the number of application copies that ScriptCase automatically saves. This is the language used in ScriptCase development environment.Number of days used to calculate and display the "expired backup" alert message.Select ScriptCase Interface language. ScriptCase Session Timeout (min) . Attributes: Language . Check version every . SMTP Server .The users´ group informed with the “backup expired” message . Alert if the last backup is older than (days) . Use cache for table fields . Useful when more then one developer use a single license. Show backup alert for .ScriptCase Session time limited in minutes. Check for ScriptCase update versions after login . .Days to check for ScriptCase new versions (at login). The options are Only Administrators or All the users. Application Automatic Number of Copies . default is Port 25.System Settings Figure1: System Settings Interface.Enter the sending email server.Speed up long table processing.Used when option Check define day is selected for the item Check for ScriptCase update versions (at login) above. ScriptCase warns when a backup is due. Each "version" can be identified by a timestamp. The options are the following ones: Do not check. for example when the user forgets the login password. SMTP Port . Check every day and Check define day.Enter the server port . Useful when using very large tables. Enter the proxy server id.Enter the proxy password. Scriptcase uses it to access the web for update / version control checks. PROXYServer .Store session data in database.Enter the user email server password. PROXY Gateway .Select session data storage format during deployment. . SMTP Password .Enter the proxy gateway. To use session in database .Enter the email used to sent the password. PROXY User . PROXY Password .SMTP User . This options is very useful when working with session variables and also load balance it also increase environment security. ScriptCase Applications can use session variables stored in the database. SMTP E-Mail .Enter the server user.Enter the proxy user. Show an option in the deployment to store the PHP session in the Database . Color Schema. Attributes: Use Ajax . Themes . Figure1 Default ValuesInterface. Report page row limit . Useful when creating projects where Ajax resources are undesirable. Logo Image -Logotype image name used in application heading .Default Values All the attributes defined here are copied to new projects default options.Display summary line. Display Summary .Use Ajax processing in new projects. Customize the project using the same logo in all application header.Number of rows to display in each application page. Templates ------------------------------------------------------ . Grid Toolbar's Buttons Each ScriptCase grid application comes with basic pre-defined navigation buttons. Use the definition here as default to all grid applications in the project. Search Toolbar's Buttons Each ScriptCase Search application comes with basic pre-defined navigation buttons. Use the definition here as default to all grid applications in the project. Use the definition . Form Toolbar's Buttons Each ScriptCase form application comes with basic pre-defined navigation buttons. here as default to all grid applications in the project. . Application Path . Attributes: Web Server Document Root Directory .Directory to stored documents in used the applications. Inform ScriptCase the path to the actual storage area where to locate information used by the applications.This temporary storage is an HTML condition. Figure1:System Folders Interface. Common Libs Path .WEB server root .Directory used to store the images used in the applications.Path used to store Scriptcase Common Libs.System Folders Define default path and folders. Temporary Files Folder . . for the apache servers “apache/htdocs”.Path used to store created applications. for IIS the default is “inetpub/wwwroot”. Documents Folder. Images Folder . Projects . Users must be associates to Projects with a development profile that is individual for each project. Users .Projects And User Projects And User Figure1: Project and User. It is used as applications logical repository. .Create users and associated profiles.Define projects´ security polices. The ScriptCase is based on the concept of Projects. Click in the to display project attributes as in the following screen: Figure2: Project Details Interface.Projects Display all projects developed and allows to manage the projects available. . Figure1: Project Management Summary Interface. Note: A user list is displayed with information about the available users and action options to apply to selected users. Click in to edit user information. Click in to display user details. Figure3: Password Interface. Click in o change user password. Enter the a user name an click in to find a user.Users Figure1: Interface. . To create a new user click in the “New User” button. Figure4: Create User Interface. Confirms Password.Define user ScriptCase access profile . .User ID. Project . After making this process you must click the save button and then the user will be included. Figura5: Projects Administrator Interface. Privilege.User e-mail address. All projects will be displayed in the box left and right in the box will display the projects that were selected through the selection bar.Enter the password again to confirm. to be administered by the user. New Password -Enter a new password to the user. Attributes: User .Projects accessible to the developer. (select from the available projects) The screen below allows you to select the projects to be managed by the user. E-mail . Tools used in fault recovery management such as: OnLine Backup Restore ConImageLog View Log .Services Services Figure1: Services Options Interface. Access ?User last access time (hour and date). Logon ? User login time (hour and date).Online ScriptCase users online log information. Page ? ScriptCase page that the user is accessing at the moment. Application ? ScriptCase applications that the user is executing at the moment. OnLine ? User login elapsed time. Figure1: Online interface. IP ? User work station IP. . The following information is available about each user: User ? User login id. buttons. Enter a backup file name and select the backup option desired: Partial Backup (only some objects will be selected) or General backup to backup all the objects. Click in the Action desired element to include in the backup. icons and images).Backup Figure1: Backup Interface. projects. connections. schemas. Figure2: Partial Backup Interface. . to perform the operation on selected element and select the A final report will be displayed when backup is completed. lookups. Click in to select all the application elements (users. templates. It is recommended to download the archive. in the end of in process to another machine.Figure3:Backup Interface. . Click in files.Choose between restoring all files or a partial Restore. to perform the operation on selected After selecting a file to restore choose the restore process by configuring the restore process directives. . Figure2: Restore Interface. Figure3: Interface options of Restore.zip) Enter the information about the file to upload or click in browse to find it. Select the files to restore and click in the action buttons file. Once the files are available to ScriptCase select it from a display above.Restore A list of files available to restore is displayed. Figure1: Restore Interface. If Duplicated . It is possible to upload a backup that is store in a zip file. The file selected previously is displayed with information about creation time and usage Status. Upload a file to restore. to upload and restore (.Select between the options : NOT TO RESTORE or OVERWRITE the applications. Restore Type . Restore process selection. . Select elements to restore individually.Partial Restore Figure4: Partial Restore Interface. Restore Report A status report is displayed after the restore is completed. Important: For security reasons do not unselect all options. . There is a default selection of operations. The Log can be customized to record only specific operations according to business needs and preferences.Configure Log The ScriptCase keeps a Log with information about user performed main operations. Figure1: Log Interface. darkest he registers the days where he had access. The operations are displayed by Date and information such as: user login ID. and of pink color the day that this chosen team. In the displayed calendar the days are shown in three tonalities. user workstation IP . Figure1: View Log Interface. .View Log This feature allows the administrator to monitor the main operations carried by ScriptCase users. time. clear means that he didn’t have log. the operation type of and Action is displayed. programs . We recommend a connection with minimum speed of 128 Kbps. Including corrections. in case that a version exists but new the update is made. etc. Figure2: Interface Verifying Update. and will make the update of its system. FIRST STAGE (To verify ScriptCase Update) In this first stage the verification in the site of the ScriptCase will be made if a new version of software ScriptCase Update exists. Figure1: Interface Scriptcase Update. . Figure4: Screen successfully effected Update . THIRD STAGE The ScriptCase will directly lower of the site ScriptCase the found updates. Figure3: Interface To lower and to install joined updates. All the update process is made through the Internet directly from ScriptCase site. SECOND STAGE (To look updates) Its system will be examined and identified the available updates directly of the site of the ScriptCase. documnetation lnew versions.Scriptcase Update This option can be used to bring ScriptCase up to date. Licenses Licenses ScriptCase license management. . Figure1: Licenses Options. Then it is possible to register a license and install it also using the options on the menu below. Once using the ScriptCase there request a new license using this option. verifies and updates all the license permissions. Enter a valid ScriptCase serial number and press the register button. After successful registration your ScriptCase copy ready to use with all available functionality.Register On-line ScriptCase access the site. . Figure1: Register OnlineInterface. License Request Request a ScriptCase license: Figure1: License Request Interface. .rec file by following the link displayed.lic file will be send via e-mail attachment. Go to installation option to install the license receive by e-mail. Click in the request button to download a . A . .Installation Click in the browser button to find the full path to the license file received. Click in register button to complete the installation. Figure1: License Installation Interface. Update the Application width. Applications Creation .The options are the Wizard (Standard) and Express (Express Edition).Enables you to disable the use of security in the development. Security Resources . Pop-up Window . etc.Select information displayed in the ScriptCase Main Menu.Select the first menu item. Control Messages.). Select the first menu item .Updates Applications Menu (the space between the Treeview menu and the applications display menu). Initial Information .My Scriptcase It allows to define default values to Scriptcase. . Image1: My Scriptcase Interface. Language .Enable pop-up window display for the selected resource.Define the language used in the Scriptcase GUI ( Error Messages.Allows automatically saving changes in ScriptCase. Main MenuInterface . Auto Save . Application Edition Interface . is possible to update the password to access Scriptcase. The password is case sensitive.Options. Click on Save to modify and save it. words can differ in meaning based on differing use of uppercase and lowercase letters. Image1: Main Menu . Type the old password. Image2: Change Password Interface. then confirm the new password. admin is different from Admin and ADMIN . the new password.Change Password Accessing Options > Change Password menu. That is. Appendix Appendix See also some useful information at : Programming Tips Variables in Scriptcase . For example: SELECT field1. If created it in the login application it can be called it in any project application.sends the encoded user information appended to the page request. [var2] = 'global'. // Now we can call [var3] in any other event Session Variables It is used like a global variable (with square brackets) [var4] = 'session'. In this scheme. But you must access "Application>>Global Variables" to set var4 to be "SESSION". Scriptcase uses global variables with square brackets. it encodes it using a scheme called URL encoding. To build a Dependent Grid specify which parameters receive external values by using square brackets [ ] to indicate a "global variable" on the WHERE or HAVING clause. There are Local Variable and Gobal variables: Local Variables It should be used as a common PHP variable (beginning with $).field2 FROM table_duplicates WHERE cod_client = [glo_clientid] Scriptcase uses variables in any application event or method. Its scope ends at the end of the event. // var3 is a local variable sc_set_global($var3).Variables In Scriptcase Dependent Applications Concepts. Session variables can be called in any event of any application. Note 1: A local variable can be a global variable if you use sc_set_global $var3 = 'testing'. GET Method . name/value pairs are joined with equal signs and different pairs are separated by the ampersand. It can be called in any event or method of an application.transfers information via HTTP headers. It is used in only in an event or method. $var1 = 'local'. The information is encoded as described in case of GET method and put into a header called QUERY_STRING. ." global variables". // transforming var3 in a global variable echo [var3] . POST Method . Global Variables Before the browser sends the information. ScriptCase considers dependent applications those applications (Form or Grid) that need to receive external parameters (variables) passed by Get or Post HTML methods. If it is being used in onLoad event it will be used just in that event. The page and the encoded information are separated by the ? character. . If the application is CREATING the variable.[var4]). Fields Variables Field values can be called in an event using "curly brackets". {field_z} = {field_y}. sc_reset_global ([var3].Note 2: Accessing "Application>>Global Variables" you can define if a global/session variable is IN or OUT variable. (IN is default) Note 3: Global and Session variables can be reseted using sc_reset_global macro. {field_y} = [var3]. If the application is RECEIVING the variable from another one. {field_x} = 'field_x receive this value'. it should be an IN variable. it should be an OUT variable. Programming Programming This section offers PHP programming tips and available Macros in the ScriptCase. PHP programming tips Scriptcase Macros SQL programming tips . . The value can be any type PHP: <?php $arr = array("somearray" => array(6 => 5. echo $arr["foo"]. collection. array( [chave =>] value . You can use it as an array. // 5 echo $arr["somearray"][13]. stack. dictionary... // 9 echo $arr["somearray"]["a"]. As you can have another Array PHP as a value. "a" => 42)). // bar echo $arr[12]. A map is a type that relates values with keys. hashtable. // 1 ?> The key can be integer or a string. echo $arr["somearray"][6]. 13 => 9. ) // key pode ser tanto string ou um integer // value pode ser qualquer coisa <?php $arr = array("foo" => "bar".Php Commands if else elseif while do while for foreach break continue functions date strpos str-replace ltrim rtrim trim substr substrreplace array activex Arrays An Array in the PHP is currently a commanded map. or a list (vector). 12 => true). // 42 ?> . you can easily simulate trees.The explanation of these structures is beyond the target of this manual. line and probably more. Syntax An Array can be created with the constructor of Array() language. 32. $arr[] = value. 7 => 56. 3. <?php $arr = array(5 => 1. you need to apply the unset(). //remove an array element unset($arr). //key can be integer or string // value can be anything To remove a pair key/value. this necessarily don?t need existing in the Array. then the value associated to it is updated.. ?> Creating/modifying with the square brakets syntax That is another way to create and/or update an array as in the example below. <?php // Creating an array $array = array(1. // The same as $arr[13] = 56. // Removing the array values leaving an empty structure. 6 => 32. "b" => 12). $arr[key] = valuer. 2. this array array(5 => 43. $arr["x"] = 42. // new element to array with "x" key unset($arr[5]). 56. 4. used for.If you to specify a key that already in use. // remove the complete array ?> It notices that the greater entire key. 5).. 12 => 2). "b" => 12). <?php array(5 => 43. foreach ($array as $i => $value) { unset($array[$i]). print_r($array). } . $arr[] = 56. He sees the following example. It can have existed in the Array since the last time that the Array was indexed. // . print_r($array). $a['flavor'] = 'sweet'. 2 => 'c' ). $b[] = 'b'. $array[] = 7. // or array('a'. 'b'. // key 0 $b[] = 'a'. $a['name'] ='apple'. // or $a['color'] = 'red'. 'name' => 'apple'. 4// key 0 ). print_r($array). 'flavor' => 'sweet'. // array( 0 => 'a' . <?php $a = array( 'color' => 'red'. $b[] = 'c'. // Adding an item $array[] = 6. 'form' => 'round'. // Reindexing $array = array_values($array). ?> The example above must produce the following exit: Array ( [0] => 1 [1] => 2 [2] => 3 [3] => 4 [4] => 5 ) Array ( ) Array ( [5] => 6 ) Array ( [0] => 6 [1] => 7 ) . $a[] = 4. 1 => 'b' . $a['form'] = 'round'. 'c') . print_r($array). break 1. while (list (.while or switch current. . <?php $arr = array ('um'. 'STOP'. do. while (1) { . $value) = each ($arr)) { if (!($key % 2)) { continue. } echo "$val<br>\n".<br>\n". while ($i++ < 5) { echo "Out<br>\n". } $i = 0. $val) = each ($arr)) { if ($val == 'STOP') { break. . Break accepts an optional numerical argument.?> break Break cancels the execution of commands like foreach while. while (++$i) { switch ($i) { case 5: echo "No 5<br>\n". 'três'. default: break. } } ?> Continue Continue is used inside of loops structures to jump out the current Loop remaining portion of the iteration and to continue the execution at the beginning of the next iteration. 'cinco'). } $i = 0. 'dois'. while (1) { echo " . case 10: echo "N# 10. break 2. 'quatro'. <?php while (list ($key. } do_something_odd ($value).Middle<br>\n". 2 digitos com leading 01 to 31 zeros D Text representing day. } echo "Neither this<br>\n". PHP 4 ) date .Inside<br>\n". In other words. } echo "It will never be displayed. The following characters are recognized in format to parameter string.echo " .timestamp is optional and the standard for the value of time. format Description character Exemples (return values) a Lowercase Ante meridiem and Post am or pm meridiem A Uppercase Ante meridiem and Post AM ou PM meridiem B Swatch Internet time d Dia do mês. Description string date ( string format [. with 3 letters Mon through Sun F Text representing month January through December g 12-hour format no leading zeros 1 a 12 G 24-hour format no leading zeros 0 a 23 h 12-hour format with leading zeros 01 a 12 H 24-hour format with leading zeros 00 a 23 i Minutes with leading zeros 00 para 59 000 até 999 . continue 3.<br>\n". Table1.Format the date and local hour. . int timestamp]) String in accordance with returns one the format from string using the given whole number timestamp or to the local current hour if no teamses tamp is given. } ?> date (PHP 3. . mês. 2 caracteres Funciona bem com j t Days in a month 28 a 31 T Timezone setting Examples: EST. 0 not leep year m Month (numeric) with leading zeros 01 a 12 M Text representing month in short (3 Jan a Dec letters) n Month (numeric) no leading zeros O Diferença ao horário de Greenwich Example: +0200 (GMT) em horas r RFC 822 formatted date Example: Thu.1. nd. MDT .I summer time 1 summer time. 0 no summer time j Day no leading zeros 1 to 31 l Text representing week days Sunday through Saturday L leep year 1 leep year..0) year) Y Year with 4 digits Examples: 1999 ou 2003 y Year with 2 digits Examples: 99 ou 03 1 a 12 0 (for Sunday) through 6 (for Saturday) . rd ou th. Example: 42 (the weeks starting on Monday (added in 42nd week in the PHP 4. U Seconds since the Unix Epoch See also time() (January 1 1970 00:00:00 GMT) w week day numeric W ISO-8601 week number of year. 21 Dec 2000 16:01:07 +0200 s Seconds with leading zeros 00 a 59 S Sufixo ordinal inglês para o dia do st. the execution of the Loop would finish immediately).d. It has only syntax for loops of while: <?php $i = 0. mktime(0. 2000 is on a " . // Sat Mar 10 15:16:08 MST 2001 $today = date('H:m:s \m \i\s\ \m\o\n\t\h'). // 03.2000)).while (0). até Example 1. since that after the first iteration. it is w Day z '). 5:16:18 pm $today = date("F j. The -43200 offset for timezones west of UTC is 43200 always negative. // 10. // 17:03:17 m is month $today = date("H:i:s"). $today = date("D M j G:i:s T Y"). 10-03-01. 1631 1618 6 Fripm01 $today = date('\i\t \i\s \t\h\e jS \d\a\y. 2000 is on a Saturday echo "July 1.while is similar to loop. j-m-y. 2001 $today = date("Ymd"). ..z Day in a year 0 a 366 Z Timezone offset in seconds. allowing to the end of the execution in the way them code blocks. } while ($i > 0). 2001. // Prints: July 1. 2001.1.01 $today = date("j.while Loops do.0. // 17:16:17 ?> do.').10. date() examples <?php // Prints something like: Wednesday echo date("l"). 5:16 pm $today = date("m. Y. // Prints something like: Wednesday 15th of January 2003 05:51:38 AM echo date ("l dS of F Y h:i:s A"). and using the instruction break. and for those east of UTC is always positive.while guaranteeing is executed (the condition alone is verified in the end of the iteration) whereas it can necessarily not twirl in a normal Loop while (the condition is verified in the start of each iteration. n. except for the fact of that the condition is verified in the end of each iteration instead of in the start. do { print $i. 3. // 05-16-17. if it is evaluated as FALSE soon in the start. // 20010310 $today = date('h-i-s. g:i a"). // March 10. date ("l". generalizing them with it . ?> Loop above would twirl accurately one time. ?> <?php // Assuming today is: March 10th. // It is the 10th day. Advanced users of C can be made familiar to the differentiated use of the Loop of . The main difference of loops while regular is that the first iteration of a Loop of . it is evaluated as it FALSE isn?t greater who zero 0) and the execution of the Loop finishes.while. when the condition is verified.7.y"). I break up it of code following demonstrates this: .0. Y"). Else extends to a command if to execute an instruction case the expression in the command if either evaluated as it FALSE. in contrast to else. In the PHP./* process i */} while(0).break. as its name suggests. a it is equal the b or it she is minor who b: <?php if ($a > $b) { echo "a is bigger than b".}$i *= $factor. the code to follow would show it is greater that b if $a will be greater that $b and it isn?t greater that b contrary case: <?php if ($a > $b) { echo "a is greater than b". For example. and the current expression elseif will be evaluated as TRUE. You can codify simple or exactly powerful scripts without using this ?resource?. the code following would show it is greater that b. is a combination of if and else. } ?> If can have several inside of the same instruction. } ?> The command else is only executed if the expression if will be evaluated as FALSE. In the same way that else. } elseif ($a == $b) { echo "a is equal to b". However.}print "i is Ok".?> If it doesn?t worry if you it did not understand this of the certain form no way or. else Frequently you go to want executing an instruction if a certain condition will be found and a different instruction if the condition will not be found. if all they will only be evaluated as it also FALSE (it sees elseif). } else { echo "a is smaller than b". it extends to a command if executing a different instruction in the case of the original expression if to be evaluated as FALSE. for Loops will be is the bows most complex in PHP. They behave as its compatible in C. The first expression elseif(it will be had) that it will be evaluated as TRUE will be executed.if ($i < $minimum_limit) {break. and if having any expression elseif. but in the end of accounts both would have the same behavior accurately.<?php do {if ($i < 5) {print "i is not big enough ". That is what else makes. The command is only executed if the preceding expression if and any previous expressions elseif will be evaluated as FALSE. syntax of a Loop will be is: . elseif elseif. them you have behavior the same). For example. } else { echo "a is NOT greater than b". you also it can write ?else if? (in two words) and the behavior will be identical to one 'elseif' (in one alone word). The meaning syntactic is slightly different (if you are made familiar to C. it will only execute that alternative expression if the conditional expression of elseif will be evaluated as TRUE. } print $i. but useful. } /* example 2 */ for ($i = 1. but you can perceive that the possible use of empty expressions in bows will be if it becomes practical in some occasions. Each one of the expressions can be empty. the value of the current element is attributed the $value and the internal hand of the matrix is advanced in a position (thus. } print $i. $i++. $i++). expr3): instructions. It considers the following examples. This offers an easy way to iterar on matrices. for (.expr3 is evaluated (executed). and will launch an error if to try to use it in an variable of any different type or in variable not initialized.. print $i. $i <= 10. foreach The PHP4 (but not it PHP3) includes a constructor foreach. If it is evaluated as TRUE. $i++) { if ($i > 10) { break. the Loop continue and (s) the command (s) nestled (s) (they are) is executed (s).expr2> empty means that the Loop can twirl indefinitely (PHP considers it implicitly as TRUE. expr3) instructions The first expression (expr1) is evaluated (executed) a time unconditionally in the start of the Loop. of the first one: foreach (expressao_array as $valor) instructions foreach (expressao_array as $chave => $valor) instructions The first form sweeps one given first one given for expression_array. In the end of each iteration. . as in C). foreach only functions with arrays. It has two syntaxes. In each Loop.. $i++) { print $i. If she is evaluated as SHE FALSE. } /* example 4 */ for ($i = 1. expr2 is evaluated. endfor. therefore frequently you can want to finish the 'Loop' using a break conditional instruction instead of using the expression-truth of it you will be. except for the fact of that the key of the current element will be .. expr2. The PHP also supports the alternative syntax of two-points bows will be: for (expr1. } /* example 3 */ $i = 1. . the execution of the 'Loop' finishes. second it is an abbreviation.) { if ($i > 10) { break. ?> The first example seems to be prettiest (or perhaps the room). In the start of each iteration. in the next iteration you it will be looking at for the next element). much similar to the Perl and other languages. expr2. All they show to numbers of 1 the 10: <?php /* example 1 */ for ($i = 1.. $i <= 10. The second form makes the same thing. This can?t be so useless how much you can think.for (expr1. $value) = each ($arr)) { echo "Chave: $key. that it modifies the element of the selected Array. the internal hand of the Array will be located in the end of the Array. Note: It also notices that foreach operates on a copy of the specified Array. the internal hand of the matrix is zeroed automatically for the first element of the Array. while (list($key. /* . the hand of the original Array is not modified as in the instruction each(). } foreach ($arr as $value) { echo "Valor: $value<br>\n".. */ $arg_n) { .. Assuming that the bow foreach twirls until the end. while (list(. reset ($arr). Note: foreach has the ability to prevent messages of error with ?@?. "two". Note: When foreach initiates its first execution. However. You can have noticed that following items is functionally identical: <?php $arr = array("one".attributed to the 0 variable $key in each iteration. } ?> More examples to demonstrate the uses: Functions defined for the user A function can be defined using it syntax as the following one: Pseudo code to demonstrate function uses <?php function foo($arg_1. } foreach ($arr as $key => $value) { echo "Chave: $key. not it proper Array. "three"). } ?> The following are also functionally identical: <?php reset ($arr). but this doesn?t reflect the original Array. $arg_2.. and therefore. Valor: $value<br>\n". the internal hand of the original Array is put into motion by the processing of the Array. Valor: $value<br>\n". $value) = each ($arr)) { echo "Valor: $value<br>\n". This means that you do not need to call reset() before a Loop foreach. \n". } } /* Now we can safely call foo() since $makefoo evaluated to true */ if ($makefoo) foo(). return $retval. function bar() { echo "I exist immediately upon program start.\n". } ?> Functions within functions <?php function foo() { function bar() { echo "I don't exist until foo() is called. if ($makefoo) { function foo() { echo "I don't exist until program execution reaches me.\n". its definition can be processed before<\I> being called. } } /* We can't call bar() yet since it doesn't exist.\n". When a function is defined conditionally as in the two examples below.echo "Example function. } ?> Any valid code PHP can appear inside of a function. /* We can't call foo() from here since it doesn't exist yet. but we can call bar() */ bar(). exactly other functions and definitions of classrooms. Conditional functions <?php $makefoo = true. */ . if The construction if is the one of the most important implementations of many languages. Note: Names of functions are insensitive to the case. */ bar(). the PHP will execute instructors. The PHP implements a structure if that it is similar to that one of the C: /P> if (express) instructions As described in the section on expressions. The examples to follow would show that it is greater that b if $a will be greater that $b: <?php if ($a > $b) print "a is grater than b". expression is evaluated by its Boolean context. including PHP. this code would show it is greater that b if $a will be greater that $b. /* Now we can call bar(). what it makes with that you completes flexibility for the conditional execution of some parts of its program. For example. Allows the conditional execution of fragments of code. and it will have evaluated itself as FALSE. ltrim . If expression will be evaluated as TRUE.foo(). ?> Frequently you go to want having more than an instruction is executed conditionally. And is clearly. More information on the evaluation for FALSE can be found in the section converting for Boolean. Instead of this. and also it isn?t possible to cancel or to modify the definition of functions previously declared. does not have necessity of generalize each instruction with a clause if. but it is better to call the functions in the same way that it appears in the declarations. $b = $a. and then would attribute the value of $a for $b: <?php if ($a > $b) { print "a is grater than b". you can place some instructions in a grouping of commands. } ?> Commands if can inside indefinitely be nestled of other commands if. ?> The PHP doesn?t support overload of functions. will be ignored. foo()'s processesing has made it accessible. . ltrim() will remove these characters: " " (ASCII 32 (0x20)). "\0" (ASCII 0 (0x00)). through the parameter charlist. " $clean = ltrim($binary.(PHP 3. ". PHP 4 ) ltrim -. // trim the ASCII control characters at the beginning of $binary // (from 0 to 31 inclusive) ?> rtrim . Without as the parameter.\0x1F"). uma tabulação vertical. Example ltrim() <?php $text = "\t\tThese are a few words :) ..1. Simply he lists all the characters that you want removing. "\r" (ASCII 13 (0x0D)).It removes whitespace of the beginning of string. string charlist]) Note: As the parameter was added in PHP 4. " $trimmed = ltrim($text... um espaço normal. $trimmed = ltrim($text). With you can specify an interval of characters. uma linha nova (line feed). You also can specify which characters you want removing. "\n" (ASCII 10 (0x0A)).")...0 This function returns one string with whitespace removed from the beginning of str." \t.. o byte NULL. // $trimmed ="These are a few words :) . um retono de carro. uma tabulação. "\t" (ASCII 9 (0x09)). // $trimmed = "These are a few words :) ."\0x00. "\x0B" (ASCII 11 (0x0B)). Description string ltrim ( string str [. "\n" (ASCII 10 (0x0A)). // $trimmed = "\t\tThese are a few words :)" $clean = rtrim($binary.0 This function returns string as the removed spaces blank from the end of str. Without as the parameter."\0x00. "\t" (ASCII 9 (0x09))." \t. a new line (line feed). for the parameter charlist. Simply he lists all the characters that you want to see removed. a vertical tab. "\x0B" (ASCII 11 (0x0B)). ". rtrim() will go to remove the following characters: " " (ASCII 32 (0x20)).. You also can specify the characters that you desire removing. "\0" (ASCII 0 (0x00))..(PHP 3. PHP 4 ) rtrim -.1.It removes blank space of the end of string. // $trimmed = "\t\tThese are a few words :) . a tab.").. "\r" (ASCII 13 (0x0D)). string charlist]) Note: As the parameter was added in PHP 4.. // retira os caracteres de controle ASCII ao final de $binary // (de 0 até ?> str_replace . an ordinary space.." $trimmed = rtrim($text. Description string rtrim ( string str [.\0x1F"). With you can specify an interval of characters. a carriage return. the NUL-byte. $trimmed = rtrim($text). Example funtion rtrim() <?php $text = "\t\tThese are a few words :) . "O". "o". then the search and replace is performed with every entry of subject. mixed replace.Replace all occurrences of the search string with the replacement string.0 $str = str_replace("ll". // 2 ?> Note: This function is compatible with binary data. "black". . $count).0. then an empty string is used for the rest of replacement values. "e". echo $count. "u". Description mixed str_replace ( mixed search. "i". then this replacement string is used for every value of search. // Use of the count parameter is available as of PHP 5. "A". If search is an array and replace is a string. mixed subject [.5.0. "ice cream"). If you don't need fancy replacing rules. beer. "". As of PHP 4. int &count]) This function returns a string or an array with all occurrences of search in subject replaced with the given replace value. and fiber every day. then str_replace() takes a value from each array and uses them to do search and replace on subject.". "". "fiber"). "good golly miss molly!". = str_replace($healthy. "Hello World of PHP"). $healthy = array("fruits". and ice cream every day $phrase = "You should eat fruits. "I". If subject is an array. // Provides: You should eat pizza. $newphrase $phrase). $yummy = array("pizza". If replace has fewer values than search. you should always use this function instead of ereg_replace() or preg_replace(). $yummy.6. str_replace() examples <?php // Provides: <body text='black'> $bodytag = str_replace("%body%".0. // Provides: Hll Wrld f PHP $vowels = array("a". $onlyconstants = str_replace($vowels. "vegetables". vegetables. PHP 4 ) str_replace -. If search and replace are arrays.(PHP 3>= 3. "<body text='%body%'>"). and the return value is an array as well. every parameter in str_replace() can be an array. "beer". "U"). "E". . Description int strpos ( string haystack. strpos() will go to return B>boole FALSE. $findme). Differently of strrpos(). $findme = 'a'. } else { echo "The string '$findme' was found in the string '$mystring'".String returns a part from one. string needle [. substr (PHP 3. } ?> If the parameter needle isn?t a string. PHP 4 ) strpos -. If needlewill not be found. Example strpos() <?php $mystring = 'abc'. int offset]) It inside returns the numerical position from the first occurrence of needle of haystack.String finds the position of the first occurrence of one. echo " and exists at position $pos". Use the === operator for testing the return value of this function. Please read the section on Booleans for more information. this function can have one string entire as the parameter needle and all string will be used. Warning This function may return Boolean FALSE.strpos (PHP 3. The optional parameter offset allows you defining from which character in haystack to initiate the search. Simply == would not work as expected // because the position of 'a' was the 0th (first) character. // Note our use of ===. The position still return is relative to the beginning ofhaystack. is converted for a whole number and applied the value of the character. such as0 or "". $pos = strpos($mystring. PHP 4 ) substr -. if ($pos === false) { echo "The string '$findme' was not found in the string '$mystring'". but may also return a non-Boolean value which evaluates to FALSE. 0. -4). -1). string returned will initiate in the position startin string. -3. Example 3. -1). 2.Description string substr ( string string. // returns "cde" $rest = substr("abcdef". Using a negative start <?php $rest = substr("abcdef". Using negative length <?php $rest = substr("abcdef". 4. // returns "abcdef" // Another option is access it using curly brackets $string = 'abcdef'. If start denotes a position beyond truncate. -1). // returns "abcd" $rest = substr("abcdef". If start will not be negative. then this amount characters will be omitted of the end of string (after the beginning position to have been calculated when start will be negative). 1). 0. -3. // returns "" $rest = substr("abcdef". will be returned FALSE. // returns "abcde" $rest = substr("abcdef". // returns "bcd" $rest = substr("abcdef". For example. // returns a echo $string{3}. 1. Basic use of substr() <?php $rest = substr("abcdef". 4). one string empty will be returned. string returned will go starting in the character start from the end of string. the character in position 0 is 'a'. and thus in ahead. If length will be given and will be negative. // returns "d" ?> If length will be given and will be positive. int start [. string returned will go to contain length characters starting in start (depending on the size of string). // returns d ?> If start will be negative. -1). 3). // returns "ef" $rest = substr("abcdef". // returns "f" $rest = substr("abcdef". echo $string{0}. in string 'abcdef'. starting in zero. // returns "de" ?> . -2). // returns "bcdef" $rest = substr("abcdef". the character in position 2 it is 'c'. Example 2. 1). If string is lesser from what start. 8). int length]) substr()it returns the part from string specified by the parameter start and length. 0. /* Delete 'MNRPQR' from $var. echo substr_replace($var. it represents the number of characters from the end of string at which to stop replacing. */ echo substr_replace($var. */ echo substr_replace($var. "<br>\n". 10. 'bob'. -1) . "<br>\n". the replacing will begin at the start'th offset into string. . 10. the replacing will begin at the start'th character from the end of string. string replacement. 'bob'. substr_replace() example <?php $var = 'ABCDEFGH:/MNRPQR/'. 0) . /* These two examples replace all of $var with 'bob'. If start is positive. "<br>\n". 0) . int length]) substr_replace() replaces a copy of string delimited by the start and (optionally) length parameters with the string given in replacement. */ echo substr_replace($var. /* These next two replace 'MNRPQR' in $var with 'bob'. ?> trim (PHP 3. it represents the length of the portion of string which is to be replaced. 0. PHP 4 ) trim -. ''.substr_replace (PHP 4 ) substr_replace -. "<br>\n". -1) . If start is negative. end the replacing at the end of string. strlen($var)) . "<br>\n". If it is negative. echo substr_replace($var. i. /* Insert 'bob' right at the beginning of $var. Description string substr_replace ( string string. 'bob'.Replace text within a portion of a string. then it will default to strlen( string ). The result is returned. -1) . 'bob'. "<br>\n". If length is given and is positive. echo "Original: $var<hr>\n".Removes space in the begin and end of one string. 'bob'. -7.e. If it is not given. 0. */ echo substr_replace($var. int start [. They behave as its compatible ones in C. o byte NULL.Description string( string str [. trim() will go to remove these characters. It asks for that the PHP executes the nestled commands . "\0" (ASCII 0 (0x00)). "\r" (ASCII 13 (0x0D))... ". "\n" (ASCII 10 (0x0A)). uma linha nova (line feed).")." $trimmed = trim($text. "\x0B" (ASCII 11 (0x0B)). through the parameter charlist.0 This function returns one string with the removed spaces from the beginning and the end of str. $trimmed = trim($text).. With you can specify an interval of characters. uma tabulação vertical. Simply he lists all the characters that you want removing. " " (ASCII 32 (0x20)). uma tabulação." \t. // $trimmed = "These are a few words :)" $clean = trim($binary. string charlist]) Note: The optional parameter charlist was added in PHP 4..1. // $trimmed = "These are a few words :) . Example trim() <?php $text = "\t\tThese are a few words :) . Without as the parameter. The basic format of a command while is: while(expression) instructions The meaning of a command while is simple."\0x00..\0x1F"). um retono de carro. um espaço normal. "\t" (ASCII 9 (0x09)). // trim the ASCII control characters at the beginning and end of $binary // (from 0 to 31 inclusive) ?> while Loops while is the simples type t to create a ? Loop? in PHP. You also can specify which characters you want to removing. exactly that this value moves during the execution of (s) the command (s) nestled (s). in such a way. while the expression of while is evaluated as TRUE. $obj->valid_user({user}.Sql server"). if($retorno == “err”) { sc_err_message(“invalid user”) } . <?php /* exemple 1 */ $i = 1. {fieldPHP} = $obj->retorn_status. $obj->repass_conection( "demo. endwhile. while ($i <= 10): print $i. the execution will not stop until the end of the iteration (each time that the PHP inside executes the commands of the 'Loop' is an iteration. if the expression while is evaluated as IT FALSE soon at the beginning.. {password}). methods and attributes // PHP suports COM tecnology EX2: $obj = new COM("sc.[glo_banck].csecurity"). while ($i <= 10) { print $i++. } /* exemple 2 */ $i = 1.valid").[glo_user]. {return} = $obj->valid("[glo_user]"). ?> CALLING ACTIVEX EX1: $obj = new COM("security.. you can group multiples inside commands of the same bow while generalizing a group of instructions with keys. $obj = null. or using the alternative syntax: while (expressao): instrucoes . // the code below calls an ActiveX objecto .[glo_server]. The value of the expression is verified each time that if passes in the start of the 'Loop'. $obj->release(). As in the command if.repeated.[glo_password]. To the times. $i++. the command (s) nestled will not be twirled (s) nor a time at least. endwhile. 'CAR'.gif') UPDATE It updates a given line. DELETE FROM adm_category WHERE categoryId = 9 /*it eliminates in the table adm_category the line with category code equal 9 * Commands INSERT.NameCategory. Ex. UPDATE E DELETE in the ScriptCase.Sql INSERT In SQL language the only way to add data to a table is using the INSERT statement like the following: INSERT INTO adm_Category (CategoryID. WHERE It returns only the values from the lines that satisfies the conditions specified in the WHERE clause. UPDATE adm_category SET NameCategory 'rent car' WHERE CategoryId = 9 DELETE Exclude a given table line.Photo) VALUES (9. sc_exec_sql('DELETE FROM adm_category WHERE categoryId =9').NameCategory.Photo FROM adm_category. FROM : It specifies the tables where the columns are located. . To execute these commands the ScriptCase use the macro sc_exec_sql. QUERY Use the Query statement to search a given DB table.: SELECT categoryId.'carros. A Query has at least two components: SELECT : It enumerates the columns name that contains the desired data. NameCustomers ('ABCDE'.AND : It specifies data range.Name_supplier FROM adm_supplier WHERE SupplierId BETWEEN 1 AND 9 IS NUL : Select lines where the content of the field is null (EMPTY).NameCustomers FROM adm_Customers WHERE BETWEEN '1997-01-01' AND '1997-04-31' SELECT SupplierId. SELECT CustomersId FROM adm_order WHERE DateOrder IS NULL LIKE : Use masks in conditions to compare text values: Substitute only one character: _ or? . SELECT NameCustomers FROM adm_Customers WHERE NameCustomers LIKE 'RIC%'.SELECT NameCustomers FROM adm_Customers WHERE Sex = 'M' Operators Description = equal != Not equal <> Different > Higher < Shorter !< Not Shorter !> Not Higher >= Higher or equal <= Shorter or equal BETWEEN . SELECT CustomersId. IN : Selects data from a given set or lists. Substitute a sequence of characters: % or *.'WW3CD') FROM Operators AND and OR Allows to use more than one condition in one WHERE clause. SELECT CustomersId. adm_Customers WHERE IN .'ZXED'. SELECT NameCustomers FROM adm_Customers WHERE NameCustomers<<strong>LIKE 'J_A_'. that manipulate date type fields.ValueOrderFROM adm_Customers C. SELECT AVG(ValueOrder) FROM adm_orderP CLASS="western" STYLE="margin-bottom: 0cm"> MAX : Returns the max value from the query selected items. Functions Use functions to perform the operations on query results.P.SELECT P. Note the use of the functions day. SELECT DISTINCT C. C. SELECT MAX(ValueOrder) FROM adm_order MIN: min value from the query selected items.CustomersId = 'ABCDE') Arithmetical operators + Addition - Subtraction * Multiplication / Division In the example to follow.05 to Customer ???ABCDE??? order value. Aggregate functions They produce one value from an entire data column.05 AS DISCOUNTING FROM adm_Customers C. month e now. . adm_order P WHERE (CustomersId ='CustomersId') AND (P. They are also called column functions. . NameCustomers.CustomersId. adm_order P WHERE C.CustomersId AND CustomersId= 'ABCDE' Concatenation Operator In the MySQL the function concat implements the concatenation functionality: SELECT concat(Name Customers " Happy Birthday???)from admCustomers where month (DateBirth)= month(now()) AND day(DataBirth) = day(now()). we add 0.dateOrder IS NULL AND C. AVG: Calculates the query selected items average.CustomersId = P.ValueOrder + 0. For example. SELECT UCASE(NamCustomers FROM adm_Customers LCASE : Returns a text in lower case. SELECT F.1. SUM : Returns the sum of all items for the selected column.SupplierId= F. MID : Display a part of a text. SELECT SUM(ValueOrder) FROM adm_orders COUNT : Returns the line count (number of records) of a query result.SELECT MIN(ValueOrder) FROM adm_order. Not Aggregate functions Return a value for each line.5) FROM adm_Customers. For example : F. SupplierId GROUP BY F.NameProduct FROM P. SupplierId adm_supplier Aggregate Functions cannot be used in GROUP BY clause. SELECT MID(NameCustomers. SELECT LCASE(NameCustomers) FROM adm_Customers LENGTH : Returns the amount of characters from a field/text/P> SELECT LENGTH(Namesupplie) FROM adm_supplies Breaks and Organization Clauses that can be added to a query to organize the results. it lists all the customers with only the 5 first characters of its name. UCASE : Returns a text in capital letters. HAVING Apply search conditions to the lines in GROUP BY clause. adm_product P WHERE . SELECT COUNT(*)adm_Customers.P. GROUP BY Used to group lines in the result.Namesupplier. SELECT CustomersId MAX(ValueOrder).. . ORDER BY Order (sort) the lines (records). List all the customers who had made more than 20. SELECT CustomersId COUNT(CustomersId) FROM adm_order GROUP BY CustomersId HAVING COUNT(CustomersId) > 20.MIN(ValueOrder).MAX(ValueOrder) ??? MIN(ValueOrder) as Differences FROM adm_pedidos GROUP BY CustomersId HAVING MAX( ValueOrder)MIN(ValueOrder) > 12700.